JP7485295B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

There is known a gaming machine in which the degree of expectation regarding a variable display result is indicated by the display mode of an operation instruction display that is displayed when an operation unit is made available for operation (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-179063 A

However, since the display regarding the operation of the operating unit is a matter of player preference, there is a problem that the display method can reduce interest, depending on the way it is displayed, and there is room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
A determination means capable of deriving a predetermined determination result;
a display means for displaying various images based on a display priority, and for displaying an image with a higher display priority in front of an image with a lower display priority when images with different display priorities are displayed overlapping each other;
A performance control means for displaying a performance display based on a determination result of the determination means on the display means;
a plurality of operation units operable by a player and capable of causing a display change on the display means;
The plurality of operation units include a first operation unit and a second operation unit,
The performance control means includes:
The display means is capable of executing a variable display showing the determination result,
A first operation effective period during which an operation on the first operation unit can be detected can be set during the varying display,
During the first operation effective period, a simulated image simulating the first operation unit is displayed, so that an operation instruction is given to the first operation unit, and at a timing when an operation to the first operation unit is detected, a display change control can be started to change the display mode in which the simulated image simulating the first operation unit displayed on the display means is displayed to a display mode in which the simulated image simulating the first operation unit is not displayed and a single operation presentation display based on the operation to the first operation unit is displayed ;
During the varying display, a display change can be imparted to the display means based on an operation on the second operation unit,
The second operation unit is capable of accepting an operation when the first operation valid period is set during the variable display,
During the varying display, as the simulated image simulating the first operation unit, any one of a plurality of simulated images having different expectation levels for the judgment result can be displayed,
The specific display displayed by the application of a display change based on an operation to the second operation unit is a display that does not suggest the determination result, can be displayed multiple times during the variable display, and has a higher display priority than the display of a single operation presentation display that is displayed by detecting an operation to the first operation unit when the first operation effective period in which a simulated image simulating the first operation unit is displayed is set ;
A specific look-ahead effect that is performed in a plurality of variable displays as an effect suggesting the result of the judgment can be executed, and while the specific look-ahead effect is being executed, the specific display can be displayed across a plurality of variable displays;
A simulated image simulating the first operation unit may be displayed multiple times in one of the variable displays, and when each of the simulated images simulating the first operation unit that is displayed multiple times is displayed, the specific display can be displayed based on an operation on the second operation unit,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific display, which is displayed based on operation of the second operation unit, is made non-display if no operation of the second operation unit is performed a predetermined time after it is displayed, but if operation of the second operation unit continues after the specific display is displayed, it is possible to continue displaying the specific display beyond the predetermined time.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 1A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of a locking member in the outer frame. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame of the operation button, etc., in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the appearance of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). 1A is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine; FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that of Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of a dispensing control unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. 10 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that performs drawing in the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device. FIG. A table showing examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. A table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creation process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 11 is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). A flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). 1A is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). 1 is a diagram showing the entire game board of this embodiment. FIG. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a front view, an oblique view, and an exploded oblique view of a rabbit toy of this embodiment. 2A and 2B are front and rear views of the face board of the rabbit character of this embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit toy of this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the rabbit device of this embodiment in a standby position. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a rabbit toy of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a rabbit toy of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a rabbit toy of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the entire game board in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a stump accessory of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a stump accessory of the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the stump box portion of this embodiment and its exploded view, a front view of the rear wall cover, and a front view of the rear wall base plate. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a stump box section and its exploded view in a modified example of this embodiment, a front view of the rear wall cover, and a front view of the rear wall base plate. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of grass material in a modified example of this embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a front view, an oblique view, and an exploded oblique view of a rabbit toy in a modified example of this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a mountain feature of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the back grass accessory of the present embodiment. This figure shows the state in which the upper wall portion, the right wall portion, the lower wall portion, and the left wall portion of the box have each been moved from a standby position to a moving position in the stump box portion shown in Figures 129(A) and 130(A) of this embodiment. This figure shows an example in which a stump board section is not provided in front of the stump box section of this embodiment, and a fixed grass board section is provided instead of the first grass movable section and the second grass movable section. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 148 of this embodiment. FIG. 150 shows a modified example of FIG. 149 of this embodiment. FIG. 150 shows a modified example of FIG. 149 of this embodiment. FIG. 150 shows a modified example of FIG. 149 of this embodiment. 151 of this embodiment, and (C) and (D) are diagrams showing examples of the configuration of the rear wall portion of the box of this embodiment in FIG. 152. 1A and 1B are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views showing a pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 1 is a time chart showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state for each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 1 is a time chart showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state for each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device, and the changes in the movement state of the frame movable body and the light-emitting performance state over time in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device, and the changes in the movement state of the frame movable body and the light-emitting performance state over time in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 13A and 13B show a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, and (E) and (F) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, and (E) and (F) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, and (E) and (F) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, and (E) and (F) are right side views. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B are front views, and FIG. 13D are plan views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 13A and 13B are right side views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13A and 13B show a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, where (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views. 13A and 13B are front views, and FIG. 13D are plan views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 13A and 13B are right side views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. 13A and 13B are front views, and FIG. 13D are plan views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 13A and 13B are right side views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a modified example showing the operating mode, display state, and light emission performance state in each performance pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board in a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a game board in a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front oblique view of a game panel in a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an enlarged right-side front oblique view of the game panel in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of an area cover member in a second embodiment. A plan view showing the arrangement of obstacle nails in the right-side play area in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member in the second embodiment. These are cross-sectional views of the obstacle nails in the right-side play area in the second embodiment, where (a) is a cross-sectional view of the location where one obstacle nail is accommodated in the penetration portion, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the location where two obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetration portion, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the location where three obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetration portion. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a nail sheet. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a usage form of the nail sheet. An example of an installation mode of an area cover member in the third embodiment, where (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member, (c) is a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is attached to an existing member, and (d) is a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is integrated with an existing member. 13A is a front view of an installation example of multiple types of area cover members in the third embodiment, in which (a) is an installation form of an area cover member with the right-side penetration part shifted inward, (b) is an installation form of an area cover member with the left-side penetration part shifted inward, (c) is an installation form of an area cover member with both penetration parts shifted inward, (d) is an installation form of an area cover member with the right-side penetration part shifted outward, (e) is an installation form of an area cover member with the left-side penetration part shifted outward, and (f) is an installation form of an area cover member with both penetration parts shifted outward. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of a method of installing the area cover member, (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member, (c) is a front view of an installation state in which the area cover member is rotated 180 degrees and both through-holes are shifted inward, (d) is an installation state in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both through-holes are shifted inward, and (e) is an installation state in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both through-holes are shifted inward, each of which is shown in a front view. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of a method of installing the area cover member, (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member, and (c) is a front view showing an installation state in which the area cover member is moved downward and the through-holes on both sides are shifted downward. 13A to 13D are front views showing different embodiments of the area cover member in the third embodiment, each of which illustrates various applicable shapes of the through-hole. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) shows an installation form of an area cover member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetration portions on both sides, (b) shows an installation form of an area cover member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetration portions while shifting both penetration portions inward, (c) is a front view showing an example of the area cover member being installed on a gaming panel from the front side, and (d) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of the area cover member being installed on a gaming panel from the front side. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of when the area cover member is fixed from the rear of the game panel, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of when the area cover member is fixed from the rear of the game panel. Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, where (a) is a front view showing a portion of the left side playing area before the area cover member is installed, and (b) is a front view showing a portion of the left side playing area after the area cover member is installed. This is another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, where (a) is a front view showing the installation mode of the area cover member in which the through-hole is shifted downward, and (b) is a front view showing the installation mode of the area cover member in which the through-hole is shifted upward. An example of how to install a decorative seal on an area cover member is shown, where (a) is a front view showing the area cover member before the decorative seal is installed, (b) is a front view showing an example where the decorative seal has been affixed to the entire periphery of the through-hole, and (c) is a front view showing an example where the decorative seal has been affixed to a portion of the periphery of the through-hole. This is an example of how to store obstacle nails in a through-hole formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views showing how to store obstacle nails in a through-hole having a convex portion formed on the front side and the game panel side of the area cover member. This is an example of a manner in which an obstruction nail can be accommodated in a through-hole formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (g) are cross-sectional views each showing a manner in which an obstruction nail can be accommodated in a through-hole having a convex portion formed in the center of the cross-section of the area cover member. This is an example of a manner in which obstacle nails can be stored in a through-hole formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (d) are cross-sectional views each showing a manner in which obstacle nails can be stored in a through-hole having a convex portion formed on the game panel side of the area cover member. This is an example of a manner in which an obstruction nail can be accommodated in a through-hole formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (d) are cross-sectional views each showing a manner in which an obstruction nail can be accommodated in a through-hole having a convex portion formed on the front side of the area cover member. This is an example of how to store an obstruction nail in a through-hole formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (e) each show a cross-sectional view of how to store an obstruction nail in a through-hole that blocks the front side of the area cover member. This is an example of how to accommodate an obstruction nail in a penetration portion formed in an area cover member, and (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views showing how to accommodate an obstruction nail in an area cover member having a rib formed around the penetration portion. This is an example of how an obstruction nail is stored in a penetration portion formed in an area cover member, where (a) is a front view showing the viewing state before the tampering and (b) is a front view showing the viewing state after the tampering. 13 is a front view of another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment. FIG. 1A and 1B are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views showing a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are front views showing a modified example of a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 1C is a front view of a root vegetable frame movable body of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko machine in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the presentation mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. A figure showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. A figure showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a blocking nail and a panel board in this embodiment. A diagram showing obstacle nails, a panel board, and a game ball in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing a decorative member and a panel plate in the present embodiment. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing a decorative member and a panel plate in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a decorative member according to the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a decorative member according to the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a decorative member according to the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a decorative member according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a housing according to the embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a housing according to the embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a display example in a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image of the movement of the player's tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image of the movement of the player's tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the game state in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a transition diagram of the game state in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing moving images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the display priority of a display image in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 10. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper outer frame hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end side of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 and the lower outer frame hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plate unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and a participatory type display unit 320 that is attached to the center of the plate unit 320 and allows the player to select a participatory type display depending on the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. It is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting performances, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left of the front side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the top of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the door frame top unit 570.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main body frame upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame lower hinge member 640 which are attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 670 attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base 600. The game machine includes a ball launcher 680 for shooting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out game balls to the player, a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a back cover 980 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable, covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, which is a box-shaped tank that is open upward and extends to the left and right, and which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), a tank rail 803 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extends to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine shape, and a ball guide unit 820 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, and which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and releasing the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and having a normal guide path 861 that guides the game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and guides them from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600, a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a lower low-pitched speaker 921 inside, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board inside, an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that define the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which game balls are shot and guides game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls shot into the game area 5a are received by a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning hole into which the game ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, so that the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a). The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend left and right, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend up and down. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces facing outward in the horizontal direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the front view of the apron member 50 and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The outer frame 2 also includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, a fascia reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear side of the fascia member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position to the left of the center, and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position near the right end. The fascia reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid member (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 further includes connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 to the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 to the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 to the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 to the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 also includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described below.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 that penetrates from top to bottom and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of a connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached within this engagement notch 11. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has an attachment step 12 that is recessed from the general surface on the top surface and front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The left-right length and top-bottom thickness of this lower frame member 20 are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and the front-to-back width is longer than that of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the left-to-right center at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-to-back direction at both left and right ends. Lower lateral fixing portions 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within the engagement cutouts 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. The width of the lower frame member 20 in the front-to-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notches 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the area between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the fascia board member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have, on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction, recesses 31, 41 recessed inwardly between a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end, and protrusions 32, 42 that bulge from the side surface opposite the recesses 31, 41 and are formed with a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32, 42. In addition, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 and attached.

The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 also have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These multiple grooves allow the operator to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility such as an amusement hall, and also enhance the design quality of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Skirting panel members]
The fascia board member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The fascia board member 50 includes a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through and penetrating vertically, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the fascia board member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and inclining rearward as the front surface moves upward.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (described later) is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on it. The left discharge hole 52 of the front panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the fascia board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The fascia board member 50 also has a left attachment portion 56 for attaching a left sliding member 81 to a portion of the top surface to the right of the rear extension 51, and a right attachment portion 57 for attaching a right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 is placed on the top surface of the fascia board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the front of the fascia board member 50 is decorated with a shallow relief. Although not shown in the figure, the box-shaped interior of the fascia board member 50 is divided into a lattice pattern by multiple ribs, which increases its strength and rigidity. The fascia board member 50 is also formed so that the front half of the fascia board reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat upper fixing portion 61 with a rectangular outline, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 in a planar view, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62, around the front end to the point where the bearing groove 63 opens, and which is continuous with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, the outer frame upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Fig. 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then extending diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so as to be able to abut against a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 forward of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking member 66 can rotate the locking body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the locking body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 into the bearing groove 63 or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from within the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame side hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the central part of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia board member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the fascia board member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the fascia board reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) that penetrates the upper surface of the fascia board member 50. Also, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached by a screw (not shown) to a portion forward of the protruding portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30. This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the skirting board member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the skirting board member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll to the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74, because the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and game balls can be made less likely to become stuck in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the part from which the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-to-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left-to-right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, by screws that are inserted into the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the part of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. In addition, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of abutting against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame 4 upper hinge member 620 by the locking member 66 in the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes a part of the L-shaped bent bearing groove 63. At the same time, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that in the normal support state, in which the main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65, and they are not in contact), the centers of the main frame hinge pin 622 located in the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are offset diagonally and face each other.

In this normal support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame, which supports the heavy main frame 4, is in contact with the front end of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the hinge pin 622 on the front end of the lock body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the figure, the center of the arc on the front end of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the action force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a L-shape and abuts against the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, when the action force F is divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and a component force F2 acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66), so no moment is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in a direction away from the right hanging portion 65, and the state in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is sandwiched between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63 is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal support state or when the force of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the locking member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66 is not constantly loaded, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from falling off the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the front right side of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65 and does not rotate any further, so that the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

In addition, even if the shape of the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or at a position where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension portion 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, and even if the locking member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension portion 62.

When the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. When the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 622 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is abutted against the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. As a result, the lock body 66a that had been closing the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is housed in the space in front of the front end of the lock body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

When removing the main frame hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and the locking body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, and the main frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball-trapping prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
The following describes the anti-theft mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. This fascia board member 50 has a vertical wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50, so that the illegal tool cannot be inserted any further to the rear side, and illegal acts can be prevented from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the rear of the main body frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

When the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, if a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so there is a risk of it being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the fascia board member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74, a left discharge hole 52, and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass, so that the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74, etc., and the game ball can be reduced from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing normally and creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 that is a rectangular frame-shaped unit that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side when viewed from the front of the reinforcement unit 130 and hingedly rotatably attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear underside of the glass unit 190. The door frame 3 and main frame 4 are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and can be opened and closed. An opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is used to lock the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2. A ball sending unit 250 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 110 and sends game balls to the ball launcher 680. A foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 110 and receives game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a, and discharges them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to shoot the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the lower part of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, with the front side bulging forward and the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 arranged below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 or the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card, and It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of game balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 that can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting game balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The performance operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the center of the left and right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can present performance images to the player. This performance operation unit 400, which will be described in detail later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player side and can display performance images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and serves to decorate the left outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be illuminated for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, the details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front of the main frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through opening 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front surface of the through opening 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 with a through hole 111 that is a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and penetrates from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the main body frame upper hinge member 620 and main body frame lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, a door frame left side decorative board 160 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 to the left of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards, ball sending solenoid 255, handle rotation detection sensor 307, handle touch sensor 310, single button operation sensor 312, ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending/returning display unit 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), upper speaker 573, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape in a front view that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape in a front view that is approximately a square extending vertically. The through hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and a lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is provided with a handle mounting surface 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through hole 111 and to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates from the front to the back in the cylinder mounting section 113 and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates from the front to the front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance 251a and ball removal opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage hole 116 that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and exposes the ball discharge hole 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, an upper tray passage hole 117 that penetrates from front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through hole 111, and exposes the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and a speaker insertion hole 119 that penetrates from front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110 and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcement unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcement metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcement metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, a right reinforcement metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcement metal plate 134 and engaging with the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with screws. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, the right reinforcing metal plate 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions that are bent in the front-to-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, which increase the strength and rigidity of the plate and also prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33 etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 which passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has an upper end which is inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142; and a lock spring 144 which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and which urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a (not shown), and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the mounting piece is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a, is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the upper door frame hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a that is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the door frame upper hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the upper hinge member 140 of the door frame side upper hinge member 620 can be inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame, and is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, which will be described later. This allows the upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the side. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the bottom. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described below. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 so that it can rotate relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 includes a door frame left side upper decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a height position lower than the speaker insertion hole 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction, and a door frame left side lower decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a height position lower than the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to a height approximately the same as the lower end of the upper tray passage hole 117.

The upper left side decorative board 161 and the lower left side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have a number of LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can radiate light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described later) when the door frame 3 is assembled, and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a protruding portion 172 that protrudes in a rod shape from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at a location outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protruding portion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so that the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. For this reason, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which it can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state in which it protrudes downward from the base 171. In addition, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotation position in which the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle attachment member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending from the rear end of the tube portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 protruding into the tube portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the tube portion 181 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side of the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned, and the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, since the axis of the tube portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, by mounting it on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tube portion 181 is inclined to extend forward to the right, and the handle unit 300 can be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the inside of the frame of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 can abut against the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see Figure 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 to abut the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 202 projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the body 201, and a pair of locking pieces 203 spaced apart on the left and right, projecting forward beyond the body 201, and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not impede the shooting of game balls into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000 described below. Also, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projection 202 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view and between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is equipped with a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends forward and backward, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation operation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and if the key is a corresponding one, it can be rotated a specified angle in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In detail, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular, flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b extending flatly backward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending flatly from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in a direction away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is such that the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side as viewed from the front is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side as viewed from the front is attached to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. As a result, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 34 to 41. Fig. 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Fig. 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. Fig. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view cut along line D-D in Fig. 34(a), and Fig. 38 is a cross-sectional view cut along line E-E in Fig. 34(b). Fig. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along line F-F in Fig. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Fig. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Fig. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can also present performance images to the player.

The performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, which can be pressed by the player, a frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and can illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to the front, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen from the player side through the operation button 410 and can display performance images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 42. Fig. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side except for the outer periphery is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is equipped with a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical shape) with a circular periphery and a central side bulging forward, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a material that is difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without any irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decoration part 411a that extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, recessed from the back surface into a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b that extend on an axis toward the center at a position on the outer periphery side of the first button decoration part 411a, recessed from the back surface into an arc-shaped cross section, and are arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom sides.

The multiple second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a lens effect that refracts light due to the unevenness of the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape for a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a main body 413a that is approximately cylindrical and extends in the front-rear direction, a ring-shaped flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, a plurality of guide bosses 413c (four in number) that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, a plurality of detection pieces 413d (three in number) that protrude in a strip-like shape from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged in the circumferential direction, a base opening 413e that penetrates the flange 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body 413a, extends a predetermined length along the outer periphery, and is formed in the circumferential direction in a plurality of (six) base openings 413e, and an inner extension 413f that extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape and narrows inward (toward the center) so that the front end side fits along the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided three on each side, and correspond to the second button decorative part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension 413f, which tapers inward, is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface) and is formed transparent, so that the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer periphery abutting against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and moves backward until the rear end abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When the pressure detection sensor 440 detects the detection piece 413d, it means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the first button decoration 411a is formed around the entire circumference of the operation button 410, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

The front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 makes the transparent portion through which the rear can be seen narrow inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner periphery of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) protrudes rearward from the front surface of the decorative board unit 420 through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light irradiated forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and prevents light irradiated forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LED 422a, 423a and second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, and the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed into a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates from front to back, a plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a cutout portion 416c that is cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 to abut against the outer periphery rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting parts 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame body 416 (performance operation unit 400) is attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of mounting parts 416e and the cutout part 416c.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a region of the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lens 417 closes the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416 from the rear. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed as a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lens 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a generally rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In addition, the rear side of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see the rear side of the frame top lens 418.

When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 are positioned in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b etc. mounted thereon.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 43. Fig. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit when viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, and can impart vibration to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open on the upper side, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are respectively attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner circumference of the substrate base 421 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer circumference is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left operation button outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The left operation button outer decorative board 422 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4f. Effects of the Production Operation Unit]
The effect of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 44 to 46. Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Fig. 37. Fig. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and Fig. 45(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Fig. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and Fig. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The presentation operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player presentation images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can have the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented presentation, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall height is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned in the center in the left-right direction below the play area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110).

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. As a result, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1 to play a game using this pachinko machine 1, the player's head is located in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5 located above the plate unit 320 (performance operation unit 400), so that the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the play area 5a to the performance operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 will be seen as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (the side of the central axis CL) near the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the part that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

In this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for effects provided on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. In more detail, the operation buttons for effects on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axes extend approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above as in conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in FIG. 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons for effects are formed on a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button is made larger while keeping the part that is pressed on a flat surface, when a part of the operation button that is not in the center is pressed, the surface that is pressed will tilt so that the part that is pressed will move back first, and the operation button will not be able to move back in a straight line, which could make it impossible to press the operation button.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (a part of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses, so when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be detected reliably, and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the part where it is attached, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly) and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing him to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 that forms the lower surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, so that when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., can bend downward to absorb the impact until the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and excessive force is prevented from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a lot of force when a performance is presented to the player in which the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the performance operation unit 400 will not be damaged, and interruption of the game due to damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented, and by making it less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall can be prevented.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward, making it stronger and more rigid than if it were flat. Even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

As shown in FIG. 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button interior decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so that the uneven decorations formed on the back sides of the first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button interior decorative part 432f, and second button interior decorative part 432g can be seen from the front side (player side). In addition, in the areas where the uneven decorations are formed, the plate thickness changes and light refracts in a complex manner, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The performance operation unit 400 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration part 411a makes it difficult to see behind at the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall part 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432, but the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 is provided with an internal decorative member 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when they see the operation button 410, and also allows the internal decorative member 432 to be positioned without problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In more detail, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 prevent the unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and on the rear side (back side) from being seen by the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is made invisible to the player. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412, the outside and back side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made difficult to see, improving the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, while the second button interior decoration 432g formed on the front plate 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a row in concentric circles, so that, as shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button interior decoration 432g intersect, allowing the player to see a geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the performance operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that has a deep, three-dimensional feel, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g are separated in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the player's eye position moves, the overlapping degree between the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration 432g changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration and entertaining the player.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player through the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, as shown in Figure 38, so that the light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and a first LED 423a on the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b facing through the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are positioned between the cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body 413a or to the outside of the inner tube 416d, and only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416, and the light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or to the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating a number of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 is attached, up to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418, so that light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view cut along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the front left side so as to cover the front sides of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 comprises a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 that extends vertically along with the left unit upper decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 that is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member; and a plurality of decorative members 537 that are attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left side of the front of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward from the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located approximately in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. This left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left reflective standing wall 538 (see Figs. 5 and 23) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. The left reflective standing wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. The reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left reflective standing wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is formed so that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b when assembled to the door frame 3.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward as a point. The light irradiated forward from this circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens section 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffusion reflection section 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, a front diffusion lens section 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection section 532c on the front surface, an input lens section 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection section 532c), and a front reflection section 532f that is outside the input lens section 532e on the rear surface and is generally inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e.

The front diffuse lens section 532d of the rectangular lens section 532b is formed by a number of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection section 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuse lens section 532d is cut in the radial direction, the cross-sectional shape is such that the grooves are recessed in an arc shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves are bulged in an arc shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. The front diffuse lens section 532d is also formed such that the grooves and peaks are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing it in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are V-shaped from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape, with the mountain parts between the grooves being triangular and pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and mountain parts move forward as they move away from the center. The front reflecting portion 532f is also formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines dividing the front reflecting portion 532f ...

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the rectangular lens section 532b, the light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens section 532e into the rectangular lens section 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it can refract the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, and guide almost all of the input light to the cone-shaped central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is reflected by the inclined cone surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c so as to be diffused in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160), and travels from the center to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b. Furthermore, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) throughout the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. At this time, the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, so that the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction at the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c can be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center to the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffuser lens section 532d has a wavy cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f in various directions, and can irradiate the light forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) approximately uniformly from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b.

In the front diffusion lens section 532d and the front reflection section 532f of this rectangular lens section 532b, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple lines extending radially, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b from becoming light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and to irradiate light with a more uniform shade forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative section in front of the rectangular lens section 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed to fit the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and a polyhedral decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion that is recessed in the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the polyhedral decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube that extends from front to back. The part that forms the lower surface of the outer periphery of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this part is perforated from front to rear. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, which is open upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it moves upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the vertical middle part is concave backwards, and is composed of an L-shaped part whose lower part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, an L-shaped part whose upper part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight part connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped part and the upper end of the lower L-shaped part.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both the top and bottom ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, so that the left unit decorative lens member located at the rear can be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front, a door frame right side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551, a transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553 that is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, to the left of the center when viewed from the front, on the front of the right unit base 551, and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative member 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the right side of the center in front view on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in a front view, extending in the up-down and front-to-back directions, a sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a right unit left light blocking member 559, which is a shallow box-like opaque member that is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions with the front and right sides open, and a right unit right light blocking member 560, which is a flat, opaque member that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 is provided with a right unit decorative lens member 561 having translucency and a polyhedral decoration at the front end, which is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a right unit decorative base 562 in the form of a frame that penetrates from front to back and is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right unit base 551 so as to penetrate vertically, and is provided with a connection cable for connecting the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with the center in the front to back direction closed off in a box shape. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right reflective wall portion 568 (see Figs. 6 and 24) that stands toward the front side from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. In this right reflective wall portion 568, the inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. In addition, like the inner surface of the left reflective wall portion 538, this reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the right reflective wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, this right reflective wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective wall portion 33.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is equipped with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating and decorating the right unit left decorative member 554 through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall 553b protruding in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body 553a to the right as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout 553c cut from the right end side of the rear wall 553b to the left as viewed from the front and formed in multiple places at regular intervals in the vertical direction, a shallow storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a as viewed from the front so that the right unit left decorative member 554 can be stored in it, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and provided in multiple vertical directions, and side reflecting portions 553f arranged in multiple vertical directions on the right side of the main body 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be effectively illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 553e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 553e has a rectangular part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 553e are each located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the left LED 552a to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 553a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain portion between the grooves facing toward the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc grooves as the boundary.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 553a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 553a moves to the right as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens section 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

The light that is incident forward from the input lens section 553e into the main body section 553a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 553f and is reflected to the left when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the left surface of the main body section 553a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 553f) of the main body section 553a, but since the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body section 553a is a white material, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body section 553a and is irradiated to the left. Therefore, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f inside the main body 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are irradiated to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent material, so that from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. In detail, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 556b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 556a to the left as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 556c cut from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b as viewed from the front to the right and formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, a storage recess 556d that is shallowly recessed on the right side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front so that the right unit right decorative member 557 can be stored, input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and side reflecting portions 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front.

The body 556a of the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corners on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the body 553a of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves leftward as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. The front end of the body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back, and the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 556e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 556a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 556e are each located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed of multiple concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. In each of these multiple concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain part between the grooves facing the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 556a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 556e as the center.

The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 556a moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens section 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflector 556f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 556e into the main body section 556a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 556f and is reflected to the right when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body section 556a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (leftward when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 556f) of the main body section 556a, but since the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body section 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body section 556a and is irradiated to the right side. Therefore, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f inside the main body 556a and the light irradiated to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are irradiated to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 556f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent material, so that from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with translucent material, such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape in a side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is provided with a flat body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 559a to the right when viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 559c that is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b when viewed from the front to the left and is formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend to the right from the right surface of the body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the body portion 559a.

The body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is vertically extending rectangular with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed to have approximately the same external shape as the body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The multiple reinforcing parts 559d are provided in three sets spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing parts 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing parts 559d is formed in a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing parts 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is slanted so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right side opening that opens to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white material. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the respective main body parts 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged in close proximity to the main body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body parts 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed from an opaque material, preventing the light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other, and the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, so that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light interference between the spaces, and the parts located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided vertically into multiple (four) areas, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 has a circular decorative part 561a that is circular when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative part 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative part 561a is formed in a shape with multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical part that is concave on the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative part 561b is formed in a shape in which multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of multiple triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part.

In more detail, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed so that, in the areas located in front of each of the spaces divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left shading member 559, in the top three areas, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on both the top and bottom sides of the circular decorative part 561a located in the vertical center, and in the lowest area, only the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is formed from a transparent material, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side can be seen from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically and are attached to the front of the right unit cover 563 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate shape farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can independently illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in amusement halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in amusement halls where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as ball jamming or an error occurs in this pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides are illuminated and decorated in a unique manner, so that the occurrence of the malfunction can be immediately notified to the game hall staff and they can quickly respond to the malfunction, which can quickly resolve the interruption of the player's play and prevent the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a box-shaped base 573 extending left and right with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward and open at the rear, penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center, penetrate in the front-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572; and speaker covers 575 made of punching metal that are disposed in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 is made up of a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a plurality of transparent flat light guide members (three on each side) that are attached to the front of the unit body 271, close the plurality of slits 574b, and extend from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. 578, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271 and cover the front surfaces of the multiple (three) light guide members 578, and a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further includes a door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, respectively, and have LEDs mounted at the locations facing the left and right outer ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578, a pair of board bases 585 attached to the locations through which multiple (three) slits 574b are formed on both the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585, respectively, and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271, and a pair of light-shielding members 588 attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 in front of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed into a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has multiple projections and recesses on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that the front surface of each of the pair of upper speakers 573 moves backwards on the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the lower portions near both the left and right ends of a rectangle extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower edge. The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the shape seen from the front combines a rectangle extending left and right, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with a base that is about 1/2 the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the left and right center of the front edge of the rectangle, and a rectangle that protrudes forward a short distance with the front edge of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, both sides of the part that protrudes forward at the left and right center on the front surface of the unit body 271 are located behind (recessed) the line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the part that protrudes forward.

The unit body 271 has openings 574a that penetrate from the front to the rear in areas from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside the area protruding forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits 574b that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front and rear direction in areas that extend diagonally from the area protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the area that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271, three on each side, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut into a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d cut into the bottom surface from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also has a top left decorative part 574e and a top right decorative part 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative part 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative part 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. This unit body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the left-right center on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a shape that, when viewed from the front, combines a roughly square irregular pentagon bent so that the left-right center of the bottom side is located downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle that connects the tips of the sides that extend outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape overall and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted state, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it moves downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and by illuminating these LEDs, the top middle decorative member 576 can be illuminated and decorated.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of both the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit body 271. If the side closer to both left and right ends of the unit body 271 is the end side, and the side closer to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end side to the center side, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward as it moves from the end side of the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b. In addition, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the up-down direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b decreases as it moves toward the center side. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends in the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584, and the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the outer ends in the left and right directions, the light travels toward the center inside the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffusion reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated and decorated.

When light from the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is incident on the light guide member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the area located in front of the arc portion 578b on the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides the light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, allowing the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding members 578, and cover the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding members 578. The front of each decorative lens portion 579a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens sections 580a that accommodate the three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens section 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding member 578, and covers the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding member 578. The front of each decorative lens section 580a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative part 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of the front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side protrudes forward further than the front side of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is made of an opaque material.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall that is approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view extending from the rear side of the side wall at a right angle outward in the left and right direction, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the upper sides of the side wall and the rear wall with a line connecting the front end of the upper side of the side wall to the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the lower sides of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top center left decorative board 586 or a door frame top center right decorative board 587 so that the open areas are closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the left side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the left of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the right side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other by opaque materials. The light-shielding members 588 separate the upper and lower portions of the multiple LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. This light-shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light-guiding members 578 only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, and the decorative lens parts 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well illuminated and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, the door frame top middle decorative board 577, the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on both the left and right sides are curved as if carved out backwards, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 located in the center, and are formed to extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on both the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal, located behind each of the left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are located, and the speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the player to hear the sounds output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

The door frame top unit 570 can also guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 through a plurality of light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Function and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines, and the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. As a result, the front of the game board 5 (play area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190), and this corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide play area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the left-right center of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111, and the front surface (front surface of the dish front lower decorative part 326c) of the lower half (part below the upper dish 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape that is carved out backwards (a concave curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located further back than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the left and right center of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude forward, so that the performance operation unit 400 can be made to stand out and be emphasized to the player, and the performance operation unit 400 can be strongly drawn attention to it.

The door frame 3 is attached with the performance operation unit 400, which is located on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through hole 111, tilted so that the large, semi-spherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers his or her eyes to look at the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears almost directly ahead, allowing the large, round operation button 410 to be strongly visible, heightening anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410. At the same time, the performance image displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, which is located inside the transparent operation button 410, can be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the performance image.

The door frame 3 is also provided with a large operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape and has a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320, so that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched by moving the hand a short distance, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. In addition, the large-diameter operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape is attached in an inclined state, so not only can it be pressed from above like the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, but it can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the performance using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect of attaching the operation unit 400 to the tray unit 320 in a suspended state, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations according to the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 in the center of the front of the tray unit 320, making the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400 with respect to the lower dish opening 326d that opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the dish unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower dish 322 to be large relative to the size of the lower dish opening 326d, and ensures a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower dish 322. In addition, since the rear of the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her left hand inside the lower dish 322 or places his/her fingers on the lower dish opening 326d, it is difficult for the player's fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower dish 322, making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and allowing the player to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower dish 322 is larger than the size of the lower dish opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls on the lower tray 322 are removed into a money box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and are located on the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located at the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, which makes the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) neater and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 are immediately ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a to the dollar box, etc. below as soon as they enter the lower tray 322. At this time, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, so the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box cannot be seen. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being discharged directly into the coin box, making it less annoying for the game balls to pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of shooting the game balls, the presentation images, etc.) and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in a position on the lower tray 322, forward and to the left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally toward the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, so that game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by being reflected off the right wall portion. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1). This means that the game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

The door frame 3 also has a lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326, through which the lower dish 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if a player places his/her hand on the lower dish opening 326d or places his/her hand in the lower dish 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. Therefore, the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 can be output forward well, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. In addition, when a player places his/her hand in or approaches the lower dish 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The door frame 3 is also equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes forward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the through hole 111. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 acts as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-like and protrudes significantly forward, can be decorated with illuminating light, so that even if you are not located in front of this pachinko machine 1 in an amusement hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, the presence of this pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it possible to make this pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the left-right center in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are formed in a concave shape that carves out the front rearward (a concave curved shape such that the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes forward significantly, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the upper part of the door frame is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, and also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, so that the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, and allowing players to immediately recognize that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the performance operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protruding forward significantly at the center in the left-right direction below and above the through hole 111, so that the player can see a unified decoration from top to bottom, with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and the sophisticated decoration makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative member 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center in the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 60 to 66. Fig. 60 is a front view of the game board. Fig. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and Fig. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as viewed from the back. Fig. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, Fig. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and Fig. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled and viewed from the back. Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the function display unit portion enlarged from the front when the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content that is played by shooting game balls into the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is equipped with a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, with the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached.

The rear unit 3000 further includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in a clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1008 are inserted into the rear protruding pieces 202 of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a number of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 to determine the position relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of fitting holes 1113, which are round holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is arranged near the outer periphery in the lower left corner and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has step-shaped engagement steps 1115 with a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the play area 5a, just like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, to engage and fix the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that detachably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. The holding step 1121 is also sized so that its front inner peripheral surface forms a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and has a number of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. In detail, the engagement claw 1124 is disposed at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed at the bottom of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step 1121 and the engagement piece 1125 large enough to insert the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is removably held relative to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

The panel holder 1120 further includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a number of mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the previous component 1000 and the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the functional display unit 1400 is inserted into this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of the gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 67 and 68. Fig. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel of a different form from that shown in Fig. 63, together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. Fig. 68 is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 67, seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape formed to be approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 at the lower portion approximately in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates in the vertical direction above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 penetrating from the front to the rear, into which the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted, at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating from the front to the rear, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned between the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom. This allows the board holder 1200 to receive all game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that are inferior in terms of fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 64 to Fig. 66. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the play board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see Fig. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (play situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a second special pattern indicator 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002. It mainly comprises a first special reserved number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserved number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown in the figure, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit for controlling performance images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. In detail, the game board side performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the approximate center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side performance display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and videos.

The game board side performance display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side as viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side as viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface as viewed from the front in the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, then moving the right fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020 and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of regular winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of regular winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the regular lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery that is drawn when the game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and approximately directly below the impact stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003 and to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located directly above the outlet 1126 near the bottom end of the left-right center in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large winning port 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6 balls), and is formed so that it can be opened and closed depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center, at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the play area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and game balls that flow down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the left-right center of the play area 5a).

The center role 2500 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center device 2500, except for the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center device 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released, and a stage 2530 which releases game balls released from the warp exit 2522 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be received by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the bottom edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that the locking mechanism 3020 can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can provide light-emitting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back-down rear movable performance unit 3100, the back-upper left movable performance unit 3200, the back-left movable performance unit 3300, the back-upper middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back-down front movable performance unit 3500, etc., and can entertain players with various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through the gap between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the front right lower corner of the door frame 3, and the game with the game balls is started. The game balls shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 302, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the balls can be shot, and up to 100 game balls can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). When the game ball hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, there is also provided at an appropriate position a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball hits it.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500 while abutting multiple obstacle nails (not shown). Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 that opens into the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is highly likely to be received by the first starting hole 2002, since it is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When a game ball is received by the first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. Then, when a game ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), the game ball flows down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 are provided.

When the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the second starting hole 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball to be received by the second starting hole 2004. When the game ball is received by the second starting hole 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., four balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big win", "medium win", "small win", "probability-changing win", "time-saving win", etc.) that is favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small win", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "probability-changing (probability-changing) win", "time-saving (time-saving) win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", and "no time-saving win".

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state and a game ball is received into the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, which can entertain the player.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening and closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it is open for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) to receive game balls, and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big win", when either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large prize opening 2005 has been open to receive game balls, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) in which it is closed and cannot receive game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R big win", it repeats two rounds, if there is a "5R big win", it repeats five rounds, if there is a "15R big win", it repeats fifteen rounds, and creates an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probability hit"), or that change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the indication of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 displays three pattern rows consisting of multiple patterns lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each pattern row, sequentially stops and displays the pattern rows that are displayed in a variable manner, and each pattern row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows are a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three pattern rows have stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a small win game, a big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the special lottery by the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to perform light-emitting performances, movable performances, display performances, etc. by appropriately using the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side performance display device 460, various decorations of the center role 2500, various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable performance unit 3100, the back top left movable performance unit 3200, the back left movable performance unit 3300, the back top middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable performance unit 3500, etc., depending on the special lottery result that has been drawn. This allows the player to be entertained by various performances, and prevents the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment corresponds to the main body unit of the present invention, the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the window portion of the present invention, the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the bulge portion of the present invention, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 in the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A of this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, and the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side correspond to the second decorative body of the present invention, while the second button decorative part 432g of the decorative member inside the operation button 432 in this embodiment, the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative part of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436, as well as the LED 477a on the sub-screen decorative board 477, correspond to the light-emitting bodies of the present invention, the door frame side performance display device 460 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in this embodiment correspond to the base parts of the present invention.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see a decoration that is full of unprecedented perspective, such as the overlapping decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second performance display device 460A, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the overlapping decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460, etc., which can strongly attract the interest of the player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A (screen unit 470)) and the door frame side performance display device 460, etc. are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) move closer to or farther away from each other, and the first button decorative portion By changing the distance between 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration in which the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) appear to overlap, and the player can change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) by himself, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side to the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), a space is formed between the first decorative body and the second decorative body. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance between the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member This makes the distance to the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) more different, and even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, when the player's eye position moves, the intersection (degree of overlap) between the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration, which strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, so that the rear operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided, and the radial decoration of the first button decoration part 411a can direct the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, so that the player's attention can be strongly directed to the operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center. When viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, ensuring a sense of perspective for the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g. This makes the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 has multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered on the center, so that the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g can direct the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device.

Furthermore, when each LED mounted on the left operation button inner decorative board 433, the right operation button inner decorative board 434, the upper operation button inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button inner decorative board 436 (or the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477) is illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), the player can be entertained by the illuminated decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) can diffuse the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436. Therefore, the second button interior decoration part 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436, whereas the first button decoration part 411a is illuminated and decorated by direct light from the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button decorative part 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is illuminated and decorated with indirect light diffused by the light source, and the first button decorative part 411a is illuminated and decorated with a weak light, so that when the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the left operation button decorative board 433, the right operation button decorative board 434, the upper operation button decorative board 435, and the lower operation button decorative board 436 are illuminated, when the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside, the player can see decorations with a more emphasized sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a strong appeal that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, there is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move in the area outside the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), and it is possible to expand the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made more noticeable. Also, as described above, since there is no need to secure space outside the button lens 411 to move it, by arranging the frame unit 415 in the area outside the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and have a high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player strikes the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the applied impact force is more likely to be dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 had a flat shape, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and can lead to frustration for some players and a loss of interest, and because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged in the main frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, the operation button 410, which is a circular shape of about 15 cm in outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player, and the transparent button lens of the operation button 410 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111. Since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a, 423a are provided for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b are provided for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame body 416 has an inner cylinder 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the second button decoration 411b, and a main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that separate the second button decoration 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylinder 416d, the main body 413a, and the inner extension 413f prevent the light from the first LED 422a, 423a from illuminating the center of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411, and prevent the light from the second LED 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decoration 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b, which are adjacent to each other, can be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, and a good-looking illumination can be produced. In addition, by appropriately combining the off, on, blinking, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration 411b, a variety of light-emitting patterns can be produced, preventing the player from becoming bored and entertaining the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). Therefore, compared to the case where a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated to the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the wiring connected to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 does not bend or extend as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not break, so the player can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) are decorated by the second button decorative part 411b, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. By appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), and the player can enjoy the illumination effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410) with the second button decoration 411b on its outer edge can be operated by the player, so that by having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Furthermore, by illuminating and decorating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 when a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410, so that the player can be encouraged to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player-participation type performance and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is provided with an opaque main body portion 413a and an inward extension portion 413f which enable only the second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the portion of the operation button 410 which is closer to the center than the second button decorative portion 411b is not illuminated (decorated) by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, and the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, which prevents the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) located at the rear from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 which is equipped with the frame side lens 417, at the rear side of the frame unit 415, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is located closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of the light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, so even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner tube 416d, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f can completely separate the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the operation button 410. On the other hand, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, so that the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decorative part 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which is arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Therefore, the second button decorative part 411b makes it difficult to see the outer parts and rear side (rear side) of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby preventing the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. In addition, when the second button decoration 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration member 411b, making it difficult to see the components on the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). This can further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decoration member 432, door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc., and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button decoration 411b are formed in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light goes around the outer edge of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., so that the player is less likely to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper tray 321, in which the stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for playing, is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and below the upper tray 321 to form the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined width behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is A portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 in the lower tray main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the space, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to mount the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. This makes the lower tray 322 appear smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable, and relatively making the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were seen lined up and down in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided which extend upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b which extends upward from the outer periphery and restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing the game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 or the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball, which prevents the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and also prevents an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the lower tray cover 340, 340A that restricts the movement of the game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the game balls can be prevented from entering (spill) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he or she has lost money or is uncomfortable if the game ball enters the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325 in the lower tray 322, even if the game ball supplied into the lower tray 322 bounces up inside the lower tray 322, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325, when a player inserts his/her hand into the lower tray second area A2 from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can restrict the fingertips, etc. from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that it is possible to prevent the fingertips, etc. from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and causing injury, and the player can play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray cover 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), even if an impact or pressure is applied to the lower tray cover 340, 340A due to a game ball hitting it, the impact or pressure is not transmitted from the lower tray cover 340, 340A to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, so that when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), making it difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, as described above, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, the game ball can be prevented from abutting against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), so that damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and the interruption of the game can be reduced, suppressing the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, the game ball moving toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 climbs the inclined bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, the speed of the game ball that abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, so that the lower tray cover 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game ball from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the impact when the game ball abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A or the main body vertical wall portion 325b can be reduced, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which reduces the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played in which game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, etc., a dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward from the center of the left and right direction of the front, and the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forward bulging portion, and the dish unit cover 326 is provided with a storage dish consisting of an upper dish 321 and a lower dish 322 capable of storing game balls, and the storage dish (upper dish 321 and lower dish 322) In addition, the lower tray first area A1 is located outside the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, and the lower tray second area A2 is located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, so that the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in conventional pachinko machines, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that this is a gaming machine different from conventional pachinko machines, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the left and right direction of the front of the dish unit cover 326, the area where the lower dish 322 is open on the surface of the dish unit cover 326 is small, but since the first extension part 325B, second extension part 325C, and lower dish cover 340, 340A of the lower dish main body 325 having the lower dish second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in the area (lower dish second area A2) that cannot be seen from the front of the lower dish 322. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, so that the player can concentrate on playing without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower dish 322, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C having the lower tray second area A2 to the lower tray main body 325 and main body part 325A having the lower tray first area A1.By preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of sizes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Also, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, and since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), it is possible to make the lower tray 322 compatible with various performance operation units 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body vertical wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 is in the shape of a container recessed downward, and game balls can be stored reliably. In addition, the lower tray cover 340, 340A has a cover vertical wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, so by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate various forms and achieve the same effects as described above.

In addition, in the lower dish 322, which is composed of the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A, the lower dish covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325, so the part of the lower dish 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower dish main body 325, and the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A is not located in the part where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower dish main body 325, no force is applied that pulls the lower dish covers 340, 340A away from the lower dish main body 325 even if many game balls are stored, and it is possible to prevent the lower dish covers 340, 340A from coming off the lower dish main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it difficult to see) from the front (player), so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and it can be made into a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players. In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from becoming distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls guided by the guidance means such as the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, which are located between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 that guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a. Therefore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guidance means and smoothly (instantly) ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, so that the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured sufficiently compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, and discharged to the bottom of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents the game balls from circulating inside the lower tray 322, and makes it possible to reliably make the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the ball guide section 322c etc. without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front, so the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, so a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the left-right center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 are played. In addition, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than the approximate center in the up-down direction, is shaped to be concave so as to be carved out toward the rear. This makes it possible for the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a to appear to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are lined up in a vertical direction in the conventional pachinko machine, the large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. And, from the tray front lower decoration part 326c which is recessed backward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray 322 is recessed backward and a part of it is wrapped around the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), so that the storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322) can be sufficiently secured, so that the player does not have to worry about the lower tray 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and can concentrate on playing, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), when a player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, the player's fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front surface of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the player can recognize that many game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction and allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, because the fingertips of the hand placed on the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, the player is given the same sensation as with the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, putting the player at ease and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed so that it becomes wider toward the back (rear), even if the front side is small, it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface (lower tray front decorative portion 326c) of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens, and relatively, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which can increase the appeal to players and entertain the players to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower tray cover 340, so when a player puts their hand inside the lower tray 322, their fingertips are prevented from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and getting injured, allowing the player to play in a safe environment. The lower tray cover 340 also prevents game balls from entering (spill) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is positioned in the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more noticeable to the player, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the decorations made by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more visible, allowing the player to enjoy the decorations and presentations of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, so that it has the same function as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, when a player who is accustomed to conventional pachinko machines plays this pachinko machine 1, he or she will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322, and can play in the same way as before, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front, which makes the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and makes it possible to make a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can strongly attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the play area 5a in the door frame 3. The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) has an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a center that is arranged in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a and the button base 413 can reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the inner side (rear side) of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration part 432 provided inside, the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can make it difficult to see the outer edge or the back side of the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470). Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative part 411a, etc., so that a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm can be realized without any problems while preventing a deterioration in appearance. Therefore, the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be enlarged, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attracting the player's attention, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and make invisible anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 is made to have a three-dimensional shape (semispherical) that bulges outward (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, a plane perpendicular to the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410), so light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved.

In addition, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, so the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) placed inside the operation button 410 can be made larger and easier to move, making it easier to provide the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) that entertains the player inside the operation button 410, and realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even more entertainment for players.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, which makes the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracts the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, are opaque, so that the button frame 412 can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc., and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 is also provided with an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer edge of the button to the inside at a specified width all around, and in cooperation with the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 411b, makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). This makes it possible to enlarge the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470), which makes it easier to secure space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A to move, allowing them to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directionality to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation presentation using the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player-participation type presentation is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type presentation using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), by presenting a performance image according to the game status, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410, and the player can enjoy the performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), and the player can be encouraged to operate the operation button 410 by the performance image and light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), and the decrease in interest can be suppressed by having the player actively participate in the player participation type performance and enjoying it. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, and the expectation for the game can be increased, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, because the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative part 411a) of the large operation button 410, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing the player's anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is shown to have the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner circumference side of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and the button lens 411 may have no first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown to have a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer periphery of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, but this is not limited to this, and at least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (flat decoration by pasting a sticker or printing, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) at least on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. If the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to apply light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, etc. to at least one of the inner wall side or the outer wall side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this, and the lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), or may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), with a portion of it wrapping around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the shape (shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) of the portion (lower dish front decorative portion 326c) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is recessed toward the rear is recessed in a curved surface toward the rear, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in a polygonal columnar or polyhedral shape.

In the above embodiment, the example of attaching the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) to the front of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to attach a unit or panel or other member that has "a control dial, a rotating body with a decoration on its surface," "a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that match the concept of the gaming machine," "a character, item, logo, a predetermined pattern, etc. that is decorated by stickers or printing, etc., that match the concept of the gaming machine." Also, the member attached to the mounting space 326j (performance operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and multiple (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown to have a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), but this is not limited to this. The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) may not have an opening (presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and a space equivalent to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It is preferable to decorate the front of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by means of stickers, printing, mounting decorative members, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a planar view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) as a covering part to make it difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially arranged in the circumferential direction, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative part 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ovals) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 allows the rear members such as the operation button interior decorative member 432, the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, which are arranged on the rear side, to be always visible, but this is not limited to this, and at least one of the front and rear members arranged in the front and back (or up and down) may have a variable light transmission means that makes the rear side visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, examples of the variable light transmission means include "a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides," and "a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent or opaque by turning the power on and off, making the rear side visible." The front and rear members may be movable relative to each other, or may not be movable relative to each other.

By providing a variable light transmission means in at least one of the front and rear members, in the normal state, only the front member, or both the front and rear members, are visible, and the decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in the special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear member (the rear member, or the member arranged behind the rear member) that was not visible in the normal state becomes visible, and a decoration in which the front and rear members, or the front member, the rear member, and the member behind the rear member overlap can be shown. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front and rear members, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses a decline in the player's interest.

To go into more detail, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened, allowing the player to see only the decoration of the front member. Then, by brightening the area between the front and rear members, or the rear side of the rear member with light from a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the front member are met, making the rear member visible through the front member, and allowing the player to see the overlapping decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions the surface of the rear member is visible through the front member, allowing the player to see the decoration of the front member and the surface of the rear member. Then, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, making the rear side visible through the rear member, allowing the player to see the components behind the rear member (e.g., display devices, decorations such as characters, etc.) through the front and rear members.

Furthermore, if both the front and rear members have a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, and when the area between the front and rear members is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is met, the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member, and the decoration of the front and rear members can be seen by the player. On the other hand, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED (or the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED), the fulfillment conditions of the variable light transmission means in the front and rear members are respectively met, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a character, or other decoration) can be seen by the player through the front and rear members. As a result, by appropriately selecting the area to be brightened by the light of the light-emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmission means is something like a magic mirror, so when the back side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, allowing the player to see the sparkling decorations on the surfaces of the front and back members.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was described as something like a magic mirror, but the same effect can be achieved if it is something like a liquid crystal film. In addition, if something like a liquid crystal film is used as the variable light transmitting means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so if the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) with light from light-emitting elements such as LEDs, the player can be shown a wider variety of light-emitting effects, decorative effects, and other effects.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 69 to Fig. 74. Fig. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, Fig. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Fig. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing the outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Fig. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power source (e.g., +5V, etc.) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that performs presentations related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing multiple boards, and includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931 as the first control unit MCG, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the above-mentioned first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is mainly composed of a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and has various control programs such as a main control program that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code that is assigned a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on a clock signal (a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator, described later) input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as a random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type circuit with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is output from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is not input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first start port sensor 4002 that detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 that detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, and the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects game balls that have entered the general winning port 2001, as well as the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Also, the detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the large winning port 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 69 and detects fraudulent acts using magnets are input to the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specific output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 951, and outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning hole sensor 4020 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 frequently detect game balls. For this reason, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 use long-life proximity switches. In addition, when a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long lifespan is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, the general winning opening 2001, where game balls do not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general winning opening sensor 4020. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives various commands as serial data from the main control input circuit 1310b at the input terminal of its specified serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) indicating this from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via the bus 1310ah (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and is mainly configured of the transmission shift register 1310aea, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, the serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a, based on a detection signal output by being operated.

[7-2-1. Dispense control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of the gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in RAM'') and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in ROM''), as well as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control program receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 as serial data in a serial manner as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 as an error release unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands as serial data in a serial manner as a payout main serial data transmission signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, if an error occurs with respect to the payout operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and payout control is started, this payout control program releases the error based on a detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954 and stops the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error release control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted to various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is inputted. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is reset by a payout control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is outputted from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not inputted. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The detection signals from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, which detects the exhaustion of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guide unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 in serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port via the payout control input circuit 952b, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, which then outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb from the output terminal of its serial output port, and thereby transmits various commands as serial data from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands as serial data from the dispensing control board 951, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to inform the dispensing control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the error LED display 860b to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is "connection abnormal" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 840 detects ... 2, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of payout retry attempts has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, a "full" has occurred (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, a "CR not connected" has occurred (electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, a "stocked (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" has occurred (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., from the output terminal of a specified output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor not shown.

Furthermore, the payout control board 951 outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 via resistors (not shown) to the external terminal board 784. The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (configured with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is configured to transmit the number of game balls and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of game balls or a notice that an error has occurred) to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall) via these multiple photocouplers.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by multiple photocouplers to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, and also to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 which proceeds with the game or the payout control board 951 which controls the payout, etc. The hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the degree display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending and return display unit 330, and this signal is input to the ball lending and return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending and return display unit 330 is also input with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and the dispensing control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the information is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control built-in RAM by the dispensing control MPU 952a using this as a trigger. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). The CR unit 6 and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). In addition, AC 24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The degree display board 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the ball lending unit 360, a return button 329, which is a push button switch, mounted on a position corresponding to the return button 329 on the ball lending unit 360, and a ball lending/return display unit 330, which is a segment display, mounted on a position corresponding to the remaining loaned amount display unit 363 on the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/return display unit 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. By controlling the lighting in this way, the ball lending/return display unit 330 can display the remaining balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or display errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0-DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up the specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and the content displayed by the illumination of these three-digit segment displays can be viewed through the remaining loan display unit 363.

The CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the degree display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330. This CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending possible signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using an internal voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are active and ball lending is possible, the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be seen through the remaining loan display unit 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor implemented on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball loan button 328 is pressed and the ball loan operation signal TDS from the ball loan button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball loan request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen) in one payout operation, to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input outputs an EXS signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that one payout operation has started or ended, and outputs a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible. For example, if the hall staff or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out next, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance obtained by subtracting the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931
Next, a brief description will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 electrically connects and disconnects the 24 volt AC (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment. 5. A power switch 934 for switching on and off the power supply, a power supply control unit 935 for generating various power supplies, and a control unit for controlling the launching of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 by the launching solenoid 682 and the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. It is equipped with a launch control unit 953 that controls ball delivery using the delivery solenoid 255.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control section 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 255, is mainly composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal that notifies the player is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for shooting (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682, while at the same time controlling the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 to receive one of the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and send the received game ball to the ball launching device 650 by outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in FIG. 72, is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 4140a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (e.g., game board, It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores various information (such as information for managing schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side performance display device 1600 and schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.), a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special performance flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and loses its contents if power is cut off for a long period of time (if a long-term power outage occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. By providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is no longer able to retain its stored contents and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is out of control, and when this timer expires, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 to the motor drive board via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board and the peripheral control output circuit. The motor drive board 4180 is sent to the motor drive board 4180, door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the performance operation unit 400 and the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 are serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided in the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit via the serial I/O port for performance operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

The detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT") and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether the system itself is out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, a peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, etc.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak that are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer times out, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer times out), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period, it can restart the timer count, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and serializes detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly to shorten the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby taking measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED, which is important for the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs, etc., except for this LED, are executed in the peripheral control unit regular process described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects coming from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from being difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be low so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be high to make the screen unfolding on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which of a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is to be used, and a track number for specifying which of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is to be incorporated with sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to various control program copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs with aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, and obtains the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. The brightness setting information, as described below, includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% of the positive information, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management subject work area 1511ca for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a first backup area 1511cb and a second backup area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management subject work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a non-backup management subject work area 1511cf for exclusively storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf to clear it to zero, whereas the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Bank0 (1ms), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs described later. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Furthermore, "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4", which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank 0". As described below, when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform the peripheral control MPU 1511a that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore "(1fr)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described below). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in some cases, various schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a motor transmission data memory area 1511caf on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak, etc. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set. The motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set. The movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. The performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 are set. It is a storage area in which various information (for example, rotation (direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc., created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400) is set, which is obtained by acquiring the rotation (direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 based on detection signals from the switches, and the drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which various information is set, which is obtained by acquiring the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 based on a LOCKN signal (described later) that is output by the performance display drive board 4450 when it receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data.

The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and for example, when game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit routine processing, processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa when the previous peripheral control unit routine processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the previous peripheral control unit regular processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. The backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc are managed as one page, with two pairs of two banks as one pair. The performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc has Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and the backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, and the program that executes these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup targets among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear performance and a game state when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored after a momentary stop or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power). This is completely different from the above-mentioned backup management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c being cleared to zero. In addition, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of when a jackpot game state occurred) can be cleared, while the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) which stores various information (SRAM) that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a big win game state has occurred, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, as described above, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. And, "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc described later have the same memory area size as "Bank0". "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area, is quickly copied as performance backup information (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db is managed as a page, with Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The second backup area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the second backup area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source for controlling the sound of music and sound effects etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data for the screens displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460; an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b for transmitting serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates, into a positive signal and a negative signal, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), operation menu background image data used for displaying an operation menu background image described later, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume setting icon image data used for displaying a volume adjustment icon described later, and the like, are stored. In addition, main body frame back image data used for displaying a main body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 is visible from the player's perspective, service mode screen image data used for displaying a service mode screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying a break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying a break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying suggestion display objects for encouraging the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when the V blank signal described later is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first screen data according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the OM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when a V blank signal is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source mentioned above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in VRAM") which, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, which is for the game board side performance display device 1600, from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. In this way, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5, while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, namely red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronous signals, namely horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal, and is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. These serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals in the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen (one frame) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen (one frame) of drawing data on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this is done, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives this V blank signal, it executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. The interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP 1512a uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source as shown in FIG. 74, and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and serializes the music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track incorporating the sound data, and in addition to the sound data of the performance sounds such as music and sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a incorporate sound data of the notification sounds for notifying the parlor staff of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof. Specifically, for the performance sounds, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending at all on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to switch to a setting mode, which will be described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that is actually the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the performance sound, the sound data of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks and the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized performance sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, a brief explanation of the control of playing an alarm sound to notify parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be given. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the alarm sound volume is set to maximum volume are mixed together, and the volume of this mixed sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified sound effect and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound that actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at the maximum volume. At this time, since the performance sound is muted, it is not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the performance sound proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that has been proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is set again as the sub-volume value to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (at this time, if the volume has been adjusted by switching to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound), and is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but rather resume from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed since the alarm sound started.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alert sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music and sound effects according to various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for the left and right sides between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive and negative signals are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, and thus providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, namely, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronous signals, namely, a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, and the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, totaling 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each composed of 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, so the lower 2 bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

When the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, which are the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, into differential type serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and transmits these various signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 using only a differential one-pair cable.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, so the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to the door frame side performance display device 460, so the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in Fig. 1, various wirings must be passed along the open side of the main body frame 4 on the closed side opposite the locking unit 700 shown in Fig. 5 to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, such as the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. However, in addition to the payout device 830, a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged on the closed side of the main body frame 4, which can guide the game balls paid out by this payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and can branch and guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls.
5, which is a unit made up of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and other boards supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment, is disposed below the main body frame 4. In this way, the various wirings electrically connecting the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc., and are in an environment subject to noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has invaded the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Corporation is adopted for the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, as described above, a differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential one pair cable is not a parallel line in which two wires are simply arranged in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. For channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. However, with only this hardware configuration, the serial data in the parallel wires may be corrupted by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. If affected, the noise is not cancelled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 mounted on the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from the normal data, causing a problem that an image resembling a snow storm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to discern what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. is adopted in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to make it less susceptible to the effects of noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential method serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the noise is cancelled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By cancelling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is, from being displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. This helps prevent players from losing motivation to play due to noise.

In this embodiment, between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, there are a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, so that the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side can be electrically connected to the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and removing the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4 to perform maintenance on the main frame 4 and the door frame 3. If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side to the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the boards between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power wiring and wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are each formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a problem occurs in that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise or the output level of the signal decreases between the input and output of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses, with one of the twisted pair cables being red and the other being gray, and the wiring that supplies power in the harness being red and the other multiple wirings being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f receives the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the pachinko machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to connect the circuit to transmit two signals when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to connect the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V, which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described below, restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to inform the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to inform the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs the image to the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user.

When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no malfunction in the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a malfunction in the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the performance display device on the door frame side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the performance display device on the door frame side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, so that the alert sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured with the RTC 4165a at its core, as shown in Fig. 72. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") in which calendar information and time information are held. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and retain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and is able to display effects based on the acquired calendar information and time information on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. Examples of such effects include a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on December 25th, or a screen performing a New Year countdown on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on New Year's Eve. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. When the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the date and hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board side performance display device 1600, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second input on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on.

In this way, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa can store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the probability of a low or high probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of the LED type, and input date and time information.

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is possible to switch to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, it is possible to reset the calendar information and time information, and adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 to the desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is an LED type. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to identify the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to identify the current date and time, and acquires brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if it has already been six months since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, corresponding correction information (e.g., 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, which is the obtained correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the obtained correction information of 10%.

The current date and time may be determined by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the current date and time may be determined by acquiring the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[7-4-4. Volume Control]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 4140a has a resistance value that can be changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven stages as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the sound effects such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is cheating, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is low, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing malfunctions or player cheating due to the warning sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to the setting mode. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode. Specifically, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is converted from an analog value to a digital value by the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and a predetermined value is added or subtracted from this converted value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume. This adjusted volume is updated as a sub-volume value for the tracks in which sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects are incorporated among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the performance sounds, but is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned alert sounds and notification sounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, or increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is implemented on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to always keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In that case, the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a can be rotated by the hall staff. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may be too low for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or may be too high for the player to hear the music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a specified time, or if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the machine is in a waiting state for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 in accordance with this setting mode screen. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to increase the volume to the desired volume, or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to decrease the volume to the desired volume.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. As a result, if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was low and that the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, and if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was high and that the music and sound effects were loud, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400.

[8. Power Supply System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram continuing from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is turned on. is supplied to the power supply board 931, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and the launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the +37V supplied, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 in the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as the driving power source to adjust the drive current to be output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, so that the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

The power supply generating circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control board 951 and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the current flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode PD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as the dispensing VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0, and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM is supplied with the dispensing VBB, thereby maintaining the memory contents.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing through the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the above diode MD0 and the above capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc. will be provided, followed by an explanation of the voltages supplied primarily to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, the two voltages, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are also supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In response to this, the three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that creates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V created by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. of the door frame 3.

The +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is also supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V created by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage created by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a and the like of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b and the like of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used by the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the output control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power failure warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b), and is also input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, and is therefore able to more accurately detect signs of a power failure or momentary interruption, compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 will be described with reference to Figs. 77 to 79. Fig. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Fig. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and Fig. 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Fig. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V generation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figs. 69 and 75, as well as the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal, as shown in Fig. 77.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0 as shown in Fig. 77. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has a first terminal to which +5V generated by a +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied, a second terminal to which is grounded (GND), and a third terminal to which +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), to further remove ripple and smooth the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through a resistor MR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. As a result, as described above, when the +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the current is prevented from flowing through the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0, the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the memory contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in Fig. 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripples and smoothes them out. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Fig. 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. With +5V applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the vibration sensor 2405, general winning port sensor 4020, first start port sensor 4002, second start port sensor 4004, magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, and gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated when clearing the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or when an error is notified after power-on, it is operated to cancel the error, and has a function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and a function of canceling the error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling errors that the dispensing control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it is judged to be a RAM clear signal for clearing the main control built-in RAM and performs a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (this point will be explained in detail later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3, as shown in Fig. 77. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the dispensing control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and input with a logic LOW, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and input with a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is not an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which has been pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may invade the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V, is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are not directly input to the main control board 1310, and are therefore pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +24V, the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied to the REF terminal, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 6, which is the negative terminal of MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed by the capacitor MC21 to remove ripples, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 compares the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +24V power supply. The 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 compares the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +12V power supply. The 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and to the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power fails or is momentarily interrupted and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A described above. Therefore, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in response to a change in edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and outputs this stored value (logic) from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and also outputs the inverted value of the stored value (logic) from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. When a signal with a logic LOW is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, that is, a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. In addition, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latched state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with a logic LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, so that the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal with a logic HI from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with the logic of the inverted signal output from 1Q is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured so that the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are grounded to ground (GND), so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +24V, and a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V, at the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, and outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the power supply terminal Vcc terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has ripples removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic becoming LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the output control board 951 as a power outage warning signal, and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

As shown in Fig. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and a power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in Fig. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30 and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and to the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30, MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33, MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage and the preceding switch circuit also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage and the succeeding switch circuit also turns ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF and the succeeding switch circuit OFF.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 in the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a +12V power line in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning the transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are While the logic is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverted logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Fig. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 69 as a dispensing main serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and transmit a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and transmit a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs drive signals to the various displays, and outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the output control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit is mainly composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communication interface circuit mainly composed of a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

The anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 is applied with +12V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)) whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can be continuously applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. This increases the reliability of the signal.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb via the serial management unit 1310aec to the transmission shift register 41aea and transmits it as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 can transmit a main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI due to +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and since one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR50 via a resistor MR51. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, transistor MTR50 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

The anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the negative terminal of which is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, as well as to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and that signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

As a result, as described above, if the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, the +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 can complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being cut off or missing.

When the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR50 OFF and turning the photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main loop serial data transmission signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same logic as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this embodiment, measures are taken when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs on the +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied, causing the control reference voltage and communication voltage to drop. In other words, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel to the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, so that even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power source, so that the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the control reference voltage is configured to be connected to the +5V power line by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, so that the communication voltage can be maintained. This makes it possible to prevent commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and also prevents them from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive commands being sent. This makes it possible to eliminate the risk of missing commands immediately after a power outage or during a momentary interruption.

In addition, the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communications interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of the payout control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, and various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
The payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 as shown in Fig. 80. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC0, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by first removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the capacitor PC1, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacity: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), so that the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. Note that, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC3 to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 is mainly composed of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) as peripheral circuits, in addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as shown in Fig. 80. Here, we will first explain the payout control system reset, and then explain the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 80. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispatch control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Fig. 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power failure notice signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, and the full tank detection sensor 279 via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 have output terminals of the open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and is turned ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) of which one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line on the external terminal board 784. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and that signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through resistor PR21, and is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through resistor PR24. It is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20, turning the transistor PTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor PTR21 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which detection signal from main body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (NC), and is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR21, and is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29, and is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR24 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal, but it can be used to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open during normal play. Since an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state that does not occur during normal play by the player, that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will be opened from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will be opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

When the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' turns ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' turns ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will be released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, even in the event of a disconnection, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c) Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power failure warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the power supply control board 951 as a power failure warning via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both conditions, that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic of the power failure warning signal becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the dispensing power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, turning the transistor PTR40 ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the dispensing power failure warning signal with the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 being LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, whereas when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there is no sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, the power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the payout power outage warning signal input to the payout control MPU 952a due to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 shown in Fig. 1 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 6. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line, and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor in the dispensing control board 951. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor through resistor PR44b, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and to the other end of the capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND). The capacitor PC40 plays the role of a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40B) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it and outputs it). When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic HI is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes HI, which is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning the transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR47, and a full tank signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are input directly to each switch circuit without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise compared to the bulb out detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it performs control to forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even if the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor to continue paying out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the upstream side of the prize ball passage is filled with game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and an abnormal load is applied to the payout motor 834, the payout motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up, or the mechanism that transmits the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational motion of the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
The first and second terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49 and to the other end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 changes when the front and rear transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a RWMCLR signal.

In addition, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77. When transistor PTR44 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to cancel an error when an error is notified after power-on. It has a function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and a function to cancel an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, while it becomes an error cancellation signal in the function of clearing the error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, turning the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR43 in the next stage OFF and the switch circuit in the next stage OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, it does not indicate that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from when the power is turned on), it determines that it does not indicate that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning the transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as described above, the RAM clear signal with a logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, turning off the transistor PTR42 in the front stage and turning off the switch circuit in the front stage, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage, is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, turning on the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage and turning on the switch circuit in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, inputs the RAM clear signal with a logic HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 shown in FIG. 77, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 2, terminal 4, terminal 9, and terminal 11, correspond to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, via resistors PR60 to PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. When the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged, so as a protection measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in Fig. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball loan request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 as described above, and is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 71. The payout control board 951 outputs an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is possible or impossible, via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in) as shown in Fig. 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 through a resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 through a resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 through a resistor PR72. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71, and also to one end of a pull-up resistor PR73, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 80 via the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a as the CR connection signal 1.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR76, the other end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) in the power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is now HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic HI is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 as well as to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 receives the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 receives the BRQ from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, whereas when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the EXS with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not a payout operation for dispensing loaned balls is possible from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU 952a, is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, whereas when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same logic as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals that are input/output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. On the other hand, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and transmits the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the main control board 1310, and a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input and output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 85(a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 receives game information signals related to the game, such as the main prize ball number information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting hole winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals, from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the payout motor 834 outputs a prize ball number information output signal every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a jackpot information output signal of a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and other game information signals to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal, and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time reduction, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the player's play, etc. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 by adding up the number of jackpots with two rounds (the number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the number of jackpots that have actually occurred in the pachinko machine 1 is 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, which is displayed on the data counter, to decide whether or not to play.

However, the number of times the jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of times a 2-round jackpot has occurred, so that even when a player starts playing, there may be only 2-round jackpots occurring and no 15-round jackpots occurring for a while. In this way, although the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of hope, it may also stimulate the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently in the pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, so that the player's gambling spirit is not unnecessarily stimulated.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 2-round jackpot, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer during the period from when the 15-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 15-round jackpot. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. Such a method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to a hall computer installed in an amusement facility (hall) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of a prize ball base that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the jackpot information output signal of the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special pattern display information output signal, the normal pattern display information output signal, the time-saving information output signal, and the starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that informs the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. 60 reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; and the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. The output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has ended (stopped) the display of the variable special patterns, the normal pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal pattern display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has ended (stopped) the display of the variable normal patterns, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start hole winning information output signal is a signal that indicates that each time a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60.

As shown in FIG. 86, the external terminal board 784 has output terminals PT1 to PT10 arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 has actually paid out 10 prize balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of paid out prize balls to determine the total number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can grasp that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the special symbol has been displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT6 while a 2-round jackpot is occurring. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 2-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has finished (stopped) the variable display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7 is output for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can grasp that the variable display of the normal symbol has finished (stopped) in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times that this has happened to grasp the total number of times that the normal symbol has been displayed variable in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-saving information output signal. As described above, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. When the time-saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a time-saving state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the time-saving information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the time-saving information output signal is input to determine the total number of times the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the pachinko machine 1 is planning to pay out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls to be paid out and know the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, and the large winning port 2005, reaches 20 or more, and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that it does not become one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (passing through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring having connectors colored the same to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to prevent other wiring from being electrically connected in error. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. In this respect, it is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. For example, in a state where game balls are no longer being supplied from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 at the point when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and therefore payout will not be possible (also, for example, if a ball jam or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). In this case, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side is a signal that notifies the fact that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10, as described above. Therefore, when the payout control board 951 is unable to pay out game balls, it is unable to output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall staff. The hall staff, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the location of the ball jam (and also identifies the location of the ball jam or ball jam that occurred in the payout device 830, for example) and resolves the jam, thereby restoring the state in which game balls are paid out.

However, even when the hall staff is working, the game is still in progress using the main control board 1310. When the hall staff returns to a state where game balls are being paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal that notifies the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60 reaches 10 balls. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging or ball clogging in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in this game state can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out during that game state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the dish unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Fig. 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and this common mode choke coil SDL0 is able to separate noise from the positive and negative signals. The positive and negative signals from which noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, and prevents distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronization signals, horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively (i.e., restores the parallel signals before being serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is also configured to receive two signals, which are serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and which are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above, while connecting the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, but has a structure whose data format is completely different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned differential type serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not that output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the function of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to output a LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal is used to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below, and LOCKN signal output request data having a data format structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the device called the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuitry, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuitry, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for the TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal for specifying whether the transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as described above, the OE terminal is grounded to enable output at all times. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, output is not permitted.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and the operating mode can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) - a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal - and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) - a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal - based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is the normal operating mode. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, which are three video signals (18-bit video signals) of red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) of horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, are abnormal data for some reason and are difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the handshake mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the satisfaction. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the connection between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, that are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) that are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, as described below. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. The D0 to D5 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. The D6 to D11 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the performance display drive board 4450, and the door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Figure 89, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by a description of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and a description of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "CR machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents hexadecimal), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), command 30H is provided as a common command for CR machines and general machines, and this command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after sending the command, the sending side sends command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal has been input to confirm the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating a variation of the presentation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into those related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, those related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, those related to big wins, power-on, those related to regular chart synchronization effects, those related to regular electric role effects, notification displays, status displays, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special symbol 1 synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 1 synchronization performance, and the variable time state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving state are composed of a low probability time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a time-saving state, a low probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting a jackpot is set higher than in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state is, for example, a state in which the time for which the normal pattern display 1402 shown in FIG. 66 displays the normal pattern in a variable manner is shortened compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and the normal pattern display is stopped in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, thereby increasing the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped in a predetermined time period by the normal lottery described later compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, This is a state in which the period during which the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed is longer than in the non-time-saving state (normal game state), thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60, thereby providing an opportunity to win a special pattern without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, there are more decisions to make as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, the period for the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is longer, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 1 synchronization start command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation starts, the special pattern 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 1 synchronization start, the special pattern 1 synchronization end command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when special pattern 1 is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 2", and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance" related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 2 synchronization performance.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special pattern 2 starts to change, the special pattern 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization performance starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special pattern 2 change time has elapsed (when special pattern 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
The "jackpot-related" category, as shown in Figure 89, is made up of commands named "jackpot opening", "Nth large prize slot 1 open display", "large prize slot 1 closed display", "large prize slot 1 count display", "jackpot ending", "jackpot pattern display", "small prize opening", "small prize open display", "small prize count display", and "small prize ending". These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display command for opening the jackpot 1 Nth time instructs the start of opening the 1st to 16th rounds of the jackpot 1 (the jackpot 2005 of the starter unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60 is opening or has started to open in the Nth round), the display command for closing the 1st closes ... open (the number of balls that entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the display command for the jackpot pattern instructs the display of the jackpot pattern information.

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is open or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large winning port winning presentation during a small win (the presentation when a game ball that has entered the large winning port 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, the Nth opening large prize opening command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened in the Nth round), the closing large prize opening 1 display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is closed (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 starts to close), the large prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large prize opening 1 (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening starts, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large winning port during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large winning port 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power On]
The power-on category consists of commands named "power-on state" and "power-on main control return destination," as shown in FIG. 89. These various commands include the status "D*H " and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1). (This was done).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state. The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to perform RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that indicates which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type, specifies which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it is (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the information of the model code of a pachinko machine is mainly composed of a series code that specifies which type it is, among the max type, middle type, and sweet type that indicate the model type, a copyright code that specifies the copyright of the work, and a game specification code that specifies the game specification (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on and when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-5. General-purpose synchronous performance related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start normal symbol synchronization performance", "Specify normal symbol", "End normal symbol synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization start command instructs the start of the normal pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode, the normal pattern designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal pattern synchronization end command instructs the end of the normal pattern synchronization performance, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As described above, the probability and time-saving state consists of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal pattern synchronization start command is sent when normal pattern 1 starts to change, the normal pattern designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern synchronization start, the normal pattern synchronization end command is sent when the normal pattern change time has elapsed (when the normal pattern is confirmed), and the change time state designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern win/lose information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related relates to a pair of movable pieces of the second starting hole 2004 shown in Fig. 60, which is opened and closed by the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and this section is composed of commands named "normal winning opening", "normal power opening display", and "normal winning ending", as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power release display command instructs the start of normal power release (when the pair of movable pieces are in a state where they have been opened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when they are about to open), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when the normal map opening starts, the normal power release display command is sent when the normal power is released (when the pair of movable pieces open left and right due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the notification display categories are made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality notification when a ball enters the large winning port other than during a jackpot (when the condition device is operating) (when a game ball enters the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 and the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball even when there is no jackpot), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, for example, the open circuit/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a open circuit/short circuit abnormality display when there is an electrical connection break or short circuit between the main control board 1310 and the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc., for example, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. In addition, if an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command is sent to instruct the start of a vibration detection switch abnormality notification.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs the end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs the end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a big prize is won in the big prize winning port other than during a big win (when the condition device is operating), the connection abnormality display command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is sent when any of the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. is disconnected or shorted, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. In addition, the door open command is sent when the door is opened (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door frame close command is sent when the door is closed (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the status display is made up of commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Clear Navigation Command (corresponding to the error clear command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command are each commands with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) sent from the dispensing control board 951, and a detailed description of these will be given later. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode as is. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to these received commands, thereby forming them into commands with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame State 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when error clear navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clear navigation is performed, and the Frame State 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted Frame State 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame State 2 command are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test" as shown in Fig. 90. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" represents a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the main control board is powered on, the RAM is cleared, and at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Fig. 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Variation shortening operation end designation", "High probability end designation", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start hole entry command instructs the start of the start hole entry presentation, and instructs the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, and the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, respectively. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and is a high probability end designation. The fixed command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 shown in FIG. 60), and the special symbol 2 memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60). The special symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved normal symbols (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbols 1 that have not yet been used to display the changing normal symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. This command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the changing patterns, and the special pattern 2 storage look-ahead performance command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the changing special patterns on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

Regarding the timing of sending these various commands, the start hole entry command is sent from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the start hole (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) to notify the fact mainly by voice, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed). The fixed command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability count in the case of "high probability N times" is consumed and the fluctuation is confirmed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The pattern 2 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). The normal pattern memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal pattern 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the normal pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). When there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the normal pattern variation in 402, and the reserved number increases when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, or when the reserved number is used to display the normal pattern variation in the normal pattern display 1402 and the reserved number decreases), the special pattern 1 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 activation increases (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases), and the special pattern 2 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation increases (when a game ball enters the second start hole 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As described above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the player of the start hole entry (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) by voice, but how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the command is also used to monitor for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In contrast, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command, and does not notify the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the classification of various commands from the dispensing control board 951 consists of commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2, and the priority is set in the order of Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (corresponding to the error command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection abnormality, and CR not connected; for out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to value 1, for full, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1, for 50 or more bulbs in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, for connection abnormality, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1, and for CR not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to value 1, B6 set to value 0, and B7 set to value 0.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) is prepared for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. "Retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been performed repeatedly by the retry operation. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command has a "ball removed" status, during which a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have the following settings: B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and B7 has a value of 0.

These various commands are sent with the following timing: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed; Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 92 to 94. Fig. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a reach determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (reach miss) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number used to determine the first special pattern display when a jackpot game state is generated. The following random numbers are provided: a jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405; a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot pattern random number; a small win pattern random number for use in determining the small win pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated; and a small win pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small win pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 shown in Figure 60, random numbers for determining an initial value for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece, and random numbers for determining a normal pattern winning pattern, which are used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece, and random numbers for determining a normal pattern variable display pattern, which are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for determining a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Fig. 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Fig. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This type of high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 in the main control side power-on processing described later does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), etc., the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit executes an ID code derivation process to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit judgment will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped with other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if momentary interruptions are generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 at the predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece of the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60 to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when ending a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a new item is added to the stack.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Fig. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will be started again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then starting the timekeeping again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, first, the power outage clear signal is output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. When no power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic of this comparison result becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power outage clear process, the power outage clear signal is first output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, which starts outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Next, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, and a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage after power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power outage warning signal.

If, after power-on, the voltage becomes greater than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and input to its preset terminal, the PR terminal, the D-type flip-flop outputs the power outage warning signal from the output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (game side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program performs this determination based on whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 is not operated, judging that it does not instruct to perform RAM clearing, whereas when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that the operation switch 954 is operated, judging that it instructs to perform RAM clearing.

In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the program waits until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 starts up (boots up). In this embodiment, the wait time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When the power outage warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be provided later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when game information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). If they match, the main control program judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after production for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cut processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of the fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. to change as various subsequent processes are performed. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is present, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and allow transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Fig. 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and sets the startup of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. A detailed explanation of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, when the main control side main processing has begun, the main control program will regulate the execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt of an error clear navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to handle the detection signal input in association with the operation of the operation switch 954, and executes the RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the error clear navigation command for a predetermined time from power-on as described above (game control side power-on operation control means), and regulates the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error clear navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (game control side normal operation control means), treating it as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error clearing section), which would normally be used to clear an error that occurs during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation section for executing a RAM clear process to start the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as the payout memory section, described later) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on, or as an operation section for clearing an error that occurs during the payout operation of the game balls after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

The main control program then determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern hit determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as the process in which the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals output to the start port solenoid 2107, the attacca solenoid 2108, the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the normal pattern memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a prohibition on access to the RAM (step S68). This prohibition on access to the RAM makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby making it possible to prevent updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and performs main control power-on processing when power is subsequently restored.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts timing the standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before reaching that standby time, a charge of +5 V stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on processing will begin again when power is restored.

If this is the case, when power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28 is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, there is a problem that when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall staff member or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the hall staff member or the like to clear the RAM.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed and the game information can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step 24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power failure process consisting of the process of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup process for storing information, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the value calculated and stored for the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms determined by hardware, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process upon power recovery, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then the process in step S24 immediately follows the wait time standby process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and when a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using such software, it is possible to prevent the progress to the step after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), thereby avoiding the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the system is divided into two parts: a software part that ensures that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and a hardware part that ensures that the main control's power cut processing is completed reliably and that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. By configuring the system in two ways, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (e.g., a jackpot game presentation screen) in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60, and the main control board 1310 drives the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 by the opening/closing member 2005a, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and thus when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but cannot display at all which round of the large prize game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2005a (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2005a to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable pieces are being opened) on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, and the main control board 1310 is driving the starting hole solenoid 2107 to open the pair of movable pieces of the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60 to the left and right, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 is started, and the pair of movable pieces transition from a state in which they are approximately vertically standing to a state in which they are opened to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which a game ball could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which a game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, a screen instructing the game to be played (i.e., a screen instructing the game to put a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to the state where the attacca solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is transitioned from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a to an open state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big win game state (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing that it is a big win game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the big win opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member 2005a (for example, a screen saying "It's a big win. The big win opening is open. Please enter the game ball into the big win opening"). Please play your game.") can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received by the second start opening 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 can return to the main control board 1310. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 informing the player that the start port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces have been opened to the left and right (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are being opened. Please play so that the game ball enters the open start port."), and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball enters the second start port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored. Therefore, after power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout can be quickly restored. In other words, it is possible to prevent a player seated in front of the pachinko machine from mistaking the system of the pachinko machine for a malfunction, as appearing to be frozen when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As described above, the power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, there are game specifications in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when the main control boards 1310 are manufactured, main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may be mixed together.
As a result, workers on the production line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or they may mistakenly believe or believe that even though the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), it is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line cannot confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the manufacturing line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they cannot confirm which model type (max type, middle type, sweet type) and what game specifications (game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, or ST machine) are. As a result, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, and it will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, there were cases where workers on the game board assembly line attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on status command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are created in step S50 and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed (such as an ST machine), in addition to the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (one of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specification it is (such as a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can send the main control boards 1310 for each copyright of the work to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time of the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs the payout control board 951 that various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) have been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 60, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60. The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 60, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the fraudulent act using a magnet, the vibration sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the fraudulent act of giving vibration to the gaming machine, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69, which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, are read, and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Also, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, which detects the game ball that has entered the first start hole 2002, and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, which detects the game ball that has entered the second start hole 2004, are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as others shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the general winning port 2001, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects the game ball that entered the big winning port 2005, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting port 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that passed through the gate section 2003 are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read the second time is compared with the result read the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result read the third time is compared with the result read the second time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result read this time is compared with the result read the third time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, by performing a double reading that compares the detection signals from the first to third times, and then a double reading that compares the detection signals from the second to fourth times, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and thus improving the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a random number update process (step S106). In this random number update process, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the small win symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the random numbers for the small win symbol are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined is updated by this random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 is created for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a self-check command shown in FIG. 88 is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 60, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this, and the output information is stored in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified period of time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and is sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the excess number is added to the number of game balls that will be paid out as prize balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area in the next prize ball control process, and when the added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the user of this fact, and the information is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in Fig. 91 (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command). On the other hand, as described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information to that effect to the payout control board 951 as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control program also formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status displays in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the winning ball is confirmed. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created as an abnormal state, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is judged whether the random number for jackpot judgment (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a jackpot game state is generated (called a "special lottery").), or it is judged whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot symbols matches the probability hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability fluctuation) that is set higher than normal (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) described above, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set for low probability and is read from the normal judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value 32767 is set for high probability and is read from the probability fluctuation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric device control process in step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done based on whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are due to the first start hole sensor 4002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created, whereas if the lottery result is due to the second start hole sensor 4004, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth opening of large prize opening 1, command to display closing of large prize opening 1, command to display count of large prize opening 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 is set to open and close the opening/closing member 2005a of the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is determined. When the number of rounds is two, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a shown in FIG. 66 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is fifteen, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b shown in FIG. 66 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. The output of a lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set to light up the presence or absence of a probability fluctuation in a predetermined color, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric role control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric role control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd sections (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. For example, if gate information is stored in 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 3rd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 3rd section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 2nd section of the gate information storage and the 3rd section of the gate information storage become an empty area. Here, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 3rd section of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the RAM built into the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been hit is extracted from the gate information read out to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable pieces. If this decision is made to open or close the movable pieces are opened in the left and right directions, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal pattern variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal pattern variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal pattern synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal pattern display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal pattern display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been received normally, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2005a of the large winning opening 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize opening count command based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering a large prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other are stored. The main circuit serial data is configured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 can at least transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, so that the power-on state command is transmitted as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is first completed, and then the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91 and which it has received from the payout control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error clear navigation command (first error clear command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error clear navigation command (second error clear command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame open command (first main frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame open command (second main frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame close command (first main frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame close command (second main frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 90.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91 and received from the dispensing control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.In the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, or in other words, in a frozen state, which prevents the player from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50 of the same process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control units]
[16-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on process starts, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and a process of setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is able to receive various commands, such as commands regarding the control of game presentations and commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command receiving interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. The performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank0 (1fr) and Bank1 (1fr) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the performance backup information (1fr) stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to perform a hot start, whereas if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is compared with the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db, and the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, to perform a hot start, whereas when the compared contents do not match (i.e., when they are inconsistent), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and are set in the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting and lighting the brightness of the backlight of the performance display device 1600 on the game board side so that it becomes the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, no correction similar to the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600 described above is performed. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it is possible to accept screen data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0. In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (it is equal to the value 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 is created and set in the lamp data creation processing described later in the lamp data creation processing described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers and writes the data SL-DAT one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In addition, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created and set in the lamp data creation process described below in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side light emission data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a process to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410. In this process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below monitors whether the operation of the operation button 410 is performed and appropriately determines whether the operation of the operation button 410 is reflected in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, this allows for a mechanism that prioritizes synchronization between the effects of the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects of music and sound effects, etc., that are in sync with the various effects, as performed by the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2, as performed by the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data of notification sounds and announcement sounds in addition to music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds to be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be used as the light emission mode for each type of LED.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data such as alarm sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forces it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a pattern synchronization performance start command for instructing the start of a pattern synchronization performance, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output every time a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005, or a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) showing the content of full tank shown in Fig. 90 (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the performance control program analyzes whether the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and in the reception command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include the various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89, the various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to big wins, the various commands classified as power-on, the various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, the various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, and main body frame close command, as well as the various commands classified as status display such as the error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), the various commands classified as test-related, and the various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above include various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and automatically transitions to other remaining abnormality notifications after the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred because another anomaly occurs after the first anomaly has occurred but before the first anomaly has been resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90, such as the error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal performance manner associated with the performance operation, for example, a visual warning is given to the outside using the game board side performance display device 1600 (performance device), the door frame side performance display device 460 (performance device), or a lamp (performance device), or an auditory warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, which prevents fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RCT acquisition information update process updates the time information (hour, minute, second) stored in the time information storage unit, and updates the calendar information (year, month, day) stored in the calendar information storage unit based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the presentation control program performs a look-ahead presentation control process (step S1027). The look-ahead presentation control process executes processing related to the look-ahead presentation based on the presentation command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special pattern 1 memory look-ahead presentation command or a special pattern 2 memory look-ahead presentation command (hereinafter, "look-ahead presentation command") is received, settings are made to execute the look-ahead presentation. Details of the look-ahead presentation control process will be described later.

The look-ahead performance command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004. In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the look-ahead performance command, a look-ahead performance execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the look-ahead performance control process, if the look-ahead performance execution flag is set, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance based on the contents of the look-ahead performance command. In other words, in this embodiment, even if a look-ahead performance command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 decides whether or not to actually execute the look-ahead performance.

When the look-ahead performance is executed, the mode of the reserved display of the start memory is changed as the look-ahead performance (normal look-ahead performance). Furthermore, after the normal look-ahead performance is executed, if a specified condition is met, a continuous look-ahead performance is executed in which the mode of the reserved display is changed each time a start memory for which a variable display is executed in advance is consumed. In the look-ahead performance control process, a process for executing the normal look-ahead performance is performed, and it is also determined whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead performance. The specified condition may be, for example, when the number of unconsumed start memories is equal to or greater than a certain number, or when there is a high expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be looked-ahead will be a jackpot.

The content of the pre-reading performance may not only change the display mode of the start memory, but may also include display performance on the door frame side performance display device 460, such as displaying characters or changing the background, lighting up lamps, audio output from speakers, and movement of movable objects.

Following step S1027, the performance control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the performance control program extracts game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is indicated by the light emission data arranged in chronological order and constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, after the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. The data is extracted and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started each time the sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall staff member or the like from being difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and also copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition record included in Bank 0 (1fr) that is the backup target are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as performance backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies it to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

In the backup process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the rear 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to a value of 0, and repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038, and returns to step S1006 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing starts with the performance control program first setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is being executed, then in step S1010, it executes the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, and in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, it finally completes in step S1038 when it sets the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it can accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Fig. 72. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 judges whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 as shown in Fig. 96 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to the value 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) of FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 95, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process as the interrupt process priority, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1 (step S1102). By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed, is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive process, DMA serial continuous transmission process is performed to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches, and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a production operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are being input from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition memory The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the area 1511cah and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb, and then quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in succession, starting from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the last address of Bank0 (1 ms) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a takes this as a trigger to capture 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a into a reception buffer, and when this capture is completed, an interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1202), and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been retrieved from the reception buffer, and when the first byte of the main serial data, the status, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 1, when the second byte of the main serial data, the mode, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the main serial data, the sum value, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status, which is the first byte of the main loop serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already taken out of the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning and stores it. When storing the received main loop serial data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the main loop serial data in association with the mode assigned as the second byte, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 75 will be described, which is executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If it is determined that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1320 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. If 2 microseconds have not passed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine ends. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

When the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving process is performed (step S1306). This power saving process reduces the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 by sequentially turning off the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, turning off the excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, etc., thereby ensuring stable operation for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby processing, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the processing waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then copies the contents at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb is copied in order from the top address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the top address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the top address of the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence, starting from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, the process continues to determine indefinitely whether the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a cannot output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal is interrupted to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a description will be given of the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data.Specifically, this signal is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 reads out LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data and determines that a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) is being requested to be sent to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data) and determines that there is no request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 0 (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, making it possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection malfunction determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process will be described which is executed as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 reads out the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Fig. 73 as shown in Fig. 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the upper four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is judged that there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been judged that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in the judgment of step S1522 each time this routine is executed. In addition, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, whereas when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process will be described as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure judgment process shown in Fig. 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while notifying that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 judges whether the screen generation schedule data is being started among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 (step S1540). In this judgment, in the scheduler update process, it is judged whether the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is being started, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is not started. In addition, this judgment can be made based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether or not the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, and if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, whereas if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600 (when the game machine is simply waiting for customers), the routine is ended as is.

When the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation in step S1540, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is running, this routine is terminated as it is, whereas when the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation in step S1540 and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not running, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times that it is determined that a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. In this determination, it is determined whether the number of times that it has been determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred at least once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the flag is set to 1, and when the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the flag is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to inform the player that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 is performed. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and outputs LOCKN signal output request data to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, and performs processing to display an alert image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store clerk.") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to that effect, and performs processing to repeatedly play an alert sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device.") from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to light up all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be explained using the timing chart in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 60, or the first special lottery result shown in FIG. 60, is executed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, etc. If the result of the second special lottery drawn by the reception of a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is repeated will be 15 rounds in total, from round 1 to round 15. In each round, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), the round is completed, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

Based on a command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start the varying display of the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the central decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is stopped, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the central decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right side decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if a reel is spinning, and when the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become opaque so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or the second special pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops to be displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops to be displayed on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, so that, as shown in FIG. 103, when the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, so the schedule data for screen generation is running, and while the schedule data for screen generation is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts to when they stop being displayed, in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is, as determined in step S1540 in this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until it stops, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is The process to recover the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store staff member" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in a variable manner and stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started. While the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter If it has not been determined even once that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the accumulated number of times it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, where the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, where the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. While processing to restore the connection is performed, if the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (i.e., there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, for example, a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store employee" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled.

During the interval period in which the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts and stops displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern, and then starts displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and if there has been a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to, for example, display a message in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 saying, "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store employee." to notify the user.

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the schedule data for screen generation is running, during the period until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output of step S1546 in the connection recovery process No power processing is performed, no processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and until the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is enabled, whereas during the interval when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the combination results of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 are the information of most interest to the player, and the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state that will give the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, even if the image of the performance displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 becomes distorted due to the influence of noise and cannot be displayed correctly until the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner, the performance is not interrupted midway and a process is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, completing the display of the information that the player is most interested in.

In this respect, it is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for customers. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two signals it receives are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is different, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the performance display device on the door frame side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the performance display device on the door frame side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCK terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can notify the hall staff, etc., of the malfunction by executing the notification process, so that the hall staff, etc. can check very easily whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be detected without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, when the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input can eliminate the communication failure between the image communications by outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) will be started to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side performance display device 460, is unable to properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the performance control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to generate a message saying "A failure has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and notifying the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member or directly notify a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff member can begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which indicates that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing the progress of the game by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 for eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to vary the first special pattern or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and starts the game progress again, the connection confirmation signal is stopped from being output, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and is able to output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying and stops the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game progress. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and the game is not being played, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 and starts the game again, the distortion of the performance (image distortion) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (each time the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2 occurs).

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with the payout control MPU 952a of FIG. 70, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command of FIG. 88 (a) and (b), which is a payout command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM is designed to store information related to the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM is capable of storing information related to payouts even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 in Fig. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92 is performed, it outputs a RAM clear signal in Fig. 77 for erasing information related to the game stored in the main control built-in RAM to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs a RWMCLR signal in Fig. 82 to the payout control microprocessor It also has a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830, when it is operated after the period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 has elapsed (or the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed), without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; When operated after the period from power-on to when the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to when the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the performance display device 1600 (display images such as designs, various background images, letters, characters, etc.) and the display mode and operation mode of various components that contribute to the performance (performance operation unit 400, movable components, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start port winning process is performed. In this first and second start port winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball has won a start port, and when it is determined that a winning has occurred, a process is performed to increase the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1.

When the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 0, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is consumed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, and then the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 1, a variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (such as the variation time from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops) and the stop pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device are determined and set based on the stored jackpot determination result and the current game state, and then the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 2, the during-fluctuation processing is executed. In this during-fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device is stopped when the timer times out. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game mode (e.g., the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2005a is controlled based on this. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a special state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the variable start processing.

Note that, as the variation pattern, multiple types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the pattern variation of the special pattern, and the type of the performance pattern that appears in the performance display device 1600 can be determined by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, the multiple types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for a jackpot variation, a variation pattern for a miss-reach variation, and a variation pattern for a miss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the jackpot pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and it is determined that a reach will be performed by the reach judgment based on the reach random number, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the miss pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and the reach judgment based on the reach random number does not determine that a reach should be made, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the decorative pattern variation display is ultimately developed to display the miss pattern as a confirmed stop without going through the reach performance. Also, the variation pattern is specified so that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side.

In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to this information to make it possible for such decorative pattern variation patterns to appear. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 not only makes the decorative pattern variation patterns appear on the performance display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, but also executes control to change the performance display (background and reserved image) related to the expectation level, change the state (display and movement) in the performance operation unit 400, and operate movable members such as the rear-down movable performance unit 3100.

The peripheral control board 1510 can also obtain operation information for the operation buttons 410 and operation information of the player near the opening window, and can execute control related to the presentation in accordance with this information.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start hole passing processing such as obtaining a first jackpot determination random number from the random number counter and storing this in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5232), provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. In addition, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), a second special random number for the second special symbol (random number for determining a second big win) is obtained from the random number counter and a second start hole passing process is executed, such as storing this in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in a jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the big win control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R sure jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot", control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and an opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a state suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to enter a 16R jackpot game state.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates an "8R sure-win B", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and then the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to enter an 8R big win game state.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode suggesting a "2R normal jackpot", the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than left-handed hits, as described above, and in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed, left-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than right-handed hits. In this regard, in the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special pattern in response to the reception of the game ball in the first starting hole 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot game state (approximately 1,000 game balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of the winning type) of entering a long-open jackpot game state of 16 rounds (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Since the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is high, when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it is expected that a larger number of prize balls will be won than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, when starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, first, a process is performed to start the operation of the condition device, a process to reset the fluctuation count counter described below, and so on.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the process of setting the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is executed according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating that a high probability state is being established, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109 described below. It is set when the jackpot game state based on a jackpot controlled by a special probability (8R special probability jackpot A, 16R special probability jackpot, 8R special probability jackpot B) ends after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special pattern stop process shown in FIG. 114 described below or the second special pattern stop process not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is being executed (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is time-saving controlled (high probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the next jackpot occurs. Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are consumed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the low probability time-saving state occurs.

The change count counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the change count counter was reset, and is used in the first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) is started.

If the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step S5236 is to determine whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set as a result, a small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. Note that in the small win control process, a process is performed to open the big win opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big win opening 2005 is performed, the various set processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

In addition, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S5238).

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be performed continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can perform the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random number continuously and uninterruptedly by simply maintaining the ball hitting (right hit) to the right side of the center device 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state).

Note that the special symbol game (symbol change) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol), and for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol from the stored data.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the processing of step S5231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in a first special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, the first special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the first special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the first special pattern. In this first special pattern pre-reading process, information required for the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, etc. (information on winning or losing for pre-reading judgment, information on the pattern type for pre-reading judgment, information on the variable pattern number for pre-reading judgment, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the first special pattern itself, information on the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group of the variable pattern types, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, the second special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the second special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the second special pattern. In this second special pattern pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (win/lose information, pattern type, variable pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, and stores it in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the second special pattern itself, information regarding the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of big win game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group among the variable patterns, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly reserved.

When the reserved number of first special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the reserved number of second special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) in which a random number for determining a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for determining a jackpot.

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped is determined based on the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special pattern on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the display of the first special symbol change on the first special symbol display 1403 stops (step S5283)

5. A first special pattern stop process (step S5284) that stops the display of the first special pattern so that the display mode of the first special pattern when the control of the first special pattern is stopped is displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 in the mode determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the control of the first special pattern is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not there is a change display of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S5301. If it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for first jackpot symbol, the random number for first change display pattern) is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot pattern, and the random number for the first variable display pattern), are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserved memory area a to first special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the first start port 2002 are stored in the first (first) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the reservation of the variable display of the first special symbol occurred is stored in a specific order, and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserved memory area a to second special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the second start port 2004 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the second special symbol variable display reservations occurred is stored in a identifiable manner, and the reservations of the variable display are released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the first jackpot determination random number that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the ROM built into the main control, and for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number), there is a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately "1 in 321"). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric role control process, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In addition, the jackpot determination values (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values are different (same jackpot probability), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (different jackpot probability)) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different, in which case it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination processing.

Also, if it is determined in step S5315 that the player has not won the jackpot, a determination is made as to whether the read random number for jackpot determination matches the small jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won a small jackpot based on the selected jackpot determination table (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) in this example, a random number for jackpot determination that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317, it is determined that the player has not won a small jackpot (determined to have missed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a reach judgment table for a high probability non-time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state, a reach judgment table for a high probability time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for a low probability state used when the game state is in a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, the above-mentioned reach judgment random numbers are associated so that one type of reach judgment random number matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach judgment random numbers match reach judgment values indicating no reach. However, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers may match reach judgment values indicating no reach, and may not match reach judgment values indicating a reach.

In addition, in the reach judgment table for the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers, including the same reach judgment random numbers as those set in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with the reach judgment values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach judgment random numbers are associated with reach judgment values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach judgment value indicating a reach will occur is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high probability time-saving state and the low probability state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating no reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating a reach will occur is the same as in the low probability non-time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5120) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the random number for reach judgment read in step S5302 (step S5319), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S5121).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the pattern determination table on the first special pattern side stores random numbers for the first jackpot pattern (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot pattern) in association with the judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). As shown in FIG. 110(C), the pattern determination table on the second special pattern side stores random numbers for the second jackpot pattern (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot pattern) in association with the judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot pattern. In the pattern determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern are set to be different. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the special jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is the same, but the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern is greater than the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern.

The specific gameplay and presentation for each type of jackpot can be summarized briefly as follows:

1. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 8R big win game state, the game is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) is performed in which a specific character wins, and the game board side performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode that shows that the high probability time-saving state is a relatively advantageous state. 8R sure-win big win A

2. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 8R big win game state, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variation display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the game board side performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 8R normal big win

3. After the big win symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to control the game state to a 16R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 16R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (success performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since being controlled to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which a relatively advantageous state is indicated on the game board side performance display device 1600. 16R sure-win

4. After the big win symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 8R big win game state, the game is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (failure performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since being controlled to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the game is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R sure-win B

5. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated twice to control the game to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the big win opening 2005. After this 2R big win game state, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until 100 times are consumed), and during the execution period of the 2R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the game board side performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 2R normal big win

In addition, in the above-mentioned left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting hole 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and only the variable display of the first special pattern is executed on the first special pattern display 1403 except when there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R sure-win jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the above-mentioned right-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 occurs, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 is executed, and a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occurs.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2005 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 8 times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2005 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot A, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R regular jackpot, and if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R regular jackpot. Also, although not shown, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 16R special jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 16R special jackpot, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot B, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R special jackpot B, and if the second special symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 2R regular jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 2R regular jackpot.

If the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop mode) is determined as the mode when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the determination process for the stopping symbols has been performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the lottery results (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of stopping symbol of the first special symbol)) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S5337. Then, as the process of step S5338, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, center, and right decorative patterns and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and stopped and displayed simultaneously)). For example, when a type other than a 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, center, and right decorative patterns. In contrast, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, center, and right decorative patterns is not the same as the other patterns) is determined. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different). The stopped pattern thus determined is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a display showing the winning effect (special display mode) before the jackpot game starts, and displays a display showing the jackpot game after the jackpot game starts.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the big win flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small win flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small win is selected (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of the reach is selected (step S5346); if none of the big win flag, small win flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of the miss (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 is started (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this process is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol variation display control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the performance control is performed on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this example, multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers for jackpot patterns (first jackpot pattern random number, second jackpot pattern random number). In addition, the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table are stored in a form associated with each of the random numbers for the first fluctuation display pattern, with multiple fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for controlling the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the random number for jackpot judgment and the random number for jackpot pattern with the random number for the variable display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains from this table the variation time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out, thereby determining the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows the judgment processing to be performed on the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, since a small win will not be won, the variation pattern table for a small win will not be used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it may be possible to win a small win.

In addition, in the variable display pattern table during reach in this example, the type of reach performance to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach performances will be executed, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach performances with low jackpot expectation will be executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach performances with high jackpot expectation will be executed.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher chance of winning than the normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state increases when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, such a Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, which makes it possible to increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state, it is necessary for a highly anticipated preview effect, which is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special pattern, a variation time of 12 seconds is set in common to the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special pattern, a variation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds can be set for the time-saving state, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special pattern is set to be the same during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state, and during the variation of the first special pattern in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it is possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is received from this area by the gate section 2003 during a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state), a win as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, the probability of winning is 100%), and the movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting hole 2004 is maintained in an open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, even in a situation where balls can be continuously received by the second starting hole 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all game balls hit to the right of the center role 2500 can be received by the second starting hole 2004), control can be executed so that the lottery on the second special pattern side can be consumed one after another with a high probability of winning (probability in a high-probability state) of approximately "1 in 32" each time the game ball is received.

In this example, since the game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), the second starting port 2004 often receives game balls at 0.6 second intervals. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state) can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds when the second special pattern is not obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. In other words, in this case, when a miss is obtained, the pattern variation ends in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the launch interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, so that even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S5282) is set as the process of step S5371. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite having been decremented by 1 (step S5371), the above steps S5371 and S5372 will be executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the pattern is reached).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop process (step S5284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display device 1403 as the process of step S5381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is to start (step S5387), and sets the waiting time until the jackpot game state starts (the time to display the jackpot game state to start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed, and resets the high probability flag if the high probability flag is set, and resets the time-saving flag if the time-saving flag is set (step S5389), and further resets the fluctuation counter, and updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), at which point this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing described above (step S5240a).

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) corresponding to the type of jackpot specified by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability time-saving state (step S5390). Then, when the game is in a low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state has been met, and the time-saving function is stopped and the game is switched to a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time-saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating that the small win game state is started is set (step S5394), and the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time to display the fact that the small win game state is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that the small win game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and when the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special pattern normal processing, which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small win execution flag is set in the processing of the above step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the above-mentioned small win control processing (step S5240b). By the way, unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this type of small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is determined to be a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), and this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big win in progress flag or the small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) is performed according to the pending status (steps S5237 to S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining a normal random number for a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing this in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Regular symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the regular symbol variation display on the regular symbol display device 1402 is stopped
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal symbol win", the above-mentioned movable piece is opened to execute a process for controlling the second starting hole 2004 to be able to receive a game ball (step S5407).

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passing process (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to set the variable display control of the normal symbols to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter as the processing of step S5421. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (e.g., normal random number, normal variable random number) stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols was reserved to be specified, and the reservations of the variable display control are released in order starting from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during time-saving (step S5426), and if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S5427), and compares the selected normal winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal processing of the normal pattern (step S5428).

The normal winning judgment table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes a time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is in time-saving (high probability time-saving state), and a non-time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is not in time-saving (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). In the time-saving normal winning judgment table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has been won, and do not match the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has been won. In this way, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 during time-saving, a normal winning is always won, and the movable piece is opened to allow the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than in non-time-saving mode may match the normal win determination value, which indicates that a normal win has been won.

In addition, in the normal random number hit judgment table during non-time-saving, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all of the 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal random number hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number has been won, and the normal random number is associated with the normal random number miss judgment value indicating that the normal random number has been lost. In this way, during non-time-saving, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal random number will not be won, so the pair of movable pieces will not be in an open state and will not control the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004. However, as described above, a normal pattern hit may be obtained even in the non-time-saving state, and in this case, the winning probability may be set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 may be opened for a time shorter than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again to disable the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the normal symbol is a winning symbol as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429), it sets a normal symbol winning flag indicating that the corresponding variation has won a normal symbol (step S5430), and then determines the normal symbol winning symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5431). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the normal symbol is a losing symbol as a mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing, it determines the normal symbol losing symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands sent from the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the game situation at each stage within the peripheral control unit routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)) and execute presentations according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start winning situation has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects according to the start winning situation. Then, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, it executes one of the following: waiting for a change pattern designation command to be received, effect pattern change start processing, effect pattern change in progress processing, effect pattern change stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game in progress processing, and jackpot end effect processing.

Waiting for reception of a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, control is performed regarding the presentation (demo presentation, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and control regarding a jackpot is not being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the presentation pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance contents (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decorative pattern change is controlled to start based on the determined performance contents. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the performance pattern change processing.

Processing during pattern change: This performs control to start the various performance contents determined in the pattern change start processing at the respective timing during the pattern change period, and updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the pattern change stop processing when the change time ends.

Performs control to stop the change in decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stopped pattern) based on the reception of a command (pattern determination command) that instructs the user to stop all patterns. If the decorative pattern is to stop at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to stop at a losing pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the reception of a change pattern specification command.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the presentation (such as the display presentation that notifies the presentation display device 1600 of the occurrence of a jackpot) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops on the jackpot pattern to when the jackpot game starts. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the jackpot game.

Processing during jackpot play: Controls various effects during the jackpot play state. When the jackpot play state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end presentation processing: In the presentation display device 1600, the presentation (such as a display presentation that notifies the player that the jackpot play state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot play state to the transition to the change-permitted state is controlled. The value of the process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for reception of a change pattern specification command.

Here, we will explain how to control the pre-reading and timer effects that are executed when the starting win occurs.

When a game ball enters a start winning hole, the main control board 1310 executes the first start hole passing process (Fig. 105) or the second start hole passing process (Fig. 106) according to the start hole that entered the start winning hole, and extracts (obtains) a random number value as a start memory (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255), a special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command or a special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command (see Fig. 90, hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol pre-reading performance command") is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255).

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special chart pre-reading performance command, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (Figure 98). The received command is then analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 95).

When a special chart look-ahead performance command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes look-ahead performance control processing in the received command analysis processing. In the look-ahead performance control processing, processing for executing a normal look-ahead performance that changes the starting memory display and processing for executing the timer performance and background performance described above are executed. Note that the look-ahead performance control processing may set a flag indicating that a look-ahead performance command has been received in the received command analysis processing, and may be called in the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 95).

In the process for executing the normal look-ahead performance that changes the start memory display, a lottery is held based on the special pattern look-ahead performance command, and the state of the changed start memory display is selected based on the result of the lottery. At this time, the state of the start memory display may be changed only when the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern look-ahead performance command transitions to a reach state. The state of the start memory display may be changed, for example, in color or shape. Then, a normal look-ahead performance setting process is executed to change the state of the start memory display. In the normal look-ahead performance setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the start memory display, and settings are made to output sound effects, turn on lamps, or move role objects at the timing of the change. The process for executing timer performance and background performance will be described later.

The timer effect is a pre-indication effect that uses a countdown display to indicate that the time to execute an indication effect that suggests the lottery result or the possibility of winning for a specific start memory is approaching. There are two main types of timer effects: a timer effect that spans multiple variations (hereinafter referred to as a pre-indication timer effect) that is controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects and that counts down the period from before the variable display for a specific start memory begins to the specified timing of the variable display for the specific start memory, and a timer effect that does not span multiple variations (hereinafter referred to as an intra-variation timer effect) that is controlled based on a variation pattern, unlike the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and that counts down the period from a specified timing after the variable display for a specific start memory begins to another timing of the variable display for this specific start memory. In other words, the look-ahead timer effect and the within-variation timer effect are both advance notification effects in which the pattern change for a specific start memory has not been completed, and are common in that a countdown is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and a specified effect is performed when the count display reaches 0. However, the look-ahead timer effect differs from the within-variation timer effect in that the countdown display is performed on the display screen over multiple pattern changes. Also, while various values may be set as the initial value for the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the within-variation timer effect, the average value of the initial value used in the look-ahead timer effect is relatively larger than the average value of the initial value used in the within-variation timer effect, since it spans multiple changes. In this embodiment, since it includes elements that are characteristic of the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the look-ahead timer performance, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer performance. Since the look-ahead timer performance is a look-ahead performance that can be executed across multiple variations as described above, it is determined whether sufficient time is secured to execute the look-ahead timer performance before the variation display corresponding to the received special chart look-ahead performance command begins. In other words, it is determined whether the total variation time of all start memories reserved until the variation begins is a specific time or more (40 seconds or more in this embodiment). Furthermore, based on the result of the selection or loss of the start memory to be executed as the performance execution target and the variation pattern of the start memory, the performance content is determined along with whether or not the look-ahead timer performance can be executed. In addition, when the performance content is determined, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is also determined. The execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is set to, for example, the start of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead performance target, the start of the reach of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead performance target, or the end of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead performance target.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer counting effect that displays a countdown, and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are executed consecutively. In addition, the execution time of the timer counting effect, i.e., the execution timing of the timer end effect, differs depending on the length of the timer counting effect, but is during fluctuations relative to the start memory that is the subject of the look-ahead, and can occur at a variety of times, such as before or after the reach occurs.

When the execution of the look-ahead timer performance is decided, first, the execution time of the timer counting performance is decided. The execution time of the timer counting performance is decided based on the time from the start winning to the start of the change corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead performance target. For example, in this embodiment, a predetermined time calculated by adding 10 seconds to the total change time of the start memory reserved before the start memory of the look-ahead performance target and subtracting the time based on the timing set as the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is set as the execution time of the timer counting performance (initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the content of the performance to be executed as the timer counting performance (countdown performance pattern) is set. Examples of countdown performance patterns include, for example, pattern 1 in which the light emission mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 gradually changes to high-speed flashing as the countdown display progresses, pattern 2 in which the light emission color of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 changes as the countdown display progresses, and pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 is operated as the countdown display progresses. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the expected hit rate of the change of the look-ahead performance target and are set by lottery. For example, the expected probability of winning is set to increase in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, with pattern 1 being more likely to be selected in the case of a miss than in the case of a win, pattern 2 being selected with equal probability in the case of a win and in the case of a miss, and pattern 3 being selected more likely in the case of a win than in the case of a miss.

After setting the content of the performance executed as the timer counting performance (countdown performance pattern), the content of the timer end performance (post-countdown performance pattern) is set. In the timer end performance, for example, the word "END!!" is displayed on the display screen for a certain period of time in a color corresponding to the expectation level (for example, the expectation level increases in the order of black → blue → red) superimposed on the identification pattern, so that the player can be sure that the time is up. Examples of post-countdown performance patterns include pattern 1 in which the color of the text "END!!" is black, pattern 2 in which the color of the text "END!!" is blue, and pattern 3 in which the color of the text "END!!" is red. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the expectation level of the hit of the fluctuation of the pre-reading performance target, and are set by lottery. For example, the expectation level of the hit is set to increase in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, and pattern 1 is more likely to be selected in the case of a miss than in the case of a hit, pattern 2 is selected at the same rate for both the case of a hit and the case of a miss, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a miss. Note that the post-countdown performance pattern is not limited to this, and instead of just changing the text color, the text can be decorated or characters can be displayed, and the content of the message can be varied to correspond to different levels of expectation.

Meanwhile, a gaming machine is equipped with multiple boards on which electronic components are mounted. Among these, the main board and payout control board mounted on the back side of the gaming machine are generally stored in a colorless and transparent case, making them easy to inspect and check. On the other hand, in the luminous decorative board used for the movable or immovable decorative member mounted on the gaming board panel, the surface facing the player on the front side is provided with a lens member that reflects and scatters light from the luminous decorative board, and the rear side is attached to the gaming board panel in a state facing the performance display device attached to the gaming board panel. In addition, in order to realize the function of luminous decoration, electronic components such as connectors, control elements, drivers, resistors, and capacitors are mounted on the rear side of the luminous decorative board for connecting a flat cable for receiving control signals from the peripheral control means. When such a gaming machine is installed in an amusement store, it is difficult to check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the electronic components mounted on the rear side of the luminous decorative board in the gaming machine after installation. This is because the rear side of the luminous decorative board faces the surface that forms the display area of the performance display device. Therefore, the means for solving such problems are shown below.

Figure 118 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 is equipped with a game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side performance display device 1600. The game panel 1100 is equipped with a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by providing a physical opening in the game panel 1100 in a punched-out shape. A space is formed between the game board side performance display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side, and multiple roles are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, a board back grass role 6800, a first giant tree role 6600, a second giant tree role 6650, a first cloud role 6700, and a second cloud role 6750 are provided in a position close to the back side of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree role 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant tree leaf board 6630, and the second giant tree role 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant tree leaf board 6680. Behind these are the first grass role 6470 and the second grass role 6475, behind which is the rabbit role 6000, behind which is the mountain role 6500, and behind which is the game board side performance display device 1600. By arranging multiple roles in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be created.

Figure 119 (A) is a front view of the rabbit role 6000. Figure 119 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit role 6000. Figure 119 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit role 6000. The rabbit role 6000 is composed of a face cover part 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the rear side of the face cover part 6010, and a body part 6030 as a unit. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as a face light emitting part 6023 on the front side. The face substrate 6020 also has a mouth decoration part 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. The first arm part 6016 and the second arm part 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover part 6010, imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. Additionally, at the bottom end of the face substrate 6020, a torso section 6030 is provided, which is a plate-shaped member made of white, opaque synthetic resin and resembles the torso of a rabbit.

Figure 120 (A) is a front view of the face board 6020. Figure 120 (B) is a rear view of the face board 6020. The face board 6020 is a plate-shaped member made of a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face board 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film to protect the electrical circuits provided on the surfaces. In addition, the front side of the face board 6020 is surface-mounted with LEDs constituting the first face light-emitting unit 6023a and LEDs constituting the second face light-emitting unit 6023b, and the rear side of the face board 6020 is surface-mounted with a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a first resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029.

As shown in FIG. 120(A), the face substrate 6020 is a horizontally long rectangle, with two rectangular portions extending upward from the top edge of the rectangle, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates a rabbit's face, and the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 imitate rabbit ears. When the face cover part 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are not covered by the face cover part 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 each have a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a that imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear. The first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible in brown. In addition, the areas of the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 other than the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are covered with the above-mentioned white protective film. In addition, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are each composed of an LED mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which will be described in detail later.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration part 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration part 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on a white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and a shape resembling a rabbit's mouth is visible in pink. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured such that the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration part 6024 is pink, and the other areas are visible in white.

Figure 120 (B) is a diagram showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the rear side of the face substrate 6020 is also entirely covered with a white protective film to protect the circuit, similar to the front side of the face substrate 6020. At the upper left and right of the rear side of the face substrate 6020, at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side, dotted lines indicating the mounting positions of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b and character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the names of the mounted components are formed by printing them on the white protective film with black ink. In addition, between the character strings "LED1" and "LED2", the driver 6026 is surface-mounted. In addition, below the driver 6026, the character string "DR1" is formed by printing them on the white protective film with black ink.

Capacitors 6028 (first capacitor 6028a and second capacitor 6028b) are surface mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face light-emitting part 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face light-emitting part 6023b. In addition, the character strings "C1" and "C2" corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b are printed on the white protective film with black ink.

Resistors 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) are surface mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face board 6020. In addition, the letters "R1" to "R6" corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f are printed on a white protective film with black ink.

A control element 6025 consisting of a microcomputer is surface-mounted to the right of the area in which the resistor 6027 is mounted. In addition, the character string "IC1" corresponding to the control element 6025 is printed in black ink on a white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and controls the lighting of the LEDs that make up the first face light-emitting unit 6023a and the LEDs that make up the second face light-emitting unit 6023b.

A connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face board 6020. Corresponding to the connector 6029, the character string "CN1" is printed in black ink on a white protective film. A control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and power is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the face board 6020. The power supplied to the face board 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, and the LEDs that make up the first face light-emitting unit 6023a and the second face light-emitting unit 6023b.

The control element 6025, driver 6026, resistor 6027, capacitor 6028, and connector 6029 each have a black main body and a metal terminal. The metal terminals of the control element 6025, driver 6026, resistor 6027, capacitor 6028, and connector 6029 are surface mounted on the front substrate 6020 by solder. In Figure 120 (B), the main bodies of these electronic components are shown in black, and the metal terminals and solder of these electronic components are shown in white.

Figure 121 is a perspective view of the face cover part 6010. The face cover part 6010 has a box shape with an open rear, and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover part 6010 is composed of a face cover part front part 6011 constituting the front surface, a face cover part top part 6012 constituting the top surface, a face cover part right part 6013 constituting the right surface, a face cover part bottom part 6014 constituting the bottom surface, and a face cover part left part 6015 constituting the left surface.

As shown in Figures 119 to 121, a first face light scattering section 6011a and a second face light scattering section 6011b modeled after rabbit eyes are provided on the front side of the face cover section front section 6011 which constitutes the front surface of the face cover section 6010. The first face light scattering section 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face emitting section 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in a front view. The second face light scattering section 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face emitting section 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in a front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(A), the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b are configured to have a larger area in a front view than the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively, and the outer shapes of the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b in a front view are configured to be surrounded by the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, respectively.

The first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b are formed on the front side of the face cover portion front portion 6011 by forming fine lens cuts or processing to make it matte-like, so that when light irradiated from the first face light emitting portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, the light is diffusely reflected by the rough surface. The face cover portion front portion 6011 does not have a structure that diffusely reflects incident light like the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b in any part other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, and is configured so that the face substrate 6020 located at the rear can be directly viewed from the front. The rectangular portion of the face substrate 6020 excluding the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 and the rectangle of the face cover 6010 have the same length and width, and are provided in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front. The face substrate 6020 is attached by being screwed from the rear into screw holes provided in the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, and the face cover left surface 6015, etc.

The rear surface of the face cover front part 6011 and the face light emitting part 6023 are provided with a predetermined distance (approximately 1-2 mm). This configuration makes it easier to dissipate heat generated in the face light emitting part 6023, and makes it possible to prevent the face light emitting part 6023 from breaking down due to heat generated by itself. Note that in other examples, this type of configuration may also be adopted in the relationship between the light emitting part and a member such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting part.

Thus, the rabbit role-playing device 6000 is composed of a face substrate 6020, a face cover section 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and a body section 6030 that is provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. LEDs that function as a first face light emitting section 6023a and a second face light emitting section 6023b are surface-mounted on the front side of the face substrate 6020, and are configured to irradiate light to a first face light scattering section 6011a and a second face light scattering section 6011b provided on the face cover section front section 6011 that constitutes the front side of the face cover section 6010 that covers the front. In addition, electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020.

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and receives a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to drive the LEDs that make up the face light-emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020. The flat cable also supplies power to drive the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light-emitting mode of the LEDs that make up the face light-emitting unit 6023.

The LEDs constituting the face light-emitting unit 6023 are formed by encapsulating three LED chips, one capable of emitting red light, one capable of emitting green light, and one capable of emitting blue light, in a colorless and transparent resin. The LEDs constituting the face light-emitting unit 6023 are provided with three metal terminals that serve as the anodes of each LED chip, and three metal terminals that serve as the cathodes. Each LED chip can be made to emit light by passing a current from the driver 6026 to the anodes of each LED chip. Specifically, the current flowing through each LED chip can be controlled by the driver 6026 to cause each chip to emit red, green, and blue light independently.

In addition, resistors 6027 are provided between the circuit connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip as limiting resistors to adjust the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, first resistors 6027a to 3rd resistors 6027c are provided between the circuit connecting the driver 2026 and the anode of each LED chip included in the LED constituting the face light-emitting unit 6023a, and fourth resistors 6027d to 6th resistors 6027f are provided between the circuit connecting the driver 2026 and the anode of each LED chip included in the LED constituting the face light-emitting unit 6023b. By providing the first resistors 6027a to 6th resistors 6027f corresponding to the anodes of each LED chip in this way, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted and an overcurrent is prevented from flowing through the circuit in the event of a short circuit inside the LED.

The first capacitor 6028a is electrically connected in parallel to the power supply terminal of the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is electrically connected in parallel to the power supply terminal of the driver 6026, and functions to ensure stable operation of the control element 6025 and the driver 6026.

The rabbit role 6000 can be controlled to move between a standby position at the bottom of the front side of the game board side performance display device 1600 and a moving position near the center of the front side of the game board side performance display device 1600 by a drive mechanism (not shown). This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The rabbit role 6000 is configured to inform the player of a predetermined game content by the moving mode and light emitting mode. For example, the rabbit role 6000 may be moved from the standby position to the moving position, and while the rabbit role 6000 is in the moving position, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face board 6020 may be lit in red, and the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b may be lit in red, suggesting that the expectation of the decorative pattern being stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot is higher than usual. In addition, in other examples, examples are shown in which parts of the reel or parts that make up the reel are movable, or the light-emitting parts of the reel are controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner, but these manners may be used as effects that suggest a higher than normal expectation that the decorative pattern will stop in a manner that indicates a jackpot.

As mentioned above, there is a risk of malfunctions in the light-emitting decorative board (face board 6020) provided with such a decorative member (rabbit role-piece 6000). For example, in the process of performing surface mounting on the printed circuit board that constitutes the face board 6020, there is a risk that the amount of solder on the soldering surface is insufficient, resulting in an inappropriate electrical connection between the circuit on the printed circuit board and the mounted electronic components, or that other parts or tools may come into contact with the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board during assembly at the factory, causing the mounted electronic components to fall off. In addition, there is a risk of malfunctions in the electronic components due to deterioration over time after the gaming machine is installed in the gaming facility.

For example, in an LED that functions as a face light-emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color emission by emitting three colors, red, blue, and green, in multiple gradations by a driver 6026, if one of six metal terminals loses electrical connection, even though it is intended that one of the three colors be lit in a controlled manner, only two colors will actually be lit, and one color will not be lit. This type of situation can occur when the LED chip breaks down and no current flows, or when resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face board 6020, causing a circuit break.
This situation may give the player the impression that the movable decorative member looks bad. In particular, when multiple LEDs are controlled to emit the same color, the defective LED may emit a different color. In addition, this may cause the player to misunderstand the probability of winning the jackpot.

In addition, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 on the face board 6020 may be bent repeatedly due to the repeated movement of the rabbit role 6000 as a movable decorative member, which may cause the strength of a certain part of the flat cable to deteriorate, causing the flat cable to break, and preventing the rabbit role 6000 from properly transmitting signals or supplying power. Alternatively, repeated movement of the rabbit role 6000 may cause repeated stress on a part of the connector 6029, which may cause the connector 6029 to break. In this case, an unintended control signal may be sent to the rabbit role 6000, causing an unintended light-emitting state to be shown to the player, or if power is completely cut off, the face light-emitting unit 6023 of the rabbit role 6000 may move from the standby position to the moving position in an unlit state without being lit, or from the moving position to the standby position, which may result in a poor appearance as a performance.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is in a power-off state, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is configured to be black and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 located in front is reflected on its surface. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that is configured to mirror-reflect incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflective sheet) may be installed close to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 so as to cover the entire front surface of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and this reflector may be configured to mirror-reflect incident light. With this configuration, if there is some abnormality in the face substrate 6020 equipped with the rabbit role 6000 located in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, the content of the abnormality can be confirmed by visually checking the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind. Alternatively, it can be confirmed whether an abnormality has occurred.

Figure 122 (A) is a perspective view showing the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position. Figure 122 (A) shows an example of a rabbit role 6000 installed in an amusement machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In this example, the rabbit role 6000 is placed in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the back surface of the face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit role 6000 are positioned at a predetermined distance (specifically, about a few centimeters). In the example shown in Figure 122 (A), a part of the driver 6026 mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 and the entire first resistor 6027a and second resistor 6027b are shown reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Note that while FIG. 122(A) shows the rabbit role 6000 viewed from diagonally above right, it is also possible to view the mounting state of other electronic components by looking at it from other angles. For example, when the rabbit role 6000 is viewed from above in the center of the left-right direction, it is also possible to view the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit role 6000 is viewed diagonally from above left, it is also possible to view the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029. Note that in this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting state of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

Figure 122 (B) is a perspective view showing the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position. Figure 122 (B) shows an example in which the rabbit role 6000 is installed in the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In this example, it is difficult to see the electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face board 6020, and it is possible to check the mounting state of only the entire driver 6026, part of the first capacitor 6028a, and part of the second capacitor 6028b. A method for visually checking the electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face board 6020 will be described later.

In this way, in a gaming machine in a powered-off state, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit device 6000 serving as a decorative means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, making it possible to check the status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 even after the gaming machine is installed in an amusement facility. In addition, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, so that the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is viewed as black, is configured to be easily visible.

Although an example has been shown in which the entire front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film, the circuitry on the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a light-colored protective film, such as cream, instead of white. This is because, compared to a case in which a dark protective film is used, a case in which a light-colored protective film is used creates a clearer difference in light and dark with respect to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is black, making it easier to see the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The process of coloring the face substrate 6020 is preferably carried out by forming a circuit structure on the printed circuit board by copper plating, adopting a white protective agent as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, and applying this protective agent to the entire both sides of the printed circuit board except for the portion where the through hole is provided, thereby forming a white protective film, and making the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is adopted as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, a white ink may be applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. Alternatively, these aspects may be combined, and after applying a white protective agent to form a protective film, a white ink may be applied on the white protective film so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes whiter. By forming the face substrate 6020 in such an aspect, it is possible to make the face substrate 6020 visible in white. Note that a similar method can be adopted when it is desired to make the substrate visible not only in white but also in other colors such as black and green. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may be adopted when making the substrate a specific color.
Although an example in which both sides of the face substrate 6020 are entirely white has been shown, the area of the face substrate 6020 that is white may be only partially white. For example, only the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be white, or only a predetermined area on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 where electronic components are mounted may be white. The rear of the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a thin plate-like cover, and a punched-out opening may be provided in the cover so that the electronic components whose mounting state is to be confirmed can be seen, so that the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 and the specific electronic components whose mounting state is to be confirmed can be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 through the opening. If a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the cover surface, reducing the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. If a colored and opaque cover is used as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, making it extremely difficult to confirm the mounting state. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punched-out opening so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually confirmed. With this configuration, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be protected by the cover, while the mounting state of the electronic components to be checked can be checked through the opening provided in the cover. Furthermore, by providing such an opening, it is possible to release heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 to the outside, and it is possible to prevent the mounted electronic components from being damaged or deteriorated due to heat. It is preferable to configure the cover so that the electronic components do not protrude backward from the opening. Moreover, the color of the cover may be black opaque or dark opaque. With this configuration, it is easy to visually check the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a contrast with the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 is a light color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 is a dark color such as black or navy blue. With this configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is easier to see compared to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is black. In addition, since the face substrate 6020 is a light color and the mounted electronic components are a dark color, the face substrate 6020 and the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 can be distinguished and seen in the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are formed from white materials to increase reflectivity. In this case, if the color of the face board 6020 is white or a light color, it becomes difficult to see the mounting state of the LEDs mounted on the back surface of the face board 6020. In this way, if the electronic components to be mounted are white, the color of the face board 6020 may be black or a dark color. In this case, the face board 6020 reflected in the game board side performance display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, but the LEDs mounted on the face board 6020 become easier to see. Alternatively, the electronic components may be mounted on a white or light-colored face board by applying black or dark ink to the mounted electronic components or the electronic components before mounting.

In this specification, white refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly and diffusely reflects all wavelengths of natural light that is incident on the object (approximately 100-80%). A light color refers to a color that becomes visible, for example, as cream or light gray, by absorbing a certain wavelength range to some extent and diffusely reflecting the remaining wavelength range. On the other hand, black refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and diffusely reflects some of it (approximately 20-several percent). A dark color refers to a color that uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths and diffusely reflects only some of it (approximately 20-several percent), but is visible as a color close to black due to differences in light absorption rates in certain wavelength ranges, for example, as a dark navy blue.

The rabbit role 6000 shown in Fig. 122(A) and Fig. 122(B) may be configured so that it can be moved by hand from the standby position to an upward moving position. In this case, the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position is not immobilized by a locking mechanism when the power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate.

As a configuration for allowing the rabbit role 6000 to be moved manually, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decoration is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, there is a risk that the movable decoration may be damaged if a large acceleration is applied to the movable decoration when the gaming machine is transported or installed in an amusement store. Therefore, a method has been considered in which a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when it is in the standby position with the power on, and when the power is turned off with the movable decoration locked, the locking mechanism puts the movable decoration in an immovable state. However, if such a locking mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to move the rabbit role 6000 as a movable decoration by hand. Therefore, by configuring the rabbit role 6000 without providing such a locking mechanism, it becomes possible to move the rabbit role 6000 by hand.

The light guide plate will now be described as a configuration for allowing the rabbit gadget 6000 to be moved manually. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that diffuses light incident from the side in a predetermined pattern on the surface, allowing the player to see the predetermined pattern shining. In addition, such a light-emitting pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined performance. However, if such a light guide plate is configured to be provided in the game panel opening 1100a of the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to move the rabbit gadget 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, by configuring the game panel opening 1100a not to have such a light guide plate, it becomes possible to move the rabbit gadget 6000 by hand.

With this configuration, when the power is cut off, the store attendant can directly move the rabbit device 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, and different areas of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122(A), by moving the rabbit role 6000 upward by hand and then looking into the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 as if peering into the rabbit role 6000 from below, it becomes easy to check the mounting state of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which were previously difficult to see. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 122(B), by moving the rabbit role 6000 upward by hand, it becomes possible to view electronic components such as the control element 6025, the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f, which are mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face board 6020, which were previously invisible.

Although an example in which a light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 has been shown, if a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, it is preferable to configure it so that only a part of the game panel opening 1100a is covered rather than covering the entire game panel opening 1100a with the light guide plate. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit role 6000 is the lower front of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the movement position of the rabbit role 6000 is the center front of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is preferable to arrange the light guide plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. In this way, even if a light guide plate is provided, a portion of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered by the light guide plate, so it is possible to achieve both the function of providing a dramatic effect using the light guide plate and the function of being able to change the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side performance display device 1600 by manually moving the rabbit role-piece 6000.

The example in which the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit role 6000 with the hand has been shown, but the light guide plate may be made so large that the hand cannot be inserted into the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate, and in this case, the rabbit role may be moved by an object smaller than the hand. For example, a rod-shaped member with a diameter of about 5 mm, or a thin plate-shaped member with a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm may be inserted into the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate to move the rabbit role 6000. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be made large enough to allow such a rod-shaped member or plate-shaped member to be inserted, and for example, an opening of about 2.0 cm wide and 1.0 cm long may be provided. With this configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is covered by the light guide plate can be widened, and the area in which the performance using the light guide plate can be performed can be expanded.

In the example shown, when the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position is not equipped with a locking mechanism that makes it immovable when the power is cut off, and when a light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the store clerk can directly move the rabbit role 6000 with his/her hand or a long, thin member. However, when the role in the standby position is immovable when the power is cut off by a locking mechanism, or when a light guide plate is provided to completely cover the game panel opening 1100a, the rabbit role 6000 cannot be moved manually, and the area reflected by the face substrate 6020 relative to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 cannot be changed. This problem becomes serious in the example where the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are not reflected at all or almost not at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the rabbit role is in the standby position.

In such an example, if the power switch on the gaming machine is turned off while the initial check of the movable decoration, which is performed when the power is turned on, is performed to forcibly create a state in which no power is supplied to the control unit or drive unit of the gaming machine, it is preferable to configure the movable decoration in a position other than the standby position so that it does not return to the standby position under its own weight, but stops at the position where the power switch was turned off or at a position where it has moved a little from the position where the power switch was turned off under its own weight. A specific example is shown below.

During the initial check, the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position is first unlocked by the lock mechanism, and the rabbit role 6000 changes from a non-movable state to a movable state, and then starts moving to the upper moving position. After the rabbit role 6000 has completed moving to the upper moving position, it stays at the moving position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then starts moving to the lower standby position, after which the rabbit role 6000 stops at the standby position, and the lock mechanism changes it from a movable state to a non-movable state, and the initial check ends. When the game starts and the rabbit role 6000 is moved as a performance in response to a start winning, the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position first changes from a non-movable state to a movable state, and then the rabbit role 6000 is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined moving manner, and then the rabbit role 6000 is controlled to move to the standby position, and then the rabbit role 6000 is changed from an unlocked state to a locked state.

In a gaming machine with such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power cut state, it is possible to make the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 appear in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 without the store clerk having to directly move the rabbit role 6000 by hand. In addition, since the rabbit role 6000 is configured to stay at the moving position for a predetermined time during the initial check, the rabbit role 6000 can be stopped at the moving position by forcibly turning off the power when the rabbit role 6000 stays at the moving position, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided on the gaming machine to turn off the power does not become strict. In addition, since it is possible to stop the rabbit role 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the checking operation of the face substrate 6020.

In addition, in the initial check, the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to stay at the moving position for a predetermined time, but when moving from the standby position to the moving position, the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to stay at a predetermined position between the standby position and the moving position (for example, a position halfway between the standby position and the moving position) for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then move to the moving position, and when the power switch provided on the gaming machine is turned off to cut off the power when it is in the predetermined position, the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to stay at the predetermined position. With this configuration, it is possible to easily stop the rabbit role 6000 at different positions, and it is possible to view the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 from different angles. In addition, since it is possible to stop the rabbit role 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face board 6020.

In the example shown, the rabbit role 6000 is made to stay at the moving position or a predetermined position for a predetermined time during the initial check. In these examples, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b of the face board 6020 may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner when the rabbit role 6000 is at the moving position or staying at the predetermined position. Alternatively, when the initial check starts, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner before the rabbit role 6000 is in the waiting position and starts moving to the moving position. For example, the light emitting mode may be such that the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are lit up in the same color. In addition, the light emitting color in this case is preferably white. With this configuration, the store clerk can check whether there is anything abnormal with the light emission mode of the first face light-emitting unit 6023a or the second face light-emitting unit 6023b, and if there is an abnormality in the light emission mode, the store clerk can turn off the power to the gaming machine with the rabbit role 6000 in a specified position or moving position, and visually check the back side of the face board 6020 to see what kind of abnormality has occurred. Also, when a player complains about the light emission mode, it becomes possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example in which the first face light-emitting unit 6023a and the second face light-emitting unit 6023b are lit in the same color has been shown, it is preferable to provide three or more face light-emitting units 6023 and configure them to emit the same color. In this case, the emitted color may include at least white. In this configuration, if any resistor provided corresponding to the multiple face light-emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light-emitting unit 6023 will emit light in a color different from the other multiple face light-emitting units 6023 (for example, if a resistor provided in series with an LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red, and it will be visible that the LED emits light in reddish purple, which is a mixture of these colors). Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light-emitting unit by its emitted color.

If a power outage is forcibly generated, the rabbit part 6000 will not be in the standby position. If the power is turned on in this state, it is advisable to control the rabbit part 6000 to move to the standby position once, and then restart the initial operation check as described above from the beginning. With this configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit part 6000 in an appropriate position where the back surface of the face board 6020 can be easily seen.

There are various possible embodiments for the rabbit role 6000 itself, the movement of the rabbit role 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit role 6000 and the game board side performance display device 1600. Several examples are shown below.

Figure 123 shows an example of the rabbit role 6000. In this example, the rabbit role moves from a lower standby position to an upper moving position, changing the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this example, the rabbit role 6000 is composed of the face cover part 6010 and the face substrate 6020, and can move between the standby position and the moving position, but the body part 6030 is configured not to move relative to the game panel 1100. Figure 123 (A) shows the state in which the rabbit role 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 because the body part 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. Figure 123 (B) shows the rabbit device 6000 in a moving position, in which almost the entire back surface of the face board is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The rabbit part 6000 may be configured to rotate slowly around a front-to-back axis by a drive mechanism (not shown) when the rabbit part 6000 is in the standby position. Alternatively, the rabbit part 6000 may be configured to be manually rotated around a front-to-back axis when the rabbit part 6000 is in the standby position. This configuration makes it extremely easy to see the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which are normally located below the face board 6020 and whose mounting state is difficult to confirm.

Figure 124 shows one embodiment of the rabbit role 6000. In this embodiment, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are provided as separate parts on the face substrate 6020 that constitutes the rabbit role 6000. The first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 have a vertically long rectangular shape. When the rabbit role 6000 is in operation, the face cover part 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 move to an upward movement position to perform a predetermined performance.

Figure 124 (A) shows a state in which the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are in the standby position, and in this state, only a portion of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the game board side performance display device 1600 while being hidden by the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022. Figure 124 (B) shows a state in which the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are in the moving position, and in this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the game board side performance display device 1600. In this way, by moving a component between the component whose mounting state of the electronic components is to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to change the visual state of the component whose mounting state of the electronic components is to be confirmed. In addition, in other examples, aspects of the rabbit toy 6000 have been described, but these aspects may also be applied to the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 124.

Figure 125 shows one embodiment of the rabbit role 6000. In this embodiment, the body 6030 of the rabbit role 6000 is configured to be vertically long. When the rabbit role 6000 is in the standby position, the body 6030 makes the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit role 6000 invisible, and when the rabbit role 6000 is in the moving position, the rabbit role 6000 is positioned above the body 6030. In this state, the game board side performance display device 1600 is configured to reflect almost the entire rear surface of the face board 6020.

In the above-described embodiment, the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit role 6000 does not change, but in the case of a movable decorative member in which the member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is made of an opaque member and the area seen from the front is increased by expanding in a horizontal direction relative to the game panel 1100 when moved to the moving position, the area seen from the front may become difficult to see. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is adopted, the area seen from the front may be configured to be manually reduced when the power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, when moved to the moving position during the initial check, the area seen from the front may be increased after maintaining the state before the area seen from the front increases for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area seen from the front does not increase. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to check the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example is shown in which the rear of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. On the other hand, it is not desirable for the player to see the state in which the rear of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, if a performance is executed in which almost the entire display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is darkened as a performance indicating a high probability of winning, the electronic components mounted on the rear of the face substrate 6020 will be visible to the player, and there is a risk that the performance will end up turning off the player despite the fact that it is intended to liven up the atmosphere. In addition, when the decorative symbols form a reach state and then stop in a manner indicating a miss, i.e., a reach miss occurs, if an effect is executed in which almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is darkened in order to bring an end to the game, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 will be visible to the player, and this may further discourage the player when he or she is already in a disappointing reach miss state.

Therefore, when the rabbit role 6000 is in the standby position at the timing of executing the performance in which almost the entire display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is darkened, it is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses such reflection from being seen. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are located in the middle of the display area of the face board 6020 and the game board side performance display device 1600, so that the face board 6020 is hidden by the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022, and the reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the body 6030 is located in the middle of the display area of the face board 6020 and the game board side performance display device 1600, so that the body 6030 is hidden by these members, and the reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 123, when performing an effect in which almost the entire display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is darkened, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, etc. may be visible to the player. Therefore, by performing some display only in the lower front of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest in accordance with the performance effect of darkening the display area. For example, the lower front of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a decorative pattern, a reserved number, or a reserved image that indicates the expected jackpot probability related to the fluctuation. In this case, the color of the image may be darker or the size of the image may be smaller than when the decorative pattern, reserved number, or reserved image is usually displayed. In addition, these may be displayed dynamically like an animation rather than statically. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 less noticeable during play.

In addition, after the blackout performance has started, the rabbit role 6000 may be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 123(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 123(B) during the blackout performance, the first ear 6021 and the first ear 6022 may be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 124(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 124(B), or the rabbit role 6000 may be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 125(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 125(B). However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 may be easily visible.

Therefore, when performing an effect in which the rabbit role 6000 is moved from a lower standby position to an upper moving position, a configuration may be made in which a reflection suppression image that suppresses reflections is displayed in the area of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that overlaps with the rabbit role 6000 when viewed from the front. In this way, by displaying an image in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that makes it difficult or impossible to see the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the rabbit role 6000 moves, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident that would disappoint the player.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit role 6000 when viewed from the front, or is one size larger (approximately 1-2 cm) than the rabbit role. It is preferable that the outline of the reflection suppression image completely overlaps with the outline of the rabbit role 6000 when viewed from the front, or that the reflection suppression image extends around the rabbit role by approximately 1-2 mm when viewed from the front. The reflection suppression image may also be configured in white or a light color. By using white or a light color, it is possible to make reflections less noticeable. The reflection suppression image may also be configured using black or a dark color in addition to white or a light color. Furthermore, the reflection suppression image may be an image that is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting to display the anti-reflection image may be before the start of the blackout performance, at the start of the blackout performance, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the blackout performance. When the rabbit character 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, the anti-reflection image may also be configured to move while maintaining its positional relationship with the rabbit character 6000. The anti-reflection image may be displayed until the blackout performance ends. For example, if the rabbit character 6000 is stopped in the standby position during the blackout performance, the anti-reflection image may continue to be displayed. After that, when the rabbit character 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, the anti-reflection image may continue to be displayed as long as the blackout performance is being performed.

It is also possible to prepare multiple types of such reflection suppression images, assign different jackpot expectations to each type of reflection suppression image, and display one of the reflection suppression images when the rabbit character moves, thereby functioning as a performance that indicates the jackpot expectation. For example, blue and red reflection suppression images can be prepared, and a red reflection suppression image can be configured to indicate a higher jackpot expectation. In this case, the player will also pay attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, so even if some electronic components are reflected, it will be difficult for such reflections to be noticed.

Although the above description has been given with respect to displaying a glare suppression image when the rabbit part 6000 is moved, the above-mentioned aspect may also be applied when the first ear part 6021 and the first ear part 6022 are moved.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, it is preferable that the color of the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 is black or a dark color. It is also preferable that no electronic components are mounted on the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. If electronic components are mounted on the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, it is preferable that the electronic components are dark in color. With this configuration, even if the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face board 6020 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to make the player less likely to notice the reflection.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, it is desirable to make the color of the back of the body section 6030 a dark color. It is also desirable not to mount electronic components on the back of the body section 6030. If electronic components are mounted on the back of the body section 6030, it is desirable to mount them on a dark color. With this configuration, even if the back surface of the body section 6030, which is a member that suppresses reflections of the face board 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the impact of the reflection on the player can be reduced.

The rabbit device 6000 may be configured to move to a position in front of the center of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 during the initial check. In this case, the reflection in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, up, down, left and right, and the entire area behind the face board 6020 becomes visible.

On the other hand, when executing the above-mentioned effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to be moved to a moving position in front of the center of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and then executed. In this case, the rabbit role 6000 will be positioned exactly halfway between the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and unless the player moves his face to forcibly try to see the rabbit role 6000 reflected, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the rabbit role 6000 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, when ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the rabbit role 6000 is moved from the moving position to the standby position after the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is brightened, thereby reducing the impact of the reflection on the player.

As an example of a member reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the face board 6020 constituting the rabbit role 6000 is shown, but the rear surface of a member other than the face board 6020 constituting the rabbit role 6000 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 so that the state of the rear surface of that member can be confirmed. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided to transmit control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and to supply power from the power supply board 931 may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, connectors and control elements to which flat cables used for transmitting control signals and supplying power are connected are surface-mounted on the back of the relay board. It is preferable to configure these to be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to check whether there are any abnormalities in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

Although an example in which the relationship between the standby position and the moving position of the rabbit role 6000 is in the up-down direction has been shown, the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to be movable in the forward-backward direction and to move between the standby position at the rear and the moving position at the front. Alternatively, the rabbit role 6000 provided at the front lower part of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be movable so that the upper part of the rabbit role 6000 moves so as to tilt forward by rotating around a rotation axis provided at the lower part of the rabbit role 6000. The rabbit role 6000 may be configured to be movable between a standby position in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and a moving position where the upper part of the rabbit role 6000 moves so as to tilt forward. Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit role 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Although an example has been shown in which the game board side performance display device 1600 is fixed and the rabbit role 6000 is movable relative to the game board side performance display device 1600, the rabbit role 6000 may be fixed and the game board side performance display device 1600 may be movable. For example, the entire game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backwards, or the entire game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable around a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable up, down, left, and right, and the fixed rabbit role 6000 may be positioned in the direction of movement. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 even for a fixed rabbit role.

The examples shown are one in which the game board side performance display device 1600 is fixed and the rabbit role 6000 is movable relative to the game board side performance display device 1600, and one in which the game board side performance display device 1600 is movable relative to the fixed rabbit role 6000, but both the game board side performance display device 1600 and the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to move backward and the rabbit role 6000 may be configured to move forward. Alternatively, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the rabbit role 6000, which are not overlapped when viewed from the front, may be configured to move closer to each other in the horizontal direction and overlap when viewed from the front. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Although an example has been shown in which one game board side performance display device 1600 is provided, multiple performance display devices may be provided. The rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the multiple performance display devices. The display area of one performance display device and the display area of the other performance display devices may be configured to face in different directions, and the rabbit role object 6000 may be movable to the front side of the display area. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to reflect the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 in the display areas of the multiple performance display devices from different angles, making it easier to find the cause of the abnormality.

In addition, the device may be configured to have multiple movable performance display devices, and by moving the performance display devices, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role-player 6000 may be reflected in the display area of at least one performance display device or in the display areas of multiple performance display devices.

An example has been shown in which the rear of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is forcibly cut off, but the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be darkened almost entirely during a demo, when the player has not played for a specified period of time, so that the rear of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Figure 126 shows a modified example of the example shown in Figure 118. In this embodiment, the rabbit role 6000 shown in Figures 118 to 125 is not located in the center of the lower front side of the game board side performance display device 1600, but in the lower left front of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, a stump role 6100 shaped like a stump is provided in the lower right front of the game board side performance display device 1600. As for the game board 5 as a whole, a space is formed between the game panel 1100 and the front side of the game board side performance display device 1600, as in the embodiment described using Figure 118, and multiple roles are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, a board back grass role 6800, a first giant tree role 6600, a second giant tree role 6650, a first cloud role 6700, and a second cloud role 6750 are provided in a position close to the back side of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree role 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant tree leaf board 6630, and the second giant tree role 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant tree leaf board 6680. In addition, the first grass role 6470 and the second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, and the third grass role 6480 is provided behind these, and the fourth grass role 6485 is provided so as to overlap with the third grass role 6480 behind this, and the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 are provided behind this, and the mountain role 6500 is provided behind the mountain role 6500, and the game board side performance display device 1600 is provided behind the mountain role 6500. By arranging multiple roles in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be created.

A stump section 6200 shaped like a stump and a first grass movable section 6360 and a second grass movable section 6370 shaped like grass are provided in the lower right front of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the stump section 6200, the first grass movable section 6360, and the second grass movable section 6370 form the stump device 6100 as a unit.

Figure 127 shows the stump roler 6100. The first grass moving part 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump part 6200, and the second grass moving part 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump part 6200. The first grass moving part 6360 and the second grass moving part 6370 are each plate-shaped and made of green transparent synthetic resin. The first grass moving part 6360 has an exposed surface made of green transparent synthetic resin at the outer edge part except for the lower end part, making it possible to see through the member located behind. On the other hand, the first grass decoration part 6360a coated with green ink is provided at the part other than the lower end part and the outer edge, and the rear of this first grass decoration part 6360a is not visible. The second grass moving part 6370 has a similar configuration to the first grass moving part 6360, and is provided with the second grass decoration part 6370a.

The first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 can be in a state in which the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 are located in front of the stump unit 6200 as shown in FIG. 127(A), and in a state in which the first grass movable unit 6360 moves leftward from the state in front of the stump unit 6200 and the second grass movable unit 6370 moves rightward from the state in front of the stump unit 6200 as shown in FIG. 127(B). The first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 127(A), the end face forming the right end of the first grass movable part 6360 and the end face forming the left end of the second grass movable part 6370 are in contact with each other, and the lower half of the stump part 6200 located at the rear is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the stump opening part 6210a is configured to be visible through the area where the first grass decorative part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decorative part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall part 6350 of the stump box part 6300 provided behind the stump opening part 6210a, and a part of the rear wall light emitting part 6354 provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are configured to be visible.

In this state, as the first light-emitting effect, the rear wall light-emitting unit 6354 may be configured to emit light, and the light irradiated from the rear wall light-emitting unit 6354 may be irradiated to an area where the first grass decoration unit 6360a of the first grass movable unit 6360 is not provided and an area where the second grass decoration unit 6370a of the second grass movable unit 6370 is not provided, so that the light passes through the area where the first grass decoration unit 6360a of the first grass movable unit 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration unit 6370a of the second grass movable unit 6370 is not provided and is irradiated to the player.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 127(B), the first grass movable part 6360 has moved leftward from the state in front of the stump part 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 has moved rightward from the state in front of the stump part 6200, so that the visibility of the lower half of the stump part 6200 is improved. In this state, the stump box part 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump part 6200. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall part 6350 of the stump box part 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall light emitting part 6354 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352 have changed from a difficult to see state to an easy to see state, compared to the state before the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 moved.

In this state, as a second light-emitting effect, the rear wall light-emitting unit 6354 may be configured to emit light, and the light emitted from the rear wall light-emitting unit 6354 may pass through the stump opening 6210a and be directly irradiated forward where the player is positioned. In the second light-emitting effect, it is possible to provide the player with a stronger visual stimulation than in the first light-emitting effect in which light is irradiated to the player through an area where the first grass decoration unit 6360a of the first grass movable unit 6360 is not provided and an area where the second grass decoration unit 6370a of the second grass movable unit 6370 is not provided.

In a gaming machine that can have a first gaming state and a second gaming state (e.g., a probability-change gaming state, time-saving gaming state, or jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (e.g., a normal gaming state), the period during which the first light-emitting effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the second light-emitting effect is executed in the first gaming state, and the period during which the second light-emitting effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the first light-emitting effect is executed in the second gaming state. Alternatively, the first light-emitting effect may be executed for a relatively longer period in the first gaming state compared to the second gaming state, and the second light-emitting effect may be executed for a relatively longer period in the second gaming state compared to the first gaming state. Also, only the first light-emitting effect may be executed in the first gaming state, and both the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect, or only the second light-emitting effect, may be executed in the second gaming state. The second light emission effect is more visually stimulating than the first light emission effect and functions as an effect that gives the player interest (an effect that gives a sense of specialness), so it can be used only when the player is in an advantageous gaming state, or the effect period can be used for a longer period when the player is in an advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In this way, in the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, the player experiences a stronger visual stimulus for a longer period of time than in the first game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and this makes it possible to further increase the excitement of the player, who is already in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

Figure 128 (A) shows the stump section 6200. The stump section 6200 is composed of a stump board section 6210, which is a colored, opaque, plate-like member provided on the front side, and a stump box section 6300, which is box-shaped, provided on the back side. The stump board section 6210 is a plate-like member whose outer shape imitates a tree stump, and has a stump opening 6210a in the center.

Figure 128 (B) shows the positional relationship between the stump board 6210 and the stump box 6300 when viewed from the front. In the figure, the stump board 6210 and the stump opening 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box 6300 is positioned to correspond to the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump board 6210, simulating a state in which a hole is drilled in the side of the stump.

Figure 129 (A) shows the stump box part 6300. The stump box part 6300 is composed of a box upper wall part 6310 constituting the upper wall, a box right wall part 6320 constituting the right wall, a box lower wall part 6330 constituting the lower wall, a box left wall part 6340 constituting the left wall, and a box rear wall part 6350 constituting the rear wall. The box upper wall part 6310 and the box lower wall part 6330 are trapezoidal in plan view, with the back side and the front side being parallel, and the front side being longer than the back side. The box right wall part 6320 and the box left wall part 6340 are each provided so that the front side is inclined outward. In addition, the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, and the box left wall part 6340 are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. This configuration can create a sense of depth.

Figure 129 (B) shows the stump box section 6300 in a disassembled state. The box rear wall section 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located at the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear side. In this figure, the location where the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 of the rear wall cover 6356 is located is shown by a dotted line relative to the rear wall substrate 6352.

Figure 129 (C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 shaped to resemble a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped to resemble the root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped to resemble the leaves of a root vegetable.

Figure 129 (D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a printed circuit board in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light emitting section 6354 constituted by surface mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. Light emitted from the LEDs that constitute the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is irradiated forward perpendicular to the surface that constitutes the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting section 6354 is provided in a position that overlaps with the rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is provided in correspondence with the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a shaped like the roots of a root vegetable, and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b is provided in correspondence with the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b shaped like the leaves of a root vegetable. In addition, when the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 are located in front of the stump unit 6200 as shown in FIG. 127(A), each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 may be configured to be provided in a position that does not overlap with the area where the first grass decorative unit 6360a of the first grass movable unit 6360 is not provided or the area where the second grass decorative unit 6370a of the second grass movable unit 6370 is not provided in a front view. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is in a light emitting state as a performance, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so that a weak visual stimulus is given to the player.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not in complete contact, but are provided with a predetermined distance (approximately 1-2 mm). In this case, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light-emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting part 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With this configuration, it becomes easier to dissipate heat generated in the rear wall light-emitting part 6354, and it becomes possible to prevent the rear wall light-emitting part 6354 from breaking down due to heat generated by itself.

The stump role 6100 is used for the performance of notifying the probability of a big win in the gaming machine. Specifically, the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right from a state where the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, and then, when the stump opening 6210a becomes easily visible, the light emission mode of the box rear wall part 6350 located at the back side of the stump box part 6300 that can be seen through the stump opening 6210a (for example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering part 6358 appears to shine red, shine white, or is turned off and appears white, which is the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear), depending on the expected degree that the stopping mode of the decorative pattern during the change will stop in a manner indicating a big win is higher than usual. For example, each of the illumination modes of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be set to have a different expectation that the decorative pattern will stop in a manner that indicates a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to arouse great interest among players in the illumination modes of the rear wall substrate 6352.

In the above example, the light emission pattern of the rear wall substrate 6352 is used to indicate the expected probability of the decorative pattern stopping in a manner that indicates a jackpot, but such an indication may be made by giving different light emission patterns to the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b.

For example, by not emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and emitting weak green light from the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a shaped to resemble the roots of a root vegetable can be seen by the player in white, and the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b shaped to resemble the leaves of a root vegetable can be seen by the player in green. Also, by emitting weak white light from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and emitting weak green light from the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a shaped to resemble the roots of a root vegetable can be seen by the player in white, and the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b shaped to resemble the leaves of a root vegetable can be seen by the player in green. In addition, by making the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a emit a weak red light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b emit a weak green light, the first rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358a, which is shaped to resemble the roots of a root vegetable, can be seen by the player in red, and the second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b, which is shaped to resemble the leaves of a root vegetable, can be seen in green.

The first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a is weakly illuminated so that the light irradiated from the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a does not strongly decorate any areas other than the first rear wall cover light-scattering unit 6358a. The second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b is weakly illuminated so that the light irradiated from the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b does not strongly decorate any areas other than the second rear wall cover light-scattering unit 6358b. With this configuration, it is possible to achieve an effect in which it appears as if only the rear wall cover light-scattering unit 6358 is illuminated.

By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression that imitates the root vegetable radish in the first and second light emission examples, and an expression that imitates the root vegetable carrot in the third light emission example. Furthermore, in the first light emission example, even though the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a is not illuminated, it is possible to express a specific motif (the root of a radish in this example) by the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light-scattering unit 6358a and the shape of the first rear wall cover light-scattering unit 6358a. Furthermore, in the relationship between the second and third light emission examples, it is possible to express multiple motifs (radish and carrot in this example) by making the light emission color of the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a different.

In the above example, the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b are weakly illuminated to produce an effect in which it appears as if only the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 is illuminating. However, in such an effect, the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b may be made to emit strong light so that the light from the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b reaches the entire inner surface of the stump box unit 6300 strongly. In this case, it is preferable to configure the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b to emit light of the same color (e.g., white).

The light from the rear wall substrate 6352 may be reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 to be visible to the player. For example, the transparent synthetic resin constituting the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to have each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300 as a light scattering portion capable of scattering light. Alternatively, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to have a reflecting portion by performing a process such as plating to form a metal thin film such as aluminum on at least each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently reflect the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and irradiated to the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 toward the player. In this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has the function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

The rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall 6350 is visible in white through the colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are moved to their respective moving positions and the box rear wall 6350 is visible through the stump opening 6210a, even when the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is in an unlit state, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself allows the player to see the box rear wall 6350 as being decorated. In addition, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering part 6358 that imitates the shape of a root vegetable, and even when the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is not illuminated, the shape of the rear wall cover light scattering part 6358 allows the player to see the box rear wall 6350 as being decorated.

Although an example has been shown in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is shaped to resemble a root vegetable, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be a light scattering portion. Alternatively, the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to have a smooth shape on the entire front surface, without providing any portion for scattering the light irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and to allow the light irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 to pass through as is. Even with such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the box rear wall portion 6350 is decorated by the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself, as in the above example.

An example has been shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 is provided with a rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 and a rear wall cover 6356, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, any of the box upper wall portion 6310, box right wall portion 6320, box lower wall portion 6330, and box left wall portion 6340 may be provided with a configuration equivalent to the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356. Alternatively, at least one of the upper wall 6310, right wall 6320, lower wall 6330, left wall 6340, and rear wall 6350 constituting the stump box 6300 may be provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the upper wall 6310, right wall 6320, lower wall 6330, left wall 6340, and rear wall 6350 constituting the stump box 6300 may all be provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356. In these examples, when a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided on a specific wall, the other walls may be provided with only a configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 without providing a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354.

The box upper wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box lower wall 6330, and box left wall 6340 constituting the stump box 6300 may be formed from a transparent or semi-transparent synthetic resin, and the stump board 6210 may be formed from a transparent or semi-transparent synthetic resin, and when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 may be set to a light emitting state, so that the rear surface of the stump board 6210 is illuminated by the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting part 6354. With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting part 6354 passes through the stump board 6210, and the player can visually recognize the state in which the stump board 6210 is decorated with light. The box upper wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box lower wall 6330, box left wall 6340, and stump board 6210 that make up the stump box 6300 may be formed from a colored transparent or colored semi-transparent synthetic resin. For example, they may be formed from a brown synthetic resin. Also, a tree pattern may be printed in brown ink on the rear surface of the stump board 6210 to form an opaque or semi-transparent area in part of the stump board.

Although an example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white has been shown, other colors may be used. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown, similar to the stump board portion 6210. In such an embodiment, by turning off the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a, it is possible to express a root vegetable with soil attached in the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358.

In the example shown, when the first grass movable part 6360 moves leftward and the second grass movable part 6370 moves rightward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump board part 6210 becomes exposed, and the box rear wall part 6350 located at the rear becomes visible. However, the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 may be configured to be driven so that the upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 can be tilted forward with the left-right direction of the lower ends of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 as a rotation axis, and when the upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 tilt forward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump board part 6210 becomes exposed, and the box rear wall part 6350 located at the rear becomes visible.

An example has been shown in which the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 are provided in front of the stump section 6200, but only one of the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 may be provided in front of the stump section 6200, and the stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving it to a right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 may be configured as an integrated member, and the stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving this member to a right or left movement position.

The box rear wall 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to rotate by a drive source (not shown) around the rotation axis so that the front side of the rear wall cover 6356 contacts the inner surface of the box upper wall 6310, or the left side of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to rotate by a drive source (not shown) around the rotation axis so that the front side of the rear wall cover 6356 contacts the inner surface of the box left wall 6340. With this configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located in front of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 is visible to the player through the rear wall cover 6356, and the rear wall cover 6356 is not located in front of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. In addition, since the stump role 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side performance display device 1600 from the player's point of view, the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated around the upper or left side as an axis, so that the rear wall cover 6356 after movement becomes less noticeable. It is also possible to rotate it around the right side or a variable axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may be larger than the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be the same size and shape as the stump board portion 6210, and the outer edges of the substrate 6352 may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is expanded from its original shape. In this case, the light that is irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and reflected backwards by the box upper wall portion 6310, box right wall portion 6320, box lower wall portion 6330, box left wall portion 6340, etc., can be reflected again toward the player in front in the area where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is expanded.

Also, the light emitting section may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light emitting section may be provided on the front of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the portion of the stump board section 6210 that resembles roots or the portion that resembles the cut end of a tree, and may be configured to emit light at the same time as the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is emitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of emitting light from the rear wall light emitting section 6354. Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have no light emitting section other than the rear wall light emitting section 6354. Even in this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended around the periphery, it is possible to reflect the light reflected backward by the box upper wall section 6310, box right wall section 6320, box lower wall section 6330, box left wall section 6340, etc., toward the player in front again.

In the example shown in FIG. 129, the box rear wall 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 130, the box rear wall 6350 is composed of the rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side, the rear wall substrate 6352 located in the middle, and the rear wall plate 6380 located on the back side. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 is shaped like a root vegetable, and includes a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an outer shape that resembles the root of the root vegetable, and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b having an outer shape that resembles the leaves of the root vegetable. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be seen.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape resembling a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a resembling the root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b resembling the leaves of a root vegetable. A white protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a using a white protective agent. A green protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b using a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a. Two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall plate portion 6380 is rectangular, and the rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to its front surface. In this example, the rear wall of the stump box section 6300 is formed by the rear wall panel section 6380.

The first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be configured as separate printed circuit boards and attached to the rear wall panel portion 6380 to function as the rear wall substrate 6352. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by painting one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

In the stump box section 6300 configured in this way, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 are moved to the moving positions as described above. Also, in this embodiment, as the light emission mode when the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b are used for the effect, a weak light emission mode in which the root vegetables are visually recognized as being illuminated, and a strong light emission mode in which the entire stump box section 6300 is visually recognized as being illuminated may be adopted.

Even when the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b are turned off, a specific motif can be expressed within the stump box unit 6300 by the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is visible in white through the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a, which resembles a root, and the second rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green through the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b, which resembles a leaf. In this way, a single decorative object can be constructed by only the outer shape and color of the substrates.

In this example, multiple grass features 6400 are provided below and in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, further forward than the rabbit feature and the stump feature.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, as described above, the first grass feature 6470 to the fourth grass feature 6485 are provided as grass features 6400 between the game board side performance display device 1600 and the game area 5a. Several embodiments of such grass features 6400 are shown below.

The grass role object 6400 shown in FIG. 131(A) is composed of a grass board 6420 that is colored, opaque, and plate-like, and has an outer shape that imitates grass. In this example, the grass board 6420 is provided with a grass board front light-emitting unit 6422. The grass board front light-emitting unit 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass board 6420. Also, the grass role object 6400 shown in FIG. 131(B) is composed of a grass board 6420 that is colored, opaque, and plate-like, and has an outer shape that imitates grass. In this example, the grass board 6420 is provided with a grass board rear light-emitting unit 6424. The grass board rear light-emitting unit 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass board 6420. In the examples shown in FIG. 131(A) and FIG. 131(B), the outer shape of the grass board 6420 imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a decorative function. White may be used as the color of the grass board 6420. In this case, by making the grass board front light emitting part 6422 emit light in green or brown, the grass board 6420 can be decorated with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422. Green or brown may be used as the color of the grass board 6420. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. This allows for a decoration that imitates grass to be realized using both the color and shape of the grass board 6420.

Also, LEDs of the same color as the grass board 6420 are used as the LEDs mounted on the grass board 6420. Specifically, if the grass board 6420 is white, white LEDs are used as the mounted LEDs. With this configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass board 6420 can be made inconspicuous. Note that in other examples, this configuration may also be used when providing LEDs as light-emitting units on the board.

The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 provided on the grass board 6420 is irradiated vertically toward the front with respect to the surface of the grass board 6420. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize an effect that gives a strong visual impression. When providing the grass front cover 6440 described later, the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 may be configured to be mounted on the grass board 6420 so that light is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface of the grass board 6420. With this configuration, light is irradiated toward the upper end of the grass front cover 6440, so that the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440, and the player can visually recognize an effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 is lit up. In other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing a light emitting unit on the board.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass board rear surface light emitting unit 6424 provided on the grass board 6420 is irradiated horizontally upwards onto the surface forming the grass board 6420. In this case, the player can visually recognize an effect as if a halo is shining on the grass board 6420. When providing the grass rear cover 6460 described below, light is irradiated toward the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460, so the light irradiated from the grass board rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is transmitted up to the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460, and the player can visually recognize an effect as if the entire grass rear cover 6460 is lit up. In other examples, such a configuration may also be used when providing a light emitting unit on the board.

The front and back surfaces of the grass board 6420 are provided with through-holes (not shown) that constitute an electronic circuit. In addition, the metal that constitutes the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through-holes, and if copper is used as the metal, the through-holes will be visible in brown, which is the color of copper. Here, if at least a part of the grass board 6420 is visible to the player, there is a risk that the through-holes will also be visible to the player. In particular, if white is used as the color of the grass board 6420, the brown color of the through-holes provided on the front surface of the grass board 6420 will be visible to the player, and the function of the grass board 6420 as a decoration will be impaired. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, it is better to arrange the through-holes so that they are scattered all over the front surface of the grass board 6420, rather than concentrating them at a specific location on the front surface of the grass board 6420. Alternatively, the through-holes may be arranged along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or on an extension of the contour line of the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, so that the through-holes can be visually recognized as if they were part of the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. A decorative shape imitating grass may be formed by arranging the through-holes in a line in the same shape as the outer shape inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Also, one or more patterns in the same color as the through-holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns in the same shape as the through-holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, if the through-holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. Note that the above example is preferably applied to all through-holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but may be applied to at least some of the through-holes, and even in that case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the grass substrate 6420 is impaired. In addition, in other examples, a through hole may be provided in the board of the accessory, and an embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

Figures 131(C) to 131(E) show an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front of a grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is formed by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. The grass front cover 6440 is formed from synthetic resin, and has a decorative outer shape that resembles grass. In addition, the area where the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(C), the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than the grass substrate 6420, and part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 131(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 are the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 131(E), the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, with the grass front cover 6440 protruding outside the outline of the grass substrate 6420.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(C), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative aspect that imitates grass. It is also possible to create a sense of depth. In the examples shown in FIG. 131(D) and FIG. 131(E), the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear can be made visible. In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440. It is also possible to create a sense of depth.

Figures 131(F) to 131(H) show an example in which a grass rear cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of a grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is formed by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover 6460. The grass rear cover 6460 is formed from synthetic resin, and has a decorative outer shape that resembles grass. In addition, the area where the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 of the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass rear cover 6460.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(F), the grass-back cover 6460 is smaller than the grass substrate 6420, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass-back cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 131(G), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass-back cover 6460 are the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass-back cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 131(H), the grass-back cover 6460 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass-back cover 6460, with the grass-back cover 6460 protruding outward from the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. In this example, the outer shape of the grass-back cover 6460 is visible when viewed from the front.

In the examples shown in Figures 131(F) and 131(G), the grass object 6400 may be configured to be rotatable around the vertical axis. For example, the grass object 6400 may be configured to rotate 180 degrees by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the grass back cover 6460 faces forward. This configuration results in a visual appearance as shown in Figures 131(C) and 131(D), and produces the same effect as the examples shown in Figures 131(C) and 131(D). In the example shown in Figure 131(H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the external shape of the grass board 6420 and the external shape of the grass back cover 6460. It can also produce a sense of depth.

Figures 132(A) to 132(G) show examples that have been modified from the example shown in Figure 131(C). In these examples, the grass front cover 6440 is configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420, and further modifications to the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 are described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting, matte finish, or other treatments, but is molded smoothly, and is configured so that light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without being diffusely reflected. Note that the grass front cover transparent portion 6442 described below is also configured in a similar manner so that light passing through it passes through without being diffusely reflected. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly viewed.

In this example, by making the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 can be decorated with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting unit 6422. For example, if the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 emits light in green, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(B), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed of an upper grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. The grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b thus formed may be assembled to form the grass front cover 6440. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b may be formed by attaching a colored and transparent sticker or applying a colored and transparent print to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. In the above example, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b is formed by attaching a colored transparent sticker or printing a colored transparent on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. However, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b may be formed by attaching a colored transparent sticker or printing a colored transparent on a part of the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. In addition, it is preferable to use green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. In addition, the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b may be the same or approximately the same as the grass substrate 6420, in which case it is possible to make it less noticeable that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed substrate. In other examples, such a configuration may also be used when providing a colored transparent part.

In this example, the white grass board 6420 is visible through the colorless transparent part 6442a of the grass front cover. In addition, the green colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover is located in front of the white grass board 6420, so that the white grass board 6420 appears green. In addition, the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover is located in front of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, so that the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 are difficult for the player to see, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by directly seeing the grass board front light emitting part 6422 in the unlit state. On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is turned on, the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover reduces the intensity of the light from the light source, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled. In addition, by illuminating the grass board front light emitting part 6422, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 can be decorated with luminous colors.

Figure 132 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 132 (B) has been changed to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b, and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b has been changed to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this example, when the grass board front light-emitting part 6422 is in an off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white from above when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(D), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided at the upper portion and a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at the lower portion. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by applying lens cut or matte finish to at least one of the front surface or rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. It is preferable to form the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a on the front surface or both the front surface and rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. In this way, the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made semi-transparent by applying lens cut or matte finish, so that the shape of the member located at the rear is difficult or impossible to see, but the color of the member remains unchanged and can be seen by the player. Although the example in which the light scattering portion is formed in the colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, the light scattering portion may be formed in the colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the member located at the rear is visible in a state in which the color of the colored and transparent synthetic resin located at the front is mixed. In addition, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or approximately the same color as the grass substrate 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion at the end portion that forms the outer periphery when viewed from the front. In this case, the light from the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting unit 6424 can be diffused at the ends of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, so the external shape of the grass accessory 6400 when viewed from the front can be accentuated. Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be used when providing a light scattering unit.

In this example, by positioning the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in front of the grass board front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs that make up the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 are difficult for the player to see, which makes it possible to prevent the player from directly looking at the unlit grass board front light emitting portion 6422 and becoming disenchanted. On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a scatters the light from the grass board front light emitting portion 6422, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.

The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. By configuring it in this way, the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass board 6420 (the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422) appear blurred compared to when the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, making the presence of the electronic components less noticeable, and preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes disenchanted. In addition, when the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front and rear surfaces of the grass front cover 6440, it is possible to make the presence of the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass board 6420 (the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422) less noticeable. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 behind can be seen through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, blurring the shape of the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 while making use of the color of the grass substrate 6420 to function as a decoration.

Figure 132 (E) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 132 (D) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a has been modified to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this example, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white from above when viewed from the front.

The example shown in FIG. 132(F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132(B) has been modified. In this example, a grass front cover opaque part 6446 is provided instead of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. The grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a may be formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be formed from an opaque synthetic resin, and the grass front cover 6440 may be composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass front cover opaque part 6446. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be formed by applying a sticker or printing to part of the front of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear is not visible. In addition, instead of forming the grass front cover opaque part 6446 by applying a sticker or print to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear is invisible, the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be formed by applying a sticker or print to a part of the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear is invisible. In this case, the state of the grass front cover 6440 is visible on the front side of the part on which the sticker or print is applied. For example, when the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible while making the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible. In addition, when the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, it is possible to make the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible while making the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 visible. The color of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow or brown. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In other examples, this configuration may also be used when providing opaque sections.

In this example, when the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass board 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass board 6420 is indirectly visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. On the other hand, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass board 6420. An example has been shown in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but in this embodiment, it is possible to express the appearance of snow piled up on dead grass.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, it is possible to decorate the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color, it is possible to decorate the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in green with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

The grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be a silver material capable of mirror-reflecting light. For example, the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be made of synthetic resin plated with an aluminum thin film, and the grass front cover 6440 may be constructed by assembling the grass front cover opaque part 6446 thus constructed and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 may be entirely made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be constructed by attaching a silver sticker to a part of the front of the grass front cover 6440, printing with silver paint, or providing a part plated with an aluminum thin film. Note that the opaque part formed in silver in this way has the function of reflecting light. Note that the opaque part formed in silver may be configured to be painted with a colored paint or to have a colored and transparent sticker attached. For example, it is possible to make the opaque part visible in gold by applying a thin layer of yellow paint. In other examples, this configuration may also be used when providing opaque or reflective sections.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(F), the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, the front of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is visible in silver, and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass board 6420 are visible in white, making it possible to express the appearance of frost or snow falling on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light irradiated forward from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is reflected backward by the grass front cover opaque part 6446. Furthermore, since the grass board 6420 is white, the light reflected backward by the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is scattered by entering the grass board 6420, and ultimately decorates the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this way, it is possible to efficiently use the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 for decoration. Note that by providing a colored transparent layer as the foremost layer of the grass front cover opaque part 6446, the grass front cover opaque part 6446 can be viewed as silver and a predetermined color.

Figure 132 (G) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 132 (F) has been transformed into a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 has been transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this example, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, it is possible to express grass in white, silver, and white patterns from above when viewed from the front.

Figure 133 (A) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 132 (A) has been modified to a colored transparent grass cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b may be green. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. In this case, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to represent grass by the part that can be seen as white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is made to emit light, it is desirable that the light emitted be the same or similar color as the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover, for example, green or yellow-green. In this case, it is possible to perform a dynamic performance while keeping the color of the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover unchanged. Also, the light that does not pass through the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover is reflected and decorates the white grass board 6420, so that the white grass board 6420 appears green.

Figure 133 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b in the example shown in Figure 133 (A) is modified to a grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b. The color of the grass front cover 6440 is preferably green. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 is preferably white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green from above. Also, since the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422, it can be seen as a mixture of the white color of the grass substrate 6420 and the green color of the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, but the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is scattered in the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b can be in a decorative mode. In addition, the exposed white grass board 6420 can be made visible by the light emission color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422.

Figure 133 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in Figure 133 (B) has been modified to a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 has been modified to a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use green as the color of the grass front cover 6440. It is also preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in the form of white, green, and green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 passes through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and some of the light does not pass through and is reflected and scattered at the grass front cover light scattering part 6444, making it possible for the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 to be in a decorative mode. In addition, the diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass board 6420, making it possible for the white grass board 6420 to be visible in the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422.

Figure 133 (D) shows an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in Figure 133 (B) has been modified to a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The color of the grass front cover 6440 should preferably be green. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 should preferably be yellow, brown or silver. Furthermore, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a white, green, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque part 6446, making it possible to make the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b in a decorative mode. In addition, the reflected light decorates the exposed white grass board 6420, making it possible to decorate the white grass board 6420 with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 in green with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 133 (E) is an example in which the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b in the example shown in Figure 133 (D) is modified to a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is modified to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. The color of the grass front cover 6440 should preferably be green. The color of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 should preferably be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, silver or green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b can be in a decorative mode. In addition, the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, or reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque part 6446, thereby decorating the exposed white grass board 6420, and it is possible to decorate the white grass board 6420 with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 with green with the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 134 (A) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass front cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 132 (A) has been modified to a colorless light scattering grass front cover part 6444a. It is also advisable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, it is possible to express a white, white pattern of grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a can be in a decorative mode. In addition, the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, so that the exposed white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 with green by the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 134 (B) shows an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in Figure 134 (A) has been modified to a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. Also, the grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a white, white, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 is in a light emitting state, the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be used to make the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 in a decorative state. In addition, the light is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the exposed white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass board 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 134 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in Figure 134 (B) has been modified to a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. Also, the grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, grass can be expressed from above in the form of white, yellow or brown or silver, or white.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a can decorate the exposed white grass board 6420, making it possible to decorate the white grass board 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the example shown in Figures 134(A) to 134(C), the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin, thereby forming a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a green transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 134 (D) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in Figure 134 (C) has been modified to a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. Also, the grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a white, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the exposed white grass board 6420 can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque part 6446, making it possible to decorate the white grass board 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass board 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the example shown in Figures 132 (A) to 134 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420, which has an outer shape larger than that of the grass front cover 6440, are configured to be visible to the player as decorative shapes. In addition, the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is provided in a position covered in a front view only by one of the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446, but the LED constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 may be configured to be disposed behind the position forming the boundary line between these parts. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the LED constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is mounted on the grass board 6420 in the unlit state.

For example, in the grass feature 6400 shown in FIG. 132(B), if the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind the boundary line between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 will be less noticeable, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a will be white and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b will be green, allowing the player to see them more clearly.

Similarly, in the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the relationship between the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the relationship between the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the relationship between the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, if the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundaries, it becomes possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 less noticeable.

In addition, when the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 are arranged behind the boundaries between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion of the grass substrate cover 6442a, the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colored transparent portion of the grass substrate cover 6442b, the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless light scattering portion of the grass substrate cover 6444a, the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colored light scattering portion of the grass substrate cover 6444b, and the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion of the grass substrate cover 6446, it is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 less noticeable.

In the above-mentioned combination, when the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is combined with a member that forms a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the light from the LED that constitutes the grass board front light-emitting portion 6422 can be efficiently transmitted to the member that forms a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446.

The light from the LED that constitutes the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 may be emitted perpendicularly to the grass board 6420, or may be emitted in a direction perpendicular to the tangent of the boundary line at the position where the LED that constitutes the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted.

For example, in the case of a combination of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, when both are made of a material that can transmit light, the direction of irradiation of light from the LED constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 may be configured to irradiate perpendicularly to the grass board 6420. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and a member that combines with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to form a boundary line, the LED constituting the grass board front light emitting portion 6422 may be configured to irradiate light perpendicular to the tangent of the boundary line at the position where it is mounted, and in the direction of the member that combines with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to form the boundary line.

When rectangular LEDs are used as the LEDs that make up the grass board front light-emitting section 6422, it is advisable to position the LEDs so that their longitudinal direction coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the proximity of the boundary line at the position where the LEDs are placed.

When the two parts forming the boundary line are formed from one material, a V-shaped groove of about the same width as the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 may be provided at the boundary line so that the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 do not protrude when viewed from the front. With this configuration, when viewed from the front of the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 are bent by the V-shaped groove, making it possible to make the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 less noticeable. The shape is not limited to a V-shaped groove, and any structure that can be bent may be used. On the other hand, when the boundary line is formed by combining multiple materials, the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 are bent without providing such a groove, making it possible to make the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 less noticeable.

In the example shown in Figures 132(A) to 134(D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420, which has a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440, are configured to be visible to the player as decorative shapes. This creates a sense of depth. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440, decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446.

In addition, because the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, it is decorated by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and also by the light irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is white and light of a color other than white is irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color and made visible.

In addition, the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 located in front of the grass board 6420 and the grass board 6420, so that the light is reflected toward the end of the grass board 6420. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly illuminate the members constituting the grass front cover 6440 that are not located in front of the grass board front light emitting unit 6422. In addition, when the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and when it is turned on, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated with different colors. Note that by mounting the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 on the grass board 6420 so that light is irradiated horizontally upward to the surface constituting the grass board 6420, the light can reach the upper end of the grass board 6420.

Figures 135(A) to 137(D) show examples that are modifications of the example shown in Figure 131(D). In these examples, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 are configured to be the same size, but further modifications of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 are described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface of the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finish processing, but is formed smoothly, and is configured so that light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the colorless and transparent grass front cover part 6442a. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless and transparent grass front cover part 6442a can be directly viewed. Also, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, the entire grass feature 6400 can express grass in a white form.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light-emitting part 6422 is in the light-emitting mode, the exposed white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated in a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass board front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass board 6420 in green, thereby expressing the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 135 (B) shows an example in which a part of the colorless transparent part 6442a of the grass front cover in the example shown in Figure 135 (A) has been modified to a colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover. The color of the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover may be green. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in white and green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 135 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (B) has been changed to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b has been changed to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. The grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b should preferably be green in color. Also, the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in green and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 135 (D) shows an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (A) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, it is possible to express a white, white pattern of grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 135 (E) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (D) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a has been modified to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. It is also advisable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a white, white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 135 (F) shows an example in which a part of the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (A) has been modified to a grass cover opaque part 6446. The grass cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. The grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a white, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 135 (G) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (F) has been changed to a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 has been changed to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. The grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. Also, the grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver or white form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 136 (A) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (A) has been modified to a colored transparent grass cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b should preferably be green. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, the entire grass object 6400 can express grass in a green form.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 136 (B) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (D) has been modified to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. It is recommended that green be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b. It is also recommended that white be used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a green, green pattern from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 136 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (E) has been modified to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. It is recommended that green be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b. It is also recommended that white be used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a green, green pattern from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering part 6444, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 136 (D) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (F) has been modified to a colored transparent grass cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b should preferably be green. The color of the opaque grass cover part 6446 should preferably be yellow, brown or silver. Furthermore, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a green, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 136 (E) is an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (G) has been modified to a colored transparent grass cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b may be green. The color of the opaque grass cover part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Additionally, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver or green form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 137 (A) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (A) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. It is also advisable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, the entire grass object 6400 can express grass in a white form.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 137 (B) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass front cover portion 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (F) has been modified to a colorless light scattering grass front cover portion 6444a. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a white or green, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 137 (C) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass front cover portion 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (G) has been modified to a colorless light scattering grass front cover portion 6444a. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver or white form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the example shown in Figures 137(A) to 137(C), the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin, thereby forming a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a green transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 137 (D) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass front cover portion 6442a in the example shown in Figure 135 (A) has been modified to an opaque grass front cover portion 6446. The color of the opaque grass front cover portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the entire grass object 6400 can express grass in a yellow, brown or silver form.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass board 6420 and the grass front cover opaque part 6446, so that the light reaches the edge of the grass role 6400 that forms the periphery, and the edge of the grass role 6400 can be decorated with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass role 6400 is viewed from an angle, the edge of the grass board 6420 appears exposed, so that this exposed part can be seen as shining with a predetermined light emitting color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it is possible to decorate the edge of the grass role 6400 that forms the periphery with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing. It is also possible to make it visible in such a manner in examples in which other grass front cover opaque parts 6446 are provided.

In the examples shown in Figures 135(A) to 137(D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420, which is the same size as the grass front cover 6440, are configured to be visible to the player as decorative shapes. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440, decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries formed by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with a color that is a mixture of the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.

In addition, the light irradiated from the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 located in front of the grass board 6420, so that the light is reflected toward the edge of the grass board 6420. This makes it possible to indirectly illuminate the components that make up the grass front cover 6440 but are not located in front of the grass board front light emitting unit 6422. In addition, when the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and when it is turned on, each component that makes up the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color.

Figures 138(A) to 140(D) show examples that have been modified from the example shown in Figure 131(E). In these examples, the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 protrudes outside the outline of the grass substrate 6420. Further modifications to the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 are described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 138(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface of the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finish processing, but is formed smoothly, and is configured so that light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the colorless and transparent grass front cover part 6442a. It is also recommended to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless and transparent grass front cover part 6442a can be directly viewed. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, grass can be expressed in a colorless and transparent, white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass board 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 138 (B) shows an example in which a part of the colorless transparent part 6442a of the grass front cover in the example shown in Figure 138 (A) has been modified to a colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover. The color of the colored transparent part 6442b of the grass front cover may be green. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, and green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 138 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (B) has been changed to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b has been changed to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. It is recommended that green be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. It is also recommended that white be used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in the form of green transparent, green, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 138 (D) shows an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (A) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. It is also recommended to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering part 6444, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 138 (E) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (D) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a has been modified to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. It is also recommended to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless semi-transparent, white, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 138 (F) shows an example in which a part of the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (A) has been modified to a grass front cover opaque part 6446. The color of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent, white, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 138 (G) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (F) has been changed to a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 has been changed to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. The grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. Also, the grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver or white form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 139 (A) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass front cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (A) has been modified to a colored transparent grass front cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass front cover part 6442b should preferably be green. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent and green form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 139 (B) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (D) has been modified to a colored transparent grass cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b should preferably be green. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in the form of green transparent, green, and green from the top.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting mode, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 139 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b in the example shown in Figure 139 (B) has been modified to a grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b has been modified to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. White is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in the form of semi-transparent green, green, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored light diffusion part 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 139 (D) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (F) has been modified to a colored transparent grass cover part 6442b. The color of the colored transparent grass cover part 6442b should preferably be green. The color of the opaque grass cover part 6446 should preferably be yellow, brown or silver. Furthermore, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent, green, yellow, brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 139 (E) is an example in which the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b in the example shown in Figure 139 (D) is changed to a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is changed to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. The grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b should preferably be green in color. The grass front cover opaque part 6446 should preferably be yellow, brown or silver in color. Furthermore, the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver or green form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 140 (A) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (A) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. It is also advisable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass that is colorless, transparent, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 140 (B) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (F) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. The grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. The grass substrate 6420 may be white in color. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass can be expressed from above in a colorless transparent, white, yellow, brown or silver form.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 140 (C) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (G) has been modified to a colorless light scattering grass cover part 6444a. The color of the grass cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a yellow, brown, silver or white color from above.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in a light emitting state, the white grass board 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass board 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass board 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the example shown in Figures 140(A) to 140(C), the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin, thereby forming a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed from a green transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 140 (D) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass front cover portion 6442a in the example shown in Figure 138 (A) has been modified to an opaque grass front cover portion 6446. The color of the opaque grass front cover portion 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the entire grass object 6400 can express grass in a yellow, brown or silver form.

On the other hand, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass board 6420 and the grass front cover opaque part 6446, so that the light reaches the edge of the outer periphery of the grass board 6420, and the light can be irradiated upward or backward at the upper end of the grass board 6420. This makes it possible to decorate other components by irradiating them with light of a specific color. For example, by adopting green as the luminous color of the grass board front light emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the components located above or behind the edge of the outer periphery of the grass board 6420 with green. In this example, the grass board 6420 is not used to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself, but is provided to decorate other components.

In the examples shown in Figures 138(A) to 140(D), the external shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. In addition, in the grass front cover 6440, a decorative shape is also formed at the boundary between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with its own color, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. In addition, the light irradiated from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 located in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is reflected toward the end direction of the grass substrate 6420, and therefore it is possible to indirectly illuminate the members constituting the grass front cover 6440 that are not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off and when it is turned on, each member constituting the grass feature 6400 can be decorated with different colors.

Figures 141(A) to 141(D) show examples that have been modified from the example shown in Figure 131(H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear light-emitting unit 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the grass rear cover 6460 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass rear cover 6460 is covered by the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 is configured to protrude outside the outline of the grass substrate 6420, but further modifications of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 141(A), a colorless and transparent grass back cover 6460 is provided behind a white grass substrate 6420. The surface that forms the grass back cover 6460 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte processing, and is molded smoothly. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. It is also recommended to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover colorless transparent part 6462a located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly viewed. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, grass can be expressed in a colorless and transparent, white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear light-emitting part 6424 is made to emit light, it becomes possible to decorate the grass rear cover colorless transparent part 6462a. For example, by adopting green as the light-emitting color of the grass substrate rear light-emitting part 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the part of the grass rear cover colorless transparent part 6462a that is exposed when viewed from the front with green, thereby expressing the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 141 (B) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass back cover part 6462a in the example shown in Figure 141 (A) has been modified to a colored transparent grass back cover part 6462b. The color of the colored transparent grass back cover part 6462b should preferably be green. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 should preferably be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear light-emitting part 6424 is made to emit light, it becomes possible to decorate the grass rear cover colored transparent part 6462b. For example, by adopting green as the light-emitting color of the grass substrate rear light-emitting part 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the part of the grass rear cover colored transparent part 6462b that is exposed when viewed from the front with green, thereby expressing the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 141 (C) shows an example in which the grass rear cover colorless transparent part 6462a in the example shown in Figure 141 (A) has been modified to a grass rear cover colorless light scattering part 6464a. It is also recommended to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, semi-transparent, white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424 is made to emit light, it becomes possible to decorate the grass rear cover colorless light scattering part 6464a. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the part of the grass rear cover colorless light scattering part 6464a that is exposed when viewed from the front with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

Figure 141 (D) shows an example in which the colorless transparent grass cover part 6462a in the example shown in Figure 141 (A) has been modified to an opaque grass cover part 6466. The color of the grass cover part 6466 may be yellow, brown or silver. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422 is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver or white form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear light-emitting part 6424 is in the light-emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque part 6466, so that the light reaches the edge that forms the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420, making it possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with a specified color. For example, by adopting green as the light-emitting color of the grass substrate front light-emitting part 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the appearance of grass growing.

In the example shown in Figure 141 (A) to Figure 141 (D), the outer shapes of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover 6460, which has an outer shape larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, are configured to be visible to the player as decorative shapes. This creates a sense of depth.
In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. In addition, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424 is made to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424 reaches the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460, and the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460 can be visually confirmed to be decorated in a predetermined color.

Figures 142(A) to 143(G) show examples that are modifications of the examples shown in Figures 131(A) to 132(G). Specifically, in the examples shown in Figures 142(A) to 142(B), a grass substrate opening 6426 with a decorative shape resembling a rabbit's head is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and the rear is visible through the grass substrate opening 6426.

In the examples shown in Figures 142(C) to 142(E) and 143(A) to 143(G), a grass front cover 6440 is positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover opening 6448 that has a decorative shape resembling a rabbit's head, and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible through the grass front cover opening 6448.

In the example shown in Figures 142(F) to 142(H), a grass rear cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and a grass substrate opening 6426 with a decorative shape resembling a rabbit's head is provided on the grass substrate 6420. The grass rear cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426.

Figure 142 (A) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in Figure 131 (A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a physical opening in the form of a punched hole is provided in the grass substrate 6420. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped to resemble a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With this configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, it is possible to see behind from the grass substrate opening 6426.

Figure 142 (B) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in Figure 131 (B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a physical opening in the form of a punched hole is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and is configured so that the components located at the rear can be directly seen through the grass substrate opening 6426. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped to resemble a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With this configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the external shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, it is possible to directly see the rear from the grass substrate opening 6426.

Figure 142 (C) shows an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 131 (C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in a manner in which a physical opening in the form of a punched hole is provided in the grass front cover 6440, and is configured so that the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear can be directly seen through the grass front cover opening 6448. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped to resemble a rabbit's head. Multiple grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided, and in this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided.

The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the grass board front first light emitting part 6422a constituting a part of the grass board front light emitting part 6422 in front view, and the grass board front first light emitting part 6422a is configured to be directly visible through the grass front cover first opening 6448a. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided at a position not overlapping with the grass board front second light emitting part 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting part 6422c constituting a part of the grass board front light emitting part 6422 in front view. With this configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also in the grass front cover opening 6448. In addition, the grass board 6420 can be seen from the grass front cover opening 6448, and decoration is performed by the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass board 6420 seen from the grass front cover opening 6448.

When the grass board front first light-emitting portion 6422a is in a light-emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are directly decorated by the light emitted from the grass board front first light-emitting portion 6422a.

On the other hand, when the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c are set to light emitting state, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, for the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c.

Figure 142(D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 142(C) has been modified to be the same as that of the grass substrate 6420. Also, Figure 142(E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 142(C) has been modified to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420. In these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting a similar aspect to the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in Figure 142(C).

Figure 142 (F) is an example in which a grass board opening 6426 is provided in the grass board 6420 in the example shown in Figure 131 (F). The grass board opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a physical opening in the form of a punched hole is provided in the grass board 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 located at the rear can be directly seen through the grass board opening 6426. The grass board opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass board openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass board first opening 6426a and a grass board second opening 6426b smaller than the grass board first opening 6426a are provided. The grass board rear light emitting part 6424 is not provided around the grass board first opening 6426a. In addition, the grass board rear first light emitting part 6424a and the grass board rear second light emitting part 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right of the grass board second opening 6426b.

By configuring in this way, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, it becomes possible to see the grass back cover 6460 from the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, decoration is achieved by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass back cover 6460 seen from the grass substrate opening 6426.

When the grass board rear first light emitting unit 6424a and the grass board rear second light emitting unit 6424b are set to the light emitting mode, the grass rear cover 6460 exposed from the grass board second opening 6426b is decorated with light irradiated from the grass board rear first light emitting unit 6424a and the grass board rear second light emitting unit 6424b. On the other hand, the grass rear cover 6460 exposed from the grass board first opening 6426a is decorated with light irradiated from the grass board rear first light emitting unit 6424a and the grass board rear second light emitting unit 6424b, but the amount of light that reaches it is less than the part exposed from the grass board second opening 6426b of the grass rear cover 6460. Therefore, the part exposed from the grass board first opening 6426a of the grass rear cover 6460 is decorated with less light than the part exposed from the grass board second opening 6426b of the grass rear cover 6460.

The grass board rear first light-emitting part 6424a may be turned off, and only the grass board rear second light-emitting part 6424b may be turned on in a specified color (e.g., green). In this case, the part exposed from the grass board first opening 6426a of the grass rear cover 6460 is not substantially in a decorated state because almost no light reaches it, and only the part exposed from the grass board second opening 6426b of the grass rear cover 6460 can be in a decorated state.

Figure 142 (G) is an example in which the size of the grass rear cover 6460 in the example shown in Figure 142 (F) has been modified to be the same as that of the grass substrate 6420. Also, Figure 142 (H) is an example in which the size of the grass rear cover 6460 in the example shown in Figure 142 (F) has been modified to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420. In these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting a similar aspect to the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in Figure 142 (F).

Figure 143 (A) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided on the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 132 (A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass board 6420. The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the grass board front first light emitting part 6422a constituting a part of the grass board front light emitting part 6422 in a front view, and the grass board front first light emitting part 6422a is configured to be directly visible through the grass front cover first opening 6448a. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided at a position overlapping with the grass front cover 6440, not overlapping with the grass board front second light emitting part 6422b or the grass board front third light emitting part 6422c constituting a part of the grass board front light emitting part 6422 in a front view.

In this example, when the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, the grass board 6420 can be directly seen in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass board 6420 can be seen in white through the grass front cover colorless transparent unit 6442a. Therefore, when the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, the rabbit-like shape formed by the grass front cover opening 6448 is not noticeable. In addition, the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 provided in front of the grass board 6420 is composed of white LEDs that are the same color as the grass board 6420, so the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 provided in front of the grass board 6420 is not noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the grass board front light emitting unit 6422.

When the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a is made to emit light, the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are directly decorated with light emitted from the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when brown is used as the light emission color of the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated with brown, but the unexposed portion of the grass board 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the board.

On the other hand, when the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c are set to the light emitting state, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, for the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, if green is used as the light color for the grass board front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light-emitting portion 6422c, the grass front cover 6440 and the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b will be decorated in green, but the area near the center of the grass board 6420 exposed at the area where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided will be visually recognized by the player as white, the color of the grass board 6420.

Figure 143 (B) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 132 (B). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. It is recommended to use green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. In this example, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, the grass board 6420 can be directly seen in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the white grass board 6420 can be seen in green through the green grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. This makes it possible to express an appearance in which a white rabbit is in green grass.

When the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass board 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are directly decorated by the light emitted from the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emitting color of the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass board 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated with brown, but the part of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as green, which is white. Alternatively, if the light emission color of the grass substrate front first light-emitting portion 6422a is the same green color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a will be decorated with a green light emission color, and because it will be the same color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover, it will be possible to express the appearance of a rabbit hiding in the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c are set to the light emitting state, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, for the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, if green is used as the light color for the grass board front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light-emitting portion 6422c, the grass front cover 6440 and the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b will be decorated in green, but the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided will be visually recognized by the player as white, the color of the board.

Figure 143 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 143 (B) has been modified to a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b has been modified to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white from above when viewed from the front. In addition, with regard to providing a grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be achieved by adopting the embodiment shown as an example in Figure 143 (A).

Figure 143 (D) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 132 (D). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and a lower grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. In this example, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is in an off state, the grass board 6420 can be directly seen in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the white grass board 6420 can be seen in white through the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a. This makes it possible to express an appearance in which a white rabbit is hiding in white grass.

When the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting state, the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are directly decorated by the light emitted from the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the light emitting color of the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated in green, but the portion of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as white.

On the other hand, when the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c are set to the light emitting state, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, for the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, if green is used as the light emission color for the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c, the grass front cover 6440 and the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b will be decorated in green, but the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided will be visually recognized by the player as white, the color of the board. This makes it possible to express an appearance in which a white rabbit is in the green grass.

Figure 143 (E) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 143 (D) has been modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a has been modified to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express grass in a white, white, white form from above when viewed from the front. Also, with regard to the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be achieved by adopting the embodiment shown as an example in Figure 143 (A).

Figure 143 (F) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in Figure 132 (F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and a lower grass front cover opaque part 6446, and a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover opaque part 6446. The grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be yellow, brown or silver in color. In this example, when the grass board front light emitting part 6422 is turned off, the grass board 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 is visible in yellow, brown or silver. This makes it possible to express an appearance in which a white rabbit is hiding in yellow, brown or silver grass.

When the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass board 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are directly decorated by the light emitted from the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is used as the light emitting color of the grass board front first light emitting portion 6422a, or when a white flashing mode is used as the light emitting mode, the grass board 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated in a yellow, brown or white flashing mode. In addition, the part of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, which is yellow, brown or silver. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 have the same decorative aspect, and when the above-mentioned unlit state is changed to such a light-emitting aspect, it is possible to express an aspect as if the white rabbit had disappeared. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the light-emitting color of the grass board front first light-emitting part 6422a, the grass board 6420 exposed at the part where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated in white. In addition, the part of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as the color of the grass front cover opaque part 6446, which is yellow, brown, or silver. As a result, when changing from the above-mentioned off state to this type of light emission mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the area where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, which was visually perceived as white only due to the color of the substrate, can be made white due to the light emission color of the grass substrate front first light-emitting portion 6422a, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a manner that further emphasizes it.

On the other hand, when the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c are set to the light emitting state, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, for the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is decorated with the light emitted from the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, if white is used as the light color for the grass board front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass board front third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b will be decorated with white so that the opening is bordered, but the grass board 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided will be visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the board. This makes it possible to more emphatically express the appearance of a white rabbit hiding in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

Figure 143 (G) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a in the example shown in Figure 143 (F) has been modified to a grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446 has been modified to a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow or brown, or silver and white from above when viewed from the front. Also, with regard to the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be achieved by adopting the embodiment shown as an example in Figure 143 (A).

In the examples shown in Figures 142 (A) to 143 (G), decorative openings (grass board openings 6426 and grass front cover openings 6448) are provided in the decorative members provided in the front (grass board 6420 and grass front cover 6440) to make the members provided in the rear visible, so that the decorative openings can be prominently seen by the player. In addition, the members provided in the front and the members provided in the rear have different colors and transparencies, so that the shapes of the openings can be more prominently seen. In addition, the decorative state of such openings may be used as a performance.
In the examples shown in Figures 131(A) to 131(H) and 132(A) to 132(G), modified examples in which an opening is provided are shown in Figures 142(A) to 143(G), but the examples shown in Figures 133(A) to 141(D) may also be configured to have a similar opening.

In the above example, a physical opening is punched into the grass front cover 6440 to form the grass front cover opening 6448, forming an area that allows visibility to the rear. However, instead of forming a physical opening in the shape of a punch, the outer shape of the visible area may be formed by a boundary line between an area where the rear is not visible or is difficult to see and an area where the rear is relatively easy to see.

For example, the outer unseen area may be constituted by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily visible area may be constituted by the grass front cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outer difficult to see area may be constituted by the colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily visible area may be constituted by the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, or the outer difficult to see area may be constituted by the colored grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the inner easily visible area may be constituted by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, or the outer difficult to see area may be constituted by the colorless grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the inner easily visible area may be constituted by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, or the outer difficult to see area may be constituted by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easily visible area may be constituted by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 may be configured to have at least two of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and to provide an area that is easily visible on the inside across two or more of these areas. This configuration also allows for a decorative shape and an area that is easily visible to the rear.

143(B) to 143(G), the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided only in one area such as the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering part 6444, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446, but the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across multiple areas constituting the grass front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be provided with at least two of the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque part 6446, and the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across two or more of these areas.
131(A) to 143(G) show examples in which the grass reel 6400 is visible as a decorative aspect in the off state or the luminous state, but these states are used as effects in the game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, when these states change from one of the above-mentioned states to the other of the above-mentioned states, the change may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event. The predetermined event may be, for example, a notice indicating the probability of a jackpot or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 will be operable.

In Fig. 131(C) to Fig. 131(E), Fig. 132(A) to Fig. 140(D), Fig. 142(C) to Fig. 143(G), an example is shown in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. Also, in Fig. 131(F) to Fig. 131(H), Fig. 141(A) to Fig. 141(D), an example is shown in which a grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420, but any one of the embodiments in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420 and any one of the embodiments in which a grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 may be combined.

When combining the embodiments, it is preferable to adopt the same size of the grass substrate 6420. Also, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiments shown in FIG. 131(C) and FIG. 131(F), it is preferable to combine the embodiments with the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 being the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 will just overlap when viewed from the front. Also, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass rear cover 6460 are the same size as in the embodiments shown in FIG. 131(D) and FIG. 131(G), it is preferable to combine the embodiments with the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 will just overlap when viewed from the front. In addition, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are each configured to be larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 131(E) and FIG. 131(H), it is preferable to combine the embodiments by making the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 will overlap exactly when viewed from the front. In addition, it is preferable to make the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 from synthetic resin of the same color, and when the grass front cover 6440 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, it is preferable to make the grass rear cover 6460 from colorless and transparent synthetic resin. In addition, when the grass front cover 6440 is made of green transparent synthetic resin, it is preferable to make the grass rear cover 6460 from green transparent synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass board 6420 will have both the grass board front light emitting part 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting part 6424, but one of the grass board front light emitting part 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting part 6424 may not be provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIG. 131(E) and FIG. 131(H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 will be larger than the grass board 6420 in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the grass rear cover 6460 with light from the grass board front light emitting part 6422. It is also possible to decorate the grass front cover 6440 with light from the grass board rear light emitting part 6424. In this case, it is desirable to provide a light scattering part at the end that forms the outer periphery in a front view in the grass front cover 6440 or the grass rear cover 6460 so as to border the end. It is also possible to configure it so as not to have both the grass board front light emitting part 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting part 6424. In this case, the grass board 6420 may be configured to have the function of relaying signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to other props, for example.

Any one of the examples in the above-mentioned grass item 6400 may be applied to each of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are not changed, and the members constituting the outer area and the members constituting the inner area in any one of the examples in the grass item 6400 may be applied to the area other than the first grass decoration part 6360a constituting the outer area in the first grass movable part 6360 and the first grass decoration part 6360a constituting the inner area in the first grass movable part 6360. In addition, it is advisable to apply the members constituting the outer area and the members constituting the inner area in any one example of the grass object 6400 to the areas other than the second grass decoration part 6370a constituting the outer area in the second grass movable part 6370 and the second grass decoration part 6370a constituting the inner area in the second grass movable part 6370.

In addition, any one example of the grass object 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 141(B) may be applied to both the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. Also, the left and right green transparent grass back covers 6460 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even if the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass back covers 6460 each form one decorative body individually.

In FIG. 126, a third grass feature 6480 is provided, and a fourth grass feature 6485 is provided behind it, but the left half of the fourth grass feature 6485 is configured to be hidden by the third grass feature 6480 located in front when viewed from the front. Here, any one of the examples of the grass feature 6400 described above may be applied to each of the third grass feature 6480 and the fourth grass feature 6485. In this case, it is desirable to make the size of the grass board 6420 provided on the third grass feature 6480 and the fourth grass feature 6485 the same. In addition, one or both of the grass board front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting unit 6424 that may be provided on the third grass feature 6480 and the fourth grass feature 6485 may be configured to be simultaneously lit up as in the above example.

The following shows an example in which the grass role 6400 shown in FIG. 141(A) is used as the third grass role 6480, and the grass role 6400 shown in FIG. 138(E) is used as the fourth grass role 6485. In this case, when the grass board rear surface light emitting part 6424 provided on the grass board 6420 of the third grass role 6480 provided in the front is illuminated, it is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a, and white grass board 6420 provided on the fourth grass role 6485 from the front side. In addition, the fourth grass role 6485 can efficiently diffuse the light irradiated from the third grass role 6480 forward, enhancing the player's interest as a performance.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the grass back cover 6460 of the third grass feature 6480 by irradiating light from the grass board front light emitting part 6422 of the fourth grass feature 6485. At this time, only the upper peripheral part of the grass back cover 6460 is visible to the player as a decorated state, but the light that passes through the grass back cover 6460 is diffused backward by the white grass board 6420 and is irradiated toward the fourth grass feature 6485, decorating the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a of the fourth grass feature 6485.

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass feature 6480 located in the front and the fourth grass feature 6485 located in the rear, making it possible to efficiently reflect light forward while positioning the light source in a position that is not visible to the player. In particular, when a silver material capable of mirror-reflecting light is used as the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 and the rear grass cover opaque portion 6466, it becomes possible to reflect light more efficiently.

In the example shown, the third grass feature 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass feature 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap when viewed from the front, but the third grass feature 6480 and the fourth grass feature 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. The third grass feature 6480 may also be configured to be larger than the fourth grass feature 6485. And, the fourth grass feature 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass feature 6480 when viewed from the front. Or, they may be configured to be positioned adjacent to each other but not overlapping when viewed from the front.

Either or both of the third grass reel 6480 and the fourth grass reel 6485 provided at the rear may be configured to be movable as a performance. For example, an example was shown in which the third grass reel 6480 provided at the front and the fourth grass reel 6485 provided at the rear partially overlap when viewed from the front, but from this state, the third grass reel 6480 and the fourth grass reel 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the third grass reel 6480 and the fourth grass reel 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front by moving either one of the third grass reel 6480 and the fourth grass reel 6485 in the left-right direction, or the third grass reel 6480 and the fourth grass reel 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front by moving both the third grass reel 6480 and the fourth grass reel 6485 in the left-right direction. In this case, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state where they do not overlap at all when viewed from the front to a state where they overlap. The movement direction may be configured to be not only left and right, but also up and down. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that it can move upward or downward by the height of the grass role itself. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to configure the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 so that they can move from a state where they do not overlap at all when viewed from the front to a state where they overlap. It is preferable to configure it so that it can take the light emission mode as in each of the above examples when such a third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 are overlapped when viewed from the front.

Although an example has been shown in which the grass object 6400 can be moved, the movement of the grass object 6400 can also be used as a presentation in which the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) change from a difficult to see or invisible state to a visible state. Specifically, in relation to the third grass feature 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass feature 6485 provided in the rear and equipped with a grass board opening 6426 and a grass front cover opening 6448, the state in which the grass board opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided by the fourth grass feature 6485 are located behind the third grass feature 6480 in a front view changes to a state in which the grass board opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided by the fourth grass feature 6485 are not located behind the third grass feature 6480 in a front view, so that the grass board opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are visible to the player in a front view.

Although an example in which the grass reel 6400 can move has been shown, the grass reel 6400 may be configured to move to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 as a performance. In addition, at this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as a performance in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Specifically, when the grass reel 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, an image imitating the outline of the grass reel 6400 may be configured to move upward in accordance with the movement of the grass reel 6400. At this time, it is desirable to configure it to move while displaying an image imitating the outline of the grass reel 6400 slightly above the grass reel 6400 when viewed from the front. With this configuration, the player can see the decorative pattern in which the image imitating the outline of the grass reel 6400, the outer shape of the grass reel 6400 composed of the grass front cover 6440 or the grass substrate 6422 or the grass rear cover 6460, the boundary between the multiple members constituting the grass front cover 6440, or the grass substrate 6420 which is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440, etc. are provided from top to bottom in a front view. In this way, one decorative pattern can be realized as a performance by three things: the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the reel, and the shape provided in the reel. Note that, when there are two shapes in the grass reel 6400 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 133(B) and FIG. 138(B), one decorative pattern can be realized as a performance by a total of four shapes.

The back of the grass board 6420 may be configured to have the same electronic components as those in the rabbit role 6000. The grass board 6420 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass board front light emitting part 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting part 6424 may be attached to the grass board 6420 with adhesive, and the wiring supplying power to the LEDs may also be attached to the grass board 6420 with adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 may be provided with a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b so that the wiring is difficult to see from the player, and the LEDs and wiring may be located behind these when viewed from the front. In addition, a pattern of the same shape as the LEDs and wiring may be printed or engraved on the transparent grass board 6420, so that the transparency of the grass board 6420 is ensured while the LEDs and wiring are difficult to see from the player. In this case, by illuminating the grass board front light emitting part 6422 and the grass board rear light emitting part 6424, the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, or a pattern of the same shape as the LED or wiring may be illuminated and become decorative. With this configuration, these components can achieve both the function of hiding the presence of the LED or wiring and the function of decoration.

In the examples shown in Fig. 131(C) to Fig. 143(G), one grass feature 6400 is configured with one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass back cover 6460, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440 and one grass back cover 6460, but at least one of the grass substrate 6420, grass front cover 6440, and grass back cover 6460 may be increased to a plurality of members to configure one grass feature 6400. For example, one grass feature 6400 may be configured by attaching two grass front covers 6440 to one grass substrate 6420, or one grass feature 6400 may be configured by attaching two grass substrates 6420 to one grass front cover 6440. In addition, when there are multiple grass substrates 6420, grass front covers 6440, and grass rear covers 6460, the embodiments in the examples shown in Figures 131(C) to 143(G) may be applied independently to each of the multiple components. For example, the mountain roler 6500 described below is an example in which two front covers are provided on one substrate, an opening is provided in one of the front covers to make the substrate located at the rear visible, and an opening is also provided in the substrate.

In the examples shown in Figures 138(A) to 140(D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but in order to make the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 difficult or impossible to see, a grass front cover light scattering part 6444 or a grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be provided on at least a part of the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 when viewed from the front, and a grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a and a grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b may be provided in front of the part other than the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 when viewed from the front. Even in such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, the grass front cover light scattering part 6444 or the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be provided to cover the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 in a strip-like shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 138(D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 may be expanded upward so that the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 138(E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 may be reduced upward so that the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. Also, in FIG. 138(F) and FIG. 138(G), the area occupied by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be expanded or reduced upward so that the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Alternatively, the same effect can be obtained even if the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 or the grass front cover opaque section 6446 is configured so that at least a portion of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the decorative grass front cover light scattering section 6444 or the grass front cover opaque section 6446.

In FIG. 118 and FIG. 126, an example is shown in which the grass reel 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, but the grass reel 6400 may be provided in a position other than this. For example, the grass reel 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, the grass reel 6400 may be provided in a member that constitutes the door frame 3. For example, the grass reel may be provided in the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570. Note that the grass reel 6400 is not limited to the grass reel 6400, and other reels may also be configured to be provided in the same position as the grass reel 6400.

In this way, the grass role object 6400 can be made visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc., thanks to the multiple components that make up the grass role object 6400, and can express the appearance of lush grass, dead grass, and dead grass with frost or snow. It can also express the appearance of grass changing from one of these states to another.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 are provided in front of the mountain role 6500. In these examples, the rabbit role 6000 has a face light-emitting part 6023, and the stump role 6100 has a first rear wall light-emitting part 6354a and a second rear wall light-emitting part 6354b, and it is possible to achieve a performance state by emitting light forward from these light-emitting parts. However, in these examples, there was a problem that the light from the light-emitting part is diffused by the members provided around the light-emitting part, and some of the light irradiated from the light-emitting part goes backward, so that the light from the light-emitting part cannot be efficiently irradiated forward, and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is reduced. Therefore, an example is shown below in which the utilization efficiency of the light from the light-emitting part can be improved by reflecting the light that goes backward forward at the front side of the mountain role 6500, which is a decorative body.

Figure 144 shows a modified example of the rabbit role 6000 shown in Figure 119 etc. Figure 144 (A) is a front view of the rabbit role 6000. Figure 144 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit role 6000. Figure 144 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit role 6000. The rabbit role 6000 is composed of a face cover part 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the rear side of the face cover part 6010, and a body part 6030 as a unit. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as face light emitting parts 6023 on the front side. The face substrate 6020 also has a mouth decoration part 6024 shaped to resemble a rabbit's mouth. A first arm 6016 and a second arm 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached to the bottom surface of the vertical direction of the face cover part 6010, imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. The bottom end of the face substrate 6020 is provided with a body part 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of white opaque synthetic resin and imitates the body part of a rabbit. The face cover part 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is provided with a first face light scattering part 6011a and a second face light scattering part 6011b at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b, respectively. Up to this point, it has the same configuration as the rabbit role-playing object 6000 shown in FIG. 119 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 144(A), the face substrate 6020 does not have the first ear 6021 or the second ear 6022, and is a horizontally long rectangle. The face substrate 6020 is attached so as to be fitted into the rearward concave portion formed by the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, and the face cover left surface 6015 of the face cover part 6010. In the face cover part 6010, the upper surface of the face cover upper surface 6012 is formed to protrude upward at two points on the left and right, thereby forming the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022. The front surface of the face cover part 6010 is printed with brown ink to form the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a.

When the rabbit part 6000 is configured in this way, the light from the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b is diffusely reflected by the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b, and then reflected multiple times by the upper face part 6012 of the face cover part, the right face part 6013 of the face cover part, the lower face part 6014 of the face cover part, the left face part 6015 of the face cover part, the first ear part 6021, the first ear decoration part 6021a, the second ear part 6022, the second ear decoration part 6022a, etc., and there is a risk that the light will be directed backwards.

In addition, even when the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b of the stump role 6100 shown in Figures 127 to 130 emit light, the light from the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b may be diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b, and then reflected backwards by the box upper wall unit 6310, the box right wall unit 6320, the box lower wall unit 6330, the box left wall unit 6340, etc.

Below is an example of how the light utilization efficiency can be improved by reflecting the light that has traveled backwards from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 back forward again at the front side of the mountain role 6500.

Figure 145 (A) shows a mountain role 6500. Note that the dotted lines in the figure indicate the positions where the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 are installed. For the rabbit role 6000, the outline of the face board 6020 is also shown by dotted lines. The mountain role 6500 is composed of a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain board 6520.

The front and rear surfaces of the substrate 6520 are made of white printed circuit boards. In addition, a number of LEDs that constitute the substrate front light emitting section 6522 are mounted on the front surface of the substrate 6520. In addition, a substrate opening 6524 is provided in approximately the center of the substrate 6520 in the left-right direction. The substrate opening 6524 is formed by providing a physical opening in a punched-out shape in the substrate 6520. Components located to the rear can be seen through the substrate opening 6524.

The first mountain front cover 6540 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542, a first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544, and a first mountain front cover opening 6548. With this configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be seen in the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow accumulates on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by providing a physical opening in a punched shape in the first mountain front cover 6540. In addition, the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed across the first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544. The mountain substrate 6520 located at the rear can be seen in white through the first mountain front cover opening 6548. The second mountain front cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. This configuration makes it possible to express the appearance of a mountain covered in snow or having a glacier. In addition, the mountain base opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 each decoratively express the appearance of a cave in the mountain through their shapes.

On the front of the mountain board 6520, the mountain board front first light emitting part 6522a to the mountain board front ninth light emitting part 6522i are provided as the mountain board front light emitting part 6522. In front of the mountain board front first light emitting part 6522a, the first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 is provided. In front of the mountain board front second light emitting part 6522b, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544 is provided. In front of the mountain board front third light emitting part 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544 is provided, and further in front of that, the face board 6020 provided for the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position is located. In front of the mountain board front fourth light emitting part 6522d, the first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 is provided, and further in front of that, the face board 6020 provided for the rabbit role 6000 in the standby position is located. A stump role 6100 is located in front of the fifth light-emitting portion 6522e on the front of the mountain board. A stump role 6100 is located in front of the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f on the front of the mountain board. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the seventh light-emitting portion 6522g on the front of the mountain board, and the stump role 6100 is located further in front of that. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the eighth light-emitting portion 6522h on the front of the mountain board. A second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided in front of the ninth light-emitting portion 6522i on the front of the mountain board.

When viewed from the front, the mountain feature 6500 has an area in which the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and appears white, an area in which the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered by the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and appears light blue, an area in which the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered by the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and appears light blue, an area in which the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and appears blue transparent, and an area in which the mountain substrate 6520 is located behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b. It is composed of an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned and is seen as a translucent blue color, an area where the mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided so that the rear component can be seen as an opening, an area where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered by the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562 and is seen as a white color, an area where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered by the second mountain front cover colorless light scattering part 6564 and is seen as a white color, and an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562 and is seen as a transparent color.

Figure 145 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned rabbit role 6000 and stump role 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain role 6500. Behind the rabbit role 6000, there are an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and viewed in white, an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered by the first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 and viewed in light blue, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered by the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544 and viewed in light blue, and in these areas, the light from the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b of the rabbit role 6000 provided in the front is diffused forward, making it possible to improve the efficiency of light use. In addition, behind the stump role 6100, there is an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and appears white, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered by the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562 and appears white. In these areas, the light from the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b of the stump role 6100 provided in the front is diffused forward, thereby improving the efficiency of light use. Thus, in this embodiment, one board is configured to have multiple reflective areas corresponding to multiple members each having a light emitting part.

In addition, when the light from the rabbit role 6000 or the stump role 6100 is reflected forward by the mountain board 6520 located behind the rabbit role 6000 or the stump role 6100, it is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the board area hidden by the rabbit role 6000 or the stump role 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt a white or light color as the color of the mountain board 6520. In addition, in the board area hidden by the rabbit role 6000 or the stump role 6100, it is preferable to configure the mountain board 6520 to be exposed without providing a cover in front, or to provide a colorless transparent cover when providing a cover. In the example shown in FIG. 145 (A), the mountain board 6520 is exposed in the area corresponding to the right side of the rabbit role 6000 when viewed from the front. In addition, in the area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed, electronic components such as the mountain board front light emitting unit 6522 are not mounted on the front of the mountain board 6520. In addition, in the area corresponding to the stump prop 6100, the mountain base plate 6520 is either exposed or covered by the second mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6562. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to further increase the efficiency of reflecting light forward.

Of the mountain board front light emitting parts 6522 provided on the mountain board 6520, the first mountain board front light emitting part 6522a and the fourth mountain board front light emitting part 6522d have a first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6542 in front, the second mountain board front light emitting part 6522b and the third mountain board front light emitting part 6522c have a first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544 in front, and the ninth mountain board front light emitting part 6522i has a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering part 6564 in front. In this way, by providing a colored or light scattering cover in front of the mountain board front light emitting part 6522, it is configured so that the light from the light emitting part is not directly irradiated to the player's eyes. On the other hand, the fifth mountain board front light emitting part 6522e and the sixth mountain board front light emitting part 6522f do not have a cover in front, and are exposed at the front of the mountain board 6520. This is because the light from the fifth light-emitting unit 6522e and the sixth light-emitting unit 6522f on the front of the mountain board is used to illuminate the stump role 6100 located in front, and the light from the fifth light-emitting unit 6522e and the sixth light-emitting unit 6522f on the front of the mountain board is not directly irradiated on the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain board front light-emitting unit 6522 less noticeable. In this way, in the mountain role 6500, the mountain board front light-emitting unit 6522 is not evenly arranged on the front of the mountain board 6520, but is unevenly arranged in correspondence with the first mountain front cover 6540, the second mountain front cover 6560, the rabbit role 6000, and the stump role 6100 located in front of the mountain board front light-emitting unit 6522.

Figure 145 (C) shows the rabbit role 6000 in a dotted line after it has moved from the standby position to the moving position. In this state, the third light-emitting portion 6522c on the front of the mountain board and the fourth light-emitting portion 6522d on the front of the mountain board, which were previously overlapping the rear of the rabbit role 6000 when viewed from the front, are configured to be visible to the player when viewed from the front. The rabbit role 6000 not only emits light when it is in the standby position as described above, but can also emit light in a specified color as a performance when it is in the moving position. In this case, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a performance using the same light-emitting color as the light-emitting color of the rabbit role 6000. For example, when the rabbit role 6000 is to be illuminated in white, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to execute a performance in which white lines extending radially from the location where the rabbit role 6000 is located are displayed.

Figure 145 (C) shows the rabbit role 6000 in a dotted line after it has moved from the standby position to the moving position. A third light-emitting portion 6522c on the front of the mountain board and a fourth light-emitting portion 6522d on the front of the mountain board are provided behind the rabbit role 6000 when viewed from the front, and these can emit light in a specified color as an effect whether the rabbit role 6000 is in the standby position or in the moving position. For example, when the rabbit role 6000 is in the moving position, the mountain board front light-emitting portion 6522 can be configured to emit light in white at the same time as a white line is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the rabbit role 6000 is in the standby position and the third light-emitting unit 6522c on the front of the mountain board and the fourth light-emitting unit 6522d on the front of the mountain board are illuminated as a performance, the light irradiated from the third light-emitting unit 6522c on the front of the mountain board and the fourth light-emitting unit 6522d on the front of the mountain board passes through the upper face part 6012 of the face cover part, the right face part 6013 of the face cover part, the lower face part 6014 of the face cover part, and the left face part 6015 of the face cover part of the rabbit role 6000, and the outline of the rabbit's face is illuminated. At this time, the light irradiated from the third light-emitting unit 6522c on the front of the mountain board and the fourth light-emitting unit 6522d on the front of the mountain board that constitutes the rabbit role 6000 is diffusely reflected backward, and this light is diffusely reflected forward again at the front of the mountain role 6500. With this configuration, the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light can be improved.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, the mountain role 6500 is configured to be larger than the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 in terms of area when viewed from the front, but a role with an area smaller than the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 when viewed from the front may be placed behind the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 to perform the same function as the mountain role 6500. For example, such a role may be placed so as to fit within the area formed by the face board 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 and the stump board part 6210 of the stump role 6100 when viewed from the front. In addition, as such a role, for example, a grass role 6400 shown in Figures 131 (A), 132 (A), 135 (A), and 141 (A) to 141 (D) may be used in which the front of the white grass substrate 6420 is exposed, or the front of the white grass substrate 6420 is covered with a colorless transparent part 6442a in front of the grass cover. Even in such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front is covered with a colorless transparent part 6442a in front of the grass cover can diffusely reflect light from the rabbit role 6000 or the stump role 6100 forward.

In the rabbit role 6000 shown in FIG. 144, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely contained in the face cover part 6010 when viewed from the front. Such a mode may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass role 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is contained in the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass rear cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass role 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is contained in the grass rear cover 6460 when viewed from the front. Specifically, for example, multiple substrates shaped like flowers may be attached to the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 or the front surface of the grass rear cover 6460 so that the substrates do not overlap when viewed from the front, and further, the entire substrates are completely contained in the grass front cover 6440 or the grass rear cover 6460. Even with this configuration, it is possible to realize decorations by combining the substrate and the grass front cover 6440, or the substrate and the grass rear cover 6460. Note that in other examples, this configuration may also be used when providing the substrate and cover.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side performance display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, and multiple gimmicks are provided in this space. Among these gimmicks, a first giant tree gimmick 6600, a second giant tree gimmick 6650, a first cloud gimmick 6700, a second cloud gimmick 6750, and a board back grass gimmick 6800 are provided in a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. These can be seen through the game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have the function of decorating the back surface of the game panel 1100.

The first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree role 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the first giant tree role 6600 is located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100, and the second giant tree role 6650 is located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree role 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk board 6610 and a first giant tree leaf board 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is composed of a brown printed circuit board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is composed of a green printed circuit board. A plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk board 6610 and the first giant tree leaf board 6630, and these light sources are directed to the right. The second giant tree role 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk board 6660 and a second giant tree leaf board 6680. The second giant tree trunk board 6660 is a brown board, and the second giant tree leaf board 6680 is a green board. A plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk board 6660 and the first giant tree leaf board 6680, and these light sources face leftward. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk board 6610 and the first giant tree leaf board 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk board 6660 and the second giant tree leaf board 6680, but each of these boards may be configured to adopt the structure related to the grass board 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in Figures 131 (A) to 143 (G).

The first cloud device 6700 and the second cloud device 6750 are arranged to cover the upper part of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud device 6700 and the second cloud device 6750 are each composed of a white printed circuit board. Each of these boards may be configured to adopt the structure related to the grass board 6420 of the grass device 6400 shown in Figures 131 (A) to 143 (G).

The first giant tree leaf board 6630 constituting the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree leaf board 6680 constituting the second giant tree role 6650 are configured so that they can be continuously seen by the player from the end of the game panel 1100, within the game area 5a, and even across the game panel opening 1100a. The second cloud role 6750 is configured so that it can be continuously seen by the player from outside the game area 5a, within the game area 5a, and even across the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf board 6630 constituting the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree leaf board 6680 constituting the second giant tree role 6650 are arranged so as to overtake the upper left and upper right of the game board side performance display device 1600, and are configured so that the game board side performance display device 1600 does not appear to be a square shape. The mountain role 6500 is also installed so that it overlaps the lower left and lower right of the game board side performance display device 1600, and is configured so that the game board side performance display device 1600 does not appear to be rectangular. In addition, the mountain role 6500 is installed in the position closest to the game board side performance display device 1600 among the roles installed in front of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Figure 146 shows the grass behind the board 6800. The grass behind the board 6800 is provided close to the back of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower part of the back of the game panel 1100. The grass behind the board 6800 is composed of a grass behind the board substrate 6820 and a grass behind the board cover 6840. The grass behind the board cover 6840 may be made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, for example, and specifically, may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin. The relationship between the grass behind the board substrate 6820 and the grass behind the board cover 6840 may be configured to adopt the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass before cover 6440 of the grass role 6400 shown in Figures 131 (A) to 143 (G). Similarly, the structure related to the grass behind cover 6460 may be adopted for the grass behind the board 6800.

The grass device 6800 is provided with a circular grass board opening 6824 and a grass front cover opening 6848 as passages for passing game balls that have entered a winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located in front and passed through an opening provided in the game panel 1100. The game balls that have passed through the grass board opening 6824 and the grass front cover opening 6848 are detected by sensors provided in the grass device 6800. The sensors that detect the game balls are attached below each passage and on the back of the grass board 6820. This configuration makes it possible to make the presence of the sensors difficult for players to see. As shown below, the board back grass substrate opening 6824 includes a board back grass substrate first opening 6824a to a board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d, and the board back grass front cover opening 6848 includes a board back grass front cover first opening 6848a to a board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d.

The first opening 6824a of the grass board and the first opening 6848a of the grass front cover are each the same size and are arranged in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front on the grass device 6800. The first opening 6824a of the grass board and the first opening 6848a of the grass front cover form a passage for passing a game ball that has entered a winning hole provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 and moved to the back side of the game panel 1100.

The front of the second opening 6824b of the board grass substrate is not covered by the board grass front cover 6840, and forms a passage for allowing the game ball to pass directly through to the exposed board grass substrate 6820.

The grass substrate 6820 is not located behind the second opening 6848b of the grass front cover, and the second opening 6848b of the grass front cover alone constitutes a passage for directly passing the game ball. In this example, the shape of the grass substrate 6820 is shaped to follow the contour of the lower part of the grass front cover second opening 6848b. This configuration makes it possible to make the shape of the grass substrate 6820 a decorative outer shape, while making it as difficult as possible to see the passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the second opening 6848b of the grass front cover to the sensor located below.

The third opening 6824c of the grass board and the third opening 6848c of the grass front cover are circular and of the same size, and are arranged in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front in the grass device 6800. The third opening 6824c of the grass board and the third opening 6848c of the grass front cover form a passage for passing the game ball that has entered the winning hole provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 and moved to the back side of the game panel 1100. In this example, two elliptical areas are formed in the grass front cover 6840 above the passage formed by the third opening 6824c of the grass board and the third opening 6848c of the grass front cover, making it possible to visually recognize a decorative shape that resembles a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passage part through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passage part can be made less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the board grass device 6800 is impaired.

The fourth opening 6824d of the grass board and the fourth opening 6848d of the grass front cover are the same size and shape, and are shaped like two elliptical parts protruding from the top of a circular outer shape. In addition, they are provided at positions where they overlap in the front view of the grass device 6800. The fourth opening 6824d of the grass board and the fourth opening 6848d of the grass front cover form a passage for passing the game ball that has entered the winning hole provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 and moved to the back side of the game panel 1100. In this example, the shape of the third opening 6824c of the grass board and the third opening 6848c of the grass front cover are themselves configured to be visible as a decorative shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. In this way, by using the shape of the passage part through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passage part can be made less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the board grass device 6800 is impaired.

The passage section through which the game ball passes may be configured to allow the game ball to pass by arranging a tubular member made of a colorless, transparent synthetic resin. The tubular member may also be made of a colored, transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the synthetic resin may be the same as that of the grass front cover 6840 or the grass base plate 6820. This configuration makes the presence of the tubular member less noticeable, and prevents the decorative function of the grass device 6800 from being impaired.

The first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the grass behind the board role 6800 are located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to visually recognize each role as a decoration without being aware of the presence of the rail member 5950. The entire rail member 5950 may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be made of multiple members in the longitudinal direction, at least one of which may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With this configuration, the visibility of each role located in the rear is improved, and the range in which decoration is performed can be expanded. The rail member 5950 may also be formed of synthetic resin of the same color as the role located in the rear. For example, if the grass behind the board accessory 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950, which is positioned so as to overlap the grass behind the board accessory 6800 in a front view, may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin.

If the game ball that is shot into the game area 5a is electrically charged, discharge may occur in an unintended place, causing electronic components to break down due to high voltage, or the control element to perform unintended improper control due to electromagnetic pulses generated by the discharge. In particular, when features equipped with printed circuit boards on which electronic components are mounted, such as the first giant tree feature 6600, the second giant tree feature 6650, the first cloud feature 6700, the second cloud feature 6750, and the grass behind the board feature 6800, are provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the electronic components mounted on these boards are more likely to suffer such an incident.

In these devices, in the case where a front cover is provided, at least a part of the front cover may be configured to have a silver opaque portion formed by the above-mentioned metal thin film. More specifically, the front cover may be configured to be provided so that such an opaque portion is located in front of the location where the electronic components are mounted on the board. Also, each device may be configured so that the front surface of each device that may be affected by such charged game balls does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, each device may be configured so that at least in the area that overlaps with the game area 5a in which the charged game balls roll and fall in a front view, the front surface of each device does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100.

It is also desirable to have the earth path of the earth wire (not shown) installed on the game panel 1100 and the earth path of the earth wire (not shown) installed on each role as separate as possible. For example, it is not desirable to have the earth wire (not shown) installed on the game panel 1100 finally installed on the island equipment via the earth circuit installed on each role, or conversely, to have the earth wire of each role finally installed on the island equipment via the earth circuit installed on the game panel 1100. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an earth circuit board with a static elimination function at a predetermined location on the back of the gaming machine, and configure the earth path from the game panel 1100 and the earth path from each role to merge on the earth circuit board. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electrically charged game balls shot into the game area 5a.

118 and 126 show an example in which the grass device 6800 is provided under the back of the game panel 1100, but instead of the grass device 6800, the mountain device 6500, the rabbit device 6000, and the stump device 6100 may be provided under the back of the game panel 1100. In this case, the light diffused backward from the rabbit device 6000 and the stump device 6100 can be reflected forward again to improve the efficiency of light use. In addition, by utilizing the reflection function of the mountain base plate 6520, other decorative devices and a winning port unit equipped with a winning port may be arranged in front of the mountain device in the same manner as the rabbit device 6000 and the stump device 6100. In this case, the light emitted from the light emitting unit equipped in the decorative device and the winning port unit and diffused backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain base plate 6520.

In addition, by providing multiple cylindrical spacers on the back surface of the front cover that constitutes these features, the front surface of the substrate may be in contact with the top of the spacers and not in direct contact with the back surface of the front cover. Specifically, the structure of each spacer may be a cylindrical structure with a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm perpendicular to the back surface of the front cover. The spacers and the front cover may be molded by integral molding using the same material. In addition, when the front cover has multiple areas, the spacers may be configured to be provided in areas where it is difficult to see the rear. For example, the colored transparent part of the front cover, the colored light scattering part, and the spacers may be molded by integral molding using a green transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the spacers are green transparent. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure the colored transparent part without providing a spacer, and to provide a spacer in the colored light scattering part. By providing a spacer of this configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with a spacer height separation. With this configuration, the part closest to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 is decorated with the front cover, and the part a few mm behind the front cover is decorated with the board. In this case, compared to when the part closest to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 is decorated with the board, the board is located further back, so while the decorative effect of the board's color and outer shape can be achieved, the presence of through-holes and electronic components on the board can be made less noticeable to players. In addition, by separating the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 from the board, it is possible to reduce the effect of discharges and electromagnetic pulses from charged gaming balls on the board.

The grass behind the board 6800, the first giant tree 6600, the second giant tree 6650, the first cloud 6700, and the second cloud 6750 are each provided close to the back of the game panel 1100. Specifically, they are arranged closer to the center between the surface forming the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the back of the game panel 1100. In addition, the rabbit 6000 and the stump 6100 are provided as movable roles in the space between the grass behind the board 6800, the first giant tree 6600, the second giant tree 6650, the first cloud 6700, and the second cloud 6750 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The rabbit 6000 and the stump 6100 may be configured to be provided at the bottom of the game panel 1100 where the grass behind the board 6800 is provided.

In the case of a device that does not have a front cover, such as the first giant tree device 6600, the second giant tree device 6650, the first cloud device 6700, and the second cloud device 6750, when a light-emitting section is provided on the front of the board, a scattering section that scatters the light irradiated from the light-emitting section may be formed on the back of the game panel 1100 that overlaps with the light-emitting section in a front view. Alternatively, in these devices, even when a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided in a position that overlaps with the light-emitting section in a front view, a scattering section may be formed on the back of the game panel 1100 in a similar manner.

In Figs. 127 to 130, an example is shown in which a stump role 6100 is provided, but the components that make up the stump role 6100 may be configured to be movable as part of a performance. For example, the box upper wall 6310, box right wall 6320, box lower wall 6330, box left wall 6340, and box rear wall 6350 that make up the stump box section 6300 may be configured to be movable as part of a performance.

Figures 147(A) to 147(D) show the state in which the box upper wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 are moved from the standby position to the moving position in the stump box 6300 shown in Figures 129(A) and 130(A). Figure 147(A) shows an example in which the box upper wall 6310 is moved backward until the front end of the box upper wall 6310 contacts the upper end of the box rear wall 6350. Figure 147(B) shows an example in which the box right wall 6320 is moved left and rear until the front end of the box right wall 6320 contacts the right end of the box rear wall 6350. Figure 147(C) shows an example in which the box lower wall 6330 is moved backward until the front end of the box lower wall 6330 contacts the lower end of the box rear wall 6350. FIG. 147(D) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 has been moved to the right rear until the front end of the box right wall portion 6320 comes into contact with the left end of the box rear wall portion 6350. Only one of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown in the figure, and the other walls may be configured to be immovable, or multiple of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable; for example, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of light from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b to the stump board unit 6210, the first grass movable unit 6360, and the second grass movable unit 6370 provided in front of the stump box unit 6300. For example, before the box upper wall unit 6310 is moved backward, the light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box unit 6300, and the stump board unit 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box unit 6300. On the other hand, when the box upper wall unit 6310 is moved backward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b is no longer reflected on the box upper wall unit 6310, so the light irradiated diagonally upward from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 travels straight and illuminates the back side of the stump board unit 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box 6300, the stump board 6210 is also illuminated in the area above the front of the stump box 6300. In this way, by moving the box upper wall 6310, it is possible to change the illuminated area. Note that even if the box right wall 6320 to the box left wall 6340 are slid backward instead of the box upper wall 6310, it is possible to change the illuminated area in accordance with each of the moved walls.

The box rear wall 6350 may also be configured to be movable in the forward and backward directions while maintaining its inclination. For example, the box rear wall 6350 may be configured to be movable forward from the state shown in FIG. 129(A) or FIG. 130(A) so that the upper end of the box rear wall 6350 contacts the front end of the box upper wall 6310 and the lower end of the box rear wall 6350 contacts the front end of the box lower wall 6330. The box rear wall 6350 may also be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG. 129(A).

The box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable relative to the box rear wall portion 6350. For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rectangular in shape and the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and to be rotatable about an axis formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350 and an axis formed by the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to cover the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 by rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, or the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be parallel to the box rear wall portion 6350 by rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 outward. In addition, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 may be rectangular in shape and of the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and may be configured to be rotatable relative to the box rear wall portion 6350 in a manner similar to the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340.

Although an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 can be moved has been shown, in the example shown in Fig. 129 (A) to Fig. 129 (D), the rear wall substrate 6352 including the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 may be fixed, and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, it becomes possible to irradiate the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 directly to the stump opening 6210a without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially, making it possible to illuminate the entire rear wall cover 6356. When adopting such an embodiment, it is advisable to also make the areas of the rear wall cover 6356 other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b into scattering portions. With this configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-to-rear direction, allowing the player to visually distinguish between a state in which a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state in which the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated.

In the example shown in Figures 130(A) to 130(D), the rear wall panel portion 6380 may be fixed, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be movable in the front-to-rear direction relative to the rear wall panel portion 6380, similar to the box rear wall portion 6350 described above.

Although examples have been shown in which fixedly installed members may be made movable, in these examples, it is preferable to configure the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b to continue to maintain a predetermined light-emitting mode from before the members start to after they finish moving. As the predetermined light-emitting mode, for example, the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b may be continuously lit, periodically blinking, or in an off state where no light is emitted. In addition, when performing a light-emitting mode in which the light is continuously lit or periodically blinking, the same color may be continuously emitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the performance mode visually recognized by the player by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356, rather than changing the light-emitting mode of the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b.

On the other hand, the light emission state of the first rear wall light-emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting unit 6354b may be changed during the period from when the movement of the member starts to when the movement of the member ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a more complex presentation mode.

In addition, an example has been shown in which components such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved as a performance from the state shown in Figures 129 and 130, but it is also possible to configure the configuration so that a specific moved component becomes in the state shown in Figures 129 and 130 by moving components such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as a performance. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the performance state as perceived by the player.

Although an example has been shown in which the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move left and right, etc., the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 may be configured not to move. Even in such a configuration, the light emission mode of the stump roler 6100 can be diversified by moving components such as the box upper wall part 6310 to the box rear wall part 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356. The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 may also be configured as a single component. In this case, the first grass decorative part 6360a and the second grass decorative part 6370a may be configured as a single decorative part, or may be configured as multiple decorative parts. In addition, the first grass decoration part 6360a and the second grass decoration part 6370a may be colored and semi-transparent by painting, attaching a sticker, or other methods, so that when light from the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is irradiated forward, the light hits the first grass decoration part 6360a and the second grass decoration part 6370a, creating a special effect.

Also, as shown below, the stump device 6100 may be configured to be formed by the stump box section 6300 and the grass board section 6381, without providing the first grass movable section 6360, the second grass movable section 6370, and the stump board section 6210.

Figure 148 shows an example in which the stump board section 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box section 6300, and a fixed grass board section 6381 is provided instead of the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370. The grass board section may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The grass board section 6381 also has multiple decorative sections. Specifically, it has a green grass board colored transparent section 6381a that imitates the outer shape of grass, a grass board central decorative section 6382a that imitates the shape of an animal's face, an upper grass board decorative section 6382b, a right grass board decorative section 6382c, a lower grass board decorative section 6382d, a left grass board decorative section 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass board colorless transparent section 6381b that is the other area. The colored transparent grass board part 6381a, the central grass board decoration part 6382a, the upper grass board decoration part 6382b, the right grass board decoration part 6382c, the lower grass board decoration part 6382d, and the left grass board decoration part 6382e are each formed by printing or attaching a sticker to the front or rear surface of the grass board part 6381, which is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The central grass board decoration part 6382a is formed in a linear shape of an animal's face and ears, and the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be seen. On the other hand, the upper grass board decoration part 6382b, the right grass board decoration part 6382c, the lower grass board decoration part 6382d, and the left grass board decoration part 6382e are shaped like an animal's face and are made semi-transparent or colored transparent to allow light to pass through.

In this configuration, as described above, by moving components such as the upper box wall 6310, the right box wall 6320, the lower box wall 6330, the left box wall 6340, the rear box wall 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356, the lighting state of the grass board center decoration 6382a, the upper grass board decoration 6382b, the right grass board decoration 6382c, the lower grass board decoration 6382d, and the left grass board decoration 6382e can be changed. In particular, the upper grass board decoration 6382b, the right grass board decoration 6382c, the lower grass board decoration 6382d, and the left grass board decoration 6382e can be changed from a state in which almost no light was irradiated to a state in which light is irradiated, and the shapes imitating the faces of each animal can be configured to be visible to the player.

The stump box 6300 has a box shape with an upper wall 6310, a right wall 6320, a lower wall 6330, a left wall 6340, and a rear wall 6350 as its respective faces and no front facing face, but the position, size, or shape of at least one of these members may be changed.

Figure 149 shows a modified example of the example shown in Figure 148. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are rectangular with the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are arranged at right angles to the box rear wall portion 6350, so that the stump box portion 6300 is made into a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump board portion 6210 is not provided, and the grass board portion 6381 is located close to the front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. In this configuration, as described above, the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are configured to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, so that the irradiation mode of the light irradiated from the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 to the grass board portion 6381 can be changed as a performance. In addition, in order to make the stump box section 6300 rectangular in shape, the right grass board decorative section 6382c has been moved to the left and the left grass board decorative section 6382e has been moved to the right, compared to the example shown in FIG. 148.

Figures 150 to 152 show modified examples of the example shown in Figure 149. The shapes and mounting methods of the box rear wall 6350 differ in the examples shown in Figures 150 to 152. In the example shown in Figure 150(A), the box rear wall 6350 is configured to be positioned so that it is shifted halfway to the left when viewed from the front. Figure 150(B) shows an enlarged view of the stump box 6300 in the example shown in Figure 150(A).

In the example shown in FIG. 151(A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be expanded to twice its length to the left when viewed from the front. FIG. 151(B) shows an expanded state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 151(A). FIG. 153(A) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 151(A). Also, FIG. 153(B) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 151(A).

In the example shown in FIG. 152(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be reduced to half its size in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 152(B) shows an enlarged view of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 152(A). FIG. 153(C) shows the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 152(A). Also, FIG. 153(D) shows the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 152(A).

Under these conditions, when the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b (for details, see Figs. 130(A), 130(B), 153(A), and 153(B)) of the stump box portion 6300 shown in Fig. 150(A) and Fig. 151(A) are illuminated, it is possible to illuminate the grass board central decorative portion 6382a and the grass board left decorative portion 6382e from behind. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 to the rear, it is possible to illuminate the grass board upper decorative portion 6382b as well. On the other hand, the amount of light irradiated to the grass board central decorative portion 6382a is reduced, making it relatively inconspicuous. In addition, when the box right wall 6320 and the box bottom wall 6330 are moved backward instead of the box top wall 6310, the grass board right decorative part 6382c and the grass board bottom decorative part 6382d can be in a luminous decorative state. Although an example in which both the first rear wall luminous part 6354a and the second rear wall luminous part 6354b are luminous is shown, in the example shown in FIG. 151 (A), the area protruding from the stump box part 6300 to the left side in front view may be configured not to be luminous. In this case, only the grass board center decorative part 6382a can be in a luminous decorative state. From this state, the box top wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, and the box bottom wall 6330 may be configured to be moved backward as described above.

In addition, when the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b (see FIG. 153(C) and FIG. 153(D) for details) of the stump box part 6300 shown in FIG. 152(A) are illuminated, the grass board central decorative part 6382a can be illuminated from behind. Here, by moving the box upper wall part 6310 backward, the grass board upper decorative part 6382b can also be illuminated. On the other hand, the grass board central decorative part 6382a becomes relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated is reduced. In addition, when the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, and the box left wall part 6340 are moved backward instead of the box upper wall part 6310, the grass board right decorative part 6382c, the grass board lower decorative part 6382d, and the grass board left decorative part 6382e can be illuminated.

In this way, when the grass board central decorative part 6382a is illuminated, the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, and the box left wall part 6340 can be moved backward to illuminate the grass board upper decorative part 6382b, the grass board right decorative part 6382c, the grass board lower decorative part 6382d, and the grass board left decorative part 6382e. At this time, the grass board central decorative part 6382a is illuminated with a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by making the grass board upper decorative part 6382b, the grass board right decorative part 6382c, the grass board lower decorative part 6382d, and the grass board left decorative part 6382e illuminated, it may be configured to suggest or notify some state of the gaming machine. For example, when four states with different degrees of advantage for the player are occurring or can occur, the grass board upper decorative portion 6382b may be configured to be in a luminous decorative state corresponding to the most advantageous state, the grass board right decorative portion 6382c may be configured to be in a luminous decorative state corresponding to the second most advantageous state, the grass board left decorative portion 6382e may be configured to be in a luminous decorative state corresponding to the third most advantageous state, and the grass board lower decorative portion 6382d may be configured to be in a luminous decorative state corresponding to the fourth most advantageous state. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player as to which wall portion will move when the grass board center decorative portion 6382a is in a luminous decorative state.

Alternatively, with the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b in an unlit state and the grass board central decoration part 6382a not illuminated, first, one of the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, and the box left wall part 6340 may be moved backwards and, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b may be illuminated. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in advance which of the grass board upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e will be visible. In this case, each wall part is provided in an upright state in the front direction, and the player cannot necessarily notice that each wall part has moved. Therefore, if a player notices the movement of one of the walls, they will watch with great anticipation as the decorative part changes to an illuminated state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, for example, in a game state that is unfavorable to the player (such as a so-called normal game state), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be set to a forward position (non-operating position) so that only the front grass board central decoration portion 6382a is limited to the dispatch decoration mode, and only in a game state that is favorable to the player (such as a probability fluctuation state, a time-saving game state, or a jackpot game state), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be moved backward, and light may be irradiated onto the grass board upper decoration portion 6382b to the grass board left decoration portion 6382e, increasing the area that is in the light-emitting decoration mode. This allows the appearance of the light-emitting area to be changed to match the player's interest as he or she moves from an unfavorable game state to an advantageous game state and improves.

In the examples shown with reference to Figures 150(A) and 152(A), an opening is provided on the right side of the rear wall 6350 of the box, but in this case, for example, a decorative member that moves in the front-to-rear direction may be configured to appear and disappear through the opening.

Referring to Figs. 150(A) to 153(D), examples are shown in which the rear wall 6350 of the box is shifted to the left and enlarged or reduced, but it may also be configured to be shifted upward, rightward, or downward in the same manner and enlarged or reduced. In addition, the structure of the stump box 6300 is not limited to the example shown in Fig. 129, and the example shown in Fig. 130 may also be adopted.

In Figures 129 to 130, an example is shown in which the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are provided on the box rear wall portion 6350, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, at least one of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to have a light-emitting portion or light scattering portion or other light-emitting structure.

Specifically, in the modified example shown with reference to Figs. 148(A) to 153(D), the box upper wall 6310 may be provided with a light-emitting section or light-scattering section as described with reference to Figs. 129 and 130 to illuminate the inside of the stump box 6300 and the grass board 6381. In this case, at least one of the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 may be configured to move backward as in the example shown in Figs. 147(A) to 147(D). With this configuration, it becomes possible to illuminate the grass board 6381 not only in front of the opening of the stump box 6300, but also to the right, below, and left of the opening of the stump box 6300, in addition to the front, from a state in which only the front area corresponding to the opening of the stump box 6300 was mainly illuminated. In addition, an example has been shown in which light-emitting sections and light-scattering sections are provided on the box upper wall section 6310 to illuminate the inside of the stump box section 6300, but instead of the box upper wall section 6310, light-emitting sections and light-scattering sections may be provided on the box right wall section 6320, the box lower wall section 6330, and the box left wall section 6340, so that the lighting pattern can be changed by moving each wall section.

The upper, right, lower, and left wall sections 6310, 6320, and 6330 of the box are each formed as plates of the same thickness, but the inner walls of these walls may be structured so that they are inclined outwardly so that the thickness of the walls becomes thinner toward the front. This structure allows the light reflected inside the stump box section 6300 to be more easily reflected toward the front.

To change the manner in which light is irradiated onto the grass board portion 6381 by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be formed from a colored, opaque material, or the inner walls may be plated with a thin aluminum film to provide a reflecting portion that can reflect light and a scattering portion that can scatter light. This configuration makes it possible to more clearly highlight the manner in which the manner in which light is irradiated onto the grass board portion 6381 changes. Note that even if the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are formed from a colorless, transparent, or colored, transparent material, and the inner and outer walls are smooth, it is still possible to change the manner in which light is irradiated onto the grass board portion 6381.

As mentioned above, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and other components may be modified to be movable, but only one of these components may be movable, any multiple components may be movable, or all components may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and the other components may be fixed and immovable. Also, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and the other components may be fixed and immovable. . All of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, the luminous decoration pattern for the grass board portion 6381 can be changed.

Movement of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, etc. may be performed by a driving means (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Light emission of the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a, the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b, etc. may also be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

Figures 118 to 153 show an embodiment in which various movable bodies (such as rabbit role 6000 and stump role 6100, hereinafter sometimes referred to as movable bodies within the game board) used for effects and decoration are provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. Below, an embodiment is shown in which a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as frame movable body) used for effects and decoration is provided on the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1.

Figures 154(A) to 154(E) show an embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 modeled after the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) as movable frame bodies. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and their specific structure and operating modes will be described later.

Figures 154(A) and 154(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 154(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 154(D) and 154(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 154(A), 154(C), and 154(D) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stored in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 154(B) and 154(E) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570. Figure 154(D) shows the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stored in the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided at the top of the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided at the center of the door frame 3, and through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located at the rear, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various movable objects within the game board (rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, etc.) can be seen. A dish unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has an operation button 410, and can accept operation input by the player. Note that the upper dish 321, the lower dish 322, the ball loan button 328, the return button 329, etc. are omitted from the illustration.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its top, right side, and left side are arranged to overlap, respectively, with the top, right side, and left side of the door frame base unit 100 that constitutes the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm, and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 has a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit corresponding to the right ear frame movable body 7100 that can move in the vertical direction, and a left ear opening 7010 on the door frame top unit corresponding to the left ear frame movable body 7200 that can move in the vertical direction.

As shown in Figures 154(A) to 154(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. The specific structures and operating modes of these are shown below. Note that since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are basically identical in structure, the following explanation may only refer to the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 has a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7112 made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inside, and a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7114 made of a white semi-transparent synthetic resin on the outside. The surfaces other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are formed of the same white semi-transparent synthetic resin as the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 in a front view. In addition, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 in a front view. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is specifically composed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film applied to both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, and the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 can be illuminated and decorated by the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 can be illuminated and decorated by the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to move from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 154(A), 154(C), and 154(D) to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 154(B) and 154(E). The top surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shaped to resemble an animal's ears, and can be decoratively expressed as an animal's ears moving by either being stored in the door frame top unit 570 or protruding vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, semi-transparent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 154(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the front of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a dimly illuminated state. Note that a similar structure may also be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments, and in this case, too, the light irradiated from the light emitting part provided corresponding to the frame movable body is reflected and scattered within the door frame top unit 570, making it possible for the player to visually recognize the front and side of the door frame top unit 570 in a dimly illuminated state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are protruding from the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 on the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110, and the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7212 and the left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7214 on the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 can be visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light-emitting performance state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body is positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, which increases the area it occupies in the player's field of vision when he looks up, making it appear as if the volume of the housing has increased, providing the player with a surprise and amusement that was not possible before.

Next, referring to Figures 155 (A) to 156 (B), examples of performances that combine the specific operation modes of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the display modes of the frame movable body simulation images that are images that mimic the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in accordance with the operation modes of the frame movable bodies, the operation reception modes of the player using the operation buttons 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit), and the light emission modes of the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7218 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body light-emitting unit), etc. are shown.

Figures 155(A) to 156(B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the frame movable body displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit, respectively.

In the time charts shown in Figures 155(A) to 156(B), the passage of time is indicated by t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the drawings such as Figures 164(A) to 165(B), 170(A) to 171(B), 179(A) to 180(B), etc., which will be described later, as well as drawings that are variations of these.

Figure 155 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 155 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 156 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 156 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the performance patterns shown in Figures 155(A) to 156(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the display manner of the frame movable body simulation image, the timing at which operation acceptance to the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display begins, and the timing at which the light-emitting unit of the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting performance state to an off state are all the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting unit of the frame movable body changes from an off state to a light-emitting performance state or a specific light-emitting performance state may differ depending on the performance pattern. Below, specific performance examples for each performance pattern are shown with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 155(A) to 156(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in an initial state (before timing t0) where they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rise simultaneously (timing t7).

At the same time, the display of a frame movable body simulation image begins in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. Also, at the same time, the display of a door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, also begins. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation image is composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulation image is dynamically displayed in such a manner that the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise in accordance with the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulation images end the rise of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in accordance with the timing (timing t9) at which the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 ends, and thereafter continue to be displayed in a manner indicating a stopped state (from timing t9 onwards). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rise at timing t7, and at timing t9, two seconds later, they reach a state in which they have completed their rise (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or the rise state).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, and the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the operation instruction display). As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing the operation of the operation unit (for example, the character string "PUSH!!") may be displayed. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all frame movable body light emitting units change from a state in which they have performed a light emitting performance to an extinguished state.

Figures 155(A) and 155(B) show the presentation mode when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period during which operation on the operation unit is valid has started (timing t9). In these presentation patterns, the display of the operation instructions ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 155 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light-emitting unit of the movable frame body changes from an off state to a specific light-emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the light-emitting unit of the movable frame body changes to the specific light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 155 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes from an off state to a normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes to a normal light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a miss.

In the specific light-emitting performance state, it is preferable to adopt a light-emitting mode that is more stimulating to the player, such as faster flashing, stronger light, and more colors, compared to the light-emitting mode in the normal light-emitting performance state. In this way, the player is made to see a specific light-emitting mode that is different from the normal mode, and this indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, in the specific light-emitting performance state, the inner part of the movable frame body and the outer part of the movable frame body may be configured to be in a light-emitting performance state in different modes. For example, the inner part of the movable frame body may be configured to be visible in a light-emitting mode that is more stimulating than the outer part of the movable frame body. It is also possible to configure the specific light-emitting performance state and the normal light-emitting performance state to be applicable to other embodiments.

Figures 156 (A) and 156 (B) show the presentation mode when, after the period during which operation of the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined specified time has elapsed. In these presentation patterns, the display of the operation instructions ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into a specified light-emitting presentation state according to the special lottery result.

Figure 156 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and at the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the frame movable body light-emitting section goes into a specific light-emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting section goes into the specific light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 156 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the light-emitting part of the movable frame goes into the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the light-emitting part goes into the normal light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 155(A) to FIG. 156(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the effective operation period, the decorative symbols that have been changing are displayed in a state corresponding to the special lottery result. For example, in the case of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 155(A) and FIG. 156(A), the decorative symbols are displayed in a pattern of matching numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, and in the case of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 155(B) and FIG. 156(B), the decorative symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern (e.g., "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a miss.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body starts to move from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) while maintaining the light emission state of either the specific light emission performance state or the normal light emission performance state. At the same time, the frame movable body simulated image changes to a display state in which it descends in accordance with the descending movement of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the frame movable body to the stored position is completed, the frame movable body simulated image changes to a display state in which it has completely finished descending in accordance with the descending movement of the real frame movable body, and the display ends.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light-emitting state of the movable frame body may be configured to change from a specific light-emitting presentation state to a normal light-emitting presentation state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light-emitting presentation state continues, and the next decorative pattern begins to change.

Figures 157(A) to 157(C) are schematic diagrams showing the movement state of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulation image, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the state of the operation instruction display, and the change in the frame movable body light emission performance state over time when the performance pattern shown in Figure 155(A) is executed. Note that, as mentioned above, the performance pattern shown in Figure 155(A) is the performance pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Figure 157 (A) shows the state at timing t5, where the decorative pattern is changing in a reach state, the frame movable body is in the stored position (first state) in the normal light-emitting performance state, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation unit is in an operation disabled period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 157 (B) shows the state at timing t8, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in a reach state, the frame movable body is in a light-emitting performance state and is moving from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), the frame movable body simulation image is a display simulating the state of moving from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 157 (C) shows the state at timing t11, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in a reach state, the movable frame body is turned off and in the raised position (second state), the movable frame body simulation image is a display simulating the movable frame body in the raised position (second state), the effective operation period has started in the operation unit, and an image simulating the operation unit is displayed as an operation instruction display.

Figure 158 (A) shows the state at timing t19, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in a reach state, the movable frame body is in a raised position (second state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 158 (B) shows the state at timing t23, where the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in a sequence of numbers (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the movable frame body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the state of moving from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 158 (C) shows the state at timing t28, where the decorative symbols are displayed in a sequence of numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the frame movable body is in the stored position (first state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulation image at the timing when the frame movable body starts to move, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player misses the operation of the frame movable body or the change in the light emission mode in response to the operation of the operation unit. Also, by having the frame movable body appear in an unprecedented position in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and amusement. Also, by having the light emission mode of the frame movable body light emitting part change in response to the player's operation of the operation unit, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he or she has decided the special lottery result.

Figures 159(A) to 159(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 154(A) to 154(E). Figures 159(A) and 159(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 159(C) and 159(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 159(E) and 159(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 159(A), 159(C), and 159(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Figures 159(B), 159(D), and 159(F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159(C) and FIG. 159(E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 each have a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 on the front side when in a standby position (first state), and by rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). A frame movable body with such a structure may be configured to execute the performance pattern described above with reference to FIG. 155(A) to FIG. 156(B). Also, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body with such a structure.

Figures 160(A) to 160(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 159(A) to 159(F). Figures 160(A) and 160(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 160(C) and 160(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 160(E) and 160(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 160(A), 160(C), and 160(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 160(B), 160(D), and 160(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 160(C) and 160(E), the movable frame body has a rotation axis at the rear side, and rotates 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side, causing the movable frame body to move from a standby position (first state) to a moving position (second state). A movable frame body with this structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B). Also, modified examples of the time charts described below may be applied to a movable frame body with this structure.

Figures 161(A) to 161(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 154(A) to 154(E). Figures 161(A) and 161(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 161(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 161(D) and 161(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 161(A), 161(C), and 161(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 161(B) and 161(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the upper part of the frame movable body is visible when viewed from the front in the standby state (first state). A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance pattern described above with reference to Figures 155 (A) to 156 (B). Also, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this way, a part of the frame movable body is visible when viewed from the front in the standby state, making it possible for the player to imagine that the frame movable body moves. Also, during normal play, only the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118 and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 are in the normal light-emitting performance state, and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7216 may be configured to emit light only when the specific light-emitting performance state is set. Also, a similar light-emitting pattern may be adopted in frame movable bodies having other structures.

Figures 162(A) to 162(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 161(A) to 161(E). Figures 162(A) and 162(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 162(C) and 162(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 162(E) and 162(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 162(A), 162(C), and 162(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Figures 162(B), 162(D), and 162(F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, when in the standby position (first state), the left and right frame movable bodies are adjacent to each other, and the upper part of the frame movable body is visible when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit upper both ear openings 7040. In addition, the frame movable bodies are configured to be able to move upward while being separated from each other in the left and right directions. When moved to the moving position (second state), they are visible to the player in a state similar to that of FIG. 154 (B). A frame movable body with such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIG. 155 (A) to FIG. 156 (B). In addition, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body with such a structure.

Figures 163(A) to 163(E) show another embodiment in which a movable frame body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 that constitutes the door frame 3. In this embodiment, the movable frame body is rotatable, but the specific structure and operation will be described later.

Figures 163(A) and 163(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 163(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 163(D) and 163(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 163(B) and 163(E) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the state shown in Figures 163(A) and 163(D), protruding above the door frame top unit 570.

The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, translucent synthetic resin, and in the stored state shown in FIG. 163(A), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured so as not to be visible to the player when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the player views the door frame top unit 570 from diagonally above in front, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each visible, as shown in FIG. 163(C).

As shown in Figures 163(A) to 163(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit and a left ear opening 7010 on the door frame top unit. When viewed in a plan view, the right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit and the left ear opening 7010 on the door frame top unit are shaped like vertically long rectangles. In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. Apart from these points, the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment basically has the same structure as that described with reference to Figures 154(A) to 154(E).

As shown in Figures 163(A) to 163(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. The specific structures and operating modes of these are shown below. Note that since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are basically identical in structure, the following explanation may only refer to the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Figures 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 in a stored state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing upward. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 has a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inside, and a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 made of a white translucent synthetic resin on the outside. On the other hand, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 is entirely formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (top, left side, right side) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140. The right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 is attached near the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 of a similar structure, and can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can rotate at any angle clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the right, and can be stopped at any angle, independently of each other, by controlling a pulse motor (not shown).

As shown in Figures 163 (A) to 163 (E), the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a right-side light-emitting unit 7050 that illuminates the right-ear frame movable body 7100. The right-side light-emitting unit 7050 is installed in a state rotated about 30 degrees clockwise from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right-side light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically composed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film applied to both sides, and a light-emitting diode that can irradiate light to the right-ear frame movable body first surface 7110 located at the rear under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on its upper surface. By emitting light with a predetermined color from this light-emitting diode, it is possible to make the right-ear frame movable body first surface 7110 a predetermined light-emitting performance mode. The left-side light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right-side light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be rotated by a predetermined angle from a state in which they are stored in a standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D) by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Figures 163(B) and 163(E) are examples of this, showing the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the stored state when viewed from the right, and in a vertical state, with the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 stopped facing forward. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shaped to resemble animal ears, and can be decoratively expressed as standing animal ears by either being stored in the door frame top unit 570 or being perpendicular to the top surface of the door frame top unit 570.

In addition, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be made visible to the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. When rotating in this way, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 multiple times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can also be said that Figures 163 (B) and 163 (E) show the state during rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate multiple times clockwise when viewed from the right, or may be configured to rotate multiple times counterclockwise when viewed from the right. With this configuration, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 can be alternately viewed by the player. Additionally, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately visible to the player.

It has been shown that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped at a predetermined position or rotated, and that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can each be put into a predetermined decorative state by the light emitted from the right light-emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit. Specific examples are shown below.

As shown in Figures 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D), when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are facing downward, and light is irradiated from the right light-emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light reflected within the door frame top unit 570 can cause the entire door frame top unit 570 to glow dimly. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 163 (B) and 163 (E), when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are facing forward and light is irradiated from the right side light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light enables the player to visually recognize that the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are decorated. Even in this case, some of the light emitted from the right light-emitting portion 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting portion 7052 inside the door frame top unit is reflected by the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and this reflected light illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside, so that the entire door frame top unit 570 is visible to the player with a somewhat dim glow.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, the emitted light alternately illuminates the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220. Also, the entire door frame top unit 570 is visible to the player with a somewhat dim glow.

In this way, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned or rotated in a stationary state above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, so the area occupied by the player's field of vision when looking up increases, and the volume of the housing appears to have increased, providing the player with a surprise and amusement that was not possible before.

Next, referring to Figures 164 (A) to 165 (B), examples of performances that combine the specific operation modes of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the display modes of the frame movable body simulation images that are images that mimic the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in accordance with the operation modes of the frame movable bodies, the operation reception modes of the player on the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit), and the light emission modes of the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. are shown.

Figures 164(A) to 165(B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the frame movable body displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the illumination mode of light on the frame movable body.

Figure 164 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 164 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 165 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 165 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the performance patterns shown in Figures 164 (A) to 165 (B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from a standby state (first state) to a rotating state (second state), the display state of the frame movable body simulation image, the timing at which operation acceptance to the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display begins, and the timing at which the light irradiation state on the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting performance state to an off state are all the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from a rotating state (second state) to another state, and the timing at which the light irradiation state on the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting performance state to a specific light-emitting performance state may differ depending on the performance pattern. Below, specific performance examples for each performance pattern are shown with reference to Figures 164 (A) to 165 (B).

In the performance patterns shown in Figures 164 (A) to 165 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in an initial state (before timing t0) stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state), and specifically, as shown in Figures 163 (A), 163 (C), and 163 (D), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are facing downward. In this state, when a reach performance state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start rotating simultaneously at timing t9, and the rotation continues (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the second state or rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is one rotation per second.

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulation image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulation image continues to be dynamically displayed in a manner in which the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate in the same direction in accordance with the rotation of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is also displayed to rotate at the same speed (one rotation per second) as the rotation speed of the real frame movable body. As a result, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a rotated state facing forward as shown in Figures 163 (B) and 163 (E), the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 as frame movable body simulated images facing forward, with the image simulating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 respectively.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, and the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying an image instructing the operation for the operation unit (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the operation instruction display). For example, the operation instruction display may be an image that imitates the appearance of the operation button 410, or a character string instructing the operation of the operation unit (for example, the character string "Push!!") may be displayed. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the frame movable body, go from the light-emitting performance state to the extinguished state.

Figures 164 (A) and 164 (B) show the presentation mode when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period during which operation on the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9). In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the frame movable body that had been rotating up until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light irradiation mode on the frame movable body becomes a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 164 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 stops vertically with the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing forward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, the light irradiation state for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light-emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the light irradiation state becomes the specific light-emitting presentation state, and the player is informed that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 164 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 stops vertically with the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing forward, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 facing forward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation state for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emission presentation state. In this way, the light irradiation state changing to the normal light emission presentation state indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a miss.

Figures 165(A) and 165(B) show the presentation mode when, after the period during which operation of the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that had been rotating up until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light irradiation mode on the frame movable body becomes a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 165 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and at the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the right ear frame movable body 7100 stops vertically with the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 on the front side, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 on the front side (third state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode on the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light emitting presentation state. In this way, the light irradiation mode entering the specific light emitting presentation state indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 165 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and at the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the right ear frame movable body 7100 stops vertically with the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 on the front side, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 on the front side (fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation state on the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emission presentation state. In this way, the light irradiation state changing to the normal light emission presentation state indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a miss.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 164(A) to FIG. 165(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the effective operation period, the decorative symbols that have been changing are displayed in a state corresponding to the special lottery result. For example, in the case of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 164(A) and FIG. 165(A), the decorative symbols are displayed in a pattern of matching numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, and in the case of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 164(B) and FIG. 165(B), the decorative symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern (e.g., "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a miss.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body changes state from a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face forward (third state) or a state in which the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 face forward (fourth state) to a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode of either the specific light emission performance state or the normal light emission performance state. At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image ends.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light irradiation state of the movable frame body can be changed from a specific light-emitting performance state to a normal light-emitting performance state at a specified timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light-emitting performance state continues and the next decorative pattern begins to change.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to be displayed at the timing when the frame movable body changes from a standby state (first state) to a rotating state (second state), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player misses that the frame movable body is in a rotating state (second state). Also, by having the frame movable body appear in an unprecedented position in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and amusement. Also, by having the frame movable body stop in a predetermined stopped state (third state or fourth state) and the state in which the light is irradiated onto the frame movable body change in response to the player's operation of the operation unit, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he or she has determined the special lottery result.

Figures 166(A) to 166(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 163(A) to 163(E). Figures 166(A) and 166(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 166(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 166(D) and 166(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 166(A), 166(C), and 166(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). Figures 166(B) and 166(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240, respectively, at their lower parts. In addition, the thickness in the vertical direction of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 163 (A) to 163 (E). In addition, the right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 are each arranged so as to be perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. In addition, the upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are located at a position higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100.

In a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in a standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are positioned so as to face each other. On the other hand, in a rotating state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above. For example, Figures 166(B) and 166(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from above, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. In addition, by adopting such a rotation mode, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player or a store employee carelessly approaches the frame movable body with their hands or face and is dragged to the rear of the gaming machine, resulting in injury, compared to a case in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates clockwise in a plan view. A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to Figures 164(A) to 165(B). Also, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 167(A) to 167(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 166(A) to 166(E). Figures 167(A) and 167(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 167(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 167(D) and 167(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 167(A), 167(C), and 167(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). Figures 167(B) and 167(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also arranged perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 has a portion that protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. In addition, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to Figures 166(A) to 166(E). By providing a portion that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if a player or a store employee carelessly brings their hands or face close to the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the hands or face are dragged to the rear of the gaming machine and injured. A frame movable body with this structure may be configured to execute the performance pattern described above with reference to Figures 164(A) to 165(B). In addition, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body with this structure.

Figures 168(A) to 168(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 167(A) to 167(E). Figures 168(A) and 168(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 168(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 168(D) and 168(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 168(A), 168(C), and 168(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). Figures 168(B) and 168(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment as well, a portion of the door frame top unit 570 has an upwardly protruding portion that covers the top, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upwardly protruding portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, or the upwardly protruding portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200, are configured as one unit, and are configured so that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 begin to rotate after they have moved forward. Figure 168 (D) shows the state before the forward movement begins, and Figure 168 (E) shows the state after the forward movement has been completed.

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 166(A) to 166(E). By providing a portion that covers the frame movable body in this manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player or a store clerk carelessly approaches the frame movable body with their hands or face being dragged to the rear of the gaming machine and injured. In addition, the front of the portion that protrudes upward may be covered with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, so that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be seen, but cannot be contacted by the player or the store clerk.

A movable frame body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to Figures 164 (A) to 165 (B). In this case, the forward movement of the upward protruding portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upward protruding portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be performed from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t9. Also, an image simulating the upward protruding portion may be displayed as a movable frame body simulation image in accordance with the timing at which the upward protruding portion begins to move. Also, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a movable frame body having such a structure.

Referring to Figures 154 to 156, an embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulation image is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 has been shown, but below, with reference to Figures 169 to 171, an embodiment in which this embodiment has been modified will be shown. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and is provided with a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 instead of the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Figures 169(A) and 169(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 169(C) and 169(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 169(E) and 169(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 169(A), 169(C), and 169(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored within the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state). Also, Figures 169(B), 169(D), and 169(F) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the second state).

As shown in Figures 169(A) to 169(F), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 on the right side. The specific structures and operating modes of these are shown below. Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are basically identical in structure, so in the following explanation, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be described as representatives.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 169(A) to 169(F) and Figures 178(A) to 178(E) described below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be referred to as frame movable bodies. Also, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 may be referred to as inner frame movable bodies, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be referred to as outer frame movable bodies.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a rectangular shape elongated in the front-rear direction when viewed in a plan view in the stored state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 that faces upward in the stored state (first state) and forward in the protruding state (second state), and a right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 that faces downward in the stored state (first state) and backward in the protruding state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is formed of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) are formed of a white translucent synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 also has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300.

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body that has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 facing forward and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing backward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (top surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are made of a white translucent synthetic resin. The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

A rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330 is provided inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300. A square right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380 is provided inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 are specifically constructed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film applied to both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player when protruding from the door frame top unit 570 (second state) is mounted on the surface. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 can be controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right, around the right ear inner frame movable body pivot axis 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body pivot axis 7440, respectively, so that they can be controlled from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a waiting position within the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 169(A), 169(C), and 169(E) to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 169(B), 169(D), and 169(F).

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be controlled to move upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a waiting position within the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 169(A), 169(C), and 169(E) to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 169(B), 169(D), and 169(F).

When the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each in a state in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), as shown in Figure 169 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is positioned inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned inside the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and can be seen by the player. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shaped to resemble animal ears, and can be decoratively expressed as an animal's ears moving by taking a state in which they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and a state in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 can be independently controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to be stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) or protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In addition, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are in a state protruding vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to change their states from a state in which they are independently stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) to a state in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, semi-transparent synthetic resin. Therefore, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 169(A), and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the front of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated, which can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are protruding from the door frame top unit 570, and when the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, it becomes possible for the player to view the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in a predetermined light emitting performance state.

In addition, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are protruding from the door frame top unit 570 (second state), the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is positioned so as to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is positioned so as to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, so that the light irradiated forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 is not reflected by the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380. Even if light is directed toward the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 or the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, it is diffusely reflected backwards at the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 or the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and ultimately the light is diffusely reflected forward by the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 or the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460, making it possible to increase the efficiency of use of the light irradiated from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move and are positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, which provides the player with a surprise and excitement that was not possible before compared to when a movable body inside the game board is moved.

Next, referring to Figures 170(A) to 171(B), examples of performances that combine the specific operation modes of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the display modes of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the frame movable body that is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in accordance with the operation modes of the frame movable bodies, the operation reception mode of the player on the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit), and the light emission modes of the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, and left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body light emitting unit), etc. are shown.

Figures 170(A) to 171(B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the frame movable body displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

Figure 170 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 170 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 171 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 171 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the performance patterns shown in Figures 170(A) to 171(B), the timing at which the inner frame movable body changes from a stored state (first state) to a protruding state (second state), the display state of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing at which operation acceptance to the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display begins, and the timing at which the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes from a light-emitting performance state to an off state are all the same. On the other hand, the presence or absence of operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes from a light-emitting performance state to a specific light-emitting performance state may differ depending on the performance pattern. Below, specific performance examples for each performance pattern are shown with reference to Figures 170(A) to 171(B).

In the performance patterns shown in Figures 170(A) to 171(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are initially (before timing t0) stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach performance state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, the display of a part of the frame movable body simulation image is started in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulation image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulation image is dynamically displayed in a manner in which the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 rotate in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400. Note that, among the frame movable body simulation images, the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have not yet been displayed at this stage. The display of the rotating image of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends at the same time as the rise of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends (timing t9), and they continue to be displayed in a stopped state (from timing t9 onwards). The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start to rise at timing t7, and at timing t9, two seconds later, they have completed their rotation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or the rise state).

On the other hand, at timing t9, operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, and the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as operation instruction display). As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing the operation of the operation unit (for example, the character string "PUSH!!") may be displayed. The operation valid period continues until operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all frame movable body light emitting units change from the light emitting performance state to the off state.

Figures 170(A) and 170(B) show the presentation mode when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period during which operation on the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9). In these presentation patterns, the display of the operation instruction ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 170 (A) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes from an off state to a specific light-emitting performance state that is different from the normal light-emitting performance state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from a state (first state) in which they are stored in the door frame top unit 570, and after 2 seconds (timing t16), they complete the rising operation (second state). At the same time, the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying images imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 as new frame movable body simulation images, in addition to the images imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that are already displayed in a stopped state. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from a display state showing a stored state to a display state showing the lifting movement completed between timing t14 and timing t16, in the same manner as the actual lifting movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from an off state to a specific light-emitting performance state when they have completed their rotational movement (second state), the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which have changed from an off state to a specific light-emitting performance state, change from a state in which they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) to a state in which they have completed their upward movement (second state), and an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an upward manner on the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 170(B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes from an unlit state to a normal light-emitting presentation state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in a stored state (first state) and no operation is performed. Furthermore, no image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 or the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is displayed. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes to a normal light-emitting presentation state, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate, indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a miss.

Figures 171(A) and 171(B) show the presentation mode when, after the period during which operation of the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined specified time has elapsed. In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into a specified light-emitting presentation state according to the special lottery result.

Figure 171 (A) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and at the timing when the operation effective period ends (timing t18), the frame movable body light emitting part becomes a specific light emitting performance state different from the normal light emitting performance state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) where they are stored in the door frame top unit 570, and after 2 seconds (timing t16), they complete the rising operation (second state). At the same time, the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying images imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 as new frame movable body simulation images, in addition to the images imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that are already displayed in a stopped state. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from a display state showing the stored state to a display state showing the lifting movement completed between timing t18 and timing t20 in the same manner as the actual lifting movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from an off state to a specific light-emitting performance state when they have completed their rotational movement (second state), the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which have changed from an off state to a specific light-emitting performance state, change from a state in which they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) to a state in which they have completed their upward movement (second state), and an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an upward manner on the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 171 (B) shows a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the stored state (first state) and no operation is performed. Furthermore, no image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 or the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is displayed. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into the normal light-emitting presentation state, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate, indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a miss.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 170(A) to FIG. 171(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the end of the effective operation period, the decorative symbols that have been changing are displayed stationary in a manner that corresponds to the special lottery result. For example, in the case of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 170(A) and FIG. 171(A), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a pattern of matching numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, and in the case of the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 170(B) and FIG. 171(B), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a reach-miss pattern (e.g., "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a miss.

At the timing (timing t26) when two seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to move from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light-emitting performance state or the normal light-emitting performance state. At the same time, in accordance with the downward movement of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 among the frame movable body simulation images are displayed in a descending manner. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in a manner that indicates that the descent has been completed, in accordance with the downward movement of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display ends.

At the timing (timing t30) when two seconds have elapsed since the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 finished moving to the storage position, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light emission performance state or the normal light emission performance state. At the same time, in accordance with the movement of the real right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 rotating and descending, the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 among the frame movable body simulation images are displayed in a rotating and descending manner. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed, the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner that indicates that the descent has been completed, in accordance with the actual descent movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display ends.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light-emitting state of the movable frame body may be configured to change from a specific light-emitting presentation state to a normal light-emitting presentation state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light-emitting presentation state continues, and the next decorative pattern begins to change.

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulation image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player misses the operation of the frame movable body or the change in the light emission mode in response to the operation of the operation unit. In addition, the frame movable body appears in a position that was not present in the past in response to the special lottery result, making the player feel a great sense of surprise and interest. In addition, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body may or may not change from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state) in response to the operation of the operation unit by the player, making it possible to give the player a sense of as if he or she had decided the special lottery result. In addition, the inner frame movable body becomes the moving state (second state) first, and in a situation where the player can notice that it has become the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. This makes it possible for the player to operate the operation unit while feeling a sense of expectation as to whether the outer frame movable body will become the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

Figures 172(A) to 172(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 169(A) to 169(F). Figures 172(A) and 172(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 172(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 172(D) and 172(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 172(A), 172(C), and 172(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored within the door frame top unit 570. Figures 172(B) and 172(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 can also be moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, so that they can be controlled from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a waiting position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 172 (A), 172 (C), and 172 (D) to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 172 (B) and 172 (E).

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. In a frame movable body having such a structure, it may be configured to execute the performance pattern described above with reference to Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B). In addition, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. As shown with reference to Figures 161(A) to 161(E), even in the frame movable body structure of this embodiment, a portion of the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be configured to protrude from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

Figures 173(A) to 173(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 172(A) to 172(E). Figures 173(A) and 173(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 173(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 173(D) and 173(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 173(A), 173(C), and 173(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored within the door frame top unit 570. Figures 173(B) and 173(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but rather move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, making it possible to control them from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a waiting position within the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 173(A), 173(C), and 173(D) to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 173(B) and 173(E).

The upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a door frame top unit lower left ear opening 7030 at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the above-mentioned performance pattern with reference to Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B). Also, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, when it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot, the inner frame movable body starts to move downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the outer frame movable body starts to move upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With this configuration, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so it is possible to reduce the awkwardness and embarrassment felt by the player due to the loss of the special lottery. In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 169(A) to 169(F), the animal's ears are decoratively represented by the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body, but in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 173(A) to 173(E), the animal's ears are represented by the outer frame movable body that protrudes upward, and the animal's eyes are represented by the inner frame movable body.

174(A) to 174(E) and 175(A) to 175(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to 172(A) to 172(E) and 173(A) to 173(E). 174(A), 174(B), 175(A), and 175(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 174(C) and 175(C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 174(D), 174(E), 175(D), and 175(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, each frame movable body can be in a state where it protrudes downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and a state where it protrudes upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

Figures 174(A), 174(C), and 174(D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Figures 174(B) and 174(E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), and a state in which the outer frame movable body protrudes downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Figures 175(A), 175(C), and 175(D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and a state in which the outer frame movable body protrudes upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). Figures 175(B) and 175(E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can each be moved to any position between the first state and the second state and stopped by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, on the top surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

In addition, on the underside of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7022 under the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a second right ear opening 7024 under the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a first left ear opening 7032 under the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a second left ear opening 7034 under the door frame top unit is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

A movable frame body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to Figures 170(A) to 171(B). Also, modified examples of the time charts described below may be applied to a movable frame body having such a structure.

In this case, when it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) where it protrudes from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the movement is completed at timing t9. Figures 174 (B) and 174 (E) show the state where the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) where it protrudes from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing t18, etc.). Figures 175 (B) and 175 (E) show the state where the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed (second state). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With this configuration, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, if the special lottery results in a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, making it possible to reduce the awkwardness and embarrassment felt by the player as a result of the special lottery being a loss.

In the example shown, the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to the second state, but the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts to protrude upward at timing t7. After that, when the movement is completed (timing t9), the state shown in FIG. 175(A) and FIG. 175(D) is reached. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the inner frame movable body to start moving upward at timing t14 or timing t18. Two performance patterns in which the order of operation of such frame movable bodies is reversed may be configured to be executable. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the jackpot expectancy higher for a performance pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than for a performance pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first, and it may be configured so that, for example, a jackpot is guaranteed when the outer frame movable body operates first.

Figures 176(A) to 177(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 169(A) to 169(F). Figures 176(A) and 176(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 176(C) and 176(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 177(A) and 177(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 176(A), 176(C), and 177(A) show a state (first state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 176(B), 176(D), and 177(B) show a state (second state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all configured to be movable upward by rotating 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance pattern described above with reference to FIG. 170(A) to FIG. 171(B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 170(A) to FIG. 171(B), the outer frame movable body is in the second state after the inner frame movable body is in the second state, but in the frame movable body described with reference to FIG. 176(A) to FIG. 177(B), the order in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body move may be reversed, and the outer frame movable body may be changed from the first state to the second state from timing t7 to timing t9, and then the inner frame movable body may begin to change from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. Also, modified examples of the time charts described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to Figures 163 to 165, an embodiment has been shown in which a frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. Below, with reference to Figures 178 to 180, an embodiment in which this embodiment has been modified will be shown. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and is provided with a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 instead of the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Figures 178(A) and 178(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 178(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 178(D) and 178(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 178(A), 178(C), and 178(D) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the first state). Figures 178(B) and 178(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the second state).

As shown in Figures 178(A) to 178(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a right ear opening 7000 on the top of the door frame top unit, a left ear opening 7010 on the top of the door frame top unit, a right light-emitting portion 7050 inside the door frame top unit, and a left light-emitting portion 7052 inside the door frame top unit. Note that the specific structures and functions of these are the same as those shown in Figures 163(A) to 163(E), so explanations will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 178(A) to 178(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 on the right side. The specific structures and operating modes of these are shown below. Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are basically identical in structure, so in the following explanation, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be described as representatives.

178(A), 178(C), and 178(D) show the state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in a stored state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and has a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing downward and a right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 facing upward. The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is formed of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view with the center portion hollowed out to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and has a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 facing downward and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin. Meanwhile, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 is made of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body pivot shaft 7340 on the right side (inside) in a plan view. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body pivot shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in a plan view. The right ear inner frame movable body pivot shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body pivot shaft 7390 are located on the same axis. The right ear inner frame movable body pivot shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body pivot shaft 7390 are attached near the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490 of the same structure, and can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can each be independently controlled by a pulse motor (not shown) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise to any angle when viewed from the right, or to stop at any angle.

As shown in Figures 178(A) to 178(E), the door frame top unit 570 includes a right-side light-emitting unit 7050 that illuminates the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a left-side light-emitting unit 7052 that illuminates the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450. The specific structures of the right-side light-emitting unit 7050 and the left-side light-emitting unit 7052 are the same as those described with reference to Figures 163(A) to 163(E), so will not be described here.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be rotated a predetermined angle from a state in which they are stored in a waiting position within the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 178 (A), 178 (C) and 178 (D) to a stopped state at any position by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 178(B) and 178(E) are examples, and show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the stored state when viewed from the right, and are in a vertical state, with the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 facing forward and stopping. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shaped to resemble animal ears, and by taking a state in which they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 and a state in which they are vertical to the top surface of the door frame top unit 570, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears have moved.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be rotated by the player by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. When rotating in this way, it is preferable to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in the same direction multiple times at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can also be said that Figures 178 (B) and 178 (E) show the rotating state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate multiple times clockwise when viewed from the right, or multiple times counterclockwise when viewed from the right. With this configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 are alternately visible to the player. Also, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. Also, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. Also, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

It has been shown that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped at a predetermined position or rotated, and that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can each be placed in a predetermined decorative state by the light emitted from the right light-emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit. Specific examples are shown below.

As shown in Figures 178(A), 178(C), and 178(D), when the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are facing downward, the light reflected within the door frame top unit 570 can cause the entire door frame top unit 570 to glow dimly. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, semi-transparent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 178(B) and FIG. 178(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are facing forward, and the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door frame top unit When light is emitted from the left light emitting unit 7052 in the knit, the light allows the player to visually confirm that the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are decorated. In this case, too, some of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside, so that the entire door frame top unit 570 is visible to the player in a somewhat dimly lit state.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit while the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated, the irradiated light alternately illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are positioned in a stationary state or rotate above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, which makes it possible to provide the player with unprecedented surprise and excitement compared to when movable bodies within the game board are moved.

Next, referring to Figures 179(A) to 180(B), examples of performances that combine the specific operation modes of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as frame movable bodies), the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in accordance with the operation mode of the frame movable body, the operation reception mode of the player on the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit), and the light emission modes of the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. are shown.

Figures 179 (A) to 180 (B) are time charts showing the operation of the outer frame movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450), the display state of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the outer frame movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the operation of the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the display state of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the irradiation state of light on the frame movable body.

Figure 179 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 179 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 180 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 180 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the performance patterns shown in Figures 179(A) to 180(B), the timing at which the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body change from a standby state (first state) to a rotating state (second state), the display state of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display starts, and the timing at which the light irradiation state of the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting performance state to an off state are all the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the second state (rotating state) to another state, and the timing at which the light irradiation state of the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting performance state or a specific light-emitting performance state may differ depending on the performance pattern. Below, specific performance examples for each performance pattern are shown with reference to Figures 179(A) to 180(B).

In the performance patterns shown in Figures 179 (A) to 180 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in an initial state (before timing t0) where they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state), and specifically, as shown in Figures 178 (A), 178 (C) and 178 (D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are facing downward. In this state, when a reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 start rotating simultaneously at timing t5, and the rotation continues (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the second state or rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is one rotation per second.

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image begins in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, also begins. The frame movable body simulation image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulation image continues to be dynamically displayed in a manner in which the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 rotate in the same direction in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed to rotate at the same speed (one rotation per second) as the rotation speed of the actual outer frame movable body. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotating state facing forward as shown in Figures 178 (B) and 178 (E), the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 as frame movable body simulation images in a state in which the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 face forward.

After the rotation state (second state) of the outer frame movable body continues from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400) simultaneously starts rotating, and the rotation continues (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the second state or rotating state). The rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image imitating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, so the description will be omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image instructing the operation unit to be operated on the game board side performance display device 1600 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing the operation unit to be operated (for example, the character string "Push!!") may be displayed. The operation effective period continues until the operation is accepted for the operation unit (in the example shown below, timing t14) or until a predetermined time has passed (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light onto the movable frame body, go from a light-emitting performance state to an extinguished state.

Figures 179(A) and 179(B) show the presentation mode when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period during which operation on the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9). In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the frame movable body that had been rotating up until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light irradiation mode on the frame movable body becomes a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 179 (A) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped vertically with the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 facing forward (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, the light irradiation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes a specific light-emitting performance state different from the normal light-emitting performance state. In this way, the light projection state changes to a specific light-emitting performance state, indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 179 (B) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped vertically with the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 respectively on the front side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emission performance state. In this way, the light will be emitted in the normal light-emitting state, indicating to the player that the special lottery result was a loss.

Figures 180(A) and 180(B) show the presentation mode when, after the period during which operation of the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that had been rotating up until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light irradiation mode on the frame movable body becomes a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 180 (A) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped vertically with the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 respectively facing forward (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, the light irradiation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes a specific light emission performance state different from the normal light emission performance state. In this way, the light projection state changes to a specific light-emitting performance state, indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 180(B) shows a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped vertically with the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 respectively on the front side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emission performance state. In this way, the light will be emitted in the normal light-emitting state, indicating to the player that the special lottery result was a loss.

In this way, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, each frame movable body stops in the third state, indicating a jackpot, and if the result of the special lottery is a loss, each frame movable body stops in the fourth state, indicating a loss.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 179(A) to Fig. 180(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the effective operation period, the decorative symbols that had been changing are displayed stationary in a manner that corresponds to the result of the special lottery. For example, in the case of the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 179(A) and Fig. 180(A), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a pattern of matching numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and in the case of the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 179(B) and Fig. 180(B), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a reach-miss pattern (e.g., "7", "6", "7") indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss.

At a timing (timing t24) when four seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body changes state while maintaining either the specific light-emitting performance state or the normal light-emitting performance state, from a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state) or a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 face forward (fourth state) to a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the movable frame simulation image will end.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light irradiation state of the movable frame body may be changed from a specific light-emitting performance state to a normal light-emitting performance state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light-emitting performance state continues, and the next decorative pattern begins to change.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body to display a frame movable body simulation image at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player misses that the frame movable body is in the rotating state (second state). In addition, the frame movable body appears in a position that was not previously seen in response to the special lottery result, making the player feel a great sense of surprise and interest. In addition, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state) with the start of the operation valid period, and further, in response to the player's operation of the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body change to either the third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or the fourth state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss, making it possible to give the player the feeling that they have determined the special lottery result.

Figures 181(A) to 181(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 178(A) to 178(E). Figures 181(A) and 181(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 181(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 181(D) and 181(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 181(A), 181(C), and 181(D) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the standby position (first state). Figures 181(B) and 181(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating.

In this embodiment, the thickness in the vertical direction of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 178 (A) to 178 (E), and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

A right side light emitting unit 7050 is provided in the door frame top unit near the front end of the door frame top unit, corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. In addition, a left side light emitting unit 7052 is provided in the door frame top unit, corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right side light emitting unit 7050 and the left side light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light toward the rear. This makes it possible to set the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 located in the rear to a specified light emitting performance state.

In a frame movable body having such a structure, the above-mentioned performance pattern may be executed with reference to FIG. 179(A) to FIG. 180(B). If the special lottery result is a big win, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 may be stopped facing the front as shown in FIG. 181(B) and FIG. 181(E) (third state). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 may be stopped facing the front (fourth state). In addition, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 182(A) to 183(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 178(A) to 178(E). Figures 182(A) and 182(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 182(C) and 182(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 183(A) and 183(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 182(A), 182(C), and 183(A) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the standby position (first state). Figures 182(B), 182(D), and 183(B) show a state (second state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating.

In this embodiment, the center of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and can be seen as a U-shape when viewed from the right side. The lower part of the door frame top unit 570, which is hollowed out in the left-right direction, is provided with a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the upper part of the door frame top unit 570, which is hollowed out in the left-right direction, is provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

As shown in Figures 182(A), 182(C), and 183(A), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are positioned in a standby state (first state) such that the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 face each other.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape that is a bottomed cylinder with a part of the cylindrical side cut off and is inverted in the up-down direction, and as shown in Figures 182 (A), 182 (C), and 183 (A), in the standby state (first state), the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are located in front of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 with the right ear outer frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 facing forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are configured to be invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are viewed from diagonally below, the lower parts of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 located on the inside can be viewed.

At the bottom of the door frame top unit 570, a right side light emitting unit 7050 is provided in the door frame top unit corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. In addition, a left side light emitting unit 7052 is provided in the door frame top unit corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right side light emitting unit 7050 and the left side light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light diagonally upwards and forwards. This makes it possible to set the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are located diagonally upwards and forwards, to a predetermined light emitting performance state.

In such a structure of the frame movable body, the above-mentioned performance pattern may be executed with reference to FIG. 179(A) to FIG. 180(B). If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 may be stopped facing forward (third state) as shown in FIG. 182(B), FIG. 182(D), and FIG. 183(B). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a miss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 may be stopped facing forward (fourth state). On the other hand, for the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 may be stopped facing the player, whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or a miss. Additionally, the modified time chart described below may be applied to a movable frame body having this structure.

Figures 184(A) to 184(D) and 185(A) to 185(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body explained with reference to Figures 154(A) to 154(E). Figures 184(A) and 184(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 184(C) and 184(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 185(A) and 185(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 184(A), 184(C), and 185(A) show a state in which multiple frame movable bodies are stored in the standby position (first state). Figures 184(B), 184(D), and 185(B) show a state in which multiple frame movable bodies are moved to the moving position (second state).

In the embodiment shown below, instead of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is provided, and a door frame side unit right arm part 7600, a door frame side unit left arm part 7650, a valance bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, and a valance bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are provided.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 has a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape resembling a box made up of two parts with a lid, and its right and left sides are arranged to overlap, respectively, with the right and left sides of the door frame base unit 100 that constitutes the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 when viewed from the front. In addition, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is always located above the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit face decorative part 7500 is composed of a door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, which corresponds to a lid box that is placed on top of a box composed of two parts with a lid, and a door frame top unit lower face part 7520, which corresponds to a body box that is placed on top of a box composed of two parts with a lid.

The door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is a lid box shape without a side part on the back side, and is provided to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit lower face part 7520, and is installed so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the side part on the front side of the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is provided with a door frame top unit right eye decorative part 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decorative part 7514, which are vertically long rectangular shapes when viewed from the front and are shaped to imitate the eyes of an animal robot. The door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200, which imitate the ears of an animal, similar to the door frame top unit 570. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also configured to be movable in the vertical direction.

The door frame top unit lower face part 7520 has a box-like shape with a recess capable of storing the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and is fixed to the upper part of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top unit lower face part 7520 also includes a door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit lower face mouth movable body 7524.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 near the left-right center of the side part on the front side of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a rectangular parallelepiped, but has a box-like shape with an open bottom, like a sliding door of a chest of drawers turned upside down. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 can move in the front-to-back direction. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body that imitates the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

The door frame top unit under-face nose movable body 7522 is arranged so as to be covered by the side portion on the front side of the door frame top unit above-face movable body 7510. Therefore, in a state where it is covered by the side portion on the front side of the door frame top unit above-face movable body 7510 (first state), the door frame top unit under-face nose movable body 7522 is not visible. In addition, the door frame top unit under-face nose movable body 7522 is in a state where it cannot move forward.

When the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 moves upward to the second state, the front surface of the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522, which is embedded in the door frame top unit lower face 7520, becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom surface part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 has a shape like a cylinder cut into a fan shape, and is provided so that the side that forms the central angle of the fan shape is located on the right side when viewed from the right side as shown in Figures 185 (A) and 185 (B). The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the side that forms the central angle of the fan shape as the rotation axis. In addition, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the front side. Therefore, as shown in Figures 184 (B) and 185 (B), when the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, its inside is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state in which it is embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state) to a state in which it has moved forward (second state), and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 changes from a state in which it is stored within the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state) to a state in which it has rotated approximately 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (second state), making it possible to decoratively express a state that mimics an animal robot with its mouth open.

The door frame side unit right arm 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm 7650 are each located below the door frame top unit face decoration 7500, protruding forward from the front of both the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 is composed of a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630.

The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 is box-shaped with a gap inside, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 can move inside. The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 is about a few mm thick, and is configured so that the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 that move inside can be visually confirmed.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is formed in a pipe shape from flexible synthetic resin. The length of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is approximately 50 cm, and it can be wound up or down by rotating a reel-like drive mechanism (not shown) provided in the door frame top unit lower face part 7520 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Figures 184 (A) and 185 (A) show the state (first state) in which the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is wound up by a reel-like drive mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 is formed of two L-shaped members when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member that resembles the axis that engages them, and has a shape that resembles a robot manipulator. In addition, the end of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is attached to this cylindrical member, and when the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is wound up by the above-mentioned reel-like drive mechanism (not shown) (first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 is located at the top inside the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610.

By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in the opposite direction to the winding direction, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 is lowered inside the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610, and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 is positioned at the bottom inside the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 due to its own weight. Figure 184 (B) shows the state (second state) in which the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 is positioned at the bottom inside the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610. Note that in the second state, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The door frame side unit left arm 7650 has a symmetrical structure and function equivalent to the door frame side unit right arm 7600. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case 7660 has a structure and function equivalent to the door frame side unit right arm case 7610, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 has a structure and function equivalent to the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 has a structure and function equivalent to the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630. For this reason, detailed explanations of each component that constitutes the door frame side unit left arm 7650 will be omitted.

Similarly to the door frame side unit right arm 7600, the door frame side unit left arm 7650 can be in a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 is wound up by a reel-like drive mechanism (not shown), and in a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 is positioned at the bottom by rotating the reel-like drive mechanism in the opposite direction to the winding direction. For example, Figures 184 (B) and 185 (B) show a state in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 is positioned at the bottom (second state). Note that in the second state, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The entire or part of the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the entire or part of the outside (right side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 may be formed from an opaque synthetic resin, or may be formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin and then a colored opaque sticker or the like may be attached. It is preferable that the entire inside (right side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the entire inside (left side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 be formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for players on either side to see the movement of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, and door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680, allowing the player playing the pachinko machine 1 to enjoy themselves alone, without the other players knowing that they have moved. Also, as described below, if these frame movable bodies are operated for the purpose of indicating a certain degree of expectation, even if the special lottery result is a loss after these frame movable bodies have moved, they will be difficult to see by other players, and the player is less likely to feel embarrassed in front of other players.

The front panel member 50 has the front panel bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front panel bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 on the right side when viewed from the front. When in the standby position (first state) as shown in Figures 184 (A) and 185 (A), the front panel bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the front panel bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are located below the plate unit 320 and the handle unit 300, respectively.

The right foot movable body 7700 of the front panel bottom unit is composed of the right shin part 7710 of the front panel bottom unit and the right toe part 7720 of the front panel bottom unit. The right shin part 7710 of the front panel bottom unit is cylindrical in shape. The right toe part 7720 of the front panel bottom unit is rectangular in shape to resemble the shape of a foot, and has two circular recesses in the part that comes into contact with the sole of the foot. The right toe part 7720 of the front panel bottom unit is attached to the front surface of the right shin part 7710 of the front panel bottom unit. Therefore, the right shin part 7710 of the front panel bottom unit and the right toe part 7720 of the front panel bottom unit move together.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided at the bottom of the outer frame 2, and is capable of moving the right shin portion 7710 of the valance bottom unit in the front-to-rear direction. In addition, the right shin portion 7710 of the valance bottom unit can be rotated a predetermined angle around the longitudinal axis of the right shin portion 7710 of the valance bottom unit.

For example, the right shin portion 7710 of the bottom panel unit may be configured to move a predetermined distance forward from the standby position (first state) shown in Figures 184(A) and 185(A), then rotate 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, and move to a stopped state (second state). Figures 184(B) and 185(B) show the right shin portion 7710 of the bottom panel unit in this manner in the stopped state (second state).

The curtain board bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 has an equivalent structure and function, being symmetrical to the curtain board bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. Specifically, the curtain board bottom unit left foot shin portion 7760 has an equivalent structure and function to the curtain board bottom unit right foot shin portion 7710, and the curtain board bottom unit left foot toe portion 7770 has an equivalent structure and function to the curtain board bottom unit right foot toe portion 7720. For this reason, a detailed description of each component that constitutes the curtain board bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the movable frame body below the gaming machine in this way, rather than the player visually recognizing that the movable frame body has moved as in the past, the player recognizes that the movable frame body has moved when the movable frame comes into contact with a part of the player's body, such as the player's arm, making it possible to provide the player with an unprecedented sensory experience.

With reference to Figures 184 and 185, we have shown an embodiment in which a pachinko machine 1 is provided with multiple frame movable bodies which operate. Specifically, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit lower face mouth movable body 7524, door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680, curtain board bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, and curtain board bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 each change as frame movable bodies from a state in which they are in the standby positions shown in Figures 184 (A), 184 (C), and 185 (A) (first state) to a state in which they are in the moved positions shown in Figures 184 (B), 184 (D), and 185 (B) (second state). In addition, each movable frame body can be placed in a first state or a second state by controlling a driving means (not shown) provided for each movable frame body by the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, each movable frame body may be provided with a light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, so that it can be configured to take on the normal light emitting performance state and the specific light emitting performance state as described above.

Each of these movable frame bodies may be configured to operate or emit light in accordance with the presentation patterns shown in Figures 155(A) to 156(B), or the presentation patterns shown in Figures 164(A) to 165(B), or variations of these presentation patterns.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided on the door frame top unit face-up movable body 7510. After the door frame top unit face-up movable body 7510 is placed in the second state in which it is located upward, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which are stored in the door frame top unit face-up movable body 7510 (first state), may be configured to be placed in a state in which they protrude upward (second state). This operation may also be applied to the time charts shown in Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B) and their modified time charts. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face-up movable body 7510 may first be changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be changed from the first state to the second state in response to an operation on the operating unit, etc.

Alternatively, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 may be configured to be in the second state in which it is located upward, and then the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522, which is stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state), may be configured to be in a state in which it protrudes forward (second state). In addition, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B) and their modified time charts. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 may first be configured to be changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 may be configured to be changed from the first state to the second state in response to an operation on the operating unit, etc.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 may be changed from the first state to the second state, and then the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 may be changed from the first state to the second state. Furthermore, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in Figures 170(A) to 171(B) or time charts of their variations.

Alternatively, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 may be changed from the first state to the second state, and then the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 may be changed from the first state to the second state. Such an operation may also be applied to the time charts shown in Figures 170(A) to 171(B) or modified time charts thereof.

Figures 186(A) to 186(K) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image that can be applied to the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B). Note that Figure 186(A) represents all of the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B).

Figure 186 (B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at timing t4, and is completed at timing t6. Then, at timing t7, the frame movable body begins to rise.

By configuring such operation/display patterns to be executable as a performance, the display of the frame movable body simulation image serves as a notice that the frame movable body will operate. Furthermore, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body will operate, and a player who sees such a frame movable body simulation image can visually recognize the operation of the frame movable body from the start of the operation. This can prevent the player from missing the operation of the frame movable body. It can also prevent the player from carelessly touching the frame movable body and injuring their fingers, etc. It can also show that a player who has placed light luggage or the like on the frame movable body will move it to another position. This can prevent the player from being injured by the luggage falling, or the drive unit that moves the frame movable body from being overloaded.

Figure 186 (C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the ear frame movable body's upward movement is completed at timing t9, after which the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at timing t10, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed at timing t12.

This configuration makes it difficult for a player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the raised position (moving position). Therefore, if a player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, the frame movable body that has completed its movement to the raised position will suddenly become visible to the player, giving the player a great surprise. In addition, since a simulated image of the frame movable body is displayed after the movement to the raised position, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the frame movable body that has moved. In addition, the player can know how the frame movable body has moved.

Figure 186 (D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at timing t6, then the rising movement of the frame movable body begins at timing t7, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed at timing t8, and the rising movement of the frame movable body is completed at timing t9.

With this configuration, the display of the frame movable body simulation image serves as a notice that the frame movable body will move. The player can be made aware of how the frame movable body will operate. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually confirmed from the start of the movement. This prevents the player from missing the movement of the frame movable body. This prevents the player from injuring their fingers or other parts of their body if they inadvertently touch the frame movable body.

Figure 186 (E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the frame movable body starts to rise at timing t7, then the frame movable body simulated image starts to be dynamically displayed at timing t8, the frame movable body starts to rise at timing t9, and the frame movable body completes its rise at timing t10.

This configuration allows the player to be surprised when the movable frame body starts moving without realizing it. It also allows the player to be informed that the movable frame body has started moving.

Figure 186 (F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). Meanwhile, the frame movable body rises from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

This configuration allows the player to get a detailed understanding of how the movable frame moves.

Figure 186 (G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). Meanwhile, the frame movable body rises from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

This configuration allows the player to get a detailed understanding of how the movable frame moves.

Figure 186 (H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the frame movable body rises from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), and then the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

This configuration allows the player to see in detail how the movable frame has moved.

Figure 186 (I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t5 to timing t7 (2 seconds), and then the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed again from timing t7 to timing t9. Meanwhile, the frame movable body rises from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). Note that the number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more times, and for example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed from timing t3 to timing t5.

This configuration allows the player to understand how the movable frame moves.

Figure 186 (J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, after the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed again from timing t9 to timing t11. Meanwhile, the frame movable body rises from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). Note that the number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more times, and for example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed from timing t11 to timing t13.

This configuration allows the player to recognize how the movable frame has moved.

Figure 186 (K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulation image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, the frame movable body simulation image is changed from a display state simulating the first state to a display state simulating the second state at twice the speed of the actual frame movable body three times in total, from timing t4 to timing t5, timing t5 to timing t6, and timing t6 to timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. Note that such display may be performed a total of two times, from timing t5 to timing t6 and timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once, from timing t6 to timing t7.

This configuration allows the player to quickly recognize how the frame movable body moves. In addition, because the frame movable body simulation image is displayed quickly, the player's eyes become accustomed to the movement of the actual frame movable body by the time they see it, allowing the player to fully enjoy the movement of the actual frame movable body. In addition, by displaying it multiple times, the player can become more aware of the movement.

Each of the presentation patterns shown and explained in FIG. 186(A) to FIG. 186(K) may be configured to be executed in response to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the expectation level for a jackpot and its frequency of occurrence may be configured to differ for each presentation pattern. For example, when a predetermined reach presentation occurs, one of the presentation patterns shown and explained in FIG. 186(A) to FIG. 186(K) may be selected and executed. Also, the presentation pattern explained in FIG. 186(A) may be configured to have the highest frequency of occurrence, and the frequency of occurrence gradually decreases as the presentation patterns shown and explained in FIG. 186(B) to FIG. 186(K) progress, while the presentation pattern explained in FIG. 186(A) has the lowest expectation level for a jackpot and the expectation level gradually increases as the presentation patterns shown and explained in FIG. 186(B) to FIG. 186(K) progress. Also, each of the modified examples shown below may be configured to be executed with a predetermined expectation level and frequency of occurrence.

By configuring it this way, when a presentation pattern for a frame movable body that is different from the usual one appears, it is possible to make the player feel that their expectations for a jackpot are greater than with a normal presentation pattern for a frame movable body.

It should be noted that some of the presentation examples shown in Figures 186(A) to 186(K) may be combined together to be executed as a presentation. In this case, it is advisable to combine them so that multiple frame movable body simulation images are not displayed at the same time on the game board side presentation display device 1600. For example, by executing the presentation pattern shown in Figure 186(K) from timing t4 to timing t7, and executing the presentation pattern shown in Figure 186(J) from timing t7 to timing t11, it is possible to execute a presentation pattern that can achieve the effects of both presentation patterns.

Figures 187(A) to 187(E) show modified examples of the light emission modes of the light-emitting section of the movable frame that can be adapted to the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B). Note that Figure 187(A) collectively represents each of the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B).

Figure 187 (B) shows a performance pattern in which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body is turned off in accordance with the timing (timing t7) at which the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Also, Figure 187 (C) shows a performance pattern in which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body is turned off at a timing (timing t5) prior to the timing (timing t7) at which the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position.

In this way, the light-emitting section of the frame movable body goes into an off state before the frame movable body goes into the second state, and this state is maintained until an operation is performed on the operation section or until the end of the effective operation period, making it difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. Then, in this situation, if the player operates the operation section, the frame movable body, which has completed its movement to the moving position, will suddenly go from an off state to a light-emitting state (special light-emitting performance state or light-emitting performance state), giving the player a great surprise.

Figure 187 (D) shows a performance pattern in which the light-emitting unit of the movable frame body is turned off at timing t9, but instead the light emission is suppressed. A state in which light emission is suppressed may be, for example, a state in which the light is emitted with a longer blinking cycle or the amount of light is reduced, compared to the light emission performance state.

In this way, instead of turning the light off, the same effect can be achieved by suppressing the emission of light.

Figure 187 (E) shows a presentation pattern in which the light-emitting part of the frame movable body is in a specific light-emitting presentation state instead of being turned off at timing t9. This presentation pattern should be selected only if the special lottery result is a jackpot. An example has been shown in which the light-emitting part of the frame movable body is in a specific light-emitting presentation state at timing t9 when the frame movable body reaches the second state, but the light-emitting part of the frame movable body may also be in a specific light-emitting presentation state at timing t7 when the frame movable body starts to operate or at timing t5, which is the timing before the frame movable body starts to operate.

Instead of turning off the light, the light-emitting part of the movable frame body suddenly changes to a specific light-emitting performance state, creating a high sense of anticipation for a big win in the player.

Figures 188(A) to 188(E) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image that can be applied to the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 164(A) to 165(B). Note that Figure 188(A) represents all of the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 164(A) to 165(B).

Figure 188 (B) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at timing t7, and then, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which are in the standby position (first state), begin to rotate and enter a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed at the same speed as the speed at which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate. Therefore, between timing t7 and timing t9, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate twice, and then the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating. The timing to start displaying the frame movable body simulated image may be earlier. For example, if the frame movable body simulated image is configured to start displaying at timing t5, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will actually start rotating after the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate four times.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to be displayed before the frame movable body starts to operate, the display of the frame movable body simulation image serves as a notice that the frame movable body will operate. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body will operate. Then, a player who sees such a frame movable body simulation image can visually recognize the operation of the frame movable body from the start of the operation. The occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the operation of the frame movable body can be suppressed. In addition, by repeatedly dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulation image before the frame movable body starts to operate, it is possible to make the player more reliably recognize how the frame movable body will operate. In addition, the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures his/her fingers, etc. can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to show that a player who has placed light luggage, etc. on the frame movable body will move them to another position. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or a load is placed on the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

Figure 188 (C) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which are in the standby position (first state), start to rotate and enter a rotating state (second state), and then, at timing t11, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to be displayed after the frame movable body starts to operate, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body has changed to a rotating state (second state). Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the frame movable body, the player will suddenly see the frame movable body in a rotating state, which can give the player a great surprise.

Figure 188 (D) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed at high speed (2 rotations per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which are in the standby position (first state), begin to rotate and enter a rotating state (second state).

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to rotate and be displayed at a faster speed (twice the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts to move, it becomes possible for the eye to become accustomed to the operating mode of the frame movable body when it changes to the rotating state (second state).

Figure 188 (E) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In this performance pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a low speed (half a rotation per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which are in the standby position (first state), begin to rotate and enter a rotating state (second state).

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to rotate at a slower speed (half the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts to move, it is possible to inform a player of the movement mode of the frame movable body when the frame movable body changes to the rotating state (second state) if that player feels that the movement mode is too fast.

The modified examples of the display mode of the movable frame simulated image shown in Figures 186(B) to 186(E) may be applied as appropriate to the inner movable frame in the embodiments described with reference to Figures 169 to 171, etc., or the modified examples of those embodiments, to be configured to be executable as a performance pattern.

The modified examples of the display mode of the movable frame simulated image shown in Figures 188(B) to 188(E) may be applied to either the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 178 to 180, etc., or in the modified examples of those embodiments, or may be applied in the same manner to both, making it possible to implement the modified example as a performance pattern.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, 179 and 180, respectively, the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then that state is maintained for a certain period of time, after which the second frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. Also, in the examples shown in Figures 170 and 171, it is configured to take a certain period of time to change the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent situations in which a player misses the manner in which the movable frame body changes state.

In the examples of presentation described above with reference to Figures 155 and 156, 164 and 165, 170 and 171, 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the game board side presentation display device 1600 in the same manner as the change in the actual frame movable body at the same timing as the timing when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, but as described above with reference to Figures 186 (C), 186 (E), 186 (H), and 188 (C), it may also be configured to start an operation to change the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state, or to change it from the first state to the second state, at a timing before the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started.

This configuration makes it easier for a player who sees the dynamic display of the frame moving body simulation image, without realizing that the actual frame moving body is in motion, to find the frame moving body in motion.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, 170 and 171, 179 and 180, respectively, the state of the movable frame body may change from the first state to the second state, or from the second state to either the third state or the fourth state, depending on the result of the special lottery, when the player operates the operation unit during the valid operation period.

With this configuration, the player can determine the position of the operation unit and the position of the frame movable body whose state may change, and then operate the operation unit at the timing desired by the player without looking at the operation unit while keeping his or her gaze on the frame movable body. This allows the player to reliably see whether the state of the frame movable body will change, and if so, what state it will change to.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, 170 and 171, 179 and 180, respectively, an image instructing the operation of the operation unit is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, but a performance pattern that displays a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot may be configured to be executable in addition to the above examples. For example, the image of the movable frame may be configured to be displayed simultaneously as the operation instruction image in a manner that is included in the image of the operation unit.

With this configuration, when a player sees the special operation instruction image, the player knows that the result of the special lottery is a big win, and that operating the operation unit will definitely cause the movable frame body to move. This makes it possible to operate the operation unit while keeping one's eyes on the movable frame body, allowing the player to fully enjoy the movement of the movable frame body.

In the examples described above with reference to Fig. 155 and Fig. 156, Fig. 164 and Fig. 165, Fig. 170 and Fig. 171, Fig. 179 and Fig. 180, the frame movable body is provided with a light emitting unit, or a light emitting unit capable of irradiating light onto the frame movable body is provided separately from the frame movable body, and after the frame movable body changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the timing when the effective operation period begins, and is configured to be in a light emitting performance state with a predetermined light emitting mode according to the operation timing to the operation unit or the end of the effective operation period, but as described with reference to Fig. 187 (D) and Fig. 187 (E), it is not necessarily required to be in the off state during the effective operation period, and it may be configured to be in a light emitting performance state that can be distinguished from the normal light emitting performance state. For example, it may be configured to notify the occurrence of a jackpot by turning off only the outer frame movable body and turning on the inner frame movable body in a specific light emitting performance state, or turning on the right frame movable body and turning on the left frame movable body in a specific light emitting performance state. Alternatively, all frame movable bodies may be turned off until the valid operation period begins, and when the valid operation period begins, the inner frame movable body may be set to a light-emitting state to notify the user that the valid operation period has begun, and then, when the user operates the operation unit or the valid operation period ends, the light-emitting state of all frame-side movable bodies may be set to a light-emitting state that corresponds to the special lottery results.

In this way, the light emission state of the frame movable body changes according to the change in the state of the frame movable body, so that it is easier to detect the movement of the frame movable body by the change in the light emission state. In addition, if at least a part of the frame movable body is illuminated, there is an effect that the player is less likely to get injured when the frame movable body moves compared to when the frame movable body is in an unlit state.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 155 and 156, 164 and 165, 170 and 171, 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in the same manner as the change in the actual frame movable body at the same timing as the timing when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, but as described above with reference to Figures 186 (B), 186 (D), 186 (F), 186 (G), 186 (I), 186 (K), 188 (B), 188 (D), and 188 (E), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image may be started at a timing before the timing when the operation of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state is started or the timing when the actual frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state is started.

This configuration allows the frame movable body to be visually checked while knowing in advance how it will operate, making it possible to prevent situations in which every move of the frame movable body's operating mode is overlooked. This configuration is particularly effective when the frame movable body operates in a complex manner, such as in the time charts shown in Figures 170 and 171, or Figures 179 and 180.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 155 and 156, and Figures 170 and 171, respectively, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing state of the actual frame movable body in the same time (2 seconds) as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, but as described above with reference to Figure 186 (K), the speed at which the frame movable body simulation image changes from the display state simulating the first state to the display state simulating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to change from a display mode simulating the first state to a display mode simulating the second state in a shorter time (1 second) than the time it takes for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state (2 seconds), the eye becomes accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulation image, making it possible to fully enjoy the movement when the real frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, 179 and 180, respectively, the movable frame body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state, but as described above with reference to Figure 188 (D), the movable frame body simulation image may be dynamically displayed in a manner that rotates at a faster speed before the movable frame body enters the second state. For example, the movable frame body simulation image may be displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation per 0.5 seconds, and then the movable frame body may be configured to enter the second state.

In this way, by configuring the dynamic display to rotate the frame movable body simulation image once in a time (0.5 seconds) that is shorter than the time it takes for the frame movable body to rotate once (1 second), the eye becomes accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulation image, making it possible to fully enjoy the rotational movement of the actual frame movable body in the second state.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 155 and 156, and Figures 170 and 171, respectively, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing state of the actual frame movable body in the same time (2 seconds) as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, but as described above with reference to Figures 186 (F), 186 (G), and 186 (H), the speed at which the frame movable body simulation image changes from the display state simulating the first state to the display state simulating the second state may be slower than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to change from a display mode simulating the first state to a display mode simulating the second state over a longer period of time (4 seconds) than the time it takes for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state (2 seconds), even if the movement of the frame movable body feels too fast for the player, the player can recognize the movement mode by looking at the frame movable body simulation image.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, 179 and 180, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state, but as described above with reference to Figure 188(E), the frame movable body simulation image may be dynamically displayed in a manner rotating at a slower speed before the frame movable body enters the second state. For example, the frame movable body simulation image may be displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation per 0.5 seconds, and then the frame movable body may be configured to enter the second state.
In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to dynamically display one rotation over a longer period of time (2 seconds) than the time it takes for the frame movable body to make one rotation (1 second), even if the rotational movement of the actual frame movable body in the second state feels too fast to the player, the player can recognize that movement by looking at the frame movable body simulation image.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 155 and 156, and Figures 170 and 171, respectively, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be displayed only once, dynamically changing from an image showing a state simulating the first state to an image showing a state simulating the second state in the same manner as the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, but as described with reference to Figures 186(I), 186(J), and 186(K), such display of the frame movable body simulation image may be configured to be performed multiple times.

In the examples described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, 179 and 180, respectively, the display of the frame movable body simulated image begins at the same timing as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and while the actual frame movable body continues to be in the second state (rotating state), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the change in the actual frame movable body. Therefore, the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly rotated and displayed in a loop.

In this way, the manner in which the state of the frame movable body changes is dynamically displayed multiple times as a frame movable body simulation image, or if the frame movable body is in a state in which it changes periodically, the frame movable body simulation image is repeatedly dynamically displayed in a manner that periodically changes in accordance with that state, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the change of the frame movable body from a first state to a second state.

Figures 189 (A) to 190 (B) show modified examples of the performance pattern described with reference to Figures 155 (A) to 156 (B). In this embodiment, the frame movable body starts changing from a state (first state) in which it is in a standby position to a state (second state) in which the movement is completed in accordance with the start of the effective operation period (timing t9), the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, a premonition is displayed from timing t7 to timing t9 before the effective operation period occurs, and a post-operation display is displayed when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the effective operation period ends without an operation (timing t18). Other than these points (for example, the light-emitting performance state of the frame movable body and the stopping timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the performance aspects are basically the same, so the description of the parts in which the performance aspects are common will be omitted, and the following will focus on the above-mentioned different parts.

Figure 189 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 189 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 190 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 190 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Figures 189 (A) to 190 (B), a premonition display, which is a display suggesting that a valid operation period will occur, begins at timing t7 on the game board-side presentation display device 1600. The premonition display displays the characters "Push?" as an image and continues until timing t9, when the valid operation period begins. At timing t9, the valid operation period begins, and the characters "Push!!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in a receiving state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the valid operation period ends without an operation (timing t18), and instead displays the characters "!!" as an image as a post-operation display. The post-operation display ends after continuing for 2 seconds (timing t16 or t20).

On the other hand, at time t9, the movable frame body is turned off and starts moving from a standby position (first state), and at time t11, the movement is completed (second state).

In this way, by displaying (premonition display or operation instruction display) to divert the player's attention from the frame movable body before or during the movement of the frame movable body, when the player operates the operation unit, the frame movable body changes from a turned-off state to a specific light-emitting performance state or a normal light-emitting performance state, and the player's gaze is guided to the frame movable body. Then, the player feels as if the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, so it is possible to give the player a great surprise. In addition, even if it takes time for the frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels irritated by the frame movable body changing to the second state due to the premonition display or operation instruction display. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

Figures 191 (A) to 192 (B) show modified examples of the presentation pattern described with reference to Figures 189 (A) to 190 (B). In this embodiment, the frame movable body starts to change from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which it has completed its movement (second state) in accordance with the timing (t14) when the operation unit is operated or the timing (timing t9) when the operation valid period ends, and the frame movable body changes to the second state only when the special lottery result is a jackpot. This differs from the presentation pattern described with reference to Figures 189 (A) to 190 (B) in that the presentation modes are basically the same for other points (for example, the light-emitting presentation state of the frame movable body and the timing of stopping the decorative pattern, etc.), so the explanation of the parts in which the presentation modes are the same will be omitted, and the following will focus on the above-mentioned different parts.

Figure 191 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 191 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 192 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 192 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 191(A) and 191(B), a presentation pattern is shown in which an operation valid period occurs, and while an operation instruction display is being displayed, the player operates the operation unit (timing t14), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the frame movable body moves from a state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to a state in which the movement is completed (second state), and a post-operation display is displayed (timing t14 to timing t16), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame movable body does not change from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state), and only a post-operation display is displayed.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 192(A) and 192(B), if the special lottery result is a jackpot at the timing (t18) when the effective operation period ends, the frame movable body moves from a state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to a state in which the movement is completed (second state) and a post-operation display is displayed (timing t18 to timing t20), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame movable body does not change from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state) and only a post-operation display is displayed.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 191(A) and 192(A), at timing t22, the frame movable body starts moving from a state in which the movement is complete (second state) to a state in which it is in a standby position (first state), and at timing t24, the movement to the standby position is completed.

In this way, even after the player operates the operation unit, by displaying the post-operation display instead of the operation instruction display, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the frame movable body changing its state from the first state to the second state. Then, by ending the post-operation display at the timing when the change of the frame movable body to the second state is completed, the player finally realizes that the frame movable body has entered the second state, which can give the player a great surprise. Furthermore, even if it takes time for the frame movable body to change its state from the first state to the second state, the post-operation display can prevent the player from feeling irritated by the frame movable body entering the second state. Furthermore, since it is possible to operate the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of situations in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

The timing for changing the frame movable body from the off state to the specific light-emitting performance state may be configured to occur at the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

Figures 193 (A) to 194 (B) show modified examples of the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B). In this embodiment, the inner frame movable body starts changing from a state (first state) in the standby position to a state (second state) in which the movement is completed in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7), the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, a premonition display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, and a post-operation display is performed when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without an operation (timing t16). Other than these points (for example, the light-emitting performance state of the frame movable body and the stopping timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the performance aspects are basically the same, so the description of the parts in which the performance aspects are common will be omitted, and the following will focus on the above-mentioned different parts.

Figure 193 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 193 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 194 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 194 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Figures 193 (A) to 194 (B), a premonition display, which is a display suggesting that a valid operation period will occur, begins at timing t5 on the game board-side presentation display device 1600. The premonition display displays the characters "Push?" as an image and continues until timing t7, when the valid operation period begins. At timing t7, the valid operation period begins, and the characters "Push!!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in a reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the valid operation period ends without an operation (timing t16), and instead displays the characters "!!" as an image as a post-operation display. The post-operation display ends after continuing for 2 seconds (timing t13 or t18).

On the other hand, at time t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and starts moving from a standby position (first state), and at time t9, the movement is completed (second state).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 193(A) and 193(B), a presentation pattern is shown in which an operation valid period occurs, and while an operation instruction display is being displayed, the player operates the operation unit (timing t11), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the outer frame movable body moves from a state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to a state in which the movement is completed (second state), and a post-operation display is displayed (timing t11 to timing t13), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not change from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state), and only a post-operation display is displayed.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 194(A) and 194(B), if the special lottery result is a jackpot at the timing (t16) when the effective operation period ends, the outer frame movable body moves from a state in which it is in the standby position (first state) to a state in which the movement is completed (second state) and a post-operation display is displayed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame movable body does not change from the state in which it is in the standby position (first state) and only a post-operation display is displayed.

After that, in the performance patterns shown in Figures 193(A) and 194(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state between timing t26 and timing t28. Also, in the performance patterns shown in Figures 193(A) to 194(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state between timing t30 and timing t32, and the series of frame movable body operations ends.

In this way, before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body, displays (premonition display and operation instruction display) are displayed to divert the player's attention from the frame movable body, so that the player's attention is focused on the game board side performance display device 1600. Also, even during the movement of the outer frame movable body after the player operates the operation unit, the post-operation display is displayed instead of the operation instruction display that was performed until then, so the player's attention continues to be directed to the game board side performance display device 1600. With this configuration, the player feels as if both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, so it is possible to give the player a great surprise. Also, even if it takes time for the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body to change from the first state to the second state, the premonition display, operation instruction display, and post-operation display make it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels irritated by the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body becoming the second state. In addition, because it is possible to move the movable frame body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of situations in which a player accidentally touches the movable frame body and injures themselves.

The timing of changing the frame movable body from the off state to the specific light-emitting performance state may be configured to occur at the timing when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state (timing t13 or timing t18). By configuring it in this way, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

Figures 195 (A) to 196 (B) show modified examples of the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B). In this embodiment, the inner frame movable body starts changing from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which it has completed its movement (second state) in accordance with the time when the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or the end of the operation valid period (timing t16), and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, a premonition display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, and a post-operation display is performed when the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without operation (timing t16). This embodiment is different from the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 170 (A) to 171 (B). Other than these points (for example, the light-emitting performance state of the movable frame body and the timing of the decorative pattern stopping), the performance aspects are basically the same, so we will omit the explanation of the common parts of the performance aspect and focus below on the differences mentioned above.

Figure 195 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 195 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 196 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 196 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Figures 195 (A) to 196 (B), a premonition display, which is a display suggesting that a valid operation period will occur, begins at timing t5 on the game board-side presentation display device 1600. The premonition display displays the characters "Push?" as an image and continues until timing t7, when the valid operation period begins. At timing t7, the valid operation period begins, and the characters "Push!!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in a reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the valid operation period ends without an operation (timing t16), and instead displays the characters "!!" as an image as a post-operation display. The post-operation display ends after continuing for 2 seconds (timing t13 or t18).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 195(A) and 195(B), when an operation valid period occurs and an operation instruction display is being performed, the player operates the operation unit (timing t11), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the inner frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which movement is complete (second state) (timing t11 to timing t13), and then the outer frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which movement is complete (second state) (timing t15 to timing t17), and if the special lottery result is a loss, a presentation pattern is shown in which the outer frame movable body does not change from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 196(A) and 196(B), if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot at the timing (t16) when the effective operation period ends, the inner frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which movement is complete (second state) (timing t16 to timing t18), and then the outer frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which movement is complete (second state) (timing t20 to timing t22); if the result of the special lottery is a loss, a presentation pattern is shown in which the outer frame movable body does not change from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state).

After that, in the performance patterns shown in Figures 195(A) and 196(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state between timing t26 and timing t28. Also, in the performance patterns shown in Figures 195(A) and 196(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state between timing t30 and timing t32, and the series of frame movable body operations ends.

In this way, when the player operates the operating unit, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, allowing the player to slowly observe how the frame movable body changes state, and from the player's perspective, the level of excitement gradually increases over time.

The presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 193(A) to 194(B) and the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B) may be configured to be executed according to the game state.

For example, in normal gameplay conditions where the average change time of the decorative symbols is relatively long (such as when there is no probability change, no time reduction, or no electric support), it is advisable to execute the presentation pattern described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B). In this case, the presentation is performed in a state where a jackpot is unlikely to occur, so the player can take their time to enjoy the movement of the movable frame body.

On the other hand, if this is a state that can occur after a jackpot has occurred once, and the average time for the decorative symbols to change is relatively short compared to the normal game state, making the game state relatively advantageous to the player (probability changing, time-saving, electric support, etc.), it is advisable to configure the device to execute the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 193(A) to 194(B). In this case, the time from when the operating unit is operated until the frame movable body changes to the second state is short, allowing for a good tempo transition to the jackpot game state.

In the normal game state, only the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 195 (A) to 196 (B) may be executed, and in a state advantageous to the player, only the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 193 (A) to 194 (B) may be executed.
Alternatively, in a normal gaming state, the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B) are executed more frequently than the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 193(A) to 194(B), and in a state advantageous to the player, the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 193(A) to 194(B) are executed more frequently than the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B).

The timing for executing the performance pattern described with reference to Fig. 195(A) to Fig. 196(B) may be configured to be executed at an earlier stage, rather than immediately before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, the performance pattern described with reference to Fig. 195(A) to Fig. 196(B) may be executed without stopping the decorative symbols before the decorative symbols form a ready-to-win state, and when the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body change from the first state to the second state, the decorative symbols may form a ready-to-win state. With this configuration, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation that the special lottery will result in a jackpot for a player who visually observes the way the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body move over time. It is preferable that the decorative symbols form a ready-to-win state when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

In addition, after executing the presentation pattern described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B) as a presentation to determine whether or not a reach state is formed, the presentation pattern described with reference to Figures 193(A) to 194(B) or the presentation pattern described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B) may be executed at the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops.

In this way, when the presentation pattern described with reference to Fig. 195(A) to Fig. 196(B) is executed as a presentation as to whether or not a reach state is formed, and then the presentation pattern described with reference to Fig. 193(A) to Fig. 194(B) or the presentation pattern described with reference to Fig. 195(A) to Fig. 196(B) is executed at the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops, a presentation pattern in which the frame movable body operates as a simple presentation without accepting the operation of the operation unit by the player may be executed as a modified form of Fig. 195(A) to Fig. 196(B) as a presentation pattern as to whether or not a reach state is formed. In this case, the operation invalid period continues as the acceptance state of the operation unit, and the premonition display, operation instruction display, and post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing such a modified presentation pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels bothered to operate the operation unit when the expectation of a jackpot is not very high.

In the performance patterns described with reference to Fig. 193(A) to Fig. 194(B), an example was shown in which the word "Push?" is displayed as an image as a premonition display, but this image may be displayed by moving to the position where the operation instruction display is performed. It is also preferable to move it away from the position where the frame movable body is located. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is preferable to configure the premonition display to move the word "Push?" from a position directly above or diagonally above the game board side performance display device 1600 toward the center, and to stop and display it at the center. Also, as a post-operation display, the word "!!" may be configured to move from the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 to a position directly below or diagonally below the game board side performance display device 1600. With this configuration, it is possible to further divert the player's attention from the frame movable body located above. Note that, as described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side performance display device 1600, the premonition display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the opposite manner.

In the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 195(A) to 196(B), an example was shown in which the word "Push?" is displayed as an image as a precursor display, but this image may be displayed to move to the position where the operation instruction display is performed. It may also be moved so as to approach the position of the frame movable body. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, it may be configured so that the word "Push?" moves from the bottom to the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 as a precursor display. It may also be configured so that the word "!!" moves from the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 to the top of the game board side performance display device 1600 as a post-operation display. With this configuration, the player's gaze can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can fully view the entire series of changes in the frame movable body.

The operation instruction display may also be configured to display the characters "!! Push!!" as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Note that instead of the character "!!" as a post-operation display, the operation instruction display "Push!!" or the special operation instruction display "!! Push!!" may continue to be displayed as is. Also, in response to the special operation instruction display "!! Push!!", the characters "!? Push?!" may be displayed as a special premonition display, or the characters "!!!!" may be displayed as a special post-operation display. In this way, the special characters that are displayed only when the special lottery result is a jackpot are displayed continuously from before the operation valid period until after the operation of the operation unit, giving the player a great sense of satisfaction.

Figures 197(A) to 197(D), 198(A) to 198(C), and 199(A) to 199(C) show modified examples of the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 155(A) to 156(B). These modified examples mainly differ in that only one of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first frame movable body) and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second frame movable body) may be moved, the timing of moving both the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may differ when moving them, a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body is displayed for the first frame movable body, but a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the second frame movable body is not basically displayed for the second frame movable body, the frame movable body is operated regardless of the operation of the operation unit, and the timing of the frame movable body operation is not limited to the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops.

The presentation patterns shown in Figures 197(A) to 197(D), 198(A) to 198(C), and 199(A) to 199(C) are presentation patterns that are performed while the decorative patterns are changing, and show the state after a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the decorative patterns began to change (for example, at timing t0, 10 seconds have passed since the decorative patterns began to change).

In the performance pattern shown in FIG. 197(A), the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t7 to timing t15), changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). In addition, in accordance with the operation of the first frame movable body, a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, is displayed in the second state for a predetermined time, and changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). Meanwhile, the second frame movable body does not move from the standby position and maintains the first state. In addition, the frame movable body simulation image that imitates the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 197(B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing t7 to timing t15), changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Note that when the second frame movable body operates, a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body does not move from the standby position and maintains the first state. Also, a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) with the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B), in the case of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(A), a frame moving body simulation image that imitates the first frame moving body is displayed, so the player can easily notice that the first frame moving body has moved. On the other hand, in the case of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B), even if the second frame moving body is moved, a frame moving body simulation image that imitates the second frame moving body is not displayed, so the player cannot easily notice that the second frame moving body has moved.

When the first frame movable body or the second frame movable body operates, it is preferable to select a presentation pattern so that the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern will be a jackpot is higher than when the first frame movable body or the second frame movable body does not operate. For example, it is preferable to set the expectation when the first frame movable body operates and the expectation when the second frame movable body operates to 10% each. With this configuration, when a frame movable body simulation image that mimics the first frame movable body is displayed, a player who looks at the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body is in an operating state will feel a sense of expectation for a jackpot.

On the other hand, in order to notice the operation of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look away from the game board side performance display device 1600 on which the decorative patterns are displayed, and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, the player will notice that the second frame movable body is operating by frequently checking whether it is operating or not, or when he or she happens to turn his or her face in the direction in which the second frame movable body is located. In this case, the player will feel that he or she has learned through his or her own efforts that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot, and will feel a greater sense of accomplishment than if the first frame movable body was, so to speak, made visible as part of a performance in which a frame movable body imitation image that imitates the first frame movable body is displayed.

This configuration makes it possible to further increase the player's interest in the movable frame body, and to expand the player's interest, which was previously limited to a specific range centered on the game board 5, further outward.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 197(A) and 197(B), the expectation level is the same 10% when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body move, but the expectation level when the second frame movable body moves in the presentation pattern shown in Figure 197(B) may be set higher than the expectation level when the first frame movable body moves in the presentation pattern shown in Figure 197(A). For example, the presentation pattern may be configured to select an expectation level of 15% when the second frame movable body moves and an expectation level of 10% when the first frame movable body moves. With such a configuration, a player who notices that the second frame movable body is moving will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(C) is a modified version of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B). In this presentation pattern, the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state (timing t7 to timing t21) is 14 seconds, which is longer than the 8 seconds during which the second frame movable body is in the second state (timing t7 to timing t15) in the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B). By making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state in this way, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the second frame movable body is in the second state.

The expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B). For example, the presentation patterns may be selected so that the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B) is 15% and the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(C) is 25%. With such a configuration, from the moment the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating, the player will feel a greater sense of expectation about how long the second state will be maintained. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and there are cases where it is unclear when the second state began, so the longer the second state continues, the greater the player's sense of expectation will be.

In the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B) and the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(C), the longer the duration that the second frame movable body is in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. However, it is also possible to configure the device to have three or more presentation patterns with different durations of time in the second state. For example, it is also possible to execute a presentation pattern in which the second state is maintained from timing t7 to timing t27, and the expectation for this presentation pattern may be set to 30%.

In the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(B) and the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. However, the expectation may be suggested not by the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, but by the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state. The presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(D) shows an example. The presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body moves from the first state to the second state twice, but a presentation pattern in which the second frame movable body does not perform a second operation, or a presentation pattern in which the second operation is followed by a third operation may be executable. In this case, it is also preferable to configure the expectation to be higher as the number of operations increases. For example, it is preferable to configure the expectation to be 15% when the second frame movable body moves only once, 25% when the second frame movable body moves twice, and 35% when the second frame movable body moves three times. In this way, by configuring the expectation level to increase as the number of times the second frame movable body moves increases, a player who notices early on that the second frame movable body is moving will view the second frame movable body with great anticipation as to how many times it will move.

The performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is a modified version of the performance pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). In this performance pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body are the same as the performance pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) (there is no difference in the performance mode up to timing t20). On the other hand, the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) differs from the performance pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) in that the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33, and returns to the first state at timing t35. In addition, in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(A), when the second frame movable body is moved, the frame movable body simulation image that imitates the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) and the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(A), when either of the presentation patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the change of the decorative pattern, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then returns to the first state. After a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, the second frame movable body may maintain the first state and not change to the second state (when the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) is selected), or the second frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state (when the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is selected).

By configuring it in this way, when the first frame movable body moves, the player's line of sight may turn to the first frame movable body, and then the second frame movable body may move before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side performance display device 1600. This makes it possible for players with little gaming experience to recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) may be set higher than the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). For example, the presentation patterns may be configured to be selected so that the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is 25%, and the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) is 10%. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The performance patterns shown in Figures 198(B) and 198(C) are modified versions of the performance pattern shown in Figure 197(A). This performance pattern differs from the performance pattern shown in Figure 197(A) in that the movement of the first frame movable body and the display of a frame movable body simulation image that mimics the first frame movable body are performed multiple times.

In the performance patterns shown in Figures 198(B) and 198(C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t2, is in the second state from timing t4 to timing t6, returns to the first state at timing t8, and then starts changing from the first state to the second state again at timing t11, is in the second state from timing t13 to timing t15, and returns to the first state at timing t17. Also, a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body is dynamically displayed in synchronization with the operation of the first frame movable body.

After that, in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, remains in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33, and returns to the first state at timing t35. On the other hand, in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(B), no movement of the second frame movable body is performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(B) and the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(C), when either of the presentation patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the change of the decorative pattern, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (timing t17), and then at a timing (timing t21) when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, the second frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state or the second frame movable body may remain in the first state and not change to the second state.

By configuring it in this way, the player's gaze will remain directed at the first frame movable body as it moves, and the second frame movable body may move before the player's gaze returns to the game board side performance display device 1600. This makes it possible for players with little gaming experience to recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(B). For example, the presentation patterns may be configured to be selected so that the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(B) is 25%, and the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(C) is 35%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The performance patterns shown in Figures 199(A) to 199(C) are modified versions of the performance pattern shown in Figure 197(A). This performance pattern differs from the performance pattern shown in Figure 197(A) in that the second frame movable body may move at a timing prior to the movement of the first frame movable body.

In the performance patterns shown in Figures 199(A) to 199(C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31), it changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Also, in accordance with the operation of the first frame movable body, the frame movable body simulation image that imitates the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, is displayed continuously in the second state for a predetermined time, and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each of the performance patterns shown in Figures 199(A) to 199(C), the operating mode of the second frame movable body is different, as shown below.

In the performance pattern shown in FIG. 199(A), the second frame movable body continues to be in the first state from timing t0 to timing t39, and does not change to the second state. In the performance pattern shown in FIG. 199(B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, is in the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and returns to the first state at timing t17. In the performance pattern shown in FIG. 199(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, is in the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and returns to the first state at timing t35. In any of the performance patterns, a frame movable body simulation image that imitates the second frame movable body is not displayed.

The expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(B), and the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(B) may be set higher than the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(A). For example, the presentation patterns may be configured to be selected so that the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(A) is 10%, the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(B) is 20%, and the expectation level of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(C) is 30%.

Comparing the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(A) with the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(B), a player may miss the movement of the second frame moving body when the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(B) is being executed. For a player who is able to see the movement of the second frame moving body, the subsequent movement of the first frame moving body enables the player to recognize that the expectation level is 20%. On the other hand, for a player who does not notice that the second frame moving body has moved, the exact expectation level will be unclear even if the first frame moving body has moved.

Comparing the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(A) with that shown in FIG. 199(C), in the case of the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(C), the second frame movable body remains in the moved position (second state) even after the first frame movable body has moved. Therefore, a player who sees the frame movable body simulation image that mimics the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body has entered the second state can check the state of the second frame movable body, and recognize that if the second frame movable body is not moving at that time and is in the first state, then the expectation is not that high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is moving at that time and is in the second state, then the player can recognize that the expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the presentation pattern shown in Figure 199 (B) with the presentation pattern shown in Figure 199 (C), when the player notices that the second frame movable body has moved to the second state, the player's interest is drawn to the possibility that the first frame movable body will move while the second frame movable body is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body moves to the second state, the player can recognize that there is a high expectation. On the other hand, when the second frame movable body has reached the first state before the first frame movable body has reached the first state, the player will recognize that there is a relatively low expectation.

In the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 199(C), the second frame movable body is configured to be in the first state after the first frame movable body is in the first state. This configuration makes it possible for the player to enjoy a desirable state of high expectations for a long period of time.

The examples have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 154 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, but the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 as shown in FIG. 163 etc. may also be configured to execute the above-mentioned performance patterns as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 154 have been described as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, in the above embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 169, FIG. 178, etc., either or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be the first frame movable body, and either or both of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be the second frame movable body. The above-mentioned performance pattern may be executed by setting the state in which either or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are in the second state as the second state of the first frame movable body, and setting the state in which either or both of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the second state as the second state of the second frame movable body.

When executing the above-mentioned performance pattern in the embodiment shown in FIG. 169, FIG. 178, etc., changing one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the first state to the second state, and then changing the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the first state to the second state may be adopted as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state. Also, changing the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the second state to the first state, and then changing one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, when executing the above-mentioned performance pattern in the embodiment shown in FIG. 169, FIG. 178, etc., changing one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the first state to the second state, and then changing the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the first state to the second state may be adopted as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the first state to the second state. Also, changing the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the second state to the first state, and then changing one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, changes in state caused by successive movements of multiple frame movable bodies can be combined to represent the change in state of a single frame movable body.

An example has been shown in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are changed as the first frame movable body and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are changed as the second frame movable body, but it is also possible to configure only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 to operate as the first frame movable body and the other to remain in a standby state without operating. Alternatively, it is also possible to configure only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to operate as the second frame movable body and the other to remain in a standby state without operating.

For example, of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 may be configured to change its state as the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change their state as the second frame movable body.

In this case, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body have different visible areas when viewed from the front or side. Specifically, the first frame movable body is made up of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, so the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body is made up of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, so the visible area is relatively large.

By configuring in this way, when the state of the relatively small first frame movable body changes, a frame movable body simulation image corresponding to the change in state of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the change in state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the relatively large second frame movable body changes, a frame movable body simulation image corresponding to the second frame movable body is deliberately not displayed, making it possible to give the player a greater sense of surprise when he or she realizes that the second frame movable body is changing state.

The structure of multiple movable frame bodies described with reference to Figures 184 and 185 may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above.

For example, the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the curtain board bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be the second frame movable body. Furthermore, the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain board bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be configured to execute the above-mentioned performance pattern by setting the state in which they are in the standby positions shown in Figures 184(A), 184(C), and 185(A) as the first state, and setting the state in which they are in the movement positions shown in Figures 184(B), 184(D), and 185(B) as the second state.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 may be the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 may be the second frame movable body. Furthermore, the state in which the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are in the standby position shown in Figures 184 (A), 184 (C), and 185 (A) may be the first state, and the state in which they are in the moving position shown in Figures 184 (B), 184 (D), and 185 (B) may be the second state, and the above-mentioned performance pattern may be executed.

For example, when the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is executed, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 change from a standby position state (first state) to a moving position state (second state) while displaying a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630, and then change to a standby position state (first state). Next, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7680 change from a standby position state (first state) to a moving position state (second state) without displaying a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7680, and then change to a standby position state (first state).

Alternatively, either or both of the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain board bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be the first frame movable body, and at least one of the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522, and door frame top unit lower face mouth movable body 7524 possessed by the door frame top unit facial decorative part 7500 may be the second frame movable body. Furthermore, the above-mentioned performance pattern may be executed by setting the state where the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, the curtain board bottom unit left leg movable body 7750, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit lower face mouth movable body 7524 are in the standby positions shown in Figures 184(A), 184(C), and 185(A) as a first state, and setting the state where they are in the movement positions shown in Figures 184(B), 184(D), and 185(B) as a second state.

For example, the above-mentioned performance pattern may be executed by configuring the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 as the first frame movable body and the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 as the second frame movable body. In this case, the frame movable body simulation image will not be displayed for the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, which is larger in size than the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater surprise when he or she notices that the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) has changed state.

In addition to the door frame top unit above-face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may also be considered as second frame movable bodies, and the second state of the second frame movable body may be a state in which the door frame top unit above-face movable body 7510 has completed its upward movement from a position stored downward, and then the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed their upward movement from a position stored in the door frame top unit above-face movable body 7510.

In this way, by arranging the first and second frame movable bodies at a distance from each other in opposing positions across the play area 5a and the game board side performance display device 1600, it is configured so that when the player is viewing one frame movable body, the other frame movable body is less visible to the player. In particular, when the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is executed, the player's attention is focused on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body, which is located at a distant visual angle, is not visible. Then, it is possible to give a player who notices the state of the second frame movable body after its operation a great surprise as the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state.

Although a presentation pattern has been shown in which a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed when the second frame movable body is operated, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed for only a short time. In this case, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed on the game board side presentation display device 1600 for a short period (e.g., 1 second) during a predetermined period in the latter half after the second frame movable body has entered the second state. For example, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t30 to timing t31 in the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 198(A).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent situations in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has been operated.

Alternatively, a frame movable body simulation image that mimics the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 198(A).

In this configuration, the player will be able to see the second frame movable body changing from the second state to the first state, and will feel regretful that he or she was not able to enjoy the state in which the second frame movable body was in the second state. This will increase the player's awareness that the second frame movable body may be moving without the player realizing it during subsequent games.

The presentation patterns in which the frame movable body operates are shown with reference to Figs. 155(A) to 156(B). However, when the frame movable body is moved in this way, the frame movable body may be located in an unexpected position, causing the player to violently contact the frame movable body with his/her hands or head, resulting in injury to the player or damage to the frame movable body. On the other hand, in a gaming machine in which the frame movable body can be operated, in addition to the operation of the frame movable body, various presentations are performed on the gaming board 5 side, and there is a risk that the presentations may be performed in an excessive manner for the player. The embodiment shown below aims to solve such problems. Figs. 200 and 201, 202 and 203, 204 and 205, 206 and 207 show modified examples of the presentation patterns described with reference to Figs. 155 and 156, 164 and 165, 170 and 171, and 179 and 180, respectively.

In each embodiment shown in FIG. 200 and FIG. 201, FIG. 202 and FIG. 203, FIG. 204 and FIG. 205, FIG. 206 and FIG. 207, the volume of the variable performance sound is changed from a normal state to a suppressed state with a lowered volume at a predetermined timing. The variable performance sound is a sound that a predetermined song is played in accordance with the variation of the decorative pattern, and is recognized by the player as background music. For example, a song consisting of the voice of a predetermined singer and the sound of playing multiple instruments is played for several minutes, during which the decorative pattern changes (for example, when all the variation results of the decorative pattern are non-reach misses and the average variation time is about 10 seconds) multiple times. By outputting such a variable performance sound to the player, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. Note that a configuration may be made in which multiple such songs are prepared in advance, and a different song is started to be played when the playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, a configuration may be made in which the song that was being played is faded out in the middle of playback in accordance with a change in the game state, and a different song different from the song that was being played until then is played. In this embodiment, the volume of these variable effect sounds is suppressed in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable frame body, preventing the effect from becoming excessive.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special sound is played for a short time to alert the player that the frame movable body is moving or has moved, in accordance with the timing of the movement of the frame movable body. The special alert sound is not a sound that is recognized as a series of music played for a long time like the variable performance sound, but rather a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping pong") played for one second, a music piece that ends in a short period of time (for example, two seconds), or a sound like a drum being beaten continuously (for example, a sound such as "doko doko doko ...") played for several seconds. In addition, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special alert sound does not include the instrument sound used as part of the variable performance sound. In addition, the special alert sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable performance sound. For example, even in the normal state where the volume of the variable performance sound is not suppressed, and even in the suppressed state where the volume of the variable performance sound is suppressed, the special alert sound is output at a predetermined volume. In addition, the volume of the special alert sound is preferably larger than the volume of the variable performance sound in the suppressed state. In addition, in the performance patterns described below, the state in which the special alert sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is recommended to repeatedly play such sound effects or music that ends in a short period of time to maintain the state in which the special alert sound is output.

In this way, by reducing the volume of the variable effect sound in accordance with the movement of the frame movable body and generating a special warning sound, it is possible to prevent the effects provided to the player from becoming excessive. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged by coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 200(A) to 201(B), the state of the variable presentation sound is suppressed and a special alert sound is output at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. The output of the special alert sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends. The suppression state of the variable presentation sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 202 (A) to 203 (B), the state of the variable presentation sound is suppressed and a special alert sound is output at the timing (timing t9) when the frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which it has started to rotate (second state). The output of the special alert sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends. The suppression state of the variable presentation sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 204 (A) to 205 (B), the state of the variable presentation sound is suppressed and a special alert sound is output at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. The output of the special alert sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends. The suppression state of the variable presentation sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 206 (A) to 207 (B), the state of the variable presentation sound is suppressed and a special alert sound is output at the timing (timing t5) when the inner frame movable body changes from a state in which it is in a standby position (first state) to a state in which it has started to rotate (second state). The output of the special alert sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends. The suppression state of the variable presentation sound is also configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In this way, by changing the output state of the variable effect sound from the normal state to a suppressed state and changing the special warning sound from a non-output state to an output state at the timing when the frame movable body starts to move, it is possible to prevent the effect state from becoming excessive.

In addition, as shown with reference to Figures 204(A) to 205(B), in the case where multiple frame movable bodies can operate in sequence, the output state of the variable performance sound is changed from a suppressed state to a normal state and the special warning sound is changed from an output state to a non-output state at the timing when the second frame movable body to operate starts operating. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable performance sound necessary for the performance from being stopped excessively.

The timing for returning the output state of the variable effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for turning off the output state of the special alert sound are when the player operates the operation unit or when the effective operation period ends. This is because a certain amount of time has passed since the frame movable body moved, so there is little point in suppressing the variable effect sound, and the player notices that the frame movable body has moved when the frame movable body simulation image is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, the timing for returning the output state of the variable performance sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for changing the output state of the special alert sound from the output state to the non-output state may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player comes into contact with the frame movable body and the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged. In the case of a performance pattern in which multiple frame movable bodies return to the first state at different times, it is preferable to change the output state of the variable performance sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and change the output state of the special alert sound from the output state to the non-output state when the frame movable body that is latest to reach the first state returns to the first state.

Alternatively, the output state of the variable effect sound may be returned from the suppressed state to the normal state when the operation unit is operated or when the effective operation period ends, while the special alert sound may be changed from the output state to the non-output state when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured or the frame movable body is damaged.

Alternatively, the special alert sound may be switched from an output state to a non-output state when the operation unit is operated or when the effective operation period ends, and the output state of the variable performance sound may be switched from a suppressed state to a normal state when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured or the frame movable body is damaged.

As in the performance patterns described with reference to Figures 204 and 205, and Figures 206 and 207, when there are multiple frame movable bodies and multiple timings at which the frame movable bodies begin to operate, it is possible to configure the device to output a different special warning sound corresponding to each of the multiple frame movable bodies.

In the presentation patterns described with reference to Figures 204 and 205, an example is shown in which the output state of the variable presentation sound is changed from a suppressed state to a normal state and the special alert sound is changed to a non-output state at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), but it may be configured so that the suppressed state of the variable presentation sound and the output state of the special alert sound may continue even after the timing when the operation unit is operated or the effective operation period ends.

For example, in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 204(A), the variable performance sound suppression state and the special warning sound output state may be continued until timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position or timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes moving to the moving position, or until timing t27 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes moving to the standby position.

In addition, in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 205(A), the suppression of the variable performance sound and the output of the special warning sound may be continued until timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position or timing t20 when the outer frame movable body completes moving to the moving position, or until timing t27 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes moving to the standby position.

On the other hand, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 204(B) and 205(B), the presentation pattern does not change, and the output state of the variable presentation sound changes from a suppressed state to a normal state, and the special alert sound is put into a non-output state at timing t14 in the presentation pattern shown in Figure 204(B), and at timing t18 in the presentation pattern shown in Figure 205(B).

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (i.e., when the special lottery result is a jackpot), the variable performance sound is suppressed and the special warning sound is continuously output according to the operation of the outer frame movable body, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player is injured or the outer frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the outer frame movable body while it is moving to the moving position or when it has moved to the moving position (second state). In particular, since the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when it is confirmed that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the excitement felt by the player is very great, but according to this embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware that the outer frame movable body is operating without losing interest.

The timing for outputting the special alert sound may be limited. For example, the special alert sound may be configured to be output only during at least one of the periods when the movable frame body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period when the movable frame body is changing from the second state to the first state.

For example, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 200(A) to 201(B), the special alert sound may be output only during at least one of the periods when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9) and when the frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t22 to timing t24), and may be configured not to output the special alert sound during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In addition, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 204 (A) and 205 (B), the special alert sound may be output only during at least one of the periods when the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9) and when the inner frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t30 to timing t32), and may be configured not to output the special alert sound during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In addition, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 204(A) and 205(A), the special alert sound may be output only during at least one of the periods when the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t14 to timing t16 in the presentation pattern shown in Figure 204(A), and the period from timing t18 to timing t20 in the presentation pattern shown in Figure 205(A)) and when the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t26 to timing t28), and the special alert sound may not be output during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In addition, the special alert sound may be output only during at least one of the following periods: the period when the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the period when the inner frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (period from timing t30 to timing t32), the period when the outer frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t14 to timing t16 in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 204(A) and period from timing t18 to timing t20 in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 205(A)), and the period when the outer frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (period from timing t26 to timing t28), and the special alert sound may not be output during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation patterns, the special alert sound may be output with a short delay after the variable performance sound is switched to a suppressed state. For example, the special alert sound may be output two seconds after the variable performance sound is switched to a suppressed state. For example, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 200(A) to 201(B), the variable performance sound may be switched to a suppressed state at timing t7, and then the special alert sound may be output at timing t9. This configuration allows the player to clearly recognize that the variable performance sound has been switched to a suppressed state, and that the special alert sound is of a different nature from the variable performance sound.

Alternatively, in each of the above-mentioned performance patterns, the variable performance sound may be configured to be in a suppressed state a predetermined time before the special alert sound is output. For example, the variable performance sound may be configured to be in a suppressed state two seconds before the special alert sound is output. For example, in the performance patterns shown in Figures 200(A) to 201(B), the variable performance sound may be configured to be in a suppressed state at timing t5, and then the special alert sound may be output at timing t7. With this configuration, it becomes clear that the variable performance sound has been suppressed, and that the special alert sound is of a different nature from the variable performance sound.

The timing for ending the output of the special alert sound may be a predetermined timing. For example, the special alert sound may be configured to be output only for the first two seconds after the frame movable body starts to move. For example, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 200(A) to 201(B), the variable alert sound may be suppressed at timing t7 and the output of the special alert sound may be started, and the output of the special alert sound may be ended at timing t9. The variable alert sound may be ended when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or when the effective operation period ends (timing t18). With this configuration, the variable alert sound continues to be suppressed even after the output of the special alert sound ends, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special alert sound has been output.

It may be configured so that the variable performance sound is suppressed and the special warning sound is output before the frame movable body starts to move. For example, it may be configured so that the variable performance sound is suppressed and the special warning sound is output two seconds before the frame movable body starts to move. For example, in the performance patterns shown in Figures 200(A) to 201(B), it may be configured so that at timing t5, the variable performance sound is suppressed and the special warning sound is output, and at timing t7, the operation of changing the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state is started. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

The system may be configured so that an effective operation period occurs in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body starts to move and the variable effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in Figures 204(A) to 205(B), the effective operation period may be generated at timing t7, the operation instruction display may start, and the light-emitting effect state of the frame movable body may be switched off. Even with this configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which a player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

By slowly rotating the movable frame body in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 163, 166, 167, and 168 by a predetermined angle, it may be operated like the movable frame body in the time chart shown in Figures 155(A) to 156(B) or the modified example of the time chart shown in Figures 155(A) to 156(B). For example, the movable frame body in the embodiment shown in Figure 163 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over two seconds. When moving to the standby position, the movable frame body may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over two seconds.

In addition, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 178, 181, 182, and 183, respectively, may be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the time charts shown in Figures 170 and 171 or the modified time charts shown in Figures 170 and 171. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in Figure 178 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over two seconds. Furthermore, when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over two seconds. When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over two seconds, and then the outer frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over two seconds.

When the frame movable body described with reference to Figs. 154, 159, 160, 161, and 162, the inner frame movable body described with reference to Figs. 169, 172, 173, 174 and 175, 176 and 177, and the outer frame movable body described with reference to Figs. 169, 172, 173, 174 and 175, 176 and 177, are in the second state, the frame movable body or either or both of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue to move up and down by about 1 to 2 centimeters or to rotate by about 5 degrees. This configuration makes it easier for the player to notice that the frame movable body, inner frame movable body, and outer frame movable body have moved to the second state.

In the embodiments described with reference to Figures 164 and 165, 179 and 180, respectively, the rotation direction of the movable frame body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. Therefore, compared to when the rotation direction of the movable frame body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player places his or her hand on the frame.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in Figures 164, 165, 179 and 180, the rotation direction of the movable frame body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. By configuring it in this way, the rotating body will be perceived as approaching the player, making it possible for the player to view the movable frame body in an impressive manner.

In the embodiment shown in Figures 164, 165, 179 and 180, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to alternate between rotating clockwise as viewed from the right and counterclockwise as viewed from the right within a predetermined rotation range, rather than rotating 360 degrees or more in the second state. For example, as shown in Figures 163(B), 163(E) or 178(B), 178(E), the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat rotational movements within a range of 45 degrees forward and 45 degrees backward, with the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in an upright position as the center. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player places his or her hand on the frame.

The inner frame movable body and outer frame movable body shown in Figures 178(A) to 178(E) may be configured so that when the inner frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, and when the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's hands from getting caught in the door frame top unit 570 when they place their hands on the frame.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 154 and 169, the frame movable body was equipped with a light-emitting unit, but it may be configured to have a light-emitting unit that illuminates the frame movable body at a specified location outside the frame movable body (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570), and to illuminate the frame movable body using that light-emitting unit. Alternatively, it may be configured to have both of these, and to illuminate the frame movable body using the light-emitting unit equipped on the frame movable body and the light-emitting unit outside the frame movable body to create a specified presentation state.

On the other hand, in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 163 (A) to 163 (E) and Figures 178 (A) to 178 (E), an example was shown in which the door frame top unit right light emitting part 7050 and the door frame top unit left light emitting part 7052 are provided in the door frame top unit 570 in correspondence with the frame movable body, but it is also possible to configure the frame movable body to emit light in the same light emission mode as the door frame top unit right light emitting part 7050 and the door frame top unit left light emitting part 7052 by providing light emitting parts in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, or by providing light emitting parts in the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. Alternatively, it is also possible to configure the frame movable body to emit light in the same light emission mode as the door frame top unit right light emitting part 7050 and the door frame top unit left light emitting part 7052, by providing light emitting parts in the frame movable body and light emitting parts outside the frame movable body. Alternatively, it is also possible to configure the frame movable body to be provided with both of these, and to illuminate the frame movable body with the light emitting part provided in the frame movable body and the light emitting part outside the frame movable body to create a predetermined performance state.

Referring to Figures 154 to 207, examples have been shown in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or passes through the second state to the third state or the fourth state, but the frame movable body may be forced back to the initial position (first state) by a player or a store clerk manually pushing in the frame movable body that is in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, or the frame movable body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state. In this case, a sensor capable of detecting the position of the frame movable body may be provided in a drive mechanism (not shown) that drives the frame movable body, and if the frame movable body is in the initial position at a time when it should not be in the initial position, it may be determined that an operation such as pushing has been performed by a player or a store clerk, and the drive mechanism may not be operated any further so that the frame movable body remains in the initial position.

This configuration allows the player or amusement store staff to return the frame movable body to its initial position (first state) at any time. In addition, even if a heavy object (such as a bag carried by a player) is placed on the frame movable body, the drive mechanism that operates the frame movable body is controlled so as not to operate the frame movable body, making it possible to prevent the drive mechanism from being overloaded. It also makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which players or amusement store staff are injured.

With reference to Figures 154 to 207, the basic structure of the frame movable body and modified examples of the structure of the frame movable body, and the basic control mode of the frame movable body and modified examples of the control mode of the frame movable body have been shown, but a specified embodiment or modified example of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to a specified embodiment or modified example of the structure of the frame movable body. Also, one or more other embodiments or modified examples of the structure of the frame movable body may be applied to a specified embodiment or modified example of the control mode of the frame movable body. Also, one or more other embodiments or modified examples of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to a specified embodiment or modified example of the control mode of the frame movable body.

Each of the performance examples in the embodiment and each of the technical matters in each of the performance examples may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Also, each of the technical matters in each of the role configurations may be combined and applied to form an embodiment.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described based on the embodiment shown in FIGS.

In the gaming machine, multiple obstacle nails are installed in the area where the gaming balls roll, but in the past, malicious players have been known to bend the obstacle nails in an illegal manner, thereby guiding the gaming balls in a direction that is favorable for winning, and thus causing many gaming balls to illegally enter the winning slots.

For example, fraudulent acts include breaking into an amusement parlor after closing time, opening the door frame, and directly bending the obstructing nails with tools, or, during open hours, inserting piano wire or the like into the game area during play to bend the obstructing nails and illegally guide the game ball in an advantageous direction, causing great damage to the amusement parlor. The embodiments described below have been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a means of preventing fraudulent acts against obstructing nails.

Figure 208 shows a front view of the game board 5' in the second embodiment, and Figure 209 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As shown in the figure, the game board 5' in this embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 is mainly composed of a movable presentation unit 3600 that performs movable presentations using various movable members, and a game board side presentation display device 1600 that is placed behind it and displays game information and presentation displays as images. The presentations by the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the movable presentation unit 3600 are configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game board 5' in FIG. 209 and the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 210, the panel plate 1110 has the front component 1000, outer rail 1001, and inner rail 1002 attached to its front side, and further has a number of obstacle nails 1200 and various winning devices (general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002), etc., and the front unit 2000 is fitted from the front into the opening that spreads in the center of the panel plate 1110 and is fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front with screws (not shown).

In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a colorless, transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of approximately 10 mm. Examples of materials for the panel plate 1110 include transparent synthetic resin plates such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple obstacle nails 1200 are planted in the panel plate 1110, and a left side play area 5'a and a right side play area 5b are configured on the front side of the panel plate 1110 in accordance with the launch direction of the game ball. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 210, the right side play area 5b is formed as a rolling area for the game ball launched by the player's right hit, and a panel protrusion 1117 that protrudes from the right side of the panel plate 1110 toward the central opening is formed integrally with the panel plate 1110. Then, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted on the front side of the panel protrusion 1117, as shown in the plan view of the obstacle nail arrangement in FIG. 213.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in Figure 210, the front unit 2000 in this embodiment is formed in a roughly ring shape from a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of approximately 2 mm, and is mainly composed of a stage 2530, a warp exit 2522, a large prize opening 2005, a flow path device 2700, and an area cover member 2600 described below.

As shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the gaming panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 212, a flow path device 2700 is provided on the right side of the front unit 2000 when viewed from the front, which receives and allows the gaming balls launched by right-handed hits to flow down. The flow path device 2700 is composed of a first flow path forming member 2720a and a second flow path forming member 2720b that are arranged in parallel on the left and right as shown in FIG. 212 above.

The upper parts of the first flow path forming member 2720a and the second flow path forming member 2720b are provided with a first flow path ball inlet 2710a and a second flow path ball inlet 2710b, respectively, which receive game balls shot by right-handed hits, and further, a first flow path outlet 2730a and a second flow path outlet 2730b are provided at the lower parts. Therefore, the game ball shot by right-handed hits enters the first flow path ball inlet 2710a or the second flow path ball inlet 2710b, and is discharged from the first flow path outlet 2730a or the second flow path outlet 2730b, and is discharged into the right-side game area 5b formed in the panel board 1110 described above.

In this embodiment, as described above, the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel protrusion 1117 that constitutes the right-side play area 5b. More specifically, the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in an arrangement as shown in the plan view of the obstacle nail arrangement in FIG. 213, forming a flow path for multiple game balls. That is, three obstacle nails 1201, 1202, and 1203 are planted at equal intervals in the left and right directions above the panel protrusion 1117, and twelve obstacle nails 1204 to 1215 are planted below them in a manner in which two obstacle nails are close to each other in the approximately vertical direction. Further below that, three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are planted close to each other in an approximately diagonal direction. Note that in this embodiment, the obstacle nails are planted in the above-mentioned arrangement, but this is not necessarily limited to such an arrangement, and the obstacle nails can be planted in any position as appropriate.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged front oblique view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the exploded front oblique view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 212, the area cover member 2600 is attached to the front unit 2000 of this embodiment so as to cover the aforementioned flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b from the front side.

In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is formed from a colorless, transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of approximately 2 mm that extends in the vertical direction as shown in the figure. With this configuration, it is possible to visually check the rolling state of the game ball on the rear side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b.

The thickness of the area cover member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in this embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate, and the material constituting the area cover member 2600 can also be a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin.

The area cover member 2600 is formed in a generally flat shape on both the front and back sides, and a through hole 2610 including through holes 2611-2620 is formed at the bottom when viewed from the front as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-to-rear direction. These through holes 2611-2620 are configured to function as storage sections capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201-1218 planted in the panel protrusion 1117 of the right-side play area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 214, the heads of the obstacle nails 1201-1203 are accommodated in the circular through-holes 2611-2613 of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, two adjacent obstacle nails from the obstacle nails 1204-1209 and 1212-1215 are accommodated in the long hole-shaped through-holes 2614-2618, and the heads of the three obstacle nails 1216-1218 are accommodated in the through-hole 2619, which has a longer long hole than the through-holes 2614-2618. In addition, a through-hole 2620 with a notch is formed at the right end of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, and the nail heads of the two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are accommodated in the through-hole 2620.

In addition, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in Figure 214, a number of ball control protrusions 2640 are integrally formed on the rear side of the area cover member 2600, and when a game ball rolling on the rear side of the area cover member 2600 comes into contact with the ball control protrusions 2640, it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, prevent ball clogging, and regulate the rolling direction.

214, mounting bosses 2630-2633 are integrally provided on the rear side of area cover member 2600, and are fixed with screws (not shown) on the rear side of area cover member 2600 so that area cover member 2600 cannot be removed from the front of game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. 214, the screws screwed into mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 are accessible from the rear of game panel 1100, but the screw screwed into mounting boss 2632 is blocked by panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed, so that area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the rear side of game panel 1100. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630-2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000, which is fixed to the front surface of the panel board 1110, so that when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself must first be removed from the panel board 1110. This configuration makes it difficult for malicious players to remove the area cover member 2600, for example, and makes it possible to prevent acts such as illegally bending obstacle nails.

In addition, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 212, the first flow path ball inlet 2710a and the second flow path ball inlet 2710b, the first flow path outlet 2730a and the second flow path outlet 2730b are covered by the area cover member 2600 attached to the front side to form respective flow paths. In other words, since the area cover member 2600 is an essential component that constitutes part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, even if a malicious player removes the area cover member 2600 and illegally bends the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the right game area 5b and plays the game as is, the game ball cannot move as designed with the area cover member 2600 removed, leading to ball clogging and damage to surrounding parts, making it difficult to play normally. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of removing the area cover member 2600 and illegally bending the obstacle nails.

Next, Figures 215(a)-(c) show cross-sectional views of the planted portion of the obstacle nails in the right-side play area 5b. Specifically, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201-1209 and 1212-1218 planted in the panel protrusion 1117 are shown housed in the penetration portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600, and in this embodiment, the nail heads of each obstacle nail are configured to be housed within the thickness of the area cover member 2600.

In this embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel protrusion 1117 in which each obstacle nail is planted to the front surface of the area cover member 2600 is approximately 18 mm. In addition, the distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstacle nail and the end of each penetration portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is approximately 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstacle nail is approximately 4 mm, the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head and the opening end of each penetration portion 2610 is approximately 2 mm.

To explain this embodiment more specifically, the cross-sectional view of Figure 215 (a) shows the state in which the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the penetrations 2611 to 2613. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrations 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above, and the center of each nail head and the center of each penetration are configured to coincide.

The cross-sectional view of Figure 215(b) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204-1209, 1212-1215 are accommodated in the through-holes 2614-2618. In this case, the gap from the outer periphery of the nail heads of a pair of adjacent obstacle nails 1204-1209, 1212-1215 to the opening ends of the through-holes 2611-2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is approximately 2 mm, as described above.

The cross-sectional view of Figure 215(c) shows how the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1216-1218 are accommodated in the through-hole 2619. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1216-1218 to the opening end of the through-hole 2619 provided in the area cover member 2600 is approximately 2 mm, as described above.

As described above, the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the through-hole 2610 that constitutes the storage section is only about 2 mm, making it difficult to insert a tool to bend the obstructing nail. Even if the obstructing nail is bent illegally in some way, the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the through-hole 2610 interfere with each other, so the degree of bending of the obstructing nail is limited to a very small extent, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of bending the obstructing nail illegally. In addition, when the obstructing nail is bent illegally, the center position of the through-hole 2610 and the center position of the nail head of the obstructing nail are eccentric, so that it is possible to easily detect the illegal act by visually checking the eccentricity from the front.

The present embodiment has been described above based on the descriptions in the drawings, but it is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the implementation configuration can be modified as follows:

For example, the correspondence between the obstruction nail and the through-hole 2610 that constitutes the accommodation section for the obstruction nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 215, but is not necessarily limited to such an embodiment, and the shape of the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole 2610 can be modified in various ways as follows.

In the example of the through-hole 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of Figures 228(a) to (c), a small cross-sectional convex portion is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole 2610a in two places, on the front side of the area cover member 2600a and on the panel board 1110 side. With this configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, the convex portion is likely to leave a trace such as a chip or a dent, making it easy to detect illegal acts and making it possible to suppress the illegal bending of obstructing nails.

On the other hand, in the example of the through-hole 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of Figures 229(a) to (g), a convex portion facing the obstructing nail 1220 is formed in the center of the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole 2610a. With this configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, a trace such as a chip or dent is left in the convex portion, making it easy to detect the illegal act and making it possible to prevent the illegal bending of the obstructing nail. Also, compared to the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional views of Figures 228(a) to (c) described above, it is possible to easily process and form the above-mentioned convex portion.

In the example of the through-hole 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of Figures 230(a)-(d) and 231(a)-(d), a small cross-sectional convex portion is formed on either the front side of the area cover member 2600a or the panel plate 1110 side of the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole 2610a. With this configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, a trace such as a chip or dent is left on the convex portion, making it easy to detect the illegal act and making it possible to suppress the illegal bending of the obstructing nail.

In the example shown in the cross-sectional views of Figures 232(a) to (e), the front side of the area cover member 2600a on the inner circumferential surface of the through portion 2610a is closed integrally with the area cover member 2600a to form a storage recess 2670 for storing the nail head. With this configuration, the obstructing nail 1220 cannot be accessed from the front side of the area cover member 2600a, making it possible to prevent the act of bending the obstructing nail 1220 illegally. Furthermore, if the above-mentioned blocking portion is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, a trace will be left behind, making it easier to discover the illegal act and making it possible to suppress the act of bending the obstructing nail illegally.

In the example shown in the cross-sectional views of Figures 233(a) to (c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the through-hole 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a. With this configuration, it becomes difficult for tools or piano wires to access the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1220 housed in the through-hole 2610a in order to bend the obstructing nails illegally. Furthermore, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted, a chip or dent will be left on the rib, which further suppresses the act of bending the obstructing nail illegally. Furthermore, by providing a rib, the strength of the through-hole 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the area cover member 2600a itself can also be increased.

In this embodiment and the other examples described above, various forms of the through-hole that constitutes the storage section for the obstructing nails have been exemplified, but various forms can be adopted as long as they can store all or part of the obstructing nails when viewed from the front and function as a storage section, including through-holes with cutouts, through-holes with multiple cutouts, and through-holes with various shapes.

In addition, a decorative sticker with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front of the area cover member 2600, which can improve the design of the area cover member 2600 itself, and when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nail and the opening end of the through-hole 2610, the decorative sticker leaves traces such as scratches and peeling, making it easier to detect fraudulent acts, and thus further suppressing the act of bending the obstacle nail illegally. In addition, by attaching a decorative sticker with a through hole corresponding to the through-hole 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the decoration of the play area close to the obstacle nail at the front position of the obstacle nail can be realized by the decorative sticker with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600, as opposed to the conventional technology in which the decoration of the play area (so-called decoration by a cell sheet attached to the play board (cell decoration)) was only performed at the rear position of the obstacle nail. Furthermore, by using decorative stickers to be attached to the area cover member 2600 in combination with the cell decoration, three-dimensional decorations can be realized on both the rear and front sides of the obstacle nails, making it possible to create new decorations in the play area that have not been seen before. In this case, it is preferable that the area cover member 2600 is made of a transparent material, and that the decorative stickers attached to the area cover member 2600 have a light-transmitting portion that allows the rear cell decoration area to be seen. In the above embodiment, a sheet-like decorative sticker is used as an example, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the play area in which the obstacle nails are planted or the area cover member 2600 may be directly decorated by painting, plating, or other methods.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is formed as a single unit and attached to the front side of the front unit 2000, but this is not necessarily limited to this embodiment, and for example, it may be formed integrally with various winning devices and decorative members provided on the gaming panel 1100. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the effort required for attaching the area cover member 2600 during the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the flow path device 2700 and the right-side play area 5b, but this is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. For example, the area cover member 2600 may be configured to be separated into a member that covers the flow path device 2700 and a member that covers the right-side play area 5b, and each may be attached to the front unit 2000.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the flow path device 2700 and the right-side play area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600, but this is not necessarily limited to this embodiment, and the area cover member 2600 can be attached to any location within the left-side play area 5'a.

For example, the area cover member 2600a of the present invention can be attached to the play area shown in the front view of Figure 225 (a) in the manner shown in the front view of Figure 225 (b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is formed with a substantially rectangular through-hole 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231, a notched through-hole 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the so-called life nail 1230, a notched through-hole 2652 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, and a long hole through-hole 2653 that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233, and is fixed with screws from the rear side of the panel board 1110 to four bosses 2660 that are integrally formed with the area cover member 2600a. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of bending the obstacle nails illegally, which greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball into the first starting hole 2002. Furthermore, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the back side of the panel board 1110, the screws cannot be easily accessed, and it is possible to prevent the act of bending the obstacle nails illegally. In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is provided to accommodate the obstacle nails planted around the first starting hole 2002, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the area cover member 2600a may be provided in other game areas as well, and it is also possible to cover the entire game area with a single area cover member 2600a.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 211, the through-hole 2620 having a cutout portion formed in the area cover member 2600 is configured so that the cross section of the cutout portion is closed by the member forming the outer edge of the play area, but this is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, the cutout portion of the through-hole may be configured to be closed by using the outer wall surface of a center gimmick or various winning devices placed in the play area. Also, the cutout portion of the through-hole may be provided in any direction of the area cover member 2600, and in this case, the cutout portion may be configured to be closed by another component member located at a position opposite the cutout portion.

Figure 234 also illustrates the installation of the area cover member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 234 (a), the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are housed in a through hole 2617 that serves as a housing for the obstacle nails, and a notch is provided in a part of the through hole 2617.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 234(a) shows that all of the obstructing nails, including the obstructing nails 1212 and 1213, are in the designed position, and in the through portion 2617, the head of the obstructing nail 1213 is located inside the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a, making it possible to visually confirm that the obstructing nail 1213 is in the designed position.

On the other hand, the embodiment shown in FIG. 234(b) shows a state in which the obstructing nail 1213 is bent improperly, and the head of the obstructing nail 1213 is visually recognized as exceeding the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a, so that it is easily visually recognized that the obstructing nail is bent improperly. Note that FIG. 234(a) shows an example in which the obstructing nail 1213 is in the designed state inside the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a, but the area cover member 2600 may be formed so that the obstructing nail 1213 is located on the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a (so that the obstructing nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a when viewed from the front), which is the designed state. Even in this case, if the head of the obstructing nail 1213 exceeds the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a as shown in FIG. 234(b), it is easy to detect the improperness.

The ball output rate (degree of winning) of pachinko machines as gaming machines is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle pins that are planted on the surface of the game board. The ball output rate greatly changes the number of customers, which has a large impact on the sales of the amusement hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the condition of the obstacle pins when the gaming machine is installed and at appropriate times after installation, and adjust the obstacle pins as necessary. For this reason, nail sheets have traditionally been used to easily and accurately check the condition of multiple obstacle pins and adjust them.

The nail sheet is made of a translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material and is formed into a thin sheet. On the surface of the nail sheet, a pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board.

In order to check the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually planted on the game board and the design gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally, the various accessory devices and winning devices printed on the nail sheet along with the above-mentioned gauge arrangement are aligned and superimposed on the top surfaces of the various accessory devices and winning devices actually placed on the game board to check the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails to be planted on the game board.

However, in addition to the obstacle nails, various components are generally arranged on the game board, such as multiple winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative components, etc., and the various components also protrude in various amounts in the forward and backward directions of the game machine. As a result, when the above-mentioned thin and freely deformable nail sheet is placed on the game board, it is quite difficult even for an experienced player to place the nail sheet without twisting due to the unevenness of the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there is a problem in that it is not possible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

The embodiment described below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it relatively easy to check the position of obstacle pins.

Figure 216 shows a front view of the nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in this embodiment. The nail sheet 5000 is an A4-sized transparent film sheet 5100 on which the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail print 5200 and the images of the various components arranged around the obstacle nail print 5200 are printed in black.

In addition, in order to utilize the limited area within the nail sheet 5000 so that the gauge arrangements at multiple locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed, in the example shown in FIG. 216, a first area print body 5110 and a second area print body 5120 are printed on the nail sheet 5000, and the gauge arrangements corresponding to the two obstacle nail planting areas and their surrounding arrangement components are printed separately.

When checking the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails that have actually been planted using the nail sheet 5000 shown in FIG. 216, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 217, the outer edge and the multiple penetrations 2610 of the area cover member 2600 printed on the first area print body 5110 are precisely aligned and superimposed on the game panel 1100, and it is checked whether there is any misalignment between the printed obstacle nail print body 5200 and the obstacle nails planted on the back side.

As described above, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment is configured, as shown in the enlarged front oblique view of the gaming panel 1100 in Figure 211, the plan view of the arrangement of the obstacle nails in Figure 213, and the exploded rear oblique view of the area cover member 2600 in Figure 214, so that the heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the circular through-holes 2611 to 2613 of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, two adjacent obstacle nails from the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 are accommodated in each of the long hole-shaped through-holes 2614 to 2618, and the heads of the three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the through-hole 2619, which has a longer long hole than the through-holes 2614 to 2618. In addition, a through hole 2620 with a partial cutout is formed at the right end of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, and the through hole 2620 is configured to accommodate the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210, 1211.

214, mounting bosses 2630-2633 are integrally provided on the rear side of area cover member 2600, and are screwed to the rear side of area cover member 2600 so that area cover member 2600 cannot be removed from the front of game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. 214, the screws screwed into mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 are accessible from the rear of game panel 1100, but the screw screwed into mounting boss 2632 is blocked by panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed, so that area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the rear side of game panel 1100. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630-2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000, which is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself must first be removed from the panel plate 1110.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 212, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment is provided on the gaming panel 1100 so as to cover the flow path device 2700 and the right-side gaming area 5b in which multiple obstacle nails are planted, and forms a wide, flat surface on the gaming panel 1100. With this characteristic configuration, when placing the very soft nail sheet 5000 on the gaming panel 1100, it is layered on the above-mentioned flat surface, so that it is not affected by various components or obstacle nails with different amounts of forward protrusion, and even an unskilled person can easily and stably layer the nail sheet 5000 on the gaming panel 1100 without causing any twisting.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 208, the large prize opening 2005 is disposed below the right game area 5b, and a large prize opening cover member (not shown) is provided on the front side of the large prize opening 2005. The large prize opening cover member is formed to have flat surfaces on the front and back sides, similar to the area cover member 2600, and is attached so that the front side is flush with the area cover member 2600 installed above the large prize opening cover member. With this configuration, the area cover member 2600 and the large prize opening cover member can form an even wider flat surface on the game panel 1100, making it possible to stack the nail sheet 5000 on the game panel 1100 more stably.

Furthermore, as described above based on the enlarged front oblique view of FIG. 211 and the rear oblique view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 214, the area cover member 2600 of this embodiment accommodates the nail heads of the obstacle nails and has multiple penetrations 2610 of different shapes formed therein. When positioning the nail sheets 5000 when overlapping them, the nail sheets 5000 can be easily and accurately aligned by overlapping the shape of the penetrations printed on the nail sheets 5000 with the penetrations 2610 on the rear surface, and the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails can be quickly confirmed while observing the eccentricity between the obstacle nails and the penetrations.

The present embodiment has been described above based on the descriptions in the drawings, but it is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the implementation configuration can be modified as follows:

In the above embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the flow path device 2700 and the right-side play area 5b, but this is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. For example, the area cover member 2600 may be configured to be divided into a member that covers the flow path device 2700 and a member that covers the right-side play area 5b and installed on the play panel 1100. In other words, even if the area cover member 2600, which has a flat surface on the front side, is divided and attached to the play panel 1100, a single large flat surface can be formed, so that the nail sheet 5000 can be stably layered on the front of the area cover member 2600.

The area cover member 2600 may also be formed as a single large piece to cover an even wider playing area, and this configuration makes it possible to further stably stack the nail sheet 5000 on the front surface of the area cover member 2600.

In addition, the area cover member 2600 in the above embodiment is configured as a single member capable of covering the flow path device 2700 and the right-side play area 5b, but in addition, any range within the left-side play area 5'a may be configured to be covered by a single area cover member or multiple area cover members. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. 225(b), an area cover member 2600a is provided to accommodate multiple obstacle nails around the first starting hole 2002. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily and accurately overlap the nail sheets 5000 at any point on the play panel 1100, and it becomes possible to quickly check the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails.

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described based on the embodiment shown in FIGS.

Incidentally, pachinko machines, which are used as gaming machines, are equipped with multiple obstacle nails, and malicious players have been known to bend the obstacle nails in an illegal manner, allowing many game balls to be illegally admitted into the winning slot. In order to prevent such illegal acts, a decorative cover has been provided on the winning slot device to prevent the entrance entrance obstacle nails planted directly above the winning slot device from being bent in an illegal manner, and a concentric circular regulating section has been provided on the decorative cover at a position corresponding to the entrance entrance obstacle nails (for example, JP 2008-188259 A).

Generally, the payout rate (the chance of winning) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle pins that are set on the surface of the game board, so many players are very interested in the inclination direction of the obstacle pins when choosing a game machine to play on, and tend not to play on that game machine if the state of the obstacle pins is unfavorable to play.

On the other hand, in the conventional technology described above, as shown in FIG. 8 of JP 2008-188259 A, when a player looks at the entrance obstacle nail from the front to check its condition, the relative positional relationship between the entrance obstacle nail and the restricting portion that forms the penetration portion can be grasped, and if the player realizes that the entrance obstacle nail is tilted in a direction that is unfavorable to the winning of the game ball, this could lead to a decrease in interest.

The following embodiment has been developed in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest.

To address the above-mentioned issues, the greatest feature of this embodiment is the provision of an area cover member 2600a with a through-hole 2610a that accommodates the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220, as in the example shown in Figure 218.

The area cover member 2600a in this embodiment illustrated in FIG. 218 has a basic configuration in common with the second embodiment described above, and the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are housed in the penetration portion 2610a in a manner similar to that of the area cover member 2600 in the second embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a accommodates the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 planted near the first starting hole 2002, which greatly affect the chances of the game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, in the through-hole 2610a, in order to address the above-mentioned issues.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(a), the area cover member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting hole 2002, and the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are received in the through-holes 2610a in the manner shown in FIG. 218(b).

As a method of attaching the area cover member 2600a to the first starting opening 2002, it is possible to attach it to the decorative member of the first starting opening 2002 using a known fastening method, as shown in FIG. 218(c). It is also possible to mold it integrally with the decorative member of the first starting opening 2002 so that it can be attached, as shown in FIG. 218(d).

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 219 illustrates several embodiments in which the center position of the through-hole 2610a formed in the area cover member 2600a is shifted from the center position of the nail head of the obstruction nail 1219, 1220.

In other words, to solve the above-mentioned problems, the actual planted obstacle nails 1219, 1220 are not bent or adjusted, but instead, a through-hole 2610a is formed (off-centered) in the area cover member 2600a, with the center position shifted from the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220, allowing the player to visually perceive the planted state of the obstacle nails as being more advantageous or disadvantageous than the actual planted state of the obstacle nails (such as the degree of curvature of the obstacle nails).

For example, in the example shown in the front view of Figure 219 (a), the center position of the penetration portion 2610a on the right side as viewed from the front is shifted to the left of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220, giving a player who sees this eccentricity the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spreading outward, making it possible to stimulate a desire to play on the gaming machine.

In the example shown in the front view of Figure 219(b), the center position of the penetration portion 2610a on the left side as viewed from the front is shifted to the right of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219, giving the player who sees this the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spreading outward, making it possible to stimulate a desire to play on the gaming machine.

In addition, in the example shown in the front view of Figure 219 (c), the center positions of the penetration parts 2610a on both sides are shifted inward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220, giving the player who sees this the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides are spreading outward, making it possible to stimulate a desire to play on the gaming machine.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(d), the center position of the through-hole 2610a on the right side as viewed from the front is shifted to the right from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220, making it possible for a player who sees this to have the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. A player who sees this will assume that the ball passage between the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is narrowed, and that he or she is at a disadvantage in terms of the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 2002, but in reality, the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is not bent inward, so the game ball will enter the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. This configuration allows the player to see an unexpected winning mode, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(e), the center position of the penetration portion 2610a on the left side as viewed from the front is shifted to the left of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219, which gives the player the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is bent inward. A player who sees this will assume that the ball passage between the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is narrowed, putting him at a disadvantage in terms of the ball entering the first starting hole 2002, but in reality, the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is not bent inward, so the ball will enter the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. This configuration allows the player to see an unexpected winning mode, which can increase his interest in the game.

In addition, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(f), the center positions of the through-holes 2610a on both sides are shifted outward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220, making it possible for a player who sees this to have the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. A player who sees this will assume that the ball passage between the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is narrowed and that he is at a disadvantage in terms of the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 2002, but in reality, the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, so the game ball will enter the first starting hole 2002 at the normal entry frequency. This configuration allows the player to see an unexpected entry mode, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 219(a)-(f), it is necessary to manufacture area cover members 2600a each having a different formation position of the through portion 2610a, and to attach them to the decorative portion of the first starting opening 2002 by replacing them as appropriate, which is very time-consuming. Therefore, below, based on Figures 220(a)-(e), an embodiment that can reduce the time required to manufacture multiple area cover members 2600a, and further reduce the time required to store and replace multiple area cover members 2600a at the gaming facility will be described.

As shown in the front view of Figure 220(a), in this embodiment, four through-holes 2610a are formed in one area cover member 2600a, and the two lower through-holes 2610a are formed more inward than the two upper through-holes 2610a. When the illustrated △-shaped mark is attached to the decorative part of the first starting hole 2002 with the mark facing upward, the player can visually confirm that the center positions of the through-holes 2610a on both sides and the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides are aligned, as shown in the front view of Figure 220(b). Furthermore, if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees without being replaced and the triangle-shaped mark is directed downward, the center positions of the penetration parts 2610a on both sides can be positioned more inward than the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides, as shown in the front view of Figure 220(c), which gives the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides are spread outward.

Also, as shown in FIG. 220(d), by rotating the area cover member 2600a 90 degrees to the right and placing the triangle-shaped mark facing the right side, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 on the left side are spread outward, while as shown in FIG. 220(e), by rotating the area cover member 2600a 90 degrees to the left and placing the triangle-shaped mark facing the left side, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1220 on the right side are spread outward and slightly upward. This configuration makes it possible to change the visual appearance of the player in various ways with a single area cover member 2600a without increasing the number of parts of the area cover member 2600a.

Although this embodiment has been described above based on the descriptions in the drawings, the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following modifications to the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 221(a), an egg-shaped through-hole 2610a can be formed in the area cover member 2600a and attached to the first starting hole 2002. By moving the area cover member 2600a downward from the installation state shown in FIG. 221(b) to the installation state shown in FIG. 221(c), it is possible to give a player viewing from the front the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219, 1220 on both sides are spreading outward. This configuration can increase the player's motivation to play the gaming machine.

The shape of the through-hole 2610a is not limited to the above embodiment, and the through-hole 2610a can have various shapes as long as the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the through-hole 2610a and the obstacle nail. For example, as shown in FIG. 222(a), the shape of the through-hole 2610a can be a substantially rectangular shape with R-shaped corners, or as shown in FIG. 222(b), the shape can be a square shape.

Furthermore, the through-hole 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and may be configured to accommodate the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220 by forming a through-hole with a horizontal cutout shape as shown in FIG. 222(c). Also, as shown in FIG. 222(d), it may be configured to accommodate the nail heads of the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220 by forming a through-hole with a diagonal cutout shape.

In addition, from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstacle nails visible, the through-holes 2610a of the present invention may accommodate the nail heads of multiple obstacle nails in one through-hole 2610a. For example, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the through-holes 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a may be shaped as long holes, and one through-hole 2610a may be configured to accommodate the nail heads of multiple obstacle nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224). And, as shown in FIG. 223(b), by forming two long-hole-shaped through-holes 2610a at the inner position in the area cover member 2600a, it is possible to give the player who sees it from the front the illusion that the obstacle nails 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224 are spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play the gaming machine.

In addition, in the various embodiments described above, the installation mode of the area cover member 2600a has been described for obstacle nails planted near the first starting hole 2002, such as so-called life nails that greatly affect the winning rate at the first starting hole 2002, but it is not necessarily limited to the obstacle nails described above. As long as the obstacle nail is planted in the play area, the area cover member 2600a may be installed to accommodate the obstacle nail in the penetration part 2610a regardless of the location of the obstacle nail. In other words, if the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstacle nail and the penetration part 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a and recognize whether the state of the obstacle nail is advantageous or disadvantageous for playing, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to play the gaming machine.

For example, in another embodiment shown in the front view of FIG. 225 and FIG. 226, an installation mode of an area cover member 2600a that accommodates a plurality of obstacle nails planted around the first starting hole 2002 is shown. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is formed with a substantially rectangular through-hole 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231, a notched through-hole 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the so-called life nail 1230, a notched through-hole 2652 that accommodates the nail heads of two left guide nails 1232, and an elongated through-hole 2653 that accommodates the nail heads of four right guide nails 1233, and is fixed with screws from the rear side of the panel board 1110 to four bosses 2660 that are integrally formed with the area cover member 2600a.

The area cover member 2600a is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 225(b) for the play area shown in FIG. 225(a). The area cover member 2600a provided in FIG. 225(b) is configured so that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is visible to the player in a state that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous, and specifically, the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is located at the center of the penetration part 2651, and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is located below the penetration part 2650.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a shown in Figures 226(a) and 226(b) differs from the area cover member 2600a in Figure 225(b) in the formation of the through portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the jump nail 1231 and the through portion 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230, and the area cover member 2600a shown in Figure 226(a) has the through portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the jump nail 1231 shifted downward and the through portion 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230 formed to be longer. With this configuration, when a player visually checks the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 226(a), the player is given the mistaken impression that the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 are in a favorable state for entering the first starting hole 2002 due to their corresponding positional relationship with each penetration part, which can increase the player's motivation to play.

Conversely, the area cover member 2600a shown in FIG. 226(b) has a through-hole 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the jump nail 1231 shifted upward, and a through-hole 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 formed to be shorter. With this configuration, a player who visually checks the state of the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 226(b) will have the illusion that the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state for winning in the first starting hole 2002 due to the corresponding positional relationship with each through-hole, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in choosing the gaming machine he or she will play. Also, even if it appears to be in an unfavorable state, the actual state of the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is not bent in a disadvantageous state for winning, so the winning rate for the first starting hole 2002 does not decrease. Therefore, a player who continues to play despite visually seeing that the jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are in an unfavorable state can feel a sense of surprise and elation at the relatively good winning rate for the first starting hole 2002.

The positional relationship between the life nail 1230 and the through-hole 2650 is not limited to the embodiment shown in Figures 225 and 226. For example, as shown in the front view of Figure 235, it is possible to configure the state of the game nail to be understood based on whether the nail head of the life nail 1230 is located inside the line connecting the ends of the cutout portion of the through-hole 2650, or outside the line connecting the above-mentioned ends.

The method of installing the area cover member 2600a on the game panel 1100 is not limited to the above-mentioned method of fixing to the decorative member of the first starting hole 2002, and for example, as shown in the front view of FIG. 223(c) and the cross-sectional views of FIG. 223(d) or (e), it is possible to fix the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 from the front side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, a mounting boss may be integrally molded with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 223(d), or a screw hole may be provided on the panel plate 1110 side as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 223(e). In this case, it is preferable to place the mounting part below the obstacle nail so as not to interfere with the rolling of the game ball as shown in the front view of FIG. 223(c).

Furthermore, the manner in which the area cover member 2600a is attached to the panel board 1110 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. As shown in Figures 224(a) and (b), the area cover member 2600a can also be fixed by screws from the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. With this configuration, the area cover member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the gaming machine, making it possible to prevent the act of illegally bending obstacle nails.

In this embodiment and the other examples described above, various forms of the through-hole that constitutes the storage section for the obstructing nails have been exemplified, but various forms can be adopted as long as they can store all or part of the obstructing nails when viewed from the front and function as a storage section, including through-holes with cutouts, through-holes with multiple cutouts, and through-holes with various shapes.

In the gaming machine described with reference to Figures 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-093655 A, the progress of the game is shown to the player by the display content on a specified display means, and the movable decorative means provided on the frame body that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine is operated at a specified timing, making it possible to make the player feel a sense of interest. However, some players may find it troublesome to move their gaze from the specified display means to the movable decorative means provided on the frame body that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine, and may not move their gaze to the movable decorative means that has been operated. In such cases, there is a risk that the player may not be able to fully feel the interest that comes from operating the movable decorative means.

Below, we will explain an embodiment of a gaming machine that can provide sufficient interest to a player even if the player finds it troublesome to move his or her gaze to the movable decorative means attached to the frame that constitutes the exterior of the gaming machine and does not move his or her gaze to the movable decorative means attached to the frame that constitutes the exterior of the gaming machine.

Figures 236 and 237 show an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 154. In the embodiment shown in Figures 236 and 237, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit 570 is configured to have a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that is a frame movable body shaped like a root vegetable and can move in the vertical direction.

Figures 236(A), 236(B), 237(A), and 237(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 236(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 236(D) and 236(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 237(C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Figures 236(A), 236(C), and 236(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are stored in the waiting position in the door frame top unit 570. Figure 236(B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stored in the waiting position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the moving position. Figure 237 (A) shows the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the waiting position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has moved to the moving position. Figures 236 (E) and 237 (B) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the moving position.

As shown in FIG. 237(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802, which resembles the leaves of a root vegetable, on the right side when viewed from the front. It also has a root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804, which resembles the roots of a root vegetable, on the left side when viewed from the front. The root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 are each made of a white translucent synthetic resin, and a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in Figures 236(A) and 236(B), the lower end of the right connecting line member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. Also, the lower end of the left connecting line member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. Meanwhile, the upper end of the right connecting line member 7820 is connected to the right vertical movement drive mechanism 7825. Also, the upper end of the left connecting line member 7830 is connected to the left vertical movement drive mechanism 7835. The right connecting line member 7820 and the left connecting line member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

The right connecting line member 7820 and the left connecting line member 7830 are specifically configured as tubular cables, and inside thereof are provided a signal line (not shown) that transmits a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, and a power supply line (not shown) that supplies power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. The signal line and power supply line may be provided inside either the right connecting line member 7820 or the left connecting line member 7830. Note that instead of transmitting signals or supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, signals from the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly, or a loop antenna or the like may be used to supply power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the door frame 3 side in a non-contact manner.

The right-side up-down movement drive mechanism 7825 and the left-side up-down movement drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown), and by rotating this rotation mechanism based on drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to wind up or wind down the right-side connecting line member 7820 and the left-side connecting line member 7830, which are made of cylindrical cables.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the underside of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved downward from a state in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a state in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, or from a state in front of the game board side performance display device 1600 to a state in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570. Specifically, for example, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is in a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 236 (A), by rotating the rotation mechanism in a predetermined direction, it is possible to move the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to a moving position in front of the game board side performance display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 237 (A). Furthermore, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the opposite direction to the specified direction, it is possible to move the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the moving position in front of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 237(A) to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 shown in FIG. 236(A).

As shown in FIG. 237(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 is composed of a white printed circuit board shaped to match the outer shape of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that constitute the front side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, for example, the configuration described above for the face board 6020 may be adopted. By controlling the driving of multiple light sources (e.g., full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 into a light emitting decorative mode of a predetermined light color.

The light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 may be configured to adopt the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode described above for the rear wall substrate 6352. For example, by making the multiple light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804, which is the part of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 that imitates the roots, emit white light, and by making the multiple light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802, which is the part that imitates the leaves, emit green light, it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have a light emitting decoration mode that imitates a radish. On the other hand, by making the multiple light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that imitates the roots emit red light, and by making the multiple light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802, which is the part that imitates the leaves, emit green light, it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have a light emitting decoration mode that imitates a carrot.

The embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154 has been modified to provide a root vegetable frame movable body 7800, but the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163, 166 to 169, 172 to 178, and 181 to 185 may also be provided with a root vegetable frame movable body 7800. In such an embodiment, the following performance modes may be performed. In an embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move in response to the operation of at least one of these frame movable bodies (such as movement from a standby position to a moving position, or change from a stopped state to a rotating state).

Below, the presentation mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be explained with reference to Figures 238 and 239. Figures 238(A) and 238(B) are time charts showing the movement state of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the display mode of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means, and the movement state of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). Figures 239(A) to 239(C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a specified timing in such a presentation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 238, the passage of time is indicated as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., to explain the timing of the presentation. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the time charts shown in the drawings shown in FIGS. 242, 244, 245, 249 to 253, etc., described below, and to presentation modes that are variations of these.

Figure 238 (A) shows a presentation mode using the gaming machine described with reference to Figures 236 and 237. First, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t7, the decorative patterns on the left and right temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 begin to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to an upward movement position under drive control of the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side performance display device 1600 begins to display simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Figure 239 (A) shows the state at timing t7 when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state and the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 starts. Note that the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (e.g., 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the moving positions. At the same time, a simulated image is dynamically displayed that mimics the way the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving positions.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their movement to their movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a manner simulating the state in which they have completed their movement to their movement positions.

Figure 239 (B) shows the state at timing t9 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed moving to their respective moving positions, and the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed in a manner simulating the state when the movement to their respective moving positions has been completed.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state in a position overlapping the display positions of the simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 on the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, right ear frame movable body 7100, and left ear frame movable body 7200 that had been displayed up until that point is terminated.

Figure 239 (C) shows the state at timing t14 in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has moved to a position where it overlaps, when viewed from the front, with the position where the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 were displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from a moving position in which it has moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a standby position in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the upper moving position to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At this time, no simulated image is displayed that mimics the manner in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position. At timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a specified timing after timing t24, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

Figure 238 (B) shows the presentation mode when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to Figures 236 and 237 is applied to a gaming machine having a rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 as shown in Figure 163, etc.

First, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative pattern begins to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, resulting in a reach state in which only the central decorative pattern changes. At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from a stopped state within the door frame top unit 570 to a rotated state due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side performance display device 1600 begins to display simulated images that mimic the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state in a position overlapping the display positions of the simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 on the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, right ear frame movable body 7100, and left ear frame movable body 7200 that had been displayed up until that point is terminated.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from a moving position in which it has moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At timing t24, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from a rotating state to a stopped state stored in the door frame top unit 570.

At a specified timing after timing t24, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

During play, the player continues to look at the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) on which the performance based on the lottery results of the lottery means is displayed. According to the above-mentioned configuration, by displaying a simulated image of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) on the specified display means in accordance with the drive control of the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body, the player is notified that the first movable decorative means is being driven and controlled. This makes it possible to prevent the player from noticing that the first movable decorative means is being driven and therefore unable to feel the excitement of the first movable decorative means being driven and controlled, or from accidentally coming into contact with the first movable decorative means and being injured.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually confirm the drive control of the first movable decoration means due to, for example, feeling tired, can virtually experience the operation of the first movable decoration means by looking at a simulated image of the first movable decoration means displayed on a specified display means, instead of directly visually confirming that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled.

Furthermore, since the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position that overlaps with the display position of the simulated image that imitates the first movable decorative means when viewed from the front, it is possible for passive players who are aware that the first movable decorative means is being driven and do not move their gaze toward the first movable decorative means to feel the interest that comes from the movement of the second movable decorative means without having to burden themselves with having to move their gaze. In addition, it is possible for such passive players to regain their enthusiasm for the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238(A) and FIG. 238(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move in front of the game board side performance display device 1600 at timing t13, but in addition to the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, a performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move in front of the game board side performance display device 1600 and continues to be located in a standby position in the door frame top unit 570 may also be executed. With such a configuration, after the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, a performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position that overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in a front view, and a performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be located in a standby position can be executed.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the expectation of a jackpot occurring is higher when a presentation mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves is executed than when a presentation mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move is executed.

By configuring in this way, after the display of a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is driven and controlled to execute a first performance mode in which the second movable decorative means moves to a position that overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means when viewed from the front, and a second performance mode in which the second movable decorative means remains in a standby position, so that the player's interest is drawn to whether or not the second movable decorative means moves.

In addition, if the player is configured to have a higher expectation of a state (jackpot state) favorable to the player occurring when the first presentation mode is executed than when the second presentation mode is executed, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decorative means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238(A) and FIG. 238(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move in front of the game board side performance display device 1600 from timing t13 to timing t14, but the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to have a plurality of operation modes when moving in front of the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to stop temporarily at a position halfway between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14) and then return to the standby position (timing t15), or the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to stop temporarily at a position halfway between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14) and then move to the moving position (timing t15). In this case, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 so that the expectation of the big win state occurring is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position.

Alternatively, during the period from when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has completed its movement towards the game board side performance display device 1600 until it starts to move into the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14 to timing t18), in addition to being stopped in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move in a predetermined operating manner within a range in front of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may also be configured to have multiple operating modes when it moves into and returns to the door frame top unit 570. For example, in addition to a performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the moving position to the standby position between timing t18 and timing t19, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to execute a performance mode in which it stops temporarily at a position halfway between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t18 and timing t19) and then returns to the standby position (timing t20).

The manner in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position, the manner in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is in the moving position, and the manner in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position have been shown, but a combination of these operating modes may be adopted as the multiple operating modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Furthermore, the multiple operating modes may be configured so that the expected probability of a jackpot occurring is different for each.

With this configuration, not only will the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) move, but if it does move, it will be driven and controlled in one of a number of different operating modes, so players will be interested not only in whether the second movable decorative means moves, but also in what operating mode the second movable decorative means moves in.

Furthermore, if the expectation of a state advantageous to the player (a jackpot state) occurring is configured to differ depending on the operating mode, it is possible to further increase the player's anticipation as to how the second movable decorative means will move.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be in an off state until the forward movement of the game board side performance display device 1600 is completed, and to be in a light-emitting decoration state when the movement to the movement position is completed. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be in an off state from timing t13 to timing t14, and at timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be in a light-emitting decoration state, and the light-emitting decoration state may be continued until timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, the light-emitting decoration state may be continued until timing t19 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes its movement to the storage position. In addition, the light-emitting decoration state may be configured to be selected based on the special lottery result, either the light-emitting state in the form imitating a radish or the light-emitting state in the form imitating a carrot.

In this way, by moving the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) in an unlit state to a moving position in front of the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) and then switching it to a light-emitting decorative state at the moving position, it is possible to give the player a great surprise. Also, by switching it to a light-emitting decorative state based on the result of a special lottery, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful that the result of the special lottery will be favorable to the player (a big win). Also, by continuing the light-emitting decorative state when storing the second movable decorative means in the standby position, it is possible to make the player interested in the first movable decorative means that is located on an extension of the direction of movement of the second movable decorative means.

238 and 239, the display of a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started in a display area approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the same time as the start of the operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Also, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238(A), the display area approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 is configured to display a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 completing the movement to the movement position at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is completed. Also, during these periods, such as from timing t9 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 238(A) and from timing t7 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 238(B), it is preferable to display a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the same manner as the operating state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have moved from a standby position to a moving position, or that have changed from a non-rotating state in the standby position to a rotating state.

By configuring it in this way, the state of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) that has moved from the first state (a state in which it is in the standby position) to the second state (a state in which it is in the moving position or a state in which it is rotating) can be accurately grasped by visually checking the specified display means (the game board side performance display device 1600).

On the other hand, it may be configured to display a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in a manner different from the operating states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 238(A), a dynamic display is performed in which a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9, but this dynamic display may be configured to be performed again from timing t9 to timing t11, and further from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, even after the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state), a simulated image that mimics the operating mode of the first movable decorative means is dynamically displayed on a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600), making it possible to get the player interested in the operation of the first movable decorative means. In the above example, this kind of re-dynamic display is performed twice (from timing t9 to timing t11 and from timing t11 to timing t13), but the number of times the dynamic display is performed may be once or three or more times.

Also, at timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 238(A), the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be configured to separate from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 and begin to move upward within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and then rise within the display area and complete its movement outside the display area at timing t11. Furthermore, from timing t11 to timing t13, the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may also be configured to perform a similar dynamic display. FIG. 240(A) is a diagram showing the state at timing t10 in such an embodiment, showing the state in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 has separated from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 and is moving upward.

In this example, after the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from a first state (standby state) to a second state (state in a moving position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200) is moved in a predetermined direction suggesting the position where the first movable decorative means is provided on a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600). Also, the first movable decorative means is configured to be located on an extension of the movement direction of the simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first movable decorative means has operated to change from a first state to a second state. In addition, the position where the first movable decorative means is located can be directly suggested, making it possible for the player to take an interest in the operation of the first movable decorative means. Furthermore, movements that are impossible in the actual operation of the first movable decorative means are performed using a simulated image that mimics the first movable decorative means, which also makes it possible for the player to take an interest in the operation of the first movable decorative means.

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. 238(A), the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be dynamically displayed to alternately appear and disappear from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 240(B) shows a state in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half-retracted from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570.

In this example, after the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from a first state (standby state) to a second state (state in a moving position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200) is displayed on a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) in a manner that moves back and forth in a specified direction. Also, the first movable decorative means is configured to be located on an extension line of the direction of reciprocating movement when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first movable decorative means has operated to change from the first state to the second state. It is also possible to suggest the location where the first movable decorative means is located, making it possible to get the player interested in the operation of the first movable decorative means. It is also possible to get the player interested in the operation of the first movable decorative means by displaying a comical mock-up image that mimics the first movable decorative means.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 240(A) and 240(B), after the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from a first state (standby state) to a second state (state in the moving position), a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) is configured to dynamically display a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (ears popping out upwards, ears bouncing up and down, etc.) in a manner different from the manner in which the first movable decorative means changes from the first state to the second state.

This configuration makes it possible for the player to become interested in how the first movable decorative means actually operates.

On the other hand, the display may be configured to dynamically display the simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image of the left ear frame movable body 7200 in a predetermined color from timing t9 to timing t14 in the performance mode shown in FIG. 238(A). For example, in the simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image in which the part simulating the inside of the ear is red and the part simulating the outside of the ear is white may be displayed, and then the colors may be switched to display an image in which the part simulating the inside of the ear is white and the part simulating the outside of the ear is red. This display operation may be repeated multiple times (for example, five times in total with the colors switched every second). Also, such a display operation may be configured to be performed simultaneously in the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 241(A) shows a simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image of the left ear frame movable body 7200, in which the part that resembles the inside of the ear is white and the part that resembles the outside of the ear is red.

On the other hand, the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the color. FIG. 241(B) shows a representation in which a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 in which both the part simulating the inside of the ear and the part simulating the outside of the ear are pink, and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in which both the part simulating the inside of the ear and the part simulating the outside of the ear are pink, are continuously displayed.

This configuration makes it possible for players to become interested in how the first movable decorative means actually emits light.

Each of the presentation modes described with reference to FIG. 240 and FIG. 241 may be configured to have a different expectation of the jackpot state occurring. For example, the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 240(A) may be configured to have a higher expectation of the jackpot state occurring than the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 240(B). Also, the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 241(A) may be configured to have a higher expectation of the jackpot state occurring than the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 241(B).

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute a presentation mode that combines the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 240 and the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 241. For example, it may be configured so that a presentation mode that combines the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 240(B) and the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 241(B) has a higher expectation of a jackpot state occurring than a presentation mode that combines the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 240(A) and the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 241(A).

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the ratio of execution of a presentation mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot state occurring to a lower one. For example, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of a presentation mode so that the ratio of the number of times that a presentation mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot state occurring is executed to the number of times that a presentation mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot state occurring is executed is 9:1.

By configuring in this way, there are multiple display modes of the simulated images (simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) of the first movable decorative means displayed on the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600), which eliminates monotony in the performance and makes it possible for the player to take an interest in the first movable decorative means. It is also possible to provide the player with the interest of whether to enjoy the act of directly viewing the operation of the first movable decorative means itself, or the act of viewing the simulated images simulating the first movable decorative means and finding out the likelihood of a situation occurring that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the display mode of the simulated image that mimics the first movable decorative means indicates to the player the likelihood of a state (jackpot state) favorable to the player occurring, making it possible for players who are reluctant to view the first movable decorative means to be reminded of the presence of the first movable decorative means.

In addition, by configuring the display so that the higher the expectation of a state (jackpot state) favorable to the player, the lower the probability of that display mode being executed, the player will usually see many display modes with low expectation and high execution probability, but will occasionally (for example, once in ten times) see a display mode with high expectation and low execution probability, which will surprise the player. And when a player sees the latter display mode, coupled with the excitement of knowing that the expectation is high, the player will become more interested in the first movable decorative means.

The light-emitting state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit light so that they are recognized in the same way as a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 241(A), the outside of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit red light, and in the state shown in FIG. 241(B), the entire right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit pink light.

In this way, by making the light emission pattern in the second state (state in the moving position) of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body the same as the image color of the simulated image (simulated image simulating right ear frame movable body 7100 and simulated image simulating left ear frame movable body 7200) that imitates the first movable decorative means displayed on the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600), a player who has been viewing the specified display means can quickly recognize the first movable decorative means when attempting to view it.

In a configuration in which the decorative patterns start to vary in the display area approximately in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 and then are stopped and displayed in a manner that corresponds to the results of a special lottery, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move.

For example, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is operated, the decorative pattern may start changing approximately in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, and while the decorative pattern is changing, the decorative pattern that is changing may be moved to the upper right of the game board side performance display device 1600 and displayed in a reduced size, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed in a display area approximately in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Then, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping with the display area approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is further moved from the position overlapping with the display area approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a direction to be stored in the door frame top unit 570, and then the decorative pattern that was displayed in the upper right corner until then is moved to approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, and then expanded to its original size to continue the varying display, and finally displayed stopped in a manner that suggests the lottery result.

When this type of decorative pattern change is adopted, the decorative pattern changes multiple times in approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, the player's gaze remains at a specified position of the specified display means (approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600), and for passive players who feel stressed when viewing the drive control of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the display of a simulated image that mimics the first movable decorative means and the movement of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) make them feel as if they are being forced to move their gaze, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player feels stressed.

The decorative pattern may start changing approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, and a decorative pattern smaller in size than the decorative pattern displayed approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 may start changing in the upper right corner of the game board side performance display device 1600. From the state in which each decorative pattern is changing, while continuing the display of the decorative pattern being changed in the upper right corner of the game board side performance display device 1600, the display of the decorative pattern displayed approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be temporarily terminated, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may start to be displayed approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Then, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping with the display area approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600, and then the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the position overlapping with approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a direction to be stored in the door frame top unit 570, and then the display of the decorative pattern changes approximately at the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 is resumed, and finally, together with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner, each is displayed stopped in a manner suggesting the lottery result.

When this type of decorative pattern change is adopted, the decorative pattern changes multiple times in the approximate center and upper right corner of the game board side performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, the player's gaze remains at a specified position on the specified display means (approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 where the relatively large decorative pattern is displayed), and for passive players who feel stressed when viewing the drive control of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the display of a simulated image that mimics the first movable decorative means and the movement of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) make them feel as if they are being forced to move their gaze, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player feels stressed.

Although an example of displaying a small decorative pattern in the upper right of the game board side performance display device 1600 has been shown, it may be configured to display it in the lower right or lower left of the game board side performance display device 1600 so that the small decorative pattern is not hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 during the period when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position (timing t13 to timing t14 in Figures 238 (A) and 238 (B)), the period when it is in the moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), and the period when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position (timing t18 to timing t19 in Figures 238 (A) and 238 (B)). Specifically, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the small decorative pattern so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front during these periods.

In this way, by configuring the movement of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) so that the decorative pattern displayed at a specified position of the specified display means (the lower right or lower left of the game board side performance display device 1600 where relatively small decorative patterns are displayed) is not hidden, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations where passive players feel that the performance is excessive.

In the presentation mode described below with reference to Figures 244, 245, etc., these display methods may be adopted when displaying simulated images imitating sculpted bodies and decorative patterns on the game board side presentation display device 1600.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a waiting time indicating when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. Several display modes are shown below with reference to Figures 242(A) and 242(B). Figure 242(A) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 238(A). Also, Figure 242(B) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 238(B).

The display of the waiting time may be configured to display, for example, the number "1" from timing t8 to timing t9, the number "2" from timing t9 to timing t10, the number "3" from timing t10 to timing t11, the number "4" from timing t11 to timing t12, and the character string "GO!!" (note that the notation is abbreviated to "GO" in FIG. 242(A)) in the display area between the simulated image that imitates the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image that imitates the left ear frame movable body 7200 from timing t7 to timing t8. In addition to displaying such numbers and characters, the character string "What if the root vegetables fall...?" may be displayed in the display area between the simulated image that imitates the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image that imitates the left ear frame movable body 7200 from timing t7 to timing t8.

Alternatively, instead of displaying such numbers or letters, the display may be configured to display the text "What if the root vegetables fall...?" from time t7 to time t13 in the display area between the simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image of the left ear frame movable body 7200.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which images ("1," "2," "3," "4," "GO!!") indicating the waiting time until the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates are displayed on a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600), a player attempting to view the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can recognize the timing at which the second movable decorative means operates, and the display of a simulated image of the first movable decorative means makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who moves his or her gaze to the first movable decorative means misses the operation of the second movable decorative means. In addition, for passive players who do not move their gaze to the first movable decorative means, the operation timing of the second movable decorative means is indicated, making it possible to wait for the operation of the second movable decorative means without moving their gaze from the specified display means.

In addition, by displaying an image suggesting that the second movable decorative means will operate at a specified timing ("What if the root vegetables fall...?") at the same timing (timing t7) as the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means is displayed, the player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decorative means has operated and that the second movable decorative means will operate, which makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who is proactive in moving their gaze moves their gaze to the first movable decorative means first, and does not notice that a display is being displayed suggesting that the second movable decorative means will operate, resulting in missing the operation of the second movable decorative means.

In addition, by displaying an image suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates adjacent to the simulated image that imitates the first movable decoration means, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that an image suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates is being displayed.

An example has been shown in which an image suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decorative means operates is displayed in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, but it may also be configured to display an image suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decorative means operates or an image suggesting that the second movable decorative means will operate, superimposed on either or both of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reduce the occurrence of situations in which the player does not notice that an image indicating the waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates or an image indicating that the second movable decoration means will operate is being displayed.

In the example shown, the game board side performance display device 1600 displays the waiting time indicating when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move in response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, but instead of or in addition to such a display, a similar suggestion may be made by sound. For example, as shown in FIG. 242(A) and FIG. 242(B), in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the sound "ichi" may be output from timing t8 to timing t9, the sound "ni" may be output from timing t9 to timing t10, the sound "san" may be output from timing t10 to timing t11, the sound "yon" may be output from timing t11 to timing t12, and the sound "go" may be output from timing t12 to timing t13. Alternatively, the device may be configured to output the phrase "Konsai garakkashiba" as a voice from timing t7 to timing t13, or to output some kind of melody (a melody of about 6 seconds that is completed at least by timing t13).

By adopting a configuration that outputs a sound indicating the waiting time until the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates, a player attempting to see the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200) can auditorily recognize the timing at which the second movable decorative means will operate even when the player has moved their gaze to the first movable decorative means, making it possible to enjoy the operation of the first movable decorative means until just before the second movable decorative means operates.

Furthermore, in the case of a player who does not move his or her gaze toward the first movable decorative means, the act of viewing the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) on which the performance based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed may be controlled by operating a mobile phone or smartphone, and the player may not necessarily continue to view the specified display means. However, since the operation timing of the second movable decorative means is audibly indicated to the player by sound, it is possible to restore the player's motivation to view the specified display means and the second movable decorative means.

Referring to Fig. 238(A) and Fig. 238(B), an embodiment is shown in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position where it overlaps with the simulated images of the left and right ear frame movable bodies in a front view, but the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move to a moving position and then periodically move up and down at the moving position. For example, during the four seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move up and down once per second, repeating such up and down movement a total of four times. In this movement, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to move within a range where at least a part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps with the area where the simulated images of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 were displayed in a front view.

In this way, by configuring the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) to move to a moving position where it overlaps in a front view with the position where the simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) was displayed, and then moving so that at least a portion of the second movable decorative means overlaps in a front view with the area where the simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means was displayed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which a passive player becomes stressed by the operation of the second movable decorative means after it has moved to the moving position.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 236 and 237, the player can directly contact the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, so there is a risk that the player may be injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 falling downward, or that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be pulled downward by the player, resulting in destruction of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, etc. Therefore, below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 236 and 237 will be described with reference to Figure 243. In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to contact the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

Figures 243(A) and 243(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 243(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 243(D) and 243(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 243(A), 243(C), and 243(D) show the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 stored in a standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 243(B) and 243(E) show the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moved to the moving position.

As shown in FIG. 243, in this embodiment, a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided to cover the movement area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and is composed of a cover unit frame 7852 that is square in front view and right-angled triangular in side view, a cover unit front part 7854 that covers the square part formed on the front by the cover unit frame 7852, and a cover unit right side part 7856 and a cover unit left side part 7858 that cover the right-angled triangular parts formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852.

The cover unit frame 7852 is formed from a colored (specifically, green) opaque synthetic resin. It may also be made of metal to increase the strength of the cover unit frame 7852. The cover unit frame 7852 also has the function of holding the cover unit front portion 7854, the cover unit right side portion 7856, and the cover unit left side portion 7858.

The cover unit front portion 7854, the cover unit right side portion 7856, and the cover unit left side portion 7858 are each flat and made of colorless, transparent synthetic resin. The cover unit front portion 7854 is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a tilted state so that its upper portion is located toward the front when viewed from the side. The cover unit right side portion 7856 and the cover unit left side portion 7858 are provided facing each other at the left and right ends of the gaming machine.

The player can see the operating state of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the colorless and transparent cover unit front part 7854. Also, a player playing on an adjacent gaming machine can see the operating state of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the cover unit right side part 7856 and the cover unit left side part 7858.

A gaming machine that employs such a configuration may be configured to execute the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 238, etc.

In this way, protective members (cover unit front portion 7854, cover unit right side portion 7856, cover unit left side portion 7858) are positioned to surround the movement area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), making it difficult for the player to come into contact with the second movable decorative means, and by adopting a configuration that allows the player to see the second movable decorative means through the transparent protective member, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which a player is injured by the movement of the second movable decorative means or the second movable decorative means is destroyed by the player, while maintaining the visibility of the second movable decorative means and the impact it has on the player when it operates.

An example has been shown in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154 has been modified to provide a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850, but the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163, 166 to 169, 172 to 178, and 181 to 185 may also be configured to provide a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850. Furthermore, such embodiments may be configured to execute each of the performance modes described in this specification.

An example has been shown in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front portion 7854, the cover unit right side portion 7856, and the cover unit left side portion 7858, but it may be configured to not have either or both of the cover unit right side portion 7856 and the cover unit left side portion 7858. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may be configured to have only the cover unit front portion 7854, or the cover unit frame 7852 may be configured to have only the cover unit front portion 7854 and the cover unit left side portion 7858.

In this way, by positioning a protective member (cover unit front portion 7854; or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit right side portion 7856; or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit left side portion 7858) to surround the movement area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), it is possible to contact the second movable decorative means from the sides (from the right and left; or from the left only; or from the right only), and by adopting a configuration that allows the player to see the second movable decorative means through the protective member, it is possible to maintain the visibility of the second movable decorative means and the impact on the player when the second movable decorative means is operated, while preventing the occurrence of situations in which a player is injured by the movement of the second movable decorative means or the player impulsively destroying the second movable decorative means. Furthermore, since it is possible to contact the second movable decorative means from the side where the protective member is not provided, even if some abnormality occurs in the second movable decorative means, repairs and other maintenance can be performed by game store staff, etc.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 236 to 243, etc., even if the player is unable to fully feel the interest caused by operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest is reduced.

In the gaming machine described with reference to Figures 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-093655 A, the progress of the game is shown to the player by the display content on a specified display means, and the shaped bodies provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine are activated at a specified timing, making it possible to interest the player. However, there is room for improvement in the presentation when multiple shaped bodies are provided on the frame.

Below, we will explain an embodiment of a gaming machine that can provide sufficient excitement to the player even if the frame has multiple drivable shaped bodies.

The gaming machine in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 172 etc. has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "inner ear frame movable bodies") which are frame movable bodies that imitate the inside of the ear, and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "outer ear frame movable bodies") which are frame movable bodies that imitate the outside of the ear, and each of these four frame movable bodies can independently be positioned in a standby position and in a moving position.

Below, we will explain the first presentation mode using the ear outer frame movable body and the second presentation mode using the ear inner frame movable body with reference to Figures 244, 245, 246, and 247. Figures 244 and 245 are time charts for the first and second presentation modes, and Figures 246 and 247 are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a specified timing for such presentation modes.

The first presentation mode will be described below with reference to Figs. 244(A) and 246. Note that the presentation modes shown in Figs. 244(A) and 244(B) show presentation modes that can be applied to gaming machines that have movable inner-ear frame movable bodies and outer-ear frame movable bodies, such as the gaming machine described with reference to Fig. 172.

First, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 begin to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to an upward movement position under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side performance display device 1600 begins to display simulated images that mimic the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

Figure 246 (A) shows the state when the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 starts at timing t8. Note that the display of the simulated images simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 starts immediately after this (e.g., 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to their respective moving positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to its respective moving position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to its respective moving position are dynamically displayed.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete their movement to their respective positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a manner simulating the state in which they have completed their movement to their respective positions.

Figure 246 (B) shows the state at time t10 when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed moving to their respective positions, and the simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in a manner simulating the state when the movement to their respective positions has been completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be positioned in the moved position. At the same time, the simulated image simulating the state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is positioned in the moved position and the simulated image simulating the state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is positioned in the moved position also continue to be displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from their upper moving positions to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in a manner in which they start moving to their standby positions.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed.

At timing t18, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete their movement to the standby position and are stored within the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes to a display mode in which they have completed their movement to the standby position. Specifically, after a moment in which only the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a specified timing after timing t18, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (for example, "454") is displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to Figures 244(B) and 247. First, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t4, the decorative patterns on the left and right temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images of the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400.

Figure 247 (A) shows the state when the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 starts at timing t5. Note that the display of the simulated images simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 starts immediately after this (e.g., 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t5 to timing t7, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the moving position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the moving position are dynamically displayed.

At timing t7, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state in which they have completed moving to their movement positions.

Figure 247 (B) shows a state at timing t7 in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still stored in the door frame top unit 570, and a simulated image of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner that simulates a state in which they have completed moving to their moving positions.

Next, at timing t8, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 begin to move from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete their movement to the moving positions.

Figure 247 (C) shows the state at time t10 when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed moving to their respective positions, and the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating the state when the movement to their respective positions has been completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 continue to be positioned in the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is positioned in the moving position and a simulated image simulating the state in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned in the moving position are displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from their upper moving positions to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed as they start moving to their standby positions.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed.

At timing t18, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete their movement to the standby position and are stored within the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes to a display mode in which they have completed their movement to the standby position. Specifically, after a moment in which only the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a specified timing after timing t18, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (for example, "454") is displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are driven and controlled in the second performance mode, have a smaller area when viewed from the front when moved to the moving position, compared to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are driven and controlled in the first performance mode. Therefore, in the second performance mode, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are driven and controlled after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of displaying the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, to compensate for the sense of volume as a performance.

The first and second performance modes shown in Fig. 244(A) and Fig. 244(B) are applied to a gaming machine having a movable inner-ear frame movable body and outer-ear frame movable body, as in the gaming machine described with reference to Fig. 172, but may also be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to Fig. 173. In this case, the inner-ear frame movable body moves from an upper standby position to a lower moving position, so the simulated image of the inner-ear frame movable body also moves from the top to the bottom within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. It may also be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to Fig. 174 and Fig. 175. In this case, the inner-ear frame movable body and the outer-ear frame movable body move from a lower standby position to an upper moving position, so the simulated image of the inner-ear frame movable body and the outer-ear frame movable body also moves from the bottom to the top within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Alternatively, the inner-ear frame movable body and the outer-ear frame movable body may each be moved from an upper standby position to a lower moving position, and the simulated images of the inner-ear frame movable body and the outer-ear frame movable body may also be displayed in a manner that moves from top to bottom within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The first presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 245(A). Note that the presentation modes shown in FIG. 245(A) and FIG. 245(B) show presentation modes that can be applied to gaming machines that have rotatable inner-ear frame movable bodies and outer-ear frame movable bodies, such as those shown in FIG. 178, FIG. 181, etc.

First, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side performance display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a rotated state by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time at timing t8, the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in a dynamic manner simulating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display of simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 on the game board side performance display device 1600 continue.

At timing t18, the state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from a rotating state to a stopped state stored in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ends.

At a specified timing after timing t24, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 245(B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbols start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t4, the decorative symbols on the left and right temporarily stop at the same symbol, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the central decorative symbol changes.

At timing t5, the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in a dynamic manner simulating a rotated state.

At timing t8, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and are rotated from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display of simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 on the game board side performance display device 1600 continue.

At timing t18, the state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes from a rotating state to a stopped state stored in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a specified timing after timing t24, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are driven and controlled in the second performance mode, have a smaller maximum area that can be seen from the front when rotated compared to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are driven and controlled in the first performance mode. Therefore, in the second performance mode, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body are driven and controlled after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of displaying the simulated image that imitates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image that imitates the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, to compensate for the sense of volume as a performance.

In this way, in a gaming machine capable of controlling the drive of the first sculpted body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the second sculpted body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400) provided on the frame body, the second sculpted body is driven when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of a simulated image simulating the second sculpted body is started on a predetermined display means (game board side performance display device 1600). This makes it possible to visually increase the sense of volume for the performance using the second sculpted body even when multiple sculpted bodies are provided on the frame body. Also, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second sculpted body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the drive control of the second sculpted body.

Furthermore, when controlling the second body, which is one of the multiple bodies (first body and second body) provided in the gaming machine, and in which the size of the body itself and the amount of visual change when the body is controlled are relatively small and the fact that it is being controlled is not noticeable, the second body is configured to start being driven when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of displaying a simulated image of the second body. This makes it possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the performance using the second body, which is small in size and the amount of visual change when controlled and the fact that it is being controlled is not noticeable. Furthermore, by displaying a simulated image of the second body in advance on a specified display means, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the control of the second body, which is likely to be overlooked due to its relatively small size, etc.

In addition, by displaying a simulated image of the first body on a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) at a timing corresponding to the driving of the first body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), it is possible to show the player that the first body is being driven and controlled.

Below, a modified example of the first and second presentation modes described with reference to FIG. 244 will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

Figure 248 (A) shows modified examples of the display mode of the simulated image of the first formation body in the first performance mode described with reference to Figure 244 (A). In Modification 1, the display in which the simulated image of the first formation body is changed from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. In Modification 2, the display in which the simulated image of the first formation body is changed from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. In Modification 3, after the display in which the simulated image of the first formation body is changed from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9, the display simulating the second state ends at timing t11, and the display in which the simulated image of the first formation body is changed from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first body starts may be configured to be slightly earlier or later than the timing at which drive control of the first body starts. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first body ends may be configured to be earlier than the timing at which the first body enters the first state. The same effect can be achieved even when such a configuration is adopted.

Figure 248 (B) shows modified examples of the display mode of the simulated image of the second formation body in the second performance mode described with reference to Figure 244 (B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second formation body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. In Modification 2, the simulated image of the second formation body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, the simulated image of the second body may be configured to suddenly display an image simulating the state in which the second body is driven and controlled to enter the second state, and to continue to display the image until the timing at which drive control of the second body begins. The same effect can be achieved even when such a configuration is adopted.

Below, a modified example of the first and second presentation modes described with reference to FIG. 245 will be described with reference to FIG. 249.

Figure 249 (A) shows modified examples of the display mode of the simulated image of the first formation body in the first performance mode described with reference to Figure 245 (A). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the first formation body is displayed from timing t7 to timing t18. In Modification 2, the simulated image of the first formation body is displayed from timing t9 to timing t18. In Modification 3, the simulated image of the first formation body is displayed from timing t7 to timing t13.

In this way, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first body starts may be configured to be slightly earlier or later than the timing at which drive control of the first body starts. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first body ends may be configured to be earlier than the timing at which the first body enters the first state. The same effect can be achieved even when such a configuration is adopted.

Figure 249 (B) shows modified examples of the display mode of the simulated image of the second formation body in the second performance mode described with reference to Figure 245 (B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second formation body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. In Modification 2, the simulated image of the second formation body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, the simulated image of the second body may be an image simulating the state in which the second body is driven and controlled to enter the second state, and may be configured to continue to be displayed until the timing at which drive control of the second body begins. The same effect can be achieved even when such a configuration is adopted.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 244(A) and 245(A), the simulation image imitating the first formation is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in the first performance mode, but it may be configured not to display the simulation image imitating the first formation in the first performance mode.

This configuration makes it possible to secure a display area on the designated display means (game board side performance display device 1600), and for example, makes it possible to continue displaying the decorative pattern near the center of the designated display means without reducing its size.

Alternatively, instead of displaying a simulated image of the first formation in the first performance mode, a display indicating that the first formation is being driven and controlled may be displayed. For example, the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to display "Your ears may have popped out?!" or "If you look up?!".

This configuration makes it possible to prevent situations in which the player does not realize that the first sculpture is being controlled.

Because the second body has a smaller area in front view when driven and controlled, and is therefore less noticeable, a simulated image of the second body is displayed before the second body is driven and controlled in order to ensure a sense of volume as part of the presentation. However, even if the second body is less noticeable in other ways, a simulated image of the second body may be displayed in a similar manner.

If the amount of vertical or horizontal movement of the second body when driven and controlled is shorter than that of the first body, the second body is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 246 and 247, if the first body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is driven and controlled to move 10 cm upward from the standby position, and the second body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is driven and controlled to move 5 cm upward from the standby position, the drive control of the second body is less noticeable than the first body. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second body, it is possible to ensure a sense of volume as a presentation.

In this way, when the distance traveled by the second body is smaller than the distance traveled by the first body when it is driven and controlled, a simulated image of the second body is displayed prior to driving and controlling the second body, thereby ensuring a sense of volume as a presentation.

Alternatively, in cases where the second body has a slower moving speed when driven and controlled in the first and second bodies, where the second body has a slower angular velocity when rotated by drive control in the rotatable first and second bodies, or where the second body is driven and controlled for a shorter period of time than the first and second bodies, a simulated image of the second body may be displayed prior to drive control of the second body. In this case too, it is possible to ensure a sense of volume in a presentation using the second body.

The simulation image that imitates the second sculpture may be dynamically displayed multiple times, and the player may be shown the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot depending on the number of times the dynamic display is performed. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 244(B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, a presentation mode in which a similar dynamic display is performed from timing t3 to timing t5 may be executable. Furthermore, a presentation mode in which a similar dynamic display is performed from timing t1 to timing t3 may be executable. Furthermore, in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, a presentation mode in which a similar dynamic display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 may be executable. Furthermore, a presentation mode in which a similar dynamic display is performed from timing t9 to timing t11 may be executable.

In this way, by repeatedly displaying the dynamic image that mimics the second body before or after the drive control of the second body, and by configuring the number of repetitions to indicate the likelihood that a state advantageous to the player will occur, it is possible to further increase the sense of volume as a presentation of the second body, and also to provide the player with the interest of choosing between directly viewing the operation of the second body provided on the frame, and viewing the simulated image that mimics the second body displayed on a specified display means to know the likelihood that a state advantageous to the player will occur.

Also, a configuration may be made in which multiple simulated images of different display modes are prepared as simulated images of the second body, and the player is shown the likelihood of winning the special lottery depending on the type of simulated image displayed. For example, a large simulated image of the second body and a small simulated image of the second body may be prepared in advance, and the likelihood of winning the special lottery may be higher when the large simulated image of the second body is displayed. Alternatively, a white simulated image of the second body and a red simulated image of the second body may be prepared in advance, and the likelihood of winning the special lottery may be higher when the red simulated image of the second body is displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to execute multiple different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image that imitates the second body, and by configuring the type of simulated image displayed to suggest the likelihood that a state advantageous to the player will occur, the variety of display modes of the simulated image that imitates the second body is increased, making it possible to further increase the sense of volume as a presentation, and also making it possible to provide the player with the interest of choosing between directly viewing the movement of the second body provided on the frame body itself, and viewing the simulated image that imitates the second body displayed on a specified display means to know the likelihood that a state advantageous to the player will occur.

When the display mode of the simulated image that mimics the second body indicates the likelihood of a favorable state occurring to the player, the operation of the second body itself, which is performed by driving and controlling the second body, is the same operation mode, but the operation mode of the second body may be different so that the operation mode of the second body indicates the likelihood of a favorable state occurring to the player.

In the second performance mode, a simulated image of the second body is displayed, and then the second body is driven and controlled. However, a performance mode in which the simulated image is not displayed may also be configured to be executable. For example, the display mode of the simulated image of the second body may be configured to continue without displaying the image from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second performance mode described with reference to Figures 244(B) and 245(B).

In this way, by configuring the third presentation mode, which does not involve the display of a simulated image of the second body, to be executable in addition to the first and second presentation modes, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation mode that is unexpected and tense, in which the second body, which is relatively less noticeable compared to the first body, is activated without the player realizing it.

When driving the first formation body, a warning sound indicating that the first formation body is being driven may be output. For example, in the first performance mode described with reference to FIG. 244(A) and FIG. 245(A), a warning sound indicating that the first formation body is being driven may be output from timing t6 to timing t8, which is the timing before the first formation body is driven and controlled. Alternatively, a warning sound indicating that the first formation body is being driven may be output from timing t6 to timing t10 so that the warning sound is output even after the first formation body is driven and controlled. Alternatively, a warning sound indicating that the first formation body is being driven may be output from timing t8 to timing t12 so that the warning sound is output after the drive control of the first formation body is started.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which a player is injured by driving the first body, which has a relatively large size and amount of movement among multiple bodies (first body and second body). When the second body is driven, a simulated image that mimics the second body is displayed, so the device is configured not to output such a warning sound.

With reference to Figures 244(A), 245(A), etc., examples have been shown in which a warning sound is output during a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10), but the warning sound may be configured to employ the configuration related to the special warning sound described above with reference to Figures 200, 201, etc.

When driving the second body, the volume of the variable performance sound output as BGM during the variation may be suppressed during either or both of the display period of the simulated image simulating the second body and the drive control period of the second body. For example, in the second performance mode described with reference to FIG. 244(A) and FIG. 244(B), the variable performance sound may be output in a normal manner until timing t5, and the variable performance sound may be output in a more suppressed manner than the normal manner during the period from timing t5 to timing t8, which is the period from when the simulated image simulating the second body is displayed until the drive control of the second body is started. Alternatively, the variable performance sound may be output in a normal manner until timing t5, and the variable performance sound may be output in a more suppressed manner than the normal manner during the period from timing t5 to timing t18, which is the period from when the simulated image simulating the second body is displayed until the drive control of the second body is ended. In addition, in the suppressed state, the volume may be set to half or less than that of the normal state.

In this way, by changing the output state of the variable effect sound from the normal state to a suppressed state in conjunction with the display of the simulated image that mimics the second body, the player is able to concentrate on the act of driving, or on the act of driving, the second body, which is relatively smaller in size, out of the multiple bodies (the first body and the second body).

According to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 244 to 247, etc., by providing multiple sculptures on a frame, even if the size of each sculpture or the range of motion of each sculpture when driven is limited, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced when each sculpture is driven individually.

In the gaming machine described with reference to Figures 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-093655 A, it is possible to interest the player by operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine. However, if the player does not notice the operation of such movable decorative means, there is a risk that the player may come into contact with the movable decorative means and injure himself/herself.

Below, we will explain an embodiment of a gaming machine that can prevent the occurrence of an incident in which a player is injured by a movable decorative means.

Below, a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 243 will be described with reference to FIG. 250(A) and FIG. 250(B). Note that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in this embodiment is provided inside the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIG. 243(A) to FIG. 243(E), and is configured to be difficult for the player to come into contact with.

Below, we will explain the first performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 with reference to Figure 250 (A).

In the first presentation mode, first, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t4, the decorative patterns on the left and right temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the decorative pattern in the center changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t5, a warning sound is output to notify the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that they are about to operate. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 begin to move from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to an upward movement position under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to their movement positions. At this time, the warning sound is also continuously output.

At time t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their movement to their movement positions. At the same time, the output of the warning sound that had been continuously output since time t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. At timing t22, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes moving to the moving position. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned stationary in a position overlapping approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from a moving position in which it has moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a standby position in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from their upper movement positions to their standby positions stored within the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a specified timing after timing t30, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

Below, a second performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 250 (B). Note that in the second performance mode, unlike the first performance mode, no evocation sound is output. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start operating simultaneously.

In the second presentation mode, first, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t4, the decorative patterns on the left and right temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the decorative pattern in the center changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, under drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to an upward moving position.

At timing t22, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes moving to its moving position. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stationary and positioned so that it overlaps with approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Meanwhile, at timing t23, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete moving to their moving positions.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from a moving position in which it has moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a standby position in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from their upper movement positions to their standby positions stored within the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a specified timing after timing t30, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

Below, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 of the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 243 are applied to a gaming machine having the rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 described with reference to FIG. 163, and the first and second presentation modes executable in the gaming machine to which they are applied are described with reference to FIG. 251(A) and FIG. 251(B).

Below, we will explain the first performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 with reference to Figure 251 (A).

In the first presentation mode, first, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t4, the decorative patterns on the left and right temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the decorative pattern in the center changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t5, a warning sound is output to notify the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that they will operate. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change state from a standby state stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a rotating state through drive control by the peripheral control board 1510.

At timing t9, the output of the warning sound that had been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. At timing t22, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes moving to the moving position. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned stationary in a position overlapping approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from a moving position in which it has moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from a rotating state to a state in which they stop rotating and are stored in the standby position.

At a specified timing after timing t30, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

Below, a second performance mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (B). Note that in the second performance mode, unlike the first performance mode, no evocation sound is output. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start operating simultaneously.

In the second presentation mode, first, at a specified timing before timing t0, the decorative patterns start to change on the game board side presentation display device 1600, and at timing t4, the decorative patterns on the left and right temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the decorative pattern in the center changes, resulting in a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

Next, at timing t21, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change state from a standby state stored within the door frame top unit 570 to a rotating state through drive control by the peripheral control board 1510.

At the same time, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570 to a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. At timing t22, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes moving to the moving position. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned stationary in a position overlapping approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from a moving position in which it has moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a standby position stored in the door frame top unit 570. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from a rotating state to a state in which they stop rotating and are stored in the standby position.

At a specified timing after timing t30, the decorative pattern in the center stops changing, and a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (e.g., "444") or a pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss (e.g., "454") is displayed.

The operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common in the first and second performance modes described with reference to Fig. 250(A) and Fig. 250(B), or in the first and second performance modes described with reference to Fig. 251(A) and Fig. 251(B). On the other hand, in the first performance mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of an arousal sound, and then the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a predetermined time has elapsed, whereas in the second performance mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start operating at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without the output of an arousal sound.

In this way, when the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body operates independently, a warning sound is output in advance, so that the player is alerted to the first movable decorative means, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the first movable decorative means and is injured due to an inadvertent action by the player (such as standing up).

On the other hand, when the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decorative means, it is configured not to output a warning sound. This is because, as the second movable decorative means moves to a position where it overlaps with the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) when viewed from the front, the player's attention is directed to the vicinity of the specified display means, making it difficult for the player to perform careless actions, and therefore making it difficult for the player to be injured even if the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body is operating.

With reference to Figures 250(A), 251(A), etc., an example has been shown in which a warning sound is output during a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9), but the warning sound may be configured to adopt the configuration for the special warning sound described above with reference to Figures 200, 201, etc.

Figure 252 shows a modified version of the performance mode described with reference to Figure 250. Also, Figure 253 shows a modified version of the performance mode described with reference to Figure 251. In these modified versions, in the second performance mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to start moving to their respective movement positions at timing t22 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to its movement position is completed.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) begins to operate at the same time that the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) begins to operate and moves to a position where it overlaps with the specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600) when viewed from the front. This directs the player's attention closer to the vicinity of the specified display means, making it less likely that the player will perform careless actions, and making it less likely that the player will be injured even if the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body operates.

The second presentation mode may be configured to have a higher expectation that the special lottery will result in a jackpot than the first presentation mode. Also, the first presentation mode may be executed more frequently than the second presentation mode. For example, out of 100 special lotteries, the first presentation mode may be executed about 5 times (executed with a 5% probability) and the second presentation mode may be executed about 1 time (executed with a 1% probability).

In this way, in the first presentation mode, which is executed frequently and has a low expectancy of winning a jackpot, a warning sound is output to alert the player to the frequent operation of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). This type of warning is particularly effective because the player's attention to the first movable decorative means is distracted due to the low expectancy.

On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, which is executed less frequently and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot, no warning sound is output, and the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decorative means. In this case, because the chance of winning a jackpot is high, the player's gaze is focused on the vicinity of the specified display means (game board side presentation display device 1600) to which the second movable decorative means moves, making it difficult for the player to perform careless actions (such as standing up), and therefore there is no need to output a warning sound when operating the first movable decorative means.

On the other hand, since the staff of the gaming establishment can see from a distance that the first movable decoration means has been activated, they can recognize that there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) will occur, and it becomes possible to provide the player with certain services (such as replacing the coin box or, in the case of a fixed-volume gaming machine, processing the limit of the game).

In addition, if a warning sound is output when expectations are high, it is conceivable that the player may become discouraged, but by not outputting the warning sound, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

It is advisable to configure the device to output a warning sound at the beginning and middle of the decorative pattern change, but not output a warning sound in the middle of the decorative pattern change.

By configuring it this way, no unnecessary sounds are output at the end of the change when the result of the decorative pattern change is shown, and the player can concentrate on the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed stationary on the specified display means.

In the first performance mode, when the alert sound is output, the variable performance sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 or from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first performance mode shown in Figures 250 and 251, the output state of the variable performance sound may be changed from the normal state to a suppressed state with a low volume.

On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the variable sound effect may be suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the variable sound effect may be released at the same time as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to fall. For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 or from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second presentation mode shown in Figures 250 and 251, the output state of the variable sound effect may be changed from the normal state to a suppressed state with a low volume.

By configuring it in this way, in the first presentation mode, the warning sound is output with the variable presentation sound suppressed, so that the player is effectively notified that the first movable decoration means is operating.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the sound of the variable presentation is suppressed for a predetermined period of time before the second movable decorative means starts to move, making it easier for the player to hear the movement of the second movable decorative means.

With reference to Figures 250, 251, etc., an example has been shown in which the variable sound effect is suppressed for a specified period of time, but the configuration relating to the variable sound effect and the alert sound may be configured to adopt the configuration relating to the variable sound effect and the special alert sound described above with reference to Figures 200, 201, etc.

In the first performance mode, the operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 240(A), a display in which a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move upward within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first performance mode described with reference to FIG. 250 and FIG. 251.

On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the game board side presentation display device 1600 may be configured not to display such information when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in operation.

By displaying in this manner, in the first presentation mode, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the first movable decorative means is operating. On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, by not displaying in this manner when the first movable decorative means operates, it is possible to prevent excessive presentation around the designated display means. Note that the designated display means may be configured to display not only a simulated image of the first movable decorative means, but also other images (for example, an image of an upward arrow) in a manner that suggests the location where the first movable decorative means is located.

In the first and second presentation modes, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has been moved to the moving position may be configured to be moved to the standby position based on the player's operation of a specified operation unit (such as a push button or lever). For example, in the first and second presentation modes, if the player operates a specified operation unit at timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be moved from the moving position to the standby position between timing t23 and timing t24.

In this way, the time that the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is in the moving position may be changed in response to the player's operation. This makes it difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decorative means is operating, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which other players become jealous and harass the player due to the high expectation of a favorable state (jackpot state) occurring for the player.

In the first and second presentation modes in Figs. 252 and 253, the first movable decorative means may be configured to be driven earlier when the player operates a specific operation unit than when the player does not operate the specific operation unit. That is, in the modified examples in Figs. 252 and 253, the second movable decorative means, which starts to operate before the operation of the first movable decorative means, is started by a player who plays repeatedly, so that the player will look forward to the operation of the first movable decorative means. For this reason, instead of making the operation of the second movable decorative means always take place after a certain period of time, the first movable decorative means can be driven at an appropriate timing after the operation of the second movable decorative means is started by button operation, so that players who have watched the same presentation many times can be given the opportunity to operate the first movable decorative means as soon as possible, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, such a specified operation may be configured to initiate a process of returning the second movable decorative means to the standby position, or, even if a specified operation is performed, the process of returning the second movable decorative means to the standby position may be initiated at a predetermined timing.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 250, 251, etc., even if a warning sound is not output when the first movable decorative means is operated, the player's attention can be directed to the vicinity of the specified display means where the performance based on the lottery result is performed, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player is injured by the first movable decorative means.

In the above embodiment, a specific presentation mode out of a number of different presentation modes is executed, and the left and right ear frame movable bodies are operated to notify the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring, which is an advantageous state for the player. However, the system may be configured to notify the player of the probability of a game content occurring other than the probability of a jackpot occurring.

For example, even if a jackpot is confirmed, the content of the benefit that will be granted to the player during the jackpot may be notified. The content of the benefit may be, for example, the type of benefit or the amount of benefit.

Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of the type of benefit that will be granted to the player after a jackpot. For example, it may be configured to notify the player of the type of benefit that will be granted to the player after a jackpot, or it may be configured to notify the player of the amount of benefit that will be granted to the player after a jackpot.

In this way, even if the device is configured to notify not only the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) will occur, but also the degree of expectation regarding the amount of benefit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, the number of balls awarded to the player or the number of times the jackpot opening occurs), the degree of expectation that a new state advantageous to the player (for example, a special state or an electric chute support state) will occur after a state advantageous to the player ends, and the type (for example, a special state or an electric chute support state) and amount (for example, the number of times the special state will continue or the number of times the electric chute support will continue) of benefit given to the player in a new game that occurs after a state advantageous to the player ends, it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

It has been shown that the player is notified of the high expectation of a jackpot, which is advantageous to the player, by executing a specific presentation mode out of multiple different presentation modes, by operating the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc., but the expectation of a jackpot may also be configured to include a confirmed jackpot (100% jackpot occurrence). For example, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the first presentation mode is executed, a 50% jackpot occurs, and when the second presentation mode is executed, a 100% jackpot occurs.

In the above embodiment, when the simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc. are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time, but it may be configured to display the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 for several seconds (for example, 2 seconds) in advance and then start displaying the simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238(A), it may be configured to display the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 from timing t5 to timing t7.

In addition, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be fixedly displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and not moved, and the simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be configured to move upward relative to the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570.

In this way, by displaying simulated images of the operable movable decorative means and drivable shapes (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450), as well as a simulated image of the unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds the operable movable decorative means and drivable shapes, it becomes easier for players to understand the operating and driving modes of the operable movable decorative means and drivable shapes.

In particular, by displaying a simulated image of a unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable sculptures in a fixed area of a specified display means (game board side performance display device 1600), it becomes possible for the player to more easily understand the operating and driving modes of the operable movable decorative means and drivable sculptures.

In addition, by displaying a simulated image of the unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds the operable movable decorative means and the drivable sculpture at a timing prior to the timing of displaying the simulated image of the operable movable decorative means and the drivable sculpture, the player's anticipation for the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the sculpture is heightened. Also, since the player can visually confirm the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the sculpture from the timing at which the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the sculpture begin, the player can enjoy the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the sculpture for a longer period of time.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the simulated image of the door frame top unit 570 may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, instead of the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit role 6000 described with reference to FIG. 118 etc. may be configured to move in a similar manner (for example, in the vertical direction) to execute the various performance modes described above. In this case as well, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the various performance modes described above.

Although an example has been shown in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move between a state in which they are stored in the door frame top unit 570 and a state in which they protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570, other state changes are also acceptable. For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to move from a state in which they are half-protruding from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which they are completely protruding from the door frame top unit 570.

In this way, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when the first movable decorative means is configured to operate between a first state in which it is located at a first position (a state in which it is stored within the door frame top unit 570 and a state in which it is half-protruding from the door frame top unit 570) and a second state in which it is located at a second position (a state in which it is completely protruding from the door frame top unit 570).

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 238, 250, etc., an example has been shown in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates between a state in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570 and a state in which it is positioned so as to overlap with approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a front view, but this is not limited to such a state change and other state changes are also acceptable. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to operate from a state in which it is positioned so as to overlap with approximately the lower part of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a front view to a state in which it is positioned so as to overlap with approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 in a front view.

In this way, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when the second movable decorative means is configured to operate between a first state in which it is located at a first position (a state in which it is stored within the door frame top unit 570, and a state in which it is located in a position overlapping approximately the lower part of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front) and a second state in which it is located at a second position (a state in which it is located in a position overlapping approximately the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front).

A known type of display effect that is performed in the display area of the display device is a look-ahead display effect that is performed over multiple display variations of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The decorative symbol display variation corresponding to the specific hold that caused the look-ahead display effect to occur is set to have a higher probability of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, compared to a decorative symbol display variation that does not involve a look-ahead display effect. For this reason, when a look-ahead display effect is executed, the player feels a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will occur.

Meanwhile, in the display area of the effect display device, the decorative pattern is displayed in a changing manner, and multiple effect displays corresponding to the decorative pattern being displayed in a changing manner (for example, an effect display showing the expectation level in which the changing decorative pattern is displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot) are also displayed. This means that the player is forced to simultaneously view the look-ahead effect display that suggests the decorative pattern change display results several times in the future, as well as the change display mode of the currently changing decorative pattern and the display content of the effect display corresponding to the currently changing decorative pattern.

Although this situation can make the game more interesting, it can also cause problems in that the player cannot fully grasp what these display effects indicate. In particular, because the player is focused on the display of the currently changing decorative pattern and the various display effects corresponding to that display, the look-ahead display effect is relatively inconspicuous, and there is a problem that the player may not be aware that the look-ahead display effect is being executed or that the decorative pattern corresponding to the look-ahead display effect is about to start changing.

Below, we will explain an embodiment that allows the player to easily understand that a look-ahead display is being executed and that the timing is approaching when the display of the decorative pattern that corresponds to the look-ahead display will begin to change.

Below, with reference to FIG. 254, first, various images that are displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pre-reading performance display is executed will be described.
Specifically, examples of the effects in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the change in the display of the decorative symbols to the stop of the change when the result of the special lottery performed in response to the winning of the first starting port 2002 is a miss will be described with reference to Figs. 254(A) to 254(F). Also, examples of the effects in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the change in the display of the decorative symbols to the stop of the change when the result of the special lottery performed in response to the winning of the first starting port 2002 is a jackpot will be described with reference to Figs. 254(A) to 254(D), 254(G), and 254(H).

Figure 254 (A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. It also shows a state in which the reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state is displayed. It also shows a state in which there are three reserved balls corresponding to the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002. Specifically, the state in which a decorative symbol with the number "3" is displayed as a left decorative symbol, a decorative symbol with the number "5" is displayed as a middle decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol with the number "2" is displayed as a right decorative symbol at equal intervals from the left in the approximately vertical center of the display area is shown. The decorative symbols are composed of a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image that is a vertically elongated rectangular shape and forms the outline of the decorative symbol, and a number area (black part in the figure) consisting of an image showing any one of the numbers "1" to "9". As shown in the figure, the number area is located in the center of the background area.

It is preferable that the decorative pattern be composed of an image in a color different from that of the background area and the number area. For example, the background area may be white and the number area may be black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the pending display area, the first pending display area, the second pending display area, the third pending display area, and the fourth pending display area are set, and in the figure, the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and the first to third pending display areas are each shown displaying pending images. Note that the fourth pending display area is shown with a dotted line for the purpose of explanation, but the dotted line does not actually appear in the display area as a display state, and in the following drawings, such dotted lines are generally not used to indicate the intended position where the pending image will be displayed.

In FIG. 254 (A), the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative patterns of "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed. The reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image has ended. The reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area has ended. The reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area has ended.

Figure 254 (B) shows the display state at the time when the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to Figure 254 (A) starts to change.
Specifically, the upper end of the previous decorative pattern is displayed below the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the lower end of the next decorative pattern is displayed above the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Also, the display of the reserved display is terminated.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are always displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. In addition, the reserved image has a larger circular diameter than the reserved image.

Figure 254 (C) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that scrolls downward within the display area.

Specifically, when a decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the lower side of the pattern is first displayed on the upper edge of the display area, then the decorative pattern moves downward so that the entire decorative pattern is displayed in the display area, then the bottom end of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area and only a portion of the upper side of the decorative pattern is displayed, and finally the top end of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area and the decorative pattern is no longer displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state in a sequence that goes from not being displayed in the display area to being displayed in the display area, and then back to not being displayed in the display area.

The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set in a display order. Specifically, a decorative pattern with a certain number (for example, "1") is followed by a decorative pattern with the next number (for example, "2"), which are displayed in order from the top of the display area. The order of numbers given to the decorative patterns is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9". After the decorative pattern with the number "9", a decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 254(C), a state is shown in which a left decorative pattern with the number "1" on the lower side and a left decorative pattern with the number "2" on the upper side are displayed as left decorative patterns, but both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3" from the top of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 254(B), it has been explained that the display of the reserved image that had been displayed in the reserved display area is terminated at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change. At the same time as the display of the reserved image is terminated, the reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed moving to the left while expanding, and is displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image that was displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed moving to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image that was displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed moving to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the first reserved display area. Such expansion of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left is performed over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.67 seconds). FIG. 254(C) shows the state of the reserved image after such movement.

Figure 254 (D) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the center decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changing. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Also, in response to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002, a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area.

Now, the temporary stop display will be explained. The temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it has stopped at the display position where the decorative pattern will finally be stopped or in the vicinity thereof. Specifically, for example, the decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed so that it moves up and down gently or sways so that the number attached to the decorative pattern can be clearly seen, based on the display position where the decorative pattern will finally be stopped, and the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern during the variable display is visually recognized by the player as if it is stopped, and the player can confirm the number attached to the decorative pattern. Note that when the decorative pattern is finally stopped, such up and down movement or swaying display is not performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state.

The display may change so that the temporarily stopped decorative pattern becomes the final decorative pattern, or the temporarily stopped decorative pattern may be scrolled downwards again, changing to a decorative pattern with a different number attached, but more details will be given later.

In addition, in Figure 254 (D), arc-shaped lines are added to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached, which indicates that the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached is in a temporarily stopped state. In other drawings, such arc-shaped lines may be added to decorative patterns, and in this case too, it indicates that the decorative pattern is in a temporarily stopped state.

Figure 254 (E) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped following the left decorative pattern, and the center decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "4" added as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped.

Figure 254 (F) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped. In accordance with the stop display of the center decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern that were temporarily stopped are also stopped. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "7" added to the center decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "4" added to the right decorative pattern are stopped in the figure, and the combination of decorative patterns displayed indicates that the special lottery result was a miss. In a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during the change or temporary stop will no longer be displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the change display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. In addition, the reserved image that was displayed in the reserved image will cease to be displayed at the same time that the new decorative pattern begins to change.

Figure 254 (G) shows a state in which, following the display state shown with reference to Figure 254 (D), the right decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, following the left decorative pattern, and the center decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the right decorative pattern are each displayed as a temporary stop, showing a display state in which a reach state has occurred.

Figure 254 (H) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the center decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern that were temporarily stopped are also stopped. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the center decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the right decorative pattern are each stopped and displayed, and the combination of decorative patterns displayed indicates that the special lottery result was a jackpot. In a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during the fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is no longer displayed. After that, the big win game state starts, and when the big win game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern resumes, and then the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts again.

In this way, in the decorative pattern variable display example described with reference to FIG. 254, in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern start to vary from a stopped display state, vary for a predetermined time, and then the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped in that order, after which the center decorative pattern becomes a stopped display state. In addition, in conjunction with the stopped display of the center decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern also become stopped display states at the same time. In addition, by stopping decorative patterns with the same number as the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, by stopping at least one decorative pattern with a different number among the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

Below, an embodiment that is a variation of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 254 will be described with reference to the presentation examples shown in FIG. 255 and FIG. 256. FIG. 255 is a time chart for this presentation example, and FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the display state at a specified timing in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 in this presentation example. Note that in FIG. 256, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are the same as the display mode described with reference to FIG. 254 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points are also the same in other embodiments and presentation examples described below unless otherwise noted.

Figure 255 is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in this embodiment. Just before timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board presentation display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative patterns are stopped from changing. Figure 256 (A) is a diagram showing this state, showing the decorative patterns numbered "6", "4", and "5" from the left being displayed frozen. From this state, when timing t0 occurs, a new display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern begins. Figure 256 (B) is a diagram showing the display state at a specified timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the display change, showing the state in which the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is being changed.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 255(A), the timing is indicated as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., depending on the time elapsed, in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the other embodiments and effects examples described below, unless otherwise noted.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 255, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, generating a new reservation. This start entry triggers the start of the pre-reading performance display at timing t2. In response to the pre-reading performance display, a specific reservation image that resembles a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal reservation image. The color of the specific reservation image is green. FIG. 256 (C) shows the display state at a specified timing (for example, timing t3) after the pre-reading performance display is started at timing t2. Also, it shows a state in which a specific reservation image that resembles a pine branch with leaves is displayed in the third reservation display area instead of a normal circular reservation image.

In the look-ahead performance display, a look-ahead performance image is displayed in a frame-like shape that surrounds the display area and hides part of the decorative pattern that is displayed in a scrolling and moving manner downward. The look-ahead performance image is an image in which multiple shapes (specifically six) resembling pine branches with leaves are arranged so that they protrude toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead performance image is a slightly lighter green than the color of the specific reserved image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image is based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and the execution ratio of the effect is set so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image are displayed compared to when only the normal reserved image, which is circular and white, is displayed. For example, when the normal reserved image is displayed, the probability of a jackpot is set to 0.3%, and when the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image are displayed, the probability of a jackpot is set to 10.0%.

By configuring it in this way, when a pre-reading performance image and a specific reserved image are displayed and a change in the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is made, the player will have a sense of expectation that the decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopping manner that indicates that a jackpot will occur as a result of the change in the decorative pattern, compared to when a normal reserved image is displayed and a change in the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is made.

From timing t2 to timing t4, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed while the look-ahead performance image is displayed, but while the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is being displayed, the look-ahead performance image is displayed closer to the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is displayed while a portion of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is hidden by the look-ahead performance image. Note that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the specific reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area are displayed closer to the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image.

At timing t4, the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed frozen. Figure 256 (D) shows the display state where the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed frozen at timing t4. At the timing where the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed frozen, the front-to-back relationship between the look-ahead performance image and the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the look-ahead performance image. Note that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the specific reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area are displayed in front of the look-ahead performance image.

When the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below each decorative pattern are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 256(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern, but until just before timing t4, the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed above the decorative pattern with the number "1", and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1". With this configuration, only the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed stand out and are visible to the player.

The decorative symbols are displayed stationary from time t4 to time t5. During this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed closer to the player than the pre-reading performance image continues.

At timing t5, a new display of the decorative pattern begins. When the new display of the decorative pattern begins, the foreground image and the left and right decorative patterns switch positions again, and the foreground image is displayed in front of the left and right decorative patterns.

When the decorative patterns are stopped, the decorative patterns above and below each decorative pattern are no longer displayed, but when the new display of the decorative patterns starts, the display of the decorative patterns above and below each decorative pattern is resumed. For example, in FIG. 256(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern, but at timing t5, the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed above the decorative pattern with the number "1", and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1", and then the downward movement of each decorative pattern is instantly started.

After that, the front-to-back relationship between the look-ahead performance image and the left to right decorative patterns will be swapped in accordance with the start and end of the display of the decorative patterns. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left to right decorative patterns are displayed closer to the front of the look-ahead performance image will continue, but in the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and the period from timing t14 to timing t15, the display mode in which the left to right decorative patterns are displayed closer to the front of the look-ahead performance image will also continue.

At timing t15, the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead performance image and the specific reserved image begins to change. Figure 256 (E) shows a state in which, at a specified timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), the look-ahead performance image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the specific reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative patterns each have the number "2" attached to them, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern maintains a variable display state in which it scrolls downward and moves. Also, at timing t25, the display of the look-ahead performance image that had been displayed up until then ends, and the look-ahead performance image is no longer displayed. Figure 256 (F) shows the display state at a specified timing (e.g., timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25 and the display of the look-ahead performance image ends.

At timing t33, the center decorative pattern that was being displayed in a variable manner according to the special lottery result is stopped. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a miss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is displayed as the center decorative pattern. Also, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed as the center decorative pattern.

Figure 256 (G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "3" added as the center decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, at timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ends. Meanwhile, the stopped display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues until a new gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2002.

On the other hand, FIG. 256(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added as the center decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, at timing t34, the display of the reserved image that was displayed in the reserved display area, as well as the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, ends, and the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

This embodiment is configured so that while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, the pre-reading performance image is displayed closer to the player than the decorative pattern, and while the decorative pattern is being displayed stationary, the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the player than the pre-reading performance image.

By adopting this configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, and can recognize that he or she is one step closer to the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image, without having to check the movement of the specific reserved image.

In addition, the area that the pre-reading performance image occupies in the display area is larger than the area that the specific reserved image occupies in the display area, and the pre-reading performance image is displayed in a position closer to the stopping position of the decorative pattern than the specific reserved image, so even if the player is concentrating on visually checking the changing state of the decorative pattern, it is possible for the player to recognize that he or she is one step closer to the changing display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image.

In addition, by displaying the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image in an overlapping position, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image, thereby improving the efficiency of use of the display area. Furthermore, by configuring the image displayed in the foreground to be switched between the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image depending on the conditions, the display can be optimized.

Specifically, while the decorative patterns are changing, the look-ahead performance image is displayed in front, creating a sense of anticipation in the player as the timing approaches for the changing display corresponding to the look-ahead performance image. On the other hand, while the decorative patterns are stopped from changing, the stopping mode of the decorative patterns is not obstructed by the look-ahead performance image, making it possible to clearly show the player the entire decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted from the front into the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the obstacle nail 1201 is held in the panel board 1110 by the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c provided at the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 being engaged so as to bite into the panel board 1110. In addition, the panel board 1110 is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and it is possible to visually check the movable role and the illuminating decorative portion arranged behind the panel board 1110 through the panel board 1110. However, by engaging the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c with the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 is scratched or cracked, and a cloudy portion (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the whitened portion HKB) is generated, and these portions become visible to the player, resulting in a problem that the aesthetics are deteriorated. This is an issue that would not have arisen if pegs had been installed on a wooden playboard as in the past.

The applicant has conducted detailed research into the causes and locations of the whitened areas HKB. First, the manufacturing method and structure of the gaming panel 1100, which is the premise for the occurrence of the whitened areas HKB, will be described with reference to Figures 257 and 258.

Figure 257(a) is a side view showing the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110. Figure 257(b) is a cross-sectional view of the panel board 1110 and the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 257(c) is a cross-sectional view of the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 257(d) is a cross-sectional view of the part A where the whitened part HKB may occur around the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 257(e) is a cross-sectional view of an example of a state in which the whitened part HKB actually occurs around the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 258(a) shows the dimensions of each part that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201, and Figure 258(b) is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each component shown in the glass plate 192, the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel plate 1110 when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110. Note that some reference numerals have been omitted in the figure.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. 257(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain degree of elasticity. In addition, the entire obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster in a white light irradiation environment. When viewed from the side, the obstacle nail 1201 is composed of, from the left, an obstacle nail head 1201a, an obstacle nail first body 1201b, an obstacle nail spiral-shaped part 1201c, an obstacle nail second body 1201d, and an obstacle nail tip 1201e. The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail head 1201a is a dome-shaped round head shape, and a perfect circle shape when viewed from the front. The diameter L2 of the obstacle nail head 1201a when viewed from the front is 4 mm, and the thickness L3 when viewed from the side is 1 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail first body 1201b is a cylindrical shape. The length L4 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail is 2 mm. The shape of the helical portion of the obstacle nail is approximately cylindrical. The length L7 of the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail is 4 mm. The diameter of the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail. The shape of the second body 1201d of the obstacle nail is cylindrical. The length L8 of the second body 1201d of the obstacle nail is 1 mm. The diameter L6 of the second body 1201d of the obstacle nail is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail. The shape of the tip 1201e of the obstacle nail is conical. The length L9 of the tip 1201e of the obstacle nail is 1 mm.

Next, referring to FIG. 257(b) and FIG. 258(b), the structure of the panel plate 1110 before the obstacle nail 1201 is planted will be described. The panel plate 1110 is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel plate 1110 are formed smoothly, and it is possible to clearly see the members located at the rear through the panel plate 1110. The panel plate 1110 may be formed of a plate material made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin. The thickness L10 of the panel plate 1110 is 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through hole 1110a for planting the obstacle nail 1201. The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is cylindrical in shape, and its diameter L11 is 2 mm. The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. For this reason, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a appears slightly cloudy and is visible to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 257(c) and FIG. 258(b), a method of planting the obstacle nail 1201 in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 will be described. The obstacle nail tip 1201e of the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and a force is applied backward (to the right in the figure) until the obstacle nail spiral part 1201c, the obstacle nail second body part 1201d, and the obstacle nail tip part 1201e are all positioned in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and a part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b is positioned in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, thereby completing the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 in the panel board 1110. The obstacle nail 1201 is planted by a nail gun. The length L4 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm, of which the length L12 of the portion located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is 3 mm, and the length L13 of the portion not located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a and located in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 is 17 mm. Figure 257 (c) shows the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 has been completely installed in the panel board 1110.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstacle nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is 1 mm. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nail tip 1201e from injuring a gaming machine manufacturer or a gaming store employee if they inadvertently touch the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The shape of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is designed to penetrate the panel board 1110 in order to expel acrylic resin powder that is produced when the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is scraped away when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted into the panel board 1110 from the rear of the panel board 1110.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c slightly deforms the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. When the obstacle nail 1201 has been pushed in, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel board 1110.

The diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a may be configured to be slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and slightly smaller than the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. In this case, when the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, a small gap is generated between the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b or the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. In this configuration, when a game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed to elastically deform by the amount of this gap. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the obstacle nail 1201 breaks when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201.

However, during the process of planting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c moves backward inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, causing scratches on the inside of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110, which can be seen as white.

The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110, and has a shape that penetrates the panel board 1110. Because it is formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through hole is rough and appears white. In particular, since the obstacle nail tip 1201e is planted while remaining inside the panel board 1110, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a itself appears white at the rearmost part of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a.

In addition, when the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 is completed, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is elastically deformed to maintain the engagement with the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c, but if the limit of elastic deformation is exceeded, cracks may occur from the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a with which the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c engages toward the outside.

In addition, when playing on a gaming machine installed in an amusement facility, the gaming ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 multiple times, and the kinetic energy of the gaming ball is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a via the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b located inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, which may cause cracks to occur on the front side of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Also, cracks may occur around the part of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail spiral shaped part 1201c engages (inside the panel board 1110).

In addition, in a gaming machine installed in an amusement facility, there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as forcibly bending the obstacle nail 1201 in an attempt to change the winning rate of a certain winning slot to a situation favorable to the player, or an incident such as a store employee cleaning the front of the panel board 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state and then accidentally pinching a cleaning tool between the door frame 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 when moving the door frame 3 in the closing direction to close the door frame 3. In such a case, a large force is applied to the obstacle nail 1201, and the force is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a through the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b located inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and a crack may occur on the front side of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Also, a crack may occur around the part of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail spiral part 1201c engages (inside the panel board 1110).

In FIG. 257(d), A indicates a portion where the whitened portion HKB may occur due to collision of the game ball YGK. Also, FIG. 257(e) and FIG. 258(b) show an example of a state where the whitened portion HKB has actually occurred. In FIG. 257(e) and FIG. 258(b), the force applied to the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel board 1110. Also, the state where the whitened portion HKB is generated inside the panel board 1110 starting from the portion where the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c engages in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is shown. As shown in FIG. 258(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the gaming establishment, the higher the possibility of whitened area HKB occurring on panel board 1110. In addition, once a whitened area HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened area HKB weakens, and the whitened area HKB gradually expands from that point onwards, and when viewed from the front, the whitened area HKB may extend outwards from the obstructing nail 1201 as its center.

The shape of one whitened area HKB that occurs in this way is generally flat and its area is approximately 1-2 square mm, but multiple whitened areas HKB may occur radially from one obstructing nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Also, such whitened areas HKB may occur on multiple obstructing nails 1201.

Furthermore, the occurrence of such whitened portion HKB may weaken the strength of engagement between the obstacle nail through hole 1110a and the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. In this case, the rebound behavior of the game ball when it hits the obstacle nail 1201 may be weaker than expected at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 1 (the game ball may not bounce much when it hits the nail, and the momentum may be absorbed), which may result in a situation where the winning rate into the winning slot changes.

When playing on a gaming machine installed in an amusement arcade, if the machine is operated for a long period of time at the amusement arcade, the obstacle nail 1201 may break. In this case, the entire gaming board 5' will need to be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nails 1201 are planted in the panel board 1110 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the predetermined movable parts and the predetermined luminous decorations located behind the panel board 1110 become visible, improving the aesthetic appearance, but there is a problem that the vicinity of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted appears white, detracting from the aesthetic appearance. Conventionally, there are known gaming machines in which pilot holes are provided in a game board made of transparent synthetic resin and game nails are driven into the pilot holes (for example, JP 2008-161638 A), but these do not solve the problem that the engagement portion between the driven game nail and the game board and the pilot holes are visible as white cloudiness, detracting from the aesthetic appearance. Meanwhile, attempts have been made to address the occurrence of whitened areas HKB during the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 1 by methods such as mixing rubber into the acrylic plate material (for example, JP 2008-104622 A), but this did not anticipate the occurrence of whitened areas HKB or the whitened areas HKB gradually growing larger when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement parlor and used for play over an extended period of time, and there was room for improvement in this regard. Measures for solving these problems are presented below.

The embodiment shown below is an embodiment in which the panel board 1110 described with reference to FIG. 225(a) and the structure near the area where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted as the life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left guide nails 1232 are modified. Note that in this modified example, the area cover member 2600a is not provided.

Figure 259 shows an embodiment in which the panel board 1110 has a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface. Figure 259 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Note that the illustration of the obstacle nail head 1201a is omitted in the figure. For this reason, the circles showing the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 shown in the figure actually show the thickness of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232. It can also be said that this shows the thickness of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same in each drawing that explains an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 259.

Figure 259(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 259(a). Figure 259(b) shows a schematic cross-section of the area where the life nail 1230 is implanted, located on the left side when viewed from the front. This also applies to the drawings that explain embodiments that are modifications of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 259.

Figure 259 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection. The inclination angle in this cabinet diagram is 45 degrees. In the figure, the detailed structure of the obstacle nail 1201, such as the obstacle nail head 1201a, the obstacle nail spiral shaped portion 1201c, and the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e, is omitted, and the obstacle nail 1201 is shown as a single cylinder. In this cylinder, the part shown by the solid line indicates the obstacle nail head 1201a of the obstacle nail 1201 and the part of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b that is located in front of the panel board 1110. In addition, in this cylinder, the portion indicated by the dotted line indicates the portion of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail that is located inside the panel board 1110, the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail, the second body portion 1201d of the obstacle nail, the tip portion 1201e of the obstacle nail, and the rear end of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same in each of the drawings that explain the modified example that changes the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259.

In FIG. 259(a), the whitened portion HKB is omitted. In FIG. 259(c), the whitened portion HKB is also omitted, but the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion of the obstructing nail 1201 indicated by the dotted line. In FIG. 259(a) to FIG. 259(c), the first starting hole 2002 is omitted. These points are also the same in each drawing that explains a modified version of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259.

The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be processed to have a lens cut or matte finish. When light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or light from other game machines installed in the game parlor is incident on the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b formed in this way from the front or rear, the light is diffused by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and appears whitish.

As shown in Figures 259(a) and 259(c), the portion of the panel board 1110 where the obstacle nail through holes 1110a are provided will be seen by the player as overlapping with the panel board rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front or from diagonally above and to the left with respect to the panel board rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, the bright-colored visible portion (rough surface portion 1110b of the rear of the panel board) is located behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 on the transparent board portion (panel board 1110). This makes it possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the planted site of the obstacle nail 1201 less noticeable by the bright-colored visible portion that is visible in white.

White refers to a color that is visible when a specific object uniformly (approximately 100-80%) reflects all wavelengths of visible light of natural light irradiated onto the specific object, regardless of the wavelength range. Light colors refer to colors that are visible as cream, light gray, light yellow, etc., when a specific object absorbs a portion of the light in a specific wavelength range of the natural light irradiated onto the specific object and generally diffusely reflects the remaining wavelength range. On the other hand, black refers to a color that is visible when the surface of a specific object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of the natural light irradiated onto the specific object and diffusely reflects a portion of the irradiated natural light (approximately 20-several percent). Dark colors refer to colors that are uniformly absorbed in most wavelength ranges of the natural light irradiated onto the specific object and diffusely reflect only a portion of the irradiated light (approximately 20-several percent), but in a specific wavelength range, the light absorption rate is different, so that the color is visible as a color close to black, for example, a dark blue color. These definitions may be adopted as the definitions of each color in the present specification. In the embodiments described in the present specification, a white portion may be configured to be a light color, and a light portion may be configured to be white. For example, instead of emitting white light from a specific light-emitting member, a light colored portion may be configured to be emitting light. Also, a black portion may be configured to be a dark color, and a dark portion may be configured to be black.

Figure 259 (d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 259 (a). In the example shown in Figure 259 (d), a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110, and white light irradiated from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is introduced to the panel board 1110, and the introduced white light is diffusely reflected at the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is in a state where it is visible to the player as white light. The panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Also, a light emitting unit similar to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be provided on the side or above the panel board 1110, instead of the panel board 1110, or in addition to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, and the light emitting unit thus provided may be configured to emit light in the same way as the panel board lower light emitting board 2400.

With this configuration, even if the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed in the game arcade is weak, or the light of the game machines installed in the game arcade is weak (for example, a game machine that is not being played on may automatically go into power saving mode and emit less light, or a game machine that is being played on may be adjusted by the player to reduce the amount of light emitted by the game machine), the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible as one unit, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the planting site of the obstructing nail 1201 less noticeable. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself diffuses the introduced white light and is viewed as white, but the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is larger than the whitened portion HKB and diffuses more light behind the whitened portion HKB, preventing the whitened portion HKB from being noticeable.

Below, we will show several embodiments that are modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, and the technical content shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical content shown in another embodiment.

Although an example has been shown in which white light is introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the side of the panel board 1110, it may be configured to introduce yellow light instead of white light. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is perceived as yellow by the player due to the introduced light. The whitened portion HKB is also perceived as yellow by the introduced light. Incidentally, as mentioned above, the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are perceived as similar to the color of the obstacle nail 1201, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. This is because the use of the obstacle nails 1201 in pachinko machines 1 has been going on for decades, so players are unlikely to feel uncomfortable with the color or shape of the parts of the obstacle nail 1201 located closer to the front of the panel board 1110 (the obstacle nail head 1201a and the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b that is not embedded in the panel board 1110).

Although the obstacle nails 1201 are shown to be made of brass, obstacle nails 1201 made of other metals may be configured to be implanted into the panel board 1110. For example, obstacle nails 1201 made of stainless steel that are visible with a grayish-white metallic luster, or obstacle nails 1201 made of pure copper that are visible with a reddish metallic luster may be configured to be implanted into the panel board 1110.

When stainless steel obstacle nails 1201 are used, it is advisable to set the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to white. In this case, too, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b will be visually recognized as being similar to the color of the obstacle nail 1201, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Similarly, when a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be red or orange. In this case, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b will be visually recognized as a similar color to the obstacle nail 1201, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Note that in the case of a pure copper obstacle nail 1201, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be white.

In this way, a color similar to the color of the metal constituting the obstructing nail 1201 is introduced from the light emitting means (light emitting board 2400 below the panel board) to the transparent plate portion (panel board 1110), and light is irradiated onto the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB located behind the obstructing nail 1201. This causes the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB to be visually recognized as similar colors to the obstructing nail 1201, making it possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

The embodiment shown below is an embodiment in which the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 described with reference to Figures 259(a) to 259(d) are all made of the same metal but with different metallic luster colors, and the light emitted from the light-emitting substrate 2400 below the panel board is configured to change color at a specified timing from a specified color.

Specifically, in Fig. 259(b) and Fig. 259(c), a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used as the left guide nail 1232, a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used as the jump nail 1231, and a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used as the life nail 1230. In addition, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 changes from the off state to white, green, red, and yellow in the order specified timing.

In this case, the light introduced from the light emitting board 2400 below the panel board to the panel board 1110 and irradiated to the obstacle nail 1201 by diffuse reflection from the rough surface portion 1110b of the panel board is set to an amount of light such that the change in the hue of the obstacle nail 1201 is slight compared to the color in which the obstacle nail 1201 is perceived under the ambient light in the game arcade. For example, even if the light introduced from the light emitting board 2400 below the panel board is red, the obstacle nail 1201 is perceived as having a yellowish metallic luster under the ambient light in the game arcade.

In this configuration, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned on in white from an off state to a light emitting state, and introduces white light to the side lower surface of the panel board 1110. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b diffuses the introduced light, so that it is visible in white. The whitened portion HKB is also visible in white due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, and reflects the white light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the white light diffused by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, so that it is visible with a grayish white metallic luster similar to the color of the panel board 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

On the other hand, the jump nails 1231 are visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster because the obstacle nails 1201 are made of pure copper. The life nails 1230 are visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster because the obstacle nails 1201 are made of brass. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state as the obstacle nails 1201 with a reddish metallic luster and the obstacle nails 1201 with a yellowish metallic luster, respectively, due to the light introduced to the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b. This makes the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable in comparison.

After a certain time has passed, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emitting state from white to green, and introduces green light to the side lower surface of the panel board 1110. In this case, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b diffuses the introduced light, and is therefore visually recognized as green. The whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as green due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, and reflects the green light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the green light diffused by the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b, and is visually recognized as having a greenish metallic luster similar to the color of the panel board 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster because the obstacle nail 1201 is made of pure copper. The life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster because the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass. The jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state as the obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster and the obstacle nail 1201 with a yellowish metallic luster, respectively, due to the light introduced to the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffused by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. In particular, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster, which is a complementary color, while the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b located on the periphery is visually recognized with a green color when viewed from the front, and therefore the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized more conspicuously. Therefore, the existence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable relatively.

After a predetermined time has passed, the light-emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate changes its light-emitting state from green to red, introducing red light to the lateral underside of the panel plate 1110. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffuses the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as red. The whitened portion HKB also becomes visually recognized as red due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, so that it reflects the red light introduced from the panel plate below the light-emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the red light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, and is visually recognized as having a reddish metallic luster. In addition, because the jump nail 1231 is made of pure copper, it reflects the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffused by the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b, and is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster similar in color to the panel board 1110, the whitened portion HKB, and the left guide nail 1232. This makes it possible to make the presence of the left guide nail 1232, the jump nail 1231, and the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

On the other hand, the life nail 1230 is made of brass obstacle nail 1201, and is therefore visible with a yellowish metallic luster. The light guided to the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffused by the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b make it possible for the player to see the obstacle nail 1201 with a yellowish metallic luster in a conspicuous state. This makes it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable in comparison.

After a predetermined time has passed, the light-emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate changes its light-emitting state from red to yellow, introducing yellow light to the lateral underside of the panel plate 1110. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffuses the introduced light, so that it is perceived as yellow. The whitened portion HKB is also perceived as yellow due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 uses the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201, so that it reflects the yellow light introduced from the panel plate below the light-emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the yellow light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, and is perceived as having a yellowish metallic luster. In addition, because the life nail 1230 uses a brass obstacle nail 1201, it reflects the light introduced to the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the light diffused by the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b, and is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster similar in color to the panel board 1110, the whitened portion HKB, and the left guide nail 1232. This makes it possible to make the presence of the left guide nail 1232, the life nail 1230, and the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster because it uses a pure copper obstacle nail 1201. The light guided to the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffused by the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b make it possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster in a conspicuous state. This makes it possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable in comparison.

In this way, a specific light that is switched to a different color at a specific timing is introduced from the light emitting means (light emitting board 2400 below the panel board) to the transparent board portion (panel board 1110), and the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB located behind the obstructing nail 1201 are irradiated, so that the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB continue to be visible in a color similar to the color of the specific switched light.

In addition, by constructing the multiple obstacle nails 1201 from metals of multiple colors, when light of a specific color is introduced to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a specific timing, the obstacle nails 1201 of the first specific color are perceived by the player as being of a similar color and not standing out against the color of the specific light, and the obstacle nails 1201 of the second specific color are perceived by the player as being of a different color and standing out against the color of the specific light.

In addition, a predetermined light is introduced to the transparent plate portion (panel board 1110) at a predetermined timing, and a different predetermined light is generated, and the color of the light irradiated on the obstacle nails 1201 changes, so that the obstacle nails 1201 of the first predetermined color are perceived by the player as a different color that stands out against the different colors of the predetermined light, and the obstacle nails 1201 of the second predetermined color are perceived by the player as a similar color that does not stand out against the different colors of the predetermined light.

In this way, by changing the color of the light irradiated to the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b of the back of the panel board) located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 is perceived by the player as being either conspicuous or inconspicuous, and therefore the manner in which the player perceives the obstacle nail 1201 can be changed.

In this way, as the color of the specified light introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel board 1110) changes, the obstacle nails 1201 that are visually perceived by the player as being a color different from the specified color and therefore conspicuous change fluidly, allowing the player to obtain visual interest in following the obstacle nails 1201 that are now conspicuous, while at the same time diverting the player's attention, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB relatively less noticeable.

An example has been shown in which the whitened portion HKB and the panel plate rough surface portion 1110b on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 are visually recognized in a predetermined color by light of a predetermined color introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, but it is preferable to configure the state in which the light of the predetermined color is emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 so that it remains lit from the time the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off.

By configuring in this way, the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the rear of the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB, or the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the rear of the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB and the obstructing nail 1201, are visually perceived as being of similar colors, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Although an example has been shown in which the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate continues to be lit in a predetermined color while the power is being applied to the pachinko machine 1, the light introduced from the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate may be configured to indicate decoration or a game state. For example, at a predetermined timing while the power is being applied to the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate may be changed from a state in which the light is lit in a predetermined color to a state in which the light flashes in a predetermined color. Alternatively, the light intensity of the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate may be increased or decreased when the light is lit in a predetermined color. In such a configuration, the light introduced from the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate can also be used to indicate decoration or a game state. The predetermined timing may be when the player starts playing and the main control board 1310 detects that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, or the second starting hole 2004, or when the special lottery result drawn due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 is a jackpot and the jackpot game state in which the special winning hole 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times is started. The original light emission state may be restored when the player finishes playing or when the jackpot game state ends. Alternatively, the special lottery result may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot by such a change in the light emission mode.

In this way, by changing the light emission mode of the light introduced from the light emitting means (light emitting board 2400 below the panel board) into the transparent board portion (panel board 1110) depending on the game status, it is possible to use the light introduced into the transparent board portion as light for decorating the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board) and the whitened portion HKB, while making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

The color of light introduced into the panel board 1110 may be a predetermined color other than white or a color similar to the color of the obstructing nail 1201. For example, any one of blue, green, and red light may be selected and introduced into the obstructing nail 1201 made of brass. Also, any one of blue, green, and gold light may be selected and introduced into the obstructing nail 1201 made of pure copper. In these cases, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible in the color of the introduced light, but the color of the light visible in the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB is no longer the same color as the obstructing nail 1201, so the effect of making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable is limited. On the other hand, it is possible to introduce multiple different colors into the panel board 1110, which increases the decorative diversity.

On the other hand, the stainless steel obstruction nail 1201 may be configured to be illuminated with blue, green, red, and gold light. In this case, the panel plate rough surface 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible in the color of the illuminated light, and since some of the illuminated light also reaches the obstruction nail 1201, the color of the light visible at the panel plate rough surface 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstruction nail 1201 are visible in the same color. This makes it possible to introduce multiple different colors to the panel plate 1110 while making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, thereby increasing the decorative diversity.

The panel board may be configured to introduce one of a number of colors of light to the panel board 1110 from the light-emitting substrate 2400 below the panel board, and to perform a light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot depending on the color of the light introduced into the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board and the whitened portion HKB. This light-emitting effect may be configured to start at a timing before the result of the special lottery is indicated to the player by the decorative patterns stopping to change.

For example, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 may be configured to use blue light as the first expected color indicating a low expectation of a jackpot (e.g. 10%), green light as the second expected color indicating a medium expectation of a jackpot (e.g. 30%), and gold light as the third expected color indicating a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g. 70%).

In addition, when a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 through the panel board 1110 may be configured to use blue light as the first expected color indicating a low expectation of a jackpot (e.g. 10%), green light as the second expected color indicating a medium expectation of a jackpot (e.g. 30%), and red light as the third expected color indicating a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g. 70%).

In addition, when a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used, the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 may be configured to use blue light as the first expected color indicating a low jackpot expectation (e.g. 10%), green light as the second expected color indicating a medium jackpot expectation (e.g. 30%), and white light as the third expected color indicating a high jackpot expectation (e.g. 70%).

In this way, when the panel board rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized in a predetermined color based on the results of the special lottery, when the panel board lower light-emitting board 2400 is made to emit light in a color with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, it is preferable to configure the color of the panel board rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 to be visually recognized in similar colors when the panel board lower light-emitting board 2400 is made to emit light in a color with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, compared to when the panel board lower light-emitting board 2400 is made to emit light in a color with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot.

In this way, when a light-emitting effect is performed in which the light-emitting means (light-emitting board 2400 below the panel board) emits light in a color that indicates a high probability of a jackpot, the color of the obstructing nail 1201, the color of the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board), and the color of the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized as similar colors, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the whitened portion HKB when a light-emitting effect with high expectations is performed, thereby spoiling the player's interest that was heightened by the light-emitting effect with high expectations.

The light emitting board 2400 below the panel board may be normally turned off, and may be configured to emit light in one of the first to third expected colors for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) at a timing that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot (e.g., when a reach state occurs), thereby introducing light of one of the first to third expected colors to the panel board 1110.

The color of the light emitted by the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel board may be changed from the first expected color to the second expected color before the special lottery result is suggested by the stopping of the decorative pattern. Also, after changing from the first expected color to the second expected color, it may be further changed to the third expected color. Also, it may be changed from the first expected color to the third expected color, or from the second expected color to the third expected color. Also, it is preferable to configure it so that such a change in expected color actually increases the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.

The light-emitting effects using the first to third expected colors may be configured to continue until the display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery ends. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the light-emitting effects may be configured to continue until the display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery stops, or until the display of the next special lottery result starts. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the light-emitting effects may be configured to continue even when the display of the decorative pattern indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot stops, and to continue even after the jackpot game state starts. In this case, the light-emitting effects may end when a specified round starts during the jackpot game state, or when the jackpot game state ends.

If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the light-emitting presentation state using the first or second expected color may be changed to a light-emitting presentation state using the third expected color at the timing when the result of the special lottery is indicated to the player as a jackpot (for example, a special character is displayed in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 or a special sound effect is output). In this case, the timing for ending the light-emitting presentation may be the start of a specified round during the jackpot game state or the end of the jackpot game state.

In this way, by executing the light-emitting effect in the third expected color when it is determined that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state) will occur, or by continuing to execute the light-emitting effect in the third expected color even during the state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state), it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable and make it harder for the player to notice its presence, thereby preventing the occurrence of an incident that dampens the player's growing interest when it is determined that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state) will occur or during the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state).

The state of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be changed from an unlit state to a lit state, or from a lit state to an unlit state, in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. Alternatively, the intensity of the light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be set in multiple stages, and the intensity of the light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be changed in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. Alternatively, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be set in multiple colors, and the color of the light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be changed in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. In this case, it is preferable to adopt yellow, white, red, etc. as the light emission color that can be selected. These may also be combined. With this configuration, it is possible to irradiate the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB with light of an appropriate color and amount that makes the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

This is because the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed inside the amusement store, or from other gaming machines installed inside the amusement store (especially gaming machines installed back-to-back with the pachinko machine 1), is not necessarily sufficient to illuminate the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB. For example, if the amount of light from the lighting equipment or other gaming machines is sufficient and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are illuminated with a white color that is a mixture of light from these multiple light sources, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable even when the panel board lower light-emitting board 2400 is turned off. It is also possible to reduce the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, the color of light from lighting equipment installed in the game store and the color of light from other game machines installed in the game store (especially game machines installed back to back with the pachinko machine 1) are not necessarily close to white, and for example, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB may be illuminated by blue or green surrounding light. In this case, by operating the operation button 410 so that the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 emits light in a color similar to the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201, it is possible to visually recognize the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the whitened portion HKB, and the obstacle nail 1201 in a similar color. For example, if the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass is used, it is recommended to configure the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 to emit yellow light, and if the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper is used, it is recommended to configure it to emit red or orange light. In addition, by adjusting the amount of light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 so that the color of the light from the lighting equipment or other gaming machines is not distracting, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1 while making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

The light emission state, color, and intensity may be changed while the player is playing. For example, the light emission state, color, and intensity may be changed by operating the operation button 410 while the decorative symbols are changing or during a jackpot game. The operation button 410 is an operation button for presentation purposes, but a dedicated button for changing the color and intensity of the light may be provided on the front of the dish unit 320. The button may also be configured to be operable without opening the door frame 3.

In this way, by operating the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) that can be operated by the staff of the game arcade, it is possible to adjust the color and amount of light emitted from the light-emitting means (light-emitting board 2400 below the panel board), making it possible to change the light-emitting state of the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board) to an illumination state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable.

In the above example, the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel is illuminated in a predetermined color while the decorative pattern is changing, but such a light emitting effect may be configured to be executable during a jackpot game state. For example, the light emitting effect may be configured to start at a predetermined timing during a jackpot game, and end at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The light emitting effect may be configured to indicate, for example, the expectation level regarding the game state that will occur after the jackpot game state ends (for example, the expectation level of a probability fluctuation state after the jackpot game state).

In this way, by illuminating the light emitting means (light emitting board 2400 below the panel board) with the third expected color, which is an emission color with a higher expectation as an emission mode indicating the expectation for the game state that will occur after the end of a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state), the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the whitened portion HKB when a light emitting effect with a high expectation is performed, thereby dampening the player's excitement that has been heightened by the light emitting effect with a high expectation.

In the above example, the panel board rough surface 1110b is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201, and light of a specific color is introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110, so that the panel board rough surface 1110b is visible in a specific color. However, there is a problem that the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a (the part forming a hemispherical spherical surface) is visible in the original color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail head 1201a. In particular, when the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store or other game machines is weak, the rear of the obstacle nail 1201 is visible in a light color, and the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is visible in a darker color than the light color, making it stand out, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

The following describes an embodiment in which light is irradiated onto the front surface of the defective nail head 1201a from the side, above, below, or from the front, making the front surface of the defective nail head 1201a less noticeable.

The door frame right side unit 550 shown in FIG. 6 may be configured to emit light, and the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a may be illuminated by the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550. When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is turned off, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color, so the color of the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 may be white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light, so the color of the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. Also, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light emitting state, the door frame right side unit 550 may be in a light emitting state, and when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in a turned off state, the door frame right side unit 550 may be in a turned off state. In this way, by matching the color and timing of the light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 and the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to make the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable.

In this way, an illumination means (such as the door frame right side unit 550) is provided that can illuminate the obstructing nail 1201 from the front, and when the white or bright light from the light emitting means (light emitting board 2400 below the panel board) causes the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board) to diffusely reflect light, the illumination means illuminates the obstructing nail 1201 from the front with white or bright light, making the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable.

However, when the door frame right side unit 550 is in the light-emitting state, only the right side of the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is irradiated with light when viewed from the front, and the left side of the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is still visible in a dark color and is conspicuous. Therefore, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 may be configured to be symmetrical to the door frame right side unit 550 and controlled to be in the same light-emitting state as the door frame right side unit 550. With this configuration, it is possible to irradiate the entire front of the obstructing nail head 1201a with light, making the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a even less conspicuous. It is preferable that the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 have the same light-emitting color and light-emitting timing.

In this way, multiple illumination means (door frame right side unit 550, door frame left side unit 530, etc.) are provided that can illuminate the obstructing nail 1201 from the front, and when the light from the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) is diffusely reflected by the diffuse reflection portion (panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b), the multiple illumination means illuminate the obstructing nail 1201 with light from different angles in front, making the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable.

In the embodiment shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is in an emitting state, but instead of or in addition to the door frame right side unit 550, it may be configured to irradiate the front of the nail head 1201a with light from another component capable of emitting light. Note that it is advisable to match the emitting color and timing of the light emitted by these other components with that of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400.

In addition, when light is irradiated from the door frame right side unit 550 toward the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be left in an off state without emitting light. This is because when light is irradiated from the front toward the obstructing nail head 1201a, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are also irradiated with the light at the same time. In this case, it is preferable to irradiate the obstructing nail head 1201a with white light from the front, or to irradiate with light of a similar color to the color of the metal that constitutes the obstructing nail 1201. In addition, when light is irradiated toward the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a using light from other members that can emit light, not limited to the door frame right side unit 550, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be left in an off state without emitting light.

In this way, an illumination means (such as the door frame right side unit 550) is provided that can illuminate the obstructing nail 1201 from the front, and when the light-emitting means (light-emitting board 2400 below the panel board) is turned off, the illumination means illuminates the obstructing nail 1201 from the front with white or light-colored light, so that the white or light-colored light from the illumination means is also illuminated onto the diffuse reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b behind the panel board), and the diffuse reflection portion diffusely reflects light. Even when this is done, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Also, a light-emitting unit capable of irradiating light downward may be provided on the underside of the door frame top unit 570 described with reference to FIG. 24, etc., and configured to irradiate light toward the obstacle nail head 1201a. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light upward on the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a, making the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a less noticeable. Also, the light irradiated from the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 possessed by the performance operation unit 400 described with reference to FIG. 24, FIG. 37, etc. may be configured to be irradiated not only diagonally forward but also diagonally backward, and light may be irradiated toward the obstacle nail head 1201a through the frame top lens 418. The frame top lens 418 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light downward on the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a, making the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a less noticeable. It is desirable to match the color and timing of the light emitted by the door frame top unit 570 and the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the performance operation unit 400.

In this way, even if an illumination means (such as the door frame right side unit 550) capable of irradiating the obstruction nail 1201 with light from the front is provided above and/or below the obstruction nail 1201, and the obstruction nail 1201 is configured to be irradiated with light from the front, the obstruction nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

In addition, instead of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400 described with reference to Figures 24 and 37, the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400 described with reference to Figure 154, or an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Figure 154, may be adopted with a similar configuration to irradiate light to the front of the obstacle nail head 1201a. In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 154, the operation button 410 may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a light emitting means may be provided within the operation button 410, so that light is irradiated to the front of the obstacle nail head 1201a.

It may be configured so that light is irradiated onto the front of the obstruction nail head 1201a from a movable frame body provided on the door frame top unit 570. For example, light-emitting diodes may be mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light-emitting unit 7330 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 described with reference to Figures 173, 174, and 175, and on the rear surface of the printed circuit board constituting the left ear inner frame movable body light-emitting unit 7430 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the rear surfaces of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 may each be made of a colorless, transparent or milky white synthetic resin, so that light from the light-emitting diode mounted on the printed circuit board constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light-emitting unit 7330 and light from the light-emitting diode mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board constituting the left ear inner frame movable body light-emitting unit 7430 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 illuminate the front of the obstacle nail head 1201a. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIG. 174 may be deformed in the same manner as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and may be made to emit light in the same manner.

In this way, even if a movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, etc.) or an operable operating means (operation button 410, etc.) is adopted as an illumination means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front onto the obstructing nail 1201, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

In addition, the light from the right light-emitting unit 7050 and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, which are provided in the door frame top unit 570 so as to irradiate toward the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to Figures 181 (A) to 181 (E), may be configured to illuminate the front of the obstacle nail head 1201a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181(B) and FIG. 181(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are stopped facing forward (third state), and then the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are illuminated. Of the light irradiated from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, a portion of the light that is not irradiated to any of the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is irradiated to the lower part of the play area 5a.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to illuminate the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 when they are stopped facing forward (third state) to create a decorative state, and it is also possible to illuminate the light from the left and right directions above the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted at the bottom of the play area 5a, making the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a less noticeable without having to install a new light source.

When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in an off state, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color, so the color of the light irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit should be white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light, so the color of the light irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit should be the same color as the color of the light irradiated from the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, by matching the color and timing of the light emitted by the light-emitting board 2400 below the panel board, the right-side light-emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit, and the left-side light-emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit, it is possible to make the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable.

Also, from the standby position state (first state) shown in Figures 181 (A), 181 (C), and 181 (D), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be rotated 10 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right side and stopped, and then the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit may be made to emit light. Of the light irradiated from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, most of the light irradiated downward from the door frame top unit 570 is irradiated to the entire play area 5a without being blocked by the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

This configuration makes it possible to illuminate the upper front of the obstacle nail heads 1201a planted throughout the entire play area 5a from the left and right, making it possible to make the front of the obstacle nail heads 1201a less noticeable without installing a new light source.

When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in an off state, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color, so the color of the light irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit should be white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light, so the color of the light irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit should be the same color as the color of the light irradiated from the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, by matching the color and timing of the light emitted by the light-emitting board 2400 below the panel board, the right-side light-emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit, and the left-side light-emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit, it is possible to make the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 may be in the standby position (first state) shown in Figures 181 (A), 181 (C), and 181 (D), and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be in a stopped state facing forward (third state) shown in Figures 181 (B) and 181 (E), and then the right light-emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit may be illuminated.

Of the light emitted from the right light-emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left light-emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit, a portion of the light that is not irradiated to either the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 or the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is irradiated to the upper and lower parts of the play area 5a.

With this configuration, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in the stopped state facing forward (third state) can be illuminated to create a decorative state, and light can be illuminated from the left and right directions above the front of the obstacle nail heads 1201a planted in the upper and lower parts of the play area 5a, making the front of the obstacle nail heads 1201a less noticeable without providing a new light source. In addition, the light from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit is hardly illuminated in the vertical center of the play area 5a because it is blocked by the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460. This makes it possible to avoid situations where light is reflected off the front and back surfaces of the glass unit 190 and the surface of the game board side performance display device 1600, causing an amount of light that is perceived as "dazzling" to enter the player's eyeball, thereby impeding the player's visibility of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in an off state, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color, so the color of the light irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit should be white. On the other hand, when the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light, so the color of the light irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit should be the same color as the color of the light irradiated from the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, by matching the color and timing of the light emitted by the light-emitting board 2400 below the panel board, the right-side light-emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit, and the left-side light-emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit, it is possible to make the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a less noticeable.

It may also be configured so that light is irradiated from the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to Figures 236, 237, 243, etc. to the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a. In this case, a light emitting diode may be mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, and the light from the light emitting diode mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 may be configured to irradiate the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in the moving position. In this case, a cover member made of a colorless, transparent or milky white synthetic resin may be provided on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to protect the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810.

It is also possible to configure the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 so that no light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface thereof, and only a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin is provided to protect the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810. In this case, the light irradiated forward from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 made of a white printed circuit board or the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7800 located at the moving position is diffusely reflected backward and irradiates the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a. In this case, it is preferable to adopt white or a color similar to the color of the obstacle nail as the display color used for the background image and character image displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Alternatively, an image in which the ratio of red, green, and blue is divided equally may be used as the background image and character image displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. This is because these lights are diffusely reflected and mixed on the back of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and on the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, which is made of a white printed circuit board, so that the color of the light illuminating the obstruction nail 1201 becomes white.

In this way, even if an illumination means (such as the game board side performance display device 1600) capable of illuminating the obstacle nail 1201 from behind is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201, and a reflection means (such as the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810) capable of reflecting light onto the obstacle nail 1201 is provided in front of the obstacle nail 1201, and light is illuminated onto the obstacle nail 1201 from the front, the obstacle nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

The shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b represents a snowy mountain. In this way, by adopting a shape that imitates the shape of some object or a geometric shape as the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, it is possible to make the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b function as a decorative portion. In this specification, components or portions with a similar shape that are white or that diffusely reflect light represent snowy mountains. Furthermore, components or portions with a similar shape that have a metallic luster represent glaciers. Furthermore, other colors represent plants growing on the mountains or rocks exposed as the mountain surface.

In this way, by giving the outer shape of the diffuse reflection portion (such as the panel back rough surface portion 1110b) a decorative shape, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be made less noticeable.

The method of planting the obstacle nails 1201 in the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 has been shown, but when multiple obstacle nails 1201 are planted adjacently, the area between the adjacent obstacle nails 1201 is affected by both the elastic deformation of the panel board 1110 caused by one of the planted obstacle nails 1201 and the elastic deformation of the panel board 1110 caused by the other planted obstacle nail 1201. For this reason, whitened areas HKB are likely to occur between adjacent obstacle nails 1201. In particular, when the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 are arranged adjacent to each other so that the game ball does not pass between them, such as the left guide nail 1232, there is a high possibility that such whitened areas HKB will occur. In addition, there is a high possibility that the whitened areas HKB will also occur in the right guide nail 1233.

Therefore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, the left guide nail 1232 is configured so that the entirety is located within one panel board back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. With this configuration, even if a whitened portion HKB occurs in an area where the whitened portion HKB is particularly likely to occur, the whitened portion HKB that occurs can be made less noticeable. Note that the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as the life nails 1230 and the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as the jump nails 1231 may be configured so that a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided corresponding to each obstacle nail 1201.

It is advisable to configure the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side performance display device 1600 so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front. This configuration does not impede visibility of the game board side performance display device 1600. On the other hand, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured so that they overlap when viewed from the front. This configuration makes it possible to make at least a portion of the periphery of the game board side performance display device 1600 decoratively visible.

The technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 may be combined. For example, the light emission mode of the light emitting means in one embodiment may be adopted as the light emission mode of the light emitting means in another embodiment. Furthermore, the technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 may be adopted in another embodiment described below. Furthermore, in the case of an embodiment having a panel board rear board 2420 instead of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear board 2420 to emit light in the same manner as the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 instead of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, the panel board 1110 is configured such that the boundary between the area where the panel board rough surface portion 1110b is provided and the area where the panel board rough surface portion 1110b is not provided is made up of a combination of multiple straight lines. Specifically, the boundary between the area where the panel board rough surface portion 1110b is provided and the area where the panel board rough surface portion 1110b is not provided is formed by using multiple straight lines that are approximately the same length as the obstruction nail 1201.

In this way, by configuring the boundary between the diffuse reflection portion (such as the panel board rough surface 1110b) and the rearward visibility portion (where the panel board rough surface 1110b is not provided) which makes it easy to see behind, to consist of multiple straight lines, the rod-shaped obstacle nail 1201 and the boundary between the diffuse reflection portion and the rearward visibility portion are visually similar, making it possible for the player to see the obstacle nail 1201 and the diffuse reflection portion as being more integrated, and making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Note that instead of making all of the boundaries straight lines, at least some of the boundaries may be straight lines.

The panel board back rough surface portion 1110b may also be formed in a mesh pattern. Figure 260 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to Figure 259 is modified to a mesh pattern. Figure 260(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 260(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 are provided in a position that does not overlap with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view. In addition, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided in a position that partially overlaps with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 260(b), the parts of these obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

The panel board back rough surface portion 1110b may also be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 261 shows an embodiment in which the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 259 has been modified to be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 261(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 261(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection.

In this embodiment, the panel board rough surface portion 1110b has a decorative shape imitating a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 261(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the first obstacle nail 1201 from the right of the left guide nail 1232 and the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 are provided in positions that do not overlap with the panel board rough surface portion 1110b in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261(b), the parts of these obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the panel board rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the obstacle nails 1201 and the panel board rough surface portion 1110b as being integrated, while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

In addition, instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and a panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d having different roughnesses may be provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110. FIG. 262 shows an embodiment modified so that the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d having different roughnesses are provided instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 262(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 262(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection.

In this embodiment, the panel plate is configured to have a relatively coarse panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d above and below the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, which has a relatively fine roughness. The panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d have different visual appearances. The boundary between the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range. As shown in FIG. 262(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the first to third obstacle nails 1201 from the left of the left guide nail 1232 are provided in a position that overlaps with the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d in a front view. Additionally, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 on the left side are positioned so that they overlap the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel board when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the portions of the obstacle nails 1201 from the left, the first to third obstacle nails 1201 from the left, that are planted in the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized as overlapping at least partially with the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel board. Also, the portions of the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 on the left side that are planted in the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized as overlapping at least partially with the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel board.

In addition, instead of providing the first rough surface portion 1110c and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate according to the difference in the degree of roughness, the first rough surface portion 1110c and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate may be provided according to the difference in the roughness pattern. For example, the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel plate may be formed by matte finishing, and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate may be formed by lens cutting. Even in this case, it is possible to make the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel plate and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate different in terms of the visibility pattern.

In this way, even if multiple diffuse reflection areas (first panel back rough surface area 1110c and second panel back rough surface area 1110d) with different visibility are provided and decorative shapes are visible at the boundaries between the multiple diffuse reflection areas, the player can still see the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel back rough surface area 1110b as an integrated unit, making the whitened area HKB less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d), the white light irradiated from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is introduced to the panel plate 1110. However, in the modified example described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 262, the white light irradiated from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be configured to be introduced to the panel plate 1110.

With reference to Figure 259, an example is shown in which a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110. However, with reference to Figure 263, an example is described in which a flat panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e capable of mirror-reflecting incident light is provided in place of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b.

Figure 263(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 263(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 263(a). Figure 263(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection. Figure 263(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

The panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be formed by plating the back surface of the panel plate 1110. The panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be formed by plating aluminum to provide a plated layer having a grayish white metallic gloss and visible as silver. Alternatively, the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be formed by plating pure copper to provide a reddish metallic gloss, or the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be formed by plating brass to provide a yellowish metallic gloss and visible as gold. The shape of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be configured to adopt a shape similar to that of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. The thickness of the thin plated film formed by plating is about 0.2 mm, but is exaggerated in the figure. This point is the same in other embodiments described later and in the drawings showing other embodiments.

In this way, by providing a metallic glossy portion (also made of metal, the rear metallic glossy portion 1110e of the panel board) behind the metallic obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic glossy portion are visually recognized as one unit with their metallic gloss, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB located between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic glossy portion less noticeable in the front-to-back relationship.

As shown in FIG. 263(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to introduce light into the panel board 1110, and the introduced light may be reflected by the panel board rear metallic gloss portion 1110e. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may also be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the game parlor is weak, the panel board rear metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized by the metallic gloss, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

The panel back metallic glossy portion 1110e may also be formed in a mesh pattern. Figure 264 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel back metallic glossy portion 1110e described with reference to Figure 263 has been modified to a mesh pattern. Figure 264(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 264(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 264(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 are provided in a position that does not overlap with the panel board back metal gloss part 1110e in a front view. In addition, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 are provided in a position that partially overlaps with the panel board back metal gloss part 1110e in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 264(b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be visually recognized as at least partially overlapping with the panel board back metal gloss part 1110e. In this way, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metal gloss part 1110e in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

The panel back metallic glossy portion 1110e may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. Figure 265 shows an embodiment in which the panel back metallic glossy portion 1110e described with reference to Figure 263 has been modified to be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. Figure 265(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 265(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection.

In this embodiment, the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate has a decorative shape that resembles a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 265(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the first obstacle nail 1201 from the right of the left guide nail 1232 and the two obstacle nails 1201 that function as the life nail 1230 are provided in positions that do not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265(b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be seen to overlap at least partially with the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate. In this way, it is possible to make the player see the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate as an integrated form while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear, and as a result, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Although an example in which the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e is provided in a flat shape has been shown, if the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e mirror-reflects light, only the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e stands out, and there is a risk that the sense of unity between the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 will be weakened. This tendency is more pronounced the larger the area of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e. Therefore, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 264, one panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be formed in a mesh shape. Alternatively, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 265, a plurality of panel plate back metallic gloss portions 1110e may be provided to reduce the area of one panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e. For example, an independent panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be provided for each obstacle nail 1201. Alternatively, a portion of the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e generated by the plating process may be removed to allow the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e to more diffusely reflect light. This configuration can improve the visual unity between the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201.

In addition, instead of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 may be provided with a panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f and a panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, which are visually recognized with different metallic glosses. FIG. 266 shows an embodiment modified so that, instead of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 263, a panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f and a panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, which are visually recognized with different metallic glosses, are provided. FIG. 266(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 266(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection.

In this embodiment, the panel plate is configured to have a second metallic glossy portion 1110g on the top and bottom of the first metallic glossy portion 1110f on the bottom of the panel plate. In addition, the boundary between the first metallic glossy portion 1110f on the bottom of the panel plate and the second metallic glossy portion 1110g on the bottom of the panel plate has a decorative shape that resembles a mountain range.

It is possible to appropriately combine the following for both the first metallic glossy portion 1110f and the second metallic glossy portion 1110g: a plated portion made of aluminum and visible in silver, a plated portion made of pure copper and visible in reddish color, and a plated portion made of brass and visible in gold. Specifically, the first metallic glossy portion 1110f may be composed of a plated portion visible in silver, and the second metallic glossy portion 1110g may be composed of a plated portion visible in reddish color or a plated portion visible in gold. Alternatively, the first metallic glossy portion 1110f may be composed of a plated portion visible in gold, and the second metallic glossy portion 1110g may be composed of a plated portion visible in silver or a plated portion visible in reddish color. Alternatively, the first metallic glossy portion 1110f on the rear of the panel plate may be formed of a plated portion that appears reddish in color, and the second metallic glossy portion 1110g on the rear of the panel plate may be formed of a plated portion that appears silver in color or a plated portion that appears gold in color.

A combination may be adopted in which the metallic luster of the metallic luster part 1110e on the back of the panel plate obtained by a predetermined plating process and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have a similar color. For example, if an obstacle nail made of stainless steel and visible in silver is used as the obstacle nail 1201, a plating process that is visible in silver may be applied to the back of the panel plate 1110. If an obstacle nail made of pure copper is used as the obstacle nail 1201, a plating process that is visible in reddish metallic luster may be applied to the back of the panel plate 1110. If an obstacle nail made of brass is used as the obstacle nail 1201, a plating process that is visible in gold may be applied to the back of the panel plate 1110. In this way, by matching the color of the obstacle nail 1201 with the color of the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel board, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel board are perceived by the player as a single decorative part, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Similarly, a combination may be adopted in which the metallic luster of one of the first metallic luster portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have a similar color. For example, if an obstacle nail made of stainless steel and visible as silver is used as the obstacle nail 1201, a plating process visible as silver may be applied to the back surface of the panel plate 1110 to form one of the first metallic luster portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate so that it is visible with the same silver metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the other of the first metallic luster portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate may be plated to be visible with a metallic luster other than silver (reddish metallic luster or gold).

In addition, when using a brass obstacle nail 1201 as the obstacle nail 1201, a plating process that is visible in gold can be applied to the back surface of the panel plate 1110 to form one of the first metallic gloss portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic gloss portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate so that it is visible with the same golden metallic gloss as the obstacle nail 1201, and the other of the first metallic gloss portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic gloss portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate can be plated to be visible with a metallic gloss other than gold (reddish metallic gloss or gold).

In this way, by configuring the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 to match the metallic luster of either the first metallic luster portion (e.g., the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel board) or the second metallic luster portion (e.g., the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel board), the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and either the first metallic luster portion or the second metallic luster portion are perceived by the player as a unified decorative form, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Furthermore, since the metallic luster is still visible in either the other of the first metallic luster portion or the second metallic luster portion, the other metallic luster portion is also perceived as being roughly integrated with the obstacle nail 1201, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263(d), light irradiated from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is introduced to the panel plate 1110. However, in the modified example described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266, the light irradiated from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be configured to be introduced to the panel plate 1110.

259 to 262, an embodiment in which a diffuse reflection portion (panel plate rear rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate rear first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate rear second rough surface portion 1110d) is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is shown. However, the diffuse reflection portion in these embodiments may be plated as described with reference to Figs. 263 to 266 to provide a metallic gloss portion (panel plate rear metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate rear first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate rear second metallic gloss portion 1110g). In addition, in an embodiment having multiple diffuse reflection portions, as in the embodiment described with reference to Figs. 261 and 262, a metallic gloss portion may be similarly provided for at least one diffuse reflection portion. Note that the other diffuse reflection portions (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) may also be plated in the same manner. Alternatively, other metallic gloss portions may be formed by such a method to have an uneven shape.

In this configuration, the metallic gloss portion is not flat but has an uneven shape, so that ambient light and light from the light-emitting means (such as the light-emitting substrate 2400 below the panel board) can be diffused on the front surface of the metallic gloss portion, and the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic gloss portion are visually perceived as a single unit, making the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable. In addition, by providing both the diffuse reflection portion and the metallic gloss portion, the diffuse reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB are visually perceived as a single unit, and the metallic gloss portion and the metallic obstructing nail 1201 are visually perceived as a single unit, making the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

Incidentally, electrically charged game balls may roll onto the front surface of the panel board 1110. This can occur when, in an island of game machines consisting of multiple pachinko machines, the game balls become electrostatically charged due to friction between the game balls and other materials (such as the polishing cloth used for polishing or the synthetic resin that constitutes the flow path within the island) as they are being lifted and polished, and the charged game balls are then launched into the game area 5a. A discharge phenomenon may occur from the charged game balls towards the surrounding area, and when a discharge occurs, a high-frequency electromagnetic pulse is generated around the location where the discharge occurred, which may damage or cause malfunctions in electronic components located in the vicinity.

To prevent such problems from occurring, electronic components and electronic elements may be placed behind the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g in positions where they overlap when viewed from the front, and these metallic gloss portions may be used as shielding members to protect the electronic components and electronic elements. For example, sensors such as the vibration sensor 2405, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the general winning hole sensor 4020, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be placed behind these metallic gloss portions in positions where they overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, by arranging at least one of the electronic components or electronic elements in a position that overlaps with the metallic gloss portion (panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g) when viewed from the front, it is possible to give the metallic gloss portion used as decoration the function of protecting the electronic components and electronic elements.

The panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g may be configured to be electrically connected to the ground of an electrical circuit provided on the game board 5' (e.g., the circuit ground of the peripheral control board 1510) by a specified metal cable or the like. Note that when the panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g are electrically connected, only one of them may be configured to be electrically connected to the ground of an electrical circuit provided on the game board 5'.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, an example was shown in which the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b was provided by cutting the back surface of the panel plate 1110. However, instead of this method, a specific white or light-colored pattern may be printed on the back surface of the panel plate 1110, or a sticker with a specific white or light-colored pattern may be attached to provide a panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h capable of diffusely reflecting light. The shape of such a pattern or sticker may be configured to be similar to that of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263, an example was shown in which the rear metallic gloss portion 1110e was provided by plating the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, but instead of this method, the rear metallic gloss portion 1110e may be provided by printing a predetermined pattern that is visible due to its metallic gloss on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 or by attaching a sticker with a predetermined pattern that is visible due to its metallic gloss.

With reference to FIG. 259, an example is shown in which a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110. However, with reference to FIG. 267, an example is described in which, instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h that is visible in white or a bright color and a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e that can mirror-reflect incident light are provided. Note that for the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, it is preferable to adopt the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263.

Figure 267(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 267(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 267(a). Figure 267(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. Figure 267(d) is a cross-sectional view showing the state in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

With this configuration, the diffuse reflection portion (the bright-colored visible portion 1110h behind the panel plate) and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized as one unit, and the metallic gloss portion (the metallic gloss portion 1110e behind the panel plate) and the metallic obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one unit, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

The metallic obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be configured to have a metallic gloss of the same color. For example, if a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used, it is recommended to use a metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate that is visible in silver. Alternatively, if a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used, it is recommended to use a metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate that is visible in gold. With this configuration, the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate and the metallic obstacle nail 1201 can be more visually perceived as one unit.

The metallic obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic gloss part 1110e on the back of the panel board may be configured not to have the same metallic gloss. For example, when a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used, the metallic gloss part 1110e on the back of the panel board that is visually recognized with a reddish metallic gloss may be used. Alternatively, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used, the metallic gloss part 1110e on the back of the panel board that is visually recognized with a silver color may be used. Even in this case, since the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic gloss part 1110e on the back of the panel board are the same in terms of metallic gloss, the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic gloss part 1110e on the back of the panel board can be visually recognized as one.

The panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to emit light in a predetermined color, and the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be introduced from below the panel board 1110. FIG. 267(d) is a cross-sectional view showing the state in which the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided. For example, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to emit white or yellow light. The light emission mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the panel board back metallic gloss part 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized by the metallic gloss, and as a result, the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the example shown, the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced from below the panel plate 1110, but a specific light emitting means for emitting light forward may be arranged behind the panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h or the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e to illuminate the panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h or the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e from behind. By thinning the thickness of the panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h or the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e or by increasing the amount of light irradiated forward from the specific light emitting means, the panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h or the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, which are formed in a thin film shape, can be made to pass forward by the light irradiated from the specific light emitting means, and the panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h or the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e can be made to be in a decorative state by the light irradiated from the specific light emitting means.

The embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to Figures 259 to 262 may be employed in members or parts in other embodiments that diffusely reflect light (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). Similarly, the embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e described with reference to Figures 263 to 267 may be employed in members or parts having metallic gloss in other embodiments (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b). Also, the embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h described with reference to Figure 267 may be employed in members or parts in other embodiments that are visible in a bright color.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 263 and 267, a manufacturing method may be adopted in which the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is plated, printed, or otherwise processed, and then the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel board 1110. This is because if the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is plated, printed, or otherwise processed, after the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel board 1110, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a may be plated or the ink used for printing may adhere to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, thereby degrading the aesthetic appearance of the panel board 1110. However, if a specific light emitting means for emitting light forward is placed at the rear of the panel board 1110, which is manufactured using a method in which the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is plated, printed, or otherwise processed, and then the panel board 1110 is provided with the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the light may leak forward from the gap between the rear end of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a and the obstacle nail tip 1201e, causing the player to see the light leaking out from the rear end of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a in a circular ring shape, which may result in a poor aesthetic appearance. Means for solving this problem are shown below.

Figure 268 shows an embodiment which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 267, in which a panel board rear substrate 2420 is installed behind the panel board 1110, and the panel board rear substrate light-emitting unit 2425 provided on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 illuminates the panel board rear bright color viewing portion 1110h from behind.
Fig. 268(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Fig. 268(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by oblique projection. Fig. 268(c) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Fig. 268(a). Fig. 268(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection.

The panel board rear board 2420 is composed of a white printed circuit board on the front and rear. A plurality of panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 are provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420. The panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes that are surface mounted as light sources on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420. The direction of light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 is the normal direction of the panel board rear board 2420, and the light is emitted vertically forward.

As shown in FIG. 268, in this embodiment, a decoratively shaped panel board bright back viewing portion 1110h is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and a panel board rear substrate 2420 having the same external shape as the panel board bright back viewing portion 1110h is provided behind the panel board bright back viewing portion 1110h. In addition, by illuminating the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the panel board bright back viewing portion 1110h from behind. The life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, left guide nail 1232, and the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 are provided in positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front.

By configuring it in this way, the bright color visible portion (e.g., the panel board rear bright color visible portion 1110h) can be decorated with light from a light source (e.g., the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425) located at the rear. Furthermore, the amount of light leaking forward from the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a can be reduced, making it possible to suppress the deterioration of the aesthetic appearance that occurs when the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is visually perceived as a ring by the player.

A light-emitting diode that irradiates light toward the side of the mounting surface may be used as the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425. In this case, the light emitted from the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 is irradiated in a direction parallel to the panel board rear board 2420, so that it is possible to irradiate the entire panel board rear board 2420 with light, and it is possible to prevent unevenness in the amount of light irradiation on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420.

The embodiment of the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIG. 268 may be adopted in the panel board rear substrate 2420 in other embodiments or in the white substrate on which the light-emitting diodes are mounted.

Although an example of the bright-colored visible portion 1110h on the back of the panel board is shown, this configuration may be adopted not only for decorations that are visible in a bright color, but also for decorative portions that are provided in a thin film on the back of the panel board. In particular, black/dark decorative portions are more noticeable when light leaks forward than white/bright decorative portions, but even in this case, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the aesthetic appearance. Note that when multiple decorative portions are provided, including relatively bright decorative portions and relatively dark decorative portions, it is preferable to provide the decorative portion that is closer to a bright color in a position that overlaps with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. With this configuration, it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the aesthetic appearance that occurs when the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is visible to the player as a ring shape.

In the above example, the back surface of the panel board 1110 is provided with a diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b) that diffusely reflects light, a metallic gloss portion that is visible with a metallic gloss (e.g., the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e), or a bright color visible portion that is visible with a bright color (e.g., the panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h), making the whitened portion HKB around the obstructing nail 1201 less noticeable. Below, an embodiment is described with reference to FIG. 269 in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 is modified to provide a panel board rear decorative member 2410 that diffusely reflects light, is visible with a metallic gloss, or is visible with a bright color, close to the back surface of the panel board 1110.

Figure 269(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 269(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 269(a). Figure 269(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. Figure 269(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is disposed behind the panel board 1110. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm thick, and has a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting or matte finishing on the front side. The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a diffusely reflects ambient light and is visually recognized as a whitish color. The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 because, compared to when it is provided on the rear surface, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be positioned closer to the whitened portion HKB, and can be visually recognized as more integrated with the whitened portion HKB.

The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is configured to be located behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left guide nails 1232 in the panel board 1110.

In this way, a decorative member (such as the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board) equipped with a diffuse reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) is positioned behind the obstacle nails 1201 planted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 on the transparent plate portion (the panel board 1110), so that the diffuse reflection portion, which is visible in white, makes the whitened portion HKB near the planting site of the obstacle nail 1201 less noticeable. In addition, by providing a diffuse reflection portion on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the diffuse reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB can be made closer, so that the diffuse reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB can be more easily viewed as one unit. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the front surface of the diffuse reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) of the decorative member (such as the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board) may be metal-plated to form an uneven metallic gloss portion.

As shown in FIG. 269(d), the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to irradiate the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light of a predetermined color (e.g., white or yellow), and the irradiated light may be reflected by the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may also be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be visually perceived as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Referring to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind the panel board 1110. However, referring to FIG. 270, an embodiment modified to have a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b instead of the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is described.

Figure 270(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 270(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 270(a). Figure 270(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection. Figure 270(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is disposed behind the panel board 1110. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm thick, and has a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the front side, which is formed by plating processing. The panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b diffusely reflects ambient light, and is visible with a metallic gloss. Even with this configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 270(d), the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to irradiate the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the introduced light may be reflected by the metallic gloss part 2410b of the panel board rear decorative member. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may also be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the metallic gloss part 2410b of the panel board rear decorative member and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized as one unit with metallic gloss, and as a result, the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable.

With reference to Figure 269, an example is shown in which a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind the panel board 1110. However, with reference to Figure 271, an embodiment is described in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b in addition to the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

Figure 271(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 271(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 271(a). Figure 271(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. Figure 271(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is disposed behind the panel board 1110. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm thick, and has a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting processing and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b formed by plating processing on the front side. The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a diffuses ambient light and is visually recognized as a whitish color. The panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b diffuses ambient light and is visually recognized as a metallic gloss.

In this way, by positioning a decorative member (such as the rear panel decorative member 2410) with a diffuse reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear panel decorative member) and a metallic gloss portion (such as the metallic gloss portion 2410b of the rear panel decorative member) behind the obstacle nail 1201, the diffuse reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized as one unit, and the metallic gloss portion and the metallic obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one unit, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the decorative member (such as the rear panel decorative member 2410) may be subjected to a lens cutting process and a portion of it may be plated to form an uneven metallic gloss portion (the metallic gloss portion 2410b of the rear panel decorative member).

As shown in FIG. 271(d), the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to irradiate light onto the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the irradiated light may be reflected by the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the metallic gloss portion (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic gloss, and the diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b were provided on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, but an embodiment modified so that at least one of the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to FIG. 272.

Figures 272(a) to 272(c) are A-A cross-sectional views showing modified examples of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 271(b). Figure 272(a) shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has been modified to have the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the rear side and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the front side. Figure 272(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has been modified to have the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front side and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the rear side. Figure 272(c) shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has been modified to have both the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the rear side. Note that although only cross-sectional views are shown in Figures 272(a) to 272(c), when viewed from the front, as shown in Figure 271(a), the shape is decorative. This also applies to other embodiments that show embodiments with reference to cross-sectional views.

In this way, by arranging the diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) and the metallic gloss portion (e.g., the metallic gloss portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board) at a distance in the front-to-rear direction, the decorative member (e.g., the rear decorative member of the panel board 2410) is perceived as having a three-dimensional shape with a sense of depth, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 271 and 272, the area where the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is formed may be configured as the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, and the area where the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is formed may be configured as the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 272(a) and 272(b), the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b were provided on the front side and rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, respectively. However, an embodiment modified so that multiple panel board rear decorative member rough surface portions 2410a are provided, or multiple panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portions 2410b are provided on both the front side and rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to Figure 273.

Figures 273(a) and 273(b) are A-A cross-sectional views showing a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 272(a). Figure 273(a) shows an embodiment in which the rear panel decorative member 2410 has been modified to have rear panel decorative member rough surface portions 2410a on both the front and rear sides. Figure 273(b) shows an embodiment in which the rear panel decorative member 2410 has been modified to have rear panel decorative member metallic gloss portions 2410b on both the front and rear sides.

In this way, by arranging multiple diffuse reflection portions (rough surface portion 2410a of rear decorative member of panel board) at a distance in the front-to-rear direction, the multiple diffuse reflection portions, which are seen in white, are seen three-dimensionally, which enhances the visual unity between the multiple diffuse reflection portions and the whitened portion HKB, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Also, by arranging multiple metallic gloss portions (metallic gloss portion 2410b of rear decorative member of panel board) at a distance in the front-to-rear direction, the multiple metallic gloss portions are seen three-dimensionally, which enhances the visual unity between the multiple metallic gloss portions and the obstruction nail 1201, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 272 and 273, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b provided on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b provided on the rear surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are arranged so as not to overlap when viewed from the front, but they may be modified so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front, and an embodiment modified in this way is shown below.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figure 269, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a was provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, but an embodiment modified so that the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to Figures 274(a) to 274(e).

274(a) to 274(e) are cross-sectional views taken along the line A-A of a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269A(a). FIG. 274(a) shows an embodiment modified so that a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. FIG. 274(b) shows an embodiment modified so that a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided only on a portion of the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. FIG. 274(c) shows an embodiment modified so that a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a portion of the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. Figure 274 (d) shows an embodiment modified so that a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a portion of the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. Figure 274 (e) shows an embodiment modified so that a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided only on a portion of the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410.

By adopting such a configuration, at least one of the diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) or the metallic gloss portion (e.g., the metallic gloss portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board) is located behind the whitened portion HKB when viewed from the front, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. In particular, when the metallic gloss portion (e.g., the metallic gloss portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board) is located behind the diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) as shown in Figures 274(a), 274(d), and 274(e), the diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) is not irradiated with light from the game board side performance display device 1600 or other light-emitting decorative components from behind, so that the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board can be seen as whiter.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 272 to 274, only cross-sectional views are shown, but the shape of the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b in these embodiments when viewed from the front may be the shape as viewed from the front in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 271. In this case, the boundary between the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is visually recognized as a decorative shape that resembles a mountain range.

With reference to Figure 269, an example is shown in which a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind the panel board 1110. However, with reference to Figure 275, an embodiment modified so that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 itself is made of milky white resin will be described.

Figure 275(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 275(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 275(a). Figure 275(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. Figure 275(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin is disposed behind the panel board 1110. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is visible as a milky white color.

In this way, when a bright-colored visible portion (e.g., rear panel decorative member 2410) is arranged behind a transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable without subjecting the rear panel decorative member 2410 to processing such as lens cutting or plating.

The front surface of the rear panel decorative member 2410 may be configured to have a rear panel decorative member rough surface portion 2410a as shown in the other embodiments. This configuration can make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

In addition, instead of placing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin behind the obstacle nail 1201, a translucent or opaque panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of light-colored (white, yellow, flesh color, etc.) synthetic resin may be configured to be placed behind the obstacle nail 1201.

As shown in FIG. 275(d), the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to irradiate light to the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the irradiated light may be reflected forward by the panel board rear decorative member 2410. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may also be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 can be visually perceived as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Also, a light-colored printed portion or a light-colored sticker may be attached to the front of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, which is made of a dark-colored synthetic resin (black, navy blue, etc.) and is visible as translucent or opaque. Such light-colored printed portions or stickers may be positioned behind the obstacle nails 1201. A predetermined decorative shape (for example, a decorative shape of multiple rows of mountains as shown in FIG. 271) may be created using such light-colored printed portions or stickers. Or, part of the predetermined decorative shape may be created using printed portions or stickers with a metallic luster.

With reference to Figure 269, an example is shown in which a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind the panel board 1110. However, with reference to Figure 276, an embodiment modified so that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is made of metal itself will be described.

Figure 276(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 276(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 276(a). Figure 276(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection. Figure 276(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of a metal plate is disposed behind the panel board 1110. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm thick. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is visible with a metallic luster. The metal constituting the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be a metal such as stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. In addition, the metal constituting the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be a metal that is visible in a similar color to the material of the obstacle nail 1201.

Also, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be formed by bending a metal plate material into an accordion shape or by deforming it into a predetermined decorative shape using a mold. In this case, it is preferable to process the metal plate material so that it has depth in the front-to-rear direction. With this configuration, the decorative member (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member 2410) that is visually recognized with a metallic luster is visually recognized by the player with a sense of unevenness, and the decorative member (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member 2410) and the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as a more integrated unit. Also, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be visually recognized with a metallic luster having a predetermined color (e.g., copper, gold) by providing a transparent top coat portion with a predetermined color (e.g., red, yellow) on the front surface of the stainless steel flat plate.

As shown in FIG. 276(d), the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to irradiate light onto the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the irradiated light may be reflected on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may also be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the decorative member (e.g., the panel board rear decorative member 2410) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized by the metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 268, an example was shown in which the panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 illuminates the panel board rear bright color viewing unit 1110h from behind, but an embodiment modified so as not to have the panel board rear bright color viewing unit 1110h will be described with reference to FIG. 277.

Figure 277(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 277(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 using an oblique projection method. Figure 277(c) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 277(a). Figure 277(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420, which is made of a white printed circuit board, is configured to be directly visible through the panel board 1110. Even with this configuration, the panel board rear board 2420, which is visible in white, can make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. It is preferable to use light-colored light-emitting diodes mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420. It is also preferable to mount dark-colored elements (ICs that control the light-emitting diodes, drivers that drive the light-emitting diodes, etc.) on the rear surface of the panel board rear board 2420, or in a position that does not overlap with the obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 when viewed from the front. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the dark-colored elements and the whitened portion HKB are viewed in close proximity to each other, making the whitened portion HKB more noticeable.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting diode that emits light to the side may be used as the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425. In this case, it is possible to emit light from the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 all over the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG. 278.

Figure 278(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 278(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 278(a). Figure 278(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut treatment applied to the front surface is disposed behind the obstruction nail 1201, and further behind that is disposed a white panel board rear board 2420 having a panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425. With this configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, especially when the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In this embodiment, the light irradiated from the rear panel board light emitting portion 2425 is reflected between the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, which is capable of diffusely reflecting light, and the panel board rear 2420, which is made of a white printed circuit board. This results in the light being irradiated uniformly over the entire panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, making it possible to increase the efficiency of use of the light irradiated from the panel board rear light emitting portion 2425.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278 will be described with reference to FIG. 279.

Figure 279(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 279(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 279(a). Figure 279(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201, and a white panel board rear board 2420 having a panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is arranged behind it. The front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is composed of a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and a panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. The light irradiated from the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is irradiated forward through the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. On the other hand, when the light irradiated from the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is irradiated to the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, the light is reflected backward on the back surface of the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, the light returns to the white panel board rear board 2420, and finally, it is irradiated forward through the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

With this configuration, the metallic gloss portion 2410b of the rear panel board decorative member and the obstruction nail 1201 can be seen as one unit, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear panel board decorative member located behind the whitened portion HKB and the white rear panel board substrate 2420.

In addition, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 271 to 274 may be used as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 279.

In addition, the light emission mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 described above may be adopted as the light emission mode of the panel board rear board 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 278 and 279.

In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 278 and 279, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be formed as an integrated decorative unit.

The panel board rear board 2420 may be configured to have elements (such as an IC that controls the light-emitting diode, a driver that drives the light-emitting diode, etc.) for controlling or driving the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 mounted at a position that overlaps with the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b in a front view. In this case, these elements will be located behind the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. Note that dark colored elements may be used as such elements.

With this configuration, even if a statically charged game ball flows over the surface of the game board 5, causing a discharge at a predetermined position and generating an electromagnetic pulse, it is possible to reduce the effect of the electromagnetic pulse on these elements located behind the metallic gloss part 2410b of the rear panel board decorative member. In addition, since they will no longer be visible adjacent to the obstruction nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened part HKB less noticeable. Note that instead of mounting these elements on the front surface of the rear panel board substrate 2420, it is also possible to configure the elements to be mounted on the rear surface of the rear panel board substrate 2420. In this case as well, the same effect will be achieved.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 277 to 279, a panel board rear board 2420 equipped with a panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 is located behind the obstacle nail 1201. Therefore, it is possible to directly illuminate the area around the obstacle nail 1201 with a stronger amount of light than the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 described with reference to Figure 259 etc.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 277 to FIG. 279, when the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is made to emit a predetermined color (for example, white, red, yellow) and a strong amount of light, the panel board rear board 2420 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 can be made to be visible in the predetermined color, and the whitened portion HKB can also be made to be visible in the predetermined color. In addition, the obstruction nail 1201 having a metallic luster is also made to be visible in a predetermined color, not in the original color of the metal constituting the obstruction nail 1201, by mirror-reflecting the light from the panel board rear board 2420 located at the rear (particularly in the obstruction nail first body portion 1201b). With this configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable. Note that when the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is made to emit a strong amount of light in this way, each embodiment applied to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be applied to the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 to emit light in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined light emission timing.

The light of the specified color from the rear panel board 2420 does not reach the front of the obstruction nail head 1201a, which is part of the obstruction nail 1201. In that case, as described above, it is advisable to irradiate the front of the obstruction nail head 1201a with light of the same color as the specified color by a component located in front of the obstruction nail 1201, such as the door frame right side unit 550. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the front of the obstruction nail head 1201a from being conspicuous.

The color of the metallic gloss part 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board and the color of the light emitted by the rear board light emitting part 2425 of the panel board may be made to correspond to each other to produce a light-emitting effect, and the light-emitting state may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, in the case of an effect in which the degree of expectation is relatively high, it is preferable to configure the rear board light emitting part 2425 of the panel board to emit light in a color similar to the color of the metallic gloss part 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board. Also, in the case of an effect in which the degree of expectation is relatively low, it is preferable to configure the rear board light emitting part 2425 of the panel board to emit light in a color different from the color of the metallic gloss part 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board.

For example, in the case where a metallic glossy portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board that is visually recognized as gold is provided, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear board light-emitting portion 2425 to emit yellow light as an effect with a relatively high expectation. Also, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear board light-emitting portion 2425 to emit blue light as an effect with a relatively low expectation. With such a configuration, in an effect with a relatively high expectation, the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board and the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board that is in a decorated state due to the light of a predetermined color (a color similar to that of the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board) emitted from the rear board light-emitting portion 2425 of the panel board are visually recognized as one unit by the player, and further, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as one unit by the player because it is in a decorated state due to the same color as the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board. This makes it possible to prevent the whitened portion HKB from being seen, which can dampen the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot that had been excited by the relatively high-expectation presentation. Furthermore, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b are seen as one unit in similar colors, which can provide a visual impact to the player. Specifically, areas that were previously perceived as separate areas are now perceived as one unit, and the area appears visually larger.

In addition, when a metallic gloss part 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board that is visible with a silver metallic gloss is provided, the light color of the rear board light-emitting part 2425 of the panel board in a performance with a relatively high expectation may be configured to be white instead of yellow. Similarly, when a metallic gloss part 2410b of the rear decorative member of the panel board that is visible with a reddish metallic gloss is provided, the light color of the rear board light-emitting part 2425 of the panel board in a performance with a relatively high expectation may be configured to be red instead of yellow.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figs. 277 to 278, the panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 provided on the panel board rear board 2420 may be configured to be arranged around the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. For example, two panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 may be arranged facing each other (at 180 degrees) across the obstacle nail 1201, or three panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 may be arranged around the obstacle nail 1201, shifted by 120 degrees each. In Figs. 277(a) and 278(a), three panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 are provided around the jump nail 1231 on the left side in front view and the obstacle nail 1201 on the rightmost side of the left guide nail 1232, so that they are illuminated evenly from the periphery.

With this configuration, it is possible to thoroughly irradiate the first obstacle nail body 1201b, the helical obstacle nail body 1201c, and the second obstacle nail body 1201d, which constitute the obstacle nail 1201, with light of a predetermined color from all around. On the other hand, if only one panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 is arranged around the obstacle nail 1201, a portion where the light from the panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 is difficult to reach will occur on the opposite side of the obstacle nail 1201 to the side where the panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 is provided, and the aesthetic appearance of the obstacle nail 1201 will be impaired. This tendency is particularly noticeable in the case of the components located at the rear (panel board rear decorative component 2410, panel board rear 2420) that are visually recognized in white, as in this embodiment. In addition, when irradiating light from multiple panel board rear board light emitting units 2425, it is preferable to make the light emitting mode of each panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 the same. For example, it is advisable to configure multiple panel board rear board light emitting units 2425 so that they all light up in the same specified color (white, red, yellow, etc.).

With reference to Figures 259 to 279, an example is shown in which the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, the panel board rear substrate 2420, etc. are arranged behind the panel board 1110. In addition to these, the area cover member 2600a described with reference to Figure 225 etc. may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the area cover member 2600a may be configured to have at least one of a diffuse reflection portion similar to the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, a bright color visible portion, and a metallic gloss portion similar to the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Furthermore, to avoid impeding the visibility of the rolling game ball, these rough surface parts and metallic gloss parts should be formed in a band shape with a width less than the diameter of the game ball, so that the rolling game ball is not completely hidden by these rough surface parts or metallic gloss parts.

These diffuse reflection portions and metallic gloss portions may be provided on the back surface of the glass plate 192, rather than on the area cover member 2600a. Alternatively, in an embodiment having multiple glass plates 192, these rough surface portions and metallic gloss portions may be provided between the glass plates 192.

The diffuse reflection portion or metallic gloss portion may be used to hide the vicinity of the tip of the obstructing nail 1201, so that when the vicinity of the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 is viewed from a specified angle, the vicinity of the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 is difficult or impossible to see.

In this manner, by providing a diffuse reflection portion, a bright color visible portion, and a metallic gloss portion in front of the whitened portion HKB, the obstructing nail 1201 is sandwiched between the metallic gloss portion located in front and the metallic gloss portion located in the rear, which makes it possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the obstructing nail 1201 and the metallic gloss portion. In addition, when the whitened portion HKB is viewed from a specified angle, the whitened portion HKB is hidden by the metallic gloss portion and diffuse reflection portion. Furthermore, even if the whitened portion HKB is in a visible position, it is sandwiched between the diffuse reflection portion and bright color visible portion located in the rear and the diffuse reflection portion and bright color visible portion located in the front, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Referring to Figures 268 to 279, an embodiment has been shown in which the whitened portion HKB is made less noticeable by arranging one or both of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 behind the panel board 1110, but one or both of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be moved or rotated as an effect. This movement effect may be configured to be executed by control of the peripheral control board 1510. This movement effect may also be configured to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. The drive mechanism for moving and rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

However, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are configured to be movable in this manner, there is a possibility that the whitened portion HKB, which was previously made less noticeable by the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 that were positioned in the standby position, will become noticeable when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move to the moving position. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming noticeable, the following embodiment may be adopted.

Figure 280 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 269. Figure 280 (a) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the standby position. Figure 280 (b) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. By moving from the standby position to the first moving position, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward on a surface parallel to the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front. Figure 280 (c) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second moving position, it moves a specified distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when a decorative member having a diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board) moves from a standby position to a first moving position during a moving performance, the obstruction nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board when viewed from the front, thereby maintaining a state in which the whitened portion HKB is not easily noticeable.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the first moving position, it is desirable that all of the obstacle nails 1201 can be maintained in a state where they overlap with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, but even if only some of the obstacle nails 1201 are positioned so as to overlap with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is not easily noticeable.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position, which is farther away than the first movement position, the impact on the player is greater due to the larger movement amount, but the obstacle nail 1201 shown in FIG. 280(c) and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 do not overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the frequency of the performance in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the first movement position and then returned to the standby position without moving to the second movement position, and the frequency of the performance in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the second movement position and then returned to the standby position to be higher. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the performance modes in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved, while reducing the frequency of occurrence of the situation in which the whitened portion HKB is noticeable.

When moving the rear panel decorative member 2410, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the lower panel light emitting board 2400 together. Alternatively, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 together. Then, when the rear panel decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, it is advisable to put the lower panel light emitting board 2400 or the rear panel board 2420 into a light emitting performance state.

In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 may be configured to have different light emitting states, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be in a light emitting performance state in which it is visible in a different light emitting state. In addition, in the game board side performance display device 1600, a special performance image may be displayed at the same time in response to this light emitting performance state. In addition, different performance images may be displayed when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position. It may be configured to represent one character or a single performance, etc., by the outer shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located in the first movement position or the second movement position and the special performance image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, as a special performance image, a rainy state or a snowy state may be displayed as a special performance image for the panel board rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. Additionally, each of these different presentation modes may be configured to suggest a different probability of winning.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the game board side performance display device 1600 located in the direction to which the rear panel decorative member 2410 has moved, so even if the rear panel decorative member 2410 has moved to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 no longer overlaps with the rear panel decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the whitened portion HKB.

Although an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 has been shown, it is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, and the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 268, 270 to 279 may also be modified in the same manner. Furthermore, the embodiment may be applied between modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269. Furthermore, the modification of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may also be applied to the panel board rear substrate 2420. In these cases as well, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Figure 281 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear base plate 2420 have been modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 278.

Figure 281 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 278 (a), showing the rear panel decorative member 2410 and rear panel substrate 2420 in the standby position.

Figure 281 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 278 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear base plate 2420 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front.

Figure 281 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 278 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear substrate 2420 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear substrate 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 so that only one of them moves from the standby position to the moving position at a certain timing, and to prevent both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 from moving to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to appear and disappear alternately in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, even if a moving performance is performed in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 is moved to a moving position, the obstacle nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 that has not moved in a front view, so that the whitened portion HKB can be maintained in an inconspicuous state. Although an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position has been shown, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the two panel board rear decorative members 2410 overlapping in the front-to-rear direction may be moved in the same manner. Also, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the two panel board rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-to-rear direction may be moved in the same manner. In addition, the front-to-rear positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be reversed, with the panel board rear substrate 2420 located in front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located in the rear, and they may be moved in the same way. Also, multiple decorative units consisting of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be stacked and placed, and they may be moved in the same way.

Figure 281 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 278 (a), showing both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move from the standby position to the moving position, they move a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so that they do not overlap with the obstruction nail 1201 when viewed from the front. In this case, there is a risk that the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the obstruction nail 1201 will be noticeable.

Therefore, when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be made to emit light in a specified light color, thereby putting the panel board rear decorative member 2410 into a light-emitting performance state. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 may simultaneously display a special performance image corresponding to this light-emitting performance state. A single character or the like may be represented by the outer shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located in the moving position and the special performance image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. Note that an aspect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 280 may be adopted.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the rear panel decorative member 2410, the rear panel board 2420, and the game board side performance display device 1600 located in the direction in which the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 have moved, so that even if the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 have moved to a moving position such that the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap with the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 when viewed from the front, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

Although an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278 has been shown, it is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278, and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 279 may also be modified in the same manner. Furthermore, the embodiment may be applied between modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278. In this case as well, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

A decorative member having a predetermined pattern or the like on the front surface and visible with a bright color or metallic luster may be provided behind the movable panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel board rear substrate 2420, at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view, and this decorative member may be configured to be visible when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. Note that a similar decorative means may be adopted even when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is not easily noticeable even when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position.

A drive mechanism (arm, pinion, rack, etc.) for driving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be provided behind the movable panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel board rear substrate 2420 at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view, instead of a decorative member. In this case, the drive mechanism is formed from a colorless transparent or white opaque synthetic resin, and when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move to the moving position and stop, the obstacle nail 1201 and a part of a predetermined shape (preferably a shape other than a flat shape, such as having bumps and recesses) in the drive mechanism are positioned at a position overlapping in a front view. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened part HKB is not noticeable. If the drive mechanism is formed from a black or dark synthetic resin, the whitened part HKB will be very noticeable. In this case, letters, patterns, etc. may be printed in white on the front of the drive mechanism so that they overlap the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. The flat cable or flexible board that transmits control signals and power from the peripheral control board 1510 to the panel board rear board 2420 may be white, and the obstacle nail 1201 and the flat cable or flexible board may be positioned so that they overlap in a front view when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear board 2420 moves to the moving position and stops. A similar configuration may be adopted when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is provided.

Figure 282 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has been modified to be movable in the front-rear direction in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 269. Figure 282 (a) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in a forward standby position. Figure 282 (b) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a rear moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a specified distance (5 mm) rearward from the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so as to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and may be configured to be able to be in a state where it is away from or close to the rear face of the panel board 1110. When the panel board 1110 is close to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable than when the panel board 1110 is far from the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420.

For example, as an effect indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be moved to a rearward moving position, changing the state so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are separated. During a given period in which the player is playing, the time during which the moving effect indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot is being executed (time when it is in the moving position) may be configured to be shorter than the time during which the moving effect indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot is not being executed (time when it is not in the moving position). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable during the time when the effect indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot is not being executed, which takes up a large portion of the playing time.

On the other hand, the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 282(b) may be the standby position, and the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 282(a) may be the moving position. In addition, during a predetermined period in which the player is playing the game, the time during which the performance indicating a high jackpot expectation is being performed (the time when it is located at the moving position) is shorter than the time during which the performance indicating a high jackpot expectation is not being performed (the time when it is not located at the moving position). In this case, as a performance indicating a high jackpot expectation, it is preferable to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 to the moving position forward, and change the state so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are closer to each other. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the whitened portion HKB when a moving performance with a high jackpot expectation is being performed, which spoils the player's interest that has been heightened by the moving performance with a high jackpot expectation.

Figure 283 shows an embodiment in which the front shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 269 has been modified to have depth in the front-to-rear direction, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has been modified to be movable in the up-down direction.

Figure 283 (a) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. Figure 283 (b) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are closer to each other in the front-to-back direction than when they were in the standby position, and are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front. Note that the parts with a deep shape should be configured so that they are visible as a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range when viewed from the front.

In this way, the front surface of the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board may be shaped to have a recessed portion and a protruding portion in the front-rear direction, and may be configured so that when the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board moves horizontally relative to the panel board 1110, the obstacle nail 1201 and the protruding portion move to a position where they overlap in a front view, and the movement of the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board may reduce the distance between the obstacle nail 1201 and the front surface of the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board. Note that the direction of movement of the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board is not limited to the up-down direction, and may be configured to move horizontally in the left-right direction or diagonally in a front view.

The time during which the effect indicating a high probability of winning is being performed (time when in the moving position) is shorter than the time during which the effect indicating a high probability of winning is not being performed (time when not in the moving position). In this case, as an effect indicating a high probability of winning, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 to an upward moving position, bringing the obstacle nail 1201 and the rear panel decorative member 2410 closer to each other. This configuration makes the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, and prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the whitened portion HKB when a moving effect with a high probability of winning is performed, which dampens the player's interest that has been heightened by the moving effect with a high probability of winning.

On the other hand, the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 283(b) may be the standby position, and the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 283(a) may be the moving position. For example, as an effect indicating a high jackpot expectation, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be moved to a lower moving position, and the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be changed to a state separated from each other. Note that the time during which the moving effect indicating a high jackpot expectation is being performed (time when it is located at the moving position) is shorter than the time during which the moving effect indicating a high jackpot expectation is not being performed (time when it is not located at the moving position). With this configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable during the time when the effect indicating a high jackpot expectation is not being performed, which occupies a large portion of the game time.

With reference to Figs. 282 and 283, an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 can be moved in the vertical and front-rear directions has been shown, but it may be configured to execute a vibration effect in which it is finely vibrated in the vertical or front-rear directions when it is in the moving position or the standby position. It may also be configured to indicate a high probability of a big win by the vibration effect. It may be configured so that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 vibrates within a range of about 3 mm to 5 mm. It may be configured so that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 maintains a state of overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front within the vibration range. With this configuration, the light reflection state of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 continues to change, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. It may be configured so that similar vibration effects can be executed in other embodiments as well, not limited to the embodiment described with reference to Figs. 282 and 283.

Figure 284 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 269 has been modified to be rotatable around the front-to-rear direction as a rotation axis. Figure 284 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. This shows the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the standby position. Figure 284 (b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. This shows the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in a position rotated approximately 45 degrees clockwise from the standby position.

The panel board rear decorative member 2410 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around the panel board rear decorative member rotation axis 2410c provided in the front-rear direction. It is preferable to configure it so that the rotation effect indicates a high probability of winning. It can also be stopped at a specified rotation angle, and the angle at which it stops can be configured to indicate the degree of probability of winning. In this embodiment, even when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is rotated, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left jump nail 1231 and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 continue to be always overlapped with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front.

By adopting such a configuration, even if the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the obstacle nail 1201 will continue to be in a positional relationship in which they overlap when viewed from the front, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB of these obstacle nails 1201 less noticeable. In addition, as a performance, it is preferable to maintain the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a rotated state rather than rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position by a predetermined angle and stopping it. In the case of such a configuration, a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is located behind the obstacle nail 1201 and a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstacle nail 1201 will alternately appear when viewed from the front, so that although a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstacle nail 1201 will temporarily appear, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable. In this case, the rotation speed and direction of the panel rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

Figure 285 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 269 has been modified to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. Figure 285 (a) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. Figure 282 (b) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 269 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. By rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates about 30 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front. Figure 282 (c) is a modified example of the cross-sectional view shown in Figure 282 (b), showing the state in which the game board side performance display device 1600 is located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be rotatable around the panel board rear decorative member rotation axis 2410c, and may be configured to be able to take a standby state parallel to the panel board 1110 and a moving state that is not parallel. In addition, it is preferable to configure the operation of moving to the moving state to be executable as a performance indicating a high probability of winning. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the moving position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and to configure it so that the degree of the expectation of winning is suggested by the rotation angle. In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, it is preferable to configure it so that light from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is directly incident on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 as shown in FIG. 285 (c). In this case, the light irradiated from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is diffused by the panel board rear decorative member 2410, so that the existence of the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable. Furthermore, if the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is to flash a specified image at a specified cycle, it is possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

In addition, the light may be emitted not only from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but also from another component capable of emitting light onto the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 rotated a predetermined angle.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, which is originally tilted or has become tilted, may be configured to be directly illuminated with white light indicating a high probability of a jackpot by the game board side performance display device 1600 or other light-emitting decorative members. In this case, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable than when illuminated in another color. Note that if brass obstacle nails 1201 are used, they may be illuminated in yellow instead of white.

Figure 286 (a) is a cross-sectional view illustrating an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Figure 285 (c) by providing a light guide plate 2460 between the panel board 1110 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side performance display device 1600. Also, Figure 286 (b) is a cross-sectional view illustrating an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown in Figure 286 (a) by providing the game board side performance display device 1600 behind the obstacle nail 1201.

In this embodiment, a light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110. The light guide plate 2460 is a flat plate-like member formed from a colorless and transparent resin, and a light guide plate uneven portion 2460a formed by fine unevenness is provided on a portion of either the front or rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 2460 is 2 mm. The light guide plate uneven portion 2460a as a whole is visually recognized as a predetermined decorative shape such as a predetermined character, design, or pattern. A predetermined light emitting portion is provided to introduce light from the side of the light guide plate 2460. The light emitting portion is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

When light is not introduced from a specific light-emitting portion into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 appears colorless and transparent, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the light guide plate 2460 can be seen. In addition, since the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is fine, the specific shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is not visible to the player, or is difficult to see. On the other hand, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460 from the side, the introduced light is diffused at the uneven portion, so the specific shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a can be seen by the player as emitting light in the color of the introduced light.

In this embodiment, the obstacle nail 1201 and the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a, which is visible in a predetermined shape when viewed from the front, are positioned so as to overlap when viewed from the front. When white light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the whitened portion HKB are visible as one unit, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. When yellow light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 are visible as one unit, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. It is preferable to configure the light guide plate 2460 to be configured so that an effect is executed in which light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, as an effect suggesting a high probability of winning.

The panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the light guide plate 2460. In this case, even when no light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the rear can make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Furthermore, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the position closer to the obstructing nail 1201 can be made to emit white or yellow light, making the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

The light guide plate 2460 may be configured so that a predetermined shape formed by the uneven portion 2460a is visible to the player when no light is introduced from a predetermined light emitting portion to the light guide plate 2460. In this case, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a may be configured so that ambient light is diffusely reflected and is perceived as white. In such a configuration, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a, which is visible as a predetermined shape provided on the light guide plate 2460, can make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 286(b), the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be located behind the panel board 1110 at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. A white image may be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a position overlapping with the part where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a front view. The white image allows the white image and the whitened part HKB to be viewed as one unit, making the whitened part HKB less noticeable. A yellow image may also be displayed. When a yellow image is displayed, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 are viewed as one unit, making the whitened part HKB less noticeable. It is preferable to display a white image or a yellow image as a performance that suggests a high probability of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, a light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is positioned behind the light guide plate 2460, and the obstacle nail 1201, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a that is visually recognized as a predetermined shape provided on the light guide plate 2460, and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be positioned so as to overlap when viewed from the front.

When the light guide plate 2460 is in a non-emitting state, a yellow or white image can be displayed in a position that overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in an emitting state, white light may be used as the color of light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and a white image may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in an emitting state, yellow light may be used as the color of light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and a yellow image may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in an emitting state, yellow or white light may be introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and a black image may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Even when these configurations are adopted, the light guide plate 2460, the game board side performance display device 1600, and the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one unit, and the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable. In the embodiment described with reference to Figs. 280 to 286, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a may be transformed into the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b. In addition, the aspect shown in the embodiment described with reference to Figs. 280 to 286 may be applied to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to Figs. 269 to 277. In addition, the performance such as display, movement, and light emission in various members that can display, move, and emit light, such as the game board side performance display device 1600, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the light guide plate 2460, may be configured to be executed by the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on the special lottery result. In addition, the performance suggesting the likelihood of a big win executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the special lottery result may be configured to start at least before all of the decorative symbols have stopped. The performance suggesting the likelihood of a big win may end before all of the decorative symbols have stopped, or may be configured to end a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) after all of the decorative symbols have stopped.

As mentioned above, when brass nails 1201 are installed in the panel board 1110, a whitened area HKB may develop around the nails 1201 and gradually expand over a long period of operation at the amusement arcade. The whitened area HKB reduces the aesthetic appearance and hinders players' interest.

On the other hand, gaming establishments desire to know the long-term operating status of the pachinko machine 1 in advance. This is because if the pachinko machine 1 is operated in a gaming establishment for a long period of time, the possibility of malfunction or damage occurring in various components that make up the pachinko machine 1 increases. The gaming machine may be equipped with dedicated hardware for measuring operating time (for example, JP 2012-200434 A), but in this case, there is a problem that the price of the gaming machine becomes high. Also, although it is possible to grasp the accumulated operating time by installing a hall computer that tallys up the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 in the gaming establishment, it is necessary to introduce an expensive hall computer and to operate the hall computer to obtain the operating history of the gaming machine. Also, when a gaming establishment purchases a used gaming machine, it is difficult to know the accumulated operating time up to that point.

Then, in the embodiment shown below, we will explain a pachinko machine 1 that makes it difficult for players to notice the occurrence of the whitened part HKB, and that has an inexpensive configuration that allows game parlor staff to easily understand the operating status of the pachinko machine 1.

Figure 287 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 259. Specifically, a panel board front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

Figure 287(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 287(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 287(a). Figure 287(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. Figure 287(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the panel board front decorative member 2450.

In this embodiment, a panel board front decorative member 2450 made of colored (specifically blue) opaque synthetic resin is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 in a shape surrounding the obstacle nail 1201. Specifically, after the panel board front decorative member 2450 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110. The obstacle nail 1201 may be made of stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. The panel board front decorative member 2450 is provided with a panel board front decorative member through hole 2450a for passing the obstacle nail 1201 through. The panel board front decorative member 2450 has a decorative outer shape.

As shown in FIG. 287(a), when viewed from the front, it is impossible to visually recognize the portions of all of the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 that are located inside the panel board 1110.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 287(c), when viewed from a certain angle (diagonally from above right in the figure; similar to other embodiments), it is possible to visually confirm the portion of a specific obstructing nail 1201 (in this example, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left among the left-side guide nails 1232) located inside the panel board 1110. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

By adopting such a configuration, the whitened area HKB that occurs on the panel board 1110 is difficult for the player to see, so even if a whitened area HKB occurs or the whitened area HKB that occurs expands, the player is unlikely to notice that the whitened area HKB has occurred, which prevents the player from becoming an obstacle to improving their interest.

On the other hand, the panel plate 1110 is configured to allow the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 to be viewed from a predetermined direction. This allows the gaming establishment to view the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 from a predetermined angle through the glass plate 192 with the game board 5' attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 closed, without opening the door frame 3 or removing the game board 5'. It is then possible to check the occurrence status of the whitened part HKB around the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201, specifically whether or not the whitened part HKB has occurred, and if the whitened part HKB has occurred, its size, etc., and it is possible to carry out maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1, order replacement parts, prepare a pachinko machine 1 to be installed instead, and take other measures in advance before a malfunction or damage occurs in the pachinko machine 1. It should be noted that while it is possible to observe a particular obstructing nail 1201 while the power is on to the pachinko machine 1, it is preferable to do so while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is off.

The value of the kinetic energy of the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 gradually decreases as the game ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and rises, and instead the value of the potential energy gradually increases. When the game ball passes through the part where the backflow prevention member 1007 is provided and reaches the upper part of the game area 5a, the value of the kinetic energy of the game ball is smaller than when it was launched, while the value of the potential energy of the game ball is larger than when it was launched. From this state, the game ball falls through the area in the game area 5a where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted. Therefore, as it moves toward the bottom of the board, the value of the kinetic energy of the rolling game ball increases again, while the value of the potential energy decreases. For this reason, the whitened part HKB is likely to occur especially near the obstacle nails 1201 planted near the bottom of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, there is a risk that the obstacle nails 1201 may be subject to unauthorized adjustments in order to change the winning rate of game balls entering the winning holes. In such cases, obstacle nails 1201 planted close to the winning holes are particularly likely to be the target of unauthorized adjustments. Therefore, whitened areas HKB are also likely to occur around the tips of obstacle nails 1201 planted close to the winning holes.

In this embodiment, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 provided near the first starting hole 2002 located at the bottom of the board is viewed from a predetermined angle. Note that a similar configuration may be adopted not only for the left guide nail 1232 but also for the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and right guide nail 1233, so that the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle.

In addition, in the left guide nail 1232, the game ball does not fall downward between the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232, but rolls toward the lower right as if sliding along the upper surface of the left guide nail 1232. The game ball that rolls in this manner may collide with the jump nail 1231 on the left side with increased momentum. For this reason, it is desirable to configure the jump nail 1231 on the left side in particular so that the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a specified angle.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 225, a guide nail is provided at the upper left of the left guide nail 1232, which is composed of multiple obstacle nails 1201, similar to the left guide nail 1232. The game ball also slides on the upper surface of this guide nail and rolls toward the lower right (the game ball does not fall between the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the guide nail. On the other hand, the game ball may fall between this guide nail and the left guide nail 1232). Therefore, among the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232, the obstacle nail 1201 located on the left side may be hit by a game ball with increased momentum. In particular, the obstacle nail 1201 provided on the left side may be hit by a game ball with increased momentum. For this reason, in this embodiment, the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232 are configured so that the occurrence status of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle. As mentioned above, areas where the obstruction nail 1201 is planted in close proximity to the left guide nail 1232 are areas where whitening areas HKB are likely to occur.

Referring to FIG. 287(c), an example is shown in which a specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed from diagonally above to the right, but the angle at which the specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed can vary depending on the relationship between the position at which the specific obstacle nail 1201 is planted and the shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450. For example, of the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232, the second obstacle nail 1201 from the right is easier to view around the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from diagonally above to the left.

The panel board front decorative member 2450 is preferably provided so that the peripheral area of the tip of a particular obstructing nail 1201 can be seen from an angle of about 30 to 60 degrees (the angle of incidence when the glass plate 192 is viewed from the front) at which the obstructing nail 1201 can be seen. This is because, when attempting to see from an angle close to horizontal to the glass plate 192, the ambient light is totally reflected and reflected on the glass plate 192, making it difficult to see the peripheral area of the tip of the particular obstructing nail 1201. Also, on the panel board 1110, in addition to the ambient light, the particular obstructing nail 1201 being observed is also reflected, making it difficult to see the peripheral area of the tip of the particular obstructing nail 1201.

Although it is somewhat cumbersome, when the door frame 3 is open and the main frame 4 is closed, and the game board 5' is viewed while attached to the main frame 4, the glass plate 192 does not obstruct visibility at a position closer to the panel plate 1110 than when the door frame 3 is closed, and it is possible to view the area around the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201.

A panel board front decorative member 2450 may be provided so that the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is not visible through the panel board 1110 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visible through the panel board 1110 when the door frame 3 is open. Alternatively, a panel board front decorative member 2450 may be provided so that the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is difficult to see through the panel board 1110 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is easily visible through the panel board 1110 when the door frame 3 is open.

This configuration makes it more difficult for players to notice that the whitened areas HKB have occurred. In addition, it is possible to check the occurrence of the whitened areas HKB simply by opening the door frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 287(d), the end of the panel board front decorative member 2450 may be beveled. This configuration increases the strength of the panel board front decorative member 2450, and prevents a game ball from colliding with the panel board front decorative member 2450 and damaging the panel board front decorative member 2450.

With reference to Figure 287, an example of providing a panel board front decorative member 2450 on the front surface of the panel board 1110 has been shown, but with reference to Figure 288, an embodiment in which the panel board front decorative member 2450 is modified to be composed of a panel board front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and a panel board front decorative member opaque portion 2454 will be described.

Figure 288(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 288(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 288(a). Figure 288(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is composed of a panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 made of colorless transparent synthetic resin that allows the rear to be seen, and a panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 made of colored (specifically blue) opaque synthetic resin that prevents the rear from being seen. In addition, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 have decorative shapes.

As shown in FIG. 288(a), when viewed from the front, it is impossible to see the parts of all of the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 that are located inside the panel board 1110.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 288(c), when viewed from a certain angle, it is possible to visually confirm the portion of a specific obstructing nail 1201 (in this example, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left among the left-side guide nails 1232) located inside the panel board 1110 through the colorless transparent portion 2452 of the panel board front decorative member. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

With reference to Figure 287, an example is shown in which a panel board front decorative member 2450 made of colored opaque synthetic resin is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110. With reference to Figure 289, an embodiment is described in which the panel board front decorative member 2450 is modified to be made of colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 289(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 289(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 289(a). Figure 289(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), when viewed from the front, it is difficult to visually recognize the portions of all obstacle nails 1201 that make up the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 that are located inside the panel board 1110.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 289(c), when viewed from a certain angle, it is possible to visually confirm the portion of a specific obstructing nail 1201 (in this example, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left among the left-side guide nails 1232) located inside the panel board 1110. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

With reference to Figure 287, an example of providing a panel board front decorative member 2450 on the front surface of the panel board 1110 has been shown, but with reference to Figure 290, an embodiment in which the panel board front decorative member 2450 is modified to be composed of a panel board front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and a panel board front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 will be described.

Figure 290(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 290(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 290(a). Figure 290(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is composed of a panel board front decorative member colorless transparent part 2452 made of colorless transparent synthetic resin that allows the rear to be seen, and a panel board front decorative member colored transparent part 2456 made of colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin that makes it difficult to see the rear. In addition, the upper end of the panel board front decorative member colorless transparent part 2452 and the boundary between the panel board front decorative member colorless transparent part 2452 and the panel board front decorative member colored transparent part 2456 have decorative shapes.

As shown in FIG. 290(a), when viewed from the front, it is impossible to see the parts of all of the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 that are located inside the panel board 1110.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 290(c), when viewed from a certain angle, it is possible to visually confirm the portion of a specific obstructing nail 1201 (in this example, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left among the left-side guide nails 1232) located inside the panel board 1110 through the colorless transparent portion 2452 of the panel board front decorative member. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel board 1110.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the panel front decorative member 2450 may be configured to have a perfect circle shape, with a specific obstacle nail 1201 positioned at the center of the circle.

Figure 291 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel board 1110 in Figure 291 (a) is provided with a circular panel board front decorative member 2450, and the life nail 1230 is located at the center of the panel board front decorative member 2450.

The panel board front decorative member 2450 may be shaped like a right-angled triangle or a star. The panel board 1110 in FIG. 291(a) is provided with a star-shaped panel board front decorative member 2450 and a right-angled triangular panel board front decorative member 2450, with the left jump nail 1231 positioned at the center of the star-shaped panel board front decorative member 2450. Also, the right jump nail 1231 is positioned at the center of the right-angled triangular panel board front decorative member 2450. In this way, one panel board front decorative member 2450 may be provided in correspondence with one obstacle nail 1201.

It is also possible to provide a panel front decorative member 2450 for multiple obstruction nails 1201. The left guide nail 1232 shown in FIG. 291(a) is provided within one panel front decorative member 2450.

These shapes may be adopted not only for the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, but also for the shape of the opaque portion 2454 of the panel board front decorative member described with reference to FIG. 288, the shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 described with reference to FIG. 289, the shape of the colored transparent portion 2456 of the panel board front decorative member described with reference to FIG. 290, or for embodiments that have been modified from these.

This configuration increases the angle at which the area around the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201 can be viewed, making it possible to view the area around the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201 from various directions, such as above, below, to the right, and to the left.

In the above example, the panel front decorative member 2450 is shaped as a perfect circle, a right-angled triangle, a star, or the like, and a specific obstacle nail 1201 is placed at the center of the panel front decorative member 2450. However, the panel front decorative member 2450 may be configured to have a specific obstacle nail 1201 placed at a position offset from the center of the panel front decorative member 2450.

Figure 291 (b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, and shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 291 (a).

In FIG. 291(b), the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 on the left side is located below the center of the circular panel front decorative member 2450. The obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 on the right side is located below the center of the circular panel front decorative member 2450 and is positioned so as to protrude downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. The obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the left side is located below the center of the star-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 and is positioned so as to protrude downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. The obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the right side is located below the center of the right-angled triangular panel front decorative member 2450 and is positioned so as to contact the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. Additionally, the obstacle nails 1201 planted as the left guide nails 1232 are positioned so that they protrude diagonally downward and to the left from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450.

As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are located at the bottom of the board. Therefore, the player will see these nails and the panel board front decorative member 2450 from diagonally above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is biased toward the upper side for a specific obstacle nail 1201. With this configuration, it is possible to more freely position the panel board front decorative member 2450 while making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Note that the player will see the left guide nail 1232 from diagonally above and to the right. Therefore, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is biased toward the upper side and to the right for the left guide nail 1232. With this configuration, it is possible to more freely position the panel board front decorative member 2450 while making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

A component that is visible in a color other than a light color may be arranged behind the specific obstructing nail 1201, so that when the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 is viewed from a specified angle, the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 and the component that is visible in a color other than a light color are visible overlapping each other. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to see the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201. Note that it is preferable to use a dark color or black as the color other than white or light.

It has been shown that it is desirable to place a member that is visible in a color other than white or light behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, but it is also desirable to make this member flat and without any irregularities. At the very least, it is desirable to configure the specific obstacle nail 1201 so that when the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed from a specified angle, a flat area is located behind the entire vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 without any irregularities.

The display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is visible in a dark color when the pachinko machine 1 is in a powered-off state, may be positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201. When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 are viewed from a specified angle, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be viewed as overlapping. With this configuration, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 becomes easier to understand.

Although modified examples have been shown in which components that are visible with a bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to Figures 268 to 279, are configured to be movable, the embodiments described with reference to Figures 287 to 292 may also be applied to these modified examples. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to Figures 268 to 279 to be movably positioned behind a specific obstruction nail 1201.

In this case, during play, a component that is visible with a bright color or metallic luster, such as the rear panel decorative member 2410 or the rear panel board 2420, may be positioned in a standby state behind a specific obstacle nail 1201, and when a performance is performed that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, the component that is visible with a bright color or metallic luster, such as the rear panel decorative member 2410 or the rear panel board 2420, may be configured to move to a moving position. With this configuration, even if a whitened portion HKB occurs at the tip of a specific obstacle nail 1201, it is difficult for the player to notice this fact.

On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear substrate 2420, and other components that are visible in a bright color or metallic luster may be configured to be moved by a game parlor staff member by inserting a hand into an opening provided in the center of the panel board 1110 when the door frame 3 is open and the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear substrate 2420, and other components that are visible in a bright color or metallic luster are moved, components other than the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear substrate 2420, and other components that are visible in a bright color or metallic luster may be configured to be visible behind a specific obstacle nail 1201. In this case, the visible components may be components that are not visible in a bright color or components that are visible in a color tone that does not have a metallic luster. Specifically, it is preferable to use components that are visible in a dark color.

By adopting such a configuration, when an amusement arcade staff member tries to visually check the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB near the tip of a particular obstructing nail 1201, the staff member can improve the visibility of the area near the tip of the particular obstructing nail 1201 by manually moving a component that is visible as a bright color or metallic luster, such as the rear panel decorative component 2410 or the rear panel board 2420.

Depending on the amount of light emitted by the lighting equipment installed in the game arcade and the position of the lighting equipment, the amount of light reaching a specific obstacle nail 1201 may be insufficient. This situation may occur especially when the panel board front decorative member 2450 is made of an opaque material. Therefore, it may be configured so that light is irradiated from behind a specific obstacle nail 1201 in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the game arcade staff. As light sources for irradiating light, the panel board rear board light emitting unit 2425 mounted on the panel board rear board 2420, the game board side performance display device 1600, the above-mentioned light guide plate 2460, etc. may be used, and these light sources may be changed from an off state to a on state in response to the operation of the operation button 410, or these light sources that have become on may be changed to an off state in response to the operation of the operation button 410. It may also be configured so that the amount of light of these light sources can be changed in response to the operation of the operation button 410. For example, the light intensity emitted by these light sources may be set to multiple levels (e.g., three levels) and may be configured so that the light intensity changes sequentially depending on the number of times the arcade staff operates the operation button 410. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an appropriate amount of light around the tip of a particular obstacle nail 1201, making it possible to clearly check the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB.

In this way, the light source that has been turned on or adjusted may be configured to maintain the on state for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) rather than blinking. Alternatively, the color of the light (e.g., white) emitted by the light source that has been turned on or adjusted may not be changed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). These may also be configured to be performed simultaneously. Alternatively, the light may be turned off after the on state has been maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). By configuring the light source to maintain the on state for a predetermined time or to maintain a light emission state of a predetermined color for a predetermined time in this way, the visibility around the tip of the obstruction nail 1201 can be improved compared to when the light source is blinked or the light emission color changes.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the tips of the obstacle nails 1201 are made difficult to see by the player by using a panel board front decorative member 2450 made of synthetic resin. However, an embodiment modified by providing a panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m on the front surface of the panel board 1110 instead of the panel board front decorative member 2450 will be described with reference to FIG. 292. Note that the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 291 may be applied to this embodiment.

Figure 292(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 292(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 292(a). Figure 292(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method. Figure 292(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 292(a) in a modified embodiment of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, a thin opaque decorative layer 1110m is provided on the front of the panel 1110. The thin opaque decorative layer 1110m is blue and has a decorative shape that resembles a mountain range. After attaching an opaque sheet having a predetermined pattern and external shape to the panel 1110, the panel 1110 is cut together with the sheet to form obstacle nail holes 1110a, and obstacle nails 1201 are planted in the obstacle nail holes 1110a.

Even with this configuration, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, it is difficult for players to notice the occurrence of the whitened area HKB, and it is possible for game center staff to easily visually check the occurrence of the whitened area HKB.

The embodiment of the panel front decorative member 2450 described with reference to Figures 287 to 290 may be applied to the panel front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m. For example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 291, the panel front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m may have a decorative shape, as in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 288, a part of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m may be transparent, or as in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 289, the panel front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m may be colored (blue) and semi-transparent rather than opaque.

When game balls come into contact with the end of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m multiple times, there is a risk that the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m will break from the end. Therefore, as shown in Figure 292 (d), it is possible to configure the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m so that game balls that are in contact with the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board 1110 do not come into contact with the end of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m. By configuring the end of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m in this way, it is possible to prevent damage to the end of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m while hiding the whitened portion HKB.

In some cases, a specified decorative member may be attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In this case, the specified decorative member is provided with multiple positioning bosses that protrude rearward. The specified decorative member is also provided with holes for inserting screws to attach the decorative member to the panel board 1110. Meanwhile, the panel board 1110 is provided with insertion holes for inserting the bosses and mounting holes for attaching the screws.

When attaching the decorative member, a positioning boss is inserted into the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110. Next, the screw is inserted through the insertion hole for the decorative member and the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110, and the decorative member is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by rotating the screw. The decorative member can also be removed by rotating the screw in the opposite direction.

By adopting this type of attachment method, it is possible to reduce the time required to position the decorative member relative to the panel board 1110, and to attach the decorative member to an accurate position relative to the panel board 1110. This type of positioning method is described, for example, in the CD-ROM of Japanese Utility Model Application No. 05-059197 (Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 07-022791).

However, when both the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member are made of a transparent synthetic resin, the mounting hole in the panel plate and the boss in the decorative member are visible through the transparent decorative member, which can lead to a problem of marring the aesthetic appearance of the decorative member. Specifically, from the front of the decorative member, the inner wall of the mounting hole in the panel plate 1110 and the boss located within the mounting hole are visible as a cloudy cylinder, which can mar the aesthetic appearance.

In addition, when a decorative member made of a transparent synthetic resin is attached to the wooden panel 1110, the mounting holes in the wooden panel are visible as black openings through the decorative member. In particular, when the pattern of the cell plate on the front surface of the wooden panel is close to white, such black openings stand out.

Below, we will explain the means to solve these problems with reference to Figure 293.

Figure 293(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. Figure 293(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 293(a). Figure 293(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 293(a). Figure 293(d) is a front view showing the state in which the decorative member 2470 has been attached to the panel board 1110. Figure 293(e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 293(d) when a colorless and transparent synthetic resin panel board 1110 is used. Figure 293(f) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 293(d) when a wooden panel board 1110 is used.

As shown in FIG. 293(a), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment is a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decorative member 2470 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The decorative member 2470 is plate-shaped, and when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110, it has a horizontally long rectangular decorative member front part 2470a located in the front and a horizontally long rectangular decorative member rear part 2470b located in the rear. The thickness of the decorative member 2470 is 4 mm, and it is possible to visually confirm the member located in the rear through the decorative member 2470. The decorative member rear part 2470b has two cylindrical decorative member bosses 2470c that protrude vertically from the decorative member rear part 2470b toward the rear. The diameter of the decorative member bosses 2470c is slightly smaller than 2 mm. The length of the decorative member bosses 2470c is 3 mm. The area of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is larger than the area of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, and four decorative member inclined portions 2470d are provided that are beveled from the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470 toward the end of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b.

As shown in Fig. 293(b) and Fig. 293(c), the angle between the decorative member front part 2470a and the decorative member inclined part 2470d is 135 degrees, and the angle between the decorative member rear part 2470b and the decorative member inclined part 2470d is 45 degrees. The front surface of the decorative member 2470 is contacted by a game ball rolling in the game area 5a, but by providing the decorative member inclined part 2470d in a chamfered shape, it is possible to prevent the rolling game ball from colliding with the decorative member 2470 and causing damage to the end of the decorative member 2470. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where it can be seen in a state where a part of it overlaps with the decorative member inclined part 2470d when viewed from the front. The decorative member 2470 has two decorative member screw insertion holes 2470e for inserting decorative member mounting screws 2471 for mounting the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p. The diameter of the panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p is 2 mm, which is a diameter that allows the decorative member boss 2470c to be inserted and removed. The panel plate 1110 is also provided with two panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q. The diameter of the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q is 2 mm. The panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q are each cylindrical and penetrate the panel plate 1110.

Next, referring to FIG. 293(d) and FIG. 293(e), a method of attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 will be described. The decorative member 2470 is brought close to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front, and the decorative member boss 2470c is inserted into the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided in the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member rear surface part 2470b are brought into contact with each other, so that the decorative member 2470 is positioned. Next, the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is inserted into the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q, and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is rotated clockwise, so that the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110. The decorative member mounting screw 2471 can be removed by rotating the decorative member mounting screw 2471 counterclockwise. In addition, by removing the decorative member mounting screws 2471 in this manner, the decorative member 2470 can be removed from the panel board 1110.

By adopting such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned relative to the decorative member boss 2470c. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c is visible in a front view with a portion of it overlapping with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, when a player visually checks the decorative member 2470, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable. Furthermore, by adopting such a configuration, a damaged decorative member 2470 can be easily replaced with a new decorative member 2470.

Referring to Figures 293(d) and 293(e), an embodiment in which the panel board 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, but with reference to Figure 293(f), an embodiment in which the panel board 1110 is modified to be made of wooden plywood will be described.

Figure 293(f) is a cross-sectional view taken along CC in Figure 293(d) when a wooden panel board 1110 is used. In this embodiment, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q of the panel board 1110 are each cylindrical, but do not penetrate the panel board 1110. In addition, a panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110, so that the plywood that constitutes the panel board 1110 cannot be seen. The method of attaching and detaching the decorative member 2470 to and from the panel board 1110 configured in this way is the same as the embodiment described with reference to Figures 293(d) and 293(e).

In this embodiment, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p is provided in a manner penetrating the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Therefore, when a colorless and transparent decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, which is provided in a manner penetrating the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m, is visible from the front as a black circle with a diameter of 2 mm, which spoils the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, in this embodiment, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, which is visible as a black circle, and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d are configured to be visible in a state where they partially overlap when viewed from the front. With this configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

The panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 may be provided with a specified character or pattern by printing or pasting. In this case, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p may be provided in a dark or black colored portion of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m provided as the character or pattern. This configuration makes it possible to make the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

In addition, when the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, it is preferable to provide the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p in the white or light-colored part of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m provided as a character or a pattern. This is because the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c are visible in a state of diffused light reflection when light from a predetermined light-emitting means or the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 reaches the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c from the rear of the panel board 1110. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable. In addition, although an example in which two decorative member bosses 2470c are provided is shown, it is also possible to provide two or more decorative member bosses 2470c. In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the two decorative member bosses 2470c of the decorative member 2470 are located on the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, but it is not necessary to place all of the decorative member bosses 2470c of the decorative member 2470 on the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and it is sufficient that at least one decorative member boss 2470c is located on the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d.

294(a) and 294(b) show examples of mounting the decorative member 2470 to the panel board 1110. FIG. 294(a) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is mounted horizontally. Meanwhile, FIG. 294(b) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is mounted diagonally. In this embodiment, the inclination of the long side of the rectangular decorative member 2470 and the angle of the left guide nail 1232 are horizontal. In addition, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the left guide nail 1232 are arranged close to each other, so that the rolling game ball does not come into contact with the panel board 1110 in the area sandwiched between the left guide nail 1232 and the decorative member 2470.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that has collided with the left guide nail 1232 and rebounded from it directly collides with the panel board 1110 in the area above the left guide nail 1232 where the game ball may collide with force, causing damage to the panel board 1110 or damage to the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided in front of the panel board 1110. Note that with respect to the decorative member 2470, a situation may occur in which a game ball that has collided with the left guide nail 1232 and rebounded from it collides directly with it, causing a part to become cloudy. In this case, it is advisable to replace the decorative member 2470. In this embodiment, the decorative member 2470 can be replaced with a new decorative member 2470 simply by removing the decorative member mounting screw 2471 while the door frame 3 is open.

With reference to Figures 295 and 296, an embodiment in which the position of the decorative member boss 2470c and the shape of the decorative member boss 2470c are modified will be described. Figures 295(a), 295(b), 295(c), 296(a), 296(b), and 296(c) are front views of the decorative member 2470.

Figure 295 (a) shows an example of a configuration in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps the decorative member front portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With this configuration, three boundaries are positioned with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c: the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and one of the decorative member inclined portions 2470d, the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the boundary between one of the decorative member inclined portions 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. As a result, these three boundaries overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, making the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

Figure 295 (b) shows an example of a configuration in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front portion 2470a in a front view, but overlaps two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. Even with this configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

Figure 295 (c) shows an example of a configuration in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front portion 2470a in a front view, but overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in a front view. Even with this configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In addition, if the position of the decorative member boss 2470c is brought closer to the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d as in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 295(b) and 295(c), when positioning the decorative member 2470 relative to the panel board 1110, the decorative member boss 2470c may come into contact with other components provided on the panel board 1110, and inadvertent force may be applied to the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, which is formed thinner than the decorative member front portion 2470a, causing the decorative member inclined portion 2470d to bend or crack.

In this regard, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 293 and FIG. 295(a), it is possible to position the decorative member 2470 in an appropriate position while visually checking the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and a part of the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view, so it is possible to reduce the probability of the decorative member 2470 accidentally coming into contact with another member. Furthermore, since the decorative member boss 2470c is located slightly away from the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, even if the decorative member boss 2470c comes into contact with another member, the entire decorative member inclined portion 2470d receives the force, making the decorative member inclined portion 2470d less likely to bend, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d bending or cracking.

296(a) to 296(c) show an embodiment in which the shape of the decorative member 2470 is changed from a horizontally long rectangular shape to a cross shape. FIG. 296(a) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps the decorative member front portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With this configuration, three boundaries are positioned with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c: the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and one of the decorative member inclined portions 2470d, the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the boundary between one of the decorative member inclined portions 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, these three boundaries overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, making the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

Figure 296 (b) shows an example of a configuration in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided adjacent to the end of the decorative member front portion 2470a in front view and at a position overlapping two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. With this configuration, the end of the decorative member front portion 2470a is adjacent to the decorative member boss 2470c, and the boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located at a position overlapping the decorative member boss 2470c in front view. This makes it possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

Figure 296 (c) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With this configuration, the boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located at a position that overlaps the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. This makes it possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 293 and 295, the decorative member front portion 2470a is configured to be located between the decorative member bosses 2470c and 2470c. By configuring the decorative member bosses 2470c and 2470c to be located at a distance from each other in this manner, it is possible to quickly position the decorative member boss 2470c relative to the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, the portion of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that overlaps with the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view is linear, but other shapes than linear may be adopted. For example, it may be arc-shaped or zigzag-shaped. If such a shape is adopted, the front view of the decorative member boss 2470c becomes complex, making it possible to make the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable. In addition, a perfect circle shape in a front view may be adopted as the shape of the decorative member 2470, and a perfect circle shape in a front view may also be adopted as the shape of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. In this case, the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is arc-shaped, which is similar in shape to the decorative member boss 2470c that is also arc-shaped, making the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 293, a decorative member inclined portion 2470d is provided from the decorative member front portion 2470a toward the decorative member rear portion 2470b. However, an embodiment modified to provide a first decorative member inclined portion 2470f and a second decorative member inclined portion 2470g instead of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d will be described with reference to FIG. 297.

Figure 297(a) is a front view of decorative member 2470. Figure 297(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 297(a). Figure 297(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 297(a).

As shown in Figures 297(a) and 297(b), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and a decorative member second inclined portion 2470g. The angle between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is 155 degrees. The angle between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is 160 degrees. The angle between the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member rear portion 2470b is 45 degrees. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view.

In this embodiment, the boundary between the first decorative member inclined portion 2470f and the second decorative member inclined portion 2470g is visible to the player as a straight line, making it possible to make the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable than when only the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is present.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 297(a) and 297(b), the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f was flat, but it may be configured to have a curved surface. Figure 297(c) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is configured to have a curved surface. In this embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, which is formed to have a curved surface, in a front view. In such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p are visible in a bent state, making it possible to make the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 297(a), the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that overlaps with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view. However, an embodiment modified so that the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a different position will be described with reference to FIG. 298(a).

Figure 298(a) is a front view of decorative member 2470. Figure 298(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 298(a). Figure 298(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 298(a). Figure 298(d) is a front view of decorative member 2470 in an embodiment in which the position at which decorative member boss 2470c is provided is modified.

As shown in FIG. 298(b), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the bottom left of the decorative member 2470 is positioned so as to overlap the boundary line formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g in a front view. Also, as shown in FIG. 298(c), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the top right of the decorative member 2470 is positioned so as to overlap the boundary line formed by the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 298(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower left of the decorative member 2470 is positioned so as to overlap, in a front view, the boundary line between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, the boundary line between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g, and the boundary line between the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g.

As shown in FIG. 298(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is positioned so as to overlap, in a front view, the boundary line between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g, and the boundary line between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g.

In this way, a first plate portion (e.g., panel plate 1110) having a positioning hole portion (e.g., panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p), a transparent second plate portion (e.g., decorative member 2470) having a positioning protrusion (e.g., decorative member boss 2470c) inserted into the positioning hole portion, and a chamfered portion (e.g., decorative member inclined portion 2470d) provided from the front to the rear is provided, and when the positioning protrusion is inserted into the positioning hole portion, at least a portion of the positioning protrusion overlaps with the chamfered portion when viewed from the front, making it possible to make the presence of the positioning protrusion and positioning hole portion less noticeable.

In the above example, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q are shaped to penetrate the panel plate 1110, but the panel plate boss insertion hole and the panel plate screw insertion hole may be configured to only extend partway through the panel plate 1110 rather than penetrating the panel plate 1110. For example, the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be approximately the same as the length of the decorative member boss 2470c, and the length of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be approximately the same as the length of the decorative member mounting screw 2471.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q, which are visible from the front through the transparent panel plate 1110, making the presence of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q less noticeable.

A colored transparent synthetic resin may be used as the material for the decorative member 2470. In this case, the thickness of the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is 7 mm to 8 mm, and the thickness of the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided is 4 mm. Therefore, the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is visually perceived as being darker in color than the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided. For example, even if a synthetic resin that is visually perceived as blue is used as the decorative member 2470, the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided is visually perceived as being a relatively light blue, and the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is visually perceived as being a relatively dark blue. By being visually perceived in this way, the decorative member boss 2470c stands out, but by positioning the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d relative to the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c can be made less noticeable.

A rough surface portion capable of diffusely reflecting light may be formed on a part or the whole of the decorative member 2470 by matte processing, embossing, etc., so that the rough surface portion and the decorative member boss 2470c are positioned to overlap when viewed from the front. For example, a rough surface portion may be provided on the surface of at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g. Note that the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g are each provided in a plurality of portions, and a rough surface portion may be provided on the surface of at least one of them. In addition, instead of making the entire surface of each of the decorative member front surface 2470a, decorative member rear surface 2470b, decorative member inclined portion 2470d, decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and decorative member second inclined portion 2470g, only a portion of the surface may be made rough.

This configuration allows the decorative member 2470 to maintain the transparency of the decorative light and the visibility of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer 1110m located at the rear, while making the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p less noticeable.

Although an example of providing a rough surface portion on the decorative member 2470 has been shown, instead of the rough surface portion, a metallic gloss portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member 2470 by plating or the like. In this case, the entire decorative member 2470 or at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b may be made metallic glossy. Alternatively, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a or the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b may be made metallic glossy only in part, rather than the entire surface. The metallic gloss portion may be configured to surround the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. The decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the metallic gloss portion may be made in a similar color. For example, if a decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of stainless steel and visible as silver is used, the metallic gloss portion may be made silver in color. In addition, if a decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of brass and visible with a yellowish metallic luster is used, the color of the metallic luster part should be gold. Note that the metallic luster part should be provided only around the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and for the part where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided, the above-mentioned method should be used without providing a metallic luster part, so that the decorative member boss 2470c is less noticeable.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the decorative member mounting screw 2471 less noticeable when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110 by the decorative member mounting screw 2471.

In the embodiment shown, the decorative member 2470 itself has a rough surface portion or a metallic gloss portion, but the decorative member 2470 may be configured to have a member that diffusely reflects light, a member that is visible with a metallic gloss, a member that is visible in white or bright color, or a member that emits light, such as the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, and panel plate rear substrate 2420, as described in the embodiment with reference to Figures 257 to 286, etc.

Specifically, it is preferable to position the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc., in a position overlapping with decorative member boss 2470c and decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e in a front view.

The obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member boss 2470c may be provided at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front on one panel board rough surface back portion 1110b. Alternatively, the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front on one panel board rough surface back portion 1110b. Alternatively, the obstacle nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front on one panel board rough surface back portion 1110b.

A similar configuration may be adopted not only for the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, but also for the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc., which diffusely reflect light, are visible with a metallic gloss, are visible in white or bright colors, or are capable of emitting light.

With this configuration, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, the panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and other members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with a metallic gloss, members that are visible in white or bright colors, and members that emit light can be used not only for decoration but also to make the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 less noticeable. In this embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c does not necessarily have to be located at the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and may be configured to be located at a position that overlaps only the decorative member front portion 2470a in a front view.

The rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, stump section 6200, stump box section 6300, grass role 6400, mountain role 6500, first giant tree role 6600, first cloud role 6700, and back-of-board grass role 6800 described with reference to Figures 118 to 152, etc., are made up of members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with a metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright colors, and members that can emit light, and are provided on the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel board back third rough surface portion 1110e, the panel board back fourth rough surface portion 1110f, the panel board back fourth rough surface portion 1110g, the panel board back fourth rough surface portion 1110h, the panel board back fourth rough surface portion 1110i, the panel board back fourth rough surface portion 1110j, the panel board back fourth rough surface portion 1110i ... Like the second rough surface portion 1110d, the metallic glossy portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, the first metallic glossy portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate, the second metallic glossy portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate, the bright colored visible portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate, the rear decorative member 2410, the rough surface portion 2410a on the rear decorative member of the panel plate, the metallic glossy portion 2410b on the rear decorative member of the panel plate, and the rear substrate 2420 of the panel plate, it may be provided in a position that overlaps with the obstruction nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, or the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470 in a front view.

A decorative member 2470 may be attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. In this case, a similar attachment structure using the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be adopted. In this case, the head of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is difficult to see from the front, and the part where the spiral-shaped part of the body part of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q provided in the panel plate 1110 engage with each other is visible from the front as the whitened part HKB. In this way, when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by inserting the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from the rear, the part where the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is inserted is visible as the whitened part HKB. A configuration that makes the whitened part HKB less noticeable as described above may be adopted for the whitened part HKB that is visible in this way. For example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be disposed behind the decorative member 2470. Alternatively, the entire decorative member 2470 may be made of a transparent or semi-transparent synthetic resin that is visually recognized as a light color or white color. In addition, a rough surface portion capable of diffusely reflecting light may be formed on at least one surface of the decorative member front portion 2470a, the decorative member rear portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g by matte finishing, embossing, or the like.

By adopting this configuration, even when a decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the whitened portion HKB that occurs in the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

When attaching the decorative member 2470 to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, it is advisable to configure the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q to a length that does not penetrate the panel plate 1110.

By adopting such a configuration, the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q can be shortened, and the whitened portion HKB generated in the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which cigarette ash or dust enters the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p or the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from the front side of the play area 5a in which the game ball rolls, and the inner wall of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p or the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q becomes dirty. Note that cigarette ash and dust mainly adhere to the game ball when the game ball is located in the upper tray 321, and move together with the game ball into the play area 5a.

The embodiment has been described using the decorative member 2470 attached to the panel board 1110 as an example, but a similar configuration may be adopted not only for the decorative member 2470 but also for other plate-shaped, colorless and transparent or colored and transparent members attached to the panel board 1110. Also, a similar configuration may be adopted when a plate-shaped, colorless and transparent or colored and transparent decorative member is attached to a specific colorless and transparent plate-shaped member, not limited to the panel board 1110. Also, a similar configuration may be adopted when a plate-shaped, colorless and transparent member is attached to a plate-shaped, colorless and transparent member.

A similar configuration may also be adopted as a structure for attaching a specific transparent member to another specific transparent member. For example, a similar configuration may be adopted when attaching a specific portion of a first member made of a transparent material to a specific portion of a second member made of a transparent material. Specifically, it is preferable to configure one specific portion to have a boss and the other specific portion to have an insertion hole for inserting the boss.

When molding a synthetic resin component using a mold, a molding method is known that uses an ejector pin to separate the molded product from the mold. However, there is a problem in that the shape of the ejector pin tip is left on the molded product where the ejector pin is used. The shape of the ejector pin tip is generally circular. For this reason, the molded product will have a circular recessed or protruding mark, for example, 3 mm in diameter and 0.1 mm thick decorative component. When forming a decorative component using a mold using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin as the material, as in the case of decorative component 2470 in this embodiment, the ejector pin will leave a circular mark on the decorative component, which is not aesthetically pleasing.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the decorative member 2470 so that the circular mark formed by the ejection pin is located on the rear surface of the decorative member 2470. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the decorative member 2470 so that a part or all of the circular mark formed by the ejection pin overlaps with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in a front view. Alternatively, a rough surface portion may be provided on the decorative member 2470, and the rough surface portion and the circular mark may be configured to overlap in a front view.

In this way, by locating the marks caused by molding using a mold in a position on the decorative member 2470 that is difficult for the player to see, or by adopting a configuration that makes them difficult to see, the marks of the ejector pin on the decorative member 2470 can be made less noticeable. Note that the embodiments applied to the whitened portion HKB, decorative member boss 2470c, panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, etc. may also be applied to the marks of the ejector pin on the decorative member 2470. In this case, too, the same effect as the embodiments for the whitened portion HKB and decorative member boss 2470c is achieved.

In the case of pachinko machines, for example, each player generally sits on a seat that is installed facing the front of the pachinko machine to play. At this time, the player's eyes are close to the front of the machine, and although there are some differences in height due to age, gender, etc., the player's eyes are located approximately in front of the center of the pachinko machine. The player's line of sight is then shifted in a predetermined direction, such as up and down, left and right, or diagonally upward, depending on the movement of the game ball that rolls around the play area centered on the center of the pachinko machine, the decorative state of the decorative members, such as light emission and movement, or the game state. Therefore, when the center of the game machine is the center, the member that is located in the direction where the player shifts his or her line of sight in this way may be used as a member that hides the whitened portion HKB.

For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 or the jump nail 1231 is viewed from diagonally above by the player's line of sight, the member constituting the first starting hole 2002 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and the whitened part HKB caused by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 may be configured to overlap and be seen. Similarly, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232 is viewed from diagonally above by the player's line of sight, the member constituting the general winning hole 2001 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and the whitened part HKB caused by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 may be configured to overlap and be seen. Note that the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 may be arranged in a position that overlaps the bright color visible part, the diffuse reflection part, and the metallic gloss part when viewed from the front, as described above. The cut holes drilled through the panel board 1110 for inserting the components constituting the general winning hole 2001 and the components constituting the first starting hole 2002 and for passing winning balls from the front to the rear of the panel board 1110 are visible with their inner walls whitened, similar to the obstacle nail through holes 1110a, but may be configured so that they overlap and are visible as the whitened areas HKB caused by the installation of the obstacle nails 1201.

In this way, even if the winning port component (e.g., the component constituting the general winning port 2001, the component constituting the first starting port 2002) and the planted portion of the obstacle nail 1201 are configured to overlap when viewed from a specified angle (e.g., diagonally above) different from the front view, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Note that the configuration may be such that the bright color visible portion, diffuse reflection portion, or metallic gloss portion and the planted portion of the obstacle nail 1201 are configured to overlap when viewed from a specified angle. Also, whether viewed from the front or from a specified angle different from the front view, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 294, the decorative member 2470 is provided above the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231. By adopting such a configuration, when viewed from diagonally above by the player's line of sight, the whitened portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 and the decorative member 2470 are seen overlapping, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Specifically, the decorative member front portion 2470a, the decorative member rear portion 2470b, the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, etc. are seen forward of the whitened portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nails 1201, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, the panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p and panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q for attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 overlap with the whitened portion HKB, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

The decorative member 2470 may be configured to be provided below the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231. In this case, the decorative member 2470 may be provided at a position where, when viewed from diagonally above by the player's line of sight, the whitened portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 is visible overlapping with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q. This configuration can make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

By the way, gaming machines may be installed in gaming parlors for several years. On the other hand, the history of gaming boards formed by planting obstacle nails in a transparent panel board is shorter than the history of gaming boards formed by planting obstacle nails in a wooden panel board, and it has only been in the last 10 years or so that gaming machines with obstacle nails planted in a transparent panel board have been fully installed in gaming parlors. Furthermore, the playability of the gaming machine itself is constantly evolving. For this reason, the gauge configuration formed by driving obstacle nails and the devices installed on the gaming board change each time, and accordingly the number of obstacle nails planted in the transparent panel board, the position where the obstacle nails are planted, the interval between obstacle nails, etc. change. For this reason, it currently takes a certain number of years to verify whether such a variety of possible gauge configuration patterns are prone to the occurrence of whitened parts HKB or are less likely to occur whitened parts HKB.

In the past, examples of obstacle nails that receive impacts from collisions with game balls, especially immediately after launch, include the multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a and certain obstacle nails 1201 among the multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the right side of the game area 5a. In addition, as obstacle nails 1201 on which game balls that flow and roll down the game area subsequently concentrate depending on the game state, for example, the multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the game area 5a with which game balls rolling from the upper left of the game area 5a collide with with a predetermined probability, which concentrate during normal play, the obstacle nails 1201 (jump nails 1231, life nails 1230, left guide nails 1232) provided in correspondence with the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first starting hole 2002, and the obstacle nails 1201 provided close to the big winning hole 2005, which concentrate during big win play, etc., deterioration of the whitened part HKB has been suspected.

The following embodiment describes an embodiment that allows a gaming establishment's staff member to determine whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur with a gaming machine before such a problem occurs that could impede the progress of the game or the aesthetics perceived by the player during operation of the gaming machine at the gaming establishment.

In the example shown, a bright colored visible portion, a diffuse reflection portion, and a metallic gloss portion are provided behind the portion where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted in order to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable when the portion where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted is viewed from the front. However, in order to solve the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitened portion HKB is planted in a more noticeable position for certain obstacle nails 1201 among the obstacle nails 1201.

Specifically, among the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232, the first obstacle nail 1201 and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the left may be positioned so as to overlap a decorative member that is not a light color (preferably a dark color decorative member) when viewed from the front.

This configuration makes the whitened portion HKB less noticeable for many of the obstructing nails 1201, while for some specific obstructing nails 1201, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB is clearly visible, making it possible to easily estimate the cumulative operating time of the gaming machine and to use this as an indicator of whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur in the gaming machine.

As a dark colored decorative member, it is desirable to use a decorative member decorated with a black base color, for example, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more noticeable. Alternatively, a liquid crystal display device, which is often used as a performance display device as a basic device constituting a gaming machine, may be used. For example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 described with reference to Figures 122 to 125 is viewed as a black flat surface in front.

Figure 299 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 60. Figure 299 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a game board performance display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel board 1110, and some of the life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, left guide nails 1232, and other obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 are provided in a position that overlaps with the display area 1600a of the game board performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front of the display area 1600a is visible as a black flat surface.

In this way, if a specific obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a position that overlaps with a dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a black surface when viewed from the front, or in a position that overlaps with a dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted a specific angle in a specific direction from the center position of the pachinko machine as described above, it becomes easy to check the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB in the specific obstacle nail 1201.

This configuration makes it easy to check the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB for the specific obstacle nail 1201 planted in a position that overlaps with the dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Note that, instead of when viewed from the front, as described above, the dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be located in a position that overlaps with the specific obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted a specific angle in a specific direction from the center position of the pachinko machine. This configuration may also be adopted for the obstacle nail 1201 in other embodiments to increase the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

The specified obstruction nails 1201 that allow the whitened portion HKB to be seen in this way may be planted in a manner that penetrates the panel board front decorative member 2450 or the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Alternatively, they may be planted in a manner that does not penetrate either the panel board front decorative member 2450 or the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m.

Figure 300 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Figure 299. Figure 300 is a front view of a game board 5. In this embodiment, a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. The life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and some of the left side guide nails 1232 planted in the panel board 1110 are provided in a position that overlaps with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, which is visible in a light color, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left side guide nails 1232 (the two obstacle nails 1201 at the upper left) and the other obstacle nails 1201 are provided so as not to overlap with the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front, but to overlap with the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 less noticeable at all times, and for the other obstructing nails 1201, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above depending on the game status, and it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB more noticeable when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 300, the above-mentioned embodiment may be applied instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, so that the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable for some of the obstructing nails 1201. For example, instead of or in addition to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, at least one of the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided. The shape of these members in a front view may be configured to be the same as the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view.

Note that, while an embodiment in which a panel board back light color viewing portion 1110h is provided on the back side of the panel board 1110 has been shown with reference to Figures 267 and 268, in these embodiments, a panel board back dark color viewing portion that adopts a configuration similar to that of the panel board back light color viewing portion 1110h but has a dark color may be provided in a position that overlaps with a specific obstructing nail 1201 as described above when viewed from the front or when the line of sight is tilted a specific angle in a specific direction from the center position of the pachinko machine. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to check the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB for a specific obstructing nail 1201 as described above.

Although an example has been shown in which multiple light-emitting diodes are mounted as the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 on the white panel board rear board 2420, the color of the mounted component confirmation character string (e.g., "LED01", "LED02", etc.) provided adjacent to each light-emitting diode on the panel board rear board 2420 by a method such as printing may be configured to be a light color (specifically, cream or yellow). With such a configuration, it is possible to make these character strings less noticeable when using a brass obstacle nail 1201, when using a gold metallic gloss part as the metallic gloss part of the panel board rear decorative member 2410b provided on the panel board rear decorative member 2410, or when using yellow as the light-emitting color of the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 294 to 298, the decorative member 2470 is provided with two decorative member bosses 2470c. However, it is preferable to use a decorative member inclined portion 2470d in which the surface forming the decorative member inclined portion 2470d faces obliquely upward as the decorative member inclined portion 2470d on which the two decorative member bosses 2470c are provided.

With this configuration, when dirt such as cigarette ash, dust, dirt, grime, player's hand grime and cigarette tar that adhere to the game ball adheres to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces diagonally upward, it becomes possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c difficult to see due to these dirt. Note that although dirt (especially highly sticky dirt such as cigarette tar and hand grime) also adheres to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces diagonally downward, dirt is more likely to adhere to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces diagonally upward.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 294(b), of the two decorative member bosses 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c located at the upper left can be made less visible due to dirt than the decorative member boss 2470c located at the lower right.

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 296(a) to Fig. 296(c), dirt is likely to adhere to the area where the valley-like boundary is formed by the two decorative member inclined portions 2470d. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c located at the upper left shown in Fig. 296(a) to Fig. 296(c) difficult to see due to dirt. In addition, in game stores, the game area 5a and the decorative member 2470 are regularly cleaned to remove any dirt that has adhered. However, when such cleaning is performed, dirt may gather in the area where the valley-like boundary is formed in such an embodiment. If such an event occurs, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c difficult to see due to dirt not only for the decorative member boss 2470c located at the upper left, but also for the decorative member boss 2470c located at the lower right.

When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel board 1110, it is preferable that at least the decorative member inclined portions 2470d that face diagonally upward among the multiple decorative member inclined portions 2470d of the decorative member 2470 can be contacted by a game ball rolling in the game area 5a. With such a configuration, it is possible for the rolling game ball to efficiently deposit dirt on the decorative member inclined portions 2470d. Note that the decorative member 2470 may be configured so that all of the decorative member inclined portions 2470d are contactable by a game ball. With such a configuration, the game ball comes into direct contact with the decorative member inclined portions 2470d, so that when dirt adheres to the decorative member inclined portions 2470d, it is possible to make it difficult to see the decorative member bosses 2470c.

In these embodiments, instead of just one decorative member boss 2470c, multiple (e.g., two) or all decorative member bosses 2470c may be configured to be positioned so that they overlap the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward in a front view. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the number of decorative member bosses 2470c that are difficult to see.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with operating means have been considered, but below we will explain a gaming machine that is equipped with multiple operating means and effectively utilizes the multiple operating means in the presentation. As shown in FIG. 301, the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player at the bottom of the door frame 3.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of performing an effect of displaying the player's tank by image display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 while the decorative pattern is being changed. In this effect, the player's tank moves along various routes and fights with enemy tanks while moving to the destination, and the result of the change in the decorative pattern is suggested by the result of the fight. In addition, while the player's tank is moving or fighting with the enemy tank, the player's operation of the operation means such as the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and defense button 3740 provided at the bottom of the door frame 3 can be accepted to change the effect content such as the suggestion of the change in the decorative pattern.
In this specification, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various ways in the presentation that displays the player's tank. The attack button 3710 is a button that can be used to attack enemy forces in the presentation that displays the player's tank. The defense button 3740 is a button that can be used to defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the presentation that displays the player's tank. Each button can be pressed a predetermined distance downward. The pachinko machine 1 detects the player's pressing of each button by a sensor (not shown), inputs the information to the peripheral control board 1510, and can be used in the presentation. When the player no longer presses each button, a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like moves the button upward.

The left lever 3720 is a rod-shaped operating means capable of inputting directions. The base of the left lever 3720 is supported on a shaft, and it can be tilted in any direction through 360 degrees. The maximum angle that it can be tilted is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is structured so that it returns to a vertical state (a state in which it is not tilted in any direction) when the player releases the left lever 3720, due to a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like. The pachinko machine 1 detects the direction and angle in which the left lever 3720 is tilted using a sensor (not shown), and inputs this information to the peripheral control board 1510 for use in the presentation. The player can perform operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it a specified angle in a specified direction.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is built into the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction below. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured with a stepping motor with an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a solenoid that moves back and forth. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibration by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The vibration generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, so that the vibration can be used as a performance. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720. The vibration mode may also be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of an event advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720. For example, a left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the upper half of the left lever 3720 and a left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the lower half of the left lever 3720. Then, only one of the vibration sources may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

The left lever 3720 has a built-in left lever light source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color at the upper and lower sides. The left lever 3720 is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light by the color of light output from the left lever light source 3724. The left lever light source 3724 is specifically composed of multiple full-color LEDs and a drive circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the drive circuit with the peripheral control board 1510. The left lever light source 3724 can make mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 illuminated and decorated, and the light emission color, flashing, lighting, and other light emission modes can be used as a performance. For example, the left lever 3720 may be illuminated in a predetermined light emission mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720. The light emission mode may also be configured to indicate the expectation level of an event advantageous to the player, such as a big win. The left lever 3720 may be formed of other materials as long as it can transmit light, and may be formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut, for example.

The right lever 3730 has the same structure and function as the left lever 3720. For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operational input. Also, like the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light source 3734 are provided within the right lever 3730, and can be used for the same effects as the left lever 3720.

The layout of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 302 shows an embodiment in which the attack button 3710 is located at the top end of the left lever 3720, and the defense button 3740 is located at the top end of the right lever 3730. In this case, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 with your thumb while gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720. Similarly, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730 with your thumb while gripping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730.

The attack button 3710 may be formed from a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 may be set to a predetermined light-emitting state in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, thereby setting the attack button 3710 to a predetermined light-emitting state. Similarly, the defense button 3740 may be formed from a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 may be set to a predetermined light-emitting state in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, thereby setting the defense button 3740 to a predetermined light-emitting state.

Rather than placing the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 may be placed at the top end of the left lever 3720 in place of the attack button 3710. Alternatively, the mission button 3700 may be placed at the top end of the right lever 3730 in place of the defense button 3740. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which two or three of these buttons are placed at the top end of one lever.
With this configuration, the lever can be tilted and one or more buttons can be pressed with one hand.

Figure 303 shows an embodiment configured to execute a presentation displaying the player's tank as a reach presentation while the decorative symbols are changing. Figure 303(a) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. When a start winning occurs in the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the left, center, and right decorative symbols start to change.

Figure 303 (b) shows the state where the left, center, and right decorative symbols appear from the top of the display area and are displayed in a fluctuating manner as they disappear downwards. The decorative symbols may be displayed as a symbol representing a miss without forming a reach state, as a symbol representing a miss that forms a reach state, or as a symbol representing a jackpot that forms a reach state.

Figure 303 (c) shows the state where the "3" symbols on the left and right are temporarily displayed and a reach state is formed. In this embodiment, as a reach effect, it is possible to execute a tank reach effect in which the player's tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

Figure 303 (d) shows the state where the display of the player's tank has begun as a tank reach effect. Specifically, the player's tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area.

Figure 303(e) shows a state in which the player's tank and an enemy tank are engaged in combat. Figure 303(f) shows a state in which the player's tank has arrived at the destination. These function as effects suggesting the results of a special lottery. For example, an effect display is executed to show whether the player's tank can defeat the enemy tank shown in Figure 303(e), or whether the player's tank will be defeated by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 303(f), an effect display is executed to show whether the player's tank can reach the destination without being defeated by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery.

Figure 303 (g) shows how the display of the decorative patterns stops changing when the result of the special lottery is a miss. Also, Figure 303 (h) shows how the display of the decorative patterns stops changing when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Images of the player's tank, enemy tank, roads, etc. end displaying just before the decorative patterns stop changing.

With reference to FIG. 303, an example of a presentation in which the player's tank is displayed in the display area as a reach presentation has been shown, but the presentation may be configured to display the player's tank across multiple decorative pattern variations. For example, the presentation may be configured to start execution of the presentation to display the player's tank by predicting the results of a special lottery for a reserve that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and to be executed across multiple pattern variations to suggest the result of the decorative pattern variation corresponding to the predicted reserve. Alternatively, the presentation to display the player's tank may be executed from the start to the end of a jackpot, or the presentation to display the tank may be executed from the end of a jackpot until a predetermined number of decorative pattern variations (e.g., 10 times) are performed, thereby suggesting what kind of game state has changed at the end of the jackpot (for example, whether the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state). In this way, the subject suggested by the presentation of the player's tank is not limited to the result of a special lottery (e.g., the likelihood of a jackpot occurring), but may also suggest, for example, the game state.

Figure 304 shows a performance situation that requires the player to operate either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 with the left hand and rotate the handlebars 302 with the right hand. During the performance in which the player's tank is displayed, the player's tank basically moves forward automatically. At this time, the player can change the speed of the player's tank or move it left or right by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730. Specifically, as shown in Figure 304, the player can increase the speed of the player's tank by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen by the player. The player can also decrease the speed of the player's tank by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen by the player. The player can also move the player's tank to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen by the player. Additionally, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as viewed by the player, the player's tank can be moved to the left.

In the embodiment shown, one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move the player's tank, but the configuration may be such that an effect can be executed in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. Note that, since a reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the usual fluctuation of decorative patterns, is generated, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and can use both hands to operate various buttons such as the left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and mission button 3700, thereby making the effect more interesting.

During the performance in which the player's tank is displayed, the player's tank basically automatically moves forward. At this time, the speed of the tank can be changed or moved left and right by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 305, the speed of the tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen by the player. The speed of the tank can be decreased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen by the player. The tank can be moved to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen by the player. The tank can be moved to the left by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen by the player.

In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted forward as viewed by the player, it is possible to greatly increase the speed compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted backward as viewed by the player, it is possible to greatly decrease the speed compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the right as viewed by the player, it is possible to move the tank farther to the right compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the left as viewed by the player, it is possible to greatly move the tank farther to the left compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the direction of movement of the tank can be changed using the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, making it possible to perform effects such as avoiding attacks from enemy forces and moving forward while avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks placed on the field.

The basic usage of the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in a tank reach will be explained. Operating the mission button 3700 makes it possible to fire bullets forward from the machine gun mounted on the player's tank. Operating the attack button 3710 makes it possible to fire shells forward from the artillery turret mounted on the player's tank. Operating the defense button 3740 makes it possible to set up a defensive shield in front of the player's tank to defend against attacks from enemy tanks. Note that the functions assigned to each button may differ depending on the situation of the performance.

In this embodiment, a new condition is adopted as a condition for changing the game state. Below, the new condition for changing the game state is explained with reference to Figures 306 and 307.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, the first special symbol display 1403 displays the variation of the special symbol and displays the result of the first special lottery. Also, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the variation of the special symbol.
Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004, the second special symbol display 1405 displays the variation of the special symbol and displays the result of the second special lottery. Also, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the variation of the special symbol.
In addition, if the result of the normal lottery drawn when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 is a "win," the second starting port 2004 can change from a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball to a state in which it is possible to accept the game ball.

In this embodiment, the selection mode of the special pattern can be either a state in which the probability that the selection result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot" is low (probability: 1/300) or a state in which the probability that the selection result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot" is high (probability: 1/30).
In addition, with regard to the selection mode of the normal symbols, it is possible to have a state in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is long (average 30 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol selection result will be a "win" lottery result is low (probability: 1/100), and a state in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is short (average 2.0 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol selection result will be a "win" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
The following four game states can be achieved by combining these.
1: Normal state in which the probability that the special pattern lottery result will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the normal pattern fluctuation time is long, and the normal lottery result is a low probability of being a "win" lottery result.
2: A time-saving state in which the probability that the special pattern lottery result will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the time it takes for the normal patterns to change is short, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-saving special state in which the probability that the special pattern will result in a "jackpot" is high, the normal pattern fluctuates for a long time, and the probability that the normal pattern will result in a "win" is low.
4: A special probability state in which the probability that the special pattern will result in a "jackpot" is high, the time for the normal patterns to fluctuate is short, and the probability that the normal pattern will result in a "win" is high.
In addition to these game states, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a "jackpot", the following state will occur.
5: A big win state in which the big win opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. During the big win state, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.
FIG. 306 is a table showing these five game states.
In this embodiment, five game states are possible. When a certain condition is satisfied during a game, the game state changes from one of the game states to another. FIG. 307 shows the game state transition conditions.

The time-saving state transitions to the normal state on the condition that the number of occurrences of a special lottery result of a miss after the time-saving state has been entered reaches a predetermined number. For example, when the big win state ends and the time-saving state is entered, and the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving state reaches 100, the game state transitions to the normal state.
The non-time-saving probability variable state and probability variable state continue until a jackpot game state occurs.

In this embodiment, there are three special lottery results: "Miss", "Miss with time reduction", and "Big win".

If the special lottery result is a "lose," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the large prize opening 2005 does not open or close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. Also, the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "win" is increased, and a "time-saving state" in which the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short does not occur.

If the special lottery result is a "miss with time reduction," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the large prize opening 2005 does not open or close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and the game state transitions to a "time-saving state" in which the probability of the normal lottery result being a "win" is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is a "miss with time reduction," if the game state is in the time-saving state, non-time-saving special probability state, or special probability state, the transition to the time-saving state is not made. Note that a "miss with time reduction" may occur with a predetermined probability. For example, the probability of a "jackpot" occurring among the special lottery results may be set to 1/300, the probability of a "miss" occurring to 298/300, and the probability of a "miss with time reduction" occurring to 1/300.

If the special lottery result is a "jackpot," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the jackpot state ends, the game state transitions to one of the following states based on the predetermined jackpot breakdown: normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving special probability state, or special probability state. The rate of transitions after a jackpot state can be set appropriately, and the number of game states that can be transitioned to after a jackpot may be less than four. For example, after a jackpot state, the rate of transition to special probability state may be 50%, the rate of transition to time-saving state may be 50%, and the rate of transition to normal state or non-time-saving special probability state may be 0%.

On the other hand, if the "miss with time-saving feature" is not adopted, the number of consecutive misses in the special lottery results in the normal state is counted, and when the number of consecutive misses in the special lottery results reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the game state transitions from the normal state to the time-saving state without opening or closing the large prize opening 2005.
In addition, even if the number of times the special lottery result is a miss during the time-saving state, non-time-saving special probability state, or special probability state reaches a predetermined specific number of times (for example, 500 times), a transition to the time-saving state will not occur.

The transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on a miss with time-saving and the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special lotteries may be either one or both.

By adopting a "miss with time-saving" as the special lottery result, it is possible to transition the game state from the normal state to the time-saving state without any balls being dispensed. Also, it is possible to receive the special lottery result in the time-saving state, where game balls are less likely to be consumed compared to the normal state.

In addition, by executing the special lottery a specific number of times, the game state transitions from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, it becomes possible to receive the special lottery results in the time-saving state, where game balls are less likely to be lost than in the normal state.

The breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be the same as the breakdown of the jackpot when the second special lottery result is a jackpot.
Alternatively, the breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be different from the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be 50% for a normal state jackpot and 50% for a time-saving state jackpot, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot may be 20% for a time-saving state jackpot and 80% for a probability variable state jackpot.

Below, we will explain an embodiment of the reach effect and the conditions for changing the game state that are executed using such an operation unit, along with the display content displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Conventionally, an effect has been performed in which an image of a character or the like is displayed on a display means to suggest the result of the change display of a decorative pattern (for example, JP 2016-179063 A, JP 2010-022544 A). For example, an image of a predetermined character is displayed before the change of the decorative pattern stops, thereby suggesting to the player that the probability that the change display result of the decorative pattern will be a jackpot is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%).
However, some players may not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, if a certain suggestive effect is displayed multiple times, but the results of the last multiple variable displays in which the suggestive effect was displayed are all display results indicating a miss, the player may feel distrustful of the suggestive effect, such as "I wonder if it will miss again...", or may feel that the suggestive effect is unlucky, and may not want to see the suggestive effect. This tendency is prominent in suggestive effects that require the player to operate a specified operating unit, and a display showing a specified expectation level is made based on the operation reception. In such cases, the player may lose interest if he or she is forced to view a suggestive effect that he or she does not want to see, even though he or she has taken the trouble to operate the operating means.

In addition, there are players who prefer to be clearly informed of the results of the variable display, rather than having the results suggested with an indeterminate degree of expectation. For such players, being shown a suggestive performance with a low degree of expectation (for example, 10%) may actually reduce their interest.

However, in the past, the presence of such players was not taken into consideration, and there was room for improvement in the manner in which suggestive effects were executed. In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment is described that takes into consideration the presence of such players and is configured to prevent a decline in interest.

Below, with reference to Figure 308 etc., we will explain the "Shield Bullet Reach" in which a defensive shield is displayed by firing shield bullets from a newly developed player's tank capable of firing shield bullets during a battle scene between the player's tank and an enemy tank.

FIG. 308 is a time chart showing the progress of the "shield bullet reach" of this embodiment. In this time chart, when the execution of the performance pattern in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed for 34 seconds in response to one start winning is determined in the main control board 1310, the progress of the performance mode in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed for 34 seconds in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 by the control of the peripheral control board 1510 is shown. After the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is completed, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are executed for 1 second. In addition, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol, an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed, but the details will be described later.
In addition, Figures 309 and 310 show the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a specific timing of the time chart described with reference to Figure 308.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 308, the timing is indicated as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., depending on the time elapsed, in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the other embodiments and effects examples described below, unless otherwise noted.

Furthermore, each of the embodiments shown in Figures 313 to 360 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 308 to 312. Therefore, for configurations that are not specifically mentioned in the explanation of each of the embodiments shown in Figures 313 to 360 (for example, the display mode when the decorative pattern starts to change, the display mode when it stops, etc.), the embodiments shown in Figures 308 to 312 can be applied.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 308, the display of the decorative symbols begins at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the display of the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right is performed as shown in FIG. 303(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303(c), when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed as the same symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") in a provisionally stopped state and a reach state occurs, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the player's tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. In addition, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, the operation of the defense button 3740 is accepted.

Figure 309 (a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. The display area shows the state in which each of the decorative patterns ("3", "↓", "3") that are in a reach state is displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the player's tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, an image of the road along which the player's tank moves is displayed in the left-right center of the display area, an image of the horizon and sky is displayed in the upper part of the display area, an image of the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image is displayed in the lower right of the display area, and an image of the dialogue of "Sergeant Might", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image is displayed in the lower left of the display area. The player himself is set as a lieutenant who operates the player's tank, and a performance is performed in which the player moves through the battlefield in his tank together with "Colonel Dyna", who is a higher rank than a lieutenant, and "Sergeant Might", who is a lower rank than a lieutenant. This configuration makes it possible to increase the sense of immersion in the virtual reality reach performance.

As shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 309(a), pressing and holding the defense button 3740 will cause an effect in which a shield image is displayed in front of the player's tank, but more details will be given later.

At time t9, the image of a white enemy tank begins to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and moves to the left. Figure 309(b) shows the state at time t10 in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road.

At timing t11, the image of a white enemy tank that has been moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At this timing, the image of the white enemy tank may be replaced with an image of a red enemy tank. At the same time, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, and an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation valid period of the attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
Two types of enemy tank images are prepared as images of enemy tanks to be displayed on the road: a white enemy tank image and a red enemy tank image, and the display ratio of the enemy tank images is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot when the red enemy tank image is displayed than when the white enemy tank image is displayed.
In addition, two types of simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710 are provided: a white simulated image and a red simulated image, and the display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot when the red simulated image is displayed than when the white simulated image is displayed.

The combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may indicate the likelihood of a big win.
For example, the appearance rate may be set so that the expected rate is 10% when the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 are both white, the expected rate is 20% when one of the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 is white and the other is red, and the expected rate is 30% when the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 are both red.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by configuring only one of the enemy tank image and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 to change from white to red. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, a pattern may be prepared in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is 100%, that is, the occurrence of a jackpot is confirmed when that combination is displayed.

Figure 309 (c) shows a state at timing t12 in which a white mock image of the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area.

On the other hand, Figure 309(e) shows a state in which a red mock image of the attack button 3710 and an image of a red enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12.

If the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell flying out of the player's tank's turret is displayed, and the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of it being destroyed. An image of an exploding shell is also displayed. The display of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 ends.

Figure 308(b) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710. Also, Figure 308(c) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710.

The display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding continues for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding continues until timing t16.

Two types of images of exploding shells are provided: an image of a medium shell explosion and an image of a large shell explosion. The display rate is set so that the greater the explosion, the higher the expectation of a big win. For example, the occurrence rate of the effect may be set so that when an image of a medium shell explosion is displayed, the expectation rate increases by +10%, and when an image of a large shell explosion is displayed, the expectation rate increases by +20%, compared to the expectation rate indicated by the enemy tank image and the image imitating the attack button 3710 that had been displayed up until that point.

Figure 309(d) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a moderately exploded shell are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, Figure 309(f) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a large shell explosion are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. Note that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 309(e), in addition to the image of a destroyed red enemy tank, either an image of a medium shell explosion or an image of a large shell explosion is displayed on the road. In this way, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same.

FIG. 308(c) is a time chart showing the display contents in the display area when no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 within the valid operation period. When no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 within the valid operation period, at timing t14, which is the end timing of the valid operation period, an image effect of a shell flying out from the player's tank is displayed, and the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed tank. In addition, either an image of a medium-sized shell exploding or an image of a large shell exploding is displayed. The destruction image is displayed for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, the player will see the same display effects, except for the timing of the display and the left-right position of the enemy tank, regardless of whether or not the player operates the attack button 3710. The player will then recognize the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot based on the presentation mode of the displayed effect.

This display effect is performed from timing t9 to a maximum of timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and then the same effect is performed again from timing t17 to a maximum of timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). The effect performed again also suggests the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.

In the above example, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). However, it is also possible to have a pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or to have a pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the latter timing. It is also possible to have a pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed at two timings. In this case, the "shield bullet reach" effect ends without the player operating the attack button 3710.

It is advisable to set the occurrence rate of the presentation pattern so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for a presentation pattern in which an enemy tank is displayed than for a presentation pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. It is also advisable to set the occurrence rate of the presentation pattern so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for a presentation pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than for a presentation pattern in which the enemy tank moves only once and is destroyed. With this configuration, when this suggestion presentation is executed, the enemy tank may move and be destroyed 0 to 2 times, which increases the player's expectations for the appearance mode (color and number of times) of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank. It is also possible to configure the presentation pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed three or more times to be executable.

Figure 308(d) is a time chart showing the display contents when no operation is performed on the defense button 3740. As shown in Figure 308(d), when no operation is performed on the defense button 3740, no effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is performed. Figures 309(c) to 309(f) show the display state in the display area when no effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is performed.

Next, we will explain the display state in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated.

By pressing and holding the defense button 3740 during the operation valid period of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), a shield image set to prevent attacks from enemy tanks is displayed between the image of the player's tank and the image of the enemy tank. Note that the condition for determining that a long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed for 0.5 seconds. Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the display of the shield image continues.
In the figure, the shape of the shield image is a horizontally long oval, but the shape of the shield image may be configured to change dynamically during display. The shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, when the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the shield image may gradually become smaller after the shield image starts to be displayed, and when the shield image is no longer displayed, a shield bullet is automatically fired and explodes, and a new shield image is displayed. Such a display mode may be repeatedly performed as the continuation of the display of the shield image.

Figure 308 (e) is a time chart showing the display state when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held during the effective operation period of the defense button 3740. As shown in this time chart, a shield image is displayed from timing t7 when it is determined that the player is pressing and holding the button for a long time, to timing t24 when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long press ends. By displaying a shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, and the destruction state of the enemy tank.

For example, Figure 310(a) shows the display state that is displayed when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 during the period when the enemy tank image is not displayed (for example, from timing t6 to timing t9) after the display shown in Figure 309(a) has been performed. As shown in the figure, a shield image is displayed based on the detection of a long press of the defense button 3740. In addition, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

Figure 310(b) shows a state in which a shield image is displayed at a specific timing (e.g., timing t9 to timing t11) while an image of an enemy tank is displayed and moving toward the road. In other words, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 309(b), the display state shown in Figure 310(b) will result.

Figures 310(c) and 310(e) show a display state in which a shield image is displayed when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed (for example, from timing t11 to timing t14). That is, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 309(c), the display state shown in Figure 310(c) will result. Similarly, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 309(e), the display state shown in Figure 310(e) will result.

At this time, the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 suggest the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot, but because these images are hidden by the shield image, it is difficult to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot.

Figures 310(d) and 310(f) show an example of a state in which a shield image is displayed when an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, from timing t12 to timing t15 when an operation is performed, and from timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed). That is, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 309(d), the display state will be as shown in Figure 310(d). Similarly, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 309(f), the display state will be as shown in Figure 310(f).

At this time, the manner in which the shell explodes and the color of the image of the destroyed enemy tank suggest the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot, but these images are hidden by a shield image, making it difficult to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot.

To hide the image of the enemy tank, the mock image of the attack button 3710, or the explosion of a shell using a shield image, the display priority of the shield image may be set higher than the display priority of the image of the enemy tank, the mock image of the attack button 3710, or the image of a shell. Also, the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be set higher than the display priority of the shield image.

The operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is from timing t5, when the reach effect begins, to timing t27, after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Even if the defense button 3740 is pressed and held down, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the effective operation period for the defense button 3740 ends.

With this configuration, the display indicating the degree of expectation can be made difficult to see according to the player's preferences, making it possible to provide a stress-free gaming environment for players who do not want to know their degree of expectation.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area, as shown in FIG. 309(b), the player can make the image indicating the expectation level that is displayed thereafter difficult to see, depending on the player's preference or mood of the day.

Referring to Figs. 309(a) to 309(f) and Figs. 310(a) to 310(f), an embodiment has been shown in which the colors of the simulated images of the enemy tanks and the attack button 3710 are white or red, but in addition to these, a configuration may be made in which a performance pattern is executed in which a simulated image of the enemy tank or the attack button 3710 is displayed in gold, which has a 100% expectation rate. In particular, it is preferable to configure it to be displayed the first time in a pattern in which a simulated image of the enemy tank or the attack button 3710 is displayed twice. In this case, the player can enjoy the "shield bullet reach" performance in which the jackpot is confirmed to occur by ceasing the long press of the defense button 3740 for the second display of the enemy tank image, without the shield image being displayed.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a player may mistakenly operate the defense button 3740 instead of the attack button 3710. In this case, it may be difficult to visually recognize the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a moving enemy tank, the image of an enemy tank being destroyed, and the image of an exploding shell, which may actually reduce interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is simply pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, the shield image is not displayed immediately, which can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player who wants to see a suggestive performance feels stressed.

In the embodiment shown, the display of the shield image ends when the long press on the defense button 3740 ends, but the display of the shield image may continue for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

The shield image may be configured so that when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, the shield image becomes larger in a concentric manner, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image becomes smaller in a concentric manner. For example, the shield image may be configured so that it becomes larger in a concentric manner over two seconds, and the shield image becomes smaller in a concentric manner over two seconds. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, the visibility of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the enemy tank image is restored by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player who wants to see a suggestive performance feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the expectation level may be changed from one of the display modes of a mode in which it is not hidden at all, a mode in which it is partially hidden, or a mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode.

Although an example has been given in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation, the display mode of the shield image being displayed may be configured to be changeable without the player's operation. For example, the size of the shield image may be configured to automatically increase or decrease, the shape of the shield image may change periodically, or the transparency of the shield image may change. These display modes may also be combined. By changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the expectation level (the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the enemy tank image) may be configured to change from one of the display modes of not being hidden at all, partially hidden, or completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode.

Instead of or in addition to pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, a configuration may be made in which a shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds when it is detected that the defense button 3740 has been repeatedly pressed by the player. FIG. 308(f) is a time chart showing such a modified presentation mode. In this time chart, it is shown that a shield image is displayed in a period from timing t10 to timing t16 and a period from timing t18 to timing t24 based on the detection of the player's repeated pressing of the defense button 3740. Note that a condition for determining that a repeated press has been performed may be pressing the button four or more times in one second. Note that after the shield image is displayed, it is not necessary to continue the repeated pressing, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (six seconds).
Note that, instead of pressing and holding the defense button 3740 or tapping it repeatedly, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be conducted so that a shield image is displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Also, the shield image may be configured to be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed simultaneously. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 302 is used, the shield image may be configured to be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while tilting the right lever 3730 forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition related to the defense button 3740 is met based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a shield image is immediately displayed even if the player accidentally operates the defense button 3740, and the visibility of the suggestive performance is not hindered.

It may be configured so that, when the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect in which only the attack button 3710 is operated is a result showing a miss a predetermined number of times in succession (e.g., three or five times), the operation reception for the defense button 3740 is enabled, and a "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display in which the "shield bullet reach" is executed is a result showing a jackpot, the operation reception for the defense button 3740 is disabled, and the display of the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated until the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect in which only the attack button 3710 is operated is a result showing a miss a predetermined number of times in succession (e.g., three or five times). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the special lottery results are consecutive misses, while disabling the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to be longer than the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. For example, in this embodiment, the enemy tank's movement time before the operation valid period is set to 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed based on pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, once the display of the shield image starts, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 can be kept hidden until the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 ends, reducing the operational burden on the player.

After the attack button 3710 is operated, or at the end of the effective period of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed, but the display time of the shield image may be determined so that these images are also hidden by the shield image. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of the image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, the image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed for a maximum of three seconds, and the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds, but the display time of the shield image may be longer than the total of these times (for example, 10 seconds). With this configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, it is possible to hide both the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding shell with the shield image.

The display of the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined time may be configured so that the player can stop it. For example, the display of the shield image may be configured to end by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed. With this configuration, a situation in which a visual representation of the representation suggesting the degree of expectation is being executed can be quickly provided to a player who notices that a representation indicating high expectation is actually being executed by visually recognizing part of the representation suggesting the degree of expectation. Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when a suggestive representation indicating a degree of expectation above a predetermined level is started. For example, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when an image of a gold enemy tank with a degree of expectation of 100% or a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is configured to be stopped when a simple condition such as pressing a button is satisfied, the player may mistakenly press a button, which could result in the presentation mode being easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable to stop the display of the shield image when a specific condition is satisfied based on pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

When a shield image is being displayed, a configuration may be made to display a method of operation for stopping the display of the shield image. For example, a line such as "You coward! Press the mission button to release the shield!" or "You coward! Press the defense button 3740 to release the shield!" may be displayed in the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna." With such a configuration, even if the player accidentally displays a shield image, it is possible to quickly end the display of the shield image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 308(e), the operation of the defense button 3740 can be accepted multiple times during the valid period, so that the shield image can be displayed multiple times. Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is pressed and held, the display time of the shield image is extended and it is displayed continuously. This makes it possible to make the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell all difficult to see.

The display effect may be configured to be executable such that the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the currently displayed shield image is terminated. For example, the display of the shield image may be terminated at the timing when an image suggesting high expectation (e.g., a red or gold image) is displayed, and the player may not be able to display the shield image for a predetermined period during which the image suggesting high expectation is displayed, or until the display of the decorative pattern suggesting high expectation is terminated. Alternatively, during the display of the shield image, a start winning occurs in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the display of the shield image is terminated at the timing when it is determined that a high expectation performance is to be performed based on the pre-reading result of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball, and the "shield bullet reach" performance is continued for the period until the display of the decorative pattern that is the subject of the pre-reading is terminated, and the player may not be able to display the shield image. In addition, as the display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Also, by displaying a predetermined image larger than the shield image, the expectation that a favorable state will occur for the player can be increased.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is started after the display of the decorative pattern changes starts, but the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 may be started simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 309(a) at timing t0.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is set to end before the display of the decorative pattern changes stops, but the operation acceptance of the defense button 3740 may be continued until the timing at which the display of the decorative pattern changes ends (timing t35). With this configuration, it is possible to make the stopping state of the decorative pattern indicating the special lottery result difficult to see by using the shield image, according to the player's intention.

These embodiments may be combined to make it possible to display a shield image from the start of the decorative pattern change (timing t0) until the change display ends (timing t35).

In the embodiment shown, the shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 6 seconds) on the condition that the defense button 3740 is pressed repeatedly or a 1/3 lottery is held when the defense button 3740 is operated, but the predetermined time may be configured to be set by the player. For example, during a demo period when no decorative pattern variations are being displayed and no jackpot play is being played, the display time of the shield image may be configured to be between 5 and 60 seconds, for example, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the shield image in a manner that suits the player's mood.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be configured so that the player can set it based on the number of times the decorative pattern changes. For example, if the number of times the decorative pattern changes is set to 20, then the player will be able to operate the defense button 3740 to display a shield image during a tank reach performance that occurs during the period from when the player sets the period until the number of times the decorative pattern changes reaches 20 rotations. On the other hand, if the player does not set the period, the shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during a tank reach performance.

Even if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, a new shield image will not be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive effects from being executed. On the other hand, if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, the display time of the currently displayed shield image may be extended from the point in time when the conditions for displaying the shield image are met. With this configuration, it is possible to continue hiding suggestive effects with the shield image while suppressing excessive effects.

On the other hand, if a condition for displaying a shield image again is met while a shield image is being displayed, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the currently displayed shield image may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or the new shield image may be displayed in addition to the currently displayed shield image. With this configuration, the time during which a shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which a shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Also, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the type of image of the enemy tank, the type of simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the type of image of an exploding shell. In this case, the degree of expectation is also indicated to the player by the output sound effects.
On the other hand, for players who do not want to know the expectation level, the output of such a special sound is not desirable. Therefore, when displaying a shield image, the output of a special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. The output of the special sound may be continued until the display of the shield image is finished.
In addition, when the special sound is output, the volume of the special sound may be suppressed. The suppression of the volume of the special sound may be continued until the display of the shield image ends. In addition, the volume of the special sound may be made larger than the volume of the special sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
With this configuration, the effect sound can be made hard to hear due to a drop in volume or due to a special sound, so that even if the effect sound suggests the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation indicated can be made difficult to understand.
It is also possible to configure the system so that a predetermined sound effect that does not indicate the degree of expectation is output when an enemy tank appears. In this case, a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation can display a shield image and start outputting a special sound by quickly operating the defense button 3740 when he hears the predetermined sound effect.

The suggestive effects may be made executable even in a game state that is favorable to the player, such as a time-saving state in which the decorative pattern changes over a short period of time, or a probability-changing state in which the probability of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot is increased. In this case, the configuration may be such that the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740 in a game state in which a jackpot is more likely to occur than usual, making it difficult to see the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, or the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and to prevent the player from missing a highly anticipated effect.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effects can be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state or a probability-varying state, a shield image may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. By configuring in this way, the suggestive effects can be hidden even in a game state in which a jackpot is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image may be made smaller and the display time of the shield image may be shortened compared to the normal state, thereby slightly increasing the visibility of the suggestive effects hidden by the shield image.

In addition, during a jackpot game state, a suggestive effect may be made executable. In this case, the suggestive effect may notify the player of the likelihood of another jackpot occurring after the jackpot game state ends by reading ahead on the reserve, or may notify the player of the likelihood of transitioning to a time-saving state or probability-varying state, which are more advantageous than the normal state, after the jackpot ends. For example, when a 10-round jackpot is being executed, such a suggestive effect may be performed from the third round to the fifth round. This configuration prevents the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740 at a timing when the game state that occurs after a jackpot can be known, making it difficult to see the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, or the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

On the other hand, if suggestive effects can be executed during a jackpot, a shield image may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. With this configuration, suggestive effects can be hidden even during a jackpot. This makes it difficult for players who do not want to know the game state after a jackpot to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the game state after a jackpot.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the player's tank moves along a road may be executed across multiple changes in the decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect based on pending look-ahead in the normal state.
In this case, the display performance of the player's tank moving along the road may be configured to continue from the start of the decorative pattern change multiple times until the change stops. Also, during the decorative pattern change, the expectation of a big win for the reserved ball that was the subject of the pre-reading may be indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, or the like, as described above, or a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, making these images difficult to see. The display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across multiple display changes of the decorative pattern.
The pending image that is the subject of pre-reading may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In this way, by suggesting that the player's tank moves along the road across the variation of multiple decorative patterns, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the presentation.

In the case where the game state is shifted to the jackpot state by the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the player's tank moves on the road, if a jackpot occurs, the display effect of the player's tank moving may be continued during or after the jackpot state. In addition, after the jackpot game state occurs, the expectation of a jackpot occurring again after the jackpot game state ends may be notified by performing a reserved reading ahead, or the expectation of whether or not the game state will move to a time-saving state or a probability-varying state, which are more advantageous than the normal state, after the jackpot ends may be notified by a suggestive effect in which the player's tank moves on the road. Furthermore, in the case where the game state is shifted to a time-saving state or a probability-varying state after a jackpot, the suggestive effect of the player's tank moving on the road may be continued until the time-saving state or the probability-varying state ends. In this case, too, the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 may be configured to make it difficult to see the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the explosion of a shell, and the like.
In addition, the shield image may be configured to be displayed across the decorative pattern changing display state, the decorative pattern stationary display state, the big win game state, and the decorative pattern changing state after the big win game state.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the presentation.

Although an example has been given in which a portion of the image of the enemy tank is made invisible by the shield image, the shield image may be configured to make the entire image of the enemy tank invisible.
Fig. 311(a) shows a modified example of the example of the effect shown with reference to Fig. 310(e). In the example of the effect shown in Fig. 311(a), the entire image of the enemy tank and a part of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by a shield image.

An example has been shown in which a portion of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is made invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be configured to make all of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 invisible.
Fig. 311(b) shows a modified example of the performance example shown with reference to Fig. 310(e). In the performance example shown in Fig. 311(b), a part of the image of the enemy tank and the entire simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by a shield image.

An example has been given in which the shield image makes the image of the destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion mode of the shell invisible, but the shield image may be configured to make all of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the shell invisible.
Fig. 311(c) shows a modified example of the example shown in Fig. 310(d). In the example shown in Fig. 311(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion of the shell are all hidden by a shield image.

In the above example, the shield image is opaque, and the image of the enemy tank, which has a lower display priority than the shield image, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion of the shell are made invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be made semi-transparent so that these images, which have a lower display priority, can be seen through the shield image.

In this way, the entire simulated image imitating the first operating unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operating unit can be displayed in a hidden manner by the image displayed based on the operation on the second operating unit, so that the degree of expectation suggested by these images can be hidden.
Furthermore, since it is possible to display a simulated image that mimics the first operating unit and part of the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operating unit in a hidden manner by an image that is displayed based on the operation on the second operating unit, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while recognizing that an image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed by these images.
Also, the degree of expectation may be indicated by only a portion of these images, and the portion indicating the degree of expectation may be partially or entirely hidden by a shield image.

In the above example, the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, but instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image, the shape or size of the simulated image itself may be different. The shape or size of the simulated image itself may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation. Here, it is preferable to configure the area that protrudes from the shield image to be larger when the degree of expectation is high. A similar configuration may also be adopted for the image of the enemy tank, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the shell. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be obscured by the shield image when the degree of expectation is high.

In a state where a shield image is displayed, a larger shield image may be displayed by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing and holding the defense button 3740 further or repeatedly tapping it, etc.). Also, this larger shield image may be configured to hide more of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion state of the shell, compared to a normal shield image.
With this configuration, the player can be involved in determining the proportion of images suggesting the degree of expectation that are hidden, which can further increase interest.

Fig. 312(a) to Fig. 312(d) show modified examples of the presentation example shown with reference to Fig. 309(c). Fig. 312(a) shows a presentation example in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710. Fig. 312(b) shows a presentation example in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710. Fig. 312(c) shows a presentation example in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710. Fig. 312(d) shows a presentation example in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710.
The device is configured so that the probability of winning is higher when a large-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed than when a small-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed.
With this configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image becomes larger, allowing the player to recognize that the degree of expectation is high.
In addition, the image is not limited to the mock image, and the image of the enemy tank or the image of a destroyed enemy tank may be configured to have different shapes and sizes to indicate the degree of expectation.

Examples have been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell, but an embodiment applied to one image may be applied to an embodiment for another image. Alternatively, an embodiment applied to a number of images may be applied to an embodiment for a number of other images.

Examples have been given in which the degree of expectation is suggested by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell, but the degree of expectation may also be suggested by the display manner of a portion of these images. In this case, it is preferable to configure the image so that at least this portion is hidden by a shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the progress of the presentation, while making the degree of expectation unrecognizable or difficult to perceive.

In this way, according to the "shield bullet reach" of this embodiment, the predetermined image showing the expectation level related to the first operation unit is made difficult to see by the image displayed by operating the second operation unit, so that players who do not want to know the expectation level can be offered the option of hiding the expectation level, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with multiple operation units have been known (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). In addition, the effective period during which operations on the operation units can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern changes. Therefore, even if some players have a strong desire to operate the operation units, they may feel irritated that they cannot operate the operation units. In addition, if an operation is performed during the effective period, a display performance corresponding to the operation is always performed, which can lead to a feeling of monotony in operating the operation units. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, taking into consideration the existence of players who think like this, an operation means that can be operated for a long period of time during the decorative pattern changes is provided, and a special display change is not always given in response to an operation on the operation units, but is further configured to be given on the condition that a specific condition is met.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 308 etc. will be described below with reference to the time charts shown in Fig. 313 to Fig. 316 and the display examples shown in Fig. 317 and Fig. 318. In the "Special Machine Gun Reach" performance in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 308.
On the other hand, in the "Special Machine Gun Reach" performance, a performance pattern is executed in which operation acceptance is enabled for the mission button 3700, not the defense button 3740. The decorative pattern of the mission button 3700 becomes a reach state, and operation acceptance is enabled at the timing (timing t5) when the reach performance in which the player's tank moves begins. Operation acceptance ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank has been displayed twice.

The period during which the operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which the operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14), and the period during which the operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid includes the period during which the operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is valid. Also, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to the operation acceptance during the valid operation period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, a display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily given, and a display change displayed in the display area is given with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/3). For example, each time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a probability of 1/3 is held, and if a winning result is obtained, an image of a bullet fired from a special machine gun hitting an enemy tank and causing an explosion is displayed in the display area for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image of the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period during which acceptance of operations of the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27), indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid.

The time chart in Figure 313 shows an example of the presentation when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 313, the variable display of the decorative symbols starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the variable display of the left, center, and right decorative symbols is performed as shown in FIG. 303(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303(c), when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") and a reach state occurs, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the player's tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. In addition, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, the operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 is enabled.

Figure 317(a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. The display area shows the various decorative patterns ("3", "↓", "3") that are in reach at the top left of the display area, an image of the player's tank at the bottom center of the display area, an image of the road along which the player's tank will move at the left-right center of the display area, an image of a horizon and sky at the top of the display area, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image at the bottom right of the display area, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image at the bottom left of the display area, and a mock image of the mission button 3700 at the top left of the window image displaying the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna".

As shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 317(a), by operating the mission button 3700, bullets are fired from the special machine gun of the player's tank and displayed as moving bullets, which will be described in more detail later.

At time t9, the image of a white enemy tank begins to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and moves to the left. Figure 309(b) shows the state at time t10 in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road.

At timing t11, an image of a white enemy tank that has been moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might." The effective operation period of the attack button 3710 continues for three seconds, from timing t11 to timing t14.

Figure 317(b) shows a state in which a white mock image that resembles the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. Also, Figure 317(c) shows a state in which a white mock image that resembles the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. The effective period for operating the attack button 3710 ends. Figure 317(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves off-screen and is no longer displayed.

The valid operation period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 continue until timing t27. At timing t27, the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 end.

After that, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display state shown in FIG. 303(f) is displayed, and at timing t34, the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. If the special lottery result is a miss, the display state shown in FIG. 303(g) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display state shown in FIG. 303(h) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35.

Referring to the time chart in Figure 313, an example of the presentation when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 314, an example of the presentation when the player operates the attack button 3710 is shown.

The time chart in Figure 314 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, a display of a moving cannonball is displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. Figure 317(e) shows an example of a display of a moving cannonball. In addition, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12, which is the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Figure 317(f) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 315, an example of the presentation when the player operates the mission button 3700 is shown.

The time chart in Figure 315 shows an example of a presentation when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. Figure 315(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Also, Figure 315(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 315(a), a bullet fired from the special machine gun is displayed moving from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 318(a) shows an example of the display in which the bullet is moving. Note that the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 315(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 318(b) is an example of a display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 315(b) is an example of a presentation in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a miss (selected with a 2/3 probability), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left. Also, an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed. FIG. 318(c) is an example of a display in a state in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to an image of a destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 316, we will show an example of the presentation when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700.

The time chart in Figure 316 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. Figure 316(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 and an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. Also, Figure 316(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 but an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 316(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving cannonball fired from a cannon turret and a moving bullet fired from a special machine gun are displayed. FIG. 318(d) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball and a bullet are moving. Also, at timing t12, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 316(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 318(e) is an example of a display showing a state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding bullet, and the image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the performance shown in FIG. 316(b) is an example of a performance in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 318(f) is an example of a display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

318(e), the size of the image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Also, the image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, the image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With this configuration, it is possible to make the display change that is not necessarily given based on the operation of the mission button 3700 stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to miss the display change given in this way.

When the player operates the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed in response to the operation. Thus, during the performance of moving the tank, the player can operate the attack button 3710 to display an explosion image and change the image of the enemy tank to a destroyed display mode, and then operate the mission button 3700 to add a further explosion image to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can also change the image of the enemy tank to an image of a destroyed enemy tank by operating only the mission button 3700, without operating the attack button 3710.

It is preferable to configure the display mode (color, size, shape, etc.) of at least one of the images of a destroyed enemy tank, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a method similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 308, etc. (color, size, shape, etc. of each image). Note that it is not necessary for these images to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

With this configuration, by operating the mission button 3700 and meeting certain conditions (a 1/3 chance of winning), the image of the enemy tank can be changed to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding bullet can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. By adding such a display change, the player feels that his operation of the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great joy at having gone to the trouble of causing the display change to appear, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The display priority of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is higher than that of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. This configuration ensures the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery win) is met in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, and prevents the player from becoming dissatisfied because the visibility of the image displayed by the operation of the mission button 3700 is impaired.

A plurality of display change modes with different appearance rates may be displayed in the display area in response to the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. For example, there are three destruction images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction, and the destruction images to be displayed may be selected so that the probability of a destruction image with a large degree of destruction being displayed is 10%, the probability of a destruction image with a medium degree of destruction being displayed is 30%, and the probability of a destruction image with a small degree of destruction being displayed is 60%. In addition, a destruction image of an enemy tank with a very large degree of destruction that is displayed with an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated may be provided. In this way, when a display change is made to appear with great difficulty, an even rarer display change is shown to the player. Instead of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be shown in an explosion image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, a shell may be automatically fired from the turret at the end of the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), and an image of the enemy tank being destroyed may be automatically displayed without the player having to operate the button. This configuration allows the player to concentrate on operating the mission button 3700.

In this embodiment, when no enemy tanks are displayed, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 to fire a bullet from the special machine gun of the player's tank, and display the bullet exploding when it hits the road. For example, by operating the mission button 3700 at timing t5, a display of a bullet moving from timing t5 to timing t6 is displayed. Furthermore, if the player wins the 1/3 lottery, an image of a bullet exploding when it hits the ground is displayed for three seconds from timing t6 to timing t9.
The operation timing at which an image of a moving enemy tank being destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank, or from timing t11 to timing t14, which is the effective operation period of the attack button 3710.

On the other hand, if the player operates the mission button 3700 before the attack button 3710 is operated and a 1/3 lottery is drawn, and a display of a bullet fired from the special machine gun of the player's tank hitting an enemy tank and exploding is performed, the display may be configured not to display an image of a moving shell or an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect that makes the player feel as if he or she has defeated the enemy tank with his or her own strength, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been produced with great effort. Also, by not displaying the image of an exploding shell, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been produced with great effort by operating the mission button 3700.
When the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where an image of an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed, an image of an exploding bullet may be additionally displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. In this case, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction as if he or she had destroyed the enemy tank.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 308 etc., the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of the enemy tank or the manner of destruction of the enemy tank. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank or the manner of destruction of the enemy tank is visible by the image of an exploding bullet displayed by operating the mission button 3700. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation can be ensured.
Furthermore, in the case of a suggestive performance with low expectation, by operating the mission button 3700 during a specified period of time after the suggestive performance has ended (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27), an image of an exploding bullet can be displayed once or multiple times, thereby restoring interest in the game that has waned due to the execution of a performance with low expectation.

Although an embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated has been shown, in addition to the mission button 3700, the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 may be operable, and the direction of the special machine gun may be changed left and right by the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720. When the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of the lottery winning when the mission button 3700 is operated may be 1/2, which is a probability that is more likely to win than 1/3, and when the special machine gun is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of the lottery winning when the mission button 3700 is operated may be 1/10, which is a probability that is less likely to win than 1/3. Furthermore, when the operation mode of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 is very appropriate, the probability of the lottery winning may be 100%. Conversely, when the operation mode of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 is very inappropriate, the probability of the lottery winning may be 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tank in a destroyed state, so that the player can feel more immersed in the game. Also, when an image of destroying the enemy tank is displayed, the player feels a great sense of accomplishment.

In addition, the game arcade may be configured so that the probability of winning the lottery can be changed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Alternatively, a real-time clock function may be used to change the probability of winning the lottery each week when the mission button 3700 is operated. With such a configuration, the appearance rate of the effects can be set according to the tendencies of the players who visit the arcade. For example, the probability of winning the lottery can be cyclically switched each day from 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, etc.

The mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which an operation instruction is displayed and a situation in which an operation instruction is not displayed during the period in which operation reception is enabled. For example, a performance pattern in which a mock image that imitates the mission button 3700 is displayed and a performance pattern in which a mock image that imitates the mission button 3700 is not displayed may be executable.

The selection of such presentation patterns may be configured so that a staff member at the gaming establishment can select which presentation pattern is to be executed, or a real-time clock function may be used to change which presentation pattern is to be executed each month. For example, only presentation patterns that do not display operation instructions may be executed for one month after the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and after one month has passed since the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, both presentation patterns that do not display operation instructions and presentation patterns that do display operation instructions may be executed. Alternatively, when a "special machine gun reach" is executed, either one of the presentation patterns that does not display operation instructions or the presentation pattern that displays operation instructions may be selected with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 50/50 probability).

By configuring in this way, in the case of a performance pattern in which no operation instructions are displayed, the display content in the display area can be simplified. It also prevents players who are not familiar with the game from becoming confused when multiple operation instructions are displayed. On the other hand, even in a situation in which no operation instructions are displayed, players who are familiar with the game can operate the mission button 3700 to fire bullets from the special machine gun of their tank, and display the appearance of the bullets exploding on impact.

An example has been shown in which a 1/3 lottery is held in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, a player hoping for a display change will press the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, there is a problem in that players may become bored if the operation of the mission button 3700 is simply by pressing it repeatedly. Therefore, it is also possible to configure the system so that a 1/3 lottery is held by another operation mode, for example, by pressing and holding the mission button 3700 for a long time. In this case, for example, it is recommended to configure the system so that one lottery is held each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second.

In addition, when it becomes possible to accept an operation of the mission button 3700, it is advisable to instruct the player which operation is required for the presentation pattern. For example, if the presentation pattern requires repeated taps of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed as "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", and if the presentation pattern requires a long press of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed as "Press and hold the mission button 3700!".

With this configuration, the player does not operate the mission button 3700 randomly, but instead feels a sense of tension as to which presentation pattern will be executed and which operation instruction will be presented. Also, since the number of times a lottery can be entered is smaller when the button is pressed for a long time than when the button is pressed repeatedly (since a continuous press can generally be performed several times per second), the player feels a greater sense of accomplishment when a presentation pattern that requires a long press results in an explosion of an enemy tank. In this way, by providing a plurality of presentation patterns with different levels of difficulty in displaying images, the interest in the game can be increased.
The appearance ratio of presentation patterns requiring rapid tapping and presentation patterns requiring a long press may be configured to be selectable by the arcade staff, or may be configured to be set using a real-time clock function.

Furthermore, when the player performs an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, a presentation pattern may be configured to be executable in which a bullet is displayed as being fired from a special machine gun.

For example, in a presentation pattern that displays "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", if the mission button 3700 is pressed repeatedly in accordance with the operational instructions, no display will be displayed to fire the special machine gun, but if a long press is performed, which is an operation different from the operational instructions, a lottery will be held with a 1/2 probability of winning every time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second, and if the lottery is won, a display will be displayed to fire the special machine gun.

Conversely, in a presentation pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700," if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held in accordance with the operational instructions, no display will be displayed showing the special machine gun being fired, but if a rapid press is performed, which is an operation different from the operational instructions, a lottery will be held with a 1/2 probability of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if the lottery is won, a display will be displayed showing the special machine gun being fired.

The device may be configured to display images of bullets exploding in different ways (preferably different colors or shapes) when the button is pressed and held and when it is pressed repeatedly.

Furthermore, a presentation pattern may be executed in which the line "To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button...what do I do...?" is displayed as the line of "Colonel Dyna". Internally, it is preferable to execute either a presentation pattern in which the mission button 3700 is requested to be pressed for a long time, or a presentation pattern in which the mission button 3700 is requested to be pressed repeatedly. Furthermore, if the operation mode performed by the player differs from the requested operation mode, a line such as "I remembered! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button repeatedly!" or "I remembered! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button for a long time!" may be displayed as the line of "Colonel Dyna" to prompt the player to perform the appropriate operation mode. In this way, if the operation performed by the player after estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or if the operation performed by the player after estimating the operation mode is inappropriate and the appropriate operation mode is displayed as an operation instruction and then the player performs the appropriate operation mode, an image of a bullet exploding in a special manner different from the case where the operation mode instruction display has been given beforehand may be displayed. Also, a different special sound effect may be output corresponding to each of the exploding images.

This configuration makes it possible to satisfy the rebellious spirit of a player who feels as if he or she is always being ordered around by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give a player a sense of surprise and satisfaction when they accidentally or intentionally perform an operation different from the instructions. In addition, since the player plays while guessing the operation mode of the operation unit, it is possible to increase the player's enthusiasm in participating in the game. Furthermore, the second operation unit may be displayed in a manner in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed, in which case the player's sense of satisfaction with the operation he or she performed is further increased.

Although an example has been shown in which a lottery is held by pressing and holding the mission button 3700 long or repeatedly, and a specific condition is met, and a display is displayed of the special machine gun being fired, other methods may be used to achieve the specific condition. For example, in a performance pattern that requires the mission button 3700 to be pressed long, a display may be configured to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun if the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds. Alternatively, in a performance pattern that requires the mission button 3700 to be pressed repeatedly, a display may be configured to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun if the mission button 3700 is pressed 16 or more times in one second.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation in the sense of being pressed. Therefore, instead of the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated once clockwise or counterclockwise so that the lottery is performed and a display of a bullet being fired from the special machine gun is displayed with a probability of 1/3. Alternatively, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated multiple times (e.g., three times) clockwise or counterclockwise so that a display of a bullet being fired from the special machine gun is displayed.

The system may be configured to always accept an operation on the mission button 3700 while the decorative symbols are fluctuating. With this configuration, when a player feels anger that cannot be contained because the fluctuating display result is a miss despite the fact that the fluctuating display result was a highly anticipated reach, the player can relieve such anger by making the mission button 3700 operable. For example, the player can release his/her frustration by attacking the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are being displayed and stopped as a miss.
It is also preferable to configure the display change that has been given not to end even when the next variable display of the variable display that has been lost starts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which was displayed to relieve stress, is forcibly interrupted, causing the player to feel even more dissatisfied. In addition, in this way, when it is determined that the display of the image of an exploding bullet crosses over the variation of the decorative pattern, it is also possible to configure the "Special Machine Gun Reach" to be executed again at timing t0, which is the start of the variation of the next decorative pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state in the presentation.

In addition, whether or not a bullet is fired by operating the mission button 3700 may also be determined by lottery. For example, the probability of a bullet being fired may be 1/2, and the probability of a bullet not being fired may be 1/2.

According to this embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and certain conditions are met, a change is made to the display content in the display area, so the player feels a sense of satisfaction at having gone to great lengths to achieve the display. Even if the display result resulting from an operation on the attack button 3710 is not what the player wanted and the player is dissatisfied with the display result, the player's dissatisfaction is alleviated by the display based on the operation on the mission button 3700. In particular, since the mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times, a display corresponding to the operation will eventually be displayed, which is effective in alleviating the player's dissatisfaction.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with multiple operation units have been known (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Gaming machines are also known that output a sound effect indicating that an operation can be accepted or that an operation is available when an operation is made on the operation unit, or that output a sound effect indicating that an operation has been accepted when an operation is made. However, there is room for further improvement in presentation. Below is shown an embodiment in which a sound effect is not output even when operation acceptance on the operation unit is enabled or an operation is made on the operation unit, and an operation acceptance display is displayed and a special sound is output when certain conditions are met.

Below, an embodiment of the "Silent Machine Gun Reach" which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 etc. will be described with reference to FIG. 319 etc. Note that, apart from the output of sound effects such as voice, the display is almost the same as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 etc. in the display area. Note that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 etc. can be applied to this embodiment. Note that the "Silent Machine Gun" in this embodiment is an improvement over the "Special Machine Gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 etc., and is set so that the firing sound when firing a bullet is extremely quiet.

The time chart in FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a situation where neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 319, in this embodiment, a sound effect of "preparing to fire a cannon" is output as a precursor sound indicating that the operation of the attack button 3710 is available for a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing at which the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is made available. In addition, at timing t11 when the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is made available, output of a sound of "OK" is started as an effective sound indicating that the operation acceptance is made available. The output of the sound of "OK" is performed from timing t11 to timing t12. The effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. When the operation acceptance period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14, a sound of "stop preparing the cannon" is output as an end sound indicating that the operation acceptance period of the attack button 3710 has ended from timing t14 to timing t16.
On the other hand, for the mission button 3700, the valid operation period begins at timing t5 and ends at timing t27, but no sound effects are output in response to the start or end of the valid operation period.

Figure 323 (a) shows the state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 323 (a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet will be fired from the silent machine gun equipped on your tank and displayed as moving, but this will be described in more detail later.

Figures 323 and 324 show display examples in the display area, and the type of sound that will be output (or is being output) when that display state is reached is written in the upper right corner of the figure. For example, the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner of the display example shown in Figure 323(c), which indicates that the sound "OK" will be output (or is being output) when the display example shown in Figure 323(c) is reached.

At time t9, an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. In addition, from time t9 to time t11, a sound saying "Prepare for cannon fire" is output. Figure 323(b) shows the state in which an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area at time t9.

At timing t11, an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 begins. In addition, a voice message saying "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 323(c) shows the state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

Figure 323 (c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank is displayed as having reached the left edge of the road. The effective period for operating the attack button 3710 also ends. From timing t14 to timing t16, a voice message saying "Stop preparing the cannon" is output. Figure 323(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart in FIG. 320 shows an example of a performance in which the attack button 3710 is operated, and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. As shown in FIG. 320, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this example) during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, the sound effect "bang", which is the sound of a shell being fired from a cannon, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), and then the sound effect "boom", which is the sound of the shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t13 to timing t15).

From timing t12 to timing t13, a display of the moving cannonball is displayed. Figure 323(f) shows an example of a display of a moving cannonball. Also, at timing t12, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, the sound effect of a shell exploding, "boom", is output from timing t13 to timing t15. Figure 323 (g) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

The time chart of FIG. 321 shows an example of a performance when the attack button 3710 is not operated and the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 321(a) shows an example of a performance when the enemy tank can be destroyed, and FIG. 321(b) shows an example of a performance when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying the enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not destroying the enemy tank is 2/3. When the enemy tank can be destroyed, a sound effect of "boom" is output, which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, at the same time as the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. On the other hand, when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
In the example presentation shown in FIG. 321, since no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, sound effects are output similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 319.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 321(a), a bullet fired from a silent machine gun is displayed moving from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 324(a) shows an example of the display in which the bullet is moving. Note that the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 321(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. An image of an exploding bullet is also displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 324(b) is an example of a display showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed (for example, timing t14).

On the other hand, the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 321(b) is an example of a presentation in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is a miss (selected with a 2/3 probability), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and continues to move to the left. Furthermore, an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed. Furthermore, no sound corresponding to the firing of a bullet is output. FIG. 324(c) is an example of a display in a state (for example, timing t14) in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to an image of a destroyed enemy tank.

The time chart in FIG. 322 shows a situation where both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, sound effects are output similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 320. In addition, in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, sound effects are output similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 321.

The time chart in Figure 322 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. Figure 322(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 and an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. Also, Figure 322(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 but an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 322 (a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving cannonball fired from a cannon turret and a moving bullet fired from a silent machine gun are displayed. In addition, the sound effect of a "bang" that is the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon is output. Figure 324 (d) shows an example of a display in which the cannonball and bullet are moving. In addition, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 322(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example of the performance, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound effect of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, which is a "boom" sound. At the same time, the sound effect of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, which is a "boom" sound. FIG. 324(e) is an example of a display showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which the image of a destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding bullet, and the image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the performance shown in FIG. 322(b) is an example of a performance in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is a miss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. An image of an exploding shell is also displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example of the performance, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, that is, a "boom!" sound. FIG. 324(f) is an example of a display showing a state in which the image of a destroyed enemy tank and the image of an exploding shell are displayed (for example, at timing t14).

The volume of the "BOOM" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be made louder than the "BOOM" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Note that in Figures 324(b) and 324(e), the fact that the volume of the "BOOM" sound effect is louder is indicated by making the font of the characters "\BOOM/" larger.
In addition, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) when the "boom" sound effect is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the volume of variable sound effects such as background music may be suppressed.
In addition, when the sound effect "BOOM" is output based on the operation of mission button 3700, the sound effect "BOOM" that would normally be output when attack button 3710 is operated may be made not to be output, or, if it is already being output, the output may be interrupted and output of the sound effect "BOOM" based on the operation of mission button 3700 may be started.
Also, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output may be longer than the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output may be six seconds, which is three times the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is output. Also, the sound effect (the sound effect "boom") output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be output multiple times. For example, the sound effect "boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Also, an image of a bullet exploding may be displayed multiple times. For example, an image of a bullet exploding may be displayed three times in six seconds.
Furthermore, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be different from the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the sound effect "boom!" may be output based on the operation of the mission button 3700.
In addition, the display displayed and sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 are seen and heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions, but the display displayed and sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be seen and heard by the player two or more times for each player operation that satisfies the conditions.

In this way, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect is output indicating that an operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that an operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that an operation has been accepted.
On the other hand, no sound effect indicating that an operation can be accepted or that an operation can be accepted is output for the mission button 3700. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) a predetermined time (1 second) after the operation is performed.
In this way, sound effects are not necessarily output when the mission button 3700 is operated, which can increase interest in the game.
Furthermore, sound effects that are output or explosion images that are displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be output or displayed multiple times, thereby making the game more interesting.
Furthermore, the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Also, as described above, it is desirable to make the sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 easier to hear than the sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize sound effects and special displays associated with operating the mission button 3700, which is relatively difficult to make appear.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 is started after the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, but the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 may be started simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 323(a) at timing t0.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 is set to end before the display of the changing decorative patterns stops, but operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 may continue until the timing at which the display of the changing decorative patterns ends (timing t35).

These embodiments may be combined to continue accepting operations of the mission button 3700 from the start of the decorative pattern change (timing t0) until the change display ends (timing t35). This configuration can increase the opportunities for the player to make sound effects and special displays appear that are relatively difficult to make appear when the mission button 3700 is operated.

When an image of a bullet exploding or a sound effect such as "boom" that is the sound of a bullet exploding is displayed once based on the operation of mission button 3700, it is preferable that the display of the image and the output of the sound effect be executed after these displays and output of the sound have ended.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 321(a), the output of the sound effect "boom" ends at timing t15, and the display of the image of a bullet exploding ends at timing t16. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period during which the image of a bullet exploding and the sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a bullet exploding, are not displayed, and it is preferable to configure so that the display of these images and the output of the sound effect can be performed after timing t17.
Furthermore, even if operation of mission button 3700 between timings t15 and t16 satisfies the condition for outputting the sound effect "BOOM" or the condition for displaying an image of an exploding bullet, no sound or display may be performed while these sounds and displays are being executed, and the output of the sound effect or the display of the image may be resumed only when an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds or displays end.
With this configuration, the display of an image or the output of a sound effect can be more clearly recognized each time, thereby reducing the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to recognize the start of the display of an image or the output of a sound effect that he or she has worked so hard to achieve.

In the example of the performance shown with reference to FIG. 319 etc., the effective period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once, from timing t11 to timing t14, but it may be configured to occur multiple times. For example, a similar display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Also, it may be configured to determine the number of occurrences based on the results of a special lottery, and to suggest the degree of expectation based on the number of occurrences and the content of the performance each time. It is preferable to cause the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 to occur multiple times during the effective operation period of the mission button 3700.
In this way, the number of occurrences of the operation valid period related to the attack button 3710, i.e., the number of times an image of an exploding bullet is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710, can be determined based on the special lottery result. On the other hand, the display of an image of an exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect "boom" which is the sound of an exploding bullet based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be executed multiple times during the operation valid period without being based on the special lottery result.
With this configuration, by operating the mission button 3700 multiple times, it is possible to successfully display an image of an exploding bullet, thereby enhancing the player's sense of accomplishment.

The tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, a presentation mode intermediate between the shells fired from the turret in this embodiment and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun may be adopted. For example, the additional machine gun may basically have the same operation acceptance mode and presentation mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, but may be configured to always output an acceptance sound (for example, the sound of a bullet flying) indicating that the operation has been accepted when an operation is performed. In this case, the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit. The size of the bullet explosion image may be intermediate between that of the shell explosion image and that of the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in Figure 323 (a) etc., the fact that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid is indicated by a simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dinah," but the configuration may be such that no notification is given that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid.
For example, the configuration may be such that the operation of the mission button 3700 is not performed during the first half of the effective operation period of the mission button 3700, and the operation of the mission button 3700 is performed during the second half of the effective operation period of the mission button 3700. Note that it is preferable that an enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area during both the first and second half of the effective operation period of the mission button 3700, and the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective. In this case, when the enemy tank is displayed for the first time, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the attack button 3710, and when the enemy tank is displayed for the second time, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 in addition to the operation of the attack button 3710.
In this way, even if it is enabled to display based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700, it may be configured to provide cases where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed and cases where it is not performed.
In addition, the special sound and the display contents based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700 may be different depending on whether or not the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed. For example, when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is not performed, a louder special sound may be output or a larger explosion image may be displayed compared to when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed. By adopting such a configuration, the interest felt by the player can be further increased.

The device may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and not displaying operational instructions using the real-time clock function described above or by operation by the player or store clerk.

Thus, according to the "Silent Machine Gun Reach" of this embodiment, an operation is performed on the second operation unit, and a special sound is output when certain conditions are met. With this configuration, even if the second operation unit is operated, there are cases where a special sound is output and cases where it is not, so players who are lucky enough to have a special sound output will feel great joy.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which operation instructions for the operation unit are displayed (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). In such gaming machines, the player simply follows the instructions, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing interest. For example, if the operation instructions are not followed, a display similar to that in the case where the operation instructions are followed after a predetermined time has passed is generally displayed, and if no operation instructions are performed, no display is generally displayed, and the player's intention of not wanting to follow the operation instructions is not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment is shown in which a special display is displayed when an operation is performed on the operation unit in a manner contrary to the instructions.

Below, with reference to Figure 325 etc., we will explain the "bomb character reach" in which the player's tank and a bomb character engage in combat while accelerating or decelerating the player's tank.

Figure 325 is a table showing the presentation pattern that can be selected in the "Bomb Character Reach". Figures 326 to 328 are time charts showing examples of presentation when one of the presentation patterns is executed. Figures 329 to 334 show examples of display at specific timings in these time charts.

In the "Bomb Character Reach", the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 34 seconds, and are statically displayed for 1 second. While the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, at timing t5 the decorative symbols enter a reach state. In addition, during the period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first period") and the period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second period"), a performance is performed in which bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed in addition to the player's tank that is currently being displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach," a bomb character appears on the road along which the player's tank is traveling, and the player is asked whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 to move the player's tank toward the bomb character.

The bomb characters displayed are bomb character A, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and bomb character B, which has sunglasses facing upside down compared to bomb character A. If bomb character A is displayed, part of the player's tank will be destroyed if the player's tank crashes into it, but if bomb character B is displayed, the player's tank will not be destroyed and will be able to move forward even if it crashes into it.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the player's tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether the player should drive the player's tank into the bomb character or not. For example, "Colonel Dyna" may say, "It's obviously a fake! Move forward!", which instructs the player to push the left lever 3720 forward (towards the game machine, as below). "Sergeant Might" may say, "An enemy bomb has been spotted ahead! Please slow down!", which instructs the player to push the left lever 3720 backward (towards the player, as below). Note that instead of indirect expressions such as "move the left lever forward" or "move the left lever backward", more direct expressions such as "move the left lever forward" or "move the left lever backward" may be used.

Also, on the left side of the window in which "Colonel Dyna's" lines are displayed, a vertically long rectangular imitation image of the left lever 3720 and an image indicating how to operate the left lever 3720 (the words "Lean forward" and "Lean backward") are displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window in which "Sergeant Might's" lines are displayed, a vertically long rectangular imitation image of the left lever 3720 and an image indicating how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In the "Bomb Character Reach," if "Colonel Dyna" speaks a line giving an operation instruction, the instruction is basically 100% an incorrect operation instruction. Furthermore, the image indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is also an image indicating an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if "Sergeant Might" speaks a line giving an operation instruction, there is a 20% probability that a line giving an incorrect operation instruction will be displayed, and an 80% probability that a line giving a correct operation instruction will be displayed. Furthermore, the image indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is an image that matches the instruction content indicated by the line.
Therefore, the player need only operate the lever in the opposite direction to the lines and instructions for operating the left lever 3720 from "Colonel Dina," and pay some attention to the lines and instructions for operating the left lever 3720 from "Sergeant Might."
Once the player becomes accustomed to the game, he or she will be able to determine the type of bomb character from the shape of the sunglasses, and will be able to decide whether or not to crash his or her tank into the bomb character and operate the left lever 3720 appropriately.

When the bomb character A is displayed, the player's tank will be partially destroyed if it collides with the bomb character A. If the player's tank does not run into the bomb character A, only the bomb character A will explode before the player's tank collides, preventing the player's tank from being destroyed. When the bomb character A collides with the player's tank, the first collision results in the player's tank's gun turret being destroyed (the player's tank state shown in FIG. 330(c)). Furthermore, the second collision results in the player's tank's machine gun also being destroyed (the player's tank state shown in FIG. 330(f)).
On the other hand, when the bomb character B is displayed, even if the player's tank collides with the bomb character B, the tank will not be destroyed and can proceed forward. The bomb character B is actually a giant balloon disguised as a bomb, and the player's tank will not be destroyed even if it crashes into it.
As the player's tank advances, a giant bomb character appears and effects can be executed using the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, but details will be given later.

The presentation patterns shown in the table in Figure 325 indicate whether a bomb character is displayed from timing t6 to timing t11 and timing t16 to timing t21 in the time charts shown in Figures 326 and 327, and if a bomb character is displayed, whether the displayed bomb character is bomb character A or bomb character B. Also, the possible states of the image of the player's tank are shown at timing t26.

Presentation pattern 01, presentation pattern 03, presentation pattern 07, and presentation pattern 09 are presentation patterns in which the bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the player's tank is in an undestroyed state.
The presentation pattern 02, presentation pattern 04, presentation pattern 06, and presentation pattern 08 are presentation patterns in which the bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at timing t26, the player's tank is either in an undestroyed state or the player's tank's turret is destroyed.
In the presentation pattern 05, the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at the timing t26, the player's tank is in an undestroyed state, the player's tank's gun turret is destroyed, or the player's tank's gun turret and machine gun are destroyed.

Which of the presentation patterns from presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 09 will be executed is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, referring to Figures 326, 329 and 330, the form of presentation using explosion character A will be described.
Figure 326 (a) is a time chart showing the state of the varying display of decorative patterns executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of Figures 326 (b) and 326 (c).
326(b) is a time chart showing the execution state of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the first period. The following describes the presentation state when presentation pattern 04, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15), is executed.
At timing t5, the "Bomb Character Reach" starts. Figure 329(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the lines of "Colonel Dyna", either "It's obviously a fake! Advance!" or "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. On the other hand, as the lines of "Sergeant Might", either "An enemy bomb has been spotted ahead! Slow down!", "That one's a fake. Advance!" or "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. If the lines indicate that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the word "forward tilt" is displayed together with the lines. If the lines indicate that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "backward tilt" is displayed together with the lines. If the lines do not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

Figures 329(b) to 329(g) show examples of display in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types of lines for "Sergeant Might", and by combining these there are a total of six possible combinations that can be displayed. These six combinations are shown in Figures 329(b) to 329(g).

For example, Figure 329 (b) is a display example showing a state in which an incorrect operation instruction, "It's obviously a fake! Move forward!" by "Colonel Dyna," is displayed, and a correct operation instruction, "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!" by "Sergeant Might," is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by performing an operation opposite to that instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dina" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Also, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by performing an operation in accordance with the operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Also, regardless of the instructions in the lines, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A and tilting the lever backward.

Furthermore, Figure 329 (e) is a display example showing the state in which the line "Hmm, mumble mumble" from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed and the line "He's a fake. Move forward!" from "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operational instruction, is displayed.
In this case, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" do not instruct the operation mode. Also, performing an operation in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) will result in a collision with bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player is not concerned with the instructions of the lines, but confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A, and tilts the left lever 3720 backward, the collision with bomb character A can be avoided.

The operation input is determined to have been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted in a predetermined direction for a predetermined time within the period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, it is determined that an operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9.

If the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, a visual effect is displayed in which the bomb character A collides with the player's tank from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, an image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12 showing a collision between the player's tank and the bomb character A. Figure 330(a) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image of the gun turret of the player's tank being destroyed is displayed. Figure 330(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backwards when the bomb character A is displayed, a display will be displayed in which the bomb character A explodes in front of the player's tank from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 330(b) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display as shown in Figure 329(a).

Fig. 326(c) is a time chart showing the manner of execution of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the second period. Fig. 326(c) shows an example of a presentation when presentation pattern 02, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this presentation example, from timing t16 to timing t25, a presentation display similar to that shown with reference to FIG. 326(b) is performed.

When either bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed in both the first and second periods, as in presentation pattern 05, presentation pattern 06, presentation pattern 08, and presentation pattern 09, a presentation mode that combines the presentation mode relating to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 326(b) or the presentation mode relating to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 327(b) described below with the presentation mode relating to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 326(c) or the presentation mode relating to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 327(c) is executed.

For example, when presentation pattern 05 is selected, a presentation mode is executed that combines the presentation mode relating to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in Figure 326 (b) and the presentation mode relating to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in Figure 326 (c).
In this case, there is a possibility that the player's tank will crash into the bomb character A in both the first period and the second period.
For example, in a first period, a player's tank crashes into a bomb character A, resulting in the tank's turret being destroyed, whereas in a second period, a player's tank with a destroyed turret crashes into a bomb character A, resulting in the tank's machine gun being destroyed.
Fig. 330(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the player's tank, whose turret has been destroyed, crashes into bomb character A during the second period. Also, from timing t22 to timing t25, the display example shown in Fig. 330(f) appears.
On the other hand, if the player's tank, whose turret has been destroyed, does not crash into the bomb character A during the second period, the display example shown in FIG. 330(e) will be displayed from timing t21 to timing t22.

Next, referring to Figures 327, 331 and 332, the form of presentation using the explosion character B will be described.
Figure 327(a) is a time chart showing the state of the varying display of decorative patterns executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of Figures 327(b) and 327(c).
327(b) is a time chart showing the execution state of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character B is displayed during the first period. The following describes the presentation state when presentation pattern 07, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character B is displayed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11), is executed.
At timing t5, the "Bomb Character Reach" begins. Figure 331(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character B is displayed at the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the lines of "Colonel Dyna", any one of "It's an enemy bomb! Slow down!" and "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. On the other hand, as the lines of "Sergeant Might", any one of "That guy is a fake. Advance!", "An enemy bomb found ahead! Slow down!" and "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. Also, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "forward tilt" is displayed together with the line. Also, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "backward tilt" is displayed together with the line. Also, when the line does not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

Figures 331(b) to 331(g) show examples of display in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types of lines for "Sergeant Might", and by combining these there are a total of six possible combinations that can be displayed. These six possible combinations are shown in Figures 331(b) to 331(g).

For example, Figure 331 (b) is a display example showing a state in which an incorrect operational instruction, "There's an enemy bomb! Slow down!" by "Colonel Dyna" is displayed, and a correct operational instruction, "He's a fake. Move forward!" by "Sergeant Might" is displayed.
In this case, the player can dive into bomb character B by performing an operation opposite to that instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dina" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward). Also, the player can dive into bomb character B by performing an operation in accordance with the operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward). Also, regardless of the instructions in the lines, the player can dive into bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

Furthermore, Figure 331 (e) is an example display showing a state in which the line "Hmm, mumble mumble" from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed, and the line "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!" from "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operating instruction, is displayed.
In this case, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" do not instruct the operation mode. Also, by performing an operation in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward), it becomes impossible to dive into bomb character B. On the other hand, if the player is not concerned with the instructions of the lines, confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B, and performs an operation to tilt the left lever 3720 forward, it becomes possible to dive into bomb character B.

If the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, a visual effect of the player's tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image is displayed of the player's tank crashing into the bomb character B. Fig. 332(a) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is preferable to display as shown in Fig. 329(a).

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backwards when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B located in front of the player's tank will be displayed as is from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 332(b) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display as shown in Figure 329(a).

Fig. 327(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the presentation pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period. Fig. 327(c) shows an example of presentation when presentation pattern 03, which is a presentation pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this presentation example, from timing t16 to timing t25, a presentation display similar to that shown with reference to Figure 327 (b) is performed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 328, the presentation modes from timing t26 to timing t35 when presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 09 are executed will be described.
As described above, based on the selected presentation pattern and the manner in which the player operates the left lever 3720, at timing t26, the player's tank is displayed in one of three states: undamaged, with its turret destroyed, or with its turret and machine gun destroyed.

328(a), at timing t26, the display of bomb character A or bomb character B begins. In addition, from timing t26 to timing t28, the operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 becomes valid.
The attack button 3710 is valid when the player's tank is undamaged. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 is valid when the player's tank's turret is destroyed. When the turret and machine gun are destroyed, neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is valid. The performance mode when the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is invalid will be described later.

At timing t26, operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid and at the same time, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Also, an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right corner of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might."
Figure 333 (a) is an example of a display from timing t26 until the attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in Figure 328 (a)), or until the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends (until t29 in Figure 328 (a)).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, a display of the bomb character A exploding is shown for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 or from the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 333 (b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is displayed for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 333 (c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the player's tank after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a loss. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the expiration of the valid operation period, a display effect is executed in which a shell is fired from the player's tank's cannon, as in the example shown with reference to FIG. 317.

At timing t26, operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid and at the same time, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Also, an imitation image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah."
Figure 333 (d) is an example of a display from timing t26 until the mission button 3700 is operated (until t28 in Figure 328 (a)), or until the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 ends (until t29 in Figure 328 (a)).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, a display of the bomb character A exploding is performed for three seconds from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 or from the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 333(e) shows a display state in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is performed for three seconds from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 333(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the player's tank after the mission button 3700 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the expiration of the valid operation period, a display effect is executed in which a bullet is fired from the player's tank's machine gun, as in the example shown with reference to FIG. 318.

When presentation pattern 05 is executed and the player's tank crashes into bomb character A in both the first and second periods, the player's tank with its turret and machine gun destroyed is displayed at timing t26.
Figure 328 (b) is a time chart showing the performance state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed in that position until timing t29. Figure 334(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, the bomb character A is displayed moving toward the player's tank for three seconds. Figure 334(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward the player's tank. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a miss.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a big win, the bomb character B starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed in that position until timing t29. Figure 334(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, the bomb character B is displayed moving toward the player's tank for three seconds. Figure 334(b) shows the display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward the player's tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a big win.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 will be enabled for operation.

In this way, by giving appropriate operation instructions without being misled by incorrect operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player can operate the special operation parts (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700) as shown in Figures 333(a), (b), (d), and (e), and can see special images (an image of bomb character A exploding, an image of the sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, and the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might"). On the other hand, if the player simply follows the operation instructions, he or she will not be able to operate the special operation parts as shown in Figures 334(a) and (d), and will not be able to see the special images.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 333(a) and (d), or Figures 333(b) and (e), the player will be able to see special presentation displays depending on the manner in which his or her own tank is destroyed.

If the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. At this time, the image that would be displayed if the player performed the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" does not perform an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward tilt operation or the backward tilt operation may be automatically displayed by lottery. For example, the forward tilt operation may be selected with a 1/2 probability, and the backward tilt operation with a 1/2 probability, and a display corresponding to that operation may be displayed.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation not following the operation instructions during at least one of the first period and the second period. Also, by performing an operation not following the operation instructions, it is possible to generate an effect state in which an operation to a specific operation unit becomes effective and a special image is displayed just before the decorative symbols stop.
In this way, the player is presented with operation instructions that are different from or contradictory to the operation instructions that should be performed, and so the player must estimate what the appropriate operation for the operation unit is and tilt the left lever 3720. If the player is able to perform an appropriate operation contrary to the operation instructions, the player will be able to operate a special operation unit or see a special image or effect display.
In addition to performing an operation contrary to the operating instructions, the special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, performing an operation contrary to the operating instructions multiple times successfully) is met. By configuring in this way, the special display can be made visible only to players who have performed the operation appropriately, rather than being accidentally displayed by a player who has operated the operating unit appropriately.

The player may be configured to operate the left lever 3720 left or right to allow the tank moving forward to avoid minefields set up on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield may be displayed on the right or left side of the road, and an effect may be executed in which the player operates the left lever 3720 left or right to avoid the minefield. If the player's tank enters the real minefield, the tank's turret and machine gun may be destroyed. The lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may also be configured to give incorrect operating instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. Such effects may be configured to be executable in the first period or the second period.

In this way, by appropriately operating the left lever 3720, the player can move the tank left and right while avoiding the minefield, and even if the player successfully performs an operation contrary to the operating instructions, the player can operate a special operating section or view special images or special effects, as in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 325 to 334, etc.

The presentation table shown in Figure 325 has a first period and a second period, but it may be configured to have only the first period, and a table may be adopted in which a presentation pattern is selected during the first period from among a presentation pattern in which a bomb character does not appear, a presentation pattern in which bomb character A appears, and a presentation pattern in which bomb character B appears.
In this case, it is advisable to configure the game so that if the player's tank crashes into bomb character A, both the tank's turret and machine gun will be destroyed.

The presentation table shown in FIG. 325 has a first period and a second period, but the presentation may also be performed using a presentation table configured to provide three or more periods in which the bomb character can be displayed.
In addition, the reserve may be read in advance, and based on the results of the read-ahead, multiple periods may be set during which a bomb character may be displayed across multiple decorative pattern changes (one period may be set during each decorative pattern change, or a period may be set during which any number of bomb characters may be displayed during each decorative pattern change), and the display effect shown with reference to Figures 328, 333 and 334 may be executed just before the change display corresponding to the reserve that was the subject of the read-ahead stops.

In addition, although three stages are provided for the display mode of the player's tank, two stages or four or more stages may be provided. Also, while an example of a display mode change in which the destruction of the player's tank progresses in stages has been shown, it is also possible to configure the game so that a performance is possible in which the player's tank is repaired and the destruction stage of the tank returns to a relatively undestroyed stage.

Although examples have been shown in which, during the first or second period, the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, or the bomb character B appears, it is also possible to configure so that either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is always displayed during the first and second periods. For example, the table shown in FIG. 325 may be modified to adopt a table consisting of only presentation pattern 05, presentation pattern 06, presentation pattern 08, and presentation pattern 09. With such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed during each period of the presentation pattern, which can increase the sense of tension in operating the left lever 3720.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 329 to 334, display examples in which a bomb character is displayed are mainly shown, but in periods in which a bomb character is not displayed, it is preferable to display the player's tank character moving forward, as shown in Figure 329(a).

It may be configured so that the special image is displayed only when a certain condition is met. For example, the special display may be displayed only when an operation that does not follow the operating instructions is successfully performed multiple times. Also, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operating instructions, a predetermined lottery may be held and the special display may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). With such a configuration, the special image will not be displayed by chance simply by operating the operating unit, and the difficulty of displaying the special image can be increased, thereby making it possible to increase the surprise and joy felt by the player when the special image is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, the volume of the variable effect sound may be reduced and suppressed at least during the period in which the special image is displayed.
In addition, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (e.g., a special explosion sound) may be output at least during the period during which the special image is displayed.
Furthermore, the variable effect sound may be suppressed and the special sound may be output at the same time.
In this way, by suppressing the variable performance sound and outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image, the display of the special image is not disturbed by the variable performance sound, and the display of the special image can be made more prominent by the output of the special sound.

The variable performance sound is a sound that is recognized by the player as background music, in which a specific piece of music is played in accordance with the change in the decorative symbols. For example, a piece of music consisting of the voice of a specific singer and the sounds of multiple instruments is played for several minutes, during which the decorative symbols change several times (for example, when all the changes in the decorative symbols are non-reach misses and the average change time is about 10 seconds). By outputting such a variable performance sound to the player, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. It is also possible to prepare several such pieces of music in advance, and to start playing a different piece of music when the playback of a certain piece of music has ended to the end. Alternatively, the music that was being played up until that point may be faded out midway through playback in accordance with a change in the game state, and a different piece of music different from the one that was being played up until that point may be played instead.

When the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately without being deceived by the operating instructions, a game state in which a special image is displayed is generated. The display period of the special image and the display period of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 can overlap, and an example of a presentation in which a special image (such as an image of an exploding bomb) and a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 are displayed simultaneously is shown below.

Figures 335(a) to 335(c) show other display examples which can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in Figure 333(a) is displayed.
In each of the figures of FIG. 335(a) to FIG. 335(c), the display priority of the image of the diagonally inclined semi-transparent sunglasses is higher than the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna", the image of the line of "Colonel Dyna", the image of the player's tank, the image of the bomb character A, and the simulated image of the attack button 3710. Also, there are cases where one semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed as shown in FIG. 335(a), two semi-transparent sunglasses images are displayed as shown in FIG. 335(b), and three semi-transparent sunglasses images are displayed as shown in FIG. 335(c). Then, whether or not to display the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the expectation of the big win is higher when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed compared to when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 333(a). Also, the display mode of the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the expectation of the big win is higher as the number of semi-transparent sunglasses images increases.

For example, a translucent sunglasses image may be displayed so that the expected degree of success when the display state shown in FIG. 333(a) is reached is 10%, the expected degree of success when the display state shown in FIG. 335(a) is reached is 30%, the expected degree of success when the display state shown in FIG. 335(b) is reached is 50%, and the expected degree of success when the display state shown in FIG. 335(c) is reached is 80%.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image begins at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 ends. Note that if the bomb character A can be exploded (i.e., the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may continue until the display of the explosion image ends.

This configuration can achieve the same effect as the above-described embodiment. In addition, because the semi-transparent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, it is possible to prevent the special image that could be easily seen from being obscured by the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

Fig. 335(d) is a modified example of the display shown with reference to Fig. 335(c). As in this display example, a simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be displayed in front of a semi-transparent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in Fig. 335(c) and the display mode shown in Fig. 335(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be made to stand out.
Incidentally, the bomb character A before or after the explosion may be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710.

Note that the degree of expectation does not have to be indicated by an image of semi-transparent sunglasses. In this case, the appearance rate of the displayed image may be differentiated.

In the example shown with reference to Figures 328 and 333, the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated once between timing t26 and timing t29. Below, however, an embodiment modified so that the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times will be described with reference to Figure 336.

FIG. 336(a) to FIG. 336(c) are display examples in the case where the attack button 3710 can be operated multiple times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, multiple simulated images (for example, five images) of the attack button 3710 are displayed according to the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. In addition, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed at the front side among the simulated images of the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of a bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, if the fifth operation is performed, an image of an explosion may be displayed with a 100% probability. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the bomb character A is not hit by a shell and the image of an explosion is not displayed.
Figure 336(a) shows an example of display at timing t26.
FIG. 336(b) shows a state in which, when the attack button 3710 is operated a third time, a predetermined probability is met and an explosion image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 336 (c) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated five times or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
When the exploded image is displayed, if there are remaining times that the attack button 3710 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and the display mode of the exploded image may be configured to be displayed in an even more exploded manner in response to this operation.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image. Fig. 336(b) shows a display example in which the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image.

FIG. 336(d) to FIG. 336(f) are display examples in the case where the mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, multiple simulated images (for example, five images) of the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. In addition, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed at the front side among the simulated images of the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, an image of a bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the image of the explosion is not displayed.
Figure 336(d) shows an example of display at timing t26.
FIG. 336(d) shows a state in which, when the mission button 3700 is operated a third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 336 (f) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the mission button 3700 is operated five times or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
When the exploded image is displayed, if there are remaining times that the mission button 3700 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and the display mode of the exploded image may be configured to be displayed in an even more exploded manner in response to this operation.
When an explosion image is displayed, an operation on the mission button 3700 is not necessarily required, so the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image. Fig. 336(e) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image.

In the example presentation shown with reference to Figures 336(d) to 336(f), Colonel Dyna's lines are "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", which is an incorrect operation instruction. For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700. If the player can operate the mission button 3700, he or she will be able to see a special image of a bomb exploding.

Next, referring to FIG. 337, a description will be given of a performance example that combines the performance examples shown with reference to FIG. 336(a) to FIG. 336(c) and the performance examples shown with reference to FIG. 336(d) to FIG. 336(f). In this embodiment, when the player's tank's turret is not destroyed and timing t26 arrives, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is enabled at the same time. At this time, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can each be operated a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times each). In addition, a predetermined number of simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are each displayed.

337(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710 and five simulated images that imitate the mission button 3700 are displayed. As described above, the effective operation period may start from timing t26.
In this state, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, an exploded image will be displayed depending on whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or not and whether or not the lottery has a specified probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, 1/3 for the mission button 3700) as described above.

FIG. 337(b) shows a state where an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. FIG. 337(d) shows a state where an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. The display examples shown in FIG. 337(b) and FIG. 337(d) are each displayed when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if there are still remaining times that the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and the display mode of the exploded image in response to the operation may be displayed in a more exploded mode.
For example, in the display state shown in Fig. 337(b), if a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on an operation on the mission button 3700, the display state may be changed to an explosion state as shown in Fig. 337(d). Alternatively, in the display state shown in Fig. 337(d), if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on an operation on the attack button 3710, the display state may be changed to an explosion state as shown in Fig. 337(b).
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the player continues to lose the specified lottery, when the operation is performed a total of 10 times, there is a 100% probability that an exploded image of the type corresponding to the last button operated will be displayed.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, so it is advisable to display the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 with a lower display priority than an exploded image. Figures 337(b) and 337(d) show display examples in which the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 337 (c) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated five times and the mission button 3700 is operated five times during the valid operation period, or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 337(a), the words of "Colonel Dyna" are "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", which is an incorrect operation instruction. Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the performance situation and operate the mission button 3700.

In the example of the presentation described with reference to Figure 333 (d), the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instruct the player to operate the mission button 3700, but instead of the line "Fire that special machine gun! Press the mission button!", it is also possible to configure the display to display an incorrect line such as "Fire that special machine gun! Press the defense button!"
In addition, in the examples of presentation described with reference to Figure 333(a), Figure 335(a), Figure 336(a), and Figure 337(a), the lines of "Sergeant Might" instruct the operation of the attack button 3710, but instead of the line "It's a big bomb! Attack with the attack button!", it is also possible to configure it so that an incorrect line is displayed, such as "It's a big bomb! Attack with the defense button!"
With this configuration, the player is required to carefully observe the presentation situation, which can further increase the interest in the game. The player can recognize the operation part to be operated by the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

In addition, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 indicate the operation part that should be operated, but these may also be configured to display simulated images that indicate an operation part other than the operation part that should actually be operated, similar to the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" (when an incorrect instruction is given). In this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display of a shell or bullet being fired may be displayed to suggest to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Although the display examples show simulated images of the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, and mission button 3700, these do not have to be displayed. In this case, the player will need to operate the operation section in a manner that goes against or differs from the operation instructions based on the type of bomb character and the destruction status of the player's tank, etc., which increases the difficulty of performing appropriate operations and therefore increases the excitement felt when appropriate operations are performed.

Referring to Figures 336 and 337, an example of a presentation state is shown in which a special image (such as an explosion image or an image of tilted sunglasses) is displayed when the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions even during the period after timing t26. Even in such an embodiment, the same effect as the embodiment described above with reference to Figures 325 to 335 is achieved.

It is advisable to set the time during which the special image that contradicts the operation instructions is displayed longer than the time during which the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is displayed. This configuration allows the player to fully enjoy the special image.

The special image displayed when an operation is performed in a manner contrary to or different from the operation instructions may be an image larger than the operation instructions. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 335, it is possible to display an image (an image of large translucent sunglasses as shown in FIG. 335(c)) that is larger than the image that gives the operation instructions (an image of a line instructing the player to operate the lever incorrectly). This configuration can increase the player's interest in the display of a more special image.

In this embodiment, operation instructions such as "tilt forward" and "tilt backward" are displayed as operation instructions for the left lever 3720, but even if no operation instruction is given (as in the display examples shown in Figs. 329(g) and 331(g)), the operation content can be inferred from the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player is able to operate the left lever 3720 appropriately in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in Fig. 333(b), there may be cases where an image of tilted sunglasses is displayed and cases where it is not, and when no operation instruction is given for the attack button 3710, an image of tilted sunglasses (special image) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10) if the attack button 3710 is operated.

In addition, when the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above are operated, an operation acceptance sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above may not be output, and a special sound corresponding to the operation may be output only when the special conditions described above are satisfied based on the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above, causing a special image to be displayed. With such a configuration, the display of a special image will be perceived by the player as being even more special. A similar configuration may be adopted in the display of special images in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 335 to 337.

Note that, as examples of operations that go against operational instructions, the above examples include tilting the left lever 3720 in a different direction and operating a button other than the instructed button, but other modes are also possible. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly tapping the attack button 3710 may be used as an operation that goes against operational instructions. Alternatively, when the player is instructed to operate the attack button 3710, operating the defense button 3740 may be used as an operation that goes against operational instructions.

In the above example, a special display change is applied when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed. However, such a special display change may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Alternatively, the likelihood of a jackpot may not be indicated. Alternatively, among the above-mentioned special display changes, some of the display changes may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and other display changes may not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the left lever 3720 is started after the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, but the operation acceptance period for the left lever 3720 may be started simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, at timing t0, the display shown in FIG. 329(b) may be performed to start the "bomb character reach."

Also, based on the reserved pre-reading, a similar effect to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIG. 329 to FIG. 337 may be executed over multiple decorative pattern variations. In this case, a bomb character A or a bomb character B may be displayed once in the decorative pattern variation display executed before the decorative pattern variation display that is the subject of the pre-reading. Then, during the entire period during which the decorative pattern variation display is performed, an effect that accepts the operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character may be executed, and during the entire period during which the decorative pattern variation is stopped, a display effect corresponding to the operation of the left lever 3720 may be executed. For example, the example of the effect performed from timing t6 to timing t11 in FIG. 326 and FIG. 327 may be executed during the decorative pattern variation display, and the example of the effect performed from timing t11 to timing t15 may be executed during the decorative pattern variation stop. Then, during the period from the start of the decorative pattern variation display that is the subject of the pre-reading to the end of the stopped display, an effect performed from timing t26 to timing t35 in FIG. 328 may be executed.

In addition, the game may be configured so that when the player's tank's turret is destroyed, the destroyed turret is restored by performing an operation that does not follow the displayed operating instructions.
In addition, the game may be configured so that when the player's tank's machine gun is destroyed, the destroyed machine gun is restored by performing an operation that does not follow the displayed operating instructions.
In addition, when the turret of the player's tank is not destroyed, the player's tank may be upgraded by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display. For example, the number of turrets may increase by one, the color of the turrets may change, or the turrets may change into extra-large turrets.
In this case, the bomb character can be made to appear five times, rather than twice, as shown in Fig. 325, to increase the number of times, thereby making the presentation more interesting. Also, the player can be made to see special presentation displays, such as the revival of a destroyed machine gun or an upgrade of the player's tank.

The display change may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a big win, or the display change may be configured to be merely for presentation purposes and not to indicate the likelihood of a big win.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets may be configured to suggest or notify the current game state or a game state that will occur.

The system may be configured so that bomb character A or bomb character B is always displayed during the first period, the second period, and the variable display during the look-ahead performance. By configuring it in this way, the operation instructions are always shown to the player, creating a sense of tension for the player and thus increasing the player's interest.

An example has been shown in which a special display change is imparted by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content, but a configuration may be adopted in which a special display change is imparted by an operation that goes against the instructed operation content or an operation that is different from the instructed operation content.

An example was given in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" give operational instructions, but it is also possible to configure it so that only one character gives operational instructions during a series of "bomb character reaches." In this case, the other character may display a line such as "Hmm, mumble mumble."

In this way, in the "Bomb Character Reach" mode, if an operation is performed that does not follow the displayed operating instructions, a special display change is given, giving the player a special sense of satisfaction.

In the past, in order to suggest the result of a special lottery, a specific image was displayed based on the player's operation to suggest the result of the special lottery (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). However, the number of times such operations were accepted and the number of times the display was made in response to the acceptance of the operation were predetermined. Furthermore, the period during which the player could perform the operation was also limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode could not be freely changed by the player's free operation. Furthermore, the display time of the effects displayed in this way was fixed, and there was room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described that allows the acceptance of operations multiple times during the valid operation period, and allows the display time of the image displayed based on the operation to be set to a long or short time, making it possible to suggest the result of the special lottery depending on the length of the display time.

The following describes the "sudden tank effect" that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern with reference to Fig. 338. Whether or not to execute the "sudden tank effect" is determined based on the peripheral control board 1510 reading ahead the reserved contents.
Figure 338 is a table showing the types of presentation patterns that can be selected in the "Sudden Tank Presentation," the conditions under which the presentation pattern is selected, and the period during which the pre-reading presentation is executed (specifically, how many times the decorative pattern changing display is spanned over which it is executed).

Look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 4 when the previous decorative symbol variable display ends and a new decorative symbol variable display begins. Look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank display" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display. Note that look-ahead performance pattern 01 is not strictly a look-ahead performance because it is executed only during one variable display period, but for convenience, it will be referred to as a look-ahead performance.

Pre-reading performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 3 when the previous decorative symbol changing display ends and a new decorative symbol changing display starts. Pre-reading performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which an "instant tank performance" is executed in the changing display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the changing display and in the changing display related to the first reserved symbol.

Pre-reading performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 2 when the previous decorative pattern variable display ends and a new decorative pattern variable display starts. Pre-reading performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern in which an "instant tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first reserved symbol, and the variable display related to the second reserved symbol.

Pre-reading performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 3 when the previous decorative symbol variable display ends and a new decorative symbol variable display starts. Pre-reading performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern in which an "instant tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first reserved symbol, the variable display related to the second reserved symbol, and the variable display related to the third reserved symbol.

In addition, in a performance pattern in which multiple variable displays are performed, such as pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04, the result of the special lottery for the final variable display in which the ``sudden tank performance'' is performed can be either a jackpot or a miss, but if the results of the special lottery for the intermediate variable displays other than the final variable display in which the ``sudden tank performance'' is performed are all misses, a pre-reading performance based on pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04 should be performed.

Figure 339 is a table showing the three display presentation patterns that are displayed in the "Sudden Tank Presentation." Also, Figure 340 is a time chart showing the presentation mode when pre-reading presentation pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 340(a), in the "Sudden Tank Presentation", the decorative symbols are displayed in a varying manner for 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. The decorative symbols are displayed stationary for 1 second. At timing t0, the attack button 3710 is enabled for operation, and at timing t14, when the decorative symbols end their display in a varying manner, the attack button 3710 is disabled for operation. During the period when the attack button 3710 is enabled for operation (timing t0 to timing t14), a simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area. Below, with reference to FIG. 341, the presentation mode displayed in the display area based on the player's operation of the attack button 3710 will be described.

Figure 341 shows the display state in the display area at a specific timing in the time chart described with reference to Figure 340.

341(a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. The display area shows a state in which each decorative pattern ("3", "↓", "3") in a reach state is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an image of the player's tank facing forward in the lower center of the display area, an image of an enemy tank facing left in the upper center of the display area, an image of a road along which the player's tank moves in the left-right center of the display area, an image of a horizon and sky in the upper part of the display area, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", a character for presentation purposes, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower right of the display area, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", a character for presentation purposes, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower left of the display area, and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might.
Thus, in the "sudden tank effect", at timing t0, an image of the player's tank and an image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid.

As shown in FIG. 340(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the image of the enemy tank continues to be displayed until timing t14. In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary at timing t14.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed.
Furthermore, Figures 340(b) to 340(d) are time charts showing the state in which a performance pattern corresponding to an operation is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the attack button 3710 at timing t3.
In addition, Figures 340(e) to 340(g) are time charts showing the state in which a performance pattern corresponding to an operation is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the attack button 3710 at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.

FIG. 339 shows the presentation patterns that can be selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed for one second in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed for two seconds in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for three seconds. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.

The appearance rate of smoke display pattern 01 to smoke display pattern 03 is determined in advance to indicate the likelihood that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When smoke display pattern 01 is executed, the likelihood is 30%, when smoke display pattern 02 is executed, the likelihood is 50%, and when smoke display pattern 03 is executed, the likelihood is 100%.

Figure 340 (b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 340 (c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 340 (d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on operation of the attack button 3710.

Figure 341(b) shows an example of the display in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the performance examples shown in Figures 340(b) to 340(d). Figure 341(b) shows a state in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank, and an image of the shell exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 341(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 341(c) appears. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun turret is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 340(b), smoke display presentation pattern 01 is selected, and one second after the display state shown in FIG. 341(c) is reached, the display state shown in FIG. 341(d) appears without the smoke image. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating that expectations are low.

In the example of the presentation shown in Figure 340 (c), by selecting smoke display presentation pattern 02, two seconds after the display state shown in Figure 341 (c) is reached, the display state changes to one in which no smoke images are displayed (not shown). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that is displayed two seconds later is "The power of the new type of cannon seems decent...". Here, the line from "Colonel Dyna" indicates that the level of expectation is medium.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 340(d), by selecting smoke display performance pattern 03, the display state shown in FIG. 341(c) is followed three seconds later by the display state shown in FIG. 341(e) where no smoke image is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating high expectations.

In this way, the longer the time for which the smoke image is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player will view the display area in the hope that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the words of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the smoke image finishes displaying correspond to each smoke display performance pattern. Therefore, the words of "Colonel Dyna" also suggest the expectation of a big win. Since the words of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the display time of the smoke image, even if the player does not know the exact display time of the smoke image, the player can know the expectation. This makes it possible to make a player who has a low concentration on the game and does not bother to check the display time of the smoke image feel an interest in the game.

One second after the smoke image is no longer displayed, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 340(b), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the example shown in FIG. 340(c), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the example shown in FIG. 340(d), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. FIG. 341(f) is an example showing a state in which a new image of an enemy tank is displayed.

In the example presentation shown in Figures 340(b) to 340(d), no further operation is performed on the attack button 3710, and the display of the decorative pattern changes ends at timing t14.

Fig. 342(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the performance examples shown in Fig. 340(b) to Fig. 340(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown to be stopped and displayed as "333", which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the player that it is a jackpot.
Fig. 342(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the performance examples shown in Fig. 340(b) to Fig. 340(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown to be stopped and displayed as "343", which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the user that the result is a loss.

Referring to Figures 340(b) to 340(d), an example of the effect when an operation is received on the attack button 3710 at timing t3 is shown, but it is possible to receive an operation from the player at any timing between timing t0 and timing t14 and execute one of the smoke display effect patterns.

In this way, by accepting the player's operation not just once but multiple times between timing t0 and timing t14, it is possible to execute the smoke display effect pattern multiple times.

Figures 340(e) to 340(g) show examples of effects when operation of the attack button 3710 is detected twice at timings t3 and t8.
Figure 340 (e) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t8.
Figure 340 (f) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and smoke display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t8.
Figure 340 (g) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t8.
In addition, even if the smoke display performance pattern is executed multiple times, each time the performance pattern is executed, a display similar to the performance example described with reference to Figures 340 (b) to 340 (d) is produced.

In addition, if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain smoke display effect pattern is being executed, the display state shown in FIG. 341(f) may continue for one second after the end of the currently executed smoke display effect pattern, and then one of the smoke display effect patterns may be automatically executed, leading to the display state shown in FIG. 341(b) and subsequent patterns. For example, when an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times within a short period (e.g., one second), three smoke display effect patterns will be automatically executed.

An example has been shown in which pre-reading performance pattern 01 is selected and an "sudden tank performance" is executed in one variable display, but below we will explain how the "sudden tank performance" is executed when pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04 are selected.
In the "Sudden Tank Performance," the performance is carried out over a maximum of four changing displays, with each changing display taking 14 seconds, and the change stop time being 1 second.

Hereinafter, with reference to Fig. 343 and Fig. 344, a description will be given of an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance pattern 02 is executed. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target for which the expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead performance is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second one is a miss. This point is the same for look-ahead performance pattern 03 and look-ahead performance pattern 04.
In addition, in the case of pre-reading performance patterns 02 to 04, when the display of smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks begins and ends during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a display similar to the performance examples described with reference to Figures 340 and 341 is displayed.

The following describes the manner in which smoke images and images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while decorative patterns are being statically displayed.
As shown in FIG. 343(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display state shown in FIG. 344(a) will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 343 (b), when smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance using smoke display performance pattern 01 ends at timing t14, and the display state shown in Figure 344 (b) is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 343 (c), when smoke display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a smoke image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 344 (c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 343 (d), when smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a smoke image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 344 (c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 343 (e), when smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 344 (d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 343 (f), when smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 344 (e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the display of new decorative symbols begins to change. The display of the decorative symbols at this time also begins in a display mode that creates a reach state, such as "3↓3."

With reference to FIG. 343, we have explained the display mode of the smoke image and the enemy tank destruction image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading performance stops. Below, with reference to FIG. 345, we will explain the display mode of the smoke image and the enemy tank destruction image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading performance stops.

All of Figures 345(b) to 345(f) show examples in which the execution period of the selected smoke display performance pattern overlaps with the stopped display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the examples shown in Figures 345(b) to 345(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display performance pattern, the smoke display performance pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29 and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in Figure 342(a) or Figure 342(b) will be displayed based on the special lottery results.

On the other hand, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, but the opening state of the jackpot game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 is started from timing t35. Figures 346(b) to 346(f) show examples of effects in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative patterns are stopped varying or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, the smoke display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a miss. In this case, the next variable display starts from timing t30, but the tank effect may be continued in the next variable display, and the "tank effect" may be ended in the middle of the variable display.
Figures 346(b) to 346(f) show examples of presentations in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts.

In this way, in the "sudden tank effect" according to this embodiment, the attack button 3710 (operation unit) can be operated at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change, and the number of times that the display effect based on the operation of the operation unit is performed is not predetermined, and the display effect can be performed any number of times based on the player's will, so that the player can be highly interested in the operation of the operation unit. In addition, it is necessary to pay attention not only to the operation of the operation unit but also to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (because the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is suggested), so that the interest can be further increased. Furthermore, since the change time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension about the operation of the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. In addition, by configuring this display effect to be executable over the change of multiple decorative patterns as a look-ahead effect, the player's interest in which decorative pattern change is the expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image can be increased.

Although three smoke display performance patterns are shown in FIG. 339, the "sudden tank performance" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display performance pattern 01 and smoke display performance pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "sudden tank performance" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display performance pattern 01 and smoke display performance pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only smoke display performance pattern 02 and smoke display performance pattern 03 are executed.

Furthermore, as smoke display presentation pattern 04, a presentation pattern in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for four seconds, followed by one second of only the destruction image, with a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, or as smoke display presentation pattern 05, a presentation pattern in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for five seconds, followed by one second of only the destruction image, with a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, may be adopted. In this way, by adopting a presentation pattern with a long presentation execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the expectation rate is 100%, making it possible to increase interest.

With reference to Figs. 338 to 346, an embodiment has been shown in which the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display), the higher the likelihood of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot. Below, with reference to Figs. 347 to 354, an embodiment modified so that the shorter the display time of the specific display (the image of a destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment shown below) the higher the likelihood of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot. Note that descriptions of processes and displays that are the same as those before the modification may be omitted.

FIG. 347 shows the presentation patterns that can be selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second on top of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.
When the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second on top of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.
When the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second on top of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

The appearance rate of white flag display pattern 01 to white flag display pattern 03 is predetermined to indicate the likelihood that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When white flag display pattern 01 is executed, the likelihood is 30%, when white flag display pattern 02 is executed, the likelihood is 50%, and when white flag display pattern 03 is executed, the likelihood is 100%.

Figure 348 (b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 348 (c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 348 (d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on operation of the attack button 3710.

Figure 349(b) shows an example of the display in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the performance examples shown in Figures 348(b) to 348(d). Figure 349(b) shows a state in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank, and an image of the shell exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 349(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 349(c) appears. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun turret is destroyed and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that at this stage, the white flag image has not yet been displayed.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 348(b), by selecting white flag display presentation pattern 01, the display state shown in FIG. 349(c) is followed three seconds later by the display state shown in FIG. 349(d) in which the white flag image is displayed. Also, here, the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" is changed to indicate that the expectation level is low.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 348(c), by selecting white flag display presentation pattern 02, the display state shown in FIG. 349(c) is displayed with a white flag image two seconds later (not shown). The line from "Colonel Dyna" displayed two seconds later is "The enemy's morale seems to be decent...". Here, the line from "Colonel Dyna" indicates that the level of expectation is medium.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 348(d), by selecting white flag display presentation pattern 03, the display state shown in FIG. 349(c) is followed one second later by the display state shown in FIG. 349(e) in which the white flag image is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating high expectations.

In this way, the longer the time (1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds) during which no white flag image is displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player will view the display area hoping that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna", which are displayed when the white flag image starts to be displayed, are displayed in accordance with each white flag display performance pattern. Therefore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" also suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. Since the lines of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, even if the player does not know the exact time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to make even players who have a low level of concentration in the game and do not bother to check the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed feel the interest of the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, the image of a new enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the example shown in Figure 348(b), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the example shown in Figure 348(c), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the example shown in Figure 348(d), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. Figure 349(f) is an example showing the state in which the image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the example presentation shown in Figures 348(b) to 348(d), no further operation is performed on the attack button 3710, and the display of the decorative pattern changes ends at timing t14.

Fig. 350(a) shows a display state displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the performance examples shown in Fig. 348(b) to Fig. 348(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown to be stopped and displayed as "333", which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the player that the jackpot has been reached.
Fig. 350(b) shows a display state displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the performance examples shown in Fig. 348(b) to Fig. 348(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state of "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the display mode is such that the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also notified that the result is a loss.

Referring to Figures 348(b) to 348(d), an example of the effect when an operation is received on the attack button 3710 at timing t3 is shown, but it is possible to receive an operation from the player at any timing between timing t0 and timing t14 and execute one of the white flag display effect patterns.

In addition, by accepting the player's operation multiple times, rather than just once, between timing t0 and timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display effect pattern multiple times.

Figures 348(e) to 348(g) show examples of effects when operation of the attack button 3710 is detected twice, at timings t3 and t8.
Figure 348 (e) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display performance pattern 01 starts at timing t3, and white flag display performance pattern 01 starts at timing t8.
Figure 348 (f) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3, and white flag display presentation pattern 02 starts at timing t8.
Figure 348 (g) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3, and white flag display presentation pattern 03 starts at timing t8.
In addition, even if the white flag display performance pattern is executed multiple times, each time the performance pattern is executed, a display similar to the performance example described with reference to Figures 348 (b) to 348 (d) is displayed.

In addition, if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain white flag display effect pattern is being executed, the display state shown in FIG. 349(f) may continue for one second after the execution of the white flag display effect pattern ends, and then one of the white flag display effect patterns is automatically executed, leading to the display state shown in FIG. 349(b) and subsequent patterns. For example, when an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times within a short period (e.g., one second), three white flag display effect patterns will be executed automatically.

An example has been shown in which pre-reading performance pattern 01 is selected and an "sudden tank performance" is executed in one variable display, but below we will explain how the "sudden tank performance" is executed when pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04 are selected.
In the "Sudden Tank Performance," the performance is carried out over a maximum of four changing displays, with the time required for one changing display being 14 seconds, and the time required for the display to stop changing being 1 second.

Hereinafter, with reference to Fig. 351 and Fig. 352, a description will be given of an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance pattern 02 is executed. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target for which the expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead performance is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second one is a miss. This point is the same for look-ahead performance pattern 03 and look-ahead performance pattern 04.
In addition, in the case of pre-reading performance patterns 02 to 04, when the display of a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank begins and ends during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a display similar to the performance examples described with reference to Figures 348 and 349 is displayed.

The following describes the manner in which the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed while the decorative pattern is being statically displayed.
As shown in FIG. 351(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display state shown in FIG. 352(a) will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 351 (b), when white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance using white flag display pattern 03 ends at timing t14, and the display state shown in Figure 352 (b) is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 351 (c), when white flag display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 352 (c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 351 (d), when white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 352 (c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 351 (e), when white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a white flag image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 352 (d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 351 (f), when white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a white flag image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 352 (e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the display of new decorative symbols begins to change. The display of the decorative symbols at this time also begins in a display mode that creates a reach state, such as "3↓3."

With reference to FIG. 351, we have explained the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading performance stops. Below, with reference to FIG. 353, we will explain the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading performance stops.

All of Figures 353(b) to 353(f) show examples in which the execution period of the selected white flag display performance pattern overlaps with the stopped display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the examples shown in Figures 353(b) to 353(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display performance pattern, the white flag display performance pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in Figure 350(a) or Figure 350(b) will be displayed based on the special lottery results.

On the other hand, the white flag display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, but the opening state of the jackpot game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 starts from timing t35. Figures 354(b) to 354(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the decorative pattern is stopped changing or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the currently executing white flag display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and if the result of the special lottery is a big win, the currently executing white flag display effect pattern may be interrupted without being executed for the predetermined execution period. This is to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player feels dissatisfied because the result of the special lottery is a loss even though a highly anticipated effect has been executed, if the display of the image of the enemy tank destruction is interrupted.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a miss and there is one or more reserved items, the next variable display starts from timing t30, but the "sudden tank presentation" is continued in the next variable display, and the "sudden tank presentation" is preferably ended in the middle of the variable display. By adopting such a configuration, the "sudden tank presentation" can be ended in a natural way that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
Figures 354(b) to 354(f) show examples of presentations in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts.

The embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 347 to 354 can also achieve the same effect as the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 339 to 346. Note that in the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 347 to 354, the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a jackpot is suggested, so the player watches the display presentation while hoping that the display time of the destroyed enemy tank will be short.

Referring to Figures 338 to 354, an embodiment of the "sudden tank effect" has been shown, but the following modified embodiments may be used. Note that an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a smoke image are displayed will be described as an example, but a similar modification may be applied to an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a white flag image are displayed.

As shown in Figures 339 and 347, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A specified sound effect may be output during the period in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, sound effects of 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds may be prepared in advance, and the output of the sound effect of the same number of seconds may begin simultaneously with the start of the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be configured to begin and end at the same timing.

On the other hand, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank may be modified to differ from the output time of the sound effect. For example, only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds may be prepared, and this sound effect may be output regardless of whether the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is 2, 3, or 4 seconds. With such a configuration, the player will not know the level of expectation unless they pay close attention to the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, which can add tension to the game. Note that only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds may be used.

A predetermined sound effect may be looped to output the sound. For example, a one-second sound effect may be played multiple times (two, three, four times) to match the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a one-second sound effect may be played four times in succession to output the sound effect for four seconds. In this case, as above, although the display times differ, by outputting the sound effect a fixed number of times (fixed time), the player will not know the level of expectation unless they pay close attention to the display state of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, which can add tension to the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 339, the expected rate when smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 347, the expected rate when white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

This embodiment is configured so that the effect pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times by referring to each effect pattern shown in FIG. 339 or FIG. 347 based on the player's operation, but a limit may be placed on the number of times that a high expectation effect pattern is executed. For example, the number of times that a smoke display effect pattern 03 or a white flag display effect pattern 03, which have a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, is executed during one "sudden tank effect" may be limited to once. Similarly, the number of times that an effect pattern with an expectation rate of 0% as described above is executed may be limited to once. With this configuration, a sense of tension can be created in the game because the player carefully observes whether or not a high expectation (or low expectation) effect pattern is executed.

As shown in Fig. 341 and Fig. 349, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern (during variable display and static display), the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an undestroyed enemy tank, and the image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of these may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed variably at the size shown in Fig. 303(b) and Fig. 303(c). In this case, a display mode in which these images overlap may be adopted. In this case, the display priority may be set to the highest for the image of an undestroyed enemy tank and the image of a destroyed enemy tank, followed by the simulated image of the attack button 3710, and the decorative pattern (during variable display and static display). In addition, the display priority may be further lowered for the image of the player's tank, the dialogue image, and background images such as roads.

By configuring it in this way, even if the decorative patterns (during variable display and static display), the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the image of an undestroyed enemy tank or the image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed overlapping each other, the visibility of the images of the undestroyed enemy tank and the destroyed enemy tank is not obstructed by the decorative patterns or the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. Therefore, the timing of the start and end of the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank becomes clear, preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the player has a mistaken understanding of the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, i.e., the degree of expectation.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the image of the enemy tank is always destroyed and displayed by operating the attack button 3710, the difficulty level may be increased so that the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed state. In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the above-mentioned embodiment may be adopted. For example, a lottery may be held when the attack button 3710 is operated, and if a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/2) is obtained, the image of the enemy tank is destroyed and displayed. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when a specific condition is met, the difficulty level of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased, and the player can feel a sense of tension, as he or she does not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed, even if the attack button 3710 is operated.

In the above embodiment, an example of a performance in which an image of a destroyed tank is displayed for a different time than usual in the "sudden tank performance" when the expectation of a jackpot is 100%, that is, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (a performance example when smoke display performance pattern 03 or white flag display performance pattern 03 is selected) is shown, but other game values that are beneficial to the player may be similarly suggested in addition to suggesting a jackpot. For example, as described above, the "sudden tank performance" may be executed in a failure variation that triggers a switch from a normal game state to a time-saving game state in which time saving is granted, by winning a symbol that grants time saving, or by executing a predetermined number of failure variations from the time of power-on or the previous win. In this case, the various effects described in the above embodiment can be similarly achieved, since they are common in that a time-saving game state is granted instead of a win as a benefit advantageous to the player.

In the above embodiment, the "sudden tank effect" indicates the expectation of a jackpot, but the "sudden tank effect" may be configured to indicate the type of benefit to be given to the player. For example, the benefit to be given to the player may indicate whether a time-saving state or a high probability state will be given after the decorative pattern changes to a jackpot, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, what is the expected percentage of the high probability state). Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can transition to a time-saving state or a high probability state after the decorative pattern changes without going through a jackpot state, it may indicate whether a time-saving state or a high probability state will be given after the decorative pattern changes, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, what is the expected percentage of the high probability state).

In this way, the "sudden tank effect" can increase the excitement of the gaming machine.

In the past, there were effects that required the player to operate the operation unit (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). In such effects, a predetermined effect display is displayed whether the player operates the operation unit or not, so there was little sense of tension in operating the operation unit. In particular, even if a complex operation mode is required, it is ultimately just a pretense, and a predetermined effect is simply performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit, so there was a risk that executing such an effect would actually reduce the player's interest in the effect display. Thus, there was room for improvement in conventional gaming machines in terms of effectively using the operation on the operation unit to increase interest in the game. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, a gaming machine that can make the player feel tense about the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit and thereby suppress a decrease in interest in the game will be described.

In the embodiment described below, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720, and depending on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a specified direction and angle and maintain that state, the special display will either not be impeded from being viewed or will be impeded from being viewed (cannot be viewed or will be difficult to view).

Below, an embodiment of a "full power breakthrough reach" in which the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a specified range will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355 and the display examples shown in FIG. 356 and FIG. 357. Note that FIG. 356 shows a display example when appropriate operation has been performed as shown in FIG. 355(a). Also, FIG. 357 shows a display example when appropriate operation has not been performed as shown in FIG. 355(b).

At timing t5, a reach presentation state occurs. In a "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", a speed display window showing the speed of the player's tank is displayed above the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". The display within the speed display window changes depending on the manner in which the player operates the left lever 3720. Images of decorative patterns, roads, and the player's tank are displayed in the same manner as in other embodiments. Figures 356(a) and 357(a) show examples of the display at timing t5 when the reach presentation state occurs.

At timing t5, the effective operation period of the left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 304, by operating the left lever 3720, it is possible to change the left-right position and speed of the player's tank. The effective operation period of the left lever 3720 continues until timing t34, which is the timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing.

At timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball is coming from behind the tank. This state continues for four seconds until timing t11. During this period, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed to the left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna." The simulated image is also labeled "Lean forward," which indicates the manner in which the left lever 3720 is operated.
Figures 356(b) and 357(b) show display examples at timing t7.

Below, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355(a) and the display example shown in FIG. 356. Also, below, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355(b) and the display example shown in FIG. 357.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player must tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a specified angle for a specified period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be held between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for two seconds. By performing this operation, the player's tank is displayed accelerating and moving in the display area. Figure 356(c) shows an example of a display in which the player's tank has accelerated sufficiently at timing t9.

The time chart shown in Figure 355(a) shows a state in which the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the display of the operation instructions for the left lever 3720 ends. Figure 356(d) shows an example display from timing t11 to timing t15 when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the angle at which it is operated is insufficient, a display will be displayed showing a shell fired from an enemy tank hitting the player's tank and exploding.

The time chart in FIG. 355(b) shows an example of a performance in which the left lever 3720 is operated for only one second, from timing t8 to timing t9, during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the player's tank is not sufficient. Therefore, from timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, an image of smoke generated by an exploding shell begins to be displayed around the image of the player's tank.

The display state shown in Figure 357(c) shows an example of the display when the speed of the player's tank is insufficient at timing t9. Also, Figure 357(d) shows an example of the display when a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the speed of the player's tank is not sufficient.

In addition, in FIG. 356(c) and FIG. 356(d), the state in which the text "30 km/h" is displayed as the speed of the player's tank is shown. In addition, in FIG. 357(c) and FIG. 357(d), the state in which the text "20 km/h" is displayed as the speed of the player's tank is shown. In this way, if an appropriate operation is performed with the left lever 3720 while the operation instructions are displayed, the display in the speed display window is 30 km/h or more, and if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instructions are displayed, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instructions are displayed, the display in the speed display window is less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time from when the left lever 3720 reaches the appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the player's tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. With this configuration, the player can recognize whether the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is appropriate or whether the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately by looking at the display in the speed display window.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves forward. Even if a smoke image is displayed due to an explosion of a shell from an enemy force, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15. Figures 356(e) and 357(e) show examples of a display effect in which the player's tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed in response to the operation of the left lever 3720 may be set to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing between the timing when the display of the smoke image ends (timing t15) and the timing when the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is again given (timing t24).

In this embodiment, the speed of the tank can be changed in response to the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, during the period when no operation instruction display is being shown, the player can practice changing the speed of the tank by operating the left lever 3720. In this case, it is recommended that the speed display window display be set to "10 km/h" when the speed instruction display starts.

At timing t24, images of multiple enemy tanks are displayed in the upper part of the display area. The images of multiple enemy tanks move leftward in the upper part of the display area and are displayed until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed, and display of operating instructions for the left lever 3720 begins. Display of operating instructions for the left lever 3720 continues until timing t32.

Between timing t24 and timing t32, the player must tilt the left lever 3720 forward at a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be held at a position between 30 and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for four seconds. By performing this operation, the display area shows the player's tank accelerating and moving at a maximum speed of 50 km/h.

The time chart shown in Figure 355(a) shows a state in which the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the display of the operation instructions for the left lever 3720 ends. Figure 356(g) shows an example display from timing t32 to timing t34 when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Figure 356 (h) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient, the angle of tilt is insufficient, or the direction of tilt is incorrect, a display will be displayed showing that the player's tank has collided with the enemy tank and the player's tank has exploded.

The time chart in FIG. 355(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is tilted appropriately for only two seconds, from timing t25 to timing t27, during the effective operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the player's tank is not sufficient. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, an image of smoke generated by a collision with an enemy tank starts to be displayed around the image of the player's tank.

Figure 357(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the acceleration of the player's tank is insufficient. Also, Figure 357(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The display examples shown in Figures 356 and 357 are for when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, but the same display is also made when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the numbers "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

Thus, according to the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" of this embodiment, if the player fails to operate the left lever 3720 in the appropriate operating manner, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern is obstructed by the smoke image. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern, and the player will be conscious of operating appropriately from the next time onwards. On the other hand, if the player operates the left lever 3720 in the appropriate operating manner, the player will be able to see the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern without its visibility being obstructed, and will feel a sense of satisfaction for having completed the tense operation.

In this embodiment, operation instructions are displayed for the left lever 3720 twice, once from timing t7 to timing t11 and once from timing t24 to timing t32, and display effects are displayed according to the operation mode during both periods.
At this time, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 requires a longer operation time and has a narrower operating angle range at the later timings compared to the first timing, which provides the player with a more tense operation mode.

Fig. 355(c) shows an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 355(a) and Fig. 355(b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image when it is displayed due to a shell from an enemy tank is extended, so that the smoke image is displayed until the enemy tanks are displayed.
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) overlaps with a part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction is displayed.
At this time, it is preferable that the smoke image hides a part or all of the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720. Similarly, it is preferable that the lines of "Colonel Dinah" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window are hidden a part or all of the same.
With this configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) when the first operation instruction is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize the operating mode during the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) when the second operation instruction is displayed, thereby making it possible to further increase the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

The length of time for which the smoke image is displayed when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately may also be determined by lottery. For example, the length of time for which the smoke image is displayed may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image will be displayed for a minimum of 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15, and for a maximum of 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35. In particular, when the maximum display period is selected, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the center of the display area will be rendered difficult or impossible to see by the smoke image, regardless of the manner in which the left lever 3720 is operated the second time.

The technical ideas related to the "Sudden Tank Effect" shown with reference to Figures 338 to 354 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach." For example, the display time of the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" may be configured to differ depending on whether a jackpot state or a time-saving state occurs.

An example has been given in which a smoke image is displayed if the player fails to perform the appropriate operation while the operation instructions are displayed, but rather than always displaying these images, the system may be configured to display these images with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/2 probability) if the player fails to perform the appropriate operation.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a miss, a smoke image may be displayed with a predetermined probability (e.g., a probability of 3/4), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a smoke image may not be displayed.
In addition, the color and shape of the smoke image may be provided in a plurality of patterns, and the display pattern of the displayed smoke image may indicate the expectation of the special lottery result.

Another embodiment, which is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 355 etc., will be described with reference to FIG. 358 and FIG. 359. FIG. 358 is a time chart in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 359 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of displaying a group of tanks, a minefield is displayed on the road along which the player's tank is traveling from timing t24 to timing t29. Figure 359(a) shows an example of the display at timing t29, when the minefield display begins. From timing t24 to timing t29, the player's tank is displayed approaching the minefield.

At timing t26, acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The valid operation period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, it continues until timing t29. During the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, a mock image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dinah." Figure 359 (b) shows an example of the display at timing t26 when the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 358(c), if the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), a display of the player's tank jumping over an advancing minefield is displayed for three seconds. FIG. 359(c) shows an example of a display at the timing (e.g., timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the display of the player's tank jumping ends. This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Figure 359 (d) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Figure 358 (d) shows an example of the presentation when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the timing when the valid operation period ends, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the player's tank is displayed, and a presentation is displayed in which the player's tank enters a minefield and is enveloped in smoke. Figure 359 (e) shows an example of the display from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped. Figure 359(f) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern that is displayed as stopped in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, if the mission button 3700 is operated appropriately, the visibility of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is not impeded, but if the mission button 3700 is not operated appropriately, the visibility of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is impeded by the smoke image. This makes the player feel even more tense when operating the mission button 3700.

The modified example shown in FIG. 355(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown in FIG. 359. In this case, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the player to operate the mission button 3700, and the display of the player's tank jumping are made difficult or impossible to see due to smoke images generated by shells from enemy tanks. This increases the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720.

Thus, according to the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" of this embodiment, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operating range, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery (or the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700, or the performance display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image, which causes the player to operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, creating a motivation to actively operate the left lever 3720 and increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above example, a smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately, but the probability of displaying a smoke image may be different depending on the operation content when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately. For example, if the tilt direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than a predetermined time, the shorter the operation time, the more likely the smoke image is to be displayed. Also, if no operation is performed or an operation is performed in the opposite direction to the instructed operation, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100%.

The visibility of the operation instruction image, decorative patterns, etc. may be made completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be made partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a semi-transparent image may be used as the smoke image, and the operation instruction image, decorative patterns, etc. may be configured to be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. With such a configuration, the visibility of the operation instruction image and decorative patterns is guaranteed to a certain degree.

A display effect (such as displaying a specified character image) with a 100% expectation rate and a very low probability of appearing may be configured to be executable, and the timing at which this display effect is executed may be the timing at which a smoke image is displayed. Also, the display effect may be configured to be partially or entirely invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, there may be cases where the display effect is obscured by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate gaming situation for the player. Such a configuration can maintain a greater sense of tension for the player in operating the operating means.

Although the smoke image impedes the visibility of the reach state of the decorative pattern, the display time of the smoke image may be set so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, the display of the smoke image may be configured to end at timing t34, and not to display the smoke image during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not impeded by the smoke image, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the result of the special lottery for a loss when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot, or for a loss when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot.

Alternatively, even if a smoke image is displayed, the visibility of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may or may not be hindered. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed, and the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time during which the left lever 3720 is tilted is less than half the required operation time, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may remain hidden by the smoke image, and if the time during which the left lever 3720 is tilted is more than half the required operation time, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With such a configuration, the player will operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The display of the decorative pattern may be configured so that the display of the decorative pattern is made invisible or difficult to see over a number of times by using a smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the above-mentioned lottery method for determining the display time of the smoke image may be modified so that the display time of the smoke image is determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. In addition, it is preferable to configure the display of such a smoke image to be performed with a high probability (99/100 probability) when the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is ignored twice (timing t7 to timing t11, timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted.
In this case, during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner (timing t32 to timing t34) and during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stationary manner (timing t34 to timing t35), the decorative pattern etc. will be hidden by the smoke image, hindering visibility, and further, the visibility of the decorative pattern varying display and the decorative pattern stationary display which commence after timing t35 may each be hindered by the smoke image multiple times.
In this case, in order to achieve consistency in the presentation, it is advisable to configure the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" to continue after timing t35. In this case, the player will be required to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Furthermore, in this manner, when the display of the smoke image spans the changing display of the decorative pattern, the operation of the left lever 3720 is not invalidated even while the decorative pattern is stopped changing or immediately after the changing display has started (between timing t0 and timing t5), but the valid operation period may be configured to continue across multiple changing displays 7, and a performance display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the acceptance of the operation of the left lever 3720 may be performed at any time.

In the figure, the speed of the player's tank is displayed in the display area, but the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted and the angle at which it is tilted may also be displayed. Alternatively, when an instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is being given, the display may be configured to display the elapsed time since the left lever 3720 was tilted at the required angle. With this configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being operated within an appropriate range and how many seconds the left lever 3720 has been operated within the appropriate range.

Although examples have been shown in which a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed and an operation instruction is displayed by the lines of "Colonel Dyna," instead of or in addition to this presentation pattern, a presentation pattern may be configured to be executable in which the left lever 3720 is required to be tilted without clear operation instruction displayed by such an image. For example, an enemy tank approaching from behind may be displayed as if a shell is being fired from the rear, allowing the player to spontaneously tilt the left lever 3720 without an operation instruction being displayed. By configuring in this way so that more difficult game situations can occur, the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720 can be increased.

There are cases where the player cannot properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being properly maintained within a predetermined operation range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built into the left lever 3720. For example, when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved into the appropriate operation range by the operation by the player, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be started when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved into the appropriate operation range, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued while the operation range of the left lever 3720 is located within the appropriate operation range, and the vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is outside the appropriate range.

In addition, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) is shown by the display content in the speed display window, but it may be configured so that the operation mode is displayed in some cases and the operation mode is displayed in other cases. For example, it may be configured so that the speed of the player's tank is hidden by a smoke image in the speed display window. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player will operate the left lever 3720 with a greater sense of tension.

In the example shown, the left lever 3720 is tilted forward, but in order to make the operation more difficult, the range in which the lever should be operated can be limited to only about 30 degrees forward (for example, a range of 25 degrees to 35 degrees). When the lever is tilted completely forward 45 degrees, there is a certain probability (1/2 probability) that smoke will come out of the tank's engine, and a smoke image as shown in FIG. 357(d) or FIG. 357(g) will be displayed, and the image of the tank and the operation instruction display will be hidden by this smoke image. In this case, the player is required to perform a more difficult operation, which can further increase the sense of tension. Note that when such an embodiment is adopted, it becomes possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 358 and 359, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, a smoke image is displayed, hindering the visibility of the operation instructions of the mission button 3700. Also, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the visibility of the performance display (the display mode in which the player's tank jumps) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 is hindered by the smoke image. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720.

Furthermore, an operation-responsive image showing the expectation level of the special lottery result being a jackpot may be displayed depending on the type of display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the display mode of the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation mode of the mission button 3700, the type of the lines themselves, and the type of display mode of the player's tank jumping when the mission button 3700 is operated. With this configuration, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operation range, the visibility of the display showing the expectation level may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. Therefore, a player who wants to know the expectation level will naturally operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, which increases the interest.
The technical idea suggesting the degree of expectation in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figures 308 to 312 may be applied to the display mode of the image of a shell fired from an enemy force, the simulated image simulating the left lever 3720, the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, the image of a group of enemy tanks, the image of a minefield, and the like in the "full power breakthrough reach". For example, the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot state or a time-saving state may be shown by the display mode of these images in the "full power breakthrough reach". Furthermore, the technical idea relating to the shield image in the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach".

After the operation of the left lever 3720 is completed, the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested. However, the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested while the operation of the left lever 3720 is being requested. This configuration increases the difficulty of operating the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700, and further increases the tension of the player. When both operation instruction displays are performed simultaneously, it is preferable to display them in a manner that does not overlap each other. For example, it is preferable to display the simulated image of the left lever 3720 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 in the display mode shown in FIG. 356(b) in a manner that does not overlap each other. When the area available for display in the display area is insufficient, it is preferable to display the simulated image of the left lever 3720 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 in such a manner that one of them is displayed in front and the other is displayed in the back, overlapping both, while allowing a part of the simulated image displayed in the back to be visible.

However, if the difficulty level is too high, players who are not good at complex operations may avoid playing. Therefore, an auto reception mode may be adopted in which the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation is executed even if the player does not perform any operation, and the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation is executed even if the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700 is not operated. In this case, the player only needs to concentrate on operating the operation unit that is not in the auto reception mode.
It is preferable to set the auto-acceptance mode to only the operation of the left lever 3720, to only the operation of the mission button 3700, or to set the auto-acceptance mode to both the operation of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only needs to concentrate on skillfully operating the left lever 3720, which can prevent the occurrence of situations in which a player who is not accustomed to the "full-power breakthrough reach" becomes confused. Also, when both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only needs to concentrate on visually checking the effects without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700.

In addition to the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730 may also be configured to be operable. For example, in the operation of the right lever 3730, the condition for executing the performance mode may be that the right lever 3730 is tilted within a predetermined tilt range for a predetermined period of time, similar to the left lever 3720. For example, a performance display may be displayed in which dust comes out of the caterpillar, representing the state in which the player's tank is accelerating. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display so that an image (simulation image, etc.) instructing the operation of the right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this way, the right lever 3730 may be set to a performance mode that makes the performance display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 look luxurious. For this reason, no operation instruction display is performed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not suggest the degree of expectation.
It is advisable to make the effective operation period of the right lever 3730 coincide with the effective operation period of the left lever 3720 .
This configuration allows a player who is tired of operating the left lever to maintain a higher sense of tension.

Furthermore, it is advisable to place the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 in positions that make it difficult to operate them simultaneously with one hand, that make them impossible to operate (positions where operation is impossible), and that make them difficult to reach. In other words, since one operation part is operated with one hand, the sense of tension in the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the three operating parts, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700, can be operated simultaneously, and in such cases, a great sense of tension can be created in operating each operating part.
In the operation unit shown in FIG. 301, the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720, and they are spaced apart, making it extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand. On the other hand, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions of the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 may be interchanged. In this case, the defense button 3740 will be located between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, making it extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the left lever 3720 is used for a specific effect, the right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720. Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be configured to be operable, and when an operation on either lever satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, the above-mentioned display effect or the like may be executed.

In this way, the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" in this embodiment can increase the sense of tension when operating the control unit.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known to produce an effect in which one operating unit is pressed. In this case, by providing multiple operating units and using the operating units for the effect, it is possible to increase interest in the game (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Furthermore, if operations on multiple operating units are enabled simultaneously, it is possible to further increase interest in the game. On the other hand, for players who want a simple game, the requirement for such complex operating modes can be tedious and stressful, and there is a risk that this could lead to a decrease in interest. Below, we will explain a gaming machine that satisfies players with different preferences and does not decrease interest in any case.

In the "AI Tank Reach" of this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may become active simultaneously at a specific timing during the display performance, but the player can set whether or not to display each of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, which indicates an instruction to operate the attack button 3710, and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, which indicates an instruction to operate the mission button 3700.
The player can select and set in advance one of four settings (presentation situations): a first setting (first presentation situation) in which both a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 and a simulated image that mimics the mission button 3700 are displayed; a second setting (second presentation situation) in which only a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 is displayed; a third setting (third presentation situation) in which only a simulated image that mimics the mission button 3700 is displayed; and a fourth setting (fourth presentation situation) in which neither a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 nor a simulated image that mimics the mission button 3700 is displayed.
The player can select the setting during the demo in which the decorative symbols are not changing by using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. When the power is turned on without the player making a selection, the first setting is selected by default.

When the effective operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the setting selected by the player. For example, if the player selects the third setting, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

Below, with reference to Figures 360 to 365, etc., we will explain examples of the display of "AI Tank Reach" depending on whether the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated when the first to fourth settings are made.

Figure 360 (a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a first setting (first performance situation) is made and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating a mission button 3700 are displayed.
Figure 362 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 360 (a), and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating a mission button 3700 are displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 360(a), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 362(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are displayed instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700. Also, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 start. Also, during the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. FIG. 362(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 also ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 362(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 362(d) shows an example of a display in which an image of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 362(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 362(f) shows an example of a display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 360 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a second setting (second performance situation) is made, and a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image imitating a mission button 3700 is not displayed.
Figure 363 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 360 (b), and shows a display state in which the second setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 360(b), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 363(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, a line from "Sergeant Might" is displayed instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710. Also, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. FIG. 363(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 363(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 363(d) shows an example of a display in which an image of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 363(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 363(f) shows an example of a display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 361 (a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the third setting (third performance situation) is made, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
Figure 364 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 361 (a), and shows a display state in which the third setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 361(a), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 364(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, a line from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed instructing the player to operate the mission button 3700. Also, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. FIG. 364(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 364(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 364(d) shows an example of a display in which an image of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 364(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 364(f) shows an example of a performance display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effect as that executed after timing t8 is performed.

Figure 361 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) is made and neither the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
Figure 365 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 361 (b), and shows a display state in which the fourth setting has been made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 361(b), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 365(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 begin. Additionally, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), no simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed. FIG. 365(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 365(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 365(d) shows an example of a display in which an image of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 365(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 365(f) shows an example of a performance display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effect as that executed after timing t8 is performed.

The effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed in accordance with the setting selected by the player. In response to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the mode of operation instructions. When an operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the effective operation period ends. For this reason, when an operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, no effect display corresponding to an operation of the other operation section is performed.

It is preferable to configure the display mode so that the expectation degree of the big win is suggested by the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an exploding shell, etc. In this case, it is preferable to apply the suggestion mode of various expectation degrees in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figures 308 to 312 to the display performance in this embodiment.
The display mode of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the image of an exploding bullet may be similar to the display mode of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the image of an exploding shell.

In this way, according to the "AI Tank Reach" of this embodiment, a presentation situation in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed and a presentation situation in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed are realized based on the player's will, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Although an example has been shown in which the player can select from the first to fourth settings, an operating section (such as a dip switch or button) that allows the setting to be selected may be provided on the rear of the door frame 3, allowing the setting to be changed by a staff member of the gaming establishment with the door of the door frame 3 open. With such a configuration, the settings can be changed as appropriate depending on the customer demographics of the gaming establishment, the location of the establishment, the number of days since installation, etc., to provide the player with an optimal gaming environment. Note that the settings made by the gaming establishment are only valid when the gaming machine is powered on, and the settings may be changed by the player thereafter.

The game may be configured so that the first setting, which does not restrict the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, and any one of the second setting to the fourth setting, which restrict the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, are alternately switched by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (e.g., the defense button 3740) that can be operated by the player, are switched. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, the game may be configured so that the game is switched to the first setting by operating the defense button 3740 once, and the game is configured so that the game is switched to the second setting again by operating the defense button 3740 once more. Note that if the player has selected the first setting, the first setting will remain selected even if the defense button 3740 is operated. For example, the game may be configured so that the game is switched when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t14) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, during the valid operation period (the period during which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed), the setting may be configured not to be able to be switched.
With this configuration, it becomes possible to quickly switch to a setting in which simulated images of both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

If the player can change the settings with a simple operation, a situation may arise where the player feels dissatisfied because the settings change when the player presses a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted that prevents the settings from being changed easily. For example, the configuration may be such that the settings are changed when certain conditions related to the operation are met, such as holding down the defense button 3740 for three seconds.

If a non-play state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 minutes), and the setting is one of the second to fourth settings, the setting may be automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. This configuration can prevent players who have started playing from feeling uncomfortable because the setting has changed.

Although an example has been shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated simultaneously and the valid operation period of the other button ends when either button is operated, it is also possible to configure so that the valid operation period of the other button does not end even when either button is operated. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, it is preferable to configure so that the performance display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (display of shell firing, movement, and explosion) starts, and then the performance display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (display of bullet firing, movement, and explosion) starts.

It may be configured so that there may be cases where only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid, and cases where only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image of the button whose operation is valid based on the settings. Alternatively, it may be configured so that a simulated image of the operation means whose operation is valid is displayed, regardless of the settings. When there is only one operation means whose operation is valid, it is expected that the player will not have much difficulty operating the button, so it is beneficial to adopt such a method.

Rather than making the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 operable at the same time, for example, one operation part may be enabled when the other operation part is enabled. In this case as well, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image that resembles the operation part based on the settings.

After the mission button 3700 becomes operable, the attack button 3710 may be made operable. Here, when an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (an image of a moving bullet) is displayed, if the attack button 3710 is made operable, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may not be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of information, and reduce the stress that the player may feel.

Before or simultaneously with the occurrence of the valid operation period, a sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has started or is in the valid operation period may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at a timing before the valid operation period starts (from timing t7 to timing t8, or from timing t22 to timing t23). Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the valid operation period occurs (from timing t8 to timing t9, or from timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, if the setting is such that the simulated image of the operation unit is not displayed even when the valid operation period has occurred, it is preferable to configure the game so that the sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has occurred is not output for that operation unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the game so that, when an operation is performed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being reduced.

Depending on the selected setting, a presentation state in which one simulated image of a button is displayed, or a presentation state in which two simulated images of buttons are displayed, may occur. In this case, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
By adopting such a configuration, the display area can be effectively utilized. Also, players who do not select the display of multiple simulated images may be elderly and may not even notice that a simulated image has been displayed. However, by displaying the simulated image in a large size like this, the players can notice that their operation has been effective, and this more appropriately prevents the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in a first presentation situation in which a third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) are capable of accepting operations and both a simulated image of the first operation unit (display relating to operation of the first operation unit) and a simulated image of the second operation unit (display relating to operation of the second operation unit) are displayed, a special display may be made to appear based on the player operating the third operation unit, making it difficult to see both the displayed simulated image of the first operation unit and the simulated image of the second operation unit.
For a player who operates the third operation unit in a situation where the first operation unit or the second operation unit should be operated, this special display makes it possible to suggest to the player that the operation is incorrect. Note that, since a player who operates the third operation unit in a situation where the simulated images of the first operation unit and the second operation unit are clearly displayed is considered to be intentionally performing such an action, it is preferable that the condition for the appearance of the special display to be displayed to such an intentional player is not limited to the operation of the third operation unit, but that the special display is displayed when the third operation unit is operated and the operation time of the third operation unit satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or more.

In this way, the "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment can prevent players from becoming confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a special premonition before an operation on the operation unit becomes valid, suggesting that the operation will be valid, and then displays a simulated image of the operation unit that imitates the operation unit, indicating that the operation on the operation unit is valid during the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid, prompting the player to operate the operation unit, and suggests the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot based on the operation on the operation unit (for example, JP 2011-125549 A).

By performing such a special premonition effect, the player is informed that the operation on the operation unit may be effective.
However, for some players, the use of such premonition effects can distract them, and their attention may be distracted from the display of the operation section simulation image, which indicates that the operation of the operation section has been effective, or from the operation of the operation section itself, which can result in them not having enough time to deal with the display of the operation section simulation image or to operate the operation section.
For example, some experienced players prefer to concentrate on operating the control unit rather than visually checking the premonition effects and enjoying them as such. This is because, while the player merely visually checks the premonition effects, the player concentrates on operating the control unit with the hope of hitting the jackpot of his or her own will. However, there is a risk that such concentration will be disturbed by the premonition effects that are performed before the effective period begins.
On the other hand, players with little gaming experience may not be able to understand the meaning of various effects, including premonition effects, and may not notice that a simulated image of the control unit has been displayed, indicating that an operation on the control unit has been effective, and may not be able to operate the control unit, thereby missing an opportunity to intervene in the effect.

In this way, premonition effects that are relatively unimportant to the player may prevent the player from concentrating on operating the operation unit, which is relatively important to the player, or may cause the player to fail to notice the display of the operation unit simulation image, which indicates that the operation of the operation unit has been effective.
In the embodiment described below, the visibility of the premonition effects can be reduced at the player's own will, and an example is shown in which a simulated image of the operation section is displayed to indicate that the operation of the operation section has been effective, allowing the player to concentrate on operating the operation section.

Hereinafter, an embodiment that is a modification of the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figure 308 etc. will be described with reference to Figures 366, 367, 368 etc.
Fig. 367 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. Figs. 366 and 368 are diagrams showing display examples in the display area.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the premonition effect during the demo. When a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes) has elapsed during which the decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 303(a) is not displayed in a variable manner, it is determined that no game is being played, and control is performed to transition to the display state shown in FIG. 366(a). FIG. 366(a) shows an example of display during a demo. In addition, when the attack button 3710 is pressed from the display state shown in FIG. 303 or the display state shown in FIG. 366(a), the display state changes to that shown in FIG. 366(b). As shown in FIG. 366(a) to FIG. 366(c), the decorative pattern in this case is displayed in a stopped state, smaller than when it is displayed in a variable manner, in the upper left of the display area.

Figure 366 (b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the premonition effects can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 left or right, one of the settings "normal display", "small display", or "not display" can be selected. The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed in a thicker color. The player is also shown how to select the setting by the lines displayed in the "Sergeant Might" lines window. Note that when the gaming machine is turned on, "normal display" is automatically selected.

FIG. 366(c) shows the display state in which "normal display" has been selected and "small display" has been selected by tilting the left lever 3720 to the right. In this state, operating the attack button 3710 again returns to the display state shown in FIG. 366(a). At the same time, the setting selected by the player (in this case, the setting to display the premonition effects small) is stored in the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, the player can select one of the display settings which differ in the visibility of the premonition effects.
Even if the player selects "Do not display," the same display and the selected setting contents are stored.

Next, the display mode when the premonition effect is executed will be described with reference to Figures 367 and 368. Figure 367(a) shows the changing state of the decorative pattern and the operation acceptance state of the attack button 3710 (whether operation acceptance is valid or invalid). Figures 367(b) and 367(c) show the display state of the cheering line image, attack button simulation image, enemy tank image, etc. when "normal display" is selected. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the cheering line image functions as the premonition effect. Figures 368(a) to 368(d) are examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 367, cheering line images are displayed for six seconds from timing t13 to timing t19. Four cheering line images are displayed: "<Get off~", "<Go for it~", "Get off~>", and "Go for it~". The two cheering line images, "<Get off~" and "<Go for it~", appear from the left edge of the display area, move horizontally to the right within the display area, and move out of the display area at the right edge of the display area. On the other hand, the two cheering line images, "Get off~>" and "Go for it~" appear from the right edge of the display area, move horizontally to the left within the display area, and move out of the display area at the left edge of the display area. Also, from timing t13, an image of an enemy tank is displayed moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display area.

Figure 368(a) shows a display example at timing t14, when the display of the cheering line image has just started. Figure 368(b) shows a display example at timing t16, when the display of the cheering line image is in the middle stage. Figure 368(c) shows a display example at timing t18, when the display of the cheering line image is in the final stage. As shown in the display examples, the cheering line image moves horizontally to the right or left.

At the same time that the display of the cheering image ends at timing t19, a simulated image of the operation section imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 368(d) shows a state in which a simulated image of the operation section imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area (for example, the display state at timing t20). After the display of the cheering image ends, similar to the embodiment shown for the "shield bullet reach", a simulated image of the operation section imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the effective operation period begins, and a destruction image is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the end of the effective operation period, suggesting the probability of a big hit. FIG. 367(b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t21. Also, FIG. 367(c) shows the display state when the effective operation period ends at timing t22.

Next, a display example when "Small display" is selected will be described. Fig. 367(d) is a time chart when "Small display" is selected. Fig. 368(e) to Fig. 368(g) are display examples when "Small display" is selected.
Fig. 368(e) shows the display state at timing t14, Fig. 368(f) shows the display state at timing t16, and Fig. 368(g) shows the display state at timing t18.
As shown in Figures 368(e) to 368(g), when "small display" is selected, the cheering message image is displayed smaller than when "normal display" is selected, making it difficult to see.

Next, a display example when "Do not display" is selected will be described. Fig. 367(e) is a time chart when "Do not display" is selected. When "Do not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the cheering line image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
When "Do not display" is selected in this way, the cheering message image is not displayed as in the case where "Normal display" or "Small display" is selected.

In this way, by allowing the player during the demo to set three states - a state in which the special premonition display (supportive dialogue image) is displayed, a state in which it is displayed small, or a state in which it is not displayed - it is possible to execute a presentation style that suits the player's preferences. For example, a player who does not want to see the special premonition display can make the special premonition display difficult or impossible to see, allowing them to focus their attention on the display of the operation section imitation image that mimics the first operation section (attack button 3710) and on operating the operation section.

In the above embodiment, the visual appearance of the premonition effect could only be changed during the demo. Therefore, when trying to change the visual appearance of the premonition effect, it was necessary to first reset the reserved number to 0 and put the decorative pattern into a state in which it was not changing. This could cause the player to feel it was troublesome to reset the reserved number to 0, or to lose the tempo of the game by resetting the reserved number to 0.

Therefore, we will explain an embodiment that has been modified so that the visual appearance of the premonition effect can be changed while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 369.

Fig. 369(a) to Fig. 369(c) are time charts showing the same performance as in the embodiment shown in Fig. 367(a) to Fig. 367(c). That is, the display of the decorative pattern changes, the operation part simulating image of the attack button 3710, the destruction image of the enemy tank, and the operation valid period have the same performance.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 369(d), operation of the defense button 3740 is valid from t5, which is the timing when the reach effect starts, to t27, which is the timing after the display of the destruction image of the enemy tank ends. When a specific condition is satisfied with respect to the operation of the defense button 3740 (when a long press or a rapid tap operation is detected, as will be described in detail later), it is possible to change the cheering line image from the normal display to a state where it is displayed small or not displayed at all.

Figure 369(e) is a time chart when "Small display" is selected in the demo settings. After the cheering line image is displayed at timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering line image is displayed small if the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image is changed from the display state shown in Figure 368(a) to the display state shown in Figure 368(e) while the cheering line image is being displayed.

Figure 369 (f) is a time chart when "Do not display" is selected in the settings during the demo. After the cheering line image is displayed at timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering line image is hidden when the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image is changed from the normal display state shown in Figure 368 (a) to a state in which the cheering line image is not displayed while the line image is being displayed.

The display state in which the cheering line image is displayed small or the display state in which the cheering line image is not displayed is configured to continue as long as a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the cheering line image may continue to be displayed in a small size or may not be displayed at all until timing t19, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering line image ends.

In addition, by pressing and holding the defense button 3740 in advance during the period from timing t5, when the effective operation period of the defense button 3740 begins, to timing t13, when the display of the cheering line image begins, it is possible to display the cheering line image in a small size or not at all from timing t13, when the display of the cheering line image begins.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special premonition display (cheerful dialogue image) is set in advance during the demo, and when a reach effect occurs during the display of changing decorative symbols, and there is a possibility that a special premonition display (cheerful dialogue image) suggesting that the first operation unit (attack button 3710) will be operable is displayed, the player can operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) at any timing to select the display mode of the special premonition display during the display of changing decorative symbols. For example, if the player does not want to see the special premonition display, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced to make it difficult or impossible to see, allowing the player to focus their attention on the display of the operation unit imitation image that mimics the first operation unit and on operating the operation unit.

In addition, instead of detecting a long press of the defense button 3740, the display mode of the cheering line image may be changed when repeated taps of the defense button 3740 are detected.

Instead of providing a function for setting the display mode of the cheering line image during the demo as shown in FIG. 366, the cheering line image may be configured to be displayed in a small size only when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected. Alternatively, the cheering line image may be configured not to be displayed.

Note that in the "Shield Bullet Reach" example shown in FIG. 308, an embodiment was shown in which a shield image was displayed by operating the defense button 3740, but an embodiment modified so that the cheering message image is hidden by displaying such a shield image is shown below.

With reference to Figures 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g) to 369(h), and 370, an embodiment modified to display an image (first shield image) that conceals the special omen display (cheerleading line image) will be described. In this embodiment, instead of displaying the cheerleading line image in a small size or hiding it based on the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), an image (first shield image) that conceals the cheerleading line image is displayed to hide the cheerleading line image, thereby reducing the visibility of the cheerleading line image and making it difficult or impossible to see.

Figure 369 (g) is a time chart showing the display state of the first shield image when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a specified timing (timing t14 in this performance example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be six seconds. In this performance example, it is displayed for six seconds, from timing t14 to timing t20. Also, it is not necessary to continue to press and hold the defense button 3740; after a long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image will continue to be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is released.

Figure 370(a) shows an example display at timing t14, when the display of the cheering line image has just started. Figure 370(b) shows an example display at timing t16, when the display of the cheering line image is in the middle stage. Figure 370(c) shows an example display at timing t18, when the display of the cheering line image is in the final stage. Figure 370(d) shows an example display from timing t19, when operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, to timing t20.

Figure 370(e) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14. Figure 370(f) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t16. Figure 370(g) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t18. Figure 370(h) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 370(e) to FIG. 370(h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the premonition effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself stand out, and the player can patiently wait for the timing when the operation unit simulative image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. The color of the first shield image may be an inconspicuous color such as gray. Also, the display mode of the first shield image may be configured so that the expectation level for the special lottery result is not indicated. As in the embodiment related to the "shield bullet reach", the expectation level may be indicated by the operation unit simulative image or the enemy tank destruction image. At this time, a plurality of different expectation levels may be indicated by the color of the operation unit simulative image or the enemy tank destruction image. Also, the display priority of the destruction image may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first shield image. When the display priority of the destruction image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, even if a part or all of the destruction image overlaps with the first shield image, it is displayed in front of it. When the display priority of the destruction image is set lower than the display priority of the first shield image, a part or all of the destruction image may be displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points for the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described below.

As shown in FIG. 370(h), between the first shield image and the operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation section simulated image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the first shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulated image is not hindered, and in fact the visibility of the operation section simulated image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that conceals the special premonition display (cheerful line image) at the player's discretion, and configuring the special premonition display so that some or all of it is hidden, a player who does not want to see the special premonition display can reduce the visibility of the special premonition display, making it difficult or impossible to see, thereby allowing the player to focus their attention on the display of the operation unit simulative image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.
Furthermore, the operation part simulation image that imitates the first operation part (attack button 3710) is not difficult or impossible to see, and therefore does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation part.

Although an embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 has been shown with reference to FIG. 369(g), the first shield image may be displayed based on repeated taps of the defense button 3740 instead of a long press of the defense button 3740. FIG. 369(h) shows an example of a presentation in which repeated taps of the defense button 3740 are detected at timing t14, and the first shield image is displayed until timing t20. Note that in this case as well, the display examples shown in FIG. 370(e) to FIG. 370(h) are the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment.

The size of the first shield image may be different. Figures 371(a) to 371(d) are display examples in an embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g), 369(h), and 370(e) to 370(h). In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is smaller. Also, the display position is slightly higher. Figures 371(a) to 371(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. In this embodiment, the cheering line images "<Get off~" and "Get off~" are made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are not made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image.

In this way, the visibility of a portion of the special precursor display (cheerleading line image) may be reduced by the first shield image, making it difficult or impossible to see, while the visibility of other portions of the special precursor display may be configured so as not to be reduced and made difficult or impossible to see.

A configuration may be made such that a plurality of shield images can be displayed. FIG. 369(i), FIG. 371(e) to FIG. 371(h) are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images can be displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 369(a) to FIG. 369(d), FIG. 369(g), FIG. 369(h), and FIG. 371(a) to FIG. 371(d). In this embodiment, a configuration is made such that a first shield image is displayed when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, and then a second shield image is displayed when a long press of the defense button is detected again. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the figure, the first shield image is shaded diagonally downward to the right, and the second shield image is shaded diagonally upward to the right.

Figure 369(i) is a time chart showing the display state when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15, and shows the state in which the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. Figures 371(e) to 371(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In Figure 371 (e), the cheering line images "<Get off~" and "Get off~" are made difficult to see by the first shield image, but the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In Figure 371 (f), in addition to the first shield image, a second shield image begins to be displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are made invisible by the second shield image.
In Figure 371 (g), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown in a state in which they are made difficult to see by the second shield image.
371(h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulative image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. As shown in FIG. 371(h), between the second shield image and the operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation section simulative image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulative image is not impaired.

The second shield image is slightly wider than the first shield image. Similarly to the first shield image, the second shield image does not move. The color of the second shield image may be gray, similar to the first shield image. Furthermore, the colors of the first and second shield images may be gray of the same brightness, or may be gray of different brightnesses.

After the first shield image is displayed by pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the second shield image may be displayed if the defense button 3740 continues to be pressed for a predetermined period of time. With this configuration, it becomes possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image by simply continuing to press the defense button 3740.
On the other hand, the second shield image may be displayed when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 long to display the first shield image, releases the defense button 3740 to release it from the pressed state, and then presses the defense button 3740 again for a predetermined period of time. This configuration increases the difficulty of displaying the second shield image, making it easier for the player to intentionally create either a state in which only the first shield image is displayed, or a state in which the first and second shield images are displayed.

In this way, by providing multiple images (first shield image, second shield image) that conceal the special premonition display (cheerleading line image) and displaying these in stages in response to operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), the special premonition display is not suddenly hidden, so even if the player accidentally operates the second operation unit, part of the special premonition display can remain easily visible. It is also possible to realize a display mode that suits the player's preferences.

Although an embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed by one operation unit (defense button 3740) has been shown, an embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images (first shield image and second shield image) are displayed corresponding to a plurality of operation units (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700) will be described below. Figures 369(j), 369(k), and 371(e) to 371(h) are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g), 369(h), and 371(a) to 371(d).
In this embodiment, in the period from timing t5 to timing t27, in addition to the defense button 3740, the mission button 3700 is also enabled for operation reception. Furthermore, when a press operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, the second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, the same as the display time of the first shield image.

Figure 369 (j) is a time chart showing the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 and the display state when pressing of the mission button 3700 is not detected.
Fig. 369(k) shows a state in which pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected at timing t15, and the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. Fig. 371(e) to Fig. 371(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing from t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In Figure 371 (e), the cheering line images "<Get off~" and "Get off~" are made difficult to see by the first shield image, but the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In Figure 371 (f), in addition to the first shield image, a second shield image begins to be displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are made invisible by the second shield image.
In Figure 371 (g), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be difficult to see due to the second shield image.
371(h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulative image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. As shown in FIG. 371(h), between the second shield image and the operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation section simulative image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulative image is not impaired.

In this way, by configuring the system so that multiple images (first shield image and second shield image) that conceal different positions in the special premonition display (cheerful line image) can be displayed in response to operations on multiple operation units, i.e., the second operation button and the third operation button (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700), the player can select to what extent the special premonition display is to be concealed and which positions of the special premonition display are to be concealed according to their preferences.
Furthermore, by displaying an operation unit imitation image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) in front of the second shield image, the operation unit imitation image is not difficult or impossible to see, and therefore does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation unit.

With reference to Figs. 369 to 371 etc., an embodiment in which the special premonition display (supporting dialogue image) can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image has been described. Below, with reference to Figs. 372 and 373, an embodiment in which these images etc. are modified will be described. Note that the behavior of the gaming machine other than these image displays is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 369 to 371 etc.

Figures 372(a) to 372(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image has a horizontally long rectangular shape with a hole in the center through which an image displayed at the rear can be seen, and the second shield image has a horizontally long donut shape.
Fig. 372(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering message image is difficult or impossible to see due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first shield image.
Figures 372(b) and 372(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
372(d) is a display example showing a state in which an operation valid period has occurred while the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation section imitation image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

Instead of making the second shield image doughnut-shaped, it may be modified to make it elliptical, so that the area behind the hole in the center of the first shield image is not visible. Figures 372(e) and 372(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in Figure 372(f), a simulated operation unit image that mimics an attack button 3710 is displayed in a position that overlaps with the second shield image.

Figures 373(a) to 373(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, each of the first shield image and the second shield image has a vertically long rectangular shape, and two first shield images and two second shield images are displayed.
Fig. 373(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering message image is difficult or impossible to see due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the shield image.
Figures 373(b) and 373(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
373(d) is a display example showing a state in which an operation valid period has occurred while a shield image and a second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation section imitation image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the area between the two second shield images.

Although a gap is provided between the two second shield images, it may be modified so that there is no gap. Figures 373(e) and 373(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in Figure 373(f), an operation section simulating image that resembles an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the two second shield images.

In this manner, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 372 and 373, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the operation section simulation image that mimics the attack button 3710, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the operation section simulation image.
A player can display only the first shield image, only the second shield image, or both the first and second shield images according to his/her preference.

An embodiment has been shown in which a cheering message image is displayed as the image to be displayed as a special premonition display, but the following shows an embodiment modified to display an operation part imitation image shaped like the first operation part (attack button 3710) instead of the cheering message image.

Figure 374 is a time chart in this embodiment, specifically, a time chart modified from Figure 369. Note that, as a premonition effect, instead of displaying a cheering line image, a mock image shaped like an attack button 3710 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "premonition mock image") is displayed in a predetermined manner, but the operation timing, etc. are the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 369, etc.

Figures 375 to 377 are display examples of premonition effects in this embodiment, and specifically, are display examples that are modified versions of Figures 370 and 371.
Figures 375(a) to 375(d), 376(a) to 376(d), and 377(a) to 377(d) are display examples corresponding to the display examples at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in Figures 370(a) to 370(d), respectively.
Similarly, Figures 375(e) to 375(h), 376(e) to 376(h), and 377(e) to 377(h) are display examples corresponding to the display examples at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in Figures 370(e) to 370(h), respectively.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 375, first, a precursor simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in 5 rows and 5 columns (FIG. 375(a)). The precursor simulation image is opaque, and the image behind it (such as an image of a road) is not visible. Some precursor simulation images are hidden by a dialogue window or an image of the player's tank. Next, as shown in FIG. 375(b), a precursor simulation image is displayed in 3 rows and 3 columns. Next, as shown in FIG. 375(c), only one precursor simulation image is displayed. At the same time as the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 begins, the character "attack" is added to the precursor simulation image that was previously displayed as the only one, as shown in FIG. 375(d), and an operation section simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed.

Figures 374(e) and 375(e) to 375(h) show a time chart and a display example when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t14 in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 375(a) to 375(d). In this case, the premonition simulation image is displayed semi-transparently from timing t14 to timing t19. At timing t19, when the effective operation period begins, the premonition simulation image becomes opaque, the character "attack" is added, and an operation section simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 374(f), the premonition image resembling the attack button 3710 may be configured not to be displayed.

Figures 374(g) and 376 are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment in which, instead of displaying the premonition simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 semi-transparently in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 375, the premonition simulation image is modified so that it is hidden by a first shield image.

Figures 376(a), 376(b), 376(c), and 376(d) respectively show display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed.

As shown in Figure 374(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this example), a first shield image is displayed in front of the premonition simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, making part of the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see. Figure 376(e) shows an example of a display when the display of the first shield image begins at timing t14. Figures 376(f), 376(g), and 376(h) show example displays at timings t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of a long press of the defense button 3740, the first shield image may be modified so as to be displayed when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected.
Figure 374 (h) shows an example of a presentation when repeated taps of the defense button 3740 are detected instead of a long press of the defense button 3740.

Figure 377 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the premonition simulating images shown in the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 374(g), 374(h), and 376 are transformed into other premonition simulating images.

As shown in FIG. 377(a) to FIG. 377(c), nine precursor simulation images simulating the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly to the left of the center of the display area, and finally reach a display state in which they are gathered as shown in FIG. 377(d), and the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. FIG. 377(a) is a display example at timing t14. At this time, each precursor simulation image is displayed at a distance. FIG. 377(b) is a display example at timing t16, in which each precursor simulation image is gradually approaching. FIG. 377(c) is a display example at timing t18. At this time, each precursor simulation image is displayed overlapping on the right side of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might". Each precursor simulation image is displayed with three protrusions like afterimages indicating the direction of movement. At timing t19, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, the display of each protrusion ends, and the character "attack" is added to the precursor simulation image and displayed as an operation part simulation image. Figure 377(d) shows a display example from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in Figure 374(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this example), a first shield image is displayed in front of the premonition simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, making part of the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see. Figure 377(e) shows an example of a display when the display of the first shield image begins at timing t14. Figures 377(f), 377(g), and 377(h) show examples of displays at timings t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this way, even if a premonition simulation image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed as the special premonition display instead of a cheering line image, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced to make it difficult or impossible to see, thereby achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 369(i) and 371 (an embodiment capable of displaying a second shield image) is applied to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 374(a) to 374(h) and 375 to 377 (an embodiment in which a precursor simulation image is displayed) will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 374(i) and the display example shown in Figure 378.
In this embodiment, the premonition simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the premonition effect is configured to be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

Figures 378(a) to 378(d) show display examples in an embodiment shown with reference to Figures 376(a) to 376(h) that has been modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
374(i) is a time chart when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
Figures 378(a), 378(b), 378(c), and 378(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 378(e) to 378(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 377(a) to 377(h) has been modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
374(i) is a time chart when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
Figures 378(e), 378(f), 378(g), and 378(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 369(j), 369(k), and 371 (an embodiment in which a second shield image can be displayed in response to operation of the mission button 3700) is applied to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 374(a) to 374(h) and 375 to 377 (an embodiment in which a precursor simulation image is displayed) will be described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 374(j) and 374(k) and the display example shown in Figure 378.
In this embodiment, the premonition simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the premonition effect is configured to be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
Moreover, the second shield image is configured to be displayed when pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected.

Figures 378(a) to 378(d) show display examples in an embodiment shown with reference to Figures 376(a) to 376(h) that has been modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
As shown in Figures 374(j) and 374(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 378(a), 378(b), 378(c), and 378(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 378(e) to 378(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 377(a) to 377(h) has been modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
As shown in Figures 374(j) and 374(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 378(e), 378(f), 378(g), and 378(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 375, 377, etc., in which a premonition simulation image is displayed as a premonition effect, the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 372 and 373 may be adopted.

The embodiments shown with reference to Figures 374(i) to 374(k) and 378 can also achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiments.

With reference to Figures 369 and 374, an embodiment has been shown in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700, respectively, and the effective operation period of the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 is from timing t5 when the reach presentation state occurs to timing t27, which is the end of the reach presentation state.
During this period, the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed at any timing triggered by the player's operation of the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700. Furthermore, the first shield image or the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds), but after the display of the first shield image or the second shield image has ended, the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed again triggered by the player's operation.

For example, if a reach effect occurs at time t5, but the player does not want to see the premonition effect, the player can operate the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 at a predetermined time before time t13, when the premonition effect starts, to display the first shield image or the second shield image, thereby making the premonition effect difficult or impossible to see in advance.

Also, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed simultaneously with an operation section simulation image that imitates the attack button 3710, which indicates that operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is valid.
In addition, it is possible to continue displaying the first shield image and the second shield image even after the operation of the attack button 3710 has been accepted or the effective operation period has ended. When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted or the effective operation period has ended, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result is indicated by the state of the destruction image of the enemy tank, but the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image may be set higher than that of the destruction image, and a part or all of the destruction image may be hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing of starting the display. For example, if the player operates the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 carelessly regardless of the progress of the presentation, a display state in which the visibility of the destruction image is hindered may occur as a penalty, so that the player will operate the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 seriously, and the decline in interest will be suppressed.

It is also possible to prepare multiple types of operation section simulation images according to the degree of expectation, and to keep them displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds) instead of making them disappear when the operation is accepted or when the valid operation period ends.
Since the display status of the operation part simulation image is important to a player who has made at least a part of the premonition display difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image and the second shield image in order to concentrate on operating the operation part, the player can be given a lingering impression of interest in the operation presentation by leaving this presentation status even after the operation.

The time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image and the time for displaying the cheering line image or the premonition simulating image imitating the attack button 3710, which function as the special premonition display, are each set to 6 seconds, but the time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image or the second shield image may be configured to be displayed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image has started, the display of the first shield image or the second shield image may be continued until the effective operation period starts or until the display of the destruction image starts (i.e., until the player operates the attack button 3710 or the effective operation period ends). With this configuration, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced with a small number of operations, and it can be maintained in a difficult to see or impossible to see state.

On the other hand, the time for which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed may be shorter than the time for which the special precursor display is displayed (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, a player who does not want to see the special precursor display will be required to perform multiple operations, but a player who accidentally displays the first shield image or the second shield image will be able to see the special precursor display without visibility being obstructed by the first shield image or the second shield image for at least a portion of the period during which the special precursor display is displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

If a condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied as a result of the operation of defense button 3740 while the first shield image is being displayed, the display of the first shield image may be continued again from the timing at which the condition is satisfied. For example, if the condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied when the first shield image has been displayed for four seconds, the first shield image may be displayed for an additional six seconds from that point on, for a total of ten seconds.
Similarly, with regard to the second shield image, when a condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied as a trigger of the operation of mission button 3700, the display of the second shield image may be continued again from the timing at which the condition is satisfied. For example, when the condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied when the second shield image has been displayed for four seconds, the second shield image may be displayed for an additional six seconds from that point on, so that the second shield image is displayed for a total of ten seconds.

During the effective period of the defense button 3740, if a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the first shield image was displayed and the display of the first shield image has ceased, and the conditions for displaying the first shield image again are met, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

With this configuration, a player who hesitates about whether to see the special premonition display and then decides not to see it can extend the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image. On the other hand, a player who wants to see the special premonition display may mistakenly operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) or the third operation unit (mission button 3700), causing the visibility of the special premonition display to decrease and become difficult or impossible to see. However, if the player does not operate the second operation unit any further, the state in which the visibility of the special premonition display has decreased and become difficult or impossible to see will quickly end. In addition, since the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed at any time (for example, before the start of the special premonition display or after the end of the operation valid period), it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image or the second shield image.

Figures 379(a) to 379(d) show display examples in an embodiment in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 378(a) to 378(d).
As shown in Figures 374(j) and 374(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 379(a), 379(b), 379(c), and 379(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 379(e) to 379(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 378(e) to 378(h).
As shown in Figures 374(j) and 374(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 379(e), 379(f), 379(g), and 379(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 379(a) to 379(d) and the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 379(e) to 379(h), the display priority of the first shield image is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed in front of the second shield image. Moreover, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulation image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the position. Moreover, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area it occupies in the display region) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
Furthermore, as described above, a special operation (long press operation or rapid tap operation) on the defense button 3740 is required to display the first shield image, whereas the second shield image can be displayed by simply pressing the mission button 3700. That is, the second shield image is displayed at the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated (timing when the operation start is accepted), whereas the first shield image is not displayed at the timing when the defense button 3740 is operated (timing when the operation start is accepted).

According to such a configuration, the first shield image is displayed when the player operates the second operation section (defense button 3740) in a complex manner with a clear intention.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed when the player operates the third operation unit (mission button 3700) in a simple manner. Therefore, the second shield image is displayed not only when the player intentionally operates the third operation unit, but also when the player operates it unintentionally or by mistake.
In this way, in this embodiment, the difficulty of the operation required to display the first shield image is made relatively higher than the difficulty required to display the second shield image, but the first shield image is able to hinder the visibility of the special precursor display more than the second shield image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image, which will not appear unless a clear intention is expressed when operating, the player can concentrate on the operation part simulation image that mimics the first operation part (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation part.
In addition, even when the second shield image that can be displayed by a simple operation is displayed, the player can concentrate on the operation unit simulating image and the operation unit. Meanwhile, by making the visibility of the special precursor display relatively higher when the second shield image is displayed compared to when the first shield image is displayed, even if the player mistakenly displays the second shield image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest felt by the player who wanted to see the special precursor display.

Furthermore, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., two seconds) has elapsed after a special operation (long press operation or repeated tap operation) is detected on the defense button 3740. Moreover, the display time of the first shield image may be set longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

The size and display time of the first shield image, which is displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, may be different from that of the second shield image, which is displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 371 and Fig. 378, the size of the second shield image is made larger than the first shield image, making a wide area of the special omen display invisible.
Alternatively, the display time of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the display time of the first shield image may be six seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be nine seconds. Conversely, the display time of the first shield image may be nine seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be six seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, the special sign display can be made to look like what the player likes.

The first shield image and the second shield image may be displayed dynamically instead of simply appearing at a predetermined position. When showing them as dynamic displays, for example, they may be displayed so as to dynamically appear from any of the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area in a so-called cut-in manner, or dynamic displays such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in, and fade-out may be adopted.
The first shield image and the second shield image that have appeared while moving in this manner may continue to move and stop in the center of the display area, or the first shield image and the second shield image that have appeared while moving in this manner at one end of the display area may continue to move and move to the other end of the display area so as to disappear outside the display area.
This not only allows the first shield image and the second shield image to simply hide the special precursor display, but also allows for a dramatic presentation when the first shield image and the second shield image appear and disappear, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

The configuration may be such that operation of the defense button 3740 triggers the display of a cheering line image or a precursor image for the attack button 3710 in a semi-transparent manner, and operation of the mission button 3700 triggers the display of a first shield image or a second shield image, making the cheering line image or the precursor image for the attack button 3710 difficult or impossible to see.
In this way, by making it possible to make the special sign display invisible or difficult to see in different ways depending on the type of operating part, it is possible to provide a visibility mode that suits the player's preference.

Also, there may be a plurality of display modes of the premonition simulation image imitating the attack button 3710, and the degree of expectation of the special lottery result may be indicated by the type of the displayed premonition simulation image. For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color or shape of the premonition simulation image. In this case, too, it is preferable to configure the special premonition display so that it can be made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image or the second shield image.
With this configuration, the player is not misled by the degree of expectation indicated by the premonition simulated image, and can concentrate on the display of the operation unit simulated image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.

Even if the special premonition display (display of the cheering line image or premonition simulation image) ends while the first or second shield image is being displayed, it is advisable to keep the first or second shield image displayed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the display of the first or second shield image ends at the same time as the start of the valid operation period, a background image (such as a road) behind the first or second shield image will be displayed, causing a sense of discomfort to the player who wants to concentrate on the display of the operation section simulation image that mimics the attack button 3710. In this way, it is advisable to continue displaying the concealment image (first shield image, second shield image) even if the valid operation period has occurred.

In addition, the display priority of the operation section simulated image may be set higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 370(h), the operation section simulated image may be displayed in front of the first shield image. This configuration allows the player to concentrate only on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image were to be erased, the background image hidden by the first shield image would become visible, which would result in the player being unable to concentrate on the operation section simulated image.
It should be noted that the same configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 371(h) and Fig. 378(h), the operation section simulative image may be displayed so that a part of the operation section simulative image and a part of the second shield image overlap. In this case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the operation section simulative image higher than that of the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 376(h) and Fig. 377(h), the operation section simulative image may be displayed near the first shield image or the second shield image but not overlapping with the first shield image or the second shield image.
With this configuration, the player can concentrate solely on the displayed operation section simulation image.

In the embodiment shown, the display priority of the operation section simulation image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image, but the display priority of the operation section simulation image may be lower than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image. In this case, it is preferable to configure a part of the operation section simulation image so that it is visible to the player without overlapping with the first shield image and the second shield image.

In addition to displaying the premonition simulated image and the operation section simulated image, the display area may be configured to display the name and operation mode of the first operation section (attack button 3710) while the special premonition display is being displayed (while the premonition simulated image is being displayed) or during the operation valid period (while the operation section simulated image is being displayed). In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a deeper understanding of the name and operation method of the first operation section, and will be able to operate the first operation section with confidence.
On the other hand, for a skilled player, such a display may not be necessary. Therefore, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be made difficult or impossible to see by displaying the first shield image and the second shield image. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the operation unit simulation image so that it is not difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before the valid operation period occurs, or only during the valid operation period, or may be displayed from before the valid operation period occurs throughout the valid operation period.
The embodiment shown with reference to Figures 372 and 373 is one example of such an embodiment. In Figures 372(d), 372(f), 373(d), and 373(f), the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might" displays the text "Second Lieutenant! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!", but the first shield image and second shield image are displayed, making the operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 invisible.
With this configuration, the player can concentrate solely on the displayed operation section simulation image.

Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the first shield image can be easily displayed, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly operate the defense button 3740, causing the first shield image to be unintentionally displayed while the premonition effect is being performed, thereby impairing the visibility of the premonition effect and ruining the interest provided by the premonition effect.
Therefore, the first shield image is configured to be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied as a trigger for operating the defense button 3740. Although the specific condition is exemplified by repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 (detection of a pressing operation a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time) or a long press (detection of a pressing operation continuously for a predetermined time or more) of the defense button 3740, other conditions that are satisfied as a trigger for operating the defense button 3740 may be adopted.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the second shield image is displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held or when the mission button 3700 is pressed, the second shield image may be displayed under other conditions. For example, the second shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed and then the mission button 3700 is pressed. Alternatively, the second shield image may be displayed when a long press or repeated taps of the mission button 3700 are detected.

In the embodiment shown, the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether the first shield image is displayed or not, but the second shield image may be configured to be displayed on the condition that the first shield image is being displayed.

The display priority of the first and second shield images is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. This ensures that the decorative pattern is not hidden by the first and second shield images, ensuring the visibility of the decorative pattern.

The effective operation period of the defense button 3740 is set to be from timing t5 to timing t27, but the effective operation period and the period during which the first shield image is displayed may be set to the entire period during which the decorative symbols are displayed or stopped from varying. By configuring in this way, it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image by operating the defense button 3740 at any timing.
Since it is not necessary to adopt such a configuration for the effective operation period of the mission button 3700, which is a trigger for displaying the second shield image, it is preferable to configure it so that the effective operation period is only during the display of the decorative pattern variations (for example, the period from timing t5 to timing t27) or so that the second shield image can be displayed. Alternatively, it is preferable to configure it so that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the decorative pattern variations are stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed from decreasing.

Although an embodiment has been configured in which multiple images are displayed to execute the special precursor display, the special precursor display may be performed with only one image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 368, etc., four cheering message images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 377, etc., nine precursor simulation images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

A case may be provided in which operations on the first operation unit (attack button 3710) are not valid after the special premonition display is displayed. In this case, an operation unit imitation image that imitates the first operation unit is not displayed after the special premonition display is displayed, and no operation valid period occurs.
For a player who has hidden the premonition simulation image by the first shield image or the second shield image, it results in disappointment as the operation part simulation image is not displayed even though he has taken the trouble to make the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see, but by deliberately performing such a performance display, the player can be made to feel that he wants to operate the operation part next time.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which, in a game presentation instructing a player to operate an operating means, even if the player does not operate the operating means, the same presentation display as when the operating means is operated is displayed (for example, JP 2007-136096 A).
However, while the operational burden on the player is reduced by displaying the same effect when no operation is performed as when an operation is performed, there is a risk that the player will lose motivation to operate the operating means. In particular, in game presentations that require complex operating instructions for the operating means, if the same effect display is displayed when no operation is performed as when an operation is performed, there is a risk that the player will lose motivation to operate the operating means.
The following describes an embodiment of a gaming machine that solves such problems and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

Hereinafter, with reference to Figures 380 to 382, an embodiment in which the "shield bullet reach" is modified will be described.
Fig. 380 shows a time chart in this embodiment, and Figs. 381 and 382 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 380(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t15. Next, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. If a repeated hit or a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the effective operation period, the effective operation period ends. Next, a display according to the operation status of the attack button 3710 is performed, and then a decorative pattern is displayed stationary at timing t34.
Figures 380(b) to 380(d) show examples of effects that may occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period.

Figure 380 (b) shows an example of a presentation when a rapid tap operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this presentation example, at timing t15, an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and begins to move to the left. Then, at timing t18, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 begins. The valid operation period ends when a rapid press or long press operation is detected. If a long press or rapid press operation is detected, a presentation display according to the operation mode is performed. If a long press or rapid press operation is not detected, the valid operation period ends at timing t22, four seconds after the start of the valid operation period.
FIG. 381(a) shows a display example at timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, in the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", the character string "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" is displayed, and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. In addition, in the upper right corner of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", an operation section imitation image (circular image) that imitates the attack button 3710 is displayed. In addition, the character "attack" is displayed in the operation section imitation image.
In addition, the same display as this (display examples shown in Figures 382(a) and 382(d)) is also performed in the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 380(c) and 380(d) described below.

When a rapid tapping operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank at the enemy tank is displayed, and then a smoke image, which is an image showing smoke generated by the shell exploding, is displayed in place of the image of the enemy tank. Fig. 381(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At timing t23, two seconds after the start of the display of the smoke image, a bomb character image appears from behind the smoke image and moves to the left. The bomb character images displayed include bomb character image A and bomb character image B, and the type of bomb character image displayed indicates the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot.
Fig. 381(c) is an example of display at timing t25. In this example of display, a bomb character image A is displayed to the left of the smoke image. Fig. 381(d) is an example of display at timing t25. In this example of display, a bomb character image B is displayed to the left of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image continues until timing t27 (6 seconds after the rapid tapping operation is detected).
In this way, the player's expectation of the special lottery result is shown to the player by performing an appropriate operation on the operation unit.

Figure 380 (c) shows an example of a presentation when a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this presentation example, the display state switches from the display example shown in Figure 382(a) to the display examples shown in Figures 382(b) and 382(c).
In this example, when a long press is detected at timing t21, a shell is displayed from the player's tank instead of the enemy tank image, and then a smoke image is displayed, which is an image showing smoke generated by the shell exploding. Figure 382(b) is a display example at timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this example, the bomb character image is not displayed, and only the smoke image is displayed. Figure 382 (c) is a display example at timing t25. The smoke image continues to be displayed until timing t27 (6 seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, if the operation performed by the player on the operating means is not appropriate, a display corresponding to the operation is made, but the expectation of the special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is not shown to the player.

Figure 380 (d) shows an example of a presentation when no rapid tapping or long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period from timing t18 to timing t22 (for example, when the button is pressed only once or when no operation is performed).
In this presentation example, the display state changes from that shown in FIG. 382(d) to that shown in FIG. 382(e) and FIG. 382(f).
In this example, when the operation valid period ends at timing t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right at the top center of the display area and starts to move upward in the display area. Figure 382 (e) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
Fig. 382(f) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank has been moved upward and is displayed smaller than in the case shown in Fig. 382(e).
In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operating means, the display corresponding to the operation will not be displayed, and the expectation of the special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) will not be shown to the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the type of bomb character image is configured to indicate the degree of expectation for the special lottery result. Specifically, when bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that there is a higher degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot compared to when bomb character image B is displayed. Note that different colors of the bomb character image (red or green) may be configured to indicate different degrees of expectation. Also, it may be configured so that the bomb character may not be displayed even when the appropriate operation (repeated taps) is performed.

In this embodiment, a player who performs an appropriate operation on the operating means (attack button 3710) can see a specific effect (display of a bomb character image) along with a special game-related display (smoke image). In addition, the type of specific effect can tell the player the expected outcome of the special lottery. On the other hand, a player who does not perform an appropriate operation on the operating unit can see the special game-related display but cannot see the specific effect, or cannot see both the special game-related display and the specific effect. This configuration can increase the player's motivation and enthusiasm for operating the operating unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 380 etc., it is possible to execute a performance pattern in which the attack button 3710 is requested to be pressed repeatedly and a performance pattern in which the attack button 3710 is requested to be pressed and held down, and it is possible to modify the embodiment so that either of the performance patterns is executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the "Sergeant Might" dialogue window to display a line such as "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" or "Second Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack the enemy tank!". In addition, when a player presses and holds down the button despite a command to press and hold down the button repeatedly, or when a command to press and hold down the button is given but the player presses and holds down the button repeatedly, it is preferable to control the bomb character image so that it cannot be seen, as shown in FIG. 382(c).
With this configuration, the player is required to carefully visually check the contents of the operation instruction display (the characters displayed in the dialogue window), which increases the tension regarding the operation and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 380 to 382, the same smoke image was displayed in the same position when the attack button 3710 was pressed repeatedly and when it was pressed and held down (for example, Figures 381(b) and 382(b)). With this configuration, even if other players can see the display content in the display area, it is difficult for them to determine whether the operation content was appropriate or not, and the player can be prevented from being noticed by other players and feeling embarrassed.
In addition, smoke images that are partly different and partly common may be displayed depending on whether the operation is appropriate or inappropriate. Alternatively, images showing the same or similar concept may be displayed as smoke images.
In this way, even if a similar image is displayed instead of an identical smoke image, or a similar image that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in this embodiment) is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to determine whether or not the operation was appropriate.
A similar configuration may be adopted for the embodiment in which a smoke image and an explosion image are displayed, which will be described later. For example, images that the player recognizes as having a similar motif may be displayed. Also, similar smoke images may be displayed when the operation content is appropriate and when it is not, similar messages regarding the operation of the operation means may be displayed, or smoke images and explosion images similar to smoke images may be displayed. These similar images may also be displayed at a position that overlaps with the display position of the reserved image or near the center of the display area. The same effect can be obtained even when images that are slightly different on the display are displayed in this way.

A predetermined suggestive display showing the expected probability of a special lottery result may be executed over a predetermined period (e.g., timing t10 to timing t30) spanning the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately during the operation valid period while the suggestive display is being executed, the suggestive display being executed may be terminated. For example, a suggestive display different from the display showing a bomb character may be executed over the period from timing t10 to timing t30, and if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, this suggestive display may be continued, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, this suggestive display may be terminated.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the effective operation period (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 when the display of the decorative pattern changes ends), a predetermined suggestive effect display showing the expected probability of the special lottery result may be executed, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately during the effective operation period (timing t18 to timing t22), the execution of the suggestive effect display may be restricted during the predetermined period after the effective operation period. For example, during the period from timing t22 to timing t34, a suggestive effect display different from the effect displaying a bomb character may be executed, and if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display may be executed with a predetermined probability, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display may not be executed.

In this way, if an operation is not performed appropriately, the currently running suggestive display can be terminated, or the suggestive display can be prevented from being executed until the display of the decorative pattern changes stops, thereby increasing the sense of tension regarding the operation and improving the player's willingness and enthusiasm to operate the operating means.

If the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately in a certain variable display, the execution of the suggestive performance may be restricted in a predetermined number of variable displays after that variable display. For example, the execution of the suggestive performance may be restricted until the decorative pattern variable display is performed 10 times.
With this configuration, depending on the manner in which the operating means is operated, a game situation may arise in which the execution of a specific effect (suggestive effect) is restricted across multiple display changes of decorative patterns, thereby increasing the sense of tension regarding the operation and further improving the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operating means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 380 etc., an embodiment is shown in which if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, the expectation level is not indicated for the result of the ongoing change display. Below, however, with reference to FIG. 383 etc., an embodiment is described which is modified to restrict the execution of the look-ahead performance if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately.

Fig. 383 shows a time chart in this embodiment, and Figs. 384 to 386 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 383(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, an image of a minefield is displayed at timing t16. Next, an effective operation period for the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. Note that at the time when the effective operation period occurs, three reserved symbols are generated. Next, decorative symbols are displayed stationary from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, new variable display of decorative symbols is performed from timing t35 to timing t44, and decorative symbols are displayed stationary from timing t44 to timing t45.
Figures 383(b) to 383(d) each show a number of examples of effects corresponding to the manner in which the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period.

Figure 383 (b) shows an example of a presentation when a rapid tap operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and starts to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the effective period for operating the attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 384(a) shows a display example at timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", a character string "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack those guys!" is displayed, and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. In the upper right corner of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", an operation part simulation image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with the character "attack" attached. Furthermore, a reserved image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Specifically, from the left, reserved images corresponding to the reserved item, the first reserved item, the second reserved item, and the third reserved item are displayed. Of these, the reserved item, the first reserved item, and the third reserved item are displayed as white reserved images, which are normal reserved images. On the other hand, the second reserved item is displayed as a red reserved image, which indicates that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot than the normal reserved item. It is possible to display a total of five reserved images, including one reserved item and four reserved items, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved items. In addition, in each of the reserved items from the reserved item to the fourth reserved item, it is possible to display the reserved item in a display mode that indicates that the special lottery result is expected to be a jackpot more than the normal reserved image. In addition, the reserved image basically continues to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative pattern is being displayed or not.
In addition, a display similar to this type is also produced in the presentation example shown with reference to Figure 383 (c) and the presentation example shown with reference to Figure 383 (d).

When a rapid-fire operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank into the minefield is displayed, and then a smoke image, which is an image of the smoke produced by the shell exploding, is displayed in place of the image of the minefield. Figure 384(b) shows an example of the display at timing t22. In this example of the display, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. Figure 384(c) shows an example of the display from timing t23 onwards. Note that the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of rapid-fire detection. For example, if rapid-fire detection is early, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the top of the display area, and if rapid-fire detection is late, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the bottom of the display area. Furthermore, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and continues to be displayed in the same position.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative pattern changes to the end. Figure 384 (d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the reserved item is erased. Next, from timing t35, a new display of the decorative pattern changes to the end. At this time, the reserved item that was the first reserved item moves to the left and becomes larger, becoming the reserved item. Also, the reserved item that was the second reserved item moves to the left and becomes the first reserved item. Similarly, the reserved item that was the third reserved item moves to the left and becomes the second reserved item. Also, in this example, when the third reserved item moves to the left and becomes the second reserved item, it changes from a normal reserved item (white reserved item image) to a reserved item with a higher expectation (green reserved item image). Figure 384 (e) shows a display example at timing t36. Figure 384 (f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the change to the end is completed.

In this way, by the player performing an appropriate operation on the operating means, the state in which the expectation level for the special result (the expectation level that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is indicated to the player is maintained.

Figure 383 (c) shows an example of a presentation when a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and starts to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the effective period for operating the attack button 3710 starts.
Fig. 385(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to Fig. 384(a).

Even if a long press operation is detected at timing t21, there is no display of shells being fired from the player's tank into the minefield. Instead, the minefield continues to be displayed approaching the player's tank. Figure 385(b) shows an example of the display from timing t22 to timing t23, when the operation valid period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank, causing the minefield to explode, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the image of the minefield. At the same time, the second reservation, which had been displayed in red until then, changes to a white reservation image. Figure 385(c) shows an example of the display at timing t24.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative pattern is terminated. FIG. 385(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the reserved image is erased. Next, from timing t35, a new display of the decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the reserved image that was the first reserved image moves leftward and becomes larger, becoming the reserved image. Also, the reserved image that was the second reserved image moves leftward and becomes the first reserved image. Similarly, the reserved image that was the third reserved image moves leftward and becomes the second reserved image. FIG. 385(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 385(f) shows a display example at timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the decorative pattern is terminated. In this embodiment, a smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal reserved image can be displayed, and the reserved image (red reserved image) that was previously displayed and indicates high expectation is replaced with the normal reserved image (white reserved image). Furthermore, while the smoke image is displayed, no special display is performed to change the normal reserved image to another reserved image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating high expectations.
The display of the smoke image continues until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved item that existed when the smoke image started to be displayed ends. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal reserved item image is displayed.
In addition, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the hold image (red hold image) indicating high expectation is replaced with a normal hold image (white hold image) for the second hold, but if there is a hold other than the second hold that indicates high expectation, it will be replaced with a normal hold image, as with the second hold.

In this way, if the player does not perform the appropriate operation, a state will occur in which the expectation of a special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is not indicated to the player, and this state will be maintained for a specified period of time.

Figure 383 (d) shows an example of a presentation when no rapid tapping or long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22).
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and starts to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the effective period for operating the attack button 3710 starts.
Fig. 386(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to Fig. 384(a).

In this example, as in the other examples, a minefield is displayed approaching the player's tank. Figure 386(b) shows an example display from timing t22 to timing t23, when the effective operation period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank and explodes, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image. The explosion image is set to have a higher display priority than the player's tank image and the reserved image, making it difficult to see the player's tank image and impossible to see the reserved image. Figure 386(c) shows an example display at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed. FIG. 386(d) shows a display example at timing t34 to timing t35. The explosion image is set to have a higher display priority than the decorative pattern, and the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern is difficult to see due to the explosion image. The reserved image also remains in an unrecognizable state. Next, a new variable display of the decorative pattern starts at timing t35. FIG. 386(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 386(f) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display is completed. In this embodiment, the explosion image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image and the decorative pattern. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and the decorative pattern, and the reserved image and the decorative pattern are displayed hidden by the explosion image. Therefore, the reserved image becomes unrecognizable, and the decorative pattern also becomes difficult to see.
The display of the explosion image continues until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image that existed when the explosion image started to be displayed ends. Also, as described above, while the explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see.

In this way, if the player does not perform the appropriate operation, a state will occur in which the player is not shown the number of reserved balls in addition to the expectation of the special result (expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.), and this state will be maintained for a specified period of time.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383 etc., the display of the smoke image or explosion image continues even after the changing display in which the smoke image or explosion image is displayed has ended and the next changing display has begun, and the visible state of the reserved image and decorative pattern is changed according to the operation mode of the player.

In this way, when a specific condition is met (when the operation of the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), a special game-related display (smoke image) is displayed across multiple display changes, and a specific effect (changed pending image) suggesting the expectation of a special result (expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is displayed; when a specific condition is met (when the operation of the operation means is not appropriate), a special game-related display is displayed across multiple display changes, and the specific effect suggesting the expectation of a special result is not displayed, thereby further increasing the player's motivation to operate the operation means. Also, by imposing graded penalties depending on the manner in which the operation means is operated, the motivation to perform more appropriate operations can be increased.

During the valid operation period, if a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected and then a successive hit is detected, an effect similar to the effect example shown with reference to Fig. 383(b) is performed from the timing when the successive hit was detected. In order to perform such processing, the timing when the display corresponding to the long press is executed is set to the end of the valid operation period, not the timing when the long press is detected.
With this configuration, even if an incorrect operation is made on the operating means, if the correct operation is quickly performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the display showing the expectation degree becomes invisible, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

An example has been given in which the change in the display mode of the pending image is restricted or the pending image is made invisible until the variable display corresponding to the pending image that existed at the time the display of the smoke image or explosion image began ends, but it is also possible to restrict the change in the display mode of the pending image or make the pending image invisible until the variable display has been performed a number of times corresponding to the maximum number of items that can be reserved (in this embodiment, the maximum number of items that can be reserved for the first starting port 2002, which is four).
In this way, by predetermining the number of times the display changes to limit pending changes and the number of times the display changes to make the pending image invisible, the display control of smoke images and explosion images on the peripheral control board 1510 can be simplified.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 383 etc., it may be configured so that there are cases where an effect pattern is executed in which rapid tapping is required as an operational instruction for the attack button 3710, and cases where an effect pattern is executed in which a long press is required. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that, as the lines of "Sergeant Might", in the effect pattern in which rapid tapping is required, the lines of "Sergeant Might" are "Second Lieutenant! Rapid tapping of the attack button to attack those guys!" are displayed, and in the effect pattern in which a long press is required, the lines of "Second Lieutenant! Long press of the attack button to attack those guys!" are displayed.
When an appropriate operation has been performed, the same display as the display examples shown in Figures 384(b) to 384(f) may be displayed.
On the other hand, if a player presses and holds a button despite an instruction to press repeatedly, or if a player presses and holds a button despite an instruction to press and hold a button, it is advisable to display the same as the display examples shown in Figures 385(b) to 385(f).
Also, if neither repeated tapping nor long pressing is performed, it is preferable to display the same as the display examples shown in Figures 386(b) to 386(f).
Such a configuration requires the player to carefully check the contents of the operating instructions, which increases the sense of tension regarding the operation and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operating means.

Referring to FIG. 385, a presentation example in which a reserved image is displayed in front of a smoke image has been shown, but a modified embodiment in which a smoke image is displayed in front of a reserved image may also be used. FIG. 383(e) is a time chart showing a presentation example in this embodiment. FIG. 387 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this example as well, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank, causing the minefield to explode, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image; however, the smoke image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and decorative patterns. Figure 387(a) is an example of the display at timing t24. As shown in the figure, the reserved image is hidden by the smoke image, making it invisible.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative patterns has ended. Figure 387(b) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new display of the decorative patterns begins from timing t35. Figure 387(c) shows a display example at timing t36. Figure 387(d) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the decorative patterns has ended. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed in a position that overlaps with the display area of the reserved image, so the reserved image becomes invisible. Also, part of the decorative patterns that are changing becomes invisible. Meanwhile, the visibility of the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed is not impeded.

In each of the performance examples shown in FIG. 384, FIG. 385, FIG. 386, and FIG. 387, the smoke image or explosion image is displayed until the change display corresponding to all the reserved images that existed at the time of starting the display of the smoke image or explosion image is finished, but the display of these images may be finished at a predetermined timing before the change display corresponding to all the reserved images is finished. For example, at the timing (timing t35) when the change display in which the smoke image or explosion image is displayed is finished and a new change display is started, the display of the smoke image or explosion image may be finished and the reserved image may be made visible. Note that the reserved image displayed at this time may be only the normal reserved image, and the reserved image with high expectation (for example, the red reserved image) may not be displayed. Note that the period during which only the normal reserved image is displayed may be set to a condition that a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the smoke image or explosion image was finished, not limited to the remaining number of changes.
In this way, by ending the special game-related display (display of smoke images and explosion images) in a short period of time, while prohibiting specific effects (preview effects) for a predetermined period of time and displaying only normal reserved images for a predetermined period of time, the player can only see the normal reserved images for reserved items, and cannot see the reserved images with high expectations, but can know the number of reserved items. Also, it is possible to prevent the embarrassment of other players finding out that the smoke images and explosion images were displayed for a long period of time and the player was unable to operate the operating means well.

The gaming machine may also be provided with a new operating means that can be operated when a special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is displayed to end the special game-related display before the display end period arrives. Although this operating means may be designed to end the display early with a simple operation, it is preferable in terms of preventing erroneous operation to require a special operation such as multiple operations, since the display ends early as a result of an operation with a clear intention to end the display. Furthermore, even if the operating means is operated to end a special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image, it is preferable to configure the game machine so that the execution of a look-ahead performance is prohibited for a predetermined period of time in the game that proceeds after the special operation of the operating means is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the game machine so that only a normal reserved image is displayed during this predetermined period of time.

When a long press is performed, the display may be in the manner shown in Figure 383 (d) or 386 (an explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern is difficult to see), and when an operation that does not amount to repeated pressing or a long press is performed or when no operation is performed, the display may be in the manner shown in Figure 383 (c) or 385 (a smoke image is displayed and the reserved image is normally reserved).
In this case, if a player dares to perform an operation different from the operating instructions, an explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative patterns are also difficult to see, resulting in a gaming situation in which a severe penalty is imposed compared to if no operation was performed.
On the other hand, if an operation that is not repeated tapping or long pressing is performed or if no operation is performed, a smoke image is displayed and only a normal reserved image is displayed, but the number of reserved items can be recognized. This is because it would be cruel to give a large penalty for a situation in which the player cannot perform an operation (for example, when purchasing a drink from a store clerk).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 383, restrictions were imposed on the display content based on the operation mode during one valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22). However, restrictions may also be imposed on the display content if the presentation shown with reference to Figure 383 is executed multiple times, and an operation that is not a rapid tap or long press is performed by the player during the valid operation period, or if no operation is performed multiple times (a predetermined number of times, being two or more times).
In this case, in the performance up to the specified number of times, it is possible to display a specific reserved image indicating high expectations by not displaying smoke images or explosion images regardless of the operation content, and in the performance when the specified number of times is reached, a smoke image may be displayed and only normal reserved images may be displayed as the reserved image, or an explosion image may be displayed to make the reserved image invisible.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not amount to rapid tapping or a long press, or if no operation occurs multiple times (two or more times, a predetermined number of times), a special effect may be executed in the next and subsequent changes in the decorative pattern, so that only a normal reserved image is displayed as the reserved image, or the reserved image becomes invisible.
As a special effect, for example, the effect examples shown with reference to Figures 385(a) to 385(f), 386(a) to 386(f), and 386(a) to 387(d) may be modified to execute an effect in which the player cannot intervene without generating an effective operation period in these effect examples (and without displaying a simulated operation section image), so that smoke images or explosion images are automatically displayed.
The special performance may be performed in the next variable display after the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or in the variable display after a predetermined number of randomly selected times (e.g., after 2 to 10 rotations) from the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or may be started after a randomly selected period of time has elapsed (e.g., after 10 seconds to 120 seconds) from the timing when the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed.

With this configuration, a penalty is imposed only if an inappropriate operation is performed multiple times, thereby preventing a situation in which a player is suddenly penalized.
In addition, since the same effects as those that were operable are automatically executed in an inoperable state, it is possible to impose restrictions on the display that suggests the degree of expectation in a natural way as an effect.
If the player continues to ignore the operation instructions, the reserved display indicating high expectations will not be displayed, so the player can concentrate only on the display of the currently changing decorative patterns. In other words, it can be said that the player can change the presentation mode to suit his/her preferences.

In this embodiment, the execution of a specific effect (display of a highly anticipated reserved image based on a read-ahead reserve) is restricted for reserves that existed at the time when the operation was not performed appropriately, and the execution of a specific effect is not restricted for reserves that occurred after the time when the operation was not performed appropriately. For example, the execution of a specific effect may be restricted for a predetermined number of fluctuations (number of reserved items), but in this case, it becomes possible for a player to perform an inappropriate operation on the gaming machine they were playing on, leave the store, and then cause the next player to play on that gaming machine to start playing in a state where the execution of effects is restricted, thereby committing a nuisance act against other players. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of a specific effect (read-ahead effect) for reserves that occurred after the time when the operation was not performed appropriately, it is possible to prevent a player from committing a nuisance act against other players.

Instead of continuously displaying the smoke image, the smoke image may be alternately displayed and not displayed, for example, every 0.5 seconds.
Such a configuration makes it possible to highlight specific effects (preview effects such as a bomb character image, a reserved image, etc.) that may be displayed together with a special game-related display (smoke image).

The explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 387 may be displayed and not displayed repeatedly. For example, the explosion image may be displayed and not displayed every 0.5 seconds. When the explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 387 are not displayed, the reserved image hidden by the explosion image or the smoke image becomes visible, but the reserved image displayed at this time should be only the normal reserved image (white reserved image).
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the reserved ball and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of reserved balls, making it possible to give an appropriate penalty to the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of the detection of the repeated taps. For example, if the detection of the repeated taps is early, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the upper part of the display area, and if the detection of the repeated taps is late, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the lower part of the display area. In other words, the later the detection of the repeated taps is, the closer the smoke image is to the display position of the smoke image displayed when a long press is detected. In addition, the smoke image displayed by the repeated tap operation and the smoke image displayed by the long press operation are the same image. Therefore, if a player performs a repeated tap just before the effective operation period ends, it is difficult to distinguish from a case where the player performs a long press operation by mistake. This makes it difficult for other players to tell whether the player performed the operation properly or incorrectly, even if they see the situation where the smoke image is being displayed, and prevents the player from being embarrassed by being noticed by other players even if the player makes a mistake in the operation mode.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 385, all of the reserved items through the fourth reserved items are displayed as normal reserved items, but the first through fourth reserved items may be displayed only with normal reserved images, but the reserved items may continue to be displayed with a reserved image that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reserved items. For example, if the reserved item is a reserved item that indicates a higher expectation, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the reserved item even if the display of a smoke image begins. Also, while the smoke image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the reserved item from a normal reserved image to a reserved image that indicates a higher expectation (for example, a red reserved image).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 386 and 387, the first through fourth reserves may be hidden by a smoke image or an explosion image, and the reserve in question may not be hidden. Furthermore, if the reserve in question is a reserve image indicating high expectations, it is preferable that the display mode of the reserve in question is not changed to a normal reserve image even if a smoke image or an explosion image starts to be displayed. Furthermore, while a smoke image or an explosion image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the reserve in question from a normal reserve image to a reserve image indicating higher expectations (for example, a red reserve image).

By configuring it in this way, the expectation level for the first through fourth reserves is not shown to the player, but the expectation level for the outcome of the currently changing decorative pattern is shown to the player by the display mode of that reserve, preventing the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the examples of effects shown in Figs. 384 to 387, instead of the smoke image or explosion image, a dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed at the display position of the smoke image or explosion image. In this case, as for the reserved image, as described above, only the normal reserved image may be displayed, or the visibility of the reserved image may be restricted by the dialogue window displayed instead of the smoke image or explosion image. Also, a character string such as "Check the operation content and operate carefully!" may be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, when the rapid-fire stroke is performed appropriately, "You performed the rapid-fire stroke well!" may be displayed, and when the rapid-fire stroke is not performed appropriately, "You should have performed the rapid-fire stroke." Alternatively, a character string such as "Don't confuse rapid-fire strokes with long presses!" may be displayed to indicate that there are multiple operation modes.
In this way, by displaying messages regarding the operation of the operating means, a player who is not familiar with how to operate the operating means can learn how to operate the operating means after the expiration of the effective operation period, and can operate the operating means well from the next time onwards.

In the above example, a hold image indicating high expectations is displayed instead of a normal hold image by looking ahead, but it is also possible to indicate that expectations for a specific hold are high by using other display modes other than hold images.

The display mode of the reserved image indicates the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but the display mode of the reserved image may also indicate the likelihood that other events will occur. For example, it may indicate the likelihood of a guaranteed jackpot, or the likelihood of a miss with time reduction.

With reference to Figs. 301 to 387, we have described embodiments that further increase the interest of the effects that use the operation unit. Below, we will explain embodiments that can be applied to these embodiments.

Although an example in which the operation unit is provided at the bottom of the door frame has been shown, other operation units may be used. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor may be provided on the game board, and the glass plate may be divided into multiple equal regions, for example, four regions in a cross shape: the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, and operations may be accepted when the player approaches each of these regions. With such a configuration, the player moves his/her hand significantly upward, and thus feels more like he/she is participating in the game. In this regard, sensors may be provided on the movable parts of the movable body provided on the frame (parts that resemble rabbit ears, movable body that resembles root vegetables, etc.) to detect the movement by the player, and these movable parts may have the function of accepting operation inputs by the player. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game is further enhanced.

In the various operation instructions in each embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 301 to 387, a special display may be displayed when a specific operation that does not comply with the operation instructions (for example, operating in an operation mode different from the instructed mode, operating an operation unit different from the instructed operation unit, etc.) is performed. For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that would normally be displayed when an operation is performed in compliance with the operation instructions is displayed when a specific operation that does not comply with the operation instructions is performed.

On the other hand, there are players who may not like such operation inputs that require large body movements, such as tired players and elderly players. Therefore, one or more sensors may be provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the detection of a game ball launched by a player into the game area by this sensor may be used as a substitute for the operation of the various operation units described above. In this case, the player can operate the operation unit only with his right hand, so that even tired or elderly players can perform operation inputs while launching game balls. It is also possible to accept both the operation of the operation unit and the input of the sensor provided in the predetermined area, and to display a performance corresponding to the operation input when an operation input is made to either one of them. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that the player or a store clerk can select whether the operation input is to be accepted by the operation input to the operation unit or the sensor provided in the predetermined area. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that the operation input is only performed by the game ball being launched. The predetermined area may be a dedicated performance sensor that can detect the passage or approach of a game ball on the board, or an operation input may be accepted based on the entry (detection by a sensor) of a game ball into an existing winning hole (for example, a general winning hole, a first starting hole, a gate, a large winning hole, etc.). In addition, a function as a sensor may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of a predetermined area. For example, a backflow prevention member at the top end of the rail or a collision stopper at the upper right of the game board may be provided with a sensor, and an operation input may be accepted when a game ball launched based on an operation by a player has passed or collided with the game ball. In addition, in order to correspond to a directional input of a lever, a directional input may be simulated by two or more sensors provided at different positions. In addition, the operation time may be simulated according to the number of detections per unit time. In this way, the player may adjust the launch strength of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball, thereby realizing the acceptance of the operation input. This allows for a greater variety of effects by reducing the number of controls and enabling additional effects to be displayed based on the operation received from the controls.

308 to 312, an embodiment capable of displaying a predetermined image hidden by a shield image has been shown, but in the embodiment shown in FIG. 308 to 312, simulated images simulating a plurality of operation units may be displayed, and these may be configured to be hidden by a shield image. Also, operation instruction displays may be displayed corresponding to the plurality of operation units, and these may be configured to be hidden by a shield image. Also, operation corresponding displays may be displayed corresponding to the operations on the plurality of operation units, and these may be configured to be hidden by a shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has little interest in operating the operation units to see the displays related to the plurality of operation units.
Similarly, the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 313 to 387 may be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of operation units and a shield image.
The display of the shield image may be configured to be performed by operating a predetermined operation unit (such as the defense button 3740).

Referring to Figures 301 to 387, we have shown various effects such as "Shield bullet reach", "Special machine gun reach", "Silent machine gun reach", "Bomb character reach", "Sudden tank effect", "Full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", but it is possible to adopt a specific technical idea in one effect as the technical idea in another effect. Also, it is possible to adopt multiple technical ideas in multiple effects as multiple technical ideas in one effect.

For example, the display of a shield image related to the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to each of the effects of the "special machine gun reach,""silent machine gun reach,""bomb character reach,""sudden tank effect,""full-power breakthrough reach," and "AI tank reach." In this case, the degree of expectation may be suggested by a method related to the "shield bullet reach" in a predetermined image (an enemy tank image, a bomb character image, a simulated image of a predetermined button, an image of an exploding shell, an image of an exploding bullet, a smoke image, a white flag image, or other image used in each effect) displayed in each effect. Also, the degree of expectation indicated in this way may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In addition, the predictive aspects of the "Sudden Tank Performance", the execution aspects of the predictive performance, and the technical concepts thereof may be applied to the "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", and the "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach" may be executed over multiple variable displays.
For example, a presentation mode or technical idea using an image of a destroyed enemy tank in a "sudden tank presentation" may be applied to a presentation mode using a shield image in a "shield bullet reach" or a smoke image in a "full-power breakthrough reach."
Also, the shield image or smoke image may be configured so that the player can display it multiple times, or the shield image or smoke image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the image suggesting the expectation level corresponding to the variable display that is the pre-read target (in the "sudden tank performance", the image of the destroyed enemy tank) is hidden by the shield image or smoke image.
Also, for example, in the "special machine gun reach" and "silent machine gun reach," images of shells fired from a cannon, bullets fired from a machine gun, and exploding shells and bullets may be displayed across the variable display.
Also, for example, in the "bomb character reach", a collision scene between the bomb character and the player's tank can occur not only during the change of the decorative pattern but also immediately before the change of the decorative pattern stops, and the player's tank can be configured to explode (part of the player's tank is destroyed) across the stopped display of the decorative pattern, and to cross the stopped display of the decorative pattern without exploding.In addition, immediately before the change of the change display that is the subject of the pre-reading stops, it is advisable to execute a performance that displays a large bomb character as shown in Figures 328, 333, 334, etc.
In addition, in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", it may be configured so that the player may be attacked by enemy shells multiple times during one display of the decorative pattern. Also, it may be configured so that a smoke image is displayed across the display of the decorative pattern. After performing the performance display based on the look-ahead multiple times in this way, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks at the final timing of the display that was the subject of the look-ahead.
Also, in the "AI tank reach", a display across multiple variable displays may be performed based on the foresight. In this case, it may be configured so that an encounter with an enemy tank occurs once or multiple times in each variable display. At least, it may be configured so that an encounter with an enemy tank occurs immediately before the display of the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern, and an image of a shell or bullet being destroyed is displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. Also, when the left lever 3720, which is not normally operated, is operated, a tank may fall off a cliff on the left side of the road as a performance, and a smoke image may be displayed on the screen. In this case, the display of the smoke image may be performed across multiple variable displays of the decorative pattern until the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the foresight performance display stops.
In each of the effects of "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Sudden Tank Effect", "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", and "AI Tank Reach", the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the defense button 3740, etc., are operable. However, for some or all of the operation parts in each effect example, the effective period may be configured to be executable during the display of the decorative pattern variation, or across multiple decorative pattern variation displays when a pre-reading effect is performed. In addition, the effective number of operations may be configured to be executable multiple times during the display of one decorative pattern variation. In addition, the display corresponding to the operation reception of the operation part may be configured to be displayed multiple times. In addition, the display corresponding to such an operation reception may be configured to be displayed across the display of the decorative pattern variation.
With this configuration, some kind of display reaction occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, so it is possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, by executing the performance display based on the operation across the variable display without being interrupted by the stopped display of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed performance.

Conventionally, gaming machines capable of executing a display effect in which effect images are switched according to the game situation have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340037).
However, if the display effect of switching the effect images is something that the player feels is strange, there is a risk that interest will decrease, and there is a need for a more appropriate display method for the display effect of switching the effect images. Also, by realizing a more appropriate display method, it is possible to increase interest.
Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, a gaming machine will be described that is unlikely to make the player feel uncomfortable with the display presentation that switches presentation images, and that can prevent a decline in interest and increase interest.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 254 to 256, 301 to 312, etc. will be described with reference to Figs. 388 to 400, etc. Figs. 388 to 392 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or the modification). Fig. 393 shows the display priority of these images. Figs. 394 and 397 show time charts in this embodiment. Figs. 395, 396, 398 to 400 show display examples in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, in special reach effects such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach," a special reach background image is displayed instead of a normal background image.

388 to 390 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, background images (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed during right hitting), images of various decorative patterns, images of the player's tank and enemy tank, belt-shaped pre-reading performance image, the reserved image, the first reserved image to the fourth reserved image, a character image for revival performance, the fourth pattern, a reserved number display image, and an error notification image are shown.
Data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

388(a) shows a normal background image A. Normal background image A is an image showing a state in which multiple tanks have gathered near a destroyed building.
Fig. 388(b) shows a normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a tank parked in a hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images that are displayed when the gaming state is the normal state.

388(c) shows a special reach background image A that is displayed when the special reach effect, the "giant tank reach" effect, is executed. The special reach background image A is an image that represents the sky, the desert, and an unpaved road.
388(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when the special reach effect, "enemy tank destruction reach," is executed. The special reach background image B is an image showing the sky, grassland, and road.

Figure 388 (e) shows a normal background image C that is displayed when the player is in a special state or time-saving state that is advantageous to the player and may occur after the end of a jackpot game state. The normal background image C is an image that indicates to the player to hit to the right.

The size (number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. The background image is also opaque. Therefore, no image is displayed behind the background image and is not visible to the player.

Figure 389 shows an example of decorative patterns that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative pattern consists of a left decorative pattern, a center decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern. These are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the presentation and the game situation.

389(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. In this figure, an example of a normal decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is shown, but each normal decorative pattern can be scrolled in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) and displayed, or can be temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position.
The display mode of the normal decorative symbols is determined according to the special lottery result, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the symbols are displayed as a sequence of numbers (e.g., "222"), and if the special lottery result is not a jackpot, the symbols are displayed as a sequence of numbers that are not a sequence (e.g., "352"). Figure 389(a) shows an example of the normal decorative symbols being displayed as "352".
A typical decorative pattern is composed of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters arranged in front of the background area. The numbers and characters have a one-to-one correspondence.

Figure 389 (b) shows a special reach decorative pattern that is displayed when special reach effects such as the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect are executed.
The special reach decoration symbol is displayed in a smaller size than the normal decoration symbol near the center of the display area, which makes it easier for the player to see the effects that suggest the special lottery results that are executed during the "Giant Tank Reach" effect or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect.
389(c) is a modified example of the special reach decoration symbol. In this way, the special reach decoration symbol in which the numbers are displayed more emphasized may be adopted.
In addition, Figures 389 (b) and 389 (c) show a state in which the special reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
During the reach performance, only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed, and the center decorative pattern may not be displayed.

Figure 389 (d) shows the right-hit decorative pattern that is displayed during a right-hit. The right-hit decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed in a game state that requires the player to hit the right, such as a probability hit state or a time-saving state. Figure 389 (d) shows the state in which the right-hit decorative pattern is displayed stopped at "352."

As shown in FIG. 389, normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, and right-hit decorative patterns can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of the numbers, etc. This makes it easy to understand the presentation situation and game status by visually checking the decorative patterns.

390(a) shows an image of the player's tank, an image of an enemy tank, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", and a simulated image of a mission button 3700, which are displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" performance is executed. The display manner of these images suggests the result of the special lottery.
390(b) shows an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", and a simulated image of the attack button 3710, which are displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is executed. The display manner of these images suggests the result of the special lottery.
The specific manner in which the special lottery results are indicated will be described later with reference to Figure 397 etc.

FIG. 390(d) shows a reserved image. At the bottom of the display area, the reserved display area, the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area are set from the left. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and are basically white in color. In addition, the diameter of the circle of the reserved image is larger than that of the reserved image.
The figure shows an example in which the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and pending images are displayed in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area.
When a game ball wins the first starting hole 2002, the reserved image or reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. For example, when the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area and reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area (i.e., when there are two reserved images), if a game ball wins the first starting hole 2002, the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area.

As shown with reference to Figures 254 to 256, based on the prediction of the reserved items, a specific reserved item image or a special reserved item image that has a different display mode (color or shape) from a normal reserved item image or a regular reserved item image (white circular) may be displayed, and the display mode may indicate that there is a high expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the reserved item will be a jackpot.

For example, instead of the usual white reserved image, a red reserved image may be displayed to indicate a high probability of the special lottery being a jackpot. For example, the order of the probability of a jackpot increasing may be white, green, red, and gold (recognized as gold by the player, but displayed as a combination of white pixels and yellow pixels expressing metallic luster in the display process). Also, the order may be configured so that the probability of displaying the images decreases. Although the reserved image has been given as an example, the reserved image may be displayed in the same manner.
For example, it is preferable to configure the reserved image or reserved image displayed at the time of the initial winning so that the probability that it is a white reserved image or reserved image is the highest, and the probability that it is a gold reserved image or reserved image is the lowest.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the reserved image last displayed at the timing when the decorative pattern change ends so that there is the highest probability that the reserved image is white and the lowest probability that the reserved image is gold.
In addition, the reserved image or the reserved image may be displayed in green, red or gold at the time of the initial winning, or the reserved image or the reserved image that is white at the time of the initial winning may be changed to a green, red or gold reserved image or the reserved image at a predetermined timing before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 is displayed in the reserved display area and the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area, but for example, in response to the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 2004 during right-handed play, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in a similar manner in the reserved display area and the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area.
Alternatively, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the winning of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in the same position as but in a different display manner from the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the winning of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002. For example, the reserved image or reserved image may be represented by being hexagonal rather than circular, or by superimposing the letters "electric chute" on each of the circular images.
In addition, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in the same display format as the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002, but in a different position (for example, the lower left part of the display area).
In addition, these may be combined to display the reserved image or reserved images corresponding to the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 in different positions and in different display formats.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which starting port the reserved ball corresponds to.

Figure 390 (e) shows the revival performance character and its words that may be displayed when the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a reach miss state. Details of the performance using the revival performance character will be described later.

Figure 390(f) shows the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol that indicates whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and is displayed, for example, in the upper right corner of the display area, smaller than the decorative symbols shown in Figures 389(a) to 389(d). The fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed stationary according to the stationary display of the special symbol. Like the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in the form of a sequence of numbers if the special lottery result is a jackpot, and is displayed in a form other than a sequence of numbers if the special lottery result is a loss. Figure 390(f) shows the number "352" displayed stationary as the fourth symbol.

Although the fourth symbol is composed of three numbers in the embodiment shown, the result of the special lottery may be shown by only two symbols, a symbol "○" indicating a big win and a symbol "×" indicating a loss, as the type of symbol displayed as the fourth symbol. During the variable display of the special symbol, the "○" and the "×" may be alternately displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds).
According to this configuration, while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a varying manner, the fourth pattern is alternately displayed as "○" and "×", and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the decorative patterns are displayed in a sequence of numbers and the fourth pattern is displayed as a "○", and if the special lottery result is a miss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a sequence other than numbers and the fourth pattern is displayed as an "×".
In this case, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped can be displayed in different ways for each variable display, but the symbols that are stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol are only two types: "○" and "×".

In this embodiment, since the change display of the first special pattern display 1403 and the change display of the second special pattern display 1405 are not performed simultaneously, the fourth pattern indicates the change status of both the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405, but the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern display 1403 and the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern display 1405 may be provided separately. For example, the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern display 1403 may be displayed above the image displaying the number of reserved images, and the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern display 1405 may be displayed below the image displaying the number of reserved images.

Figure 390 (g) shows a pending number display image. The pending number display image consists of an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 on the upper side, and an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 on the lower side. Figure 388 (h) shows an example of a display where the pending number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 is 3, and the pending number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 is 0. In this way, the pending number can be confirmed not only by the pending number display image shown in Figure 390 (g), but also by the pending image and the pending image shown in Figure 390 (d).

Figure 390 (h) shows an error notification image that is displayed when some kind of abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when fraudulent behavior against the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of a message that reads "Error has occurred. Please call a store attendant." The error notification image may also show specific details of the abnormality that occurred in the gaming machine or the fraudulent behavior committed by the player. In this case, the error notification image is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the fourth symbol or the image displaying the number of reserved balls.

Note that a hitting instruction image that instructs the user to operate the handle 302 may be displayed using a display method similar to that of the error notification image. For example, a hitting instruction image may display a message such as "Please hit to the right" or "Please return to hitting to the left." The display priority of the hitting instruction image should be higher than the display priority of the fourth symbol and the reserved number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

It is also possible to place objects within a virtual space, create a moving image in which a virtual camera is moved in a predetermined manner, and display the moving image as a normal background image, thereby making the normal background image dynamically visible.
391(a) to 391(c) show examples of displaying normal background moving image A at a predetermined timing, which is generated by tracking a group of tanks entering an enemy position in a virtual space with a virtual camera. By generating and repeatedly playing back such normal background moving image A, it is possible to repeatedly display a dynamic background image in a loop.
Specifically, Figure 391(a) shows an example of a display when the group of tanks departs, Figure 391(b) shows an example of a display when the group of tanks is entering an enemy position, and Figure 391(c) shows an example of a display when the group of tanks has further entered an enemy position.

Although an example of displaying a moving image of a group of tanks advancing into enemy territory has been shown with reference to Figures 391 (a) to 391 (c), other types of moving images may also be displayed.
Below is an example of a normal background moving image B created by moving the virtual camera from the initial position to the right and then to the left in the virtual space. In this normal background moving image B, each tank stops in the hangar. When the virtual camera finishes moving, it returns to the position where it started moving. The direction of the virtual camera is adjusted so that it faces the direction of the tank. FIG. 391(d) shows a display example when the virtual camera is in the initial position. FIG. 391(e) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the right and in front of the hangar. FIG. 391(f) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the rightmost position. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to the initial position. The player will view the moving images of the tanks and the hangar displayed in the order of FIG. 391(d), FIG. 391(e), FIG. 391(f), FIG. 391(e), and FIG. 391(d).
When normal background moving image B is displayed in a loop, after the images are displayed in the order of Figure 391(d), Figure 391(e), Figure 391(f), and Figure 391(e), normal background moving image B is again displayed starting from Figure 391(d).

The length (playback time) of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B should be set to about 30 to 120 seconds. In this case, it is possible to display the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B in a loop with a period of about 30 to 120 seconds.
In addition, a plurality of normal background moving images, such as normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B, may be generated and displayed in a predetermined order, including normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B.
In addition, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B can also be displayed across multiple variable displays, just like normal background image A and normal background image B.

In addition, as in the embodiment described below, when the execution of a special reach effect such as a "giant tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is started while the normal background video image A is being displayed, the background image is changed to a background image or background video image specifically for the special reach effect.
Thereafter, in accordance with the end of the special reach performance, the normal background moving image A that was displayed before the special reach performance is performed may be displayed in place of the background image or background moving image dedicated to the special reach. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (display state shown in FIG. 391(a)), or the playback of the normal background image A may be continued even during the special reach performance, and the normal background image A that has been progressed may be displayed in accordance with the end of the special reach performance.
Although normal background moving image A has been taken as an example, normal background moving image B may also be displayed in a similar manner.

Instead of the statically displayed normal background image A and normal background image B, an example has been shown in which dynamically displayed normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B are displayed, but the special reach background image A, special reach background image B, the reserved image, and the reserved image may also be displayed as still images or dynamically using moving images. When displayed dynamically, the images may be displayed by looping at a predetermined cycle. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed by looping at a cycle of about 10 to 60 seconds. Also, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed by looping at a cycle of about 1 to 2 seconds.

392(a) to 392(c) show examples of background concealment images.
The background concealment image is an image that is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or the normal background image B and the special reach background image that is displayed when the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is executed. The background concealment images shown in Fig. 392(a) to Fig. 392(c) are made of black images. The background concealment image can reduce the visibility of images that have a lower display priority than the background concealment image.
A plurality of background concealment images (specifically, three) with different degrees of visibility reduction are prepared. In this embodiment, each background concealment image is black, but has different transparency. Specifically, three background concealment images are prepared: a background concealment image A (FIG. 392(a)) with high transparency and low degree of visibility reduction, a background concealment image B (FIG. 392(b)) with medium transparency and medium degree of visibility reduction, and a background concealment image C (FIG. 392(c)) with low transparency and high degree of visibility reduction, and these are switched and displayed in a predetermined order. Although details will be described later, by displaying each background concealment image in sequence, the switching of the background images is visually recognized by the player in a natural way. Although three background concealment images with different degrees of transparency are shown, two or four or more background concealment images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the switching of the background is visually recognized by the player in a more natural way.
Also, instead of preparing multiple background concealment images with different degrees of transparency, the visibility of the background image may be changed by gradually changing the transparency of one black background concealment image using the function of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. With this configuration, it is possible to smoothly change the visibility of the background image while reducing the capacity used to store the background concealment images.
Figures 392(d) to 392(f) show other examples of background concealment images. These are examples in which an image of a bomb character (specifically, bomb character A shown in the above-mentioned embodiment) is used as the background concealment image. As will be described in more detail later, a white background concealment image may be used instead of black.

A display priority is set for each image shown with reference to Figures 388 to 392. Figure 393 is a table showing the display priority, the name of the layer in which the image is arranged, and the type of image that can be arranged in each layer. For example, a background image is arranged in layer L90, an image of the player's tank, an image of an enemy tank, and an operation instruction image are arranged in layers L75 to L80, and a decorative pattern is arranged in layer L70, and they are displayed superimposed based on the display priority set for each layer.
As shown in the table in Figure 393, the display priority is increased in the following order: background image (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed during a special reach (image of the player's tank, image of the enemy tank, lines from Sergeant Might, lines from Colonel Dyna, operation instruction images imitating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700, etc.), decorative patterns (normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, etc.), pseudo consecutive count display image, strip-shaped pre-reading performance image, first hold image to fourth hold image, the hold image, line preview image described later with reference to Figure 433 etc., background concealment image, game result image described later with reference to Figure 420 etc., revival performance image (revival performance character and its lines), fourth pattern, hold number display image, and error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of the various images, decorative patterns, reserved images, etc. displayed during a special reach is higher than the display priority of the background image, and the various images, decorative patterns, reserved images, etc. displayed during a special reach are displayed in front of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealment image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed during a special reach, decorative patterns, the reserved image, etc., and by displaying the background concealment image in front of these images, these images are hidden and their visibility is reduced.

Although an example in which the reserved image is arranged on layer L40 and the reserved image is arranged on layer L45 has been shown, the reserved image may be arranged on layer L26 and the reserved image may be arranged on layer L27. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealment image arranged on layer L30.
In addition, the reserved image may be arranged on layer L21, and the reserved image may be arranged on layer L22. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealment image arranged on layer L30 or the game result image arranged on layer L25.

The decorative pattern may also be placed on layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern will not be hidden by the background concealment image placed on layer L30.

The various presentation modes in this embodiment and various modified examples are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery and the game status, etc., determined by the main control board 1310, and are executed at predetermined timing by the peripheral control board 1510.
For example, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the decorative symbols in a non-missed state (e.g., "352") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, or displays them in a reach state (e.g., "2↓2") and then finally displays them in a missed reach state (e.g., "232"). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state ("2↓2") and then finally displays them in a repeat number (e.g., "222").
In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 also decides whether or not to execute special reach effects ("giant tank reach", "enemy tank destruction reach") or other effects, which will be described later.

First, a presentation example in which the decorative pattern does not reach a winning state and the background image does not change will be described with reference to Fig. 394(a) and Fig. 395. Fig. 394(a) shows a time chart for this presentation example, and Fig. 395 shows a display example at a specified timing for this presentation example.

Just before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative pattern stops changing. FIG. 395(a) shows a state in which the display of the decorative pattern is stopped changing. The number of reserved symbols at this time is 3. As the decorative pattern, a normal decorative pattern is displayed. In addition, as a background image, a normal background image A is displayed behind the decorative pattern.
From this state, at the timing t0, a new variable display of the decorative pattern starts. Figure 395 (b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display starts.
After that, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a manner that scrolls downward. FIG. 395(c) shows the display state at that time.
After that, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, and then at timing t5, the left decorative image is temporarily stopped and displayed. Figure 395 (d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at timing t10, the right decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. Figure 395 (e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at timing t15, the middle decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. Next, at timing t16, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed temporarily stopped. At the same time, the display of the reserved image ends. Figure 395 (f) shows the display state from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is shown that the special lottery result is a loss. From timing t17 onwards, a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next reserved is performed.

Next, a presentation example in the case where the decorative symbol is in a reach state but the background image is not switched will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 394(b) and the display example shown in Fig. 396. Note that during the period from timing t0 to timing t10, the same display as the presentation example shown with reference to Fig. 394(a) is performed.
In this example, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and a reach state occurs. Figure 396 (a) shows the display state at that time. After that, at timing t20, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and at timing t21, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped, and the player is informed of whether the special lottery result is a miss or a jackpot.
396(b) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a miss. In the figure, the decorative symbol "232" is displayed in a stopped state.
396(c) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the figure, the decorative symbols are displayed in the sequence of "222".
After timing t22, if the special lottery result is a miss, a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the next hold is executed, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to a jackpot background image exclusively used during a jackpot, and a jackpot game state is executed.

Compared to the example of a performance that does not result in a reach state shown with reference to FIG. 394(a), the example of a performance that results in a reach state shown with reference to FIG. 394(b) has a longer display time for the decorative pattern variations. Therefore, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that the special lottery result may be a jackpot for a long period of time.

In the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 394(a) and 395 and the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 394(b) and 396, only the normal background image A continues to be displayed while the decorative patterns are changing, and the special reach background image A and the special reach background image B are not displayed. Also, the background concealment image is not displayed.

In the time chart of FIG. 394(a), a performance example is shown in which the normal background image A is continuously displayed during the change of the decorative pattern (timing t0 to timing t16), during the stop of the decorative pattern (timing t16 to timing t17), and during the change of the decorative pattern from the next time onwards (timing t17 onwards), but the normal background image A is displayed even when the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the decorative pattern is not changing. FIG. 396(d) shows a display example after the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the most recent decorative pattern change display shows the number "253" stopped, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. If no winning ball is won at the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004), this display state is maintained.
In addition, the normal background moving image is maintained in a display state when the decorative pattern is not changing, similar to the normal background image. Specifically, even after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal background moving image that was displayed during the changing display of the decorative pattern continues to be played. In addition, after the normal background moving image is played to the end, it is preferable to play the moving image again from the beginning, so that the moving image is played in a loop.
Thus, the normal background image or normal background moving image is an image or moving image that is displayed as a background image when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a varying manner and when the game is not in a jackpot game state.

If the number of reserved items remains at zero for a predetermined period of time (if no changing display has been performed for a predetermined period of time), the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Specifically, when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved symbols is zero, the decorative symbols shown in Fig. 396(d) may be displayed stationary for one second, and then the decorative symbols may be displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., three seconds) until the lapse of the predetermined time, after which the decorative symbols may not be displayed. Fig. 396(e) shows an example of a display in which the decorative symbols are not displayed stationary.
This display state may be continued until a winning ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004).
In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the display area may be shifted to a demo image display state in which a demo image is displayed to introduce the pachinko machine 1. In the demo image display state, a demo image may be displayed in front of the stopped decorative pattern, or a demo image may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern.
In this way, even when the decorative pattern is changed from a state in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed to a state in which the decorative pattern is not variably displayed, the normal background image A continues to be displayed.
In addition, the normal background image A continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is not being changed, when the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004) is zero, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004) and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change.

In addition, when the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved symbols is 0, and after the decorative pattern has been displayed stationary for one second, if the touch of the player to the handle 302 is not detected by the handle touch sensor 310 for a predetermined period of time, the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Also, when the touch of the player on the handle 302 is newly detected by the handle touch sensor 310, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004), the display of the decorative pattern may be resumed. At the same time, the display of the demo image may be terminated. In this case, it is also preferable to continue to display the normal background image A regardless of whether the decorative pattern is displayed or not.

Normal background image A has been given as an example, but normal background image B and normal background image C can also be used in the same way as normal background image A, and can be displayed as background images when the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

In addition, the normal background image may be switched from one of normal background image A and normal background image B to the other when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a predetermined number of variable displays have been performed, when a predetermined lottery has been won, when a special reach effect that is a high expectation reach effect has ended in a miss, etc.).
In addition, in the most recent decorative pattern change display that starts after a specified condition is satisfied (for example, the change display executed next to the change display in which a special reach effect was performed resulting in a miss), it is advisable to execute an effect of switching the normal background image.
In addition, the normal background images that can be displayed in a gaming state (normal state) other than a gaming state in which right-hand hitting is performed have been described as normal background image A and normal background image B, but they are not limited to two types and may be three or more types. In that case, the normal background images may be switched based on a predetermined rule, such as being displayed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, the normal background images may be switched irregularly, such as being displayed in a random order.
Also, when a game state where right-hand play is performed (probability bonus state or time-saving state) is entered as a result of a jackpot game state, the normal background image C is displayed as the background image during right-hand play. In this way, the normal background image displayed may be changed as a result of a change in the game state. Note that there may be multiple background images other than the normal background image C as the background image during right-hand play. In this case, too, the background image may be switched in the same manner as the normal background image is displayed during the normal state.

In the performance examples shown with reference to Fig. 394(a), Fig. 394(b), Fig. 395, and Fig. 396, the background image is not switched during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is displayed continuously, but below, the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance in which the normal background image is switched to a special reach background image during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 394(c) and Fig. 397(a), and the display examples shown in Fig. 398 to Fig. 400. Note that in the time chart shown in Fig. 394(c), a performance example from timing t0 to timing t10 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is shown, and in the time chart shown in Fig. 397(a), a performance example from timing t10 to timing t45 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is shown.
In addition, during the period from timing t0 to timing t13, the variable display is performed in the same manner as the performance example shown with reference to Fig. 394(b). Fig. 398(a) is a display example of a predetermined timing during a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealment image is displayed.

In this example, from timing t13 to timing t19, background concealment image A, background concealment image B, and background concealment image C are displayed in a predetermined order. In addition, at timing t16 when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is switched from normal background image A to special reach background image B.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 397(a), background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t14 (one second). Fig. 398(b) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Fig. 398(c) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t15 to timing t17 (2 seconds), background concealed image C is displayed. Fig. 398(d) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t17 to timing t18 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Fig. 398(e) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t18 to timing t19 (one second), background concealed image A is displayed. Fig. 398(f) shows an example of the display during this period.

At timing t16 when the background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B, and the decorative pattern is changed to a special reach decorative pattern which is smaller than the normal decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 389 (b). However, since the background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, it is not until timing t17 when the background concealment image B is displayed that it becomes possible to recognize that these images have been changed.
The special reach decoration symbols are displayed during the period when the special reach background image is displayed (timing t16 to timing t39). The left decoration symbols and the right decoration symbols are not scrolled downward, and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

From timing t30 to timing t33, there occurs a valid operation period during which acceptance of operations on the attack button 3710 is valid. Fig. 398(g) shows an example of a display during this period. Simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed, along with a line instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710.
When an appropriate operation mode is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends, a mode suggesting the special lottery result (whether or not an indication that the enemy tank has been destroyed) is displayed.

Figure 399 shows an example of the display when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed is displayed. In addition, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a repeat pattern ("222") at timing t34, which is a predetermined time after the end of the effective operation period of the attack button 3710. Figure 399(a) shows this state.

On the other hand, Figure 400 shows an example of the display when the special lottery result is a miss. When the special lottery result is a miss, an image of an enemy tank passing by without being destroyed is displayed. In addition, at timing t34, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ended, the special reach decoration pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a reach miss mode ("232"). Figure 400(a) shows this state.

Next, in the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the background concealed image is displayed.
Specifically, background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t36 to timing t37 (one second). Figures 399(b) and 400(b) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t37 to timing t38 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Figures 399(c) and 400(c) show examples of displays during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t38 to timing t40 (2 seconds), background concealed image C is displayed. Figures 399(d) and 400(d) show examples of display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t40 to timing t41 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Figures 399(e) and 400(e) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t41 to timing t42 (one second), background concealed image A is displayed. Figures 399(f) and 400(f) show examples of display during this period.

At timing t39 when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image changes from special reach background image B to normal background image A, and the decorative pattern changes from special reach decorative pattern B to normal decorative pattern A; however, because background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, it is not until timing t40, when background concealment image B is displayed, that it becomes apparent that these images have been changed.

During the period from timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a temporarily stopped state. During the period from timing t42 to timing t44, the background concealment image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the normal decorative pattern A during the temporarily stopped state is not obstructed by the background concealment image. Figures 399(g) and 400(g) show the display state at this time.

At timing t44, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static manner, and the special lottery results are shown to the player. Figures 399(h) and 400(h) show the display state from timing t44 to timing t45.

Between a reach in which the background image does not change as shown in FIG. 394(b) and FIG. 396, and a special reach in which the background image changes as shown in FIG. 394(c) and FIG. 397 to FIG. 400 ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the latter has a higher probability of the special lottery result being a jackpot. For example, the former may be configured to have a probability of 3%, while the latter may have a probability of 10%.

In addition, a configuration may be made in which multiple special reaches with different expectations of a big win can be executed, and any of the special reaches can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to make the special reach background image, the image of the player's tank, the image of the enemy tank, the operation unit that requires operation, etc. different depending on the type of special reach. In this way, by visually checking the displayed special reach background image, the image of the player's tank and the enemy tank, and the operation instruction image of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation of a big win is high or low.
In addition, a form suggesting the degree of expectation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 309 etc. or its modified example may be adopted.

An example of a presentation in which the background image is switched at timing t16 has been shown, but since the change to the special reach background image B or a small special reach decorative pattern becomes recognizable from timing t17 onwards, the change to the special reach background image B or a small special reach decorative pattern may also be made at timing t15 or timing t17.
An example of a presentation in which the background image is switched at timing t39 is shown, but since the change to the normal background image A or the small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable from timing t40 onwards, the change to the normal background image A or the normal decorative pattern may also be made at timing t38 or timing t40.

In this manner, in this example of effect, at timing t16, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B. Similarly, at timing t39, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A.
At timing t16 and timing t39, since the background concealment image C is displayed, the player does not recognize that the background image has been switched.

The background image switching performance in this embodiment includes a period during which background concealment image A and background concealment image B are displayed in sequence, the visibility of the background image decreases, and the background image before the switch gradually becomes difficult to see (hereinafter may be referred to as a "first period"), a period during which background concealment image C is displayed and the background images before and after the switch are not visible (hereinafter may be referred to as a "second period"), and a period during which background concealment image B and background concealment image A are displayed in sequence, the visibility of the background image increases, and the background image after the switch gradually becomes easier to see (hereinafter may be referred to as a "third period").
After the end of the third period, during the period until the decorative patterns stop changing (the period from timing t42 to timing t44), the background image remains easily visible (hereinafter, this period may be referred to as the "fourth period").

With this configuration, the change in background image is perceived by the player in a natural way, and loss of interest can be prevented.
In addition, at the start of a special reach, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image while the background concealment image is being displayed, so that the start of the special reach is perceived by the player in a natural way, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.
Similarly, when the special reach ends, the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image while the background concealment image is being displayed, so that the end of the special reach is perceived by the player in a natural way, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In such a background image switching presentation, the background image is switched during the period (second period) when the background is most difficult to see (note that the background image may be switched simultaneously with the start of the third period). This allows the background to be switched smoothly, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the presentation.
In addition, by displaying a black background concealment image over the entire display area, the luminance of the display area is reduced, and the visibility of the decorative patterns is reduced, resulting in less image movement within the display area. Therefore, a player who is less aware of the contents displayed in the display area due to operating a smartphone, etc., can be made to recognize that an opportunity has come to pay attention to the display area.
In addition, when the special reach ends, a black background concealment image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display content in the display area is simplified for a certain period of time. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, since even if the special reach display result shows the player that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the player's excitement due to the expectation of a big win calms down and he or she continues playing without losing interest in the variable display thereafter.

A display example when the special lottery result is a jackpot is shown with reference to Fig. 399, but the background concealment image is displayed only when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the special lottery result is a jackpot, the background concealment image is not displayed, and the display mode shown in Fig. 399(a) is continued until timing t44, and the special reach decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Also, although the background concealment image is displayed, at timing t39, the special reach background image B may be switched to the jackpot background image rather than the normal background image A.
With this configuration, the excitement caused by the occurrence of a big win can be maintained until the big win game starts.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 399 and 400, the result of the special lottery was indicated by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative pattern, but a large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 389 (c) may also be adopted as the special reach decorative pattern indicating the special lottery result.
For example, at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t33) or at the timing when a predetermined time (one second) has elapsed since the end of the valid operation period and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed (timing t34), the decorative pattern may be changed from the small special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 389(b) to the large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 389(c).
The display of the large special reach decorative pattern continues until timing t39 during the second period, and after timing t39, the normal decorative pattern is displayed.
When the special lottery result is a jackpot and the background concealment image is not displayed, the display of the large special reach decoration pattern may be continued until timing t45.

The reserved image or reserved image may be configured not to be hidden by the background concealment image. For example, if the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 398 to 400 etc. is modified to display the reserved image or reserved image in front of the background concealment image, each display example shown in Figures 400(a) to 400(h) will be displayed as each display example shown in Figures 401(a) to 401(h). Such a display can be realized by setting the display priority of the reserved image and reserved image higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. Note that the reserved image or reserved image may be configured not to be hidden by the background concealment image not only at the end of the special reach, but also at the start of the special reach.

With this configuration, the reserved image or the visibility of the reserved image is not reduced, so the player can check the number of reserved balls and can operate the handle 302 to make a decision as to whether or not to place the game ball in the first starting hole 2002.
Specifically, the background concealment image is displayed at the start of a special reach, which has a relatively long variable display time compared to a reach in which only a normal background image is displayed, or immediately after a reach-time decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, from a state in which a reach-time decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, one reserved symbol is reduced and the next variable display is started, or a big win game state is generated and the opening and closing of the big prize winning port 2005 is started.
Therefore, if it is possible to check the number of reserved balls at the start of a special reach, it will be possible to determine whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls during a special reach when the expectation of a jackpot is high and there is not necessarily a high need to increase the number of reserved balls.
Furthermore, if it is possible to check the number of reserved balls at the end of a special reach, a player who has stopped firing game balls during the special reach can accurately decide whether or not to fire game balls again.

With reference to Figures 255 and 256, an embodiment has been shown in which a look-ahead performance display is performed over multiple variable displays based on the look-ahead results, but the method in this embodiment may be applied to modify the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 398 to 400, etc., so as to perform a look-ahead performance display.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 398 to 400 etc., if a pre-reading display is configured, the display examples shown in Figures 400(a) to 400(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 402(a) to 402(h), respectively.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 402, a strip-shaped look-ahead performance image with a character string "Enemy tank approaching!" is displayed at the top right and top left of the display area as a look-ahead performance display in a special reach. In addition, the background concealed image A and background concealed image B are displayed to create a first period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is difficult to see, and the background concealed image C is displayed to create a second period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is not visible. Thereafter, the background concealed image B and background concealed image A are displayed to create a third period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image gradually becomes easier to see, and the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image goes from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Such a display mode can be realized by setting the display priority of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image lower than the display priority of the background concealed image.

The display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image ends at timing t45 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern ends. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end during the period from timing t36 to timing t42 (see FIG. 397), during which the background concealed image is displayed. In this case, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end during any of the first to third periods. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end during the fourth period, during which the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end at timing t44 when the decorative pattern is stopped. In this way, the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image can also be displayed in a manner similar to that of other images such as reserved images, making it difficult or impossible to see by the background concealed image.

By displaying the strip-like look-ahead performance image even during the first and third periods during which the background concealment image is being displayed, the player can recognize under what degree of expectation the variable display of the decorative pattern has been performed.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the strip-like read-ahead performance image in the first to third periods (particularly the second period), it is possible to end the display of the strip-like read-ahead performance image in a natural manner.
Furthermore, by terminating the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not impeded.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 402, the reserved image or the reserved image and the preview performance image are made difficult to see or impossible to see by a background concealing image.
On the other hand, the look-ahead performance image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 402 may be displayed in front of the background concealed image, similar to the reserved image and the reserved image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 401. In this case, since the reserved image and the reserved image and the look-ahead performance image are displayed in front of the background concealed image, these images are easily visible.
On the other hand, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed in front of the background concealing image to make them easy to see, and the preview performance image may be displayed behind the background concealing image to make them difficult or impossible to see.
Alternatively, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed behind a background concealing image to make them difficult or impossible to see, and the preview performance image may be displayed in front of the background concealing image to make them easily visible.
In addition, the superimposition of these images can be performed by appropriately setting display priority for each image and using a layer function.

If the reserved image or both the reserved image and the look-ahead performance image are not visible, the player will be more likely to recognize that the scene has been changed.
When the reserved image or both the reserved image and the preview performance image are visible, the player will find it difficult to recognize that the scene has changed, but the player can recognize the degree of expectation indicated by these images.
When only the reserved image or only one of the reserved image and the look-ahead performance image is visible, the sense of scene change is somewhat diminished, but the player can recognize the general degree of expectation.

Furthermore, if the reserved image is displayed in a special manner that is different from the normal manner (for example, the reserved image is green or red) that indicates a high probability of winning a jackpot, the player can recognize that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot.
For example, if the reserved image is visible at the start of a special reach, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation under which the special reach is taking place.
In addition, if the reserved image is visible at the end of the special reach, it is possible to confirm under what degree of expectation the decorative pattern at the time of the reach stopped in a pattern indicating a jackpot, or in a non-pattern indicating a miss. For example, when the result is a miss under a high expectation condition, or a jackpot under a low expectation condition, the result is presented in a way that betrays the player's expectations, making the player feel a sense of surprise. Then, in the subsequent game, when the same reserved image is displayed, the player can enjoy the performance of the special reach with a sense of tension, considering that the result of the special reach will be a miss even when a low expectation condition is indicated, without losing the expectation that the result of the special reach will be a jackpot, and that the result of the special reach will be a miss even when a high expectation condition is indicated.
In addition, the display of the reserved image or reserved image can prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the gaming machine is broken.

A white background concealing image may be adopted as the background concealing image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 398 to 400, etc., when a white background concealing image is modified to be displayed, the display examples shown in Figs. 400(a) to 400(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figs. 403(a) to 403(h), respectively.
Similar to the black background concealment image, white background concealment images A to C with different degrees of transparency are prepared, and first, the white background concealment images A and B are displayed, and the transparency is gradually decreased to gradually decrease the visibility of the image located behind the white background concealment image (Fig. 403(b), Fig. 403(c)). Next, the white background concealment image C is displayed to make the image located behind the white background concealment image invisible (Fig. 403(d)). Next, the white background concealment images B and A are displayed, and the transparency is gradually increased to gradually improve the visibility of the image located behind the white background concealment image (Fig. 403(e), Fig. 403(f)). After that, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then stopped (Fig. 403(g), Fig. 403(h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as the background concealment image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 398 to 400 etc., when a plurality of bomb characters are modified to be displayed, the display examples shown in Figures 400(a) to 400(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 404(a) to 404(h), respectively.
In the first period in this modified embodiment, an image of a bomb character and a triangular-shaped background area begins to be displayed from the upper left and lower right of the display area as background concealment image A (Figure 404 (b)), and then background concealment image B is displayed (Figure 404 (c)).
Furthermore, in the second period, an image of a bomb character and two trapezoidal background areas is displayed as background concealment image C (Figure 404 (d)).
In the third period, background concealment image B is displayed (FIG. 404(e)), and then background concealment image A is displayed (FIG. 404(f)). After that, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then stopped (FIG. 404(g), FIG. 404(h)).
In this manner, in this embodiment, the background concealment image is composed of an image of the bomb character and the background region (the triangular or trapezoidal portion).
The background region may be a single color (white or black). The bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be dynamically displayed, such as by moving its hands and feet. Instead of or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of the following may be displayed as part of the background concealment image in front of the background region: a character other than the bomb character, a predetermined picture, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, or the name of a special reach that is being or has been executed.
With this configuration, the player's attention can be switched to the next varying display of the decorative symbols.

With reference to Figures 398 to 400, an example is shown in which a black background concealing image is displayed and the background image is switched at both the start and end of a special reach.
Furthermore, as the background concealment image, instead of a black background concealment image, an embodiment in which a white background concealment image is displayed with reference to FIG. 403, and an embodiment in which a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed with reference to FIG. 404 have been shown, but rather than displaying the same background concealment image at the start and end of a special reach, different background concealment images may be displayed at the start and end of a special reach.
For example, the background concealment image at the start of a special reach may be any of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc., and the background concealment image at the end of the special reach may be any of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.,.
Specifically, a white background concealment image may be displayed as the background concealment image at the start of a special reach, and a black background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 397(a), the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible are all the same length (specifically, 2 seconds). According to this embodiment, it is possible to simplify the display process of the background concealing image and reduce the amount of work required to develop the image presentation.

On the other hand, the length of each period may be different instead of being the same. Figures 397(b) and 397(c) show modified examples (modified examples 01 to 12) in which the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start and end of a special reach are different. For example, in modified example 08, the length of the first period is the longest at 3 seconds, the length of the second period is the shortest at 1 second, and the length of the third period is the middle length at 2 seconds.
In each modified example, the length of the fourth period may also differ from that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397(a).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display the background image within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required to display the background concealing image.

The basic effects at the start of special reaches for variants 01 to 12 are shown below.

According to variant 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image is fully recognized is lengthened), allowing the player to enjoy seeing which of the multiple reach effects is being displayed.

According to variant 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period = second period > third period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image is completely recognized is shortened), so that the special reach performance being executed can be recognized early.

According to variant example 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach is set to "second period > first period = third period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is lengthened), thereby ensuring more time to enjoy seeing which of the multiple reach effects will be executed.

According to variant 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period = third period > second period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is shortened), allowing the special reach performance to be enjoyed for a long time.

According to variant 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (i.e., the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened), so that the joy of progressing to the special reach performance can be provided for a long time.

According to variant example 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (i.e., the time it takes for the normal background image to become completely unrecognizable is shortened), so that the background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach performance early.

According to variant 07, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach "first period > second period > third period", the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened, so that the joy of progressing to a special reach performance can be provided for a long period of time, and the special reach performance that is being executed can be recognized early.

According to variant 08, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach "first period > third period > second period", the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened, and the joy of progressing to the special reach performance can be provided for a long time, and by shortening the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed, the special reach performance can be enjoyed for a long time.

According to variant example 09, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach as "second period > first period > third period", it is possible to secure more time to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects will be executed, and to make it possible to recognize early on which special reach effect will be executed.

According to variant example 10, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach equal to "second period > third period > first period," the background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach performance early and ensuring more time to enjoy finding out which of the multiple reach performances will be executed.

According to variant example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "third period > first period > second period", allowing the player to enjoy the special reach performance for a long time and to enjoy which of the multiple reach performances is being displayed.

According to variant example 12, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach the following relationship: "third period > second period > first period", the background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach performance early and to enjoy finding out which of the multiple reach performances is being displayed.

The basic effects at the end of special reaches for variants 01 to 12 are shown below.

According to variant 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, the second period, and the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (i.e., the time it takes for the normal background image to be fully recognized is lengthened), allowing the player time to change their mindset for the next change.

According to variant 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "first period = second period > third period" (i.e., shortening the time it takes for the normal background image to be completely recognized), which makes it possible to end the sense of anticipation for the current change early and create anticipation for the next change (enabling a quicker change of mood).

According to variant example 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period > first period = third period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealing image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is lengthened), making the time during which the background concealing image C is displayed feel longer and creating anticipation that the normal background image will not be displayed.

According to variant example 04, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "first period = third period > second period" (i.e. shortening the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed), it is possible to make the normal background image, although less visible, recognized early, ending anticipation for the change early and creating anticipation for the next change (enabling a quicker change of mood).

According to variant 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period and third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened), allowing the player to enjoy the afterglow of missing the fluctuation.

According to variant 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (i.e., the time it takes for the special reach background image to become completely unrecognizable is shortened), which makes it possible to end the sense of anticipation for the current change early and create anticipation for the next change (enabling the player to quickly change their mood).

According to variant 07, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach "first period > second period > third period", it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of the missed fluctuation, and also to end the expectation for the fluctuation early and create anticipation for the next fluctuation (enabling the player to quickly change their mood).

According to variant 08, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "first period > third period > second period", it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of the missed fluctuation, and also to end the expectation for the fluctuation early by making the normal background image, although it is less visible, recognized early, and to create anticipation for the next fluctuation (enabling a quicker change of mood).

According to variant example 09, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "second period > first period > third period", the time during which the background concealment image C is displayed can be made to feel longer, creating anticipation that the normal background image may not be displayed, and by making the player recognize the normal background image early when it is displayed, anticipation for the next change can be created (enabling the player to quickly change their mood).

According to variant example 10, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "second period > third period > first period," the time until the special reach background image becomes completely unrecognizable is shortened, and the background concealment image C is displayed for a long time when the expectation for the change was thought to have ended early, creating a new expectation.

According to variant example 11, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach "third period > first period > second period", the normal background image is recognized early, although it is less visible, and the sense of anticipation for the change is ended early, and by lengthening the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, it is possible to take time to change one's feelings for the next change.

According to variant example 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period and first period at the end of the special reach is "third period > second period > first period", which ends the sense of expectation for that change early and lengthens the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, allowing time for the player to change their feelings for the next change.

In addition, the display mode of the background concealed image at the start of a special reach in the embodiment shown in Figure 397(a) and each of the modified examples shown in Figure 397(b) and Figure 397(c) may be appropriately combined with the display mode of the background concealed image at the end of a special reach in the embodiment shown in Figure 397(a) and each of the modified examples shown in Figure 397(b) and Figure 397(c). For example, at the start of a special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of modified example 02.
According to this configuration, the background image can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 397(a), the number of seconds for each of the first to third periods was 2 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 6. In the embodiments shown with reference to Fig. 397(b) and Fig. 397(c), the number of seconds for each of the first to third periods was 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 5 to 7 seconds, but these are merely examples.
For example, the first to third periods may each be set appropriately within a range of about 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds may also be set appropriately within a range of about 3 to 9 seconds. Note that the number of seconds for each period may be made shorter or longer as long as an effect is observed.

As shown in Modifications 04, 05, 08, and 11 of FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 01, 04, 08, 11, and 12 of FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 04, 08, and 11 of FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the first and third periods.

During the first and third periods, the transparency of the background concealing image changes dynamically and is visible, and although the visibility of the decorative patterns and background image is reduced, they are not invisible. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative patterns and background image become invisible and appear to have stopped being displayed, which may lead some players to mistakenly believe that the gaming machine has broken down (or that a freeze effect has occurred, indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery will result in a jackpot); however, by making the second period relatively shorter than the first and third periods, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

In addition, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the player's own face or light from the light-emitting means of a gaming machine located behind the gaming machine may be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and be visible to the player, which may reduce the player's sense of immersion in the game. This tendency is more pronounced when a glossy (glare) type display device is used as the liquid crystal display device that constitutes the game board side performance display device 1600. However, the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by making the second period shorter than the first and third periods.

It is also possible to execute the third period after executing the first period without providing the second period. In this case, the background image may be switched at the timing of switching from the first period to the third period. The same effect can be obtained with such a configuration.
In the embodiment and modification shown in Fig. 397, when the second period is not provided, the start timing of the first period may not be changed and the third period may be executed after the end of the first period. Alternatively, the end timing of the third period may not be changed and the end timing of the first period may be modified to coincide with the start timing of the third period.

As shown in Modifications 03, 06, 09, 10, and 12 of FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 02, 03, 07, 09, and 10 of FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 03, 09, and 10 of FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the first period and the third period.

With this configuration, the background image and decorative patterns are hidden by the background concealment image for a longer period of time, making them invisible, so that the display content in the display area is simplified and the player's attention can be shifted to the presentation and game situation after the background image has been changed.
For example, when a special reach begins, the player's attention can be focused on the content of the performance that will be performed during the special reach. In this case, multiple special reach performances with different expectations can be performed as special reach performances, and one of the special reach performances can be performed (the "giant tank reach" performance described later is one example). In this case, the player can be teased as to which special reach will develop, which can increase the interest.
On the other hand, when the special reach ends, the player can switch his/her attention to the next pattern change or big win game.

Furthermore, when a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealment image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealment image during the second period, which allows the player to change his/her mind. The background concealment image may be dynamically displayed, such as a character moving around on the screen. In this case, the player's mind can be changed to the next pattern change or big win game.
On the other hand, black or white background concealment images only change transparency and do not move, so the player is not given unnecessary information, the division of effects is made clearer, and the player's mood can be changed.

As shown in variants 02, 05, 07, 08, and 09 of FIG. 397, the first period may be longer than the third period.

This configuration allows the player to fully perceive that the background image has started to change, preventing the player from being unable to understand how the presentation has changed. If the first period is shorter than the third period, the player may not be able to understand how the presentation has changed.

As shown in variants 01, 06, 10, 11, and 12 of FIG. 397, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to such a configuration, the special reach background image is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, so the player feels teased and the expectation of the special reach increases. In this case, it is possible to configure the special reach performance to be a plurality of special reach performances with different expectation levels, and to perform any one of the special reach performances (the "giant tank reach" performance described later is one example). In this case, the player is interested in which special reach performance will be performed, and by making the third period longer, the player can feel even stronger interest.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly reduced when the special reach ends, allowing the player to switch his/her attention to the next pattern change or big win game. This is particularly effective when the result of the special lottery is a miss.

The embodiments shown in Figures 397(a) to 397(c) may be modified so as not to provide the first period. In this case, the background concealing image may be hidden during the period that would have been the first period, and the second period may start at the timing shown in the figures.
Even in the case where the first period is not provided in this way, the same effect as that described above can be achieved.

397(a) to 397(c) may be modified so as not to provide the third period. In this case, the background concealment image may be hidden during the period that would have been the third period, and the second period may end at the timing shown in the figures.
Even in the case where the third period is not provided in this way, the same effect as that described above can be achieved.

The type of background concealment image displayed at the start of a special reach may also be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher when a white background concealment image is displayed than when a black background concealment image is displayed.

The display mode of the background concealment image may be configured not to indicate the probability of a big win. For example, even when a special reach with a different probability of a big win is executed, the same background concealment image may be displayed.
With this configuration, the player waits for the end of the background concealment image display while feeling a sense of anticipation about what kind of special reach will occur. Also, when the special reach ends, the player can calmly face the next and subsequent decorative pattern changes and big win games.

In the middle of a special reach effect, the effect content may be switched to a special reach effect with a higher expectation level. In this case, any of the above-mentioned modes may be adopted to display a background concealment image. In this case, the special reach effect after the switch may be configured to display one of a number of special reach background images with different jackpot expectation levels.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the background image is made invisible by the background concealing image, it is also possible to make it difficult to see, instead of making it invisible.
For example, even in the second period in which the visibility of the background image is most reduced by the background concealing image, the background image may be configured to be visible through the background concealing image rather than being invisible. For example, when a black background concealing image is used, the background image may be configured to be visible in the second period in a display state intermediate between the display state shown in Fig. 398(c) and the display state shown in Fig. 398(d).
Alternatively, the size of the background concealing image may be set to a size capable of concealing most of the background image (at least 70% or more, and preferably 90% or more), rather than a size capable of concealing the entire background image, and this background concealing image may be displayed during the second period.
These aspects may also be combined.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change in background image.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, a background concealing image made up of a bomb character, etc., are displayed as the background concealing image, these background concealing images may be displayed simultaneously.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background concealment image may be displayed for each divided area. For example, a black background concealment image may be displayed on the right half of the display area, and a white background concealment image may be displayed on the left half of the display area.
Moreover, a display priority may be set for the background concealing images, and the background concealing images may be displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like and a black background concealment image may be displayed, and the display priority of the background concealment image consisting of the bomb character or the like may be set higher than the display priority of the black background concealment image. In this case, the background concealment image consisting of the bomb character or the like narrows the area in which the background image is visible from the left and right, and is perceived by the player in such a manner that the visibility of the background image is reduced even within the area in which the background image is visible. Note that a white background concealment image may be displayed instead of a black background concealment image.
The display times (lengths of the first to third periods) of the multiple background concealed images displayed in this manner may be any one of the embodiments or modifications thereof shown in Fig. 397. Alternatively, a different display time (a different one of the embodiments or modifications thereof shown in Fig. 397) may be used for each background concealed image.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change in background image.

At the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, the background image itself is darkened, and the background image is switched using a background concealment image that is brighter than the background image (for example, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.).
This allows the player to clearly see that the background concealment image has been displayed, and the player can recognize that the presentation content has changed, allowing the player to switch his or her attention to the next pattern change.

On the other hand, at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed as a miss, the background image itself may be darkened and the background image may be switched using a black background concealment image. In this case, the visual difference between the background image and the background concealment image becomes smaller, making it less noticeable that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 388 to 404, display effects were performed using the display area, but these embodiments may be modified so that in addition to these display effects, effects using decorative members provided in the vicinity of the display area may be performed simultaneously.
Referring to Figure 405 etc., the following describes the tank device 3770 which lights up and moves during a special reach, thereby adding excitement to the special reach.

The tank role object 3770 is a three-dimensional role object that mimics the shape of a tank when viewed from behind, and is provided on the game board 5. When viewed from the front, the tank role object 3770 is provided at the bottom, in front of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Figure 405 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank role object 3770 when viewed from the front.

The tank role 3770 has a tank role light-emitting part (not shown). The tank role light-emitting part is equipped with a full-color LED, and can be in a non-emitting state or a emitting state of a predetermined color. As a specific light-emitting mode, for example, the tank role light-emitting part can be lit up or flashed in white, green, red, or yellow.
In addition, the tank role 3770 has a function of moving vertically between a lower standby position and an upper moving position by driving a tank role drive mechanism (not shown). Also, it is possible to stop at any position between the standby position and the moving position.

Figure 405 (a) shows the tank part 3770 in a non-illuminated standby position.
Figure 405 (b) shows the tank part 3770 emitting light in a predetermined color (e.g., red) and positioned in a standby position.
405(c) shows a state in which the tank role object 3770 is not emitting light and is located at a moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank role object 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.
405(d) shows a state in which the tank role object 3770 is emitting light in a predetermined color (e.g., red) and is located at a moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank role object 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.

405(b) and 405(d) show examples in which the reserved image display area is not displayed in the usual white color of the reserved image, but in red, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the usual reserved image. Also, the tank role object 3770 is positioned at the standby position or the moving position, and the tank role object 3770 is illuminated in the same red color as the reserved image.
Although red is given as an example of the color of the reserved image, the color is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank feature 3770 may be configured to move from a standby position to a moving position when a special reach begins.

The lighting and movement of the tank feature 3770 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 397(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 406(a). Note that aspects other than the tank prop 3770 and the reserved image are basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397(a) etc., so a description of these will be omitted.

Figure 406 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the presentation in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the tank device 3770 does not move from its standby position, but emits light in the same color as the reserved image, red, to indicate a high expectation of a jackpot. The reserved image may be turned red when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and the reserved image is displayed, when the variable display begins (timing t0), or at a specified timing during the variable display (for example, a specified timing during the period from timing t1 to timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 406(a), the reserved image is displayed in red as the reserved image until timing t45 when the variable display ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for one second. Note that the reserved image is difficult to see or cannot be seen during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42 when the background concealment image is displayed.
On the other hand, the tank character 3770 remains in the standby position without moving during the period from timing t0 when the variable display begins to timing t45.
The tank device 3770 begins to emit red light when the pending image is displayed in red (as described above, at the timing of the initial winning, at the timing when the changing display begins, at a specified timing during the changing display, etc.), and continues to emit red light until timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(b).
406(b) is a time chart showing modified example 01. In modified example 01, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t36, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(c).
406(c) is a time chart showing modified example 02. In modified example 02, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t38, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(d).
406(d) is a time chart showing modified example 03. In modified example 03, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(e).
406(e) is a time chart showing modified example 04. In modified example 04, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t42, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(f).
406(f) is a time chart showing modified example 05. In modified example 05, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t36, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(g).
406(g) is a time chart showing modified example 06. In modified example 06, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t38, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(h).
406(h) is a time chart showing modified example 07. In modified example 07, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406(i).
406(i) is a time chart showing modified example 08. In modified example 08, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

Next, another modified example will be shown with reference to FIG. 407. Note that FIG. 407(a) is the same as FIG. 406(a).

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(b).
407(b) is a time chart showing modified example 09. In modified example 09, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until timing t45. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in luminance from timing t40 to timing t42, and emits red light at the original luminance from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(c).
407(c) is a time chart showing modified example 10. In modified example 10, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t39, the luminance increases from timing t39 to timing t42, and the tank role object 3770 emits red light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(d).
Fig. 407(d) is a time chart showing modified example 11. In modified example 11, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, the light is turned off from timing t38 to timing t40, the luminance increases with the white light emission color from timing t40 to timing t42, and the white light is emitted from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(e).
407(e) is a time chart showing modified example 12. In modified example 12, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t39, the light emission color changes from red to white at timing t39, the luminance increases with the white light emission color from timing t39 to timing t42, and the white light is emitted from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(f).
Fig. 407(f) is a time chart showing modified example 13. In modified example 13, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t38 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(g).
407(g) is a time chart showing modified example 14. In modified example 14, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407(h).
407(h) is a time chart showing modified example 15. In modified example 15, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until timing t45. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation by making the illuminating decorative component (tank device 3770) glow in the same color as the reserved image.
In addition to displaying the background concealing image, when switching the background image, it is possible to switch the display mode of the reserved image or to end the display of the reserved image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member is gradually decreased as the visibility of the background image decreases, or the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member is gradually increased as the visibility of the background image increases, thereby making the luminous decorative member look natural.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the reserved image is displayed until timing t45, the display of the reserved image may be ended at timing t44, which is the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, at the same time as the display of the reserved image is ended, the luminous color of the tank role object 3770 may be changed from the luminous color of the reserved image to the normal luminous color, white.

In variant example 15 of Figure 407, the pending image is displayed in red and the tank character 3770 is turned off at timing t38, but instead of being turned off, it may be illuminated in white.
In variants 11 to 13 of FIG. 407, at timing t39, the red reserved image is changed to a white reserved image or the reserved image is not displayed, but at this time the red illumination state of the tank feature 3770 may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern begins or timing t45 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern ends).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the light emission state of the tank role object 3770 is changed to white or turned off, it is also possible to modify the state so that, at the timing when the light emission state of the tank role object 3770 is changed to white or turned off, the light emission state of the tank role object 3770 is stopped from matching with the light emission state of the pending display and a state in which it is simply illuminated as decoration is started. In this case, the degree of expectation may not be indicated by the light emission state, or a light emission state that matches the type of normal background image being displayed may be adopted.

It may be possible to implement a performance in which, during the varying display of the decorative pattern, the reserved image or reserved image is changed to another reserved image or reserved image that indicates a higher degree of expectation.
For example, at timing t25 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 406(a), the reserved image in red may be changed to the reserved image in gold. This allows the player to know that the expectation is higher.
During the first to third periods in which the background concealment image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the pending image or the pending image to another display mode indicating a different degree of expectation.
With this configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is guaranteed at the time when the expectation level changes, preventing the player from missing the reserved image or the change in the display mode of the reserved image.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 406(a) will be described below with reference to Fig. 408(a). Note that, other than the movement of the tank role object 3770, the performance is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 406(a) and the like, so the description of these will be omitted.
In this embodiment, when a special reach is executed, the tank role object 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position, and then moves from the moving position back to the standby position.
As described above, Fig. 405(a) and Fig. 405(b) show the state where the tank role object 3770 is in the standby position. Fig. 405(c) and Fig. 405(d) show the state where the tank role object 3770 is in the moving position.

In this embodiment, the tank role object 3770 is located in a standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. After that, it moves upward from the standby position to the moving position from timing t21 to timing t24. It is located in the moving position from timing t24 to timing t36. It moves downward from the moving position to the standby position from timing t36 to timing t42. It is located in the standby position from timing t42 to timing t45. It is recommended that these movements of the tank role object 3770 be performed at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank device 3770 will begin to emit red light when the pending image is displayed in red (such as the timing of the initial winning or the timing of the start of the variable display, as described above), and will continue to emit red light until timing t45.
In this manner, in this embodiment, the downward movement of the tank character 3770 begins at the same time as the display of the background concealment image begins, and the downward movement of the tank character 3770 ends at the same time as the display of the background concealment image ends.

It is advisable to configure the tank device 3770 so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when it moves upward than when it does not.

This configuration makes it possible to make the action of moving the movable decorative member (chassis 3770) from the moving position to the standby position less noticeable. Therefore, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the joy of the player who is happy about winning the jackpot from diminishing. It is also possible to make it less likely for a player who loses to feel disappointed that their hopes were high but the result was a loss.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 408(a), the tank role object 3770 is moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42. Below, an embodiment in which the timing for moving the tank role object 3770 downward is modified will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 408(b).

Variation example 01 is an example in which the tank role object 3770 is moved from the moving position to the standby position between timing t34 and timing t36.
Similarly, in Modifications 02 to 14, the tank part 3770 moves from the moving position to the standby position at each of the timings shown in FIG. 408(b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 408(a) and 408(b), the movement of the tank part 3770 starts and ends simultaneously with the start and end of the period before the visibility of the background image decreases, the period when the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), the period when the background image is not visible (second period), the period when the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image has returned to normal (fourth period). However, these embodiments may be modified so that the downward movement of the tank part 3770 starts in the middle of a certain period, or the downward movement of the tank part 3770 ends in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the downward movement may start at timing t37 in the middle of the first period and end at timing t39 in the middle of the second period. Also, for example, the downward movement may start and end within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative member (tank character 3770) from the moving position to the standby position near the time when the background concealment image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the movement of the movable decorative member returning to the standby position can be made less noticeable.

Each embodiment of the movement mode of the tank character 3770 shown with reference to Figures 408(a) and 408(b) may be combined with each embodiment of the display mode of the reserved image and the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 shown with reference to Figures 406(a) to 406(i) and 407(a) to 407(h).
For example, the embodiments described in Figure 408 may be combined with the embodiments described in Figure 406 or Figure 407 at the timing shown in the figures to move and illuminate the tank character 3770 and display the reserved image.
Alternatively, the light emission pattern or change in the pending image shown in Figures 406 and 407 may begin at the timing when the period in which the tank character 3770 shown in Figure 408 moves downward begins or ends.
Alternatively, the lighting pattern and the change in the reserved image shown in Figures 406 and 407 may begin exactly in the middle of the period during which the tank character 3770 shown in Figure 408 moves downward.

With this configuration, the light emission pattern of the tank part 3770 can be made more or less noticeable.
Even if a background concealment image is displayed in the display area, reducing the visibility of the display area, the movable decorative member (tank part 3770) is illuminated, allowing the player to know the degree of expectation of a hit or miss result.
Alternatively, when a background concealment image is displayed in the display area, reducing the visibility of the display area, the movable decorative member (tank character 3770) can be turned off, making the movement of the movable decorative member less noticeable.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 397 to 400, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern is reduced simultaneously, but an embodiment modified to vary the timing of these will be described with reference to Figures 409 and 410.

Note that Figure 409(a) shows a presentation pattern that is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 397(a) etc., except for the addition of an explanation of the visual appearance of the decorative pattern, so explanation of this will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 409 (a), during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern gradually decreases until the background image and decorative pattern become invisible, and then the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern gradually increases.

Figure 409(b) shows an embodiment in which the embodiment shown in Figure 409(a) is modified so that the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In variant example 01, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t14 to timing t15, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t15 to timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t17 to timing t18.
In addition, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t37 to timing t38, the decorative pattern becomes unnoticeable from timing t38 to timing t40, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t40 to timing t41.

Similarly, in variants 02 to 08, at the respective times shown in FIG. 409(b), the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases.

Fig. 410 shows a display example corresponding to Modification 03 of Fig. 409(b). Also, Fig. 410(a) to Fig. 410(h) show display states corresponding to the respective display states shown with reference to Fig. 400(a) to Fig. 400(h).
Fig. 410(b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in modified example 03 of Fig. 409(b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not reduced. In order not to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern, it is preferable to temporarily set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.
Fig. 410(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced. In order to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern when the background concealment image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a black semi-transparent image in front of the decorative pattern.
Figures 410(a), 410(c) to 410(f), and 410(h) are similar to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 400(a), 400(c) to 400(f), and 400(h), so their explanation will be omitted.

In addition, the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the special reach in the embodiment shown in Fig. 409(a) and each modified example shown in Fig. 409(b) may be appropriately combined with the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols at the end of the special reach in the embodiment shown in Fig. 409(a) and each modified example shown in Fig. 409(b). For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed in the form of modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed in the form of modified example 02.
According to this configuration, the background image can be appropriately switched according to the content of the presentation.

Referring to FIG. 410, an embodiment in which a black background concealment image is displayed has been shown, but instead of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed.

According to the embodiments of variant example 01, variant example 02, variant example 03, variant example 04, and variant example 06, the time during which the decorative patterns are visible can be extended when the background image is switched, thereby preventing the player from being unable to understand the game content.
According to the embodiments of Modification 03, Modification 05, Modification 06, Modification 07, and Modification 08, the time during which the decorative symbols are difficult to see can be lengthened when the background image is switched. This allows the player to focus on the display contents other than the decorative symbols when the special reach begins, and improves interest. In addition, when the special reach ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner indicating a reach failure or a jackpot, and in the case of a reach failure, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, the player's interest can be improved by teasing him.

During the special reach, a special decorative pattern with a different design from that during the variation of the normal decorative pattern is displayed. Specifically, during the normal reach, a large normal decorative pattern with characters as shown in FIG. 389(a) is displayed, and during the special reach, a small special reach decorative pattern with no characters as shown in FIG. 389(b) is displayed. Note that although the design of the decorative pattern is different, the numbers indicated by the decorative pattern are the same before and after the background concealment image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the first period, the special reach decorative pattern is changed to a normal decorative pattern in the second period, and the normal decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the third period.
During the temporary stop display, the displayed decorative pattern is not changed to another decorative pattern with a different number, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that the decorative pattern periodically swings, and the swinging manner may be the same or different in the first period and the third period. For example, the manner of the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern in the first period and the third period may be one of a swinging manner in the up-down direction, a swinging manner in the left-right direction, and a swinging manner that rotates around the up-down direction as an axis.
In addition, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be the same as the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be one second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be set to 2 seconds, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 2 seconds.

In this way, by making the display mode different between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern when temporarily stopped, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern.

The oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 3 seconds, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 3 seconds.

In this way, by making the display mode different between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern when temporarily stopped, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397(a), the length of the third period, which is the period during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see, is set to 2 seconds, and the length of the fourth period, which is the period after the visibility of the background image returns to the original state, is set to 2 seconds, but the fourth period may not be provided and the change of the decorative pattern may be stopped at the end timing of the third period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 397(a), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the timing t42 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 397(b), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the timing t43 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modified examples 02 to 12, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the third period ends.
The fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is 2 seconds, the fourth period may be less than 2 seconds.

With this configuration, the decorative pattern can be definitively displayed promptly after the end of the third period.

Referring to Figure 397 (a), in the embodiment, the display of the reserved image was terminated at timing t44 when the decorative pattern was displayed in a stopped state, but a dynamic display in which the reserved image is erased may be performed for a short period of time from timing t44.
At this time, rather than simply terminating the display of the reserved image, a concealed image that conceals at least a part of the reserved image may be displayed in front of the reserved image simultaneously with the stopped display of the decorative pattern, and then the display of the reserved image and the concealed image may be terminated after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the reserved image itself may be dynamically erased and displayed in the same manner. For example, the size of the reserved image may be gradually reduced, and after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds, the size of the reserved image may be set to 0, and the display of the reserved image may be terminated.

With this configuration, the player can accept the result of the special lottery without being bound by the expectation level shown during the varying display.
In addition, the display of the reserved image can be ended in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 397 to 400, the decorative symbols provisionally displayed at timing t34 indicate whether the result of the special lottery is a miss or a jackpot. However, an embodiment in which this embodiment is modified so that the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a display mode indicating a miss, and then change to a display mode indicating a jackpot, will be described below with reference to Figures 411 to 415. Note that after the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the decorative symbols do not change to a display mode indicating a miss.

In this embodiment, at timing t34 during a special reach, the left, center, and right special reach decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (for example, "232"), and then a revival effect is executed after the temporary stop miss. After the revival effect is executed after the temporary stop miss, the normal decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss, or the normal decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot.

411 to 413 are time charts showing examples of effects in this embodiment. 414 and 415 are diagrams showing examples of displays in this embodiment.
In addition, as for the presentation modes other than the revival presentation after a temporary stop miss, they are basically the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 397 (a) etc., so explanations of these will be omitted.

Figures 411(b), 412(b), and 413(b) show the display time of the decorative pattern when the revival performance after the temporary stop is unsuccessful and the display time of the decorative pattern when the revival performance after the temporary stop is unsuccessful.
Figures 411(c) to 411(g), 412(c) to 412(f), and 413(c) to 413(h) show examples of presentation in the display area when the revival presentation after a temporary stop misses fails, and examples of presentation in the display area when the revival presentation after a temporary stop misses is successful.
Figure 414 shows an example of the display in the display area when the revival performance after a temporary stop misses fails, and Figure 415 shows an example of the display in the display area when the revival performance after a temporary stop misses is successful.

Of these examples, the revival effect after a missed temporary stop will be explained with reference to the time chart (variation 06) shown in Figure 412 (d) and the display examples shown in Figures 414 and 415.

In the modified example 06, at the timing t34, the reach-time decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss. Fig. 414(a) and Fig. 415(a) show a state in which the reach-time decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, a bomb character and an image of the dialogue "You still have a chance!" are displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Figures 414(b) and 415(b) show the display state from timing t36 to timing t37. Also, Figures 414(c) and 415(c) show the display state from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right corner of the display area to the center of the lower part of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, together with the bomb character, either an image with the dialogue "There's nothing I can do..." indicating that the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has failed, or an image with the dialogue "A feeling of victory!" indicating that the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has succeeded is displayed. Fig. 414(d) shows a display example when the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has failed, and Fig. 415(d) shows a display example when the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has succeeded.

If the revival performance after the provisional stop is unsuccessful, the bomb character and the dialogue image are no longer displayed at timing t40, and the same display as that in the case where the revival performance after the provisional stop is not performed is performed from timing t40 to timing t45.
Figure 414(e) shows an example of a display from timing t40 to timing t41, Figure 414(f) shows an example of a display from timing t41 to timing t42, Figure 414(g) shows an example of a display from timing t42 to timing t44, and Figure 414(h) shows an example of a display from timing t44 to timing t45.

If the revival performance after a missed temporary stop is successful, at timing t40, the decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped in a pattern of a sequence indicating a jackpot, the display of the decorative patterns stops at timing t49, and the decorative patterns are displayed stationary from timing t49 to timing t50. Also, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues from timing t40 to timing t50. In other words, the display time of the decorative patterns when the revival performance after a missed temporary stop is successful is longer than the display time of the decorative patterns when the revival performance after a missed temporary stop is unsuccessful.

Figure 415(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, Figure 415(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, Figure 415(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t49, and Figure 415(h) shows a display example from timing t49 to timing t50. As is clear from the figures, if the revival performance after a temporary stop miss is successful (if the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the bomb character and dialogue image continues until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Variant example 06 has been described as a representative example, but in other variant examples, the timing at which the revival effect begins after a missed temporary stop, the number of seconds that the bomb character is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, the timing at which the bomb character moves to display whether it was a failure or success, and the length of time that the bomb character is displayed in the lower center of the display area when the revival effect is successful will differ, but in other aspects, the display will be similar to variant example 06.
For example, in the embodiments shown in Figures 411 (c) to 411 (g) and in variants 01 to 04, the display of the bomb character begins at timing t34, but the timing at which the bomb character moves and the display of the dialogue image indicating the result of the special lottery begins is timing t37 in variant 01, timing t39 in variant 02, timing t41 in variant 03, and timing t43 in variant 04.
Similarly, FIG. 412 shows a modified example in which the display of a bomb character begins at timing t36, and FIG. 413 shows modified examples in which the display of a bomb character begins at timing t38, timing t40, and timing t42.

If the revival effect after the provisional stop miss is successful, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop state may be changed from a display mode indicating a miss to a display mode indicating a jackpot at the timing when the image with the line "A feeling of victory!" is displayed. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to a display mode indicating a jackpot a predetermined number of seconds later (e.g., one second later) after the image with the line "A feeling of victory!" is displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 411 to 415, after the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a miss, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image begins at the start of the period until the visibility of the background image begins to decrease, the period when the background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), the period when the background image is not visible (second period), the period when the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image has returned to normal (fourth period), or the display of the dialogue image begins during these periods, and at the end of these periods, an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been reached is made using the dialogue image (when the revival performance fails). However, these embodiments may be modified so that the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image begins in the middle of a certain period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image begins at the end of a certain period, or an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been reached using the dialogue image is made in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started at timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the notification of whether or not a jackpot has been reached may be made by the dialogue image at timing t38 which is the start timing of the second period. Also, for example, during the second period, the display of the bomb character may be started, and the notification of whether or not a jackpot has been reached may be made by the movement of the bomb character and the display of the dialogue image.

The display priority of the bomb character and dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth pattern and the reserved number display image.

If the result of the revival performance after the temporary stop miss is a failure, the revival performance after the temporary stop miss may be executed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in FIG. 411(c) is a failure, the revival performance may be executed again in any of the modes shown in FIG. 412(c) to FIG. 412(f) and FIG. 413(c) to FIG. 413(h). Similarly, even if the mode shown in FIG. 412(c) is a failure, the revival performance after the temporary stop miss may be executed again in the mode shown in FIG. 413(c) to FIG. 413(h).
In this way, the revival performance after a temporary stop miss may be configured to be executable multiple times so that after a failed result is displayed once in the revival performance after a temporary stop miss, the revival performance after a temporary stop miss may finally be successful and the player may be shown that the result of the special lottery is a win.

In this way, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, a revival effect after the temporary stop miss may be executed when the background image is switched, resulting in a big win, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for a big win until the final stage of the variable display.
In particular, since the display content in the display area is simplified by displaying a background concealment image, the player can be given a great sense of surprise and joy when a revival effect is executed after a temporary stop miss in this state, or when the player is notified that the result of the revival effect after a temporary stop miss has been successful and a jackpot has occurred.

In a period (first period) when the visibility of the special reach background image gradually decreases, when a revival performance is performed after a temporary stop failure, the player is not left feeling disappointed that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a failure, and the player can be made to feel an expectation for a big win.
When a revival performance after a temporary stop miss is performed during a period (second period) when the special reach background image is not visible, the visibility of the revival performance after a temporary stop miss is high, so that a player can easily notice that the revival performance after a temporary stop miss has been performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the revival performance after a temporary stop miss is being performed.
When a revival performance is performed after a temporary stop miss during a period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see or during a period (fourth period) when the normal background image is easily visible, the normal background image can be seen, making the player think that the result of the special lottery is a miss, but it may turn out to be a big win, exciting the player.
As shown with reference to FIG. 397(b), by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, these effects can be made more effective.
In addition, by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, the revival effect may be executed multiple times after the provisional stop fails in a certain period.

An embodiment of the revival effect after a missed temporary stop has been shown with reference to Figures 411 to 415, but it may be combined with the other embodiments described above.

Referring to Figures 388 to 415, an embodiment and its modified forms of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect are shown, but the embodiment and its modified forms of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be applied to other embodiments described in this specification (for example, the "giant tank reach" effect described later).

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 388 to 400 etc. will be described below. In the "giant tank reach" which is a special reach performance in this embodiment, special reach background image A is displayed instead of special reach background image B. Also, operation of mission button 3700 is valid instead of attack button 3710. Also, during the period when the special reach background image is displayed, the reserved image is not displayed.
Fig. 416(a) is a time chart showing an example of the performance from timing t10 to timing t45 in this embodiment. Note that, apart from the reserved image, the display mode of the reserved image, and the performance mode during the special reach (such as the background image and the enemy tank), the performance mode is basically the same as that of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 397(a) and the like, so a description of these will be omitted.

Fig. 417 shows a display example at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect. The display examples shown in Fig. 417(a) to Fig. 417(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 398(a) to Fig. 398(g), respectively, and the display timing, etc. are the same as the effect examples shown with reference to Fig. 398(a) to Fig. 398(g).
Fig. 418 shows a display example at the end of the "Giant Tank Reach" (at the time of the big win). The display examples shown in Fig. 418(a) to Fig. 418(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 399(a) to Fig. 399(g), respectively, and the display timing, etc. are the same as the presentation examples shown with reference to Fig. 399(a) to Fig. 399(g).
Fig. 419 shows a display example at the end of the "Giant Tank Reach" (when it is a miss). The display examples shown in Fig. 419(a) to Fig. 419(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 400(a) to Fig. 400(g), respectively, and the display timing, etc. are the same as the performance examples shown with reference to Fig. 400(a) to Fig. 400(g).

As shown in Figures 416 to 419, in the "Giant Tank Reach" of this embodiment, the image of the enemy tank displayed is different from that in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach." In addition, special reach background image A is displayed as the background image. In addition, operation of mission button 3700 is effective, not attack button 3710. In addition, the reserved image or reserved image is not displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach."

In this embodiment, the "Giant Tank Reach" has a higher probability of winning when the reach effect is executed than the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figures 397 to 400, etc. For example, the probability of winning the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is 10%, and the probability of winning the "Giant Tank Reach" is 50%.

As shown with reference to Figures 418 and 419, the reserved image and the reserved images are not displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach", but it is also possible to display the reserved image and not display the reserved image.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can recognize the expectation level indicated by the reserved image even during the "Giant Tank Reach". Also, during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" which has a very high expectation level, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of reserved items or the expectation level of the variable display that will be performed after the current variable display (for example, even if a green reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, the player is more concerned about the result of the "Giant Tank Reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the reserved image, the display content of the display area can be simplified, and the player can be focused on the "Giant Tank Reach".

Referring to Figures 397 and 416, an example has been shown in which a "giant tank reach" and an "enemy tank destruction reach" occur at the same time, but when a "giant tank reach" occurs, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be longer than when an "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs. For example, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be extended by 5 seconds, a reach state occurs at timing t15, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, starting the "giant tank reach".

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 397 and 416, the length for which the reach performance is executed is the same for the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach", but the length for which the reach performance is executed may be different. For example, the "giant tank reach" may take longer than the "enemy tank destruction reach", and the reach performance may end in a shorter time for the "giant tank reach" than for the "enemy tank destruction reach".

When the reserved image indicating that the expectation level is above a predetermined level (e.g., a red reserved image or a gold reserved image) is displayed, the "giant tank reach" may always occur. On the other hand, when the reserved image indicating that the expectation level is below a predetermined level (e.g., a white reserved image or a green reserved image) is displayed, the presentation may be such that the "giant tank reach" occurs, the "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs, or neither reach occurs.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach," it has been shown that any one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be used. In the "giant tank reach," it is also possible to use any one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.
For example, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be used in the "giant tank reach" and a black background concealment image may be used in the "enemy tank destruction reach" so that the background concealment images are different. Alternatively, the same background concealment image (for example, a black background concealment image for both) may be used in the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach".

Figures 416(b) and 416(c) show several embodiments (Modification 01 to Modification 12) that are modifications of the embodiment shown in Figure 416(a) so that the lengths of the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (specifically, 2 seconds) are different rather than being the same. Note that these embodiments may also achieve the same effects as the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 397(b) and 397(c).

In this way, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image is not displayed while the special reach background image is displayed. On the other hand, in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the reserved image is displayed while the special reach background image is displayed. In this way, by providing cases where the reserved image is not displayed and cases where it is displayed depending on the type of reach, the display content can be diversified.
For example, by not displaying the reserved image, the player can focus on the tank-based presentation. On the other hand, by displaying the reserved image, the player can decide whether or not to operate the handle 302. Also, when the reserved image is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation of a big win.

As the visual recognition mode of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach", the embodiment shown in Fig. 416(a) and the modified embodiments shown in Fig. 416(b) and Fig. 416(c) may be adopted. Note that the contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to Fig. 397, with some exceptions.
In addition, the visual appearance of the background image in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be the embodiment shown in Figure 397(a) or the modified embodiments shown in Figures 397(b) and 397(c).
In addition, it may be configured so that a "giant tank reach" employing any of the embodiments or modified examples shown in FIG. 416 and an "enemy tank destruction reach" employing any of the embodiments or modified examples shown in FIG. 397 can be executed.
For example, in the "giant tank reach", variant 01 shown in FIG. 416(b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", variant 02 shown in FIG. 397(b) may be adopted.

The embodiment and modified example shown with reference to FIG. 416 can achieve the same effects as the embodiment and modified example shown with reference to FIG. 397.

As shown in variant example 01 shown in Figure 416 (b) and variant example 02 shown in Figure 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made longer than the third period (1 second) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to such a configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that has not been displayed until then is displayed more slowly at the end of the reach performance than in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

As shown in variant example 01 shown in Figure 416 (b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made the same length as the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
With this configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As shown in variant example 02 shown in Figure 416 (b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", the third period (1 second) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made shorter than the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to such a configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that had not been displayed until then becomes rapidly visible in a short period of time at the end of the reach performance, compared to the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

By making the third period during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see longer when the background image changes at the end of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") than when the background image changes at the end of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the player's eyes are drawn to the reserved image that has been displayed for the first time in a long time, and the player's awareness of the reserved number can be increased. This allows the player to decide whether or not to launch the game ball.
In particular, in the first reach performance, since a longer time has passed since the start of the variable display and the expectation of a big win is high, the player tends to lose consciousness of the reserved number, but by adopting this display method, it is possible to regain consciousness of the reserved number and to increase consciousness of the launch of game balls, which was paused during the reach performance.

As shown in variant example 02 shown in Figure 416 (b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 397 (b), in a "giant tank reach", the fourth period (3 seconds) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is made may be made longer than the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" is made in an "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to this configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that was invisible or difficult to see until then is displayed clearly for a relatively long period of time at the end of the reach performance compared to the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), so the player can remember to launch the game ball. Also, although there is a risk that the result of the special lottery will be a loss and the player will be shocked, it is possible to secure time for the player to switch his/her mind to the variable display of the decorative pattern from the next time onwards.

As shown in variant example 01 in Figure 416 (b) and variant example 01 in Figure 397 (b), in a "giant tank reach", the fourth period (1 second) following the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made the same length as the fourth period (1 second) following the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "giant tank reach", in an "enemy tank destruction reach".
With this configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As shown in variant example 01 shown in Figure 416 (b) and variant example 02 shown in Figure 397 (b), in a "giant tank reach", the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is made may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" is made in an "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to such a configuration, the time for which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the end of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") can be made shorter than that of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

In addition, as a method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", this can also be achieved by changing the timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing from timing t44 to timing t43 or timing t45 in the embodiments and modified examples shown in Figures 416 and 397.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397 etc., the display priority of the decorative pattern may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. For example, in the period from timing t10 to timing t44, the display priority of the decorative pattern may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image.
With this configuration, the decorative pattern is always visible during a period when the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), a period when the background image is not visible (second period), and a period when the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period).
In addition, it is advisable to switch between the reach decorative pattern and the normal decorative pattern at an appropriate timing, such as at the start of the next variable display.
In this way, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the decorative patterns may be made invisible during the second period, and in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the decorative patterns may be made visible during the second period.

In the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), which has a relatively high expectation, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, the decorative symbols become invisible in the second period, so that the shock felt by the player due to the losing result can be mitigated.
On the other hand, in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach") which has a relatively low expectation, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in a missing state, and even if the decorative symbols are visible in the second period, the player does not feel that much of a shock; rather, since the decorative symbols continue to be visible, the player can smoothly switch his/her mind to the change in the next decorative symbol, and the tempo of the change in the decorative symbol is not hindered.

An embodiment has been shown in which the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same position and at the same size during the third period of the ``Giant Tank Reach'', in which a background concealment image consisting of, for example, a bomb character is displayed, and during the third period of the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'', in which a black background concealment image different from that of the ``Giant Tank Reach'' is displayed, but other modes may be adopted as the temporary stop display mode of the normal decorative pattern during the third period of the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach''.
For example, during the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed at the same position may be changed to a smaller size. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed to keep the size of the normal decorative pattern the same. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern may be changed to a smaller size.
In addition, strictly speaking, the same position may mean the average position of the normal decorative pattern that is displayed while swaying at a predetermined cycle.

After the reach performance ends for both the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (the end of the special reach background image for each reach), the same normal decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern from the third period. The temporary stopping position of the normal decorative pattern is also the same. Note that during the third period of the "Giant Tank Reach", a display employing a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is performed, and during the third period of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a display employing a black background concealment image different from that of the "Giant Tank Reach" is performed.
With this configuration, after the end of the first reach and the second reach, which have different contents and expectations of the presentation display, the normal decorative pattern is viewed by the player in the same presentation form, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the changes from the next time onwards.

Referring to Figure 402, an example is shown in which a strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is displayed when an "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, but a strip-shaped look-ahead performance image may also be displayed in a similar manner when a "giant tank reach" is executed.
Also, the display mode of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image when the background concealed image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 402 is displayed can be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image in the "giant tank reach". For example, the display priority may be higher than the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is not affected even in the first period to the third period, or the display priority may be lower than the background concealed image so that the visibility of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may be stopped during the display of the background concealed image (the visibility of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and made invisible in the third and fourth periods).

Three display modes have been shown for the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image: a mode in which the display priority is higher than the background concealment image so that the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is not affected even in the first period to the third period; a mode in which the display priority is lower than the background concealment image so that the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period; and a mode in which the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is stopped while the background concealment image is displayed (the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and also invisible in the third and fourth periods). However, any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image in the "giant tank reach," and any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image in the "enemy tank destruction reach."

In this way, even if the types of reaches are different, by adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the pre-reading performance image, the performance processing is standardized, and the display processing and development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by adopting different display modes as the display mode of the pre-reading performance image depending on the type of reach, it is possible to diversify the performance modes.

With reference to Figures 405 to 408, in the "enemy tank destruction reach", embodiments and variations thereof have been shown in which the tank role 3770 is made to emit light in a predetermined light color and is moved between a waiting position and a moving position; however, in the "giant tank reach", the embodiments and variations thereof in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be adopted to make the tank role 3770 emit light in a predetermined light color and is moved between a waiting position and a moving position.
That is, as the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 in the "giant tank reach", any of the light emission modes shown in Fig. 406 and Fig. 407 may be adopted. Similarly, as the operation mode of the tank role object 3770, any of the operation modes shown in Fig. 408 may be adopted.

Even if the types of reaches are different, by adopting the same lighting and movement patterns for the movable decorative parts (tank parts 3770), the presentation processing can be standardized, simplifying the display processing and development labor.
On the other hand, by adopting different lighting patterns and movement patterns for the movable decorative member (chariot part 3770) depending on the type of reach, the presentation patterns can be diversified.

Although the tank role object 3770 is shown as an example of a movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having similar functions may be provided on the game board 5. For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided, with the upper, right, and left sides of the display area as standby positions and the vicinity of the center of the display area as a moving position. When multiple movable decorative members are provided, they may be illuminated or moved at the same timing as the tank role object 3770, or may be illuminated or moved at a different timing from the tank role object 3770. In other words, any of the illumination modes or operation modes shown in Figures 406 to 408 may be adopted for other movable decorative members.
In addition, the lighting patterns and movement patterns of other movable decorative parts may be different for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and in this case, any of the lighting patterns and movement patterns shown in Figures 406 to 408 can be adopted for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

Although the tank role object 3770 is shown as an example of a light-emitting decorative member, a light-emitting decorative member may be provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The decorative means (e.g., the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550) provided on the door frame 3 or the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be illuminated at the same timing as the tank role object 3770, or may be illuminated at a different timing from the tank role object 3770. In other words, the light-emitting decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the light-emitting decorative members provided on the game board 5 may adopt any of the light-emitting modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408.
In addition, the lighting patterns of the decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be different for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and any of the lighting patterns shown in Figures 406 to 408 can be adopted for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

Referring to Figures 406 to 407, embodiments and variations thereof have been shown for the display mode of the pending image in the "enemy tank destruction reach", but the pending image may also be displayed in the "giant tank reach" by adopting any of the display modes of the pending image in the embodiments and variations thereof in the "enemy tank destruction reach".

For example, in the "giant tank reach", variant example 01 shown in FIG. 406(b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 406(a) may be adopted.
In the case of the "Giant Tank Reach" which has a relatively high expectation level, the reserved image can be quickly returned to its normal state once it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a loss, thereby easing the shock of the player who had high expectations but ended up with a loss.
On the other hand, in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," which has a relatively low degree of expectation, by displaying the pending image in red even if it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the player can be impressed with the degree of expectation under which the variable display was generated, and can use this as a reference for the next time a similar performance situation occurs in the variable display onwards.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 406(a) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and variant example 01 shown in FIG. 406(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
In the "enemy tank destruction reach" where the expectation level is relatively high, even if it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the reserved image is displayed in red, making the player clearly aware of the fact that the result of the special lottery was a miss despite the high expectation level, and it is possible to motivate the player for the next and subsequent variable display.
On the other hand, in the "enemy tank destruction reach" which has a relatively low expectancy, the reserved image is quickly returned to its normal state at the stage when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a miss, allowing the player to smoothly switch his or her attention from the reach presentation, which originally had a relatively low expectancy and was unlikely to result in a jackpot, to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the reserved image, whether to adopt the embodiment in the "giant tank reach" or the embodiment in the "enemy tank destruction reach" or a modified embodiment, it is advisable to adopt an appropriate combination, taking into consideration the priority of such effects.

The expected jackpot probability of the "Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment may be lower than the expected jackpot probability of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figures 397 to 400, etc.

Not limited to the above examples, the modified example applied to the embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397 etc. may be applied to the embodiment of the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 416 etc. to form a new embodiment.

In this way, during the third period of the first reach performance ("Giant Tank Reach"), a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display A").
During the third period of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), a display is made in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display B").

As shown in Figures 306 and 307, when a jackpot occurs in the normal state, the game state after that may be a time-saving state, a non-time-saving probability variable state, or a probability variable state with time-saving (probability variable time-saving state), which are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The advantageous states shown below refer to the time-saving state and the probability variable time-saving state among the above states.
As shown with reference to Figures 306 and 307, the configuration may be such that a time-saving state is generated when a "miss with time-saving" occurs as a special lottery result, or when a missing special lottery result occurs a predetermined number of times in succession.
When in an advantageous state, the player rotates the handle 302 widely to hit the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "right hit"), causing the game ball to enter a starting hole (e.g., second starting hole 2004) located on the right side of the game area.
In addition, if a jackpot occurs during an advantageous state and the advantageous state continues afterwards, the number of balls dispensed from the jackpot and small jackpots during that period are added up and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.
In addition, when the player is in an advantageous state, a normal background image C, which indicates that the player is in an advantageous state, is displayed in place of the normal background images A and B.
Such an advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, after the advantageous state starts, the decorative pattern does not become a jackpot and a predetermined number of misses are displayed in succession (the special lottery results are a predetermined number of misses in succession). For example, in the probability time-saving state, the probability time-saving state ends when there are 100 consecutive misses. The time-saving state may also end when there are a predetermined number of misses (for example, 100). In addition, in a so-called falling type in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to end the probability time-saving state at the start of fluctuation in each game, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the lottery to end the probability time-saving state is won.
In this way, the advantageous state ends when the specified conditions are satisfied, and at the timing when the advantageous state ends (specifically, during the 100th fluctuation if the advantageous state ends after a specified number of misses (e.g. 100 times), or during the fluctuation when the fall-down lottery is won in the case of a fall-down type), the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A or normal background image B, and the total number of game balls paid out to the player during the jackpot or advantageous state is displayed.

Fig. 420 shows an image displayed at the end of a right hit. Fig. 420(a) shows background concealment image A at the end of a right hit, Fig. 420(b) shows background concealment image B at the end of a right hit, and Fig. 420(c) shows background concealment image C at the end of a right hit. These images are based on the sunglasses worn by the bomb character.
Figure 420 (d) shows a game result image indicating that "Dynamite Time" in the right-hit state has ended, the number of consecutive wins (13), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14,125 balls).

The presentation mode at the end of a right hit will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 421 and the display example shown in Figure 423.
In FIG. 421(a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th decorative pattern change display is performed in the advantageous variable time shortening state. Note that the decorative pattern displayed during the variable time shortening state is the right-hitting decorative pattern.
After that, from timing t8 to timing t24, the 100th decorative symbol display is performed in the probability variable time-saving state. Note that this time chart shows an example of a performance in which the 100th decorative symbol display results in a miss.
423(a) shows a display example from timing t14 to timing t16. It shows a display state in which a right-hit decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in front of the normal background image C.

From timing t16 to timing t17, a background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed. Fig. 423(b) shows a state in which the background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed.
From timing t17 to timing t18, the background concealment image B at the end of the right hit is displayed. Fig. 423(c) shows the state in which the background concealment image B at the end of the right hit is displayed.
From timing t18 to timing t20, the right-hit end background concealment image C is displayed. Fig. 423(d) shows the state in which the right-hit end background concealment image C is displayed.

From timing t18 to timing t20, game result images showing game results during right-hand play, such as "Dynamite time ended,""13 balls defeated," and "14,125 obtained," are displayed. The display of "Dynamite time ended" indicates that the time-saving probability bonus state will end. The display of "13 balls defeated" indicates that the number of consecutive wins was 13. The display of "14,125 obtained" indicates to the player that a game ball entered the large winning port 2005 during right-hand play and the number of game balls paid out was 14,125.
In addition, at timing t19 during the second period in which the background concealment image C is displayed at the end of right hitting and the background image is not visible, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A. The background image may be switched at timing t18 or timing t20.

From timing t20 to timing t21, the background concealment image B at the end of right hitting is displayed. FIG. 423(e) shows the state in which the background concealment image B at the end of right hitting is displayed. At this time, the background image has been changed to the normal background image A. Also, the decorative pattern has been changed to the normal decorative pattern.
From timing t21 to timing t22, a background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed. Fig. 423(f) shows a state in which the background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed.
From timing t22 to timing t24, the normal decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 423(g) shows a state where the background concealment image A is no longer displayed when right-hand play ends.
After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t24 to timing t25. Fig. 423(h) shows a state in which the normal decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

From timing t25, a new display of the decorative symbols begins, but at this time the background image has changed to the normal background image A, and the decorative symbols have changed to the normal decorative symbols. In addition, because the game state has changed from the special time-saving state to the normal state, the probability of a jackpot being determined has also changed from 1/30 to 1/300 (see Figures 306 and 307).

In this way, when the background concealment image is displayed at the end of a right hit, there is a period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), a period during which the background image is not visible (second period), a period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and a period after which the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

In addition, if the result of the 100th variable display in the probability variable state is a big win, the background concealment image is not displayed at the end of the right hit, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.
At this time, a "giant tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be executed.

Figures 421(b), 421(c), and 421(d) each show an embodiment in which the timing for displaying the background concealment image at the end of a right hit is modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 421(a).
For example, in the time chart shown in Figure 421 (c), at timing t24, the display of the background concealment image A ends when a right hit is completed, and the varying display of the decorative pattern stops simultaneously.

Figures 422(b) and 422(c) show examples (Variation 01 to Variation 12) of modified display times and display timings of background concealed image A at the end of a right hit, background concealed image B at the end of a right hit, and background concealed image C at the end of a right hit.

By displaying in this manner, the player can know the number of consecutive wins (the number of consecutive jackpots) and the number of game balls acquired at the end of the right-hand hitting state.
In addition, when normal background images A to C are not displayed, the display area displaying the number of consecutive wins and the number of acquired game balls can be photographed using a portable terminal such as a smartphone or digital camera.
In addition, while such a display is being performed, the background image and decorative patterns can be smoothly switched from those in the special time-saving state or the time-saving state to those in the normal state.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible during the ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of the right hit may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach". The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of the right hit may be more than half the fluctuation time of the fluctuation (i.e., the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). This period of more than half the fluctuation time may be longer than the shortest time of all the fluctuation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit and the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach'' may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

In the example shown, the background image displayed at the end of a right hit and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends in a miss are both normal background image A, but the background image displayed at the end of a right hit and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends in a miss may be different.
For example, normal background image B may be displayed at the end of a right hit, and after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a miss, normal background image A may be displayed. Alternatively, normal background image A may be displayed at the end of a right hit, and after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a miss, normal background image B may be displayed.

Although an example has been shown in which normal background image A is displayed instead of normal background image C when right-hand hitting is completed, either normal background image A or normal background image B may be displayed randomly instead of normal background image C.
Furthermore, with regard to the background image during right-hit, in addition to the normal background image C, a background image of a different type other than the normal background image C (for example, a background image having a different type of bomb character or dialogue) may be displayed randomly as the background image during right-hit.

In addition, in response to the end of right-hand hitting, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image C. In this case, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 391(a) or FIG. 391(d)).
In addition, during right-hitting, a background moving image specifically for right-hitting may be displayed.

Referring to FIG. 420, an example of a background concealment image at the end of a right hit is shown, but a background concealment image of another display mode may be used as the background concealment image at the end of a right hit. For example, one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a bomb character, or the like, may be used as the background concealment image exclusively for the end of a right hit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 423, an example is shown in which the game result image is displayed in the second period (from timing t18 to timing t20), but the game result image may also be displayed in the first or third period. In this case, the game result image may be made to appear in the display area or to disappear from the display area by moving the game result image from the left or right side of the display area in accordance with the movement of the background concealment image at the end of right hitting.

When the decorative symbols change display at the end of a right hit, regardless of whether or not a reach state occurs, if the special lottery result is a miss, a background concealment image is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of a "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a background concealment image is displayed when a reach state occurs.

With reference to Figure 406 etc., it has been shown that before and after displaying the background concealment image when the "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, the display mode of the reserved image may be maintained (for example, the red reserved image may remain red) or the display mode may be changed (for example, the red reserved image may be changed to a normal reserved image (white reserved image) and displayed) (note that a similar display may also be performed in the "giant tank reach").
On the other hand, when the right-hit state ends and the normal state is restored by executing the changing display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a background concealment image at the end of the right hit is displayed. At this time, the reserved image displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right hit ends should preferably be a normal reserved image (a white reserved image).
In addition, with regard to the reserved image that will be displayed after the right hit is completed, it is preferable to display it as a normal reserved image (a white reserved image), and not to display a reserved image that indicates a higher expectation than a normal reserved image (a red reserved image or a gold reserved image).

At the end of the right-hit state, a right-hit end background concealment image is displayed so that the reserved image is not changed to another reserved image during the period (third period) in which the normal background image A and the normal background image B gradually become easier to see.
Similarly, when a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, a background concealment image may be displayed so that the reserved image is not changed to another type of reserved image during the period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see.
This configuration can prevent the player from overlooking a change in the appearance of the reserved image and the change in the level of expectation shown.

Referring to Figure 402 etc., it is shown that the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image may be maintained before and after the background concealment image is displayed when the ``enemy tank destruction reach'' is executed, or the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image may be ended without being maintained (note that a similar display may also be performed in the ``giant tank reach'').
On the other hand, when the right-hit state ends and the normal state is entered by executing the variable display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealment image at the end of the right hit is displayed, but at this time, it is preferable that the belt-shaped pre-reading performance image is not displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right hit ends. Alternatively, the belt-shaped pre-reading performance image may not be displayed in the variable display at the end of the right hit state.
Whether or not the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is executed is determined by the look-ahead process at the time of the start winning, but for the start winning that occurs after the start of the variable display a predetermined number of times before the end of the advantageous state, it is preferable not to start displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image. For example, for the hold that occurs when the 96th to 100th variable display is being performed, it is preferable not to start displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image.

When the decorative pattern changes for the last time (100th time) in the right-hit state, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot announcement image announcing the occurrence of a jackpot may be displayed during the period when a background concealment image consisting of sunglasses or the like is displayed (first period to third period) or during the period after the background concealment image is displayed (fourth period).

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 421 is modified to display a jackpot announcement image that announces the occurrence of a jackpot will be described with reference to Figure 424.
Figure 424 (a) shows an embodiment in which a jackpot announcement image is displayed during the period from timing t14, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t16, when the first period begins.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 424(a), modified examples (Modification 01 to Modification 14) in which the period during which the jackpot notification image is displayed is modified are described below with reference to FIG. 424(b).

In the modified example 01, the big win notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t18, when the first period ends.
In variant example 02, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 03, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 04, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 05, the big win notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In variant example 06, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 07, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 08, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 09, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 10, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 11, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 12, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 13, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant 14, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

The timings for starting to display the jackpot announcement image are shown as timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, and timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, but a specified timing within these periods may also be used as the timing for starting to display the jackpot announcement image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timings for starting to display the jackpot notification image.

In addition, the timings for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image are shown as timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period, timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period, timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period, and timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period, but a specified timing within these periods may also be used as the timing for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timings for ending the display of the jackpot notification image.

In this way, the timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image can be any time between timing t14 and timing t23, and the timing to end displaying the jackpot notification image can be any time between timing t15 and timing t24.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 424, the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A at timing t19, but if the display of the jackpot notification image has started before timing t19, the display of the normal background image C may continue after timing t19, and the normal background image C may be changed to the jackpot background image at timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot announcement image may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image and the game result image. The jackpot announcement image may be displayed in a position where it overlaps with the game result image. The jackpot announcement image may be a moving image, and the jackpot announcement may be made by displaying the moving image.

The period from the start of the variable display to the display of the background concealment image at the end of right-hand hit should be shorter than the period from the start of the variable display to the display of the special reach background concealment image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach."
For example, in the presentation example shown in Figure 421 (a), the display of the background concealment image begins at timing t16, 8 seconds after timing t8 when the variable display began, at the end of right-hand hit.
On the other hand, in the "Giant Tank Reach" shown with reference to Figure 416 (a) and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figure 397 (a), the display of the special reach background concealment image begins at timing t36, 36 seconds after the start of the variable display.
In addition, when the right hit ends (if the result of the 100th variable display is a miss), the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is not executed, and the special reach background concealment image is not displayed.

This configuration allows for a suitable presentation.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display C").

When the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") is executed, a background concealing image such as a bomb character is displayed, so that even if the first reach performance results in a miss, the player can see a special performance in which a character appears, thereby easing the player's disappointment.
In addition, when comparing the special display A in the first reach performance with the special display C at the end of right hitting, the background concealment image used for the special display A is different from the background concealment image used for the special display C. This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

When the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach") is executed, a black background concealing image is displayed, so that the player can ease his/her disappointment even if the second reach performance ends in failure.
In addition, when comparing the special display B in the second reach performance with the special display C at the end of right hitting, the background concealment image used for the special display B is different from the background concealment image used for the special display C. This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

Next, referring to Figure 425 etc., an embodiment of a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative pattern appears to stop for a moment and then changes and is displayed again will be shown.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of Fig. 425 and Fig. 426, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with decorative symbols of different numbers, and then a special symbol stop effect is performed in which a special decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center symbol, causing each temporarily stopped decorative symbol to scroll downward again and change. Also, when each decorative symbol temporarily stops and then starts scrolling downward again, an image of "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, such an effect is called a pseudo consecutive effect.

When the image "x2" is displayed, the left and right decorative symbols may temporarily stop with decorative symbols of different numbers, and a special symbol may be displayed in the center symbol, causing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols to scroll downwards again and change. In this case, an image "x3" is displayed in place of the image "x2". Hereinafter, these images "x2" and "x3" are referred to as pseudo consecutive number display images. Figures 425(b) and 426(b) are time charts showing an example of a performance in which the image "x2" is displayed, followed by the image "x3".

A specific example of the effect will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 425(b) and the display example shown in Fig. 427. At timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbols starts.
At timing t4, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At timing t6, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops. Figure 427(a) shows the display state at this time. At timing t8, the middle decorative symbol temporarily stops. A decorative symbol with the kanji character "continue", which is a special decorative symbol, is displayed on the middle decorative symbol. Figure 427(b) shows the display state at this time. At timing t10, the left to right decorative symbols are scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the pseudo consecutive number display image "x2" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Figure 427(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative pattern temporarily stops. At timing t16, the right decorative pattern temporarily stops. Figure 427 (d) shows the display state at this time. As shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. At timing t18, the middle decorative pattern temporarily stops. A decorative pattern with the kanji character "continue", which is a special decorative pattern, is displayed as the middle decorative pattern. Figure 427 (e) shows the display state at this time. At timing t20, the left to right decorative patterns are scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the "x3" of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Figure 427 (f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t30, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the same number as the left decorative pattern (the number "2"), and a reach state occurs. Figure 427 (g) shows the display state at this time. From timing t37 to timing t39, the "x3" in the pseudo consecutive number display image gradually becomes semi-transparent and difficult to see. Figure 427 (h) shows the display state at this time. At timing t40, the center decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. The display state of the decorative pattern at the time of the temporary stop indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or a miss. At timing t41, the left to right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and this state is maintained until timing t42. After timing t42, the next or subsequent variable display is executed, or the jackpot game state is executed.

The pseudo consecutive performance has been explained using Figure 425 (b) as an example, but similar displays are also shown on other time charts.

In the example of the performance shown in the time chart of Fig. 425(a), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally displays "x2", it does not develop into "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and at timing t31, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state indicating a reach miss or a big win. The pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
In addition, since the pseudo consecutive win count display image has a higher display priority than the normal background image, and the pseudo consecutive win count display image makes part of the normal background image difficult or impossible to see, the gradual disappearance of the pseudo consecutive win count display image in the time chart of Figure 425 (a) is synonymous with the normal background image gradually becoming visible.

In the example of the performance shown in the time chart of FIG. 426(a), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally shows "x2", it progresses to a "giant tank reach" performance or an "enemy tank destruction reach" performance. After the reach occurs at timing t20, the reach performance is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 416(a) or FIG. 397(a).

In the example of the performance shown in the time chart of FIG. 426(b), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally shows "x3", it progresses to a "Giant Tank Reach" performance or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance. After the reach occurs at timing t30, the reach performance is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 416(a) or FIG. 397(a).

In the example effects shown in Figures 426(a) and 426(b), the pseudo consecutive number of times display image becomes difficult or impossible to see due to the background concealment image displayed at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect, and the display ends in this state. For example, it is advisable to end the display at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t13 to timing t19 shown in Figures 416(a) and 397(a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. In FIG. 427, it is shown that the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.
Furthermore, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is lower than the display priority of the background concealing image, and the pseudo consecutive win count display image is displayed behind the background concealing image.

As shown in FIG. 425(a), from timing t27 to timing t29, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image ("x2") is gradually erased.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 425(b), from timing t37 to timing t39, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x3") is gradually erased.
During these periods, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state over a period of 2 seconds, and the display is terminated when the image finally becomes transparent, thereby improving the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern. Figure 427 (h) shows the state in which the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state in this way.
It should be noted that, rather than gradually making the entire pseudo consecutive win count display image transparent, the pseudo consecutive win count display image may be made transparent from the edges, and finally the central portion may be made transparent to terminate the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image.
Other display modes may be adopted as long as the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a manner that gradually decreases the visibility thereof.

The display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and the image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. However, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image may be temporarily lowered than the priority of the decorative pattern, so that at least a part of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is hidden by the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped.

As shown in Figures 426(a) and 426(b), when a background concealment image is displayed to switch the background image to a special reach background image, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image may be terminated at a predetermined timing during the period in which the background concealment image is displayed. For example, the display may be terminated when background concealment image A or background concealment image B is displayed, or when background concealment image C is displayed.

When the pseudo consecutive play performance is executed and the pseudo consecutive play count display image ("x2", "x3") is displayed, it is preferable that the stop display mode of the decorative pattern does not become a non-reach miss.
In other words, when a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern stop with decorative patterns of the same number, resulting in a reach state, and then, as shown in Figures 425(a) and 425(b), the middle decorative pattern stops to show the result of the special lottery without developing into a special reach, or, as shown in Figures 426(a) and 426(b), it is preferable that the middle decorative pattern stops after developing into a special reach and shows the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may not be a non-reach miss. Also, when "x2" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number of times display image but "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may be a non-reach miss.

When the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, the latter has a higher expectation of a big win than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and a pseudo consecutive performance number display image of "x2" is displayed.
In addition, when a pseudo consecutive play effect is performed and a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x2" is displayed, and then a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x3" is not displayed, compared with when a pseudo consecutive play effect is performed and a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x2" is displayed, and then a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x3" is displayed, the latter has a higher probability of winning.

The temporary stopping mode of the decorative pattern in the pseudo consecutive performance is not limited to the display example shown in Figure 427, and other temporary stopping modes may be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and a special symbol such as "NEXT", "Ren", "Pseudo-Ren" or "Next" may be stopped as the center decorative symbol.
Alternatively, such a special symbol may stop on one of the left and right decorative symbols, not limited to the central decorative symbol.
In addition, each of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right may be temporarily stopped in a special combination (such as the numbers "1, 3, 5" or the numbers "6, 7, 7").
In this way, in the pseudo consecutive presentation, some or all of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are viewed as if they were stopped and displayed, and then these patterns are displayed moving again so that they can be viewed by the player.
In addition, the decorative pattern itself may not be temporarily stopped, but an effect image in which a predetermined character's reminiscence story progresses step by step may be displayed in front of the decorative pattern, hiding part or all of the decorative pattern, so that the player can visually recognize it as a division of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this case, the first effect image and the second effect image will be displayed showing different stories.

In the example of the performance shown in Fig. 425(a) and Fig. 425(b), the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, so that the player can understand the expectation level more easily. Also, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends at a timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) when a part of the decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the visibility of the decorative pattern is guaranteed, and the player can easily recognize the special lottery result.
In the examples of presentation shown in Figures 426(a) and 426(b), the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is ended during the period in which the background concealment image is displayed, so that the pseudo consecutive win count display image is not displayed during the special reach, allowing the player to focus their attention on the outcome of the battle between tanks during the execution of the special reach.

In the example shown in Fig. 425(a), the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased from timing t27 to timing t29, but it may be erased at other timings. Fig. 428(b) shows an embodiment in which the erase mode of the pseudo consecutive number display image is modified in the example shown in Fig. 425(a).
As shown in Fig. 428(b) in modified examples 01 to 11, the timing to start erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the timing to end erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, and the period from the end of erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be determined. Note that Fig. 428(a) is the same as Fig. 425(a). Note that in modified example 01 and the like, for convenience of drawing, the part that should be written as "gradually erased" is written as "gradually".

In order to simplify comparison with other inventions, the period from when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image starts to when it starts to be erased (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 428(a)) may be referred to as the "second period" for convenience. Similarly, the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number of times display image (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 428(a)) may be referred to as the "third period" for convenience. Similarly, the period from when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is erased to when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be referred to as the "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 428(a)). In addition, a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 428(a)) in which the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state and gradually becomes opaque may be provided.

Variation example 01 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t27.
Modification example 02 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t28.
Modification example 03 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t29.
Variation example 04 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t28.
In addition, an example of a presentation in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29 has already been shown in Figure 425 (a).
Variation example 05 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t30.
Variation example 06 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t29.
Variation example 07 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t30.
Variation example 08 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t31.
Variation example 09 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t30.
Modification example 10 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t31.
Variation example 11 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t30 to timing t31.
In these examples, the time for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image is set to one to three seconds, and the time for the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed after the pseudo consecutive number display image is completely erased is set to one to four seconds.

Referring to FIG. 428(b), an embodiment and modified example for erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x2" is shown, but the method described in FIG. 428(b) can also be applied when erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x3" in the performance example shown with reference to K30(b).

The decorative symbols displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects differ in design and size from the decorative symbols displayed during the reach effects shown in Figures 425(a) and 425(b). Specifically, the decorative symbols displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects consist only of numbers and a square frame and are small in size, whereas the decorative symbols displayed during the reach effects shown in Figures 425(a) and 425(b) consist of numbers, a rectangular frame and a bomb character and are large in size.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number of times display image in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 428 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS.

The period required for the pseudo consecutive number display image to be erased may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 428 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number of times display image in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 428 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive count display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern in variant example 05 shown in Figure 428 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in variant example 02 shown in Figures 416 and 397.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern may be the same length as the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive count display image in variant example 05 shown in Figure 428 to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern is the same as the length of the fourth period in variant example 01 shown in Figures 416 and 397.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive count display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern in variant example 01 shown in Figure 428 is longer than the length of the fourth period in variant example 01 shown in Figures 416 and 397.
In the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the size of the decorative symbols is small, but in the reach performance shown with reference to Fig. 425(a) and Fig. 425(b), the size of the decorative symbols is large and is displayed overlapping with the pseudo consecutive number display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased to when the decorative symbols are stopped, the player can easily visually recognize the stopping state of the decorative symbols.

In the reach effects shown with reference to Figures 425(a) and 425(b) and the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" effects, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, but after the background concealment image or the pseudo consecutive number display image ends, the normal background image A may be displayed again. Alternatively, the normal background image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed or the timing when the pseudo consecutive number display image ends. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
In addition, it may be possible to switch to another normal background image only when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image shown with reference to Figures 425 (a) and 425 (b) has ended, or only when the ``Giant Tank Reach'' effect or the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' effect has ended.

In this way, by configuring it so that the normal background image that was displayed while the pseudo consecutive number of times display image was being displayed or before the special reach performance can be switched to another normal background image after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image has ended or after the special reach performance, it is possible to change the feelings of a player who is disappointed when the special lottery results in a loss.

Instead of normal background image A and normal background image B, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the timing when the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is increased during the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased, even when the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased arrives, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed from the beginning, and even when the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed from the beginning.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 426(a) and 426(b) will transition to a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach", but the display mode of the reserved image or the reserved image in the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" at this time may adopt the display mode in the embodiment described above with reference to Figures 397 to 408, etc.

On the other hand, while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the display mode of the reserved image to a display mode indicating another expectation level.
For example, if the reserved image is a green reserved image at timing t27 in Figure 425 (a), the reserved image may be displayed in green from timing t27 to timing t29, during which the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased.

When a pseudo consecutive performance is executed while a strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is displayed based on a pending pre-reading, a special reach such as the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 416 etc. or the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397 etc. may be ensured to occur from timing t20 onwards in the performance example shown in FIG. 426(a) or from timing t30 onwards in the performance example shown in FIG. 426(b).

In this way, while the pseudo consecutive win count display image is being erased, a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display D").

When the display of the decorative pattern begins, the normal background image may be switched to another normal background image. Below, an embodiment of a normal background image switching effect in which a special background concealment image is displayed and the normal background image is switched to another normal background image is described.

First, the background concealment image displayed in the normal background image switching performance in this embodiment will be described.
Figure 429(a) shows a giant bomb character as seen from the front left diagonal. The rest of the image other than the bomb character is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image A.
Figure 429(b) shows the bomb character as seen from slightly front and diagonally to the left. The rest of the image other than the bomb character is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image B.
Figure 429(c) shows the bomb character as seen from the front. The rest of the image is opaque blue. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image C.
Figure 429(d) shows the bomb character as seen from slightly front and diagonally to the right. The rest of the image is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image D.
Figure 429(e) shows the bomb character as seen from the diagonal front right. The rest of the image other than the bomb character is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image E.
In addition, the image of the giant bomb character has an opaque black outline and other parts (within the area enclosed by the outline) are opaque white.
In this embodiment, while a background concealing image made up of such a giant bomb character or the like is being displayed, the normal background image is switched to.

In a background concealment image consisting of a giant bomb character, etc., the blue semi-transparent parts of background concealment images A and E are more transparent than the blue semi-transparent parts of background concealment images B and D, and the image located behind them is more visible. Note that the blue parts of background concealment image C are opaque, so the image located behind it is not visible. Note that the bomb character may be displayed large in background concealment image C so that only the bomb character is visible.

Below, referring to the time chart shown in Figure 430 (a) and the display example shown in Figure 431, an example of a normal background image switching effect in which the normal background image being displayed is switched to another normal background image will be explained.
First, a new variable display of the decorative pattern starts from timing t0. FIG. 431(a) shows a display example from timing t0 to timing t1. Note that at the time of timing t0, the normal background image A is already displayed. The normal background image A is displayed, for example, over multiple variable displays.
Next, in the period from timing t1 to timing t2, background concealed image A is displayed. Fig. 431(b) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, in the period from timing t2 to timing t3, background concealed image B is displayed. Fig. 431(c) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, background concealed image C is displayed. Also, at timing t4, the background image is switched from normal background image A to normal background image B. Fig. 431(d) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, in the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the background concealed image D is displayed. Fig. 431(e) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, in the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the background concealed image E is displayed. Fig. 431(f) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t6 to timing t7. In this manner, the normal background image switching effect is executed in the period from timing t1 to timing t7.
After timing t7, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner without displaying the background concealment image. Fig. 431(g) shows a display example after timing t7.
In this manner, in this embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from timing t0 to timing t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from timing t4 to timing t32. Note that in the next and subsequent variable display, the normal background image B is displayed.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a period in which the normal background image becomes gradually difficult to see (first period), a period in which the normal background image is not visible (second period), a period in which the normal background image becomes gradually easier to see (third period), and a period until the visibility of the normal background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops (fourth period). Note that the normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background image in the third and fourth periods. This allows the normal background image to be switched without any discomfort.
In addition, the background concealment image is displayed immediately after the start of the varying display of the decorative symbols, and the normal background image is switched, thereby changing the player's mood.

In this embodiment, the background concealment image is different from the background concealment image used when starting a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach", the background concealment image used when ending a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach", and the background concealment image used when ending an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player thinks that an advantageous reach performance has occurred.
In this way, after switching the normal background image, it is possible to execute the pseudo consecutive performance described above, such as the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach", depending on the results of the special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 430, the display of the background concealment image was started immediately after the start of the display of the decorative pattern changes, and the normal background image was changed, but the normal background image may also be changed in the middle or end of the display of the decorative pattern changes.
In addition, it is preferable that the normal background image can be changed only once during one change of the decorative pattern.
In addition, the change of the normal background image should be performed when none of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. For example, in the example shown in Fig. 430(a), the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at timing t20, which is the timing after timing t7 when the display of the background concealment image is finished.

The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may be changed at high speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (before timing t7 in FIG. 430(a)). Specifically, the downward scroll speed of the decorative patterns may be changed at the fastest speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (note that the scroll speed immediately after the start of the decorative pattern change and the scroll speed immediately before the temporary stop are slower than this scroll speed).
Alternatively, at least one of the decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed in the previous variable display may be visible even after the display of the background concealment image has ended. For example, a predetermined decorative symbol that started to be variable displayed at timing t0 in FIG. 430(a) may be made visible after timing t7 by not moving or moving slowly.

The background may be concealed as shown in Modifications 01 to 12 in Fig. 430. In these modifications, the lengths of the first to fourth periods are from 1 second to 3 seconds, and the lengths of the first, second, and third periods are compared.
For example, as in the modified example 01, the first period and the second period have the same length, but the third period is longer than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of creating the fun of wondering which normal background image will be displayed as the new normal background image. In the modified example 02, the first period and the second period have the same length, but the third period is shorter than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of displaying the new normal background image early, and taking time for so-called preview effects such as comment previews (for example, preview effects using dialogue preview images, which will be described later). In the modified example 03, the first period and the third period have the same length, but the second period is longer than the first period and the third period. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the display of the background concealment image itself. It goes without saying that the other modified examples also have the same effect for each modified example.
In addition, various modified examples may be applied to each of multiple types of normal background image switching performances, such as switching the normal background image in the manner of modified example 01 in the first normal background image switching performance, and switching the normal background image in the manner of modified example 02 in the second normal background image switching performance.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 430 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in a normal background image switching performance and the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in a ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach'' may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance gradually becomes easier to see may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach'' gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 430 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (third period) during which the background image in a normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible and the period (third period) during which the background image in a ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach'' becomes gradually more visible may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually easier to see may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" becomes gradually easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".

The period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal during the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" (fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the fourth period in the modified examples 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

As mentioned above, when the special reach ends, the high expectation reserved image that was displayed in the reserved image display area may be displayed as is, or it may be reverted to a white reserved image.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the reserved image may be moved while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed (at least one of the first, second, and third periods; the same applies below). Also, while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed, it may be possible to change the state of the reserved image or the reserved image to a reserved image with higher expectations. When the state of the reserved image or the reserved image is changed to a reserved image with higher expectations while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed, the state of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change can be recognized in any of the first to fourth periods if the change starts in the first period, in any of the second to fourth periods if the change starts in the second period, in any of the third to fourth periods if the change starts in the third period, and in the fourth period if the change starts in the fourth period. For example, if the reserved image or the state of the reserved image after the change starts in the first period and the state of the reserved image after the change can be recognized in the first period, the effect is that a sense of anticipation can be provided early on, or if the reserved image or the state of the reserved image after the change starts in the first period and the state of the reserved image after the change can be recognized in the fourth period, a sense of anticipation can be provided as to what state it will change to. If the change starts in the fourth period, even in the first to third periods where no change occurs, a sense of anticipation that it may change can be provided, and it goes without saying that each pattern has its own effect. Alternatively, the reserved image or the reserved image may be prohibited from being changed while the background concealment images A to E are being displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 430 etc., a production example is shown in which the visibility of the reserved image or the reserved image is reduced by the background concealing image, but it may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or the reserved image is not reduced, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 401. For example, the display priority of the reserved image or the reserved image may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.

When the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the reserved images that had been displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed to move to the reserved display areas to the third reserved display areas. FIG. 432(a) shows that the movement of the reserved images begins and ends during the period from timing t0, when the display of the change begins, to timing t1. The movement of the reserved images may begin and end during this period. This is also true for modified examples 01 to 07 shown in FIG. 432(b).
Figure 431 (a) shows the state in which the movement of the reserved image from the first reserved display area to the reserved display area has been completed before the display of background concealment image A begins.

FIG. 432(b) shows a modified example of the period during which the movement of the reserved image takes place.
Variation example 01 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Variation example 02 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Variation example 03 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Variation example 04 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t4 to timing t5.
Variation example 05 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Variation example 06 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t6 to timing t7.
Variation example 07 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t7 to timing t8.

In Modifications 01 to 07, it is shown that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends over one second during the period from timing t1 to timing t8, but the movement of the reserved image may start at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t1 to timing t8, and may end at a predetermined timing. Also, the time required for the movement of the reserved image is not limited to one second, and may be shorter or longer than one second.
For example, the movement of the reserved image may start at timing t1 and end at timing t7, or the movement of the reserved image may start at timing t6 and end at timing t8.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to move the reserved image while the normal background image switching performance is being executed. On the other hand, the reserved image is not moved while the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance is being executed, and the position of the reserved image does not change before and after the reach performance.

In this embodiment, an embodiment that displays a strip-shaped preview performance image as shown in FIG. 402 may be adopted.
For example, after the normal background image switching performance is executed, the display of a strip-like look-ahead performance image may be started based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, while the strip-like look-ahead performance image is being displayed, the normal background image switching performance may be executed to change the normal background image.
On the other hand, when the strip-like pre-reading effect image is already displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed, thereby preventing a player whose expectation for a big win is heightened by the display of the strip-like pre-reading effect image from viewing an excessive effect.
Similarly, when a reserve image with a higher expectation level (for example, a green or red reserve image) than the normal white reserve image is displayed in the reserve display area or the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area, the normal background image switching performance may not be executed, and the same effect can be achieved in this case.

The time from when the display of the decorative patterns begins to change to when the normal background image begins to change (for example, the time from when the display of the background concealment image begins) should be shorter than the time from when the display of the decorative patterns begins to change to when a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") begins.
In addition, the time from when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change to when the change in the normal background image ends (for example, the time from when the display of the background concealment image ends) should be shorter than the time from when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change to when a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") begins.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the device so that after the switching of the normal background image has finished and the display of the background concealment image has ended, the display of the background concealment image at the start of a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") can begin after a predetermined time has elapsed.
This configuration can prevent the player from confusing the change in the normal background image with the change in the background image during a special reach.

In the embodiment shown, a background concealment image consisting of a giant bomb character or the like is displayed in the normal background image switching performance, but a plurality of performance patterns may be executed as the normal background image switching performance, and any one of the performance patterns may be executed. For example, instead of the giant bomb character, a giant tank may be displayed to switch the normal background image.
In addition, the execution of the normal background image switching performance may not indicate the expectation of the special lottery result. That is, the normal background image switching performance may be executed regardless of the special lottery result during the variable display. Specifically, in the next variable display after the special reach is a miss, the normal background image switching performance may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/3). In addition, in the variable display after the non-reach miss shown in FIG. 394(a) or the variable display after the reach miss (no background switching) shown in FIG. 394(b), the normal background image switching performance may be executed with a predetermined probability. In this case, in the next variable display after the special reach is a miss, the normal background image switching performance may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/30) lower than the probability of executing the normal background image switching performance (for example, a probability of 1/3).
On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching performance may indicate the jackpot expectation for the decorative pattern during the change. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of the normal background image A or the normal background image B, the expectation may be set higher than when the normal background image A or the normal background image B is displayed. In this case, the expectation indicated by the switching of the normal background image may be set lower than the expectation indicated by the occurrence of a special reach.

A plurality of presentation patterns of the normal background image switching presentation may be provided. For example, a plurality of types and colors of the characters to be displayed may be provided. Also, a different expectation of a big win may be indicated for each presentation pattern. Also, for each presentation pattern, any one of the modified examples shown in FIG. 430 may be appropriately adopted to make the first period to the third period different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may be different depending on the type or color of the displayed character. In addition, in this case, different expectations may be indicated depending on the type or color of the displayed character.

In the examples of the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects shown with reference to Fig. 416 and Fig. 397, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, and the normal background image A is displayed again after the background concealment image ends, but the normal background image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the background image switching performance shown with reference to Fig. 430 and Fig. 431, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the change, and at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed, a normal background image different from the normal background image A (in this embodiment, the normal background image B) is displayed. Note that, after the background concealment image ends, the normal background image A may continue to be displayed. In this case, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the background image switching performance.

Instead of normal background image A and normal background image B, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the timing when the display of the background concealing image C ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the background concealing image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is increased during the period in which the background concealing image is erased, even when the period in which the background concealing image is erased arrives, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed from the beginning, and even when the period in which the background concealing image is erased ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed from the beginning.

In this way, in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display E") is performed during the third period.

Below, the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 420 etc. is compared with the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 etc. The embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 420 etc. displays a background concealment image at the end of a right hit and switches the background image when a right hit ends. On the other hand, the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 etc. switches the background image when the decorative pattern starts to change.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in a normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit and the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in a normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in a normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

In the example of the performance at the end of a right hit shown with reference to FIG. 421 etc., the normal background image C is displayed during the right hit, and the normal background image A is displayed after the display of the background concealment image is finished, but there may be cases where the normal background image C is displayed. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Fig. 430 and Fig. 431, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, and at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed, a normal background image different from the normal background image A (in this embodiment, the normal background image B) is displayed. Note that even after the background concealment image ends, the normal background image A may be displayed in some cases. In this case, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the background image switching performance.

Instead of normal background image A and normal background image B, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B may be displayed.
In addition, instead of the normal background image C, a normal background moving image C that is displayed as a moving image similar to the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the end of right-hand hit or at the end of display of the background concealed image C in the normal background image switching performance, the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the background concealed image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C are displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C is increased during the period in which the background concealed image is erased, the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealed image is erased arrives, and the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealed image is erased ends.

When the right-hit state ends and returns to the normal state, a right-hit end background concealment image is displayed, but at this time, the reserved image displayed after the right-hit end background concealment image ends should preferably be a normal reserved image (white reserved image).
In addition, at the end of the right-hit state, a right-hit end background concealment image may be displayed so that the reserved image is not changed to another reserved image during the period (third period) in which normal background image A and normal background image B gradually become easier to see.

On the other hand, for the reserved image in the normal background image switching performance, the reserved image may be moved while the background concealed images A to E are displayed (first period to third period). Also, while the background concealed images A to E are displayed, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the state of the reserved image to a reserved image with higher expectations. Alternatively, while the background concealed images A to E are displayed, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In this way, during the third period when the advantageous state ends, a display is made in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases ("special display C"). Also, during the third period in the performance in which the normal background image is switched, a display is made in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases ("special display E").

While the decorative pattern is changing, a performance may be executed that indicates the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. Below, an embodiment is described that is capable of executing a dialogue preview performance that displays a dialogue preview image.

First, the dialogue preview image displayed in the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment will be described.
Figure 433 shows dialogue preview images A to E displayed in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment.
The display priorities of the dialogue preview images A to E are higher than those of the decorative pattern and the reserved image, and the dialogue preview images A to E are displayed in front of these images.
The dialogue preview image consists of a bomb character (white image) located in the center, dialogue consisting of four kanji characters "Bomb Boy" (white image), and other areas (green background image). Note that the background image referred to here is merely called the background image for convenience in comparison with the image of the bomb character and the dialogue image.
The green background regions of the dialogue preview images A and E have high transparency, the green background regions of the dialogue preview images B and D have low transparency, and the green region of the dialogue preview image C has the lowest transparency, making the background image invisible.
The dialogue preview image A has the kanji character "baku" written on it, the dialogue preview image B has the kanji character "bomb" written on it, and the dialogue preview images C to E have the kanji character "bomb boy" written on it.

Figure 434 shows a time chart illustrating an example of a dialogue preview effect. Also, Figure 435 shows a display example in which a dialogue preview image is displayed at a specified timing.

As shown in the time chart of Fig. 434(a), the display of the decorative symbols starts at timing t0. Fig. 435(a) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image.
Next, during the period from timing t10 to timing t11, dialogue preview image A is displayed. Figure 435 (b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t11 to timing t12, dialogue preview image B is displayed. Figure 435 (c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t12 to timing t14, the dialogue preview image C is displayed. Figure 435(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15, a dialogue preview image D is displayed. Figure 435(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t15 to timing t16, a dialogue preview image E is displayed. Figure 435(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t16, the series of display of the dialogue preview image ends. Fig. 435(g) shows the display state at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t16 to timing t20 (the period until the left decorative pattern temporarily stops).
At timing t20, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t25, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t30, the center decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At timing t31, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of the special lottery is shown to be a jackpot or not.

In this way, even in the dialogue preview performance, there is a period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible due to the display of the dialogue preview image (first period), a period during which the background image is not visible (second period), a period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and a period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops (fourth period). In other words, the dialogue preview image also functions like a background concealment image.

In this way, when a dialogue preview effect in which a series of dialogue preview images are displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the dialogue preview effect is not executed. Whether or not to execute the dialogue preview effect is determined based on the result of a special lottery.
In addition, in some situations while the dialogue preview performance is being performed, the normal background image becomes invisible, but the normal background image is not changed to another normal background image before or after the execution of the dialogue preview performance, and the same normal background image is displayed.

A plurality of dialogue preview effects with different display modes may be executed, and any of the dialogue preview effects may be executed. For example, dialogue preview images with different dialogue contents, character types, background area colors, etc. may be used. Also, the same degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the type of dialogue preview effect, or different degrees of expectation may be suggested.
For example, if the color of the background area is red, the expectation may be higher than if the color is green.

Although examples of displaying dialogue and characters have been given, these are merely examples, and the preview performance may be executed without displaying either the dialogue or the character. Alternatively, the preview performance may be executed by displaying another image instead of the dialogue or the character.

Although it has been shown that the dialogue preview performance is performed by displaying dialogue preview images A through E, the dialogue preview performance may also be performed by displaying a moving image. For example, the character or dialogue may be moved, or the transparency may be changed smoothly.

When comparing the normal background image switching performance in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 429 etc. with the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment, it is preferable to make the time for executing the dialogue preview performance longer compared to the normal background image switching performance.
For example, compared to variant example 02 of the normal background image switching effect, variant example 01 of the dialogue preview effect has a longer execution time.
This prevents the player from overlooking the probability of winning the big win indicated by the dialogue preview effect. On the other hand, the probability of winning the big win is not generally indicated by the execution of the normal background image switching effect. Therefore, even if the time for executing the effect is relatively short, the impact of the player overlooking the probability of winning the big win can be reduced.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance and the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 434 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible and the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 434 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

The period after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be longer than the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

It is also possible to configure the display so that both the dialogue preview effect shown in FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown in FIG. 430 can be executed during one change in the decorative pattern.
For example, a normal background image switching effect may be executed in the period from timing t1 to timing t7, and a dialogue preview effect may be executed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16. Also, the modified examples of both embodiments may be appropriately combined and executed.
It is preferable to configure the device so that the dialogue preview performance is not executed before the normal background image switching performance, but rather the dialogue preview performance is executed after the normal background image switching performance. Also, the device may be configured so that the normal background image switching performance may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the dialogue preview performance.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 434 etc., an example of a performance in which the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is reduced during the dialogue preview performance is shown, but it may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is not reduced, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 401. For example, the display priority of the reserved image or reserved image may be set higher than the display priority of the dialogue preview image.

In both the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 434 etc., and the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 430, the reserved image or reserved images may be made difficult to see or impossible to see while the performance is being executed.
Alternatively, in both the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 434 etc., and the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 430, the reserved image or images may be maintained in an easily visible state, just as before the performance was executed, without becoming difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being executed.

Alternatively, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 434 etc., the reserved image or reserved image may be made difficult or impossible to see while the performance is being executed, and in the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 430, the reserved image or reserved image may not be made difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being executed, but may remain easily visible, just as it was before the performance was executed.
Conversely, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 434 etc., the reserved image or reserved image does not become difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being executed, but remains easily visible, just as it was before the performance was executed, and in the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 430, the reserved image or reserved image may become difficult or impossible to see while the performance is being executed.

Even when the strip-shaped preview performance image shown in FIG. 402 is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the dialogue preview performance to be executable.
On the other hand, when a strip-shaped preview performance image is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the device so that the normal background image switching performance is not executed.
This configuration can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes confused about his or her level of expectation due to the execution of a normal background image switching effect that does not necessarily indicate the level of expectation.

When only the dialogue preview performance is executed, the expectation level may be higher than when only the normal background image switching performance is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be the same when both the dialogue preview effect and the normal background image switching effect are executed as when only the dialogue preview effect is executed.

Since the normal background image is not changed before and after the execution of the dialogue preview performance, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if the first period or the third period of the dialogue preview performance is shortened or the second period is lengthened.
Furthermore, since the background image is not usually changed, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if there is only a short time left until the decorative pattern changes.

The dialogue preview performance may be executed as a look-ahead performance based on a look-ahead of the reserved image. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 435(a), the number of reserved images is two, and a reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area, but a look-ahead of the reserved image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area may be performed, and the dialogue preview image may be displayed in each of the three variable displays until the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area becomes the reserved image in question. In this way, the dialogue preview performance may be displayed over multiple variable displays. Also, it is preferable that a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the dialogue preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the look-ahead effect. Also, as described above, it may be executed in the next variable display that results in a miss.
When the variable display resulting from a miss is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, a normal background image switching performance is executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, the normal background image switching performance may not be executed even if a start winning occurs and the next variable display is started.
Alternatively, a specific reach effect (such as the aforementioned "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of a normal background image) is executed, and on the condition that the result is a miss, the execution of the normal background image switching effect in the next variable display may be determined internally with a predetermined probability (including 100% execution of the normal background image switching effect) and stored, and the normal background image switching effect may be executed based on the determined content when the next variable display is executed. Note that, as a specific implementation mode, this can be realized by turning on or off a normal background image switching effect execution flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. According to this configuration, even if the number of reserved items is 0, by turning on the normal background image switching effect execution flag, a start winning occurs and the next variable display is performed, the normal background image switching effect can be executed. Note that the normal background image switching effect execution flag should be maintained in the on state until the next variable display is started.
In addition, even if it has been decided that the normal background image switching performance should be performed, the decision may be changed (the normal background image switching performance execution flag may be turned off) so that the normal background image switching performance will not be performed in the next variable display, provided that no start winning occurs for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds). In addition, the display may transition to a demo image display state in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced in the display area at the same time as the predetermined period has elapsed. Even when transitioning to the demo image display state, the normal background image switching performance execution flag may be kept on, and when a start winning occurs in the demo image display state and a variable display is performed, the normal background image switching performance may be executed, and the normal background image switching performance execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the dialogue preview image is being erased, a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display F").

Although multiple embodiments and modified examples of these embodiments have been described with reference to Figures 388 to 435, all of the multiple described embodiments and modified examples may be executable in a single pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, some of the multiple described embodiments and modified examples may be executable in a single pachinko machine 1.

Also, a player or a staff member of a game establishment may be allowed to select in advance before the start of a game which of the multiple aspects in the embodiment and modified examples shown with reference to Figures 388 to 435 is to be executed. For example, a player may be allowed to set the lengths of the first to fourth periods in each of the effects shown with reference to Figures 388 to 435 on a customization screen or the like.
With this configuration, players can set the game presentation to be executed in a manner that suits their preferences. Also, the staff of the gaming establishment can set the game presentation to be executed in a manner that suits the customer base of the gaming establishment. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In each of the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 388 to 435, there is a first period during which the visibility of the background image decreases as the display of the image that hides the background image begins, a second period during which the visibility of the background image is at its lowest, and a third period during which the visibility of the background image increases. In addition, after the end of each performance, there is a fourth period during which the display of the image that hides the background image ends, the visibility of the background image returns to normal, and the decorative pattern stops.

An example has been given in which the display of the background concealing image makes the entire background image invisible during the second period, but rather than making it completely invisible, it may be made more difficult to see than when the background concealing image is not displayed.
In this case, it is preferable that the transparency of the background concealing image is set to the lowest during the second period.
Alternatively, the size of the background concealing image may be smaller than the display area, instead of being the same as the display area, so that even when the background concealing image is displayed, part of the background image can be seen. In this case, it is desirable for the ratio of the background concealing image to the display area to be 50% or more, or ⅔ or more.
The dialogue preview image can also be modified in a similar manner.
On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive number display image and the revival performance image (the revival performance character and its lines) are originally smaller than the display area. It is desirable that the ratio of these images to the display area is less than 50%.

It has been shown that there are first to fourth periods in the background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, the pseudo consecutive effect, the normal background image switching effect, and the dialogue preview effect which is part of the preview effect, but the length of at least one of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect may be longer or shorter than the length of each state described below.

The special reach decorative pattern swings up and down in a predetermined cycle during the special reach, but each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of the right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue advance notice performance) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Or, even if it is longer, it is good to make it less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the first period in the background image switching performance at the start of a special reach longer than the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a specified cycle during the special reach, since the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern during a special reach is relatively long (if it were shorter it would look hectic and it would be difficult to concentrate on the reach performance), by setting the first period in the background image switching performance at the start of a special reach to be longer than that, it has the effect of providing the joy of developing into a special reach for a long period of time.
In addition, for example, by making the length of the third period in the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a specified cycle during the special reach, it is possible to end the sense of anticipation for the change in question early and create anticipation for the next change (enabling players to change their mood more quickly).
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

The reserved image or the reserved image may be a moving image and repeatedly displayed at a predetermined cycle. At this time, each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Or, even if it is longer, it is preferable that it is less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the third period in the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach in which the reserved image or reserved image is not displayed during the special reach longer than the specified cycle of the reserved image or reserved image displayed as a moving image, the reserved image or reserved image is displayed for more than one cycle during the third period, thereby impressing the player with the presence of the reserved image and having the effect of reminding the player to operate the handle 302.
For example, by making the length of the second period in a normal background image switching performance or a dialogue preview performance shorter than the reserved image or the specified period of the reserved image displayed as a moving image, the effect is that a certain degree of visibility of the reserved image or the dynamic performance display of the reserved image is ensured.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

306 and 307, there are four game states (normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving probability variable state, probability variable state) other than the big win state. In these four game states, it is possible to variably display special symbols. It is also possible to variably display decorative symbols at the same time as the special symbols.
In the normal state, the variable display is performed in a number of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to change display to when it stops displaying), but compared to the shortest variable display time among these, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.
In the time-saving state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to change display to when it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time-saving special state, the display is performed in a plurality of different presentation patterns with different display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display and when it stops), and compared to the shortest display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.
In the special bonus state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display variable to when it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest time of the variable display time may be different depending on the reserved number at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. For example, the more the reserved number, the shorter the shortest time of the variable display time may be, and the less the reserved number, the longer the shortest time of the variable display time may be.
At this time, compared to the shortest variable display time among the variable display times of the presentation patterns that can occur corresponding to each reserved number, each period (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.

The presentation pattern of the decorative patterns and the time period during which the decorative patterns change are also determined according to the game status and the number of reserved balls, but compared to the shortest time among the time periods during which the pachinko machine 1 can take on a change, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the fourth period (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern than those that have been displayed up until then) of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the end of a right hit is made shorter than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, which has the effect of preventing the player from misunderstanding that a new variable display has begun and then stopped.
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of a normal background image switching effect or a dialogue preview effect longer than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, there is an effect that there is enough time to develop the effect (for example, to develop into a special reach or pseudo consecutive effect) after the normal background image switching effect or the dialogue preview effect is executed.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

With reference to Figures 425 to 428, an embodiment of the pseudo-consecutive performance is shown, but compared to the time required to display the information to make the player aware that a pseudo-consecutive performance has occurred (display of a special pattern such as "Continue" as shown in Figure 427 (b)), each period (first period to fourth period) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo-consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit shorter than the display that makes the player recognize that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred, the second period is quickly transitioned to, making it possible to clearly distinguish the effect from the pseudo consecutive effect, and it has the effect of making it difficult for the player to mistake that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred (since the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed in a temporary stop state, the player may have difficulty recognizing which effect has occurred).
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit longer than the display that makes the player aware that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred, the combination of decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped and displayed will remain stopped and displayed as is (in the case of a pseudo consecutive effect, a re-changing display will always be performed after the temporary stop, but in the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, the decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped and displayed will remain stopped and displayed as is, except in cases where a revival effect is executed and the result is successful), this has the effect of making the player clearly aware of this and causing them to give up on the changing display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

In comparison with the shortest interval between launches of game balls into the game area, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue advance notice performance) may be longer or shorter than the shortest interval. For example, when 100 game balls can be launched in 60 seconds, the shortest interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest interval between launches of the game ball, the following effects can be achieved.
When a special reach with a high expectation of a big win (for example, a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") starts, some experienced players stop firing the game balls. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach starts, such experienced players guess that the result of the special lottery is a miss and operate the handle 302 to resume firing the game balls. In this case, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made shorter than the shortest interval between firing the game balls, so that when the second game ball is fired, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable, so that the player learns the certainty that the result of the special lottery has become a miss due to his/her guess that it is a miss, and can concentrate on the direction of the game balls (whether or not they will win the starting prize) from the second game ball. In other words, the number of game balls that the player cannot concentrate on can be minimized while smoothly changing the background.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest interval between launches of the game ball, the following effects can be achieved.
As described above, when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach begins, an experienced player guesses that the result of the special lottery is a miss and operates the handle 302 to resume the launch of the game ball. At this time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and is recognizable by the player, so the player is concerned about both the direction of the shot game ball and the special reach background image. In particular, even an experienced player will be concerned about the special reach background image that he has been looking at for a long time in hope of a big win, and looking at it under a situation where a miss is guessed. Due to these circumstances, it is expected that even an experienced player will be distracted and upset by the display content of the display area, making it difficult to accurately launch the game ball. Therefore, the probability that the game ball launched in the first period will start winning is lower than when the player accurately launches the game ball. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest interval between launching game balls, the player's state in which the probability of winning the initial prize is reduced can be prolonged, thereby contributing to sales at the game arcade.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

When the display of the decorative pattern changes without a reserved ball, and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display area may transition to a demo image display state in which an image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. At this time, the respective periods (first to fourth periods) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than the predetermined waiting time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified waiting time before transitioning to the demo image display state, the following effects can be achieved.
Even players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may stop shooting game balls during a special reach. However, when a player who does not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience executes a special reach and strongly expects it to result in a big win, but ends up with a miss, he or she may be shocked and think, "Seriously?", and may not be able to recover for a while, and may not be able to resume shooting game balls (note that the more experienced and advanced the player is, the more quickly they can switch their mind to a calm state). In this way, if a screen change (transition to a demo performance state) is executed when a player is in a situation where they cannot recover for a while, there is a risk that the player who does not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may think that it is a performance that has been dealt a final blow (a performance that exaggerates the fact that they have lost) (this tendency is noticeable in pachinko machines that employ a revival performance). Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for the transition to the demo image display state, it is possible to care for the mind of such a player who does not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than a specified waiting time, the following effects can be achieved.
When a player who is not necessarily very experienced in gaming loses the special lottery, he or she is often shocked and cannot recover for a while, thinking, "Seriously?" In such a situation of shock, by quickly switching to the demo image display state and causing a change in the screen, the player can feel, "Oh, a revival performance may have occurred!?" (This tendency is prominent in pachinko machines that employ a revival performance. Note that experienced players remain calm in such a situation.) In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for switching to the demo image display state, it is possible to give a feeling of elation to a player who is not necessarily very experienced in gaming, and motivate him or her to resume firing game balls.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

In addition, when the payout motor 834 is driven and game balls successively enter winning ports such as the start port or the large winning port from which payouts are made when a win is made, the payout corresponding to the first winning ball is made and then the payout corresponding to the second winning ball is made. However, after making the payout corresponding to the first winning ball, it takes a predetermined time (for example, one second) before making the payout corresponding to the second winning ball. However, compared to this predetermined time, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be achieved.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, there is a possibility that the revival effect will be executed, so if the game balls are paid out multiple times in the third period, the player may be distracted by events caused by the payout (such as the collision sound generated when the game balls collide with the upper tray 321 and the management of the number of game balls in the upper tray 321), and the player's desire for the revival effect to be executed, ``Revive!'', may be hindered, and the player's concentration on the game may decrease. However, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the specified time until a new payout is made, such a situation in which the player's concentration is broken can be prevented. The reason why the payout is made once is because the player may feel suspicious if the payout is not made immediately when a predetermined winning hole (such as the general winning hole 2001 or the first starting hole 2002) is won in the third period.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than the specified time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be achieved.
The experienced player as described above assumes that the result of the special lottery is a miss when the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach begins, so naturally, in the third period, the player launches the game ball. Therefore, it is conceivable that a situation will occur in which a plurality of game balls enter a predetermined winning port (such as the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2002) in the third period that comes after the first period. Experienced players understand that when a game ball enters a predetermined winning port (such as the starting port or the general winning port), the game ball will be paid out immediately, and if the ball is not paid out immediately, the player may feel distrustful (this tendency is noticeable when the player is able to pay out a certain amount of attention to the payout by suppressing the output of the variable performance sound or simplifying the display area in the background image switching performance). However, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, such distrustfulness can be prevented.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

If the result of the normal lottery is a winning result, the movable piece (not shown) is driven and moved to open the second starting hole 2004, making it possible for the game ball rolling in the play area 5a to enter, and after a predetermined time has passed, the movable piece is returned to its original position to close the second starting hole 2004, making it impossible for the game ball rolling in the play area 5a to enter. A plurality of different times may be set as the time from when the second starting hole 2004 is opened by the movement of the movable piece to when it is closed (opening time), and the game ball may be allowed to enter the second starting hole 2004 at any of the opening times, or the second starting hole 2004 may be allowed to enter the game ball multiple times for one winning normal lottery (this is achieved by driving and moving the movable piece multiple times). At this time, compared to the shortest time during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state in which a ball can be entered (if there is only one pattern for the opening time of the second starting port 2004, the opening time for that pattern), each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo-consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting hole 2004, the following effects can be achieved.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, a normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, so that players who are not necessarily experienced in games are often shocked by the normal background image being visible in the third period, and are unable to recover for a while, thinking, "Seriously?" In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, if the start of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the timing when the second start port 2004 becomes available for ball entry are the same, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be ended before the second start port 2004 becomes unavailable for ball entry. When the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where a ball can be entered, a lottery for a special pattern is held when the game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004, so that a player who is not necessarily experienced at games can operate the handle 302 to try to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, thereby increasing the player's interest again. When the second starting hole 2004 ends its open state, the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach has also ended, so that the player can forget that the special reach has occurred and that the result was a miss, and can switch his or her attention to the change in the new decorative pattern.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second starting hole 2004, the following effects can be achieved.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, a normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, so that players who are not necessarily experienced in games are often shocked by the normal background image being visible in the third period, and are unable to recover for a while, thinking, "Seriously?" In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, if the start of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the timing when the second start port 2004 becomes available for ball entry are the same, the second start port 2004 can be made unavailable for ball entry before the end of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. When the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where a ball can be entered, a lottery for a special pattern is held when the game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004. Therefore, a player who is not necessarily experienced at games can operate the handle 302 to try to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, thereby increasing interest again. Even if the player is unable to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach continues, so the player can expect a revival effect to be executed, thereby mitigating the shock received by the player as a whole.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 397 and 416, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is three seconds (there is only one type of effective operation period), but as other operation presentation patterns, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be configured to be able to execute presentation patterns longer or shorter than the effective operation period of three seconds.
For example, a presentation pattern A may be adopted in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, two seconds, and a presentation pattern B may be adopted in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, four seconds. In this manner, a plurality of operation valid periods may be provided.
At this time, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and line preview effect) may be longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. Also, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and line preview effect) may be longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and shorter than the effective operation period of effect pattern B. In addition, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be shorter than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, an effect in which the operation unit can be operated (effect pattern A or effect pattern B) may be executed, in which case the effects described below can be expected. Also, if an effect in which the operation unit can be operated is executed in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, the operation valid period may not extend into the fourth period or after the variable display has stopped (i.e., the operation valid period ends within the third period), or the fourth period may be deleted, in which case the effects described below can be expected.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is longer than the shortest of the multiple effective operation times, which has the effect of making the player look forward to an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") being displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is set to be longer than the longest of the multiple effective operation times, which has the effect of making the player look forward to an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") being displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest of the multiple effective operation times, it is possible to make the player recognize that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will not be displayed as a revival performance during the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, which has the effect of allowing the player to quickly switch their mind to anticipation for the next changing display.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach has multiple effective operation times, and by making the length longer than the effective operation time of one of the multiple effective operation times but shorter than the effective operation time of the other one, it has the effect of making the player look forward to an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") being displayed as a revival presentation during the third period of the background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is longer than the effective operation time of one operation valid time (there is only one operation valid time), which has the effect of making the player expect that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach has an effective operation time of 1 (there is only one effective operation time), and by making it shorter than that effective operation time, it is possible to make the player recognize that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will not be displayed as a revival performance during the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, which has the effect of allowing the player to quickly switch their mind to anticipation for the next changing display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

The degree of expectation for a big win may be different by displaying the special display A to the special display F. In addition, in the relationship between any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F, the degree of expectation for one may be higher, the degree of expectation for both may be the same, or the degree of expectation for one may be lowered.
Similarly, in the case of three or more special displays, the expectation level of a certain special display may be increased, the expectation levels of multiple special displays may be the same, or the expectation level of a certain special display may be decreased.

For example, the degree of expectation may be higher when special display A is displayed than when special display E is displayed than when special display B or special display D is displayed. Also, the degree of expectation may be higher when special display A is displayed than when special display E is displayed, or the degree of expectation may be higher when special display B is displayed.
In addition, the expectation level when the special display C is displayed may be lower than that of the special display A and the special display E, and higher than that of the special display B and the special display D. Alternatively, the expectation level may be lower than that of the special display A, the special display B, the special display D, and the special display E.

The illuminating decorative means provided on the door frame 3 (e.g., the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550) may be illuminated when the special display is executed.
For example, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be illuminated with illumination patterns A to F corresponding to the special displays A to F. The illumination patterns may be different or the same in relation to any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F.
For example, for displays with high expectations such as special display A, and displays indicating a change in game status such as special display C, unique lighting patterns may be adopted, while the same lighting pattern may be adopted for special displays B, C, and E.
In this way, by making the lighting pattern different for each special display, even if the player is looking away and not at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. will come into view, allowing the player to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method for making the light emission pattern different for each special display, a method of turning on or blinking, making the light emission color or duration different, or the like may be adopted.

A lighting pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be adopted. For example, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the brightness of the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When a white background concealment image is displayed, the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be made to emit white light. When other background concealment images are displayed, the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be made to emit light in the color of the displayed character, or in the color of the background area of the displayed background concealment image.

The lighting pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end simultaneously with the special display, or may end later than the special display.
After the lighting pattern corresponding to each special display has ended, the display may be turned off or may be illuminated in a manner that matches the background music.

Although an embodiment of the "giant tank reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. 416 etc., multiple types of "giant tank reach" with different enemy tank display modes and operation units may be configured to be executable. Furthermore, the expectation level of the "giant tank reach" may differ depending on the enemy tank display mode and the operation unit. Even in this case, the expectation level of the "giant tank reach" may be higher than the expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach". Furthermore, for such different types of "giant tank reach", the background image may be switched in the same manner. For example, in multiple "giant tank reaches", a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be displayed and the background image may be switched in the same manner.

Although an embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. 397 etc., multiple types of "enemy tank destruction reach" that differ in the display mode of the enemy tank and the operation unit to be operated may be configured to be executable. Furthermore, the expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach" may differ depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Note that even in this case, the expectation level may be lower than that of the "giant tank reach". Furthermore, background images may be switched and displayed in the same manner for such different types of "enemy tank destruction reach". For example, in multiple "giant tank reaches", a black background concealment image may be displayed and background images may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 397, a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed during the valid operation period to suggest the special lottery result, but during the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, it is not considered to be a valid operation period, and no simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed.
Similarly, for each of the other effects (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effects, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue preview effect), the first to third periods should not be considered as valid operation periods, and it is advisable not to display simulated images that mimic the operating parts (i.e., simulated images that mimic the operating parts should never be displayed).
In this way, the first to third periods in all reach performances are not valid operation periods, and it is preferable not to display a simulated image that imitates the operation unit (i.e., a simulated image that imitates the operation unit is not necessarily displayed).
Note that the first to third periods are merely examples of periods that are not considered to be valid operation periods and in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed (i.e., a simulated image simulating the operation unit is never displayed), and may include the fourth period, or may be any one of the first to fourth periods, or any multiple of these periods.
With this configuration, the display content in the display area is simplified, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player does not realize that the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled and is unable to operate the operation unit.

During the varying display of the decorative pattern, a varying effect sound is output, but in special displays A to F, the output of the varying effect sound may be suppressed.
Hereinafter, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 416 etc. will be described with reference to Fig. 436(a). Similarly, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 434 will be described with reference to Fig. 436(b).
In the example of the effect shown in Fig. 436 (a), the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 when the background concealment image is displayed. Also, the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
In the presentation example shown in Figure 436 (b), even during the period from timing t10 to timing t16 when the background concealment image is displayed, the variable presentation sound is not suppressed, and output in the normal state is maintained.
Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 436 (a), the output state of the variable effect sound was in a suppressed state for the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 436 (b), even in the first to third periods, the output state of the variable performance sound was not suppressed but maintained in the normal state.
When the background image is switched in this manner, the output state of the variable effect sound may be suppressed, and when the background image is not switched, the output state of the variable effect sound may be maintained in the normal state.

An example has been given in which the first to third periods are in a suppressed state, but the variable effect sound may be in a suppressed state during at least one of the first to third periods and the fourth period, which is the period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Note that after the fourth period, the suppressed state may be maintained during the period in which the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, and the normal state may be restored when the next variable display starts.

The suppressed state may be a state in which the volume of the variable performance sound is output at a lower volume than in the normal state. Alternatively, it may be a state in which the variable performance sound is not output. In this case, although the variable performance sound is played internally, the output volume may be set to 0 internally (muted) to prevent the variable performance sound from being output from the speaker. Alternatively, the playback of the variable performance sound itself may be ended or interrupted to prevent the variable performance sound from being output from the speaker.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 436(a), the normal state is from timing t19 to timing t36, but during this period, a special variable effect sound corresponding to the type of special reach may be output. In this case, it is advisable to start outputting the special variable effect sound from timing t16 during the suppression state or timing t19 at the end of the suppression state. It is also advisable to end outputting the special variable effect sound at timing t36 at the start of the suppression state or timing t39 during the suppression state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 416 etc., the same aspect may be adopted to suppress the variable effect sound in the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect shown with reference to FIG. 397 etc., the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit shown with reference to FIG. 421 etc., the pseudo consecutive effect shown with reference to FIG. 425 etc., and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 430 etc.

In the embodiments, the technical matters in the structure of the gaming machine may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Also, the technical matters in each performance example and each performance example may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Also, the technical matters in each role configuration may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Also, these technical matters may be combined and applied to form an embodiment.
Furthermore, one embodiment obtained by modifying another embodiment may be applied to another embodiment obtained by modifying the other embodiment to produce a different embodiment.
Furthermore, multiple embodiments that a person skilled in the art could have conceived in this way may be adopted in a single gaming machine.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this, and the invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects can be achieved.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5' Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1110a Barrier nail through hole 1110b Panel plate back rough surface portion 1110c Panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110d Panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110e Panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110f Panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110g Panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110h Panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110i: First bright color visible portion on the back of panel board 1110j: Second bright color visible portion on the back of panel board 1110m: Front decorative opaque thin layer portion on panel board 1110p: Panel board boss insertion hole 1110q: Panel board screw insertion hole 1117: Panel convex portion 1200: Barrier nail 1201: Barrier nail 1201a: Barrier nail head 1201b: Barrier nail first body portion 1201c: Barrier nail spiral shaped portion 1201d: Barrier nail second body portion 1202: Barrier nail 1203: Barrier nail 1204: Barrier nail 1205: Barrier nail 1206: Barrier nail 1207: Barrier nail 1208: Barrier nail 1209: Barrier nail 1210: Barrier nail 1211: Barrier nail 1212: Barrier nail 1213: Barrier nail 1214 Obstacle nail 1215 Obstacle nail 1216 Obstacle nail 1217 Obstacle nail 1218 Obstacle nail 1219 Obstacle nail 1220 Obstacle nail 1221 Obstacle nail 1222 Obstacle nail 1223 Obstacle nail 1224 Obstacle nail 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal pattern display 1403 First special pattern display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special pattern display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side performance display device 1600a Display area 2000 Front unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting hole 2005 Big prize hole 2400 Panel board lower light emitting substrate 2410 Rear decorative member of panel board 2410a Rear decorative member rough surface section of panel board 2410b Rear decorative member metallic gloss section of panel board 2410c Rear decorative member pivot shaft of panel board 2420 Rear panel board 2425 Rear board light emitting section of panel board 2450 Front decorative member of panel board 2450a Front decorative member through hole of panel board 2452 Colorless transparent section of front decorative member of panel board 2454 Opaque section of front decorative member of panel board 2456 Colored transparent section of front decorative member of panel board 2460 Light guide plate 2460a Light guide plate uneven section 2470 Decorative member 2470a Front decorative member section 2470b Rear decorative member section 2470c Decorative member boss 2470d Decorative member inclined portion 2470e Decorative member screw insertion hole 2470f Decorative member first inclined portion 2470g Decorative member second inclined portion 2471 Decorative member mounting screw 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetrating portion 2610a Penetrating portion 2611 Penetrating portion 2612 Penetrating portion 2613 Penetrating portion 2614 Penetrating portion 2615 Penetrating portion 2616 Penetrating portion 2617 Penetrating portion 2617a Notched end portion 2618 Penetrating portion 2619 Penetrating portion 2620 Penetrating portion 2630 Mounting boss 2631 Mounting boss 2632 Mounting boss 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball restriction protrusion 2650 Penetrating portion 2651 Penetrating portion 2652 Penetrating portion 2653 Penetrating portion 2660 Boss portion 2670 Storage recess 2700 Flow path device 2710a First flow path inlet 2710b Second flow path inlet 2720a First flow path forming member 2720b Second flow path forming member 2730a First flow path outlet 2730b Second flow path outlet 3700 Mission button 3710 Attack button 3720 Left lever 3722 Left lever vibration source 3724 Left lever light source 3730 Right lever 3732 Right lever vibration source 3734 Right lever light source 3740 Defense button 3770 Tank role-playing object 5000 Nail sheet 5100 Film sheet 5110 First area print body 5120 Second area print body 5200 Obstacle nail print body 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit role-piece 6010 Face cover section 6011 Face cover section front section 6011a First face light scattering section 6011b Second face light scattering section 6012 Face cover section upper section 6013 Face cover section right section 6014 Face cover section lower section 6015 Face cover section left section 6016 First arm section 6017 Second arm section 6020 Face substrate 6021 First ear section 6021a First ear decoration section 6022 Second ear section 6022a Second ear decoration section 6023 Face light-emitting section 6023a First face light-emitting section 6023b Second face light-emitting section 6024 Mouth decoration section 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistor 6027a First resistor 6027b Second resistor 6027c Third resistor 6027d Fourth resistor 6027e Fifth resistor 6027f Sixth resistor 6028 Capacitor 6028a First capacitor 6028b Second capacitor 6029 Connector 6030 Body section 6100 Stump accessory 6200 Stump section 6210 Stump board section 6210a Stump opening 6300 Stump box section 6310 Box upper wall section 6320 Box right wall section 6330 Box lower wall section 6340 Box left wall section 6350 Box rear wall section 6352 Rear wall board 6352a First rear wall board 6352b Second rear wall board 6354 Rear wall light emitting section 6354a First rear wall light emitting section 6354b Second rear wall light emitting section 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a First rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering section 6360 First grass movable section 6360a First grass decorative section 6370 Second grass movable section 6370a Second grass decorative section 6380 Rear wall board section 6381 Grass board section 6381a Grass board colored transparent section 6381b Grass board colorless transparent section 6382a Grass board central decorative section 6382b Grass board upper decorative section 6382c Grass board right decorative section 6382d Grass board lower decorative section 6382e Grass board left decorative section 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass board 6422 Grass board front light emitting section 6422a Grass board front first light emitting section 6422b Grass board front second light emitting section 6422c Grass board front third light emitting section 6424 Grass board rear light emitting section 6424a Grass board rear first light emitting section 6424b Grass board rear second light emitting section 6426 Grass board opening 6426a Grass board first opening 6426b Grass board second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent section 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent section 6444 Grass front cover light scattering section 6444a Grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444b Grass front cover colored light scattering section 6446 Grass front cover opaque section 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover first opening 6448b Grass front cover second opening 6460 Grass rear cover 6462 Grass rear cover transparent section 6462a Grass rear cover colorless transparent section 6462b Grass rear cover colored transparent section 6464 Grass rear cover light scattering section 6464a Grass rear cover colorless light scattering section 6464b Grass rear cover colored light scattering section 6466 Grass rear cover opaque section 6470 First grass accessory 6475 Second grass accessory 6480 Third grass accessory 6485 Fourth grass accessory 6500 Mountain accessory 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain board front light emitting section 6522a Mountain board front first light emitting section 6522b Mountain board front second light emitting section 6522c Mountain board front third light emitting section 6522d Mountain board front fourth light emitting section 6522e Mountain board front fifth light emitting section 6522f Mountain board front sixth light emitting section 6522g 6522h 6522i 6522i 6524 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover colored transparent section 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering section 6548 First mountain front cover opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain front cover colorless transparent section 6564 Second mountain front cover colorless light scattering section 6600 First giant tree accessory 6610 First giant tree trunk board 6630 First giant tree leaf board 6650 Second giant tree accessory 6660 Second giant tree trunk board 6680 Second giant tree leaf board 6700 First cloud accessory 6750 Second cloud accessory 6800 Back of board grass accessory 6820 Back of board grass board 6822 Back grass board front light emitting section 6824 Back grass board opening 6824a Back grass board first opening 6824b Back grass board second opening 6824c Back grass board third opening 6824d Back grass board fourth opening 6840 Back grass front cover 6842 Back grass front cover colored transparent section 6844 Back grass front cover colored light scattering section 6848 Back grass front cover opening 6848a Back grass front cover first opening 6848b Back grass front cover second opening 6848c Back grass front cover third opening 6848d Back grass front cover fourth opening 7000 Door frame top unit upper right opening 7002 Door frame top unit upper right opening 7004 Door frame top unit upper right opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left opening 7012: First left ear opening on top of door frame top unit 7014: Second left ear opening on top of door frame top unit 7020: Lower right ear opening on door frame top unit 7022: First right ear opening on bottom of door frame top unit 7024: Second right ear opening on bottom of door frame top unit 7030: Lower left ear opening on door frame top unit 7032: First left ear opening on bottom of door frame top unit 7034: Second left ear opening on bottom of door frame top unit 7040: Both ear openings on top of door frame top unit 7050: Right light-emitting part inside door frame top unit 7052: Left light-emitting part inside door frame top unit 7100: Right ear frame movable body 7110: Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112: Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7114: Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7116: Right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body pivot axis 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface 7240 Left ear frame movable body pivot axis 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body pivot axis 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body pivot axis 7400 Left ear inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body pivot axis 7450 Left ear outer frame movable body 7460 Left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7470 Left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body pivot axis 7500 Door frame top unit face decoration portion 7510 Door frame top unit face upper movable body 7512 Door frame top unit right eye decoration portion 7514 Door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7520 Door frame top unit lower face part 7522 Door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit lower face mouth movable body 7600 Door frame side unit right arm part 7610 Door frame side unit right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7630 Door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit left arm part 7660 Door frame side unit left arm case part 7670 Door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7680 Door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7700 Skirt board bottom unit right foot movable body 7710 Skirt board bottom unit right foot shin part 7720 Skirt board bottom unit right foot toe part 7750 Skirt board bottom unit left foot movable body 7760 Skirt board bottom unit left foot shin part 7770 Skirt board bottom unit left foot toe part 7800 Root vegetable frame movable body 7802 Root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7804 Root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7810 Root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7820 Right side connecting linear member 7825 Right side up and down movement drive mechanism 7830 Left side connecting linear member 7835 Left side up and down movement drive mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front part 7856 Cover unit right side part 7858 Cover unit left side part HKB Whitened part YGK Game ball

Claims (1)

A determination means capable of deriving a predetermined determination result;
a display means for displaying various images based on a display priority, and for displaying an image with a higher display priority in front of an image with a lower display priority when images with different display priorities are displayed overlapping each other;
A performance control means for displaying a performance display based on a determination result of the determination means on the display means;
a plurality of operation units operable by a player and capable of causing a display change on the display means;
The plurality of operation units include a first operation unit and a second operation unit,
The performance control means includes:
The display means is capable of executing a variable display showing the determination result,
A first operation effective period during which an operation on the first operation unit can be detected can be set during the varying display,
During the first operation effective period, a simulated image simulating the first operation unit is displayed, so that an operation instruction is given to the first operation unit, and at a timing when an operation to the first operation unit is detected, a display change control can be started to change the display mode in which the simulated image simulating the first operation unit displayed on the display means is displayed to a display mode in which the simulated image simulating the first operation unit is not displayed and a single operation presentation display based on the operation to the first operation unit is displayed ;
During the varying display, a display change can be imparted to the display means based on an operation on the second operation unit,
The second operation unit is capable of accepting an operation when the first operation valid period is set during the variable display,
During the varying display, as the simulated image simulating the first operation unit, any one of a plurality of simulated images having different expectation levels for the judgment result can be displayed,
The specific display displayed by the application of a display change based on an operation to the second operation unit is a display that does not suggest the determination result, can be displayed multiple times during the variable display, and has a higher display priority than the display of a single operation presentation display that is displayed by detecting an operation to the first operation unit when the first operation effective period in which a simulated image simulating the first operation unit is displayed is set ;
A specific look-ahead effect that is performed in a plurality of variable displays as an effect suggesting the result of the judgment can be executed, and while the specific look-ahead effect is being executed, the specific display can be displayed across a plurality of variable displays;
A simulated image simulating the first operation unit may be displayed multiple times in one of the variable displays, and when each of the simulated images simulating the first operation unit that is displayed multiple times is displayed, the specific display can be displayed based on an operation on the second operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display, which is displayed based on operation of the second operation unit, is made non-display if no operation of the second operation unit is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed, but if operation of the second operation unit continues after the specific display is displayed, it is possible to continue displaying the specific display beyond the predetermined time.

Images